Let’s Get Technical!

Let’s Get Technical!

The ultimate guide to SHARE YOUR MESSAGE with the world ONLINE!
by Eric Elder

Do you have a message to share with the world? I’ll show you how!

I’ve shared my message online daily with tens of thousands of people for more than 30 years.

In this book, I’ll show you:

Eric Elder

Listen here, read below, or download the PDF
(Also available in PaperbackKindle, and Audible)

Note:

The technologies and links in this book were accurate as of the date of publication but are ever-changing. However, the concepts and principles remain the same!

Hopefully you’ll enjoy this glimpse into the technical world of “today” even if, in a few years, this book is relegated to a quaint remembrance of “the way things were.”

In any case, enjoy!

Preface: Let’s Get Technical!

I’d like to share with you how I’ve been able to reach the world online with my message… which is really God’s message: God loves you and has a purpose for your life.

I came to Christ on February 9th, 1987, and ever since, I’ve wanted to tell the world about Him! I did what I could while working a secular job, sharing my message with anyone who would listen.

Then on February 14th, 1995, I felt God calling me to quit my secular job and go into full-time work for Him. I didn’t know what to do. I didn’t know where to start.

But I did know how to create a website. I had been working in the Advanced Technology Group of a For- tune 10 corporation for nine years, researching everything from virtual reality to speech recognition, from tablets you could write on to maps that could tell you the nearest Chinese restaurant. Basically, everything a smart phone can do today!

It was a dream job for me, meeting researchers in their labs around the country at places like Apple, IBM, NASA, and MIT. I would come back from those visits and share what I learned with my colleagues to see how we might use these upcoming technologies in our business.

My final project before I went into full-time ministry was to create my company’s first website using the brand-new (at the time) HTML markup language.

It was exciting stuff, and my visionary eyes lit up with possibilities!

That’s when God called me into full-time ministry, to use all these gifts and talents that I had developed for Him.

As I told a reporter from USA Today, when asked why I quit my corporate job to go into an internet ministry, I said:

“I have a message I want to get out, and the Internet was made for delivering messages!”

I’ve been doing this now for over 30 years, and if you have a message you want to get out to the world, I’d love to help!

I’ve built more than 100 websites. I’ve created mailing lists that have grown from 1,000 to 40,000 subscribers. I’ve built a social media presence to reach 5,000 people. I’ve created multiple podcasts and YouTube channels, audiobooks, and online classes.

I love using all the tools and technologies at our disposal to reach as many people as possible with the message that God has put on my heart.

And I’d love to share how I did it with you. By the end of each chapter, you’ll have practical steps and tools to get you started on each of these things as well. I hope by the end you’ll have the confidence to move forward, knowing that you really can do this!

Ready to start?!? Let’s get technical! (Cue Olivia Newton-John’s dance music and let’s go!)

Eric Elder

Chapter 1. How to build a website

Your website is your home base. You can put anything on a website that you want to share… like your message, audio, videos, and links to your books or products or courses. It’s your one-stop for everything related to you.

Choose a domain name

The first step in building a website is choosing your domain name. A domain is like your own kingdom. It’s your address where people can find you.

If you choose a free or low-cost website builder, you can pick a domain name that is attached to the company you use, such as WordPress or GoDaddy or Blogspot. If so, then your domain could look like this (these are examples, not functional sites):

  • ericelder.wordpress.com
  • ericelder.godaddy.com
  • ericelder.blogspot.com

Then you can tell everyone they can find you at your domain name, and they’ll be able to read all about you!

For just a little more money, though, and not much at that, you can get your own custom address that’s shorter just about you and easy to remember, such as these (these ARE functional sites):

You can get these by registering the domain with a domain registration company, such as:

There are thousands of accredited domain registrars around the world, each with their own pricing and plans. I pay from $15-25 a year for a each domain name I’ve registered, so the price is relatively inexpensive.

Finding the right domain name can be an art! Many are taken, but many are still available! If you live in the US, you can buy a domain that ends with .COM (most common for companies and easy to remember) or .ORG (for non-profit organizations). You can also buy domains with other extensions like .NET, .ONLINE, .SPACE or .ME.

Country Codes can also be attached to domain names, like amazon.co.uk for Amazon in the United Kingdom, or amazon.it for Amazon in Italy.

If your preferred domain name is taken, you can add an adjective to make it more meaningful. For instance, for my online bookstore, books.com was taken, so I added an adjective to make it inspiringbooks.com.

Even better! I created that website to cover the range of books that I’ve written, as they all have some element of inspiration.

Go ahead and take a look! Go to web.com for instance and search for a domain you’d like. If it’s taken, they’ll suggest others. All the registrars use the same database of names, so you should get similar results at each one. But before you actually buy a domain name, let’s look at what you’ll do with it next.

By the way, when trying to decide between domains, you can check to see which term you’d like is the most popular as far as of what people are already searching for. Just go to trends.google.com and type in a word or phrase. There you can compare different words to see which words or phrases have historically had more people searching for them! I also use these trends when trying to think of names for books or podcasts or courses.

Choose a hosting company

A hosting company is where your website will live. It can be a different company than where you register your domain. Most registrars can also host your website for you for free or for a fee, but you can host your website anywhere. For instance, at one company, I pay about $10 a month for hosting my websites. Prices can range from $2-50 a month, depending on who is hosting your website and what you want to do with it.

I currently use web.com for both my domain registrations and my hosting, although their pricing is changing, as companies often do, so it all really depends on your needs and your budget. (Update January, 2026: I currently use WordPress.com to register all of my domain names for a low rate of $13 per year).

Choose how you’ll create your website

Many hosting companies have their own tools to help you create your websites, and most also offer the ability to use WordPress to create your site, a popular website creation software. I use WordPress for most of my sites, but only because I’m familiar with it and many people use it, not necessarily because it’s the best or easiest. You may want to use your hosting company’s tools instead! But for demonstration, I’ll show you how I use WordPress here. The same principles apply to most website creation tools.

Choose your theme

First, choose your theme. A theme is the “look and feel” of your website, whether bright and bold or simple and elegant. You can usually change your theme at anytime, but pick something initially that catches your attention and start creating.

Create a page

Add a new page to your website by clicking on “Pages,” then “Add New.” Add a title for the page at the top, then start typing your text and adding other content like pictures, videos, and links.

Create another page!

Next, create another page or two to get a feel for how it’s done and how it looks. View the pages in a browser and see how how they look and feel.

Arrange your menus

Once you’ve created a few pages, you’ll see that they will probably appear automatically on the “Menu” of your website. Some themes automatically add every page to the menus while other themes only add pages that you individually specify to be on the menu.

Menu items can be rearranged by clicking on “Appearance,” then “Menus.” Menus can also be nested one inside another, for submenus that display when the main menu item is selected.

To rearrange menu items, you can drag and drop them in the order you’d like, or nest them within other menu items. My flagship website at theranch.org has hundreds of pages, posts, images, and videos. I’ve nested each set of these pages within just a few main menu options. I simply designate every page as either a option or a “Child” menu option underneath a “Parent” menu.

There might also be several menus on your site: one along the top, one along the bottom, or one along the side. You can choose which items appear on each menu.

Add a link

If you want to insert a link into the text on your page, highlight that portion of text and click “insert link” or click the icon that looks like a chain link.

Then type in or copy and paste the link that you’d like the person to reach when they click on it. I’ll often go to a webpage in my browser and copy and paste the entire link from the address bar, including the https:// prefix, such as https://theranch.org. that page’s link from the address bar. If you’re new to shortcuts for copying and pasting, you can highlight some text and hold down the “Command” and “C” keys on a Mac or the “Control” and “C” keys on Windows to copy anything. Then to paste, hold down the “Command” and “V” keys on a Mac or the “Control” and “V” keys on Windows.

Once you paste in the link, the words on your page will now be clickable. To test your link, view your page by selecting the “View” option and click the link!

Add an image

To add an image, put your cursor at the location where you want the image to display. Click “Insert Image” or the “+” icon to upload an image from your computer or choose an image from one you’ve already uploaded.

After choosing your image, you can click on the image to add more features, like adding a link to the image if someone clicks on it, or add a caption below it, or change the dimensions to be small, medium, large, or customized on your page.

Add a video

You can add a video the same way you add an image. Put your cursor where you want to insert the image, then upload a video or paste in a link to a video that already exists on another website, such as YouTube. I like this second option if my storage space is limited on my website hosting company. Instead of uploading the video to my website, I’ll upload it to my YouTube channel (covered in a later chapter), then I’ll link to that video from my web page.

For instance, on WordPress I can choose “Insert Video from Link” or “Insert Video from YouTube,” then copy and paste the link in that field when prompted. The video will appear as if it’s embedded on my web page, even though it’s actually stored and streaming from YouTube.

Add a post

If you want to write a series of articles that are sorted on your website by the date you posted them or by a category you choose for them, you can create a “Post” instead of a “Page.”

Choose “Posts,” then “Add New Post.” Enter a title for your post, then write your content, including links or images or videos just as for a page. But now your post will appear in a list of posts, sorted by date or category or however you’d like. Posts can also be sent to others automatically on your mailing list if you choose to set up this option.

Add a sign-up form

Most themes include a “Contact Form.” To insert one onto a page, choose “Insert Contact Form” and start from the default that is presented to you. Your website visitors can fill out this form and submit it to you.

Some forms have an option to “require” an answer by checking a box next to that question, such as requiring a visitor’s email address and first name. Other fields may be optional, such as a phone number. You can choose whether a field is required or optional.

You can also add short text boxes for answers, longer-form text boxes for people to write lengthier responses, radio buttons (which lets people choose one and only one from several options), or check boxes (which lets people choose as many options as they’d like from several options).

Include your email address on the form where you want these responses to be sent (it doesn’t have to be displayed to the visitor or to spammers who just search the web looking for email addresses). This is one of the beauties of using forms if you don’t want to share your email address publicly. When a visitor fills out your form and submits it, their responses will be sent directly to your email.

Add a payment button

If you’re selling something or asking for donations, you can also create a button that visitors can use to send you money (covered in a later chapter on payment systems).

You can add a payment link or HTML code that your payment system will provide to you on any of your pages or menus. I have a page on ericelder.com that gives people several options to make a donation.

You can see it at ericelder.com/donate.

View your site on multiple devices

Once you’ve added several pages with your content, see how it all looks on multiple devices: desktops, laptops, phones, or tablets. Some themes automatically adapt to different sizes of displays and orientations (try turning your phone or tablet sideways to see how it may change the way your website displays).

If you like what you see, great! If not, move things around on your page or try a different theme or two to see how they compare.

It can take time to adjust everything, but this is where you can make it shine! Get it just the way you like, or at least GETMO (Good Enough To Move On), and click “Publish.”

Submit to search engines

Some web hosting companies will automatically submit your site to search engines once it’s published so that it appears whenever someone types something that exists on your website that’s of interest to them.

If your site is not listed automatically on search engines, you can go to your favorite search engines where you want your site to be listed and submit the main page yourself. For instance, to submit a site to Google, go to:

https://search.google.com/search-console/

The search engine will then “crawl” through your entire site, indexing all of the text, links, images, videos, and so on. Search engines will do this type of crawling on a regular basis to see if anything has been added, changed, or removed. It may be done daily, weekly or periodically depending on the amount of information on your site and how frequently it changes.

Once your site has been submitted and crawled, do a search on that search engine for something that you know is on your website and see if it displays. It may take time before your site appears high on the results page. But once you see your site is listed, you’re done! Everything is now set for people to start finding you and your message on your website!

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 2. How to build a mailing list

A website is great for people to come and visit, but a mailing list is a way to take your message to the people!

In this chapter, I’ll talk about mailing lists, specifically about a list of email addresses of those you want to reach with your message. There’s a time and place for physical mailing lists, but this chapter is about electronic mailing lists.

I used to send out a paper newsletter every three months to several hundred friends, family, and supporters. In that newsletter, I included a message of encouragement for their faith, updates about my ministry and life, and an appeal for funding for our ministry.

Each newsletter generated about $300 in donations. But guess what it cost for all the paper, envelopes, ink, and stamps to send out those quarterly mailings? About $300! 

As email began to grow in popularity (remember, the internet was in its infancy when I began my internet ministry), I switched over completely to sending email newsletters instead.

The problem with sending dozens or hundreds of emails, though, is that you can only send to about 40 email addresses at a time. Some email service providers block your emails if you try to send more than that simultaneously. If the number is under 40, you can use the “Carbon Copy” (“CC”) field and include everyone’s email addresses there. Or you can use the “Blind Carbon Copy” (“BCC”) field to hide each person’s email address from everyone else’s on the list.  (The terms CC and BCC were from the days when people would place a sheet of physical carbon paper between two or more sheets of paper in a typewriter to create an exact copy of the original while typing out their letters.)

If you want to send 40 or 50 or 100 or more emails at a time (depending on your email provider limits), you’ll want to use a mailing list company that is dedicated to sending out emails in bulk.

Here are a few mailing list services I’ve used over the years:

Many of these companies let you start for free while your mailing list is (relatively) small. (I say relatively because anytime you can reach anyone with your message, that’s great!) For instance, Mailchimp’s free plan includes up to 500 contacts and 1,000 sends per month, with a daily send limit of 500.

At the time of this writing, I’m using Campaign Monitor and paying $190/month, at their discounted non-profit rate, to send an email four times a month to 17,000 subscribers, which adds up to nearly 70,000 emails a month (or nearly 800,000 per year!).

I have a friend who is currently using aWeber and pays $112/month to reach 13,000 subscribers, five days a week, which is 260,000 emails a month (or 3.12 million per year!).

So you can start for free, but you can plan on paying more over time as your mailing list grows. Hopefully, the benefit to you and/or your readers will outweigh the cost, so don’t be afraid of the cost… growth is good! 

You’ll notice I’m reaching way more people now than when I was doing a physical mailing, and much more frequently, for less than the cost of sending my paper newsletter by paper mail—and now almost half of my subscribers are in countries all over the world! 

Gutenberg would have been jealous of us!

Building your list

I started my list first by sending paper newsletters to  as many of my friends, family, and others who I thought might be interested in hearing about what I was doing. I gave them the option to let me know if they didn’t want to be on my list. If I didn’t hear back from them, I kept sending them my newsletter.

People don’t usually mind being contacted once. But they do appreciate permission to be contacted repeatedly.

When I switched over to email, I did the same thing. I continued to send my updates to those who were already on my paper mailing list, and from time to time added new people I thought might be interested in hearing from me, too. 

I also added a sign-up form on my website for people who visited after finding it from a search engine or a friend. As more people started signing up for updates, I grew my list to about 1,200 subscribers.

A major boost came when I partnered with a man I met at an Internet Evangelism Conference, which was hosted by the Billy Graham Training Center. I sat by this man one day at lunch at the conference, and he told me he had an online ministry of sending out a daily Christian quotation, five days a week, to about 1,000 people. When he heard I had some tech skills, he asked if I might help him, and I did!

His list grew exponentially as his readers loved getting these short, daily, “seeds of inspiration” for their Christian walk. My new friend, Greg Potzer, started advertising on Google for $100 a month, and his signups shot up dramatically every time he did so. People were searching for the type of content he was offering, and they subscribed when they found it.

At one point, Greg added a Sunday sermon from guest pastors to his weekly offerings. I was also writing and sending weekly messages by that time to my list when he decided to feature my messages every week in his mailings.

Now, instead of reaching a few thousand of my own people, I was reaching tens of thousands of people through his list! Over time, we merged our lists and grew it to about 40,000 subscribers. We were shooting for 100,000 as our next goal, but about that time, social media began to rise, and email subscriptions slowed.

We began adding these new ways to connect with people, but the shift also fragmented our approach. Still, we have found that email is the most reliable way to reach those who really want our content. By the way, natural attrition eats away at any mailing list. About 20% of subscribers fall off of mailing lists automatically each year because of changing email addresses, changing jobs, or technical glitches or accidental spam triggers. So any growth has to outpace attrition to keep a list growing over time. It’s hard work! But this is reality, as it is in anything worth doing.

We’ve since gone back to having our own mailing lists for our different purposes and ministries, but we had a much larger start than we would have had on our own. There may be some partnering you can do to grow your list!

For our lists, we’ve mostly collected addresses organically, sending to people we personally know or letting them sign up on their own, whether through a search engine or on a paper sign-up sheet when we give talks or hand out business cards.

You can also buy mailing lists for your target demographic, which could be good for certain uses, but we simply haven’t done it for economic reasons as much as any other. Apart from occasional advertising on Google or on other mailing lists, we have stuck to word of mouth or search engines. You might find a better approach for your lists!

Now, let’s get technical!

Now, let’s look at how to set up your mailing list. I’ll use my current company, Campaign Monitor, as an example. (Update January, 2026: I now use WordPress.com’s free mailing list option.)

If you already have a list of email addresses to start with, you can add them one by one or upload the entire list all at once.

For me, I go to campaignmonitor.com, login, then go to “Lists & Subscribers,” then “Create a List.” I’ll give the list a name, such as “Let’s Get Technical,” then I’ll create a list only of those people who are interested in a class like this.

Then I select “Continue to Import,” and I can start typing in the subscribers, one by one such as:

  • john@xyz.com
  • talitha@abc.org
  • spencer@lmn.net

If I want to include more information with each subscriber, I can use a comma between those pieces of information, like this:

  • john@xyz.com, John Cooper, Louisville, KY
  • talitha@abc.org, Talitha Abbed, Cairo, Egypt
  • spencer@lmn.net, Spencer Stout, London, UK

When finished, I hit “Next” and I’m prompted to name each “field” that I’ve just included using those commas, and I name them “email,” “full name,” “city” or “state/country.” You can add any fields and name them as you’d like. 

Then I click “Save and Continue” and I’ve got my list started!

I usually enter some test emails before adding real subscriber addresses, then I send myself some tests messages.

To create a message email, I go to “Campaigns” and then “Create a Campaign.” I give my campaign a name, such as “Book Announcement.” From there, I select “Design Email” to choose a layout or theme for my email. I pick one and start writing my content and adding links and pictures of videos, just as I do when creating a webpage.

Then I send my message to my test mailing list, which you’ll remember I called “Let’s Get Technical.”

Once my test looks good, I know I’m ready!

I add my real subscribers, either one subscriber at a time, or I can choose to upload a list, which is a simple text file or spreadsheet containing several dozen or hundreds or thousands of subscribers and their information, separated by commas or by cells in a spreadsheet.

Now, each time I want to send a message to that group of subscribers, I just create a new “Campaign,” write my heading and content, and send it to the “Let’s Get Technical” list that I’ve created!

Add a sign-up form to your website

For every mailing list you create, your mailing list company will give you a link or some HTML code that you can add to your website to make it easy for website visitors to sign up. Copy and paste this link or code and that’ll make it easy for people to get on your list by themselves! 

If you have multiple lists, your mailing list company will give you a link or code where people can choose to sign up for multiple lists as well. Also, having a mailing list company and these links allows people to easily change or remove themselves from your list by clicking a link, rather than having to bother you with all of those requests. 

So start with CC or BCC if you want, then grow to a free or eventually paid mailing list service over time. Than have fun reaching more and more people with your message!

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 3. How to build a social media presence 

“Facebook saved my life.” That’s what my friend said to me as we were talking a few months ago on the anniversary of his son’s death. My friend was down and spiraling further downward.

So he posted about it on Facebook. He told me that as the reactions and comments started pouring in, he felt strengthened again. We were at a worship service that night, and he had a huge smile on his face as he told me the story. “I mean it, Facebook literally saved my life today.”

I told him I agreed. I got on Facebook in the beginning at the request of my daughter who was going off to college, and she thought it would be a good way for me to keep up with her life there. It was great seeing her posts and pictures, then I began uploading my own. 

I discovered friends I hadn’t kept up with in years. And I learned much more about people that I thought I knew well, but only on Facebook did I see some of their hurts and pains and particular proclivities that I had never seen in person!

I began sharing parts of my life, too, that some of them had never seen before either: including my faith.

When I think about building up a social media presence, I think first and foremost about building up my community… those people I’m walking through and want to walk through life with. For me, it’s not a platform to sell things, or to convince people of things, but to live life together.

When my wife Lana passed away after 23 years of marriage, there were days I wanted to reach out to someone, but I didn’t know who to call. I didn’t want to bother anyone in particular. And I didn’t want to necessarily even have a conversation about it. I just wanted to express what was on my heart. Doing so felt cathartic.

As I mentally scanned through a list of my friends that I could call, I didn’t have it in me to do it. I needed someone to “be there” on the other end of the line, someone who could share my burden.

Those are the times I would turn to Facebook. I would share some of my deep emotions, whether “I’m having a bad day” or “I’m missing her” or “I keep crying, and I know it’s supposed to be good for healing, but still it hurts.”

Then, like my friend who had lost his son, people began sharing their comments and reactions. “Same,” they’d say, for they had lost a friend in Lana, too. “We’re here for you.” “We’re with you.” “You’re not alone in this.”

Just typing those words again now brings tears to my eyes, just as it did then.

What a blessing to have a community to share our burdens, our grief, our loneliness, our pain. What a gift. What a way to lift our spirits. What a way to “be the body of Christ” for one another.

Years later, when I traveled to Italy, I shared my pictures. I shared my videos. I shared my stories. I went live on Facebook from various locations. And people followed me all along my way! “We’ll never get to Italy,” they said, “so it’s nice to see it through your eyes. We feel like we’re there with you.”

People might complain about social media. But for me, it really is social media. It’s a big part of my social life! I check it daily to see what people are up to and to share what’s up with me. I live and work at home, so it’s nice for me to have another way to connect with people through the week. It’s life-giving to me! And, when I share my own ups and downs and how God is walking with me through them, it can be life-giving to others, too. 

Now, when I make new friends, we connect on social media. When I’m out speaking, I’ll share my contact information. When I write a book, or do a podcast, or send out a message to thousands, I’ll include a few links where I can stay in touch with people who want to stay in touch with me.

For me, it’s not marketing to people, although it can have that effect. It’s not selling something to someone, although it can sometimes turn into that. Social media is a community. Where friendship happen. And on the deepest level, where love takes place.

Real-life evangelism involves walking through life together with others, celebrating joys and sharing hardships, and sometimes “one beggar showing another beggar where they found food.”

There are lots of ways to build a social media presence! There are lots of tools and techniques to help you sell your product or service or idea to others. But for me, there’s nothing like an organic approach. It fits my style, my personality, my heart, and my own needs for social and spiritual encouragement.

With that in mind, let’s get technical! Here’s how I’ve built my own social media presence… through love!

Be real

Rick Warren has said that people clap for your successes, but they connect with your failures. It can be easy to share only your joys and high points on social media. But when you share your struggles, too, you can connect even deeper. 

I shared one day on Facebook about something God was teaching me about divorce. I had never been divorced, but I watched several of my friends go through them. I thought I was being kind when I told one of them that I was still praying that she and her husband would be reconciled. She replied, “You can pray that, Eric, but what I really need is prayer that I would be able to love him, even if we never do reconcile.” That gave me a whole different perspective, and a whole new sensitivity to the topic.

I shared this insight on Facebook, and one of my childhood friends was so touched, he asked if we could get together. We went out for dinner at a local restaurant where I began to share with him, at his request, more stories about how God had been working in my life. That one Facebook post opened the door to a much larger conversation with a friend I hadn’t connected with in years.

And to underscore Rick Warren’s point, at the end of this conversation, it wasn’t the high points that my friend was touched by as much as when I told him about one of my own failings in my own family life. He said he had the same thing happen, and it was his best takeaway from our hours long conversation.

I’ve found the same as I’ve addressed other topics, inviting input and feedback along the way. Not trying to just “sell” my idea or product, but to be real about my life and what’s working and not working for me, and they share about their lives.

Rather than creating a highlight reel of your life, be real with your life!

Post pictures (not just text or links)

Facebook (and other social media platforms) give extra credit to photos… photos of food, people, scenery… anything. 

A picture os not only worth a thousand words, but it makes for a higher ranking on social media algorithms, too. If you just post text, it can get buried and skipped over. If you just post links, it doesn’t get as high a rating from your friends or from the algorithms. To get the most bang for the buck, the most attention, post a picture. Tag someone in it. Add a location.  Add a hashtag, like #howtowriteabook! By adding these extra details, your post will get extra credit with the algorithms. The platform will reward you by putting your post in front of more people.

I’ve learned that if I include a link anywhere in my post, that link is automatically turned into my “picture” that accompanies the post. While that’s good because it adds a picture, it doesn’t actually work as well as if I had shared a picture directly. Why? Because a link takes people off of the social media site, and because of that, the algorithm gives you a lower ranking, showing it to fewer people. They want people to stay on their site!

So even when the main goal of my post is to share a link, I try to upload a picture first, maybe even a picture of whatever I’m sharing. By doing this, the picture is highlighted, rather than the link. Sometimes I’ll include the link in my post, but other times I’ll include the link in the comments. My post gets more views, and the link is still there for those who want to click it.

Upload videos directly (not just links to videos)

If you want to share a video, upload it directly to each platform, not just a link to the video on some other platform. This is for the same reason as when posting links… the platform wants you to stay on their platform. So I usually try to upload a video directly to Facebook or Instagram or LinkedIn or TikTok if I can. If I can’t and really do want people to watch the whole thing on YouTube, I’ll upload a picture from the video first, or a short clip from the video, then include the link to the longer version. This seems to get more traction for my post than if I had just shared the link to the video. Plus, people can grasp quickly what I’m sharing, rather than having to decide if they want to click over to watch the video when they don’t even know what it’s about.

Tell stories

One way to tell people about what’s important to you is to tell them what you want them to do, like “Go watch The Chosen!” But there’s another way, and that’s through storytelling. Here’s one of my most popular posts, which struck me as odd at the time, but which somehow resonated with people.

“I was taking care of my daughter’s snail this month while she was out of town. I thought it was doing fine until it stopped moving. For several days. After ten days, I was going to pull it’s bubble maker and tell her I was sorry, I had killed it. But the night before, I was was watching an episode of The Chosen where Jesus prayed for a little girl who had died and brought her back to life. I thought it was unlikely to happen in this case, but I really felt bad for this little snail. I prayed that God would raise it back to life. The next morning, I saw the little snail, clinging to the top of the bubble maker, with fresh bubbles flowing over it! It was alive! I couldn’t believe it. I fell to my knees and praised God, not knowing if this was my prayers, or if the snail had just been resting those previous days. But what I do know is I had been inspired to pray, and I prayed. And now the snail’s alive. Praise God!”

That one story got more reactions than most of my posts for the whole year. People commented about how it gave them faith to pray for situations in their own lives. Some people asked me to turn it into a children’s book. Some people told me about their experiences watching The Chosen. And the more people that commented and reacted, the more frequently the post was displayed to others who then also commented  and reacted.

How did a show impact you? Share it! How did a message touch you? Share it! How did a Bible passage speak to you this morning? Share it! Not just a link to a show or a message or a Bible passage (which you can still post, possibly along with a picture related to it). If it spoke to you, then it might speak to others. Sometimes it’s okay to just share a simple “thought for the day.” But many times, people are wanting to hear how that thought impacted you.

Ask questions

One of my friends gets interactions on almost every post he makes. I couldn’t figure out why until I realized he was often asking others what they thought about an idea. He would share his thoughts, but then he would ask for their input… a key to being “social”!

One of the questions I’ve posted online has been simple but still surprising every time: “How can I pray for you today?” I don’t do this to win social media points. But I do this when I really have some time and want to pray for those who are needing prayer in their lives.

I was at an all-day prayer retreat one day, and our group was praying about everything that came to our minds. We then decided to go to social media and ask people what was on their minds and offered to pray for them as well. We had set aside the whole day to pray,  so we were glad for the responses. And people starting pouring out their prayer requests. The more people who posted, the more people saw the post, and those people then added their prayers. The prayers came in all day long, and we prayed all day long.

This wasn’t a trick. It was a natural outgrowth of what we were already doing and wanted to keep doing for others, just as we knew we would want others to do for us. Can the golden rule be as simple as that? It can!

Like and respond to others

For me, social media is not a one way street, although others sometimes use it that way. Being social means liking and commenting on other’s posts at time, too. Get to know people. Care for people. Love people! What a great way to meet new people and enjoy lifetime friendships! If you use it this way, I believe everyone will be happier, including the algorithms. :)

Create Reels, #hashtags, and change profile and background pix

Trends tend to rise and fall. Reels, short videos, adding music, adding hashtags can all help or detract, depending on the platform and period in history. 

Take time to experiment, see what others are doing, give it a shot for yourself! 

By the way, whenever I change my profile or background picture, social media seems to think that’s a big deal. So if I have a really big announcement, and a picture of me or an event I want to highlight, I feature it on my profile or background picture. 

Adding features like @feature or @highlight or @followers can also boost a post, but like all boosts, if you boost all the time, people don’t know what you think is really important. Sometimes save the big stuff for the big stuff!

The moral of the story

Social media can be a horrible, ugly place. But it can also be a place of life, of life lived well and in community.

There’s a story about a traveler who was about to move from one village to another. As he walked on the road between the two, he met an old man.

The traveler asked the man what the people were like in the village ahead. The old man asked, “What were the people like where you came from?”

The traveler said, “They were awful, rude people. I had no friends; people were trying to cheat me and insult me at every turn. I was miserable.”

The old man said, “I’m sorry, the people in this village are just like those people. You will not be happy here, either.” The traveler nodded and continued on.

Later that day, another traveler approached the same old man and asked, “What kinds of people live in this village? I’m leaving my old village, and I’m looking for a new home.”

The old man asked, “What were the people like where you came from?”

The traveler said, “They were wonderful people. I had many good friends, business was strong, and it was a most hospitable village. I wish I didn’t have to leave.”

The old man said, “You’ll find the people just like that here, too.”

What’s the moral of the story as it relates to social media? I’ll let you work that one out for yourself. :)

Remember: “If you don’t make time for friends, you won’t have any.”

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 4. How to create a podcast

When I talk about podcasting, I’m talking about using audio or video to get your message to as many people as possible. The beauty of this method of sharing your message is that there are so many ways to do it! 

One of the easiest ways is to go live on Facebook and share whatever’s on your heart for as long as you’d like. Your Facebook friends and family will be alerted that you’re going live, and they can click and watch you as you talk in real time, or you can save your video for 30 days or permanently so they can go back and watch anytime. 

These options weren’t available back when the iPod first came out and people were still listening to recorded radio-style programs on their music players. Even though the iPod has since come and gone, the word “podcasting” is still used to share your message via audio. And now video. And now live! 

Here are a few ways you can use podcasts.

Where are your people?

Your first goal is to determine where your people are currently listening to their music and messages. If they’re on Spotify, go for Spotify. If they’re on YouTube, go for YouTube. If they’re on Apple podcasts,  go to Apple podcasts. Or if they’re on Facebook, as I said earlier, go to Facebook!

Spotify has a nice way to upload podcasts that they will then distribute to all the other podcasting services, such as Apple or Amazon.

One of the podcasts I upload to Spotify this way is called “Using Your Gifts with Eric Elder and Friends.” In this video podcast, I use zoom to interview my friends who are using their gifts in cool ways for the kingdom. I record and edit the videos (covered in later chapters), then upload the podcast to Spotify. 

You can find it by searching for “Eric Elder.” I have another podcast called “Harry Potter: Lessons in Friendship,” where I talk to two other hosts about each of the Harry Potter books and what makes the friendships in the book work, what breaks them, and how all of us can make our friendships better. Again, this is a zoom recording, which I later edit and upload. Just search for “Eric Elder and Harry Potter” to find it.

A current limitation on Spotify’s distribution is that while I can upload and offer video podcasts on Spotify, they only distribute the audio portion to the other services. Alternately, I could upload all of my videos directly to Apple or Amazon or any of the other podcasting platforms, including YouTube.

Recording the podcast 

For these interview-style podcasts, I don’t have special equipment. I simply use the microphone that’s built into my laptop, then I hit “record” on zoom to save the video to my computer.

I edit the video by trimming off the front and back ends of the podcast at least, and sometimes trim out some of the video within the podcast. Sometimes I’ll add some intro and outro music and a graphic at the beginning or end of each episode using a few tools that I’ve downloaded for free, such as Audacity for audio or iMovie or DaVinci Resolve Final Cut. More about those in later chapters! 

I also sometimes simply record a video or audio on my phone, using the free camera app or the audio recording app. You could buy a USB microphone to plug into your system, but that’s usually more than I need for these interviews.

Now, for another podcast I do, usually a series that I upload to YouTube, it’s just me at a microphone sitting by my piano, which also has a microphone. Since I’m often singing and playing the piano on these episodes, these external microphones help to create a very listenable experience.

With all of my podcasts, I usually run the audio portions through a website at auphonic.com to level out the volume throughout my entire podcast, whether it’s variations in people’s voices, or between music and speaking. This is an extra touch that’s not necessary, but I’ve found it can bring everything up to an even level so listeners don’t have to turn their volume up and down throughout the podcast to hear better.

Defining your podcast

It’s easy to start a podcast. It’s also easy to stop a podcast after only seven or eight or fifteen episodes because it can turn out to be more work to think of content, create, edit, and upload it! Knowing this going in it’s best to have not only an idea of what you’d like to talk about, but to plan out at least 30 topics on that subject that you’d like to discuss over 30 episodes. If you can make it to 30, you’ll have better luck continuing beyond that! 

Your podcast could be interviews, monologues, a Bible study, a book discussion, or whatever message you’re wanting to get out. But up front, make a list of not only the subject but 30 topics you’d like to discuss.

Go ahead and brainstorm them just like you were brainstorming the chapters of a book. Each topic will become an episode. If you shoot for 30, you could go for 50 or 100 or 300. But if you shoot for five or ten, you might give up after only a handful. 

You can also think in terms of seasons or years. Maybe you have 10-12 episodes one season, and 10-12 the next, and 10-12 the next. This can help you break down the process into manageable chunks, but still give you enough momentum to keep going after a season break.

Recording your podcast example

Here’s a sample of how I record using Zoom. 

Zoom is a free download that allows you to have an online video meeting with one or more people. You could also use Teams or Skype to do the same.

When I open Zoom, I have an option to record the meeting using the “Record” button. If it doesn’t appear on your screen, you might have to click the three dots to open an extended menu. Click Record, then click either “onto this computer” or “onto the cloud.” I use “onto this computer” as my cloud storage is limited. (Your situation may be the reverse, as you have more storage in the cloud!)

Tip for musicians: One option I use when recording music at my piano is to turn on “original sound for musicians.” This uses a better quality audio tool to preserve all the music that I’m playing. For normal meetings, I don’t turn on this option, as the normal mode filters out background noise, making it better for normal speech.

When my meeting is over, I simply turn off the recording by pressing the square “Stop” button. Or I simply end the meeting and the recording stops as well. Important: keep Zoom open after stopping the recording or ending the meeting so the recording has time to save to your computer or the cloud. This may take from a few seconds to up to a minute or two.

Now you can access your recording and upload it as is, or do some trimming or editing using the tools I mentioned in the chapter on editing audio and video. That’s also where you can spice things up and add intro and outro music, graphics, text, and more to your podcast.

Uploading your podcast

Here’s how I upload my podcast to Spotify.

First, I create a free account on creators.spotify.com.

Next, I create a podcast, adding a title, description, and some cover art.

Then I create an episode, adding an episode title, description, and other information, such as a season number and episode number. Perhaps start with season “1” and have 10-12 episodes in that season, then the next year call it season “2” and have 10-12 episodes in that season. For my current podcast, I have planned out 25 episodes for the year, so I call it season 1 and number each episode accordingly.

Finally, upload the audio or video file that you’ve created and edited. You’ll have a chance to preview your podcast before publishing it live. Choose a publication date, whether it’s the day you upload it or a date in the past that it first aired elsewhere or a date in the future when you want it to become available. I have a friend who does a daily devotional. He can queue up several podcasts to be released each day, whether it’s going to be days, weeks, or months in the future.

Hit save and watch your podcast go live when you’ve chosen it to go live!

Distributing your podcast

Pick the platforms where you want to send your podcast. You can choose from the options Spotify partners with such as Apple Podcasts or Amazon Podcasts. You’ll want a title and description for your podcast, plus keywords and episode titles. Numbering your podcasts in the title isn’t necessary as the number will appear automatically next to each podcast.

Monetizing your podcast

Oftentimes you can just offer your podcast for free to anyone who wants to listen. But there are some options to monetize your podcast, such as charging a subscription fee, such as $2 or $7 or $10 a month. 

As a podcast listener, I have never paid to listen to a podcast, so I wasn’t too surprised when I didn’t have any takers when I tried offer a podcast for a monthly fee. But just because I don’t pay and I couldn’t find takers to pay doesn’t mean you can’t (or at least try!)

You can also make money by offering a “tip jar” for listeners to help you out, buy you a coffee, or buy some merch that goes with your podcast. Spotify and others offer this kind of “donation” option as well as a flat-rate fee.

A friend of mine makes money on his podcasts by finding sponsors. He has certain products he likes to use, so he contacts them directly and asks if they’d like to sponsor an episode or series. He’s been able to make $500 a month on sponsorships, and he gives the product or company a plug somewhere within his podcast, whether at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end.

And finally, if your podcast gains popularity, the platform itself might start sending you a portion of their listener fees or ad revenue. I have a friend whose YouTube podcast has become so popular, she makes enough income to support missions projects globally.

The truth is, someone’s going to pay for you to do your podcast, whether it’s you or others. So if you can find a balance that’s a blessing to everyone, that’s a win-win all around!

Sharing your link with the world! 

Once your podcast is set up and running, share it with the world!

Send texts, emails, make social media posts, using the seven-touch rule to let people know about your show at least seven times in possibly seven different ways. (My advertising and teaching friends tell me it usually takes seven attempts to get someone to take action on something you’re promoting or teaching.) 

You can also post your podcast link on your website or on your business cards (which is covered in a later chapter).

Next, we’ll talk about one of the most specific and popular ways to post your messages online: through a YouTube channel.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 5. How to create a YouTube channel

Why create a YouTube channel? For starters, YouTube is the second largest search engine in the world, only after Google (which also happens to own YouTube).

More so, YouTube is the go-to platform for all things video. If you have a message to share, and you can turn it into a video, try YouTube! 

How to create a “channel”

YouTube lets anyone upload videos for free. If you’ve ever watched a video on YouTube, you’re just a step away from creating your own YouTube channel. YouTube uses your existing email address to track the videos you watch, so that becomes your YouTube account by default. 

To create a channel, simply open YouTube in your browser or in the YouTube app, then click on your account profile—usually the picture of you or an icon of a default person in the upper right of your browser.

Next click “Create a channel.”

You can now begin customizing your channel by adding a display name, a handle (which begins with the @ sign, such as @ericelder), a description, and links to your website or sites. For me, my YouTube channel is at youtube.com/@ericelder.

Upload a video

Next, upload a video! Click the “Create” button or the + sign in the upper right corner, then click “Upload videos.” You can drag and drop or select a video  or several videos from your device.

While your video is uploading, you can choose a title, a description, and set various settings, such as adding the video to a particular playlist (create a new playlist by clicking “new playlist” if you don’t have one) and add the video to it. You can also choose whether you want the video to be “public,” “unlisted,” “private,” or schedule a date when it will go public.

Once your video has uploaded, you can edit the video using YouTube’s editing tool, such as trimming off the beginning, end, or even segments within the video.

Once posted, you can copy and paste the link to your video and share it with others!

The more videos you add, the more likely your YouTube channel will grow, both organically (because you have more content), and algorithmically (because YouTube rewards users who upload lots of videos by increasing their rank and showing them to more people).

Invite others to watch

YouTube rewards creators who promote their channels and gets lots and lots of subscribers. They make their money by keeping people watching on their platform! So if you get more people watching your channel, it makes YouTube very, very happy! And you get your message out to more people! That’s a win-win! There are incentives for every level you hit in terms of subscribers.

For instance, when you get 1,000 subscribers, you can begin to share in the profits that YouTube makes on ads that are displayed on your videos (before 1,000 subscribers, YouTube keeps all the profits). So there’s a big incentive to get to 1,000. As of today, I have 692 subscribers after several few years of posting over 200 videos. So don’t be discouraged if you don’t hit those levels right away. Then again, do all you can to bring people to your site and you could reach those levels much more quickly than me. 

The main thing for me is to get my message out to as many people as can benefit from it. So by creating and uploading videos, I trust that God will use those messages to reach the people He wants to reach. Can God do it without your help? Sure! But can He also use you and your wisdom and the wisdom of others to reach others? Of course. So I still try to do all I can to reach people, and I trust God to do all I can’t.

“Subscribe and hit the bell”

It can feel awkward promoting yourself or your own channel. But sometimes people just need to know what to do to help you reach more people. So when telling others about your channel, encourage them also to “subscribe and hit the bell.” When someone subscribes to your channel, your videos will appear on their YouTube homepage. When someone hits the bell, that will send them a notification whenever you post new videos, rather than simply appearing on their homepage.

Creating playlists and podcasts

You can group your videos together by creating a playlist or a podcast. They’re really similar things, just known by different terms. 

Click “Create,” then “New playlist.” Give your playlist a name and add some videos to it that you’ve uploaded!

In my case, I have a playlist for all the videos in this book from when I taught it as a zoom class. The playlist is called “Let’s Get Technical.” I also have a playlist called “Using Your Gifts” where I’ve put all my video interviews that I’ve done with friends who are using their gifts in cool ways. I also have a playlist of music videos I’ve created featuring piano music of my own or my sister’s, Marilyn Byrnes, called “Mesmerizing Music Videos.”

To create a podcast, simply choose “Create,” then “New podcast,” and start adding videos to your podcast. I’ve created a podcast of my videos based on the Harry Potter books called “Harry Potter: Lessons in Friendship.”

Tips for growing your channel

Here are a few tips from my friends and the developers at Youtube to grow your channel:

  • Post on a regular schedule, such as the same time and same day of the week or month.
  • Create both shorts (under 60 second clips) and longer segments from your podcast for highlights, then include links to the full episodes in the description. My “shorts” sometimes get hundreds of views while my full-length videos (20-60 minutes) sometimes get under a hundred views. The short clips help get my message out, but also help to promote my longer clips if people are interested.
  • Add music to your video. Music helps the listener and can also attract people who like the music you play. Note that if you use music that you don’t own, it can send royalties to the owner of the music every time someone watches your podcast… but you can’t monetize that episode for yourself.
  • Customize your “chicklet,” that initial graphic that people see when deciding which video to watch. Attention-grabbing text or headlines or a carefully selected shot from your podcast can help with those clicks. When uploading your podcast, you can also upload a custom graphic, or you can let YouTube choose a still image from your video. If you don’t like the one YouTube chooses, you can ask it to generate a couple more, and choose the one you like best.
  • For titles, use verbiage with an “itch” that needs to be scratched. Humans are curious and gravitate towards questions, controversy, or something interesting or unresolved so they can try to resolve it.
  • Go live with your podcast, either directly through YouTube’s live features or from within Zoom if doing interviews. Going live notifies people that something is happening right now if they’ll click on it, so it can bring more viewers who are curious.

We live in a crazy age that we can reach people in countries all over the world instantaneously. Make use of it! For God and for good.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 6. How to create an audiobook

If you’ve written a book, it’s a fairly simple next step to create an audio version for those who like to listen to your content. And many people do! It’s nice to be able to listen to a book while driving, working out, doing yard work, or other times when picking up a book is either inconvenient or impossible.

Historically, when selling my own books, about 80% of my readers have bought paperbacks, 15% eBooks, and 5% audiobooks. But those numbers are changing as more and more people are listening. 

And if you don’t have an audiobook, it’s like leaving money on the table… and missing out on reaching people who might benefit from your content. So here’s your guide to creating an audiobook.

By the way, I’ve included a BONUS chapter at the end of this book to use AI—artificial intelligence— to help you create your audiobook in your own voice or someone else’s. So if after reading this chapter, you’d like a little assistance, check out the BONUS chapter at the end!

Where to put your audiobooks?

I’ve put my audiobooks on several platforms:

  • I put them on Amazon, using ACX.com (owned by Amazon), which feeds content to listeners who use Audible (also owned by Amazon).
  • I put them on Spotify, using findawayvoices.com (owned by Spotify) to upload the audiobooks and distribute them to several other platforms, including ACX if you want.
  • I put them on my own website (owned by me!) at inspiringbooks.com. So when I upload the audio files to my own website, I can offer it for sale directly to my readers as a download and keep nearly all the proceeds, minus the online payment fees (covered in a later chapter on payment systems).
  • The fourth platform I’ll describe more in the BONUS chapter, as I’ve used Google Books to create and distribute “auto-narrated” books from my typed versions of my books.

Creating your audiobook for Audible

Creating an audiobook on ACX.com is very similar to creating a paperback or ebook on KDP (Amazon’s print and ebook website). First, create a free account on ACX.com. Then “Claim your title” if you already have a paperback or ebook on Amazon.

For this example, I’ll be creating an audiobook for my book called My Stories of Faith.

I simply click “Claim my title” then search for my book. Once I see it, I claim it! All the information about the book (title, keywords, descriptions, etc.) is pulled from my previously uploaded book so I don’t have to retype. Plus, the audiobook will then be linked to the other versions of the book so readers can choose whichever format they like when they find it on Amazon.

Recording your audio

I already own some nice microphones for recording my piano music so I use those (AKG Perception 200), but they are much higher end than is necessary for audiobooks. You can use software to enhance your voice and add special effects to make it sound more rich. 

A simple USB microphone can work just fine for recording an audiobook. There are hundreds of such mics, but here’s one that’s currently good for a good price: the FIFINE USB Computer Microphone for $30 from Amazon. 

For software, I use GarageBand, which is free on my Mac and for any Apple app stores (desktop, laptop, tablet, phone). I also use Audacity from time to time, which is free for both Macs or Windows computers from audacityteam.org.

To record, I simply open GarageBand, select  my input as “mic or line,” then create a new project. I’ll usually test speaking into the microphone to see how close or far from the mic I should be, see if I should turn up or down the volume on the input device (either on the microphone itself or in the audio input setting in software). I want to keep my voice in the green, seldom in the yellow, and never in the red, or it will begin to break up or crackle if the input level is too loud.

When I’m ready, I press the “record” button and start reading a chapter! I’ll usually record one chapter at a time. If I make a mistake or stumble over words, I’ll just keep recording and start that sentence or paragraph again, waiting till I finish my chapter to stop the recording and do my edits. 

After recording

After I record my audio, I usually “filter” my voice a bit to enhance it. For me, I often use “Male Narrator,” which deepens my vocals and reduces background shooshing sounds. 

I also like to use an external website when I’m all finished to level out my entire audio file (if my voice drops too quiet or raises too high, Auphonic can level everything out so listeners don’t have to strain to hear me or be overwhelmed by a sudden increase in volume).

I record each chapter in one file, so when I’m done recording, I’ll have one file per chapter, plus a file for an intro or conclusion, and a simple recording stating the title, the author, and the narrator, like this:

“You’re listening to My Stories of Faith, written and narrated by Eric Elder.” 

I’ll also record one sentence at the very end of the book, usually as the last sentence of the last chapter, that says, “Thanks for listening to My Stories of Faith, written and narrated by Eric Elder. You’ve reached the end.”

The statement “You’ve reached the end,” or some other wording that says “the end” is required by Spotify and ACX to let listeners know there’s no more!

I’ll share more about recording and editing your audio in the next chapter, “How to edit your audio.”

Creating your audiobook for Spotify

When you’re finished recording all your chapters, you can create a free account on findawayvoices.com, which is owned by Spotify and used for their audiobook services. 

Findawayvoices can also send your audiobook to other platforms, such as Audible, which is convenient, but currently costs a 20% cut to Spotify from your profits on Audible for this option. So it’s up to you if it’s worth it to upload it yourself to ACX for Audible customers, or just have Spotify send it to Audible for you.

Creating your audiobook for your own website

If you’re the main person pointing people to your books anyway, you can keep more control and keep more of the revenue by simply uploading the audio files to your own website and eliminate those in the middle! Those in the middle are great when they’re also helping you find readers for your book, but if you’re doing all the work anyway, you can do this yourself, too!

Just upload your files to your website, for instance using the “Media Upload” link inside WordPress. Then create a page that is private except to those who have the link. 

Next, create a payment button, such as from PayPal or Venmo, which I’ll cover in a later chapter. Then when people pay for their audiobook, you can either display a confirmation page that has a link to your audiobook or you can send them an email yourself that includes the link.

We’ll look at editing audio next.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 7. How to edit audio

I love editing! Why? Because I can present my best possible self to those I’m trying to reach! 

It’s not that I try to make things look like they’re real when they’re not. It’s that I like taking what I’ve already got and making it as pleasant and listenable as I can for my audience. 

I’ve learned from experience, listening to my own recording and the recordings of others that bad audio discourages listening, whether I’ve stuttered, coughed, stumbled over words, or had odd background noises. But with a little editing, I’ve been able to clean up those messes and make something presentable!

Recording in Garageband

I often use GarageBand on my Mac for recording and editing, which is available for free on Apple devices. I’ve also used Audacity, which is also a free download and works on both Mac and Windows computers.

For the example in this book, I’m going to use a simple USB microphone that I mentioned in the last chapter, called a FIFINE USB Computer Microphone for about $30 from Amazon. 

The microphone comes with a USB cable that I can plug directly into my computer. I also use an adapter to convert the larger size USB 3 to the smaller USB-C which my computer uses.

When I plug in the cable and adapter, an option pops up on my MacBook asking if I’d like to use this new microphone. I select “Use.” Then I can test it by opening GarageBand and recording something.

When I open GarageBand, it asks me which project I’d like to open, so I choose an “empty project.” 

Next it asks what type of track I’d like to create, and I choose “Mic or line,” then select the input microphone from those available, in this case, my USB microphone.

A new track is created, and I can see a little green bar showing me the sound that is coming into that track. When I talk into the mic, I can see the green bar rise and fall with the amount of sound coming into the system. The microphone I’m using has a dial on it so I can adjust the input volume. I test it by talking into the mic in the same way I plan to record, and adjusting the volume as I test to try to keep the green bar near the top of the green or sometimes yellow range, but never hitting the red range. If it hits the red, it’s too loud and will “clip” the sound, making the sound crackle or pop at those points, and there’s no easy way to fix that after recording. So it’s always better to record with the volume staying in the green and yellow range.

Next I can press the red “record” button and start talking, doing a test of just a few words or phrases, then pressing the record button again to stop recording. Then I press “play” to listen to the sound.

If I like it, I’m ready to record! If I notice something that needs to be changed, such as being too close or too far from the mic, or hearing pops when I say words with the letters “p” or “t” or “ch.” Some adjustments may include adjusting my distance from the mic, or adjusting the volume dial, or by using a circular nylon “popper stopper” between my mouth and my mic. 

I bought a popper stopper online for cheap, but you can make one yourself by putting a nylon stocking over an embroidery hoop! (I’ve done that, too!) By speaking through the nylon, with the mic on the other side, it cuts down on the amount of breath that gets through to the mic.

Trimming audio

 If I like what I hear, I sometimes simply trim out the silence or dead space from the beginning and end of the audio and I’m done! 

To trim out a segment in GarageBand, I make sure the recording is selected (in this case, the recording will have a white bar at top and bright blue for the track). I move the playhead (the vertical line that shows where the track is currently being played) to where I want to make the trim by grabbing the top of the playhead and dragging it to where I want, or by tapping in the timeline area above the recorded segment. I make the cut in the audio by using the Edit menu and selecting “Split regions at playhead.” I also use the shortcut that is shown next to that option, which is to press the “Command” and “t” keys at the same time.

Once split, I can select the entire clip to be removed by tapping on the white bar at the top and deleting it with the delete key. I do the same to cut out the silence at the end, using the same sequence: I tap to put the playhead where I want the split, I press “Command” and “t” together, and I tap on and delete the extraneous segment. If nothing splits when you take that action, you might need to be sure to select the track again that you want to split.

When cutting off the beginning and end, I usually leave about one second of silence at the beginning, and several seconds of silence at the end. This makes for a smooth listening experience when listening to one track after another.

I then listen to the whole segment again using the “play” button. If I like what I hear, I’m ready to export the track to a file by selecting “Share,” then “Export song to disk.” I name the file and choose the filetype, such as MP3, and click “Export.”

Then I’ll find the file on the computer, open it, and play it back to see how it sounds.

Recording in Audacity

Here’s an example doing the same thing in Audacity, a free software program that works on both Macs and Windows available for download from audacityteam.org by going to their website and clicking “Download.”

To record in Audacity, open the app and click the “AudioSetup” button to make sure your microphone is connected and recognized. In my case, I’ll choose my USB microphone from the “Recording device” menu. I also check to make sure my “Playback device” is selected properly so I can hear the playback, for instance, “MacBook Speakers.”

Now I do a test recording by pressing the red “Record” button.

As I record, I’ll see a green bar showing how loud or soft my input is. I adjust the input level if needed on my microphone or in the software so my recording stays in the green or yellow range, but never the red. I then press “Play” to listen to my recording. 

If I like it, I just trim off the silence at the beginning by clicking directly in the track where I want the split to start, then dragging my cursor to the left across the region all the way to the beginning which I want to split off. That section will then be highlighted, and I press the “Delete” to delete that section. In Audacity, the entire recording will shift to the left to automatically close the gap created by the deleted section. I do the same to trim off the end. 

Then I press the “Play” button to see how it sounds. If I like it, I save it by choosing the “File” menu, then “Export audio.” I give the file a name and press “Export.”

Adjusting volume

If I find the volume is too loud or too quiet in my exported file, I can adjust the volume for the whole track, or adjust it section by section within the recording. 

To adjust an entire track in GarageBand, I can slide the volume slider, which is to the left of the track, to the right or left while playing the track. I aim for the top of the green bar, no higher than the yellow, and never touching the red. 

In Audacity, I adjust the same way, using the slider that shows up as green when playing back the audio, and stay within the green and yellow, never red.

Another option in both of these programs to automatically increase the volume of the entire track to the maximize the volume is called “Normalization.” I’ll sometimes just use this setting when exporting a file to save the file with the fullest volume possible. Here’s how.

In Audacity, I select the “Effects” menu, then “Volume and normalization,” then “Loudness” and click “Preview” to hear how it sounds. If I like it, I click “Apply.”

In GarageBand, I choose “Settings,” “Advanced,” then I check the box for “Auto Normalize” to export at full volume.

One final step I like to take with all of my audio is  to run it through a different type of “normalizer” on a website auphonic.com. I use this especially for interviews where two speakers are using different microphones or have different speaking volumes. By uploading my exported audio file from GarageBand or Audacity to auphonic.com, I then click “New Production.” I choose various settings here, such as creating a “mono” file from a stereo file, especially for just people talking, and I can click boxes to filter out background noises or hums. Auphonic especially helps me to level out the volume of each speaker to be at the same level. For my podcasts that include live music, this produces a nicely leveled out track for both my speaking and my singing or playing. I also save my files with music as “stereo” files if I’ve used two or more mics to record.

If you’d rather have more control and adjust the volume manually within each track, such as where you notice just a few spots that are too quiet or too loud, you can adjust those spots on  your own using the “Mix” menu, then “Show Automation” in GarageBand.

Once you turn on the “automation,” you can click anywhere on the yellow volume line that now appears on the track to make a “dot.” Click another spot to make another dot. Then select and drag the dot or section where you want to raise or lower the volume. I use this  technique especially for my music when I want to increase or decrease the volume for the best possible effect.

Adding effects

Finally, you can add special effects to your track to give your recordings some extra “punch.” GarageBand and Audacity include several default effects, such as “Male Narrator” or “Female Pop Diva.” You can experiment with these different effects to see how you like them. If the defaults are good, you’re done and you can export your file! If they need some additional tweaking, you can go to the “Track Controls” or “EQ Settings” and adjust the dials to make your voice sound more “present” or “distant,” reduce irritating tones, or bring out the best of your voice. 

When you’re happy with the sound of your entire track, export and save the file!

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 8. How to edit video

Let’s take a look at editing a video.

First, we’ll explore iMovie for Apple devices, which is available for free. Second, we’ll look at DaVinci Resolve, which is a more advanced, professional-grade video editing software that works on both Apple and Windows devices, and is also free.

Either way, the concepts are similar whatever software you use, so I’ll share how I edit videos in DaVinci Resolve.

Editing with iMovie

Let’s start with iMovie. For those of you with Android devices, you can do a quick search for “iMovie alternatives” to find similar apps for Windows or Android devices.

I’ll start by using iMovie on my iPhone. To begin,  I’ll open iMovie on my iPhone. When I open the app, there’s an option to start a new project and select either “Magic Movie” for a quick automatic edit or “Movie” to create one from scratch. I’ll chose “Movie” so I have more control.

Then I open a new project and select a video from my gallery. This is a 40-minute video of my testimony and a song that I shared at a recovery group meeting.

I can trim off the beginning and the end of the video by swiping to the desired points, tapping on the video, and selecting “Split” to cut the unwanted sections. I simply tap on the sections I’ve just cut off and click “Delete” to delete them.

Adding titles

Next, I’ll add a title to the video.

I tap on the video timeline, select the “Title” option (the “T” icon), and choose “Reveal style.”

Then I tap the text box, edit the title to say what I’d like, such as “Eric’s Testimony,” and adjusted its position on the screen by dragging it with my finger.

The title automatically fades in and out, which adds a nice touch to the video.

Adding music and adjusting volume

iMovie allows you to add background music, which can enhance the mood of your video. Here’s how I do it.

I tap the “Gear” icon to add a theme soundtrack and also select fade-in and fade-out effects.

To control the volume, I tap on the video and adjust the volume slider to increase the level of my voice.

Then I can add background music by tapping the “+” button, selecting a track, and adjusting the volume so it doesn’t overpower my voice.

Adding photos and transitions

I can also add photos for additional punch.

I click the “+” button and choose a photo from my library.

iMovie will automatically add a transition between the photo and the video. I can tap on the transition icon (which looks like a bowtie), then I can change to different effects like “Slide” or “Wipe.”

Finalizing and sharing

Once the editing is done, I click “Done” at the top of the screen, and iMovie allows me to rename the project and export the video by tapping on the “Share” icon, either saving the video to my files or sharing it directly via email or social media.

Editing with DaVinci Resolve

For more advanced projects, I use DaVinci Resolve. It’s a powerful, high-end video editing software available for both Apple and Windows devices. While the learning curve is steeper compared to iMovie, it offers incredible precision for professional work.

I’ve used DaVinci Resolve to edit feature-length films like ballets and musicals and puppet operas! But I also use it for simpler projects like YouTube videos.

You can download DaVinci Resolve from blackmagicdesign.com. Click on “Products” and search for DaVinci Resolve and click “Download.”

To edit a video, open Resolve and click “New Project.”

Name your project. For this example, I’ll name it “Eric’s Testimony.”

Click the “Edit” icon at the bottom of the screen, then drag and drop a video file into the “Master Clip”section. When prompted, choose whether to match the project’s frame rate to the frame rate of the video, and your filename will appear. Drag it down to the timeline to begin trimming and cutting the video.

To trim the video, scroll through the timeline using the red slider bar. You can zoom in or out with the plus and minus buttons.

Then use the razor blade tool to cut sections of the video. For instance, if I want to cut out the introduction, I find the location where I start speaking, select the razor blade icon, and click on the video to make a split. Then I right click on the part I want to delete and click my “Delete” key. To delete and also shift the video to the left to close the gap that’s been created at the same time, I click the “Shift” key and the “Delete” key. This is called a “Ripple Delete.”

I can continue cutting out segments of the video using the razor blade tool to trim off the end, and to trim out stumbles or stammers or long silences.

Adding titles and effects

To add a title, I place the cursor where I want the title, such as at the beginning of the video.

Then I click the “Effects” button, click on “Titles,”and choose the title style (for instance, a scrolling title).

I drag the title to the timeline above the video, then edit the text of the title in the “Inspector” panel on the right. I can position the title to the left, right, or center, and adjust its size and scroll speed.

Adjusting audio levels

To adjust the audio track, I simply tap on the segment of the video I want to adjust, hover over the audio bar (below the video bar), and drag the volume line up or down.

If I find my voice is too loud or soft throughout the video, I’ll usually use an external tool like Auphonic at auphonic.com to normalize the audio levels and remove background noise.

Saving the video

To save the video, I export it using the “Deliver” tab (the icon that looks like a rocket ship). I’ll usually choose YouTube for the format, as I like its defaults, then I name the file and select where to save it. 

I click “Add to render queue,” then click “Render All” to finalize the video.

Uploading to YouTube

Once the video is ready, I’ll usually upload it to YouTube, which we looked at in an earlier chapter. I’ll review again here how I upload it. 

First, I go to YouTube Studio by visiting youtube.com, then, if I’m not already signed in, I’ll click “Sign in.”

I can then click the “Create” button at the top right corner, and then select “Upload a Video.” From there, I drag and drop the video I just exported from DaVinci Resolve onto the upload window, give it a title, write a description, and choose how and when I want to share it: publicly, privately, or unlisted.

Watch some examples

DaVinci Resolve has allowed me to create pro-length and quality movies, allowing me to mix camera angles, adjust color quality, add graphics, blur backgrounds—everything necessary for a high-end production. 

If you go to my YouTube channel you can see hundreds of videos I’ve created just like this! They’re organized into music, messages, podcasts, and shows I’ve produced. I’ve taken my movies to local movie theaters and held screenings for my family and friends. It’s so cool to see a movie you’ve created on the big screen! But it’s also just as cool to share a link to it on YouTube and know that viewers all around the world can watch with just a click. If you’d like to see my YouTube channel and all the videos I’ve created, just visit: youtube.com/@ericelder.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 9. How to create business cards

I love creating print products to promote my outreaches, whether books or music or musicals. 

I’ve used Vistaprint to print business cards, bookmarks, postcards, notecards, flyers, banners, and display stands. I love their quality and their price. They’re fast and efficient, and they even have mailing services so I can upload a mailing list and have them print and mail my cards to others.

Let’s look at several types of products and how to create them.

Creating business cards

For example, I have a business card that says, “This is your ticket,” and it’s shaped like an actual ticket. It directs people to my website, ericelder.com, where they can access my books, videos, music, and more. It’s a fun, memorable way to leave my information with people. On the back, it shares additional resources like my flagship website theranch.org, where people can find inspiring faith stories. 

Here’s how I create them.

First, I go to VistaPrint at vistaprint.com and browse their designs or upload my own. 

I’ll choose one of their templates and customize from there. I can choose a paper type, like standard, deluxe, or even plastic, choose the types of corners I’d like, whether rounded or square, and choose the finish, whether matte, glossy, or raised foil. I can also upload my own logo, artwork, or images that align with my branding.

Currently, you can print as few as 100 cards for about $18. The more you order, the lower the cost per card, for example 1,000 cards for less than $50. Depending on the price you pay, you can have your cards printed and shipped within a week.

I can continue filling out the information I want from the template, such as my name, organization, phone number, website, and email address, then adjust the layout as needed. If I want more text or images, I can click onto the template, then change the fonts and colors, then preview the card before finalizing.

I can also add text or graphics to the back of the cards for an extra fee. Some people prefer blank backs so they can write personal notes, while others opt for more information or artwork. Also keep in mind that glossy finishes can add punch, but they can be harder to write on.

First, I go to VistaPrint at vistaprint.com and browse their designs or upload my own. 

I’ll choose one of their templates and customize from there. I can choose a paper type, like standard, deluxe, or even plastic, choose the types of corners I’d like, whether rounded or square, and choose the finish, whether matte, glossy, or raised foil. I can also upload my own logo, artwork, or images that align with my branding.

Currently, you can print as few as 100 cards for about $18. The more you order, the lower the cost per card, for example 1,000 cards for less than $50. Depending on the price you pay, you can have your cards printed and shipped within a week.

I can continue filling out the information I want from the template, such as my name, organization, phone number, website, and email address, then adjust the layout as needed. If I want more text or images, I can click onto the template, then change the fonts and colors, then preview the card before finalizing.

I can also add text or graphics to the back of the cards for an extra fee. Some people prefer blank backs so they can write personal notes, while others opt for more information or artwork. Also keep in mind that glossy finishes can add punch, but they can be harder to write on.

Mock-up cards for books

Now that we’ve looked at one example, the others are variations of the same process, but for different purposes. For instance, I have sometimes created mock-up cards for my books—cards featuring the front and back of my book’s cover.  They’re the same as a business card, but they look like my book! Instead of lugging around cases of my books, I can hand out these mock-up cards with my book’s cover, tagline, and a link where people can buy them. This is a convenient way to share your book and keep the conversation going.

Bookmarks

Another great idea for authors is to create bookmarks featuring their books. One of my writing students created a beautiful bookmark that features her book’s cover on one side and the book’s description on the other. It’s a practical and affordable promotional tool, perfect for slipping into a book when you hand a copy to someone, or for promoting your book when you don’t have a copy. This keeps your book’s cover and title in front of readers as they enjoy your book, plus it’s another marketing tool that they can then use to share about your book with others.

Postcards

I’ve sent out Christmas postcards for years, featuring a picture or two on the front and a brief update on the back. In recent years, I’ve used VistaPrint’s mailing service as well, so I can upload my entire spreadsheet of names and addresses, and VistaPrint does the mailing for me. 

I’ll still have VistaPrint ship a few dozens postcards directly to my house so I can first write a personal note on the back and send them out myself. I’ve really  loved using their mailing list feature so I can reach as many people as possible with these cards. I care about every person I mail my cards to, but sometimes the process of hand printing, addressing, and mailing out my cards doesn’t get done until February or March! This speeds things along and still helps me share updates with those I care about. People tell me they put the cards on their fridge or other places where they remember to pray for us, which I really appreciate!

I recently printed and shipped 185 postcards for an event for $150—less than a dollar each! The current price of a postcard stamp alone is $.56, and a first class letter is $.73. For about $.25 more, I can have all the cards printed and shipped, too, by using a service like this!

Flyers

I’ve also used VistaPrint to create flyers for my ministry, from 8.5”x11” newsletters to 11”x17” double-sided, glossy fold-outs to raise money to make a movie. While I often use email to send out this kind of information and links where people can watch videos, sometimes I like to be able to hand someone a flyer or newsletter so they’ll have it when they get home and be reminded about my project. I’ll also print extras and ask if people would like five or ten to take with them to share with others. It’s a great way to use word-of-mouth to share about your activities. 

QR Codes

VistaPrint also offers free QR codes for anything you’d like to link to. I’ve included these codes on cards and flyers, such as links to my website with all my books listed for sale, called inspiringbooks.com, or links to  my donation pages or video trailers about my current or upcoming movies. 

To generate a QR code, I click on the “QR Code” option, then I enter a URL, such as https://inspiringbooks.com. I can customize the look and feel of the QR code to change corner styles, the size of the dot sizes, or add text to it so people will know where they’re going when they click, such as “Scan the barcode to visit inspiringbooks.com.” 

Once designed, I can add the QR code to any of my printed materials.

Endless possibilities

The list seems endless of possibilities of things you can print.

I’ve printed banners as large as 8’x3’ to display the name of my upcoming musical His Name Was Nicholas on a horse-drawn wagon for a Christmas parade carrying singers from the production. Some of the cast also walked alongside the wagon handing out cards to invite people to the show.

One of the items I really love is a table-top stand featuring the book cover of my Christmas book called St. Nicholas: The Believer. This display rolls up into a little container, then can be unrolled and displayed on my table of books where I offer and sign copies of my books after my shows based on it.

Get creative! Enjoy the process! And share your message in multiple ways. Every touch helps people connect more with you and the message you’re trying to share.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 10. How to set up a live online class

I’ve taught more than a hundred classes online using Zoom. I’ve found it to be a great way to interact with a group on a topic I’m trying to share, wherever the participants may live, anywhere in the world!

I’ve also used other group chat technologies like Skype and Teams, but when Zoom came along, I fell in love with its features and for me, ease of use.

Here’s how to do it.

Create a Zoom account

First, if you don’t have a Zoom account, go to zoom.us to create a free one. Enter your email and other information, and you’re ready to go! Your participants don’t have to set up a zoom account to join your meeting. You simply send them a link to your meeting and they can use the Zoom app to connect with you.

Scheduling a Meeting

Once logged into Zoom, look for the option to “Schedule” a meeting.

Give your meeting a name, choose a date and time, and choose whether your meeting will repeat or take place just once. If you want, you can just press “Save,” and you’re set!

But let’s take a look at some of the options you get when you press “Options.”

Here is where you can have Zoom generate a Meeting ID automatically or use your personal meeting ID. I like to have Zoom generate an ID for me automatically, as I don’t like giving out my personal meeting ID, which is more like my phone number and anyone could join any meeting I’m having if they have my personal ID.

I also set up a passcode to access the meeting. I usually choose a simple passcode related to the meeting, like “writers” or “me.”

I usually uncheck the “Waiting Room” option for most of my meetings so users don’t have to wait to enter my room. They can enter the room even if I’m not there and chat with the other participants beforehand.

For a class setting like I used for this “Let’s Get Technical” class, I’ll turn on the “Video” option for the host (me) and for the participants so their video appears automatically. I also check the box that lets people connect their audio via “Telephone and Computer Audio.”

There’s still one more “Advanced” tab that I check that says “Allow participants to join anytime.” If I have a large group or a special event like a wedding, I’ll choose to “Mute” participants upon their entry so their voices can’t be heard accidentally when they enter the room. I also often check the box that says “Automatically record meeting” so I don’t forget to record it once I get going. I like to record my classes for students who can’t attend live, or to turn the class into an online course, like I’m doing with this one.

For repeating meetings, like a 12-week class, I’ll use the same link every time to make it easier on myself and my students.

When I’m done with these options, I’ll press “Save,” then copy the invitation link and send it out! I press “Close” to go back to the home screen.

When it’s time to start my meeting, I open my Zoom app (or go to zoom.us in my browser), then look for my “Meetings.”

When I find the meeting that I scheduled, I click “Start.”

Interacting

Now comes the fun part!

Once in a meeting, there are multiple ways to participate. I like to start by choosing how I want to view the attendees. I usually select “View,” then “Gallery” if I want to see all faces at once, or if I’m on a smaller device, this option lets me swipe left or right to see more participants that can’t fit on one screen. 

If I want to highlight whoever is speaking, I can choose “View,” then “Speaker,” and Zoom will switch to the current speaker when it detects their voice.

I can share my screen or invite others to share their screen with the group by hovering over the Zoom window and choosing the green “Share” button. I select the default window to share everything on my screen, or I select a particular window or app from those that are open on my device. Then I click the blue “Share” button.

If I haven’t set the option beforehand to record the meeting, I can begin recording by clicking the three dots, the “More” button, and choosing to record the meeting to my computer or to the cloud. I usually record wherever I have the most storage space available.

There’s a chat room on the side if you click the “Chat” button where you can type text or links or other material, or where anyone can have a private conversation with anyone else in the room. Sometimes I use this feature to have people ask questions when they think of them, and I can look over their questions and answer when I get a moment.

Breakout rooms

One feature I especially like for small group discussion is called “Breakout Rooms.” These allow you to split up a larger group into smaller groups for more personal discussions. 

Look for the three dots, the “More” button, and choose “Breakout Rooms.” Then choose how many groups you want based on how many people are in your meeting, such as three groups of four people in each group based on a meeting with twelve people. Zoom can randomly assign people to each group, or you can rearrange people into specific groups on the next screen.

When ready to break out, click “Open All Rooms” and each person will be asked to click “Join” to enter their breakout group. Now the group members can chat on their own within their rooms. 

As the host, you can click “Join” to become part of any group that has been created. You can also “Move” people or yourself from one group to another.

When the time’s up for the breakout groups, click “Close Rooms” and all the participants will be given an option to return to the main meeting, either at the time they click the option, or automatically after 60 seconds.

 I often use this option in the middle of a meeting, after sharing some information with the whole group at the beginning, then breaking into smaller groups, then coming back together again at the end to share what was learned in the small groups.

Go live!

One final option I’d like to highlight is the ability to go live with your Zoom meeting on Facebook or YouTube! Click the three dots, the “More” button, and choose where you’d like to send the live stream.

I use this option for sharing group events, or for interviews when I want others to watch the interview live. For interviews, I set up a Zoom meeting with the person I want to interview, then click “Record on the computer,” then click “More” to go live on Facebook or YouTube. This is a great way to do an interview, save and record it, and share it live, all at the same time!

Saving your recording

If you’ve recorded your meeting, you’ll be able to save it after you end the meeting. When you press “End Meeting,” you’ll see a screen that says it is saving your meeting. Don’t close Zoom until this process is done, which could take a few minutes. When the processing is done, a window will display showing you the file that has been saved. You can use this file to share it with others as is, or use your video editing software to edit, and then later share your recording.

If you’d like a more detailed, fast-paced, and fun video about how to use Zoom, you can watch one I recorded on my YouTube channel called “How to Zoom” at youtube.com/@ericelder.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 11. How to set up a payment system

Setting up payment systems might seem tricky, but there are free ways to do it. Services like PayPal, Venmo, and Square take a percentage of the sale, but the initial setup is free. For example, if you have a PayPal business account, they typically charge around 3.49% per transaction plus a fixed fee—around 50 cents.

If you’re selling goods and services, setting up a business account is essential. With a personal account, you might pay slightly less, and with a nonprofit account, the fees are reduced even further. Personally, I pay about 30 cents plus 2.3% as a nonprofit.

You can set up payment buttons, links, QR codes, or simply provide your email address for people to send money directly to your PayPal account. When using PayPal and Venmo, users can also pay via major credit or debit cards. I set up all my payment buttons on PayPal, then allow users to choose how they want to pay.

How I use PayPal

You can see examples of PayPal buttons on my website at ericelder.com, as I have a Donate tab for donations to my ministry. When they click the PayPal link, they see a prompt that says:

“Thank you for helping us share the good news of Christ. Please type in how much you want to give.”

When someone makes a donation, they also have the option to cover the PayPal fees by adding that fee to their donation. This feature has been beneficial since it’s been added, as many donors choose to cover the fees, which helps especially for larger donations.

Additionally, donors can check a box to make their donation a monthly donation, ensuring a steady stream of support for my ministry. This is just one example of how you can structure payment options for your services or products.

Setting up a PayPal account

If you don’t have a PayPal account yet, it’s straightforward to set one up. Visit PayPal.com and select “Sign Up.” You’ll have the option to create either a personal or business account—both are free, but a business account is recommended for selling products.

If you already have a personal PayPal account, you can easily upgrade it to a business account. Just remember that you can’t link two PayPal accounts to the same bank account.

When setting up your account, you’ll be asked for your banking information, including your routing and account numbers, which can be found on your checks. PayPal will verify your account by making small deposits or withdrawals (under $1), which you will need to confirm.

Creating a payment link

Here are the steps to set up a payment link for people to make a payment. For me, I’m creating donation links rather than sales links, so I navigate to the “Sales” section and select “Donations.” This is where I manage my donation buttons. The current link for this section is at paypal.com/donate/buttons/manage.

I click on “Get a Link” to create a simple fundraising link. I enter my project name and can add a logo or an image related to my cause.

Next I type a message I’d like to display to potential donors, such as “Make a $15 donation, and I’ll send you a paperback of my latest book about recovery.”

I can then specify some example donation amounts, whether a single amount, such as $15, or multiple amounts, such as, $10, $15, $20, or “Other.” This allows donors options if they’d like more of their donation to go to the ministry.

I also tick the boxes to allow the donor to make their donation recurring, to collect the donor’s address for end of year tax statements, and to allow the donor to include a note to me with their donation.

Then I click “Publish” to create a link. I can copy and paste this link into an email or onto a webpage, or there’s an option to use some HTML code to insert a button directly onto your webpage.

I can also have PayPal generate a QR code for my donation link by clicking on “Get a QR code.” PayPal will generate a QR code that you can download to use on your website or printed material. Anyone can scan this QR code with their phone, which will take them directly to the donation page.

Setting up a Venmo account

Venmo is actually owned by PayPal, so creating a Venmo account follows similar steps! Some people prefer one over the other, so I offer both. You can get  started by going to venmo.com and setting up a free account. As with PayPal, Venmo takes a percentage of the payment to run their business.

Setting up a Square account

I use PayPal and Venmo to offer links for people to make donations in emails or on my website, but I use Square to accept donations when I’m selling books or other products in person. 

For example, during a book launch, I’ll use Square to take credit card payments in person, as I can swipe, tap, or type in someone’s credit card information. It’s a nice way to receive payments when people don’t have cash or I don’t have change.

You can sign up for a free Square account at squareup.com

Square offers several options for processing payments, including a free magstripe reader that connects to your device with an adapter. For newer devices without headphone jacks, Square provides Bluetooth readers for a small, one-time fee.

On Square, I can simply type in an amount and receive a payment, or I can set up my products and prices and inventory ahead of an event.

When I do my live shows, I can give access to my Square account to any of my volunteers to receive payments, and they can use their own phone, tablet or laptop to login and take payments.

All of my books and products are pre-defined within Square, as I’ve set them up beforehand with pictures of each item and default prices. This way, my volunteers simply tap the picture of an item someone is buying, and the price pops up. The volunteer can change the quantity or continue adding products for a final total.

When the final total appears on the screen, the person making the payment can simply tap or swipe their credit or debit card and sign the screen. They can then enter their email address for a receipt. If the person has used a Square reader before with that same credit or debit card, an email will be automatically sent to them using their previously stored card information, even if they’ve never done business with you before.

Square also lets you sell products from a web store based on the products and prices you’ve entered. I’ve used this for selling products that I don’t normally sell on Amazon, such a show-specific shirts, sweatshirts, and ornaments. You can see a sample of my Square online store at this link:

https://ericelderministries.square.site/shop/his-name-was-nicholas

Creating subscription plans

Now that we’ve covered payment links in general, I want to show you one more option, and that’s creating a subscription plan on PayPal. 

 I create this option similar to creating a regular button, but I set a start and an end date for recurring payments.

For example, if I offer a monthly class on Zoom, I can create a button with a fixed price of $97 per month for three months. This spreads out the payments for the payor, and I don’t have to send out reminders for people to pay each month.

Three options

I like to offer three options for things like classes because people do really like to have choices and deals!

For instance, if I offer a three-month class, I’ll offer one option at one price for all three months, another option for a payment plan of three payments spread over three months, and an option to pay for just one session over all of those months. And I’ve had people choose each of those three options! It allows people to take classes and pay for them at budgets and timeframes that make sense for them.

I hear from expert marketers that three options also gives people a better feeling about their payment as they have a choice in how and when they pay. It’s not only convenient, but it gives a better payment experience, both practically and perceptively.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Chapter 12. How to set up a coaching calendar

As people find out about your expertise, they’ll want to talk to you. Setting up a coaching calendar can make this process as easy and painless as possible, and make you money!

If you’re like me, you may not like asking people to pay for your expertise. But allowing people to pay to meet with you can make them feel better about taking your time, and make you feel better about giving it. With a coaching calendar, all the transactional steps can be handled for you without your input.

The steps involve setting up your account on a service like Calendly, then creating a publicly available calendar. By adding a payment page to the calendar,  this makes makes it easy for people to pay you without having to personally ask them for money. By letting the technology handle these transactions, you can focus on your expertise, rather than having to be a secretary and a sales person!

Set up Calendly

One product that does this well is called Calendly. Just go to calendly.com and sign up using your name and email address and other info needed.

The free option lets you create one calendar. I pay $120 a year to set up multiple calendars that people can book: one for a 1-hour session, one for a 30-minute session, one for a 15-minute session, and one for a free chat, which I use for catching up with friends or meeting with potential clients without charge.

Define your office hours

Choose the days and times that you’re usually available. You can block out specific days later by using your own calendar on your phone or computer.

Connect your calendar

You can connect your Calendly calendar to your personal calendar, such as iCloud calendar on your phone. This way, whenever you add an event to your personal calendar, your Calendly calendar will block out those dates and times so people cannot book you when you’re already busy.

Add a payment option

Calendly offers a payment option for an extra fee, but there’s a workaround if you want to simply send people directly to your PayPal or Venmo or other payment system.

Remember to enter all your events!

The biggest thing I had to remember when I started was to make sure I entered my events, and blocked off plenty of time before and after those events so I wasn’t too tightly booked.

I’ve learned a rhythm over time so I can be flexible with people wanting to chat with me, and not feel I’m too constricted by their appointments. It’s been a great win-win for me and for those who want to tap into my skills.

An example

On my website and on my business cards, I let people know they can book appointments with me at ericelder.com. On that page, they can click on a link that says, “Book a Time with Eric.” When they click it, currently they’ll see options for different lengths of appointments and prices: a one-hour session for a suggested donation of $65, a 30-minute session for $35, or a 15-minute session for $25.

I’ve priced these sessions to give price breaks for longer bookings, but I’m happy to accommodate shorter sessions depending on their need and their budget. After they select a date and time from my calendar that works for them, they enter their name, email address, and any specifics they want to discuss during our meeting. The confirmation page then guides them to make their payment.

After they book a date and time, both they and I receive an email with a Zoom link for our upcoming meeting. This process eliminates the hassle of scheduling and talking about payments! I love it! I just need to keep my calendar up-to-date, which I do on my phone using my normal calendar app. Calendly has an option to connect my calendar with my public calendar, and people visiting my site only see the days and hours that I’m available (but nothing else on my personal calendar).

I’ve also set up a second calendar for chatting with friends and family, making it easy for them to find a date and time that works for them from my available dates and times. I can use these for personal conversations or sometimes for introductory chats with new clients, but without a payment option.

Setting up your Calendly account

To set up your calendly account, go to calendly.com

You can choose a free account with one calendar or a paid account with more calendars and options. I currently pay about $10 per month, paid annually.

One of the first things I do is to set up my availability. I can choose my normal “office hours,” such as between 9-5 each day, with a few options for evening and weekend sessions for those who can’t do my normal hours. I don’t feel confined to these hours, as I can also block out dates or times either in Calendly, or as I do, in my own calendar on my phone, which is synced with Calendly. But I like to specify some general days and times each week that I’m generally available.

I then customize when I want the meeting to start, such as only at the top of each hour, or every 10 or 20 or 30 minutes throughout the day. This allows people to fit meetings in when they’re able to meet, not just at the top of every hour.

Once I set my availability, I set up my booking page.  This is the page people will see when they want to book a meeting with me. 

For example, I created a link for my normal “Office Hours” that shows people when I’m available. You can see this link at calendly.com/eric-elder.

Then I customize the booking form to ask for specific information from my invitees. The default includes their name and email address, but I also add a question asking, “What topics would you like to discuss?”

To collect payments for your sessions, Calendly offers integrated payment options for a higher paid subscription. I found a bit of a workaround, where I’ve created a PayPal button that links directly to my payment page. Then I include that link on the confirmation page of the Calendly screen with a note that says “Click here to make a Payment.” Although it’s not as polished as the integrated payment solution, it serves my needs!

I then customize what information is included in the confirmation emails, such as a cancellation policy—making it clear that cancellations must be made at least 24 hours in advance to receive a refund.

I also set up email reminders for my invitees, having automatic reminders sent 24 hours before our meeting. This helps to prevent people accidentally missing appointments.

Once I finish setting up a meeting, I “Clone” it to create similar meetings, but with different durations and payments. For instance, I’ve created three different calendars for one-hour, half-hour, and fifteen-minute sessions by simply cloning the original event and adjusting the duration and pricing for the meetings.

Connecting your calendars

Calendly allows you to connect to different calendar systems such as iCloud and Google Calendar. This feature makes it easier for me to keep just one calendar up-to-date on my phone, and I can tell what I’m doing on any day and time, but the public has access  only to my publicly available times.

Connecting your calendar with Calendly will depend on which calendar you’re using already, and there are good tutorials and help screens to walk you through this process. 

The note I will make here is to ensure when booking things on your personal calendar that you want blocked off on your public calendar, put those personal events on the right calendar! I have a calendar on my phone that I share with my family, another that has birthdays, and now one that I share with Calendly. It can take some mental acumen to remember on which calendar I’ve put different things, but after a few weeks, I was quickly on my way to booking sessions properly, and not showing myself as available when I was already booked personally for something else.

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

BONUS: How to create an AI audiobook

I’m adding this chapter at the end because while creating this book, a few companies have released AI (Artificial Intelligence) products to help people create audiobooks using their own or other people’s voices. I’ll talk here about two of those products.

The first is Google Play Books, which allows you to upload your ebook and have it automatically translated into an audiobook for free. Google Play is a platform where you can play games, read books, and access ebooks. While I don’t use it much personally, I do have some of my books available there.

Recently, they’ve been offering the ability to upload your own ebooks and choose from various voices for the narration. They have five American male voices, five American female voices, and options for British, Spanish, and other languages. I’ve uploaded several of my books and found a few voices that I like, both in English and in Spanish. 

You can see a demo of my books by searching for “Eric Elder” at play.google.com or go directly to
play.google.com/store/search?q=ericelder&c=books.

Using Google Play Books

To create an auto-narrated book, you have to first upload an ebook containing your text and making that available for sale. Once you’ve done this, a button will appear to “create an auto-narrated book.”

To start, create a free account at play.google.com/books/publish/autonarrated/

When I log in to my account, I can start by uploading an ebook version of one of my recent books called Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions. 

First I click on “Add a Book” and select the option to sell an ebook. When it asks for a book ID, I enter an ISBN for this book that I already own for this book. If I didn’t have an ID yet, I could let Google create one for me.

I then proceed to fill in the title, subtitle, and description. Next, I enter the publisher name and other relevant information, including the format of the book and the page count.

Now, I’ll select the genre. For this book, I’m choosing Christian Men’s Issues and Christian Self-Help.

Next, I add my name as the author, and I copy and paste my bio from previous books.

I then upload the .EPUB file for my book, which I previously created using Pages on my Mac by choosing File, Export as EPUB. I also upload a cover I’ve prepared for the book according to the requested dimensions.

I set a price and “Publish” the book! It can take a few hours or a day or two for the book to appear as published. Once it’s published, I log in again to my Google Play account, look for the EPUB version of my book in my account, then click “Create an auto-narrated book.” 

The screens are similar to creating the EPUB version, with much of the information already filled in. If you already have the book divided into chapters and chapter titles, that makes this process very easy, as you can see the text of each chapter attached to that chapter title. You can also rename the chapter titles, and edit the text at any point.

I usually edit the first line of the book to specify that this is an audiobook, typing something like: “You’re listening to Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions, written by Eric Elder.”

In the final chapter, I’ll include a line that says, “Thanks for listening to Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions, written by Eric Elder. You’ve reached the end.” 

As I mentioned in my chapter on creating audiobooks, opening and closing lines like these are required by audiobook platforms like Spotify.

Next, I can choose an English speaking voice for the book, such as Matt or Mike. I also have Spanish translations of some of my books, so I choose from the Spanish male voices for those books. This is one of the beauties of auto-narration, as I would not be able to pronounce the Spanish words as well as the Spanish auto-narrators!

Once I’ve made the changes to my text and chosen a voice, I can click “Save” to save my book, then continue through the screens to set a price for my book. I like to set the prices for all my books so I earn at least $5 in royalties per sale. In this case, I’ve chosen $10 as the selling price, as Google keeps a percentage for their service, and I get the remainder.

Once I’ve clicked “Publish,” I just wait a few hours or days for the book to appear on their website. I can also then download a copy of the entire book, separated into different files for each chapter, and upload them for use on my own website or to another distributor like Spotify.

Using ElevenLabs

The second I’d like to show you is from a startup company called ElevenLabs found at elevenlabs.io. The benefit of this option is you can upload your own voice samples and have your books narrated using your own voice!

I used this technique for a short recording I created of my late wife Lana reading Psalm 20 from the Bible. I had wished I had had her record it for me as it was a special one for us, but I didn’t do it while she was alive. So I took a recording of her reading another Psalm, Psalm 119, and I uploaded it to ElevenLabs. At the time, you could use samples from other people’s voices, but now they restrict use for only your own voice, as verified by a text sentence they ask you to read when you register with their service. But at that time, this worked! 

I uploaded her reading of Psalm 119, then typed in the text of Psalm 20. Within 30 seconds, I heard Lana reading Psalm 20 in her own voice! It really was her own voice, just rearranging the sounds to speak a different passage. I loved it so much, I recorded a piano track of the song “My Heart Will Go On” from Titanic to go along with it. It came out beautifully! 

For myself, I wanted to test reading my new book using a recording I had done of another book a few years earlier called Fifty Shades of Grace, written under my pen name Nicholas Deere. I had five hours of myself reading that entire book, which I uploaded to ElevenLabs. They like to have at least three hours to create a good vocal model of your voice. Then I waited a few days for their computers to process my voice and create a new voice model that could read any other text.

I then uploaded an EPUB of my newer book, Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions. I ran the new book through their process with my voice model, and the result was uncannily just like myself!

The settings allow for alternate pronunciations in case words or names are mispronounced, plus a plethora of options to provide different readings to make your voice sound more dynamic or more smooth. I began by testing the settings one paragraph at a time, regenerating the paragraph if I didn’t like a particular sentence or phrase. Once I was pleased with the results I was getting, I pressed the Convert button to do the entire book, which took about five minutes to convert 100,000 characters! I then had the option to download my MP3 files or other formats to keep for my own use or for uploading to platforms that accept AI voices.

Once finished and saved, I uploaded the files to my website to offer as the official audiobook for that newer book.

The cost was about $22 a month for 100,000 characters (that’s characters, including spaces, not words), plus an extra cost for every block of characters over that. My book was just 82,000 characters, so it was doable and cost-effective for that project. But to convert all of my books would cost several thousand dollars. So for now, I’m using the free auto-narrated voices from Google Play Books for the rest of my books.

Note about platforms

Not every audiobook platform allows the use of AI voices, such as Audible from Amazon. This is likely because they are working on their own auto-narration option that they will debut in the future. (Update January, 2026: Amazon now offers some test authors an “auto-narrate” option to transform their ebook into an audiobook automatically. This feature will likely roll out to all users on KDP at some point.)

But for now, several platforms, such as Google Books and Spotify allow and encourage AI narrations. These companies still have certain requirements to meet, such as sound quality and using only auto-narrated products. But that will change soon, I’m sure!

This is still the wild west for AI technology, so have fun experimenting and perhaps even selling your new audiobooks… whether you record them in our own voice or use a voice model of yourself or of someone else! 

For me, the main thing is reaching the world with your message! And this is just one more wonderful way to do that. 

(Here’s a video with a live demo of the steps discussed in this chapter. Consider it the “extended edition” of what you’ve read here!)

Conclusion: The best time to plant a tree

Now you have about a million new ideas and practical ways to reach the world with your message. The question is, which one do you want to try FIRST!

It might seem daunting, but skim back through this book and pick one. Really, just pick one and start there! The only bad choice is to not start anywhere at all.

Do you know when is the best time to plant a tree? Twenty years ago! Do you know when is the second best time to plant a tree? Today!

I have a lot of trees in my yard—about 80. I’ve planted about 70 of them myself; the rest were here before I was born. I heard this advice about planting trees a long time ago, so I began planting a tree or two every year.

Looking at the trees I planted twenty years ago brings me such joy. I didn’t have to plant a tree back then, and it didn’t seem like that big of a deal. But now I’m so glad I did. I’m still enjoying apples from an apple tree I planted with my mom when I was in high school, and my kids made a couple apple pies with the apples from that same tree! My mom’s been gone since 1990, but the tree we planted together is still going strong.

As with many things in life, the seeds we plant today can bring a harvest in the years to come. That’s why I’m encouraging you to pick a place to start with any of these techniques, and start planting!

I’ve also lost many trees over the years, and I never know which one will produce the most fruit, the most shade, or the most fragrance. So I also like to plant several new trees to see which ones will flourish.

I have a friend who people say has the “Midas touch,” meaning everything seems to turn to gold for him like in the story of Midas from mythology. But my friend says, “No, not really, but I do touch a lot of projects!” And some of his projects do turn into gold!

So, plant some trees today! Take one of these ideas for a spin! See what bears fruit, if not right away, maybe someday down the road.

I appreciate you coming on this journey with me.  I’m excited to see where it leads. I’d love to hear how it goes! If you need help or want to chat, you can connect with me anytime at: ericelder.com

You’ve been reading “Let’s Get Technical!” by Eric Elder. This book is also available in PaperbackKindle, and Audible.

This book is part of a series of books on writing, self-publishing, and reaching the world with your book. Use these links to read them all!

Endorsements

A few words from my writing friends…

“Eric’s a great communicator… he makes hard things easy to understand. I deeply trust Eric’s expertise.” Kirk Billiter

“Eric Elder is my ‘go-to-person’ for all things technical. Eric has the ‘know-how.’” Tim Wilkins

“Thanks for helping me with my writing. You give me the confidence to do the hard things.” Crystal Balas

“Eric has been a blessing to our ministry in so many ways…his technical expertise and assistance have meant everything!” Greg Potzer

“Eric has played a crucial role in getting my novel published. He has been the all-important bridge between my unpublished manuscript and my published dream-come-true.” Cammie Quinn

“I learned so much from this course, and I look forward to implementing these new skills (with help from my own notes from the course, and the accompanying book) in the future.” Donna Brooks-Mason

More by Eric!

DEVOTIONALS

  • Two Weeks With God
  • Exodus: Lessons In Freedom
  • Acts: Lessons In Faith
  • Jesus: Lessons In Love
  • Ephesians: Lessons In Grace
  • Nehemiah: Lessons In Rebuilding
  • Romans: Lessons In Renewing Your Mind
  • Psalms: Lessons In Prayer
  • The Top 20 Passages In The Bible
  • Israel: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • Israel For Kids! Lessons From The Holy Land
  • The Inspiring Thoughts Collection
  • Water From My Well
  • 365 Daily Devotions With Eric Elder
  • My Stories Of Faith
  • Living Life With A Capital “L”

HISTORICAL FICTION

  • St. Nicholas: The Believer (with Lana Elder)
  • San Nicolás: El Creyente (Spanish Edition)
  • San Nicola: Il Credente (Italian Edition)

MUSICAL

  • His Name Was Nicholas (with Lana Elder)

PIANO BOOKS

  • Clear My Mind
  • Soothe My Soul
  • My Favorite Classics

JOURNALS

  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Prayer
  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Faith
  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Love

SEXUALITY

  • What God Says About Sex
  • Fifty Shades of Grace (under pen name, Nicholas Deere)
  • Loving God & Loving Gays
  • Cómo amar a Dios y a los gays (Spanish Edition)
  • 15 Tips For A Stronger Marriage
  • Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions

GRIEF

  • Loving Thoughts (with Greg Potzer)
  • Making The Most Of The Darkness

WRITING & PUBLISHING

  • Write With Me!
  • Write With Me! Notebook!!!
  • Let’s Get Technical!

ALBUMS

  • Clear My Mind
  • Soothe My Soul
  • My Favorite Classics (with Eric’s children and sister)
  • His Name Was Nicholas EP (with Matt Ludwig)

STAGE PRODUCTIONS & FILMS

  • One Life (a ballet with Cynthia Dewar and Erin Morton)
  • His Name Was Nicholas (a musical with Lana Elder)
  • San Nicola (a puppet opera with Girolamo Botta)

To learn more or order, visit: www.inspiringbooks.com.

Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions

Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions

Breaking the Power of Unhealthy Attractions by Eric Elder

Highlights from My Recovery Journey
by Eric Elder

Listen here, read below, or click here to download the PDF
Also available in paperback, Kindle, or Audible

Introduction: Grateful

Hi, my name is Eric. I’m a grateful believer in Jesus Christ, and I’m in recovery from unhealthy attractions. By that I mean that I love people, and I love connecting with people. But once in a while, I find my attractions approaching the edge of what I consider to be healthy for me or for them. At that point, I know I need to pull back and do a heart check or sometimes take more drastic measures to turn my unhealthy attractions into healthy actions. 

Praise God, He’s broken the power that those unhealthy attractions have held over me, and I have not acted out on them in over 38 years, ever since I put my faith in Jesus Christ! But I still notice from time to time that my attractions can get closer to the edge than I want them to. My good friend Tim, who encouraged me to come to recovery, tells a story about a man who interviewed for a job as a chauffeur to drive a Rolls Royce. 

The owner of the Rolls pointed to a brick wall nearby and asked each candidate how close they could drive to the wall without scratching the car. The first candidate said, “I could drive within a foot of that wall and not damage your car.” The second said, “I could drive within six inches of that wall and not damage your car.” The third said, “I don’t know how close I could get to that wall. But if I were driving your Rolls, I’d stay as far away from it as I could!” Guess who got the job? 

Even though I have not acted out on my unhealthy attractions in 38 years, I have had to learn how to stay as far away from that wall as I can, while also learning how to maintain solid friendships that meet my legitimate needs, but in legitimate ways. I know this is possible because God has promised us in 1 Corinthians 10:13: “No temptation has overtaken you except what is common to mankind. And God is faithful; He will not let you be tempted beyond what you can bear. But when you are tempted, He will also provide a way out so that you can endure it.” 

I’d like to share with you five highlights, five defining moments, that have helped me since I started coming to recovery.

The Blue Chip 

The first defining moment is symbolized by this BLUE CHIP. In our recovery group, you come forward and take a blue chip when you want to work on something in your life, whether it’s leaving something behind or starting something new. I’ve heard that some of us come to recovery to lose things and others to find them. For me, I have done both.

This blue chip represents losing my pride and walking forward to say, “I need help.” I had just come off one of the greatest highs of my life, having just produced, directed, and performed in a Christmas musical I had written. I had gathered over a hundred others to help me perform the show at the Streator High School Auditorium. This was in December of 2021. 

I felt like I was hitting on all cylinders, using all my creative gifts to create and produce the show and ministering to people along the way as they ministered to me by helping me fulfill a lifelong dream. The show was a success, reaching about 1,500 people over the weekend with the life-changing message of Jesus Christ through a fun and touching Christmas musical. 

Three days later, I got COVID. It wiped me out for the next year of my life. For the first few months, I could hardly move more than an hour a day. I went from one of the most productive times of my life to one of the least. And for my personality type and giftings, being productive is extremely important, not only for my desire to achieve results and accomplish tasks, but also for the feedback I receive and the strokes I get from doing so. 

After the show, I was achieving nothing and accomplishing nothing. I was giving nothing and receiving nothing. My health was deteriorating in other areas as well. My diabetes was already getting out of control going into the show. After getting COVID, it was hard to even take a breath from moment to moment. And my interest in living at all was waning. I knew I needed help, not just physically, but spiritually, emotionally, and relationally. 

One friend suggested a spiritual director. Another suggested a medical help And another suggested a recovery group. I did all three.

I called a friend to see if he’d like to come with me to the recovery group. He was struggling with his own issues, and I felt better about taking someone with me than going alone. A few weeks later, my friend got another job that prevented him from coming. My cover was blown! But I was getting so much out of the meetings that I decided to continue coming.

I didn’t take a blue chip right away. I was so overwhelmed, I didn’t know what I wanted to work on. I started jotting down things that were weighing on me. There were seven! But the one that came to the top of my list was my struggle with unhealthy attractions. I was longing for intimacy and starting to feel out of control. I had lost my wife of 23 years to cancer in 2012. I had lost a couple of potential relationships since then. I had given up on dating or any future relationship as the pain of losing those I loved was too much for me to take. Four weeks after coming to the recovery group, I decided to walk forward and take a blue chip.

It was humbling to walk to the front. Just eight months earlier, I was leading a production that involved many in the room, many who saw me as a producer, director, and pastor. It was embarrassing. I wondered what they would think. I wondered what they thought I was coming forward for. I feared for what they might fill-in-the-blanks with in their own heads. But when I picked up that blue chip, I took it home and wrote the date on it with a Sharpie.  I knew this was a significant date. I knew that admitting I had a problem and getting help was going to be half the battle. And it was. From that day on, when I took this blue chip, I started my upward journey toward healing and recovery.

The 36-Year Coin 

That leads me to my second defining moment, represented by this coin. This is a 36-YEAR COIN to recognize what God had already done in my life in setting me free from acting out on my unhealthy attractions. I heard one night that the chips were not only for one month or two months or one year or 10 years, but went up to 40 years. I asked our leader if she thought it would be healthy for me to take a 36-year coin sometime, as I had never celebrated that accomplishment in that way. 

She said yes, that it was not prideful, but an honest recognition of a milestone in my life worth celebrating. She didn’t have a 36-year coin that night but said she would get one. 

I went to Kentucky that weekend to experience a revival that was breaking out at Asbury University. I had been at that same campus 30 years earlier at a conference dealing with unhealthy attractions. At that conference, during worship, a man sitting next to me reached over, put his hand on my shoulder, and said he had a word from God for me. He asked if it was okay if he shared it. I said yes.

The question on my heart at that conference was if someday I might trip up and fall back into acting out on my unhealthy attractions. I wanted to learn all I could to prevent that from happening. When the man sitting next to me shared his word from God for me, he said, “You will never go back to what you once were. You will never, never, never, never, never go back.” It was the answer to the exact question on my heart.

He continued, “Satan doesn’t need to get you to sin to get you off track from God’s call on your life. Men will give you many opportunities. Don’t take them. Take only the ones God gives you.” In that moment, I knew what he said was true. I knew I would never go back to what I once was. Not in a prideful way, but in a confident way. His words shifted my focus from the fear of falling, to following my calling; making sure I didn’t just do good projects, but God’s projects. Those words freed me to live the life I am living now. 

Now I was back at Asbury, praying about that 36-year coin I might receive. I walked into that same auditorium, and during worship, a man sitting next to me put his hand on my shoulder and said, I have a word from God for you. Is it okay if I share it? I said yes.

I was stunned. I had just told my son who had come with me the same story from 30 years earlier that I just told you. We both knew this was significant. 

The man said, “There are songs on your heart God wants to bring out to share with the world.” He had no idea I had just produced this musical featuring 25 songs I had written and wanted to expand globally. I had actually been in talks already with a couple from Asbury who lead their theater department about helping me finesse my musical for a larger, worldwide audience.

When the man finished speaking, God spoke something else to my heart. He said, “I want to finish the work I began in you 30 years ago.” I knew he was talking about the remnant of my unhealthy attractions, as they were beginning to feel out of control. I knew there was still work to be done. I said, “Yes, Lord. Finish the work. Finish the work. Finish the work.” When I looked up, the man was gone.

The next Monday night, I walked forward and received my 36-year coin that our leader had ordered for me. It was a helpful contrast to the blue chip I had taken a few weeks earlier. Remembering what God had already done in my life gave me the boost I needed to take the next steps He was calling me to take: to finish the work He had begun in me. As David says in Psalm 77:2, 10-11: “When I was in distress, I sought the Lord… Then I thought, ‘To this I will appeal: the years when the Most High stretched out His right hand. I will remember the deeds of the Lord; yes, I will remember Your miracles of long ago.”

The Nickel 

The third defining moment is represented by this NICKEL. I found it on the ground next to my car the night I had just finished doing my “Step Four” Inventory with my sponsor. It was a difficult but healing session as I listed specifics about people and situations where I had been hurt and people and situations where I had hurt others.

At one point in the conversation, I brought up that I was still struggling with some unhealthy attractions. I told my sponsor that even though I had not acted out on them, I had entertained them in my mind. I have never struggled with porn and for now 38 years have never struggled again with acting out. But in my head, in my fantasy life, I sometimes entertained my attractions and how they might play out. 

During this downtime after getting COVID, when everything around me was so bleak, my energy was so low, and my resistance was even lower, I found myself entertaining those fantasies more and more. I was attracted to people who were not mine… and never could be mine. They were either married or the wrong age or the wrong gender. Some were movie stars and some were from long ago, including my late wife. I felt some of this was okay, to have this fantasy life from time to time. It wasn’t really hurting anyone, was it? Especially when recalling intimate memories with my wife. What could be wrong with that? 

But as I talked with my sponsor and brought up each of these situations, I knew they were unhealthy. I told him I no longer wanted to live in a fantasy world. I wanted to  be where my feet were, to live in reality. I wanted to be present in this life that God has given me. And even though I wasn’t doing anything wrong outwardly, I knew that I was treading on shaky ground. As James says in James 1:13-15: “When tempted, no one should say, ‘God is tempting me.’ For God cannot be tempted by evil, nor does he tempt anyone; but each person is tempted when they are dragged away by their own evil desire and enticed. Then, after desire has conceived, it gives birth to sin; and sin, when it is full-grown, gives birth to death.”

James knew that the battleground was in our thought life, not just our outward expression of it. And I knew from Jesus that lust in our hearts for those who are not ours is just as grievous as acting on those lusts.

My sponsor asked if I was ready to pray and lay those fantasies down. It seemed simple enough when he said it. But the implications were huge. My fantasy life was the only place I found that level of intimacy anywhere in my world. Without that, I would have no intimacy at all, certainly not on that level.

I said I could pray with my head, because I knew it was the right thing to do. But I also said, “I don’t know if I can give it up in my heart. The implications are too big.” I said I wanted to do it but didn’t know how. And I didn’t see anything on the other side of giving it up.

I had given up on the idea of marriage and dating five years earlier. A relationship was not on my radar, nor was it my desire. The pain of losing someone I loved was just too great for me to take that risk again.

So giving up my fantasy life meant giving up on any future intimacy at all. Still, I prayed with my sponsor, at least with my head.

I went out to get some dinner before returning to the church that night for Wednesday worship. At dinner, I called a friend who had walked with me through some of these struggles before. I told him my dilemma, and he said he would pray for me. 

When I walked back to my car to head back to the church for worship, I saw this nickel on the ground. I felt God said to pick it up and read what it said. I thought, “I know what it says: ‘In God We Trust.’ Blah, blah, blah, I know I need to trust in You. I want to, but it’s just so hard.”

Again, I felt He said to pick it up and read what it said. So I reached down and picked it up. It was a newer Jefferson nickel, and it had one word on it in large, cursive letters. The word was “Liberty.” God said, “Eric, it’s not what you’re giving up that’s important. It’s what you’re going to get when you do give it up. You’ll get liberty. You’ll get freedom. And you’ll be able to walk forward in the fullness of the life I’ve called you to live.”

That word shifted my focus from what I would lose to what I would gain, even though I didn’t know what was on the other side of that prayer of surrender. 

I went to worship that night and paced back and forth during the first few songs, holding this coin in my hands. I knew if I was going to lay down these fantasies, I would have to lay down each of the specific people I had been entertaining in my mind that were unhealthy. Five names came to mind. I looked at the nickel in my hand, representing five cents. I knew what I had to do.

I walked forward during the last song, tapped the shoulder of my sponsor and another friend who had recently been set free from some related struggles, and I asked if they would pray for me. I said, “I don’t know how I’m going to do it, but I’m going to do it.” I lay down on the floor, face down, with my arms and the nickel out in front of me. I prayed to God to help me do what I couldn’t do on my own. The guys I tapped and many others started praying for me while the worship continued around me.

When I finally stood up, I felt free. I knew I would still have a ways to go to walk it out, but I knew I was headed in the right direction. I had prayed not only with my head, but also with my heart. And for that, I was thankful.

And that leads to the remaining defining moments, represented by these two remaining coins.

The Euro Coin 

One is a gold and silver EURO COIN I got when I was in Italy last spring. I was telling the guys in my recovery small group about my victory of laying down my fantasy life when I asked them when we would get our final chip! I’m a perfectionist and like to set goals and complete them. It frustrated me to think that I would have to keep taking chips for the rest of my life! But I knew this side of heaven, I’d always have things to work on.

That’s when I got this coin in Italy as change for something I bought. I noticed an image of da Vinci’s “Vitruvian Man” engraved on it. Some say this image epitomizes the perfect man. When I saw it, I thought of Jesus, the only true Perfect Man that ever lived. I realized that when God looks at me, He sees Jesus, not me, because I put my faith in Him 38 years ago. Jesus had already forgiven me of my sins and washed me whiter than snow. I thought, “There IS a final chip! And I’ve already received it, all those years ago, when I put my faith in Jesus!” This doesn’t mean there’s not work still to do. But it does mean that He’ll help me finish the work! As Paul says in Philippians 1:6, “He who began a good work in you will carry it on to completion until the day of Christ Jesus.”

The 1-Year Coin 

The fifth defining moment is represented by this 1-YEAR COIN. I had initially planned to go to the recovery group for just a few weeks to check it out with my friend. But after I started seeing the progress in my own life, I decided to keep going. Whenever I felt I could stop going, God would bring up another issue in my life that needed work. So I decided to keep going for at least 1 year. One year later, I was amazed I was still going every week, plus I had started and finished a Step Study on another day every week for several months with a smaller group of guys where some of the best breakthroughs and friendships happened. I realized recovery doesn’t happen in a moment or a day, but is a continual process of bringing our lives before Jesus. I especially loved the verse where Jesus says, in Matthew 6:34: “So don’t be anxious about tomorrow. God will take care of your tomorrow too. Live one day at a time.” It’s hard to live in my past and hard to live in my future. But I can definitely live where my feet are, taking one day at a time. 

I can’t help but shake my head in wonder as I think about all that God has done for me. It’s like Paul said in Ephesians 3:20-22, “Now to Him who is able to do immeasurably more than all we ask or imagine, according to His power that is at work within us, to Him be glory in the church and in Christ Jesus throughout all generations, for ever and ever! Amen.”

I couldn’t have believed ten years ago where I am today. I couldn’t have believed it five years ago. I can still hardly believe it today.

Yet here I am. Thank You, Lord, and thank you to my friends at my recovery group, for walking me through such a huge and meaningful season of my life. Their prayer and care, meals and hugs, and friendship and love just make me want to keep coming back. I’m forever grateful.

Recovery Groups

To find a recovery group near you, try Celebrate Recovery at celebraterecovery.com

Contact the Author

I love hearing from my readers! To contact me, visit ericelder.com For more inspiring books and music, visit InspiringBooks.com

San Nicola: Il Credente

San Nicola: Il Credente

Una nuova storia per Natale Tratta dall’antica storia di San Nicola (Italian Edition of St. Nicholas: The Believer)
di Eric & Lana Elder
Tradotto dall’inglese da Cristina Cusi

Nicola aveva solo una vita da vivere, ma se l’avesse vissuta nel modo giusto, una vita sarebbe stata tutto ciò di cui avrebbe avuto bisogno.

Ascolta qui, leggi qui sotto o clicca qui per scaricare il PDF
Disponibile anche in versione cartacea, Kindle, Audible, spagnolo o inglese

È possibile assistere a questo libro anche in altre tre forme, poiché è stato adattato in un balletto intitolato “One Life: A Christmas Story Ballet” (Una vita: un balletto natalizio), in un musical intitolato “His Name Was Nicholas” (Il suo nome era Nicholas) e in un’opera italiana con marionette intitolata “Saint Nicholas: An Italian Puppet Opera” (San Nicola: un’opera italiana con marionette). Buon divertimento!

Dedica

Questo libro è dedicato a Lana, la mia dolce moglie, che mi ha ispirato e sostenuto affinché potessi raccontarvi questa storia spettacolare.

Lana ha apportato le ultime modifiche al libro una settimana prima di passare a miglior vita, prematuramente, all’età di 48 anni.

Erano suoi il progetto e il sogno di condividere la storia di San Nicola con tante, più persone possibili. Voleva ispirarle a donare la propria vita agli altri, come anche Gesù ha fatto per noi. Questo libro è il primo passo per trasformare quel sogno in realtà.

Per il mondo Lana poteva essere solo una persona, ma per me, lei, era il mondo. Questo libro è dedicato a lei, con amore.

Introduzione

Di Eric Elder

C’è stato un periodo in cui avevo quasi rinunciato a festeggiare il Natale. I nostri figli erano ancora piccoli e non erano presi dall’idea di Babbo Natale e dei regali, dagli alberi di Natale e dalle decorazioni. 

Avevo letto che i Puritani, che giunsero per la prima volta in America, erano così zelanti nella fede da non festeggiare affatto il Natale. Anzi, arrivavano a multare nella loro comunità le attività che non restavano aperte il giorno di Natale. Non volevano avere nulla a che fare con una festa che, secondo loro, aveva radici nel paganesimo. Come neo credente e genitore, l’idea di andare controcorrente rispetto agli eccessi del Natale aveva il suo fascino, almeno per certi aspetti.

Poi, lessi l’articolo di un uomo che semplicemente amava celebrare il Natale. Non riusciva a pensare a un modo migliore di festeggiare la nascita della figura più importante della storia dell’umanità, se non organizzando la più grande delle feste per Lui: riunirsi, banchettare e condividere i regali con il maggior numero possibile di familiari e amici. Quest’uomo era un pastore dalla fede profonda e dalla grande gioia. Per lui la nascita di Cristo era un evento così eccezionale che si rallegrava per ogni aspetto del Natale, compresi tutti i preparativi, le decorazioni e le attività che lo accompagnavano. Amava persino coinvolgere nei festeggiamenti Babbo Natale, la nostra versione moderna dell’antichissimo e realmente esistito San Nicola, un uomo di profonda fede e di grande gioia che adorava e venerava il Bambino nato a Betlemme.

Ma allora perché non celebrare la nascita di Cristo? Perché non farne la più grande festa dell’anno? Perché non renderla la “festa più felice di tutte”?

Mi aveva convinto. Avrei celebrato il Natale e anche i miei figli sarebbero stati molto più felici. 

Ripresi a festeggiare a tutti gli effetti il Natale, e allo stesso tempo, approfondii la vita di San Nicola, quello reale, un uomo che pareva legato quasi irrimediabilmente a questo giorno santo. Scoprii che San Nicola e Babbo Natale erano proprio la stessa persona e che il primo, vissuto nel III e IV secolo dopo la nascita di Gesù, era realmente un seguace devoto di Cristo stesso.

Man mano che io e mia moglie leggevamo sempre di più sull’affascinante storia di Nicola, ci appassionavamo a questo credente che già aveva catturato il cuore e l’immaginazione di credenti e non nel corso dei secoli.

Nonostante i tanti libri e film che cercano di raccontare la “vera” storia di Babbo Natale (e di come le sue renne siano in realtà alimentate da qualsiasi cosa, dallo zabaione alla Coca-Cola), ho scoperto che esistono pochissime storie che si avvicinano a descrivere il vero personaggio di San Nicola e, in particolare, cosa lui pensasse dell’Uomo che ha dato nome al Natale: Gesù Cristo. Fui sorpreso nel constatare che, sebbene tutti i documenti storici attestino la fede di San Nicola in Cristo, nel corso dei secoli siano scomparse testimonianze convincenti a tal proposito.

Così, con l’incoraggiamento e l’aiuto della mia dolce moglie Lana, abbiamo deciso di riportare in vita la storia di San Nicola per voi, con il desiderio di aiutarvi a ritrovare l’essenza del Natale. 

Mentre alcune persone, a ragione, fanno di tutto per eliminare dal giorno più sacro dell’anno qualsiasi cosa che possa alludere alla laicità, mi sembra altrettanto giusto fare di tutto per cercare di riportare Babbo Natale al posto che gli spetta: non come patrono dei centri commerciali, ma come faro di luce che punta su Colui da cui questo giorno santo prende il nome.

È con profonda fede e grande gioia che ti offro questa novella natalizia, una piccola storia. Mi è piaciuto raccontarla e spero ti piacerà ascoltarla. Potrebbe risultare il racconto più umano della storia di San Nicola che tu abbia mai sentito.

Soprattutto, prego Dio di usare questa storia per riaccendere il tuo amore, non solo per questo periodo dell’anno, ma per Colui che rende questa festa così luminosa.

Che Dio ti benedica in questo Natale e sempre!

Nell’amore di Cristo,

Eric Elder

P.S. Ho diviso questo racconto in 7 parti e 40 capitoli per rendere la lettura più facile. Se ti va, puoi leggerne una parte al giorno nei 7 giorni che precedono il Natale. Oppure, se vuoi usare questo libro come devozionale quotidiano, un capitolo al giorno per i 40 prima del Natale, contando il Prologo, l’Epilogo e la Conclusione come capitoli separati. Se inizi il 15 novembre, finirai per la vigilia di Natale!

Prologo

Il mio nome è Demetrio-Demetrio Alexander. Ma questo non è importante. Ciò che è importante è quell’uomo laggiù, sdraiato sul suo letto. E… beh, suppongo che non ci sia modo migliore per descriverlo se non dicendo che è un santo. Non solo per tutto il bene che ha fatto, ma perché era – proprio come tutti i santi – un credente. Credeva che nella vita ci fosse Qualcuno più grande di lui, Qualcuno a guidarlo, ad aiutarlo ogni giorno.

Se lo osservassi da vicino, sdraiato sul letto, ti sembrerebbe morto. E in un certo senso, credo avresti ragione. Ma la verità è che è più vivo ora, di quanto lo fosse mai stato.

Io e i miei amici siamo venuti qui oggi per trascorrere con lui il suo ultimo giorno sulla terra. Solo pochi minuti fa abbiamo assistito al suo passaggio da questa vita all’altra.

Dovrei piangere, lo so. Credimi, l’ho fatto e lo farò di nuovo. Ora però, posso solo essere grato perché ha finalmente raggiunto la sua nuova casa, quella casa che ha sognato per molti anni. La casa in cui può parlare con Dio faccia a faccia, come sto facendo io con te in questo momento.

Eh sì, era davvero un santo. Ma per me, e molti altri, era qualcosa di più. Era… come dire? Un’ispirazione. Un amico. Un maestro. Un aiutante. Un donatore. Come amava dare. Lui dava e dava ancora, fino a quando pareva non avesse più nulla da dare. Ma poi cercava più a fondo e trovava sempre qualcos’altro. «C’è sempre qualcosa da dare», diceva spesso. 

Ha sempre sperato, nel suo piccolo, di poter usare la sua vita per marcare la differenza nel mondo. Voleva soprattutto aiutare le persone. Ma con così tanti bisognosi intorno a lui, che cosa poteva fare?

Era come un uomo su una spiaggia, circondato da stelle marine portate a riva dalla marea. Sapeva che erano destinate a morire se non tornavano in acqua.

Non sapendo come salvarle tutte, fece quello che poteva. Si abbassò, ne raccolse una e la gettò in acqua. Poi si abbassò di nuovo, ne raccolse un’altra e fece lo stesso.

Una volta qualcuno chiese a quell’uomo perché si sforzasse tanto: con così tanto bisogno, come avrebbe potuto cambiare qualcosa? Lui si limitò a gettare un’altra stella marina nell’acqua dicendo: «Per lei qualcosa è cambiato». Poi si chinò nuovamente e ne raccolse un’altra. 

In sostanza: magari per il mondo sei solo una persona, tuttavia per una persona potresti anche essere il mondo.

Il mio amico, per molti versi, era proprio come te e me. Ognuno di noi ha sola una vita da vivere. Ma se la viviamo bene, una vita è più che sufficiente. E se viviamo per Dio, allora, potremmo toccare il mondo intero.

La vita del mio amico cambiò il mondo? Io so già come rispondere perché sono tra quelli che ha raggiunto molti anni fa. Ma che ne dici se ti racconto la sua storia e, alla fine, sarai tu a decidere se la sua vita ha marcato o meno la differenza? E magari, quando avremo finito, capirai che anche la tua vita può fare la differenza.

Ah, a proposito, non ti ho ancora svelato il suo nome, quest’uomo è stato un grande santo, un grande credente nel Dio che lo creò e lo sostenne e con il quale ora vive per sempre. Il suo nome è Nicola e questa è la sua storia.

PARTE 1

Capitolo 1

Nicola viveva in un mondo ideale. O almeno era così che lo vedeva. Come un bambino di nove anni, cresciuto sulla costa settentrionale di quello che lui aveva soprannominato il Grande Mare – per noi il Mediterraneo – Nicola non riusciva a immaginare una vita migliore.

Spesso camminava per le strade con suo padre, facendo finta di dirigersi da qualche parte in particolare. La vera ragione delle sue passeggiate, tuttavia, era il desiderio di trovare un bisognoso, qualcuno a cui servisse un aiuto nella sua vita. Anche un semplice saluto poteva trasformarsi, delle volte, nella scoperta di un bisogno da soddisfare. Nicola e suo padre pregavano e se potevano soddisfare quell’esigenza, trovavano il modo di farlo.

Nicola non aveva idea delle volte in cui suo padre si avvicinava di nascosto a qualcuno e gli metteva nel sacco qualche mela, una o due monete. Per quel che ne sapeva Nicola, nessuno si rendeva conto di ciò che faceva suo padre e a volte sentiva le persone raccontare del miracolo di aver ricevuto quello di cui avevano bisogno, al momento giusto, in modo inaspettato.

Nicola amava passeggiare con suo padre, proprio come amava il tempo trascorso a casa con sua madre. Con lui i suoi genitori dimostravano lo stesso amore e la stessa generosità che manifestavano anche nei confronti di moltissime altre persone.

Sebbene i tempi turbolenti, in cui vivevano erano riusciti ad arricchirsi. In effetti, erano piuttosto abbienti. Tuttavia l’essere ricchi o poveri non sembrava fare alcuna differenza per Nicola. Tutto ciò che sapeva e che gli interessava era che i suoi genitori lo amavano più di chiunque altro al mondo. Era il loro unico figlio e il tempo con loro era semplice e gioioso.

I momenti più intensi arrivavano la notte, quando si raccontavano le storie, che avevano sentito, di un Uomo senza eguali. Un Uomo che aveva vissuto dall’altra parte del Grande Mare, circa duecentottant’anni prima. Il suo nome era Gesù. Nicola era affascinato dalle storie di quest’Uomo, così prezioso agli occhi dei suoi genitori. Gesù gli sembrava umile e straordinario, al contempo. Com’era possibile che una persona incarnasse entrambe queste caratteristiche? Come poteva essere così povero e nascere in una stalla e al tempo stesso così generoso da sfamare cinque mila persone? Com’era riuscito a vivere così pienamente, per poi morire in un modo tanto crudele? Gesù era, per Nicola, un enigma, la persona più affascinante di cui avesse mai sentito parlare. Un giorno, pensava Nicola, sperava di poter far visita a quella terra dall’altra parte del mare – e di camminare dove aveva camminato Gesù.

Nonostante tutto l’amore che Nicola e i suoi genitori condividevano e che li teneva uniti, c’era qualcosa che minacciava di separarli. Era qualcosa che sembrava minacciare molte famiglie del loro Paese in quel periodo, a prescindere dalla ricchezza o dalla povertà, dalla fede o dalla mancanza di fede, dall’amore per gli altri o dalla sua assenza.

Gli amici e i vicini di Nicola la chiamavano “la peste”. I suoi genitori l’avevano menzionata di tanto in tanto, ma solo nelle preghiere. Pregavano per le famiglie colpite dalla peste, chiedendo a Dio di guarire, dove possibile, e di rafforzare la fede dove non lo fosse. Soprattutto, i suoi genitori pregavano affinché Nicola, indipendentemente dalle circostanze, avesse sempre ben chiaro quanto loro lo amavano e quanto Dio lo amasse.

Sebbene Nicola fosse così giovane, aveva vissuto a sufficienza per sapere che nel mondo esistevano vere e proprie minacce. Inoltre, per un certo verso, lui era stato protetto da quelle minacce, grazie all’amore dei genitori e alla loro fede devota in Dio. Come suo padre aveva imparato nel corso degli anni, e gli aveva ricordato molte volte: «In tutte le cose, Nicola, Dio opera per il bene di coloro che lo amano». E il ragazzo gli credette. Fino ad allora, non aveva avuto alcun motivo di dubitare delle parole di suo padre.

Tuttavia era solo questione di qualche mese e la sua fede sarebbe stata messa alla prova, trovandosi a dover decidere da solo, se credere davvero a quelle parole – che Dio operasse in tutte le cose per il bene di coloro che lo amano.

Stasera, però, si fidò delle parole del padre e mentre ascoltava i suoi genitori pregare per lui – e per tutti quelli della sua città – si abbandonò in un sonno profondo.

Capitolo 2

Nicola si svegliò sentendo il cinguettio degli uccelli fuori dalla finestra. L’aria era fresca, lavata dalla foschia mattutina del mare. 

Le notizie però erano meno idilliache. Un amico della sua famiglia aveva contratto la malattia di cui avevano sentito parlare solo da persone di altre città. Il bambino stava per morire.

Il padre di Nicola aveva ricevuto per primo la notizia ed era andato a pregare per lui. Una volta a casa, proprio mentre Nicola si svegliava, il padre diede la notizia alla moglie e al figlio.

«Dobbiamo pregare», disse senza alcun accenno di panico nella voce, ma con un’urgenza inconfondibile che fece scivolare tutti e tre in ginocchio.

Il padre di Nicola iniziò la preghiera: «Padre, Tu conosci i piani che hai per questo bambino. Confidiamo che Tu li porti a termine. Preghiamo per la sua guarigione, poiché amiamo questo bimbo, ma sappiamo che Tu lo ami ancora più di noi. Confidiamo che, nel momento in cui lo affidiamo alle tue mani stamattina, Tu farai in modo che tutte le cose vadano bene, come fai sempre per coloro che ti amano».

Era una preghiera che Nicola aveva sentito recitare da suo padre molte volte in precedenza, in cui chiedeva ciò che fosse meglio per loro in ogni situazione, ma confidando, alla fine, che Dio conoscesse la cosa migliore. Era lo stesso tipo di preghiera che Nicola aveva sentito recitare a Gesù la notte prima di morire: «Padre mio, se non è possibile», pregava, «che questo calice si allontani da me senza che io lo beva sia fatta la tua volontà!».

Nicola non sapeva proprio cosa pensare di quella preghiera. Dio non vuole sempre il meglio per noi? E come, allora, la morte di qualcuno poteva essere una cosa buona? Eppure suo padre recitava quella preghiera così spesso e con tanta sincerità di cuore che Nicola era sicuro fosse la cosa giusta da fare. Ma come poteva Dio rispondere in un modo diverso se non guarendo quel bambino – e comunque farlo per il bene – rimaneva un mistero. 

Dopo che la madre di Nicola aggiunse la sua supplica e lo fece anche Nicola, il padre concluse ringraziando Dio per aver ascoltato e per aver già risposto alle loro preghiere.

Erano ancora in piedi, quando giunse alla loro porta la notizia come risposta diretta alle loro preghiere. Non era, però, quello che avevano sperato. Il bambino era morto. 

La madre di Nicola iniziò a piangere in silenzio, senza trattenere le lacrime. Piangeva al pensiero di quello che provava l’altra madre, sentendo la sua perdita come propria.

Il padre di Nicola le prese la mano e abbracciò il figlio, pronunciando una preghiera silenziosa per la famiglia del ragazzino morto e aggiungendone un’altra per la sua. Poi diede un ultimo abbraccio a entrambi e uscì dalla porta per recarsi a casa dell’altro bambino.

Capitolo 3

La morte del bambino aveva colpito l’intera città. La gente conosceva il ragazzino, naturalmente, ed era triste per la famiglia. 

La sua morte, però, fu ancora più sconfortante perché non si trattava di un evento isolato. La gente era a conoscenza di come la malattia si diffondesse nelle città circostanti, portandosi con sé non solo una o due vite qua e là, ma colpendo famiglie intere, quartieri interi. La morte di quel bambino sembrava indicare che la peste era giunta anche nella loro città.

Nessuno sapeva come fermarla. Tutto ciò che potevano fare era pregare. E si misero a pregare.

Quando la malattia cominciò a diffondersi, i genitori di Nicola si recarono in visita presso le case di coloro che stavano per morire. Sebbene il denaro dei suoi genitori non avesse alcun potere nell’offrire sollievo alle famiglie, le loro preghiere, invece, riuscivano a donare quella pace che nessuna somma di denaro era in grado di dare.

Come sempre, il padre di Nicola pregava che la morte non li toccasse, come era successo con gli israeliti in Egitto, quando la piaga della morte aveva colpito la vita dei primogeniti di ogni famiglia che non era disposta a onorare Dio. Tuttavia quella malattia era diversa. Non faceva distinzione tra credenti e non credenti, primogeniti o ultimi nati, o qualsiasi altro fattore apparente. Quella malattia sembrava non conoscere limiti, sembrava del tutto inarrestabile.

Eppure Nicola osservava il padre pregare con fede, credendo che Dio potesse fermare la peste in qualsiasi momento, in qualsiasi casa, e confidando che Dio avrebbe risolto tutto per il meglio, anche se le loro vite fossero state apparentemente stroncate.

Queste ultime preghiere erano quelle a cui tutti si aggrappavano maggiormente. Più di ogni altra cosa, quelle parole davano loro speranza: speranza che le loro vite non fossero state vissute invano, speranza che le loro morti non passassero inosservate al Dio che li aveva creati.

Le visite che facevano il padre e la madre di Nicola erano di grande aiuto per coloro che stavano affrontando un dolore insostenibile, infatti con il diffondersi della peste sempre meno persone erano disposte a uscire dalle proprie abitazioni e ancora meno erano disposte a fare visita a quelle case raggiunte dalla malattia. Le preghiere del padre di Nicola e le lacrime di sua madre, davano alle famiglie la forza necessaria di affrontare qualsiasi cosa si presentasse.

Nicola osservava meravigliato come i suoi genitori distribuivano i loro doni di misericordia durante il giorno, per poi tornare a casa ogni sera fisicamente spossati, ma spiritualmente rafforzati. Si chiedeva dove trovassero la forza. Ma si domandava anche per quanto tempo ancora la sua famiglia sarebbe rimasta indenne da questa piaga.

Quando Nicola trovò finalmente il coraggio di formulare ad alta voce questa domanda, che sembrava stare a cuore a tutti, il padre rispose semplicemente che avevano due opzioni: vivere nel timore oppure vivere nell’amore, seguendo l’esempio di Colui al quale avevano affidato la loro vita. Scelsero di vivere nell’amore, facendo per gli altri ciò che avrebbero voluto che gli altri facessero per loro.

Così ogni mattina il padre e la madre di Nicola si svegliavano, pregavano e chiedevano al loro Signore cosa volesse che facessero. Poi, mettendo da parte ogni timore, riponevano la loro fiducia in Dio, e trascorrevano la giornata come se fossero al servizio di Cristo stesso.

Sebbene la risposta del padre non rispondesse nell’immediato alla domanda che Nicola aveva nel cuore – quanto tempo sarebbe passato prima che la malattia avesse bussato alla loro porta – sembrava però risolvere un quesito molto più profondo. Rispondeva alla domanda se Dio fosse o meno a conoscenza di tutto ciò che stava accadendo e, in caso affermativo, se gli fosse importato, o non abbastanza, da fare qualcosa al riguardo.

Attraverso il modo in cui Dio guidava ogni giorno i suoi genitori, Nicola si rasserenò comprendendo che Dio era del tutto consapevole di ciò che accadeva nella vita di ogni abitante di Patara e che Lui se ne preoccupava davvero. A Dio importava così tanto, da mandare i genitori di Nicola da coloro che avevano bisogno di ascoltare una Sua parola, di toccare le Sue mani, di un contatto con Dio non solo nel corpo, ma anche nella loro anima.

A Nicola sembrò che la risposta ottenuta fosse più gloriosa di quanto avesse potuto immaginare. La sua preoccupazione di sapere quando la malattia avrebbe potuto bussare alla loro porta si dissipò il momento in cui andò a dormire quella stessa notte. Pregò che Dio usasse le sue mani e le sue parole – le mani e le parole di Nicola – come fossero le Sue, per esprimere l’amore di Dio verso il Suo popolo.

Capitolo 4

Nei giorni a venire, Nicola si trovò a voler aiutare sempre di più suo padre e sua madre nel portare la misericordia di Dio a coloro che li circondavano. 

Lavoravano insieme per portare cibo, conforto e amore a ogni famiglia colpita dalla peste. Alcuni giorni era semplice fermarsi per far sapere a una madre che non era sola. Altri bisognava portare cibo o bevande a un’intera famiglia che si era ammalata. E altri giorni ancora, era necessario preparare un luogo sulle colline che circondavano la città dove deporre con cura i corpi di coloro che avevano ceduto alla malattia e i cui spiriti erano passati da questa, all’altra vita.

Ogni giorno il cuore di Nicola era sempre più consapevole della natura temporale della vita terrena e sempre più in sintonia con la natura eterna della vita invisibile. A Nicola sembrava che il confine tra i due mondi diventasse sempre meno netto. Ciò che un tempo aveva considerato solido e reale, come le rocce e gli alberi, o le mani e i piedi, assunse presto una natura più eterea. E le cose che prima erano più difficili da toccare, come la fede e la speranza, l’amore e la pace, cominciarono a diventare più solide e reali.

Era come se il suo mondo si stesse capovolgendo dentro di lui in una sola volta, non con una torsione straziante, ma come se i suoi occhi fossero stati ricalibrati, e si fossero adattati meglio, vedendo con maggiore chiarezza ciò che succedeva, e riuscendo a concentrarsi più nitidamente su ciò che contava davvero nella vita. Nonostante fosse circondato da morte e malattia, Nicola si sentiva più vivo di quanto si fosse mai sentito prima.

Suo padre cercò di descrivere ciò che Nicola provava usando le parole che aveva pronunciato Gesù, ovvero che chiunque avesse desiderato di salvare la propria vita, l’avrebbe persa e chi avesse perso la sua vita, l’avrebbe invece salvata. Imparando ad amare il prossimo senza essere condizionato dalla paura, e perseverando con amore, Nicola stava iniziando a sperimentare cosa significasse veramente vivere.

Se quel sentimento lo avrebbe sostenuto in ciò che lo aspettava, non lo sapeva. Quel che invece sapeva era che, per il momento, desiderava più di ogni altra cosa vivere ogni giorno al massimo. Voleva svegliarsi la mattina cercando di capire come Dio potesse usarlo, e poi fare tutto ciò che Dio era disposto ad affidargli. Fare qualcosa in meno, avrebbe significato privarsi di vivere la vita che Dio gli aveva affidato e perdere l’opera che Dio intendeva compiere.

Con il passare dei giorni, Nicola comprese ciò che suo padre e sua madre già sapevano: che nessuno conosce quanti giorni gli restano su questa terra. I suoi genitori non si consideravano più esseri umani che sperimentavano una temporanea esperienza spirituale, ma come esseri spirituali che vivevano una temporanea esperienza umana. Con occhi di fede, erano in grado di guardare qualsiasi cosa si presentasse loro davanti, senza la paura che attanagliava molti altri intorno a loro.

Capitolo 5

Il giorno in cui Nicola si svegliò sentendo la madre tossire, fu come se il tempo si fosse fermato. Sebbene tutta la preparazione data dai suoi genitori e dalla sua stessa fede, il pensiero che la malattia avesse varcato la soglia di casa sua lo colse comunque alla sprovvista.

Pensava che, forse, Dio li avrebbe risparmiati per tutta la gentilezza mostrata al prossimo nei mesi precedenti. Ma suo padre lo aveva messo in guardia da questo pensiero, ricordandogli che nonostante il bene che Gesù avesse fatto nella Sua vita – nonostante le guarigioni concesse – sarebbe arrivato comunque il momento in cui anche Lui, in un certo qual modo, avrebbe dovuto affrontare la sofferenza e la morte. Eppure questo non significava che Dio non amasse Gesù, o che non fosse preoccupato per Lui, o che non avesse visto tutto il bene che aveva compiuto. E nemmeno significava che Gesù sarebbe rimasto indifferente a ciò che stava per succedere. Ai suoi discepoli disse persino che il suo cuore era profondamente turbato da ciò che stava per accadere, ma con questo non si sarebbe tirato indietro di fronte a quello che lo attendeva. No, ribadì, era proprio per quello che Egli era venuto. Un amore più grande, disse ai suoi discepoli, non esiste: dare la propria vita per i propri amici. 

La madre di Nicola tossì di nuovo e il tempo ricominciò a muoversi per Nicola, lento. Si alzò in piedi. Quando si avvicinò alla madre, lei esitò. Era combattuta tra il desiderio di fermarlo, in modo che il figlio non si avvicinasse nemmeno di un passo alla malattia che ormai aveva raggiunto il corpo della donna, e il desiderio di alzarsi anche lei e gettargli le braccia al collo, assicurandogli che tutto sarebbe andato bene. Un attimo dopo, però, Nicola rese superflua la sua decisione, perché era già tra le sue braccia, stringendola il più possibile per poi scoppiare entrambi in lacrime. Come Nicola stava imparando, avere fede non voleva dire che non si potesse piangere. Anzi, ci si può fidare di Dio, anche con le lacrime. 

Il padre di Nicola aveva già pianto quella mattina. Era uscito prima dell’alba, questa volta non per visitare le case degli altri, ma per pregare. Per lui, il luogo in cui si recava sempre quando aveva bisogno di stare da solo con Dio era la riva del mare, non lontano da casa loro. Sebbene sapesse di poter pregare ovunque e in qualsiasi momento, era al mare che si sentiva più vicino a Dio. Il suono delle onde che si infrangevano ritmicamente sulla riva, sembrava avere un effetto calmante e ipnotizzante.

Era arrivato giusto in tempo per osservare l’alba alla sua sinistra, guardando la costa del Grande Mare. Quante albe aveva visto da quel punto? E quante altre gliene sarebbero rimaste da vedere? Girò la testa e tossì, lasciando che la domanda rotolasse verso il mare con l’onda successiva che si ritirava. La malattia aveva colpito anche lui.

Non era la prima volta che si chiedeva quanto gli rimanesse ancora da vivere. La differenza, questa volta, era che in passato se lo era sempre chiesto in modo ipotetico. Si recava in quel luogo ogni volta che doveva prendere una decisione importante, una decisione che richiedesse di pensare oltre il breve termine. Veniva qui quando aveva bisogno di guardare all’eternità, considerando la brevità della vita. Qui, in riva al mare, era come se potesse cogliere la fugacità della vita e l’eternità del cielo allo stesso tempo.

Il quotidiano sorgere del sole, la cresta delle onde e il loro infrangersi sulla riva gli ricordavano che Dio aveva ancora il controllo, che il Suo mondo sarebbe andato avanti, con o senza di lui, proprio come era successo quando Dio aveva creato l’acqua e la terra, e sarebbe continuato finché Dio non avesse deciso di porvi fine, per preparare un nuovo cielo e una nuova terra. Rispetto all’eternità, il tempo della terra sembrava incredibilmente breve e quello dell’uomo ancora di più. In quell’arco di vita, così rapido, era consapevole di dover trarre il massimo da ogni giorno, non solo per se stesso o per gli altri, ma soprattutto per il Dio che gli aveva dato la vita. Se Dio, il Creatore di tutte le cose, aveva ritenuto opportuno mettere in lui il soffio di vita, allora fino al suo ultimo giorno ne avrebbe tratto il massimo. 

Tossendo di nuovo, il padre di Nicola comprese che non si trattava di un mero esercizio intellettuale per aiutarlo a prendere una decisione complicata. Stavolta, mentre guardava ancora l’alba e un’altra onda che si avvicinava, si rese conto che quella era la prova finale di tutto ciò che aveva creduto fino a quel momento.

Alcune prove della vita le aveva superate con successo. Altre le aveva fallite quando la paura o i dubbi avevano preso il sopravvento. Ma questa era una prova che sapeva di voler superare più di ogni altra.

Chiuse gli occhi e chiese la forza di affrontare un altro giorno. Lasciò che il sole gli scaldasse il viso, e aprì delicatamente i palmi delle mani per sentire la brezza che si alzava lungo la riva e gli accarezzava il corpo. Aprì gli occhi e guardò ancora una volta il mare.

Poi si voltò e si incamminò verso casa, dove presto avrebbe raggiunto la sua preziosa moglie e il suo amato figlio per un lungo e lacerante abbraccio.

PARTE 2

Capitolo 6

Nicola era solo. Si trovava sulla stessa parte di spiaggia in cui, solo dieci anni prima, il padre si era fermato ad ammirare l’alba e le onde in riva al mare. Suo padre non ebbe più occasioni di guardare il Grande Mare perché alla fine la malattia lo vinse. La madre di Nicola fu la prima a morire, nelle due settimane successive ai primi sintomi della malattia. Il padre, invece, visse altri tre giorni in seguito alla morte della moglie, come per accertarsi che fosse passata da questa, all’altra vita in maniera serena e per assicurarsi che Nicola fosse davvero pronto a muovere i prossimi passi nella sua vita in autonomia.

Il padre di Nicola non era tipo da sottrarsi alle lacrime, ma non voleva nemmeno sprecarle con emozioni sbagliate. «Non piangere perché è finita» aveva detto alla moglie e al figlio. «Sorridi piuttosto, perché è stato bello».

C’era un tempo e un luogo per la rabbia e la delusione, ma quello non era il momento per nessuna delle due. Se i genitori di Nicola avessero avuto la possibilità di rifare tutto da capo, avrebbero scelto di fare esattamente quello che avevano fatto. Non era una follia, dicevano, essere disposti a rischiare la propria vita per il bene degli altri, soprattutto quando non c’erano garanzie di sopravvivere.

Alla fine, la peste si portò via quasi un terzo della popolazione di Patara prima di fare il suo corso. La malattia sembrava avere una mente propria, colpiva sia coloro che cercavano di proteggersi da essa, sia coloro che, come i suoi genitori, si erano avventurati in mezzo ad essa. Dopo la morte di sua madre e di suo padre, Nicola sentì una rinnovata urgenza di riprendere il cammino da dove si erano fermati, visitando malati e confortando le famiglie di coloro che erano morti. 

Poi, quasi all’improvviso, la peste se ne andò. Nicola aveva trascorso la maggior parte delle settimane seguenti a dormire, provando a riprendersi dalle lunghe giornate e dalle notti ancora più lunghe passate a prestare servizio a coloro che erano stati colpiti dalla malattia. Quando era sveglio, trascorreva il suo tempo a elaborare i propri sentimenti ed emozioni alla luce della perdita della sua amata famiglia. Per certi versi, i suoi genitori erano la sua vita e quando gli vennero portati via all’improvviso, non seppe cosa fare senza di loro. Andò a vivere con suo zio, un sacerdote che viveva nel monastero di Patara, fino a quando non fu pronto per avventurarsi da solo nel mondo. Era giunto il momento per Nicola di prendere una decisione. 

A differenza di molti altri diventati orfani a causa della peste, Nicola era stato lasciato con un’eredità considerevole. La domanda non era che cosa avrebbe fatto per guadagnarsi da vivere, ma cosa avrebbe fatto per costruirsi una vita. Attraverso il suo vissuto e, ora, riconoscendo la brevità della vita, Nicola aveva capito perché suo padre si recava così spesso su quella riva a pregare. Ora era arrivato per Nicola il tempo di considerare il proprio futuro alla luce dell’eternità. 

Che cosa devo fare? Dove devo andare? Come trascorrerò il resto dei miei giorni? Le domande avrebbero potuto sopraffarlo, se non fosse stato che il padre lo aveva preparato bene anche per momenti simili. 

Suo papà, che era sempre stato uno studioso delle Scritture e della vita di Cristo, gli aveva detto che Gesù insegnava di non preoccuparci delle difficoltà lungo il cammino, ma solo di quelle di quel giorno. Basta a ciascun giorno il suo affanno, diceva Gesù.

Al pensare a questo, il fardello di Nicola si alleggerì. Non doveva più preoccuparsi di cosa avrebbe fatto per il resto della sua vita. Doveva solo decidere il suo prossimo passo. 

Aveva abbastanza denaro da viaggiare tre volte per l’intero globo in lungo e in largo e gliene sarebbe rimasto ancora per vivere gli anni a venire. Ma non era quello che voleva fare. Non aveva mai avuto il desiderio di vivere in modo sfrenato o sfarzoso, infatti la vita conosciuta fino a quel momento gli dava già enormi soddisfazioni. Ma c’era un posto che aveva sempre voluto vedere di persona.

Mentre guardava il mare, a sud e a ovest, sapeva che da qualche parte là in mezzo si trovava il luogo che più desiderava visitare, una terra che nella sua mente sembrava più preziosa di qualsiasi altra. Era la terra in cui Gesù aveva vissuto, la terra in cui aveva camminato e insegnato, la terra in cui era nato e morto, e la terra che aveva fatto da sfondo a molte delle storie della sua vita e quasi alla totalità delle Scritture. 

Nicola sapeva che nella vita alcune decisioni si potevano prendere solo attraverso il sudore e l’agonia della preghiera, cercando disperatamente di scegliere tra due strade apparentemente buone, ma che si escludono l’un l’altra. Ma questa decisione non rientrava in nessuna di queste. Era una di quelle scelte che, per la natura delle circostanze, era assolutamente semplice da fare. A parte lo zio, c’era poco altro che lo tratteneva a Patara e nulla gli impediva di seguire il desiderio che aveva nel cuore da tanto tempo. 

Era contento che suo padre gli avesse mostrato questo luogo, ed era contento di esserci tornato di nuovo oggi. Sapeva esattamente cosa avrebbe fatto dopo. La decisione era limpida come l’acqua davanti a lui.

Capitolo 7

L’arrivo di Nicola sulle rive lontane del Grande Mare avvenne prima di quanto potesse immaginare. Per molto tempo si era chiesto come sarebbe stato camminare dove aveva camminato Gesù e ora, all’età di 19 anni, era lì, finalmente. 

Trovare un’imbarcazione per arrivarci non era stato un problema, infatti la sua città natale, Patara, era uno degli scali principali per le navi che viaggiavano dall’Egitto a Roma, trasportando persone e merci. Per prenotare il passaggio era sufficiente mostrare di avere il denaro per il viaggio, cosa che Nicola aveva. 

Ma ora che era arrivato, dove sarebbe andato prima? Voleva vedere tutto in una volta sola, ma era impossibile. Uno strattone alla manica gli fornì la risposta. «Sei cristiano?», chiese la vocina.

Nicola abbassò lo sguardo e vide un bambino di non più di dieci anni che lo guardava. Lì vicino, altri due bambini ridacchiavano. Porre questa domanda in modo così diretto, quando era pericoloso in generale farla, dimostrava che il ragazzino era un sincero seguace di Cristo in cerca di un credente, oppure dimostrava che aveva qualcos’altro in mente. Dalle risatine dei suoi amichetti vicini, un maschio e una femmina poco più piccoli di lui, Nicola comprese che probabilmente si trattava della seconda ipotesi.

«Sei cristiano?», chiese ancora il ragazzino. «Ti faccio vedere i luoghi sacri?». 

Ah, ecco, pensò Nicola. Era evidente che nel corso degli anni si erano recati lì molti pellegrini e anche gli abitanti più giovani sapevano che, una volta arrivati, avrebbero avuto bisogno di una guida.

Esaminando di nuovo i tre bambini, Nicola pensò che avrebbero fatto al caso suo. Aveva un cuore fiducioso e, sebbene non fosse così sprovveduto da pensare che i guai non l’avrebbero mai raggiunto, confidava anche che lo stesso Dio che lo aveva condotto qui, gli avrebbe dato l’aiuto di cui aveva bisogno una volta arrivato. Anche se questi bambini lo facevano solo per denaro, a Nicola andava bene così. Soldi ne aveva. Una mappa no. Li avrebbe assunti volentieri per essere le sue mappe viventi attraverso i luoghi sacri.

«Sì, e sì», rispose Nicola. «Sì, sono davvero un cristiano. E se volessi portarmi con te, allora sì, sarei molto interessato a vedere i luoghi sacri. Mi piacerebbe che anche i tuoi amici si unissero a noi. In questo modo, se dovessimo mai incontrare qualche problema, potrebbero difenderci!».

Il bambino rimase a bocca aperta e i suoi amici ridacchiarono di nuovo. Non era affatto la risposta che si aspettava, almeno non così in fretta e non senza una grande opera di sollecitazione da parte sua. I pellegrini di solito erano molto più scettici, scendendo dalle imbarcazioni scacciavano via chiunque si avvicinasse, almeno fino a quando non riacquistavano l’equilibrio e il loro senso dell’orientamento. Tuttavia il ragazzino si riprese subito dallo shock e allungò immediatamente la mano destra davanti a sé, con il palmo alzato e facendo un leggero inchino con la testa. Ciò diede a Nicola la sottile impressione che il ragazzino fosse al suo servizio, e la non tanto sottile impressione che fosse pronto a ricevere qualcosa nel palmo aperto. Nicola, vedendo un’altra occasione di prendere in contropiede il bambino, lo accontentò volentieri.

Delicatamente mise tre delle sue monete più piccole, ma più luccicanti, nel palmo alzato del ragazzino e disse: «Il mio nome è Nicola. E vedo che sei un uomo saggio. Ora, se sei in grado di mantenere la mano aperta anche dopo che ti ho messo le monete, sarai ancora più saggio. Infatti, chi stringe forte il pugno intorno a ciò che ha ricevuto, avrà difficoltà a ricevere di più. Invece colui che apre liberamente la mano al cielo – dando nello stesso modo in cui ha ricevuto e quindi liberamente, scoprirà che suo Padre nei cieli, di solito, non esiterà a dargli di più».

Nicola fece poi un cenno con la mano per far capire al ragazzino di condividere ciò che aveva ricevuto con i suoi amici, che si erano avvicinati all’apparizione delle monete. Il bambino ovviamente era il portavoce di tutti e tre, ma per un attimo esitò sul da farsi. Quell’uomo era così diverso da quelli a cui si era avvicinato prima. Con gli altri, lui cercava sempre, di solito senza successo, di estrarre dalle loro tasche anche una sola moneta, ma qui gliene erano state date tre al primo tentativo! Il fatto che le monete non gli erano state offerte a malincuore, ma con gioia, lo mise in crisi. Non aveva mai sentito un’idea come quella di tenere le mani aperte per dare e ricevere. Il suo istinto sarebbe stato quello di stringere subito il pugno intorno alle monete e tenerlo così, fino a quando non fosse arrivato nel posto più sicuro che poteva trovare, e solo allora ispezionare le monete attentamente, lasciandosi abbagliare dal loro luccichio. Eppure rimase immobile, con la mano ancora tesa e il palmo rivolto verso l’alto. Quasi contro la sua stessa volontà, si ritrovò a voltarsi leggermente e a tendere la mano ai suoi amici.

Approfittando di quel momento gli altri due gli strapparono rapidi ciascuno una moneta dalla mano. In un istante, dopo aver capito che anche loro stavano per stringere i pugni intorno a quel tesoro, aprirono lentamente le dita, guardando il pellegrino appena arrivato con un senso di smarrimento. Erano sconcertati non solo dal fatto che avesse dato loro le monete, ma che fossero ancora lì con i palmi aperti, sorprendendosi di seguire il bizzarro consiglio di quell’uomo.

Al vedere la scena Nicola scoppiò in una graziosa risata. Era deliziato dalla loro reazione, così depositò veloce altre due delle sue monete più piccole in ciascuna delle loro mani, triplicando così il loro stupore. Non era l’ammontare dei doni a stupirli, perché avevano visto mance più cospicue da parte di pellegrini più ricchi, ma fu lo spirito generoso e allegro che accompagnava quella donazione la vera sorpresa.

L’intera vicenda si svolse in meno di un minuto, ma fece in modo che Nicola e i suoi nuovi amici non vedessero l’ora di affrontare il viaggio.

«Ora, è meglio che chiudiate di nuovo il pugno, perché un uomo saggio – o una donna saggia», fece un cenno alla bambina: «si prende cura anche di quello che gli è stato dato, in modo che non gli venga preso o rubato».

Poi, voltandosi in direzione della città disse: «Che ne dite di concedermi un po’ di riposo stanotte e poi, come prima cosa domattina, cominciare a mostrarmi quei luoghi sacri?».

Sebbene questa terra santa contasse numerosi luoghi sacri, nei momenti magici appena trascorsi, ai tre bambini – e allo stesso Nicola – parve di aver appena messo piede nel primo di quei posti.

Capitolo 8

Nicola si svegliò con il sole la mattina seguente. Aveva chiesto ai bambini di raggiungerlo alla locanda poco dopo l’alba. Il suo cuore batteva forte per l’eccitazione della giornata che lo attendeva. In pochi minuti sentì bussare alla porta e le loro inconfondibili risatine. 

Scoprì che i loro nomi erano Demetrio, Samuele e Rut. Erano, in altre parole “trovatelli”, bambini i cui genitori li avevano lasciati a cavarsela da soli fin dalla nascita. Orfani come loro costellavano le strade di tutto l’Impero Romano, figli di persone che assecondavano le loro passioni, ovunque e con chiunque, non curanti delle conseguenze delle loro azioni.

Demetrio avrebbe potuto autocommiserarsi per la sua situazione, ma non lo fece. Si era reso conto già da piccolo che non sarebbe valso a nulla frustrarsi e arrabbiarsi per quelle circostanze. Fu così che divenne un imprenditore.

Cominciò a escogitare il modo di aiutare le persone a fare quello di cui avevano bisogno, soprattutto ciò che non erano in grado o non potevano o non volevano fare da sole. Non veniva spesso ricompensato per i suoi sforzi, ma quando accadeva, ne valeva la pena.

Non lo faceva per motivi religiosi, anche perché non era religioso, ma nemmeno per avidità, infatti non faceva mai nulla che non gli sembrasse giusto esclusivamente per i soldi, come invece spesso fanno le persone avide, il cui interesse è solo il denaro. Credeva semplicemente che se avesse fatto qualcosa che gli altri apprezzavano, e se lo avesse fatto bene e nei giusti tempi, allora in qualche modo avrebbe avuto successo nella vita. Alcune persone, come Demetrio, inciampano nella saggezza divina senza nemmeno rendersene conto.

Samuele e Rut, invece, lo seguivano solo per vedere quale vantaggio avrebbe portato loro. Come le api con il miele, Samuele e Rut furono attratti da Demetrio, come spesso accade quando si trova qualcuno che cerca di fare del bene. Samuele aveva otto anni e, come Demetrio, non era religioso, ma aveva scelto il suo nome dopo aver sentito la storia di un altro bambino di nome Samuele che, giovanissimo, era stato dato via dai genitori per essere allevato da un sacerdote. Samuele, quello di oggi, amava sentir raccontare di ciò che il Samuele di un tempo aveva fatto, anche se l’altro era vissuto più di 1.000 anni prima. Il nuovo Samuele non sapeva se le storie sul vecchio fossero vere, ma al momento di scegliere il suo nome, non gli importò molto. Fu solo nel corso degli ultimi mesi, viaggiando nei luoghi sacri con Demetrio, che iniziò a chiedersi se quelle storie fossero davvero reali. 

Ora, Rut nonostante avesse solo sette anni, era molto acuta. Si ricordava sempre dei nomi delle persone e delle date, cosa era successo, quando e chi aveva fatto cosa e a chi. Le risatine erano il suo marchio di fabbrica, ma per quanto piccola, la sua mente era desiderosa di imparare e ricordava tutto ciò che vedeva e che le veniva insegnato. Le domande le riempivano la mente e, in modo del tutto spontaneo, le uscivano dalla bocca. 

A Demetrio non dispiacevano i suoi piccoli accompagnatori, perché, anche se sarebbe stato molto più facile fare ciò che faceva da solo, conosceva bene i pericoli della strada e si sentiva in dovere di aiutare quei bambini, come un fratello maggiore avrebbe aiutato i suoi fratelli più piccoli. E a essere del tutto onesti, non aveva nessun altro da chiamare famiglia, quindi aver trovato questi due qualche anno prima aveva riempito una parte del suo cuore in un modo che non riusciva a descrivere, ma che, non si sa come, lo faceva sentire meglio. 

Nicola scorse i tre volti raggianti alla sua porta. «Dove andiamo prima?» chiese Demetrio.

«Cominciamo dall’inizio», disse Nicola: «il luogo dove è nato Gesù». E iniziarono così, tre giorni di cammino dalla costa di Ioppe alle colline di Betlemme.

Capitolo 9

Dopo due giorni in cui camminarono e dormirono sulle colline, a Nicola e ai suoi nuovi amici mancava solo mezza giornata prima di raggiungere Betlemme. Per lui, l’eccitazione cresceva ad ogni collina che superavano, mentre si avvicinava sempre di più al luogo sacro che desiderava vedere maggiormente, il luogo in cui era nato Gesù.

«Perché pensi che l’abbia fatto?» chiese Demetrio. «Voglio dire, perché Gesù avrebbe voluto venire qui sulla terra? Se fossi già in cielo, credo che vorrei rimanere lì».

Sebbene Demetrio fosse la guida, non gli dispiaceva fare tutte le domande che poteva, soprattutto quando accompagnava qualcuno come Nicola, cosa che non accadeva molto spesso.

Anche a Nicola non dispiaceva che facesse domande, perché a casa sua aveva fatto la stessa cosa. I suoi genitori appartenevano a una comunità di credenti che era stata fondata circa 250 anni prima dall’apostolo Paolo stesso, quando quest’ultimo aveva visitato la vicina città di Myra durante uno dei suoi viaggi missionari, raccontando di Gesù a tutti coloro che lo ascoltavano. Paolo era vissuto nello stesso periodo di Gesù, anche se si convertì solo dopo la sua morte e risurrezione. Le storie di Paolo erano sempre straordinarie.

Nicola aveva avuto modo di ascoltare tutte le storie che Paolo aveva raccontato mentre si trovava a Myra, poiché erano state scritte e ripetute da altri nel corso degli anni. 

Da bambino, Nicola pensava che tutto ciò che era accaduto 250 anni prima appartenesse alla storia antica. Ma quando cominciò a diventare un po’ più grande, e ora che anche i suoi genitori erano morti, non gli sembrava affatto che fosse passato poi così tanto tempo. Le storie che Nicola ascoltava erano le stesse che suo padre, suo nonno e il suo bisnonno, per sei o sette generazioni, avevano ascoltato, alcune per la prima volta proprio dall’apostolo Paolo in persona. Nicola amava ascoltarle di continuo e poneva molte delle stesse domande che Demetrio gli faceva ora, come per esempio per quale motivo Gesù lasciò il cielo per scendere sulla terra di persona.

«La risposta semplice è perché ci ha amati» disse Nicola. «Ma di per se stessa, probabilmente non risponde alla domanda che ti stai ponendo, perché Dio ci ha sempre amati. Il motivo per cui Gesù è venuto sulla terra è stato, beh, perché ci sono cose che devono essere fatte di persona».

Nicola continuò a spiegare il Vangelo – la buona novella – ai bambini, di come Gesù fosse venuto e avesse pagato con la sua vita il prezzo più alto per tutto il male che abbiamo fatto, creando così un modo per tornare a Dio con un cuore pulito e vivere per sempre con Lui in cielo.

Per tutta la durata della storia, i bambini fissarono Nicola con attenzione. Sebbene fossero stati a Betlemme molte volte in passato e avessero spesso accompagnato le persone alla grotta, che era stata scavata nel pendio della collina, in cui si diceva fosse nato Gesù, non avevano mai immaginato che fosse andata così. Non avevano mai compreso le motivazioni del perché Dio aveva fatto quel che aveva fatto. E nemmeno avevano mai considerato che le storie che avevano ascoltato di Gesù, Dio in forma umana, fossero vere. Come avrebbe potuto esserlo? 

Eppure, la spiegazione di Nicola aveva così tanto senso che si chiesero come mai non l’avessero mai considerata vera prima. In quei momenti finalmente, i loro cuori e le loro menti si aprirono perlomeno alla possibilità che quella storia fosse vera. E quella porta aperta si rivelò per ciascuno di loro un punto di svolta nella loro vita, proprio come lo era stato per Nicola, quando aveva sentito per la prima volta la Verità. Dio li amava davvero e aveva dimostrato questo amore per loro venendo sulla terra per salvarli da un’autodistruzione certa.

Quando Nicola sentì parlare per la prima volta dell’amore del Padre per lui, l’idea gli risultò abbastanza familiare, perché aveva già avuto un buon assaggio di come fosse l’amore di un padre, grazie all’amore del suo. Tuttavia per Demetrio, Samuele e Rut, che non avevano mai avuto un padre, tanto meno uno come quello appena descritto da Nicola, si trattava di una delle descrizioni dell’amore più lontanamente incomprensibili, e al tempo stesso meravigliosamente allettanti, che avessero mai sentito.

Mentre si incamminavano per le colline verso Betlemme, cominciarono a correre avanti con la stessa velocità con cui i loro cuori già correvano, sapendo che presto avrebbero rivisto il luogo in cui Dio, come uomo, aveva toccato per la prima volta la terra meno di 300 anni prima. Avrebbero presto calpestato un terreno che era davvero santo.

Capitolo 10

Era sera quando finalmente arrivarono a destinazione. Demetrio li condusse per la città di Betlemme fino al punto in cui generazioni di pellegrini erano giunte per vedere dove era nato Gesù: una piccola grotta scavata nel fianco della collina dove gli animali avrebbero potuto essere facilmente rinchiusi per evitare che si allontanassero.

Non c’erano cartelli che indicassero il luogo, né monumenti o edifici che specificassero che ci si trovava nel punto in cui il Dio dell’universo era arrivato da bambino. Nell’Impero Romano era ancora pericoloso dichiararsi cristiani, anche se le leggi che lo vietavano venivano applicate solo sporadicamente.

Tuttavia questo non impedì a coloro che seguivano veramente Cristo di continuare a onorare Colui che servivano come loro Re. Nonostante Gesù avesse insegnato che i suoi seguaci dovevano comunque rispettare i governanti terreni, se costretti a scegliere tra adorare Cristo o adorare Cesare, sia i cristiani, sia lo stesso Cesare sapevano chi avrebbero adorato i cristiani. Così l’ostilità proseguiva.

L’unica indicazione che si trattasse di un luogo sacro era il sentiero ben battuto su per la collina che portava all’entrata della grotta. Decine di migliaia di pellegrini si erano già recati in quel luogo negli ultimi 250 anni. Era noto a coloro che vivevano a Betlemme, poiché si trattava dello stesso punto mostrato ai pellegrini da una generazione all’altra, fin dai tempi di Cristo.

Mentre Demetrio guidava gli altri tre lungo la grotta, Nicola scoppiò a ridere, un po’ tra sé e un po’ ad alta voce. Gli altri, allora, si voltarono per vedere cosa lo avesse fatto ridere così all’improvviso. Ne era stupito lui stesso! Eccolo lì, era nell’unico luogo sacro che aveva desiderato vedere più di ogni altra cosa, e stava ridendo.

Nicola disse: «Stavo pensando ai Re Magi che vennero a Betlemme per vedere Gesù. Probabilmente sono saliti proprio su questa collina. Come dovevano apparire regali, in groppa ai loro cammelli e portando in dono l’oro, l’incenso e la mirra. Per un momento mi sono immaginato uno di quei re, in groppa a un cammello. Poi ho calpestato dello sterco di pecora sul ciglio della strada. L’odore mi ha riportato in un baleno alla realtà in cui non sono affatto reale!».

«Già», disse Rut: «ma non ci avevi detto che gli angeli parlarono per primi ai pastori, e che furono loro ad andare a vedere il bambino per primi? Quindi se puzzi un po’ di sterco di pecora forse non ti farà sembrare un re, ma ti farà assomigliare a quelli che Dio ha guidato per primi alla mangiatoia!».

«Ben detto, Rut», disse Nicola. «Hai assolutamente ragione».

Rut sorrise per la sua intuizione, poi il suo sguardo divenne ancora pensieroso. «Ma forse dovremmo comunque portare con noi un regalo, come fecero i magi?». Quel pensiero sembrò prendere il sopravvento su di lei tanto da sembrare realmente preoccupata di non avere nulla da dare al Re. Lui non era più lì per ricevere doni, ovviamente, ma lei era comunque rimasta affascinata dalle storie su Gesù che Nicola aveva raccontato loro lungo il tragitto. Pensò che avrebbe potuto almeno portargli qualcosina in regalo.

«Guardate!» disse, indicando un punto della collina poco distante. Lasciò il sentiero e nel giro di pochi minuti tornò con quattro piccoli e delicati fiori dorati, uno per ciascuno di loro. «A me sembrano proprio d’oro!».

Sorrise da un orecchio all’altro, dando a ciascuno di loro un dono da portare a Gesù. Anche Nicola sorrise. C’è sempre qualcosa da regalare, pensò tra sé e sé. Che sia l’oro di una miniera o l’oro di un fiore, noi portiamo comunque a Dio ciò che è già Suo, no? 

Così, con i loro doni in mano, raggiunsero l’ingresso della grotta e vi entrarono.

Capitolo 11

Nulla avrebbe potuto preparare Nicola alla forte emozione che lo travolse quando entrò nella grotta. 

Per terra, davanti a lui, c’era una mangiatoia di legno improvvisata, una mangiatoia per animali, probabilmente molto simile a quella in cui era stato deposto Gesù la notte della sua nascita. Sembrava che fosse stata collocata lì come per ricordare ciò che era avvenuto. Tuttavia l’effetto che questo ebbe su Nicola fu profondo.

Un attimo prima stava ridendo di se stesso e guardando Rut che raccoglieva fiori sulla collina, l’attimo dopo, nel vedere la mangiatoia, si ritrovò in ginocchio, con un pianto incontrollato al pensiero di quello che si era svolto proprio in quel luogo.

Pensò a tutto ciò che aveva sentito di Gesù, di come avesse guarito i malati, camminato sulle acque e risuscitato i morti. Ripensò alle parole che Gesù aveva pronunciato – parole che risuonavano con il peso dell’autorità di Colui che è l’Autore della vita stessa. Pensò ai suoi genitori che avevano offerto le loro vite per servire quest’Uomo chiamato Gesù, morto per lui come anche per loro, e di come sua madre e suo padre avessero rinunciato alla loro stessa vita per coloro che amavano.

Quei pensieri lo inondarono totalmente, tanto che Nicola non poté fare a meno di singhiozzare con lacrime profonde e sentite. Provenivano dall’interno della sua stessa anima. Da un’altra parte, nel profondo, Nicola si sentiva agitato come non si era mai sentito prima in vita sua. Tutto questo richiedeva una reazione, un’azione. Si trattava di una sensazione così diversa da qualsiasi altra mai provata, eppure era inequivocabilmente chiaro che ci fosse un passo che ora doveva compiere, come se una porta si stesse aprendo davanti a lui e avesse capito di doverla attraversare. Ma in che modo?

Come in risposta alla sua domanda, Nicola si ricordò del fiore dorato che aveva in mano. Sapeva esattamente cosa avrebbe dovuto fare, e desiderava più di ogni altra cosa farlo.

Prese il fiore e lo posò delicatamente a terra davanti alla mangiatoia di legno. Il fiore dorato non era più solamente un fiore. Era il simbolo della sua vita, offerta al servizio del Re.

Nicola rimase in ginocchio lì per diverso tempo arrendendosi a quella sensazione che sapeva, mentre la provava, lo avrebbe cambiato per il resto della vita. Era ignaro di tutto ciò che stava accadendo attorno a lui. L’unica cosa che sapeva era che doveva servire quel Re, quell’Uomo che di sicuro era un Uomo a tutti gli effetti, ma che era anche uno con Dio, l’essenza stessa di Dio. 

Come se si stesse lentamente risvegliando da un sogno, Nicola cominciò a riprendere coscienza di ciò che lo circondava. Notò Demetrio e Samuele alla sua sinistra e Rut alla sua destra, anche loro in ginocchio. Nel vederlo inginocchiarsi, avevano seguito il suo esempio. Ora, il loro sguardo passava da Nicola alla mangiatoia alternativamente.

L’ondata di emozione che aveva travolto Nicola, ora travolgeva anche loro. Non potevano fare a meno di immaginare ciò che Nicola provasse, conoscendo la sua devozione per Gesù e quanto era costato ai suoi genitori seguirlo. Ognuno di loro, personalmente, cominciò a provare dentro di sé cosa fossero quell’amore e devozione. 

Nel vedere Nicola porre i fiori ai piedi della mangiatoia, iniziarono a sentire lo stesso impulso. Se Cristo era così importante per lui, allora anche loro, di certo, volevano seguire Gesù. Nella vita non avevano mai trovato nessuno che li aveva amati come aveva fatto Nicola negli ultimi tre giorni. Eppure, nonostante tutto, erano consapevoli che l’amore che Nicola aveva dimostrato loro non aveva origine solo in lui, ma nel Dio che Nicola serviva. Se questo era l’effetto che Gesù aveva nei suoi servitori, allora anche loro volevano servire Gesù. 

Qualsiasi dubbio sulla fede che Nicola avesse avuto prima di quel giorno era completamente sparito in quegli attimi eterni. Nicola era diventato, veramente un Credente.

E già a partire da quei primi istanti in cui aveva riposto totalmente la sua fede e fiducia in Gesù, aveva ispirato altri a fare lo stesso.

PARTE 3

Capitolo 12

Ancora una volta, Nicola era sulla spiaggia, da solo. Tuttavia, stavolta, si trovava sulle rive della Terra Santa, guardando verso il Grande Mare e verso la sua terra natale.

Nei mesi successivi alla visita a Betlemme, Nicola insieme alla sua giovane guida e alle sue guardie del corpo, aveva cercato tutti i luoghi sacri che avevano a che fare con Gesù. Avevano ripercorso i passi dell’infanzia di Gesù partendo dal villaggio di Nazareth fino alla città di pescatori di Cafarnao, dove Gesù aveva vissuto da adulto.

Avevano guadato il fiume Giordano, dove Gesù era stato battezzato, e avevano nuotato nel mare di Galilea, dove aveva camminato sulle acque e calmato la tempesta.

Avevano visitato il monte dove Gesù aveva parlato del regno dei cieli ed erano rimasti meravigliati dal luogo in cui aveva moltiplicato i cinque pani e i due pesci per sfamare una moltitudine di cinquemila persone. 

Mentre a Betlemme Nicola si riempì di meraviglia e stupore, a Gerusalemme si riempi di consapevolezza per la sua missione e il suo proposito. Camminando per le strade dove Gesù aveva portato la croce per la sua esecuzione, Nicola sentì sulle spalle un peso come se anche lui la stesse portando. Vedendo poi il monte dove Gesù era spirato e la tomba vuota in cui era risorto dalla morte, Nicola sentì svanire quel peso sulle spalle, proprio come anche Gesù doveva essersi sentito uscendo dalla tomba in cui lo avevano deposto.

In quel momento Nicola capì quale sarebbero stati la missione e il proposito della sua vita: presentare agli altri Colui che si sarebbe fatto carico anche dei loro fardelli. Voleva mostrare loro che non dovevano più portare i pesi del peccato, del dolore, della malattia e del bisogno da soli. Voleva mostrare loro che potevano gettare tutte le loro preoccupazioni su Gesù, sapendo che Lui si sarebbe preso cura di loro. «Venite a me, voi tutti che siete affaticati e oppressi», aveva detto Gesù, «e io vi darò riposo». Gesù aveva detto: «e io vi darò riposo».

I racconti che Nicola aveva ascoltato da piccolo non erano più solo immagini imprecise e lontane di quello che poteva essere accaduto. Erano storie che avevano acquisito nuova vita per lui, storie che ora erano tridimensionali e a colori. Non dipendeva dall’aver visto con i propri occhi quei luoghi. Altri prima di lui li avevano visti e alcuni addirittura ci vivevano, ciò nonostante non avevano sperimentato quello che Nicola provava. La differenza in Nicola la faceva il suo vedere questi racconti con occhi di fede, con gli occhi di un Credente, come una persona che ora riusciva a credere davvero a quello che era successo. 

Non appena si concluse il suo viaggio attraverso i luoghi santi, Nicola tornò dove aveva sentito per la prima volta la presenza di Dio in modo intenso: a Betlemme. Comprese allora che, per prepararsi meglio alla sua nuova vocazione, avrebbe dovuto trascorrere più tempo possibile vivendo e imparando in questa terra speciale. Mentre esplorava la città di Betlemme e le zone circostanti, trovò un’altra grotta nei dintorni, nella città di Beit Jala, simile a quella in cui era nato Gesù. Si stabilì lì, nella grotta, con l’intenzione di trascorrere più tempo possibile vivendo e imparando a vivere in quella terra in cui aveva vissuto il suo Salvatore. 

Anche Demetrio, Samuele e Rut avevano dato un nuovo senso e scopo alle loro vite. Per quanto volessero rimanere con Nicola, si sentivano ancora più obbligati a proseguire con il loro importante incarico di guidare sempre più persone a visitare questi luoghi sacri. Non si trattava più solo di guadagnarsi da vivere, adesso erano consapevoli che si trattasse di una vocazione santa, una vocazione per aiutare gli altri a provare ciò che anche loro avevano provato. 

Erano passati quattro anni da quando Nicola era sbarcato per la prima volta su questa lato del Grande Mare. Durante questo periodo, vide spesso i suoi giovani amici portare sempre più pellegrini a vedere ciò che gli avevano mostrato. In quegli anni, osservò ognuno di loro crescere in «altezza e sapienza, in grazia davanti a Dio e agli uomini», proprio come aveva fatto Gesù nella sua giovinezza trascorsa a Nazareth. 

Nicola sarebbe stato molto felice di poter rimanere lì, ma lo stesso Spirito di Dio, che lo aveva attirato a venire, ora lo stava riportando a casa. Sapeva che non poteva prolungare per sempre quest’esperienza santa. C’erano persone che avevano bisogno di lui e una vita che lo aspettava a casa, nella provincia di Licia. Non era sicuro di che cosa la vita avesse in serbo per lui. Dopo la morte dei suoi genitori c’era poco che lo attirasse a casa, ma era semplicemente lo Spirito di Dio a spingerlo verso la fase successiva del viaggio.

Organizzare una nave per il ritorno fu più complesso di quando dovette trovarne una per giungere in quelle terre, infatti il periodo dei calmi mari estivi stava per concludersi per lasciare posto alle prime tempeste autunnali. Tuttavia Nicola era convinto che quello fosse il momento giusto e sapeva che se avesse atteso ulteriormente, avrebbe fatto ritorno a casa solo in primavera – e la spinta dello Spirito era troppo forte per poter ritardare.

Così, quando seppe che da un giorno all’altro sarebbe arrivata una nave, una delle ultime della stagione, diretta da Alessandria a Roma, organizzò rapidamente il viaggio. La nave sarebbe arrivata il mattino seguente e lui non poteva perderla. 

Tramite un negoziante aveva comunicato ai suoi tre amici che sarebbe salpato al mattino. All’imbrunire, però, non aveva ancora ricevuto notizie da parte loro. 

Così rimase lì sulla spiaggia, da solo, a pensare a tutto quello che era accaduto, a come la sua vita era cambiata da quando era giunto in Terra Santa e a tutto ciò che sarebbe cambiato una volta lasciata. Quei pensieri lo riempivano di eccitazione, di attesa e, a essere onesti, anche un po’ di paura.

Capitolo 13

Sebbene la nave di Nicola arrivasse la mattina successiva come da programma, i ragazzi non c’erano.

Più tardi nel pomeriggio, al momento di imbarcarsi, i tre non erano ancora arrivati. Nicola tristemente aveva rinunciato alla possibilità di incontrarli un’ultima volta. S’incamminò verso la nave, quando sentì qualcuno che lo tirava dalla manica. «Sei cristiano?» chiese ancora una volta la voce, ma con maggiore profondità questa volta, perché più grande di circa quattro anni. Era Demetrio, naturalmente. Nicola girò la testa e sfoggiò il più grande dei sorrisi.

«Se sono un cristiano? Senza dubbio!», disse vedendo che tutti e tre gli sorridevano a loro volta. «E voi?», aggiunse, rivolgendosi a tutti e tre.

«Senza dubbio!» risposero i tre quasi all’unisono. Era così che parlavano di fede da quando avevano condiviso l’esperienza a Betlemme, un’esperienza in cui i loro dubbi su Dio erano svaniti.

Mentre Nicola osservava un’ultima volta quei tre volti, si chiese cosa fosse più difficile: lasciare questa terra preziosa o lasciare questi tre giovani che aveva conosciuto lì.

Erano consapevoli del fatto che Dio li avesse chiamati con un proposito e ora credevano che Dio li separasse con un altro scopo, proprio come quando quattro anni prima Nicola fu chiamato per trasferirsi a Betlemme e loro continuarono a guidare i pellegrini di città in città.

Tuttavia anche conoscendo la volontà di Dio restava comunque difficile seguirla. Come Nicola aveva spesso ricordato loro, le lacrime erano uno dei segni d’amore più forti al mondo. Senza lacrime, se si perde qualcosa a cui teniamo, sarebbe difficile capire se quella cosa conta davvero. 

La mancanza di lacrime non sarebbe un problema oggigiorno. Nicola chiese loro ancora una volta di stendere la mano destra. Mentre frugava in tasca per trovare tre delle sue monete più grosse da porre sui loro palmi, si rese conto di non essere abbastanza veloce. In un attimo, tutti e tre i ragazzi gli avevano avvolto le braccia intorno al collo, alla schiena e alla vita, a seconda della loro statura. Si tennero stretti il più a lungo possibile prima che uno dei membri dell’equipaggio della nave facesse segno a Nicola che era giunto il momento di imbarcarsi.

Mentre Nicola dava a ciascuno di loro un ultimo abbraccio, infilò di nascosto una moneta nelle loro tasche. Durante il tempo che avevano trascorso insieme, i doni di Nicola avevano aiutato in modo incommensurabile i bambini. Non erano stati i suoi doni a benedirli tanto, quanto la sua presenza e la sua disponibilità a trascorrere con loro tanto tempo. Infine Nicola volle regalare loro un’ultima benedizione che avrebbero scoperto solo una volta partito, proprio com’era solito fare con le benedizioni migliori che faceva di nascosto.

Nicola non sapeva se ridere o piangere al pensiero di quest’ultimo regalo, così fece entrambe le cose. Sottovoce, inoltre, recitò una preghiera di ringraziamento per la vita di ciascuno di loro, poi li salutò uno per uno. Gli abbracci dei bambini risultarono il perfetto commiato prima di imbarcarsi sulla nave diretta a casa, ignaro del fatto che quegli abbracci e le loro parole gentili sarebbero stati d’aiuto nel superare i giorni bui che lo attendevano.

Capitolo 14

Il vento si alzò mentre la nave di Nicola lasciava la riva. Il capitano sperava di poter iniziare il viaggio prima dell’arrivo della tempesta, navigando per qualche ora lungo la costa fino al porto successivo per trascorrervi la notte. Navigare lungo la costa del Grande Mare prolungava il viaggio, costringendo la nave a fermarsi di città in città lungo il percorso piuttosto che proseguire diretta verso la destinazione. Ma quest’ultima soluzione risultava essere anche la più pericolosa, specie in questa stagione dell’anno. Così che per evitare l’inverno imminente e la tempesta ormai alle porte, cercarono di navigare ogni giorno più tempo possibile. 

Nicola si rese conto che rispettare le scadenze andava oltre la volontà del capitano di onorare gli accordi coi clienti. Si trattava piuttosto di una questione di vita o di morte per le famiglie dell’equipaggio, compresa quella del capitano. Nicola venne a sapere che una carestia aveva colpito tutto l’impero e che ora si era abbattuta anche sulla città natale dell’equipaggio, Roma. Tutto era cominciato nelle campagne perché le piogge scarseggiavano nei dintorni, ora però anche le riserve di Roma stavano cominciando a esaurirsi. I prezzi aumentavano e anche le famiglie che potevano permettersi di pagare il cibo stavano terminando rapidamente le loro risorse per procurarselo.

Il capitano della nave non era uno stolto. Con un’esperienza nella navigazione di quasi 30 anni, sapeva, che fermarsi e non proseguire il viaggio avrebbe comportato il rischio di rimanere bloccati a terra per il resto dell’inverno. Se ciò fosse accaduto, il carico di grano che l’imbarcazione trasportava sarebbe andato distrutto in primavera, così come la famiglia del capitano. Non si poteva fare altrimenti: la nave doveva proseguire.

Secondo Nicola quella era la decisione giusta. Anche lui voleva continuare il viaggio, nonostante a motivarlo non fossero né la famiglia né il carico. Era lo Spirito di Dio stesso. Non sarebbe stato in grado di spiegarlo a nessuno, se non a coloro che già l’avevano sperimentato. Sapeva solo che era categorico che iniziassero a muoversi.

Aveva pensato che avrebbe trascorso ancora un po’ di tempo in Terra Santa, forse, anche tutta la vita. L’aveva considerata casa fin da subito, complice il fatto di averne sentito parlare così di frequente quando era piccolo. Non aveva una famiglia che lo aspettava altrove e, fino a quel momento, essere rimasto lì non gli era affatto dispiaciuto, se non fosse che lo Spirito gli avesse suggerito che era ora di partire.

All’inizio fu come un’inquietudine, come se all’improvviso non fosse più felice di trovarsi lì. Non riusciva a collegare quella sensazione a qualcosa in particolare che non gli piacesse di quel luogo, ma solo al fatto che era tempo per lui di andare. Ma dove? Dio dove voleva che andasse? Aveva un altro posto da mostrargli? Un’altra parte del Paese in cui avrebbe dovuto vivere? O forse, un altro Paese che avrebbe dovuto visitare? 

Man mano che la sua inquietudine cresceva, il suo cuore e la sua mente cominciarono a esplorare le possibilità in maniera più dettagliata. In passato aveva scoperto che il modo migliore di ascoltare Dio era disfarsi della propria volontà e abbracciare pienamente quella di Dio, qualunque essa fosse. Sebbene lasciarsi andare fosse difficile per lui, era consapevole che Dio lo avrebbe guidato sempre nei modi migliori. Così, abbandonando la propria volontà, Nicola iniziò finalmente a vedere quella di Dio in maniera più nitida anche in questa situazione. Per quanto sentisse che la Terra Santa era la sua nuova casa, non lo era davvero. Percepiva chiaramente che era giunto il momento di tornare nella regione in cui era nato, nella provincia di Licia, sulla costa settentrionale del Grande Mare. C’era qualcosa, ne era sicuro, che Dio voleva che facesse lì; qualcosa per cui era stato chiamato ed equipaggiato e, di fatto, era questo il motivo per cui Dio lo aveva scelto per crescere lì durante la sua infanzia. Proprio come si sentì sollevato nel recarsi in Terra Santa, ora Nicola si sentiva sollevato nel ritornare a casa.

Diretto a casa. Era lì che doveva andare. La spinta interiore che provava era talmente forte, se non più forte, della spinta che ora motivava il capitano e il suo equipaggio a riportare il carico, sano e salvo, alle loro amate famiglie. Con o senza la tormenta, dovevano tornare a casa.

Capitolo 15

La nave di Nicola non riusciva a raggiungere il porto successivo della costa. Infatti, proseguendo la navigazione nella speranza di anticipare la tempesta finirono per trovarcisi in mezzo. La burrasca, già poco dopo la partenza, si abbatté sulla nave e la spinse sempre più lontano dalla costa, così lontano che tre ore dopo l’imbarcazione era prigioniera delle onde.

L’equipaggio aveva già ammainato le vele, bandendo i tentativi di forzare il timone nella direzione opposta. Speravano che assecondando la tempesta piuttosto che contrastandola, sarebbero riusciti a mantenere l’imbarcazione integra. Ma anche questo piano, pareva solo spingerli nelle acque più profonde e pericolose, avvicinandoli sempre di più all’occhio del ciclone. Dopo altre tre ore, il mal di mare che aveva inizialmente sopraffatto l’equipaggio non era più una preoccupazione, poiché la paura della morte stessa stava ormai prendendo il sopravvento su tutti, tranne che sui più valorosi a bordo. 

Sebbene Nicola avesse già viaggiato in nave, non si considerava uno dei più valorosi. Non aveva mai visto onde come quelle colpire l’imbarcazione e non era l’unico. Mentre la tempesta si faceva sempre più impetuosa, gli uomini presenti cominciarono a descriverla come la peggiore che avessero mai visto. 

La mattina dopo, quando la tempesta non si era ancora placata, e poi la mattina successiva e quella dopo ancora, mentre le onde continuavano a imperversare, tutti si chiesero perché avessero avuto tanta fretta di partire cercando di battere sul tempo la tempesta. Ora speravano e pregavano solo che Dio permettesse loro di vivere un altro giorno, un’altra ora. Onda dopo onda, Nicola pregava incessantemente chiedendo di riuscire a superarne anche solo un’altra.

I suoi pensieri e le sue preghiere si riempivano di curiosità circa le esperienze vissute dall’apostolo Paolo, quel seguace di Cristo, che aveva navigato in lungo e in largo il Grande Mare molte volte su navi come quella in cui si trovava lui. Fu nell’ultimo suo viaggio verso Roma che Paolo sbarcò a Myra, a pochi chilometri dalla città natale di Nicola. Poi, nel proseguire da Myra verso Roma, Paolo affrontò la tempesta più violenta che avesse mai affrontato: una furia tremenda che durò più di quattordici giorni e che terminò con l’incagliamento della nave su un banco di sabbia, proprio al largo dell’isola di Malta.

Nicola pregò affinché la loro battaglia con il vento non durasse quattordici giorni. Non sapeva nemmeno se sarebbero riusciti ad arrivare al giorno dopo. Cercò di pensare se Paolo avesse fatto qualcosa per aiutare se stesso e i duecentosettantasei uomini che erano con lui a rimanere in vita, anche se la loro nave e il suo carico fossero andati distrutti. Ma per quanto si sforzasse, tutto ciò che riusciva a ricordare era che un angelo apparve a Paolo la notte prima che si arenassero. L’angelo gli di farsi coraggio: anche se la nave sarebbe andata distrutta, nessuno degli uomini a bordo sarebbe morto. Quando Paolo raccontò agli uomini di questa visita angelica, tutti si fecero coraggio, perché lui era convinto che sarebbe accaduto proprio come aveva detto l’angelo. E così fu. 

Ma a Nicola, nessun angelo era apparso. Non era stato predetto alcun risultato dal cielo e non erano arrivate istruzioni su cosa avrebbero dovuto o non avrebbero dovuto fare. L’unica cosa che sentiva era quella spinta interiore che aveva sentito prima di partire: dovevano tornare a casa il più presto possibile. 

Non sapendo cos’altro fare, Nicola si ricordò una frase di suo padre: «Gli ordini permanenti sono buoni ordini». Se un soldato non sapeva cosa fare, anche se la battaglia intorno a lui sembrava cambiare direzione, se l’ufficiale in comando non aveva dato altri ordini, allora il soldato doveva seguire gli ordini più recenti. Gli ordini permanenti sono buoni ordini.

Fu questa perla di saggezza del padre, più di ogni altro pensiero, a guidare Nicola e a dargli il coraggio di fare quello che fece in seguito.

Capitolo 16

Quando la burrasca sembrò arrivare al punto di travolgerli, Nicola cominciò a pensare ai bambini che aveva appena lasciato. Quel pensiero non lo riempì di tristezza, ma di speranza. Cominciò a prendere coraggio dalle storie che avevano imparato su come Gesù aveva calmato la tempesta, su come Mosè aveva diviso il Mar Rosso e su come Giosuè aveva arrestato il corso del fiume Giordano. Nicola e i bambini avevano cercato spesso di immaginare cosa volesse dire poter esercitare un tale controllo sugli elementi. A volte Nicola aveva persino provato a fare alcune di quelle cose, insieme a Demetrio, Samuele e Rut. Quando pioveva, alzavano le mani e pregavano per cercare di fermare la pioggia. Ciò nonostante la pioggia continuava a cadere sulle loro teste. Quando raggiunsero il mare di Galilea, provarono a camminare sulle acque, proprio come fece Gesù – e anche Pietro, anche se solo per pochi istanti. Tuttavia Nicola e i bambini si erano convinti di non possedere la fede o la forza o qualsiasi cosa necessaria per compiere quelle cose.

Quando un’altra onda si infranse sulla fiancata della nave, Nicola si rese conto che c’era un filo conduttore in tutte queste storie. Forse, dopo tutto, il problema non era la loro fede, ma il momento divino. Ad ogni modo, dalle storie che ricordava, Dio non permetteva quei miracoli per capriccio, solo per il divertimento delle persone che cercavano di compierli. Dio li permetteva perché Lui aveva luoghi da raggiungere, persone da vedere e vite da salvare. In ogni situazione c’era un’urgenza che richiedeva alle persone di compiere non solo ciò che era nel loro cuore, ma anche ciò che era nel cuore di Dio.

Sembrava che i miracoli si verificassero non tanto a causa dei loro tentativi di riorganizzare il mondo di Dio, ma nei tentativi di Dio di riorganizzare i loro mondi. Secondo Nicola doveva essere una combinazione tra le loro preghiere di fede e la divina volontà di Dio, a far scoccare la scintilla tra il cielo e la terra, accesa dalle due volontà che collaboravano, sprigionando un potere in grado di spostare montagne.

Quando Gesù dovette attraversare il lago, ma i suoi discepoli erano già in barca, per fede riuscì a innescare il processo che gli permise di camminare sulle acque e, una volta raggiunti, di calmare così la tempesta che minacciava le loro vite. «Gli ordini permanenti sono buoni ordini», ricordava Nicola e credeva con tutto il cuore che se Dio non avesse cambiato gli ordini, allora in qualche modo, dovevano fare tutto il possibile per raggiungere l’altra sponda del mare. Non bastava, però, che Dio lo volesse. Dio cercava qualcuno disposto, qui sulla terra, a desiderarlo anche lui, completando così il collegamento divino e sprigionando il miracolo. Come Mosè quando sollevò il suo bastone in aria o i sacerdoti di Giosuè quando mossero i primi passi nel fiume Giordano, Dio aveva bisogno di qualcuno che d’accordo con Lui nella fede, desiderasse che ciò che Egli aveva voluto accadesse nei cieli, accadesse anche qui sulla terra. Dio aveva già detto a Nicola cosa doveva accadere. Ora spettava a Nicola completare la connessione divina. «Uomini!» urlò Nicola per attirare l’attenzione dell’equipaggio. «Il Dio che io servo e che ha dato la vita per ciascuno di noi, vuole che raggiungiamo la nostra destinazione ancor più di quanto noi lo desideriamo. Dobbiamo accettare per fede, qui e ora, che Dio non solo può farlo, ma che vuole che lo facciamo. Se amate Dio, o anche solo se pensate di voler amare Dio, voglio che preghiate insieme a me, affinché possiamo davvero raggiungere la nostra meta senza che nulla ostacoli il nostro viaggio!». 

Non appena Nicola pronunciò queste parole, accadde l’impensabile: non solo il vento non si fermò, ma acquistò velocità! Nicola vacillò per un attimo, come se sentisse di aver commesso una sorta di errore cosmico, una sorta di errore di calcolo su come Dio operava e su ciò che Dio voleva che facesse. Poi, però notò che, sebbene il vento fosse aumentato di velocità, aveva anche cambiato direzione, in un modo impercettibile, ma così netto e chiaro tanto che Dio aveva attirato l’attenzione di tutti gli uomini a bordo. Ora, invece di essere sballottati dalle onde, stavano navigando direttamente attraverso di esse, come se fosse stato scavato un canale nelle onde stesse. La nave fu guidata in questo modo non solo per i momenti successivi, ma addirittura per le ore successive.

Mentre la velocità e la direzione della nave continuavano a seguire una rotta costante e incredibilmente veloce, il capitano si rivolse a Nicola. Non aveva mai visto nulla di simile in tutta la sua vita. Era come se una mano invisibile tenesse il timone della nave, fermo e dritto, anche se le corde del timone non avevano nessuno alla guida, perché erano state abbandonate da quando era cominciata la burrasca.

Anche Nicola sapeva, sebbene non fosse esperto come il capitano, che questo fenomeno in mare aperto non era normale. Aveva sentito qualcosa di soprannaturale prendere il controllo nel momento in cui si era alzato a parlare con l’equipaggio, e ancora lo sentiva mentre continuavano il viaggio.

Cosa ci fosse in serbo per loro non lo sapeva. Tuttavia era certo che Colui che li aveva condotti fin lì non avrebbe tolto la mano da quel timone finché la sua missione non fosse del tutto compiuta.

Capitolo 17

La burrasca che aveva minacciato le loro vite si rivelò averne salvate molte di più. Invece di far loro costeggiare il litorale, li aveva spinti ad attraversare il mare, a percorrere un sentiero pericolosissimo che non si sarebbero mai azzardati a prendere in quel periodo dell’anno.

Quando, la mattina del quinto giorno, avvistarono terra, la riconobbero chiaramente. Era la città di Myra, a poche miglia di distanza dalla città natale di Nicola; la stessa città dove l’apostolo Paolo aveva cambiato nave nel suo celebre viaggio verso Roma.

Erano così vicini a casa che Nicola sapeva in cuor suo che stava per sbarcare nel punto esatto in cui Dio voleva che fosse. Dio, senza dubbio, gli aveva risparmiato la vita per uno scopo, uno scopo che, ora, avrebbe dato inizio al prossimo capitolo della sua vita.

Mentre si avvicinavano alla spiaggia, notarono che la tempesta che infuriava in alto mare, era stata a malapena avvertita sulla terraferma. 

Le piogge che avevano inondato la nave negli ultimi giorni, e che avrebbero dovuto placare la sete della terra, non bagnavano quell’area da diversi mesi. La siccità che il capitano e i marinai gli avevano detto essere giunta a Roma, si era già abbattuta nella Licia da due anni e mezzo. L’effetto globale fu che il raccolto destinato a costituire le riserve per l’inverno successivo e le sementi per l’intero anno a venire erano già esauriti. Se gli abitanti della Licia non avessero avuto grano ora, molti non sarebbero sopravvissuti all’inverno e altri sarebbero morti la primavera successiva perché non avrebbero avuto le sementi per piantare altro raccolto. Questa nave era una delle ultime che avevano lasciato le fertili valli dell’Egitto prima dell’inverno e il suo arrivo, in questo momento, era un miracolo agli occhi della gente. Certamente era una risposta alle loro preghiere.

Ma la risposta non era così chiara al capitano. Il custode dei magazzini imperiali di Roma gli aveva imposto di non far mancare nemmeno un chicco di grano all’arrivo della nave a Roma. La nave era stata pesata ad Alessandria prima di lasciare l’Egitto e sarebbe stata pesata di nuovo una volta a Roma – e il capitano sarebbe stato ritenuto personalmente responsabile di qualsiasi discrepanza. La carestia aveva messo sempre più sotto pressione l’imperatore che si preoccupava di portare qualsiasi tipo di sollievo al popolo. Non solo, ma anche le famiglie del capitano e quelle dell’equipaggio erano in attesa dell’arrivo di questo cibo. Il lavoro dei marinai e la vita delle loro famiglie dipendevano dalla consegna sicura di ogni singolo chicco di grano a bordo. Tuttavia, senza la fede e l’incoraggiamento di Nicola, il capitano sapeva che la nave e il suo carico sarebbero andati persi in mare, insieme a chi era a bordo.

Sebbene a Nicola fosse chiaro che Dio lo aveva riportato in patria, non era altrettanto sicuro di cosa fare del grano. Nonostante sembrasse opportuno dare almeno una parte del grano alla gente di Myra, Nicola cercò comunque di vedere la situazione dal punto di vista di Dio.

Questa città, o qualsiasi altra città in tutto l’impero, aveva forse più bisogno di Roma di quel grano, che aveva comprato e pagato per averlo? Ma a Nicola sembrò anche che la nave fosse stata portata appositamente in quella specifica città, seguendo una rotta diretta e precisa tra le enormi onde. 

L’intero dibattito su cosa avrebbero dovuto fare si svolse nel giro di pochi minuti dal loro arrivo a terra. Nicola e il capitano ebbero poco tempo per pensare a cosa avrebbero fatto, dato che la gente della città era accorsa a vedere la nave, stupita dal modo in cui Dio l’aveva condotta nel loro porto affamato. Si riuniva in numero sempre maggiore per dare il benvenuto alla barca, ringraziando e, allo stesso tempo, lodando Dio. 

Sia Nicola sia il capitano erano consapevoli che solo Dio avrebbe potuto rispondere al loro dilemma. I due, insieme al resto dell’equipaggio, avevano già deciso la sera prima – mentre venivano condotti in maniera continua e rapida sull’acqua – che la prima cosa che avrebbero fatto una volta arrivati a riva sarebbe stata quella di andare nella chiesa più vicina e rendere grazie a Dio per la sua liberazione. Quando vide dove erano sbarcati, Nicola sapeva esattamente dove trovare quella chiesa. La sua famiglia l’aveva visitata di tanto in tanto quando viaggiava tra le città gemelle di Patara e Myra. Dopo aver detto all’equipaggio che il loro primo dovere era quello di rendere grazie a Dio per averli condotti in quel luogo sicuro, Nicola, il capitano e i marinai si diressero alla chiesa di Myra.

Mentre attraversavano la città e salivano sulle colline che cullavano la chiesa, non avevano idea che i sacerdoti all’interno delle sue mura avevano già da soli combattuto con una tempesta.

PARTE 4

Capitolo 18

Il successivo passo nella vita di Nicola stava per essere determinato da un sogno. Non un sogno avuto da lui, ma un sogno che Dio aveva messo nella mente di un uomo, un sacerdote della città di Myra. 

Nelle settimane precedenti l’arrivo di Nicola a Myra, una tragedia si era abbattuta sulla chiesa. L’anziano vescovo, il dirigente della parrocchia, era morto. La tragedia non riguardava la sua morte, infatti l’uomo aveva avuto una lunga e fruttuosa vita ed era dovuto semplicemente sottostare agli effetti dell’età. Tuttalpiù era scaturita dalla diatriba su chi avrebbe dovuto prendere il suo posto come vescovo.

Nonostante sembrasse che cose del genere potessero essere risolte in modo amichevole, specie all’interno di una parrocchia, quando i cuori, la lealtà e i desideri personali vengono coinvolti, ciò porta a volte a confondere le persone a tal punto da non riuscire a vedere quale sia la volontà di Dio in una particolare situazione. Può essere difficile per chiunque, anche per le persone di fede, mantenere la propria mente libera da preconcetti e preferenze personali su ciò che Dio può, o non può fare in un determinato momento. 

Questa diatriba era una tempesta che durava da una settimana e che aveva raggiunto il suo apice la notte prima dell’arrivo di Nicola. 

In quell’occasione, infatti, uno dei sacerdoti fece un sogno che lo svegliò di soprassalto. Scorse un uomo, mai visto prima, e che chiaramente avrebbe assunto le responsabilità del loro defunto vescovo. Al risveglio, non ricordò nulla dell’aspetto di quell’uomo, ma ricordò solo il suo nome: Nicola.

«Nicola?» chiese uno degli altri sacerdoti quando sentì raccontare il sogno. «Nessuno di noi si è mai chiamato così, e non c’è nemmeno nessuno con questo nome in tutta la città».

Nicola, in effetti, non era un nome popolare all’epoca. Venne menzionato solo una volta di sfuggita in uno degli scritti di Luca sulla Chiesa primitiva, insieme ad altri nomi altrettanto poco diffusi in quel periodo a Myra, come Procoro, Nicanore, Timone e Parmena. Agli altri sacerdoti sembrò ridicolo che quel sogno potesse venire da Dio. Tuttavia il vecchio sacerdote ricordò loro: «Anche il nome di Gesù fu dato a suo padre da un angelo in sogno».

Forse fu questa testimonianza dei Vangeli, o forse l’improbabilità che ciò accadesse, che mise d’accordo i sacerdoti sul considerare la prossima persona che avrebbe varcato la loro porta se avesse risposto al nome di Nicola. Di sicuro li avrebbe aiutati a superare la situazione di stallo in cui si trovavano.

Che sorpresa, quindi, quando nell’aprire le porte della chiesa per le preghiere del mattino, l’intero equipaggio di una nave si riversò al suo interno!

I sacerdoti salutarono ciascuno degli uomini all’ingresso, dando loro il benvenuto. Gli ultimi due a entrare furono il capitano e Nicola che avevano dato precedenza agli altri. Il capitano ringraziò i sacerdoti per aver aperto loro le porte, poi si rivolse a Nicola e disse: «E grazie a Nicola per aver avuto la brillante idea di venire qui oggi».

I sacerdoti, stupiti, si guardarono l’un l’altro increduli. Forse Dio aveva risposto alle loro preghiere, dopo tutto.

Capitolo 20

Quando i sacerdoti gli raccontarono del sogno, sostenendo che lui potesse essere la risposta alle loro preghiere, Nicola rimase stupito e meravigliato e al tempo stesso perplesso e agitato. Aveva desiderato spesso di essere usato da Dio in modo potente ed era inequivocabile che fosse stato Dio a portarlo dritto attraverso il Grande Mare, proprio in questo luogo, proprio in questo preciso momento!

Diventare sacerdote, però, per non parlare di vescovo, sarebbe stata una decisione per tutta la vita. Spesso aveva pensato di riprendere l’attività di suo padre. Aveva avuto molto successo e Nicola sentiva di poterne avere altrettanto. Tuttavia cosa ancora più importante per lui, che fare il lavoro del padre, era quella di avere una famiglia come la sua.

I ricordi che Nicola aveva dei suoi genitori erano così belli che desiderava crearne altri con una famiglia tutta sua. Usanza dei sacerdoti, tuttavia, era quella di astenersi dal matrimonio e dalla paternità per potersi dedicare pienamente ai bisogni della comunità che li circondava.

Nicola indugiò mentalmente al pensiero di dover rinunciare al desiderio di una famiglia propria. Non che avere una famiglia fosse un pensiero ricorrente, ma era radicato nel profondo della sua anima tanto da darlo per scontato e prima o poi l’avrebbe realizzato, in futuro.

Lo shock di dover rinunciare a una famiglia, ancora prima di aver preso in considerazione l’idea di averne una, fu come una scossa. Seguire la volontà di Dio non dovrebbe essere così difficile, pensava! Ma aveva imparato dai suoi genitori che rinunciare alla propria volontà per amore di quella di Dio non era sempre così facile, un’altra lezione che avevano imparato da Gesù. 

Quindi, solo perché si trattava di una decisione difficile non era una ragione sufficiente perché la escludesse. Un’altra immagine gli fluttuò nella mente, quella di tre visi sorridenti conosciuti quando era sbarcato per la prima volta in Terra Santa, con il capo chino e le mani tese. Loro non erano per lui una famiglia? E non c’erano centinaia, se non addirittura migliaia, di bambini come loro? Bambini che non avevano una famiglia, qualcuno che si prendesse cura di loro, qualcuno che si occupasse dei loro bisogni?

E non c’erano forse innumerevoli altre persone nel mondo, vedove e vedovi, coloro che erano famiglie di nome ma non di fatto, che avevano ancora bisogno di aiuto e appoggio e del senso di famiglia intorno a loro? E non c’erano forse anche altre famiglie, come i suoi genitori, felici da sole ma che avevano trovato ulteriore felicità nel riunirsi ad altre famiglie di credenti della loro città? Rinunciare all’idea di una famiglia propria non significava rinunciare del tutto all’idea di avere una famiglia. Anzi, è possibile che in questo modo arrivasse ad avere una “famiglia” ancora più grande.

Più Nicola pensava a ciò a cui avrebbe potuto rinunciare per servire Dio nella Chiesa, più considerava come Dio avrebbe potuto usare questa nuova posizione in modi che andavano al di là dei suoi pensieri e desideri. E se Dio fosse stato davvero presente in questa decisione, forse alla fine avrebbe avuto le sue ricompense speciali.

La furia della bufera che aveva travolto la sua mente cominciò a placarsi. Al suo posto, la pace di Dio cominciò a scorrere nella sua mente e nel suo cuore. Nicola riconobbe che si trattava della pace della volontà divina rivelata. Fu sufficiente un altro momento per comprendere quale sarebbe stata la sua risposta.

Le tempeste che un tempo erano sembrate così minacciose – quella in mare, quella in chiesa, quelle nella mente del capitano e di Nicola – ora si rivelavano invece benedizioni di Dio. Dimostravano, infatti, a Nicola ancora una volta che, qualunque cosa accadesse, Dio poteva davvero operare ogni cosa per il bene di coloro che lo amavano e che erano chiamati secondo il Suo scopo.

Sì, se i sacerdoti lo avessero voluto, Nicola sarebbe diventato il prossimo vescovo di Myra.

Capitolo 21

Nicola, una volta nominato vescovo, non divenne improvvisamente un altro uomo. Divenne vescovo grazie all’uomo che era già. Come aveva fatto in passato con suo padre tanti anni prima, Nicola continuò anche ora a farlo, qui nella città di Myra e nelle città circostanti: camminava, pregava e interrogava Dio su dove potesse essere di maggior aiuto.

Proprio durante una di queste passeggiate in preghiera Nicola incontrò Anna Maria. Era una bella bambina, di soli undici anni, ma la sua bellezza era celata ai più dalla povertà che indossava. Nicola la trovò un giorno che cercava di vendere fiori, fatti con fili d’erba intrecciati. Ma anche la bellezza di quei fiori sembrava essere nascosta a tutti, escluso Nicola, visto che nessuno era interessato ad acquistare quelle sue semplici creazioni.

Quando le si avvicinò, gli ricordò immediatamente la piccola Rut, che aveva lasciato in Terra Santa, con i fiori d’oro in mano sulle colline di Betlemme.

Quando si fermò a osservarla meglio, Dio parlò al suo cuore. A Nicola sembrò di provare quello provò Mosè quando si fermò a guardare il roveto ardente nel deserto, momento in cui la sua naturale curiosità si trasformò in un incontro soprannaturale con il Dio vivente.

«I tuoi fiori sono bellissimi», disse Nicola. «Posso averne uno?». 

La ragazzina gli porse una delle sue creazioni. Mentre lo scrutava, anche lui la osservava. La bellezza che vide sia nel fiore sia nella bambina era stupefacente. In qualche modo Nicola aveva la capacità di vedere ciò che gli altri non riuscivano a vedere, o non vedevano perché lui cercava sempre di vedere le persone, le cose e la vita come le vedeva Dio, come se Dio stesse guardando attraverso i suoi occhi. «Vorrei comprare questo, se possibile», disse.

Deliziata, lei sorrise per la prima volta. Gli comunicò il prezzo e lui le diede una moneta.

«Dimmi», disse Nicola: «che cosa farai con il denaro che guadagnerai vendendo questi bellissimi fiori?».

Quello che Nicola sentì dopo gli spezzò il cuore. Anna Maria era la più giovane di tre sorelle: Sofia, Cecilia e Anna Maria. Sebbene il padre le amasse profondamente era sprofondato nella disperazione quando la sua attività, una volta di successo, era fallita e la moglie era morta poco dopo. Non avendo la forza e le risorse per risollevarsi dall’oscurità, la situazione per la sua famiglia diventava sempre più cupa.

La sorella maggiore Sofia, aveva appena compiuto 18 anni e anche lei faceva girare la testa a molti. Ma nessuno voleva sposarla perché il padre non aveva una dote da offrire a nessun potenziale pretendente. E senza dote, c’erano poche probabilità che lei e le altre tre ragazze si sposassero. 

Le scelte che il padre si trovava a dover affrontare erano terribili. Sapeva di dover agire presto o avrebbe rischiato che Cecilia e Anna Maria non si sarebbero mai sposate in futuro. Non avendo modo di raccogliere una dote adeguata per lei ed essendo troppo orgoglioso per accettare la carità da altri, anche se qualcuno aveva le possibilità da offrirgli, il padre stava per fare l’impensabile: avrebbe venduto la figlia maggiore come schiava per far quadrare i conti. 

Nicola non riusciva a immaginare come il padre potesse pensare che questa fosse la soluzione migliore. Ma sapeva anche che la disperazione spesso era in grado di compromettere anche gli uomini con le migliori intenzioni. Sacrificando la figlia maggiore in questo modo, forse il padre pensava di risparmiare alle due più piccole un destino simile.

Anna Maria, dal canto suo, aveva avuto l’idea di creare e vendere fiori per cercare di salvare sua sorella da quel destino che, per lei, era peggiore della morte. Nicola trattenne le lacrime per rispetto ad Anna Maria e per il nobile sforzo che stava facendo per salvare sua sorella.

Si trattenne persino dal comprare l’intero cesto di fiori, perché sapeva che ce ne sarebbe voluti troppi di fiori per salvare Sofia. Serviva un miracolo. E mentre Dio parlava al suo cuore quel giorno, Nicola sapeva che Dio avrebbe potuto usare lui per compierlo.

Capitolo 22

Senza ostentazione né clamore, Nicholas offrì una preghiera per Anna Maria, insieme ai suoi ringraziamenti per il fiore, e la incoraggiò a continuare a fare tutto il possibile per aiutare la sua famiglia e a continuare ad avere fiducia in Dio per fare ciò che lei non poteva fare. 

Nicholas sapeva di poter aiutare quella famiglia. Sapeva di avere le risorse per cambiare in meglio le loro vite, perché aveva ancora gran parte del patrimonio dei suoi genitori nascosto nelle scogliere vicino alla costa per occasioni come questa. Ma sapeva anche che l’orgoglioso padre di Anna Maria non avrebbe mai accettato la carità da nessun uomo, nemmeno in quel momento così difficile. 

L’umiliazione di suo padre per aver perso la sua attività, insieme alla sua perdita personale, lo aveva reso cieco di fronte alla realtà di ciò che stava per accadere a sua figlia. Nicholas voleva aiutare, ma come? Come poteva intervenire senza umiliare ulteriormente il padre di Anna Maria, rischiando che rifiutasse proprio l’aiuto che Nicholas poteva offrirgli? Nicholas fece ciò che faceva sempre quando aveva bisogno di saggezza. Pregò. E prima che la giornata finisse, ebbe la sua risposta.

Nicholas mise in atto il suo piano, e non un momento troppo presto! Il giorno dopo era proprio il giorno in cui il destino di Sophia sarebbe stato deciso.

Prendendo una discreta quantità di monete d’oro dai suoi risparmi, Nicholas le mise in un piccolo sacchetto. Era abbastanza piccolo da stare in una mano, ma abbastanza pesante da essere sicuro che sarebbe stato sufficiente per soddisfare il bisogno. 

Nascosto dal buio della notte, attraversò la città di Myra fino alla casa dove vivevano Anna Maria, suo padre e le sue due sorelle maggiori. 

Mentre si avvicinava silenziosamente alla casa, poteva sentirli parlare all’interno. Il loro umore era comprensibilmente abbattuto mentre discutevano di quello che pensavano fosse il loro inevitabile passo successivo. Chiedevano a Dio di dare loro la forza di fare tutto ciò che era necessario. 

Per anni, Sophia e le sue sorelle avevano sognato il giorno in cui avrebbero incontrato l’uomo dei loro sogni. Avevano persino scritto canzoni d’amore per questi uomini, confidando che Dio avrebbe portato a ciascuna di loro l’uomo perfetto al momento perfetto. 

Ora sembrava che tutte le loro canzoni, tutte le loro preghiere e tutti i loro sogni fossero stati vani. Sophia non era l’unica a sentire l’impatto di questa nuova realtà, perché le sue due sorelle più piccole sapevano che lo stesso destino avrebbe potuto attendere un giorno ciascuna di loro. 

Le ragazze volevano fidarsi di Dio, ma per quanto riflettessero sulla loro situazione, ognuna di loro sentiva che i propri sogni stavano per andare in frantumi. 

Su suggerimento di Anna Maria, provarono a cantare ancora una volta la loro canzone d’amore preferita, ma le parole non fecero che aumentare la loro tristezza. Non era più una canzone di speranza, ma una canzone di disperazione, e le parole ora sembravano loro impossibili. Anna Maria iniziò a cantare, e poi le altre si unirono a lei:

“Credo che ci sia qualcuno, solo per me, ci deve essere qualcuno che possa essere l’unico amore per me.

“Credo che ci sia qualcuno,
Solo per me,
Ci deve essere qualcuno,
Che possa liberare tutto questo amore dentro di me.

“E so che deve essere là fuori,
Lo sento nella mia anima.
Qualcuno per me che ci tenga davvero,
Che possa finalmente rendermi completa!

“Oh, credo, Oh, credo,
Oh, credo che ci sia qualcuno, oh, credo, oh, credo, oh, credo che ci sia qualcuno, oh, credo, oh, credo, oh, credo che ci sia qualcuno, solo per me, solo per me, solo per me, solo per me, credo, credo, credo, oh, credo!”.

Non era solo una canzone, ma una preghiera, una delle preghiere più profonde che Nicholas avesse mai sentito pronunciare da bocca umana. Il suo cuore andava a ciascuna di loro, mentre allo stesso tempo batteva forte per la paura. Aveva un piano e sperava che funzionasse, ma non aveva modo di saperlo con certezza. Non era preoccupato per ciò che gli sarebbe potuto accadere se fosse stato scoperto, ma temeva che il padre avrebbe rifiutato il suo dono se avesse saputo da dove proveniva. Ciò avrebbe sicuramente segnato il destino delle ragazze. Quando Sophia, Cecilia e Anna Maria diedero la buonanotte e il padre spense le luci, Nicholas capì che era giunto il suo momento. 

Avvicinandosi lentamente alla finestra aperta della stanza dove avevano cantato, Nicholas si inginocchiò. Lanciò in aria il sacchetto di monete e lo fece passare attraverso la finestra. Il sacchetto descrisse un arco elegante sopra di lui e sembrò rimanere sospeso in aria per un attimo prima di atterrare con un tonfo sordo al centro della stanza. Alcune monete rimbalzarono, tintinnando debolmente sul pavimento, rotolando e poi fermandosi. Nicholas si voltò rapidamente e si nascose nell’oscurità lì vicino, mentre le ragazze e il padre si svegliavano al rumore. 

Chiamarono per vedere se c’era qualcuno, ma non ricevendo risposta, entrarono nella stanza da entrambe le direzioni. Quando il padre accese la luce, Anna Maria fu la prima a vederlo e rimase senza fiato. 

Lì, al centro della stanza, giaceva una piccola borsa rotonda, che brillava di monete d’oro nella parte superiore. Le ragazze si radunarono intorno al padre mentre lui raccoglieva con cura la borsa e la apriva. 

Era oro più che sufficiente per fornire una dote adeguata a Sophia, con un surplus che avrebbe permesso di prendersi cura del resto della famiglia per un bel po’ di tempo!

Ma da dove poteva provenire un dono del genere? Le ragazze erano sicure che fosse stato Dio stesso a rispondere alle loro preghiere! Ma il padre voleva saperne di più. Chi aveva usato Dio per consegnarlo? Certamente nessuno che conoscessero. Uscì di corsa dalla casa, seguito dalle figlie, per vedere se riusciva a trovare qualche traccia del mittente, ma non riuscì a trovare nulla.

Tornati dentro, e non avendo nessuno a cui restituire il denaro, le ragazze e il padre si inginocchiarono e ringraziarono Dio per la Sua liberazione. 

Mentre Nicola ascoltava nell’oscurità, anche lui rese grazie a Dio, perché era proprio quello che Nicola sperava che facessero. Sapeva che il dono proveniva davvero da Dio, fornito da Dio e dato attraverso Nicola su suggerimento di Dio in risposta alle loro preghiere. Nicola aveva solo dato loro ciò che Dio aveva dato a lui in primo luogo. Nicola non voleva né aveva bisogno di ringraziamenti o riconoscimenti per il dono. Solo Dio meritava la loro lode. 

Ma permettendo a Nicholas di essere coinvolto, usando le mani di Nicholas e la sua eredità per benedire gli altri, Nicholas provò una gioia che riusciva a malapena a contenere. Consegnando il dono di persona, Nicholas poté assicurarsi che fosse dato nel modo giusto. E donandolo in modo anonimo, poté assicurarsi che il vero Donatore del dono fosse debitamente riconosciuto. 

Il dono fu consegnato e Dio ottenne il merito. Nicholas aveva raggiunto entrambi i suoi obiettivi.

Capitolo 23

Sebbene Nicola preferisse compiere le sue opere di carità di nascosto, ci furono momenti in cui, per necessità, dovette agire alla luce del sole. E mentre erano le sue azioni segrete a guadagnargli il favore di Dio, quelle pubbliche lo facevano con gli uomini.

Molte persone apprezzano, giustamente, un cavaliere dall’armatura scintillante, ma non tutti vogliono essere salvati dal male, soprattutto quelli che ne traggono profitto.

Uno di questi uomini era un magistrato di Myra, un leader della città, che non vedeva di buon occhio Nicola e, come lui, chiunque ostacolasse la sua volontà.

Questo magistrato, in particolare, era corrotto e allo stesso tempo corruttibile. Era disposto a fare qualsiasi cosa per ottenere ciò che voleva, a prescindere da quanto costasse agli altri. Benché Nicola fosse già stato in contrasto con lui in diverse occasioni passate, il loro conflitto si inasprì fino a raggiungere il culmine quando il vescovo ricevette la notizia che il magistrato aveva condannato a morte tre uomini per un crimine di cui, lui sapeva, erano innocenti. Non poteva aspettare la copertura del buio; sapeva di dover agire immediatamente per salvare questi uomini dalla morte. 

Quel pomeriggio si era intrattenuto con alcuni generali di Roma, la cui nave aveva attraccato nel porto di Myra la sera precedente. Li aveva invitati a casa sua per essere aggiornato sui in corso a Roma. «Un nuovo imperatore sta per essere nominato», dissero: «e le implicazioni potrebbero essere gravi per lei, vescovo, e per tutti i discepoli seguaci di Cristo».

Fu durante il pranzo che Nicola venne a sapere dell’ingiusta condanna e dell’esecuzione imminente. Allora, si mise subito in viaggio. I tre generali, intuendo che all’arrivo di Nicola sarebbero potuti sorgere altri problemi, lo seguirono.

Quando il vescovo irruppe sul luogo dell’esecuzione, i condannati erano già sulla piattaforma. Erano legati e con la testa e il collo piegati, pronti per la spada del boia. 

Senza pensare alla propria sicurezza, Nicola saltò sulla piattaforma e strappò l’arma al carnefice. Pur non essendo un combattente, il vescovo si mosse in maniera così inaspettata che il boia non tentò nemmeno di strappargli, a sua volta, l’arma dalle mani. 

Nicola sapeva che quegli uomini erano innocenti, quanto il magistrato colpevole. Era certo che dovevano essere state le buone azioni di quegli uomini, non le loro cattive, ad aver offeso il governante. Sciolse le corde che legavano quegli innocenti sotto gli occhi degli astanti, sfidando il boia e il magistrato. 

Il governante allora si fece avanti per affrontare Nicola con decisione. Ma mentre lo faceva, anche i tre generali che avevano pranzato con il vescovo si fecero avanti. Uno prese posto alla sinistra di Nicola, un altro alla destra e il terzo si mise proprio di fronte a lui. Prudentemente, il magistrato indietreggiò. Nicola sapeva che era quello il momento di fare pressione su di lui per ottenere la verità. 

Anche se cercò di difendersi, le suppliche del magistrato caddero nel vuoto. Nessuno avrebbe più creduto alle sue bugie. Cercò di convincere il popolo che non era stato lui a condannare quegli innocenti, ma altri due uomini d’affari della città gli avevano offerto una tangente per la loro esecuzione. Tuttavia nel tentativo di scaricare la colpa su altri, il governante condannò se stesso a causa dell’avidità del suo cuore.

Nicola dichiarò: «Mi pare di aver capito che non siano stati quei due uomini ad avervi corrotto, signore, ma altri due, i cui nomi sono Oro e Argento!».

Pentito, il magistrato crollò e di fronte al popolo confessò di questo e di tutti gli altri torti commessi, ammise anche di aver parlato male di Nicola, che invece non aveva fatto altro che bene al popolo. Quel giorno il vescovo liberò più di tre prigionieri, e anche il magistrato fu finalmente liberato dalla sua avidità grazie alla sua onesta confessione. Vedendo il cambiamento di cuore del governante, Nicola lo perdonò, conquistando per sempre il suo favore e quello del popolo.

Quando Nicola nacque, i suoi genitori scelsero il suo nome perché in greco significa “vincitore del popolo”. Grazie ad azioni come queste, divenne a tutti gli effetti “il vincitore del popolo”. Nicola stava già diventando un’icona, anche nel suo tempo.

Capitolo 24

Dopo tre mesi dall’aver ricevuto la sua dote inaspettata da Nicola, Sofia ricevette la visita di un pretendente che “faceva proprio al caso suo”. Lui era davvero la risposta alle sue preghiere e lei, ora, era felicemente e finalmente sposata.

Due anni dopo, però, anche Cecilia, la sorella minore di Sofia, si trovò in gravi difficoltà. Sebbene Cecilia fosse ormai pronta a sposarsi, gli affari del padre, per quanto lui si sforzasse, non erano migliorati. Quando il denaro che Nicola aveva dato alla famiglia cominciò a venir meno, iniziò a farsi strada la disperazione. L’orgoglio e il dolore avevano ancora una volta acciecato il padre di Cecilia ed egli riteneva che l’unica opzione fosse quella di condannare la ragazza a una vita di schiavitù, sperando di salvare la sua terza e ultima figlia da un destino simile.

Sebbene sapessero con certezza che Dio aveva già una volta esaudito le loro preghiere, le circostanze li facevano dubitare che lo avrebbero fatto di nuovo. Un secondo salvataggio, a questo punto, era più di quanto sperare o immaginare. Nicola, tuttavia, conoscendo la loro situazione molto più intimamente, sapeva che Dio lo stava spingendo a intercedere di nuovo. Erano passati due anni dal suo precedente aiuto, ma in tutto questo tempo la famiglia non aveva mai sospettato, né scoperto, che fosse lui il “salvatore” mandato da Dio.

Man mano che si avvicinava il momento di decidere cosa fare per la famiglia, Nicola sapeva che si approssimava anche il suo momento di agire. E per chiarire che il suo dono doveva essere usato, innanzitutto, per la dote di Cecilia e poi per qualsiasi altra necessità famigliare, aspettò la notte prima che la ragazza fosse venduta come schiava per fare la sua mossa.

Ancora una volta attese l’oscurità, poi, si avvicinò alla loro casa. Cecilia e Anna Maria erano già andate a letto quella sera, ubbidendo al padre che aveva detto loro di non aspettarsi alcun miracolo simile a quello di Sofia. Ma da qualche parte, nel profondo della sua disperazione, il padre conservava ancora un barlume di speranza nel cuore, il desiderio, forse più di ogni altra cosa, che qualcuno si stesse davvero prendendo cura di lui e che le sue preghiere potessero ancora essere esaudite. Con questa speranza, decise di rimanere sveglio e di stare vicino alla finestra, nel caso in cui fosse apparso un angelo, sia esso terreno o celeste. 

Nicola sapeva che questo sarebbe potuto accadere e che il padre di Cecilia avrebbe potuto rifiutare il suo dono se avesse scoperto che era stato lui a farlo. Ma sperava anche che, magari, il cuore orgoglioso del padre si fosse un po’ ammorbidito e che avrebbe accettato il dono, anche se Nicola fosse stato scoperto.

Vedendo la casa perfettamente silenziosa, Nicola si inginocchiò accanto alla finestra aperta, per poi gettare il secondo sacchetto d’oro nella stanza. Non appena questo toccò terra il padre delle ragazze saltò fuori dalla finestra e superò Nicola mentre cercava di fuggire. Si sarebbe potuto pensare che per come lo inseguiva il padre delle ragazze, il vescovo avesse preso un sacchetto d’oro invece di donarlo.

Con il timore di aver mandato in fumo tutti i suoi sforzi, il suo cuore si rasserenò quando l’uomo anziché rimproverarlo ringraziò Nicola, senza nemmeno guardare chi aveva catturato. «Per favore, mi ascolti», disse: «Voglio solo ringraziarla. Ha già fatto così tanto per me e per la mia famiglia, che non mi sarei mai aspettato un altro regalo del genere. Ma la sua generosità mi ha aperto gli occhi sull’orgoglio che ho nel cuore – che mi è quasi costato la vita di due figlie». 

Il padre delle ragazze aveva parlato trafelato e in fretta per essere certo che lo straniero ascoltasse prima di tentare una nuova fuga. Ma quando alzò lo sguardo e vide che stava parlando proprio con il vescovo Nicola, lo shock sul suo volto fu evidente. Come poteva un vescovo permettersi di fare un regalo così incredibile?

In risposta a questa domanda non pronunciata, Nicola disse: «Sì, sono stato io a consegnarvi questo dono, ma è stato Dio a darmelo perché lo portassi a voi. Non proviene dalla Chiesa e non è frutto della carità delle mie mani. Viene da mio padre, che se l’è guadagnato onestamente con il lavoro delle sue mani. Era un uomo d’affari come lei. E se fosse vivo oggi, avrebbe voluto consegnarlo lui stesso. Ne sono certo. Lui, più di tutti, sapeva quanto fosse difficile gestire un’azienda. Inoltre amava la sua famiglia, proprio come lei».

Nicola fece una pausa per fare in modo che le sue parole venissero assimilate, poi continuò: «Ma per favore, per il mio bene e per il bene di Dio, sappia che è stato Dio stesso che ha risposto alle vostre preghiere, perché è così. Lui l’ha fatto. Io sono semplicemente un messaggero per Lui, un fattorino, uno strumento nelle Sue mani, che gli permette di fare attraverso di me ciò che vuole che venga fatto. Per quanto mi riguarda, preferisco fare le mie donazioni in segreto, senza far sapere alla mia mano destra cosa fa la mia mano sinistra».

Lo sguardo di Nicola era così sincero e trasmetteva le sue intenzioni con tale amore e devozione per Colui che serviva, che il padre delle ragazze non poté fare a meno di accettare il dono come se fosse davvero venuto dalla mano di Dio stesso.

Ma mentre si salutavano, le ragazze e il padre non riuscivano a contenere la loro gratitudine nei confronti di Nicola, anche, per aver permesso a Dio di servirsi di lui in un modo così straordinario.

Per quanto Nicola cercasse di deviare le loro lodi verso Dio, era consapevole che aveva un ruolo da svolgere nella loro vita. Sebbene Dio spinga molti a essere generosi, non tutti rispondono a questo stimolo come faceva lui.

Nicola avrebbe atteso di vedere come si sarebbero evolute le vicende della famiglia negli anni successivi, per capire se un suo nuovo intervento anche per Anna Maria fosse necessario.

Tuttavia non ne ebbe mai l’occasione. Il nuovo imperatore alla fine era salito al trono e il corso della sua vita stava per cambiare di nuovo. Anche se Nicola aiutava spesso gli altri, ci furono momenti in cui sembrava, come era successo persino al Salvatore che lui seguiva, non essere in grado di aiutare nemmeno se stesso.

PARTE 5

Capitolo 25

Al tempo della nascita di Gesù governava un re che sentendosi minacciato da questo bambino diede l’ordine di uccidere tutti gli infanti fino ai due anni di età di Betlemme e dintorni. Trecentotré anni dopo, anche un altro re si sentiva minacciato da Gesù e dai suoi seguaci.

Questo nuovo re si chiamava Diocleziano, l’imperatore dell’intero Impero Romano. Anche se i Romani avevano ucciso Gesù centinaia di anni prima, Diocleziano si sentiva ancora minacciato dai cristiani, seguaci di Gesù. Si era proclamato un dio e voleva che tutte le persone del suo impero lo adorassero.

Sebbene i cristiani fossero tra i cittadini più rispettosi della legge, non potevano adorare Diocleziano. Agli occhi dell’imperatore si trattava d’insurrezione, un atto che doveva reprimere nella maniera più severa. Quando Diocleziano raggiunse il massimo potere, ordinò di bruciare tutte le Bibbie, di distruggere tutte le chiese cristiane e di imprigionare, torturare e mettere a morte tutti coloro che seguivano Cristo.

Nonostante le persecuzioni contro i cristiani venissero perpetrate da anni sotto l’impero romano, nessuna era paragonabile a quelle che ebbero luogo durante il regno di Diocleziano. Personalmente Nicola non temeva quell’uomo, ma, come sempre, si preoccupava per coloro che nella sua parrocchia seguivano Gesù.

Avendo un ruolo così di spicco, Nicola sapeva che sarebbe stato il primo a essere preso di mira e, se fosse stato portato via, temeva per quello che sarebbe successo a coloro che avrebbe lasciato indietro. Lui, però, aveva già preso la sua decisione. Era certo che, anche se fosse stato ucciso, Dio avrebbe potuto portare a termine il Suo proposito sulla terra, indipendentemente dal fatto che Nicola ne facesse parte o meno. Erano questa fede incrollabile, la fiducia in Dio e nei Suoi propositi che lo avrebbero aiutato a superare i difficili anni a venire.

Piuttosto che nascondersi dal destino certo che lo attendeva, Nicola scelse di rimanere in piedi fino alla fine. Giurò di spalancare le porte della sua chiesa a tutti coloro che volevano entrare. E mantenne questo voto il più a lungo possibile, finché un giorno a entrare furono dei soldati, soldati giunti fino a lì per lui.

Capitolo 26

Quando arrivarono i soldati Nicola era pronto. Ormai era tardi per ricredersi sulla decisione di aver tenuto aperta la chiesa. Era giunto al termine anche il tempo della sua parrocchia purtroppo, infatti i soldati la chiusero per sempre.

Visti i buoni rapporti che Nicola aveva intessuto nel corso degli anni con la gente della sua città e anche con i soldati locali, non furono questi ultimi a venirlo a prendere. Diocleziano aveva inviato dei militari con l’ordine improrogabile di eseguire il suo volere, pena lo stesso destino dei condannati.

A Nicola fu concessa un’ultima possibilità di rinunciare alla sua fede in Cristo e di adorare invece Diocleziano, ma lui, ovviamente, rifiutò. Non voleva sfidare l’autorità romana, perché Cristo stesso aveva insegnato ai suoi seguaci quanto fosse importante onorare i governanti e rispettare le loro leggi. Tuttavia negare che Gesù fosse il suo Signore e Salvatore sarebbe stato come negare che il sole fosse sorto quella mattina! Semplicemente non poteva farlo. Come poteva negare l’esistenza di Colui che gli aveva dato la vita, che gli aveva dato la fede e che gli aveva dato speranza nelle ore più buie. Se i soldati dovevano portarlo via, lo avrebbe accettato. Dichiarare che un semplice uomo come Diocleziano fosse Dio e che Gesù fosse tutt’altro che Dio, era inconcepibile.

Nonostante la sua fede, Nicola provava dolore come chiunque altro essere umano. Non poteva scampare alla naturale paura dell’essere minacciati di subire un danno fisico. Temeva anche l’idea della prigionia, di dover rimanere isolato per così tanto tempo, soprattutto quando non ne conosceva la durata, o se sarebbe sopravvissuto a essa. 

Nicola era consapevole del fatto che queste paure erano sane, venivano da Dio, affinché lo tenessero lontano da qualsiasi pericolo e lo proteggessero da tutto ciò che avrebbe potuto essere dannoso per il suo corpo. Ma ora, mentre Nicola veniva portato via con la forza, avrebbe voluto sopprimere quelle paure.

«Dio, aiutami», esclamò mentre le catene con le quali i soldati lo stavano legando, affondavano nei suoi polsi. Era l’inizio di un nuovo tipo di pellegrinaggio per Nicola – un pellegrinaggio che sarebbe durato molto più a lungo degli anni trascorsi in Terra Santa.

Sarebbe difficile paragonare questi due viaggi in termini di impatto sulla sua vita, infatti, come si potrebbe mettere a confronto un viaggio intrapreso in piena libertà, in cui potevi andare e venire a piacimento, interrompere il viaggio quando volevi, con un viaggio imposto contro la propria volontà, in cui persino avventurarsi per intravedere il sole avveniva sotto il controllo di qualcun altro e non sotto il tuo?

Tuttavia, Nicola scoprì di essere in grado di percepire la presenza di Dio in un modo che eguagliava, se non superava, tutto ciò che aveva sperimentato in Terra Santa. Come aveva imparato da altri credenti, a volte non ci si rende conto che Gesù è tutto ciò di cui abbiamo bisogno finché Gesù non è tutto ciò che abbiamo.

Durante la sua prigionia, ogni volta che la porta della cella di Nicola si apriva, ignorava se le guardie fossero lì per liberarlo o per condannarlo a morte. Non sapeva mai se quello era il suo ultimo giorno. Nonostante la sua incertezza, Nicola acquisì un’acuta consapevolezza della brevità della vita, così come una continua coscienza della presenza di Dio.

Scoprì che chiudendo gli occhi era in grado di percepire la Sua presenza come mai prima di allora. Questa cella non era più una prigione, era un santuario. E tutto ciò che desiderava era rimanere alla presenza di Dio il più a lungo possibile. Ben presto, Nicola non ebbe più nemmeno bisogno di chiudere gli occhi. Semplicemente sapeva di essere sempre alla presenza del Signore.

Naturalmente, il periodo trascorso in prigione fu anche pieno del dolore più acuto che si potesse mai provare nel peggior tipo di inferno terrestre. I soldati erano spietati nel tentativo di convincere Nicola a rinunciare alla sua fede. Le sofferenze che gli infliggevano andavano dal pungolo con ferri incandescenti, allo spremere la sua carne con tenaglie roventi, fino alle frustate più dure, versandogli poi sale e aceto sulle ferite. Come conseguenza, la sua schiena rimase permanentemente segnata. Le condizioni igieniche della prigione contribuirono a fare in modo che Nicola sperimentasse più malattie di quante ne avesse già avuto. A volte arrivava a chiedersi se la morte non fosse migliore di ciò che era obbligato a sopportare lì. 

Fu durante uno di quei periodi, il più buio, di tutti e cinque gli anni trascorsi da recluso, che la porta della cella si aprì. Entrò una luce, ma da vicino, non era la luce del sole, poiché per quanto Nicola potesse vedere nella sua cella isolata, era ancora notte fonda.

La luce che entrava nella stanza era quella di un sorriso, un sorriso sul viso del giovane amico di Nicola, ormai cresciuto e diventato uomo. Era la luce del viso sorridente di Demetrio.

Capitolo 27

Nicola aveva visto pochi volti durante la sua permanenza in prigione, e ne aveva visti ancora meno che lo incoraggiassero in qualche modo. Vedere un sorriso sul viso di qualcuno, per di più un viso così caro a Nicola, era pura gioia.

Non era stato facile per Demetrio trovare Nicola. Era venuto a Myra sapendo che Nicola aveva preso una chiesa lì. Ma erano passati anni da quando aveva avuto notizie dall’amico, un periodo in cui lui stesso era stato imprigionato. Demetrio, da poco liberato, attraversò quindi il Grande Mare alla ricerca di Nicola. Dovette cercare a lungo, tuttavia aveva viaggiato troppo per arrendersi senza riuscire a vedere il suo vecchio amico e mentore, la prima persona che gli aveva mostrato l’amore di Cristo. 

Esercitando l’abilità di strada acquisita quando faceva la guida in Terra Santa, Demetrio era in grado di aggirare la maggior parte delle persone o delle cose che lo ostacolavano. La sua tenacia, unita alla guida di Dio, lo aiutarono a scovare il suo amico, e a trovare la porta che aprì quella sera, per quella visita speciale. Per Nicola, fu come la visita di un angelo celestiale.

Dopo che la porta si richiuse alle loro spalle e dopo un lungo abbraccio, Demetrio si sedette sul pavimento accanto a Nicola. Rimasero in silenzio per diversi minuti, senza che nessuno dei due pronunciasse una parola. In momenti sacri come questi, le parole erano superflue.

L’oscurità nella piccola cella era tale da non permettere loro di vedersi, ma rimasero seduti l’uno accanto all’altro, semplicemente. Gli occhi di Demetrio non si erano ancora adattati al buio pesto tanto da poter vedere qualcosa, e Nicola si accontentò di sapere che l’amico era lì accanto a lui. Riusciva a sentire il suono del respiro di Demetrio, un suono che accresceva la sua gioia, sapendo che il suo amico era ancora vivo ed era proprio lì, in carne e ossa.

Nicola fece un altro respiro profondo e con esso inspirò un nuovo senso di vita. Era un soffio di vita che il suo amico non poteva fare a meno di portare con sé.

Capitolo 28

«E come stanno le nostre due giovani guardie del corpo?» chiese Nicola, riferendosi a Samuele e Rut. Aveva pregato spesso per tutti e tre, poiché li amava come se fossero suoi giovani fratelli e sorelle. 

Demetrio esitò. Guardò Nicola ma non riuscì a dire una parola. Era ansioso di raccontargli tutto quello che era successo negli ultimi anni, di come Samuele e Rut continuassero a portare le persone nei luoghi santi, condividendo con tutti la stessa buona notizia di Gesù che avevano scoperto nei giorni trascorsi con Nicola.

Come Demetrio, anche Samuele e Rut dovettero smettere di fare da guida ai pellegrini quando iniziò la “Grande Persecuzione”, come la chiamavano ora. Tutti e tre iniziarono a trascorrere la maggior parte delle loro giornate occupandosi delle necessità degli altri credenti di Gerusalemme, credenti che rischiavano il carcere e la morte, proprio come Nicola. Non avendo una posizione di rilievo come il vescovo, però, i tre riuscirono a evitare la cattura per più tempo. Alla fine, però, anche loro furono imprigionati, ripetutamente interrogati, minacciati e torturati per la loro fede. 

Samuele e Demetrio erano abbastanza forti da sopportare gli abusi, ma Rut era troppo fragile. Un giorno, dopo essere stata maltrattata con particolare durezza, tornò da loro e crollò. Sebbene avesse ovviamente pianto per il dolore corporale infertole, in qualche modo sembrava essere riuscita a mantenere un sorriso nel cuore.

«Come fai?», chiese Samuele. «Come fai a sorridere ancora, anche dopo tutto questo?». 

Rut rispose: «Sento che sto camminando e parlando con Gesù da così tanto tempo, che nemmeno la morte cambierebbe le cose. Continuerò a camminare e a parlare con Lui per sempre».

Rut sorrise di nuovo e Demetrio non poté fare a meno di contraccambiare. Ma il suo corpo stava per cedere e lei lo sapeva. Poteva percepire che mancava poco al passaggio da questa, all’altra vita.

«Non puoi andare!», disse Samuele. «Devi rimanere qui con me! C’è ancora troppo lavoro da fare!». Ma Rut stava scivolando via.

«Se muori, pregherò che Dio ti riporti in vita!». Samuele era così disperato da aggrapparsi a lei. Rut si limitò a sorridergli di nuovo. Era davvero riuscita a trovare il segreto per vivere la vita al massimo e niente, nemmeno la morte, poteva portarglielo via.

Parlò, ora a bassa voce, con un sussurro. «Potreste pregare che Dio mi resusciti dalla morte, ma la verità è che lo ha già fatto una volta. Quando abbiamo incontrato Nicola e lui ci ha fatto conoscere Gesù, io sono risuscitata dai morti e mi è stata data una nuova vita. Da quel momento ho capito che avrei vissuto per sempre».

Con queste parole, Rut oltrepassò il velo per andare alla presenza visibile di Dio. Il sorriso che adornava il suo viso in vita continuò a risplendere anche nella morte e Demetrio sapeva dove si trovava. Stava solo continuando a fare quello che aveva sempre fatto, camminare e parlare con Gesù, ora però, faccia a faccia.

Nicola rimase in silenzio mentre Demetrio gli raccontava la storia, ascoltandolo assorto. Per quanto pensasse di essere triste, il suo cuore cominciò invece a battere di nuovo. Niente di tutto questo era nuovo per lui, naturalmente, ma all’ascoltare di Rut, la sua fede cominciò a rivivere.

Si potrebbe pensare che un uomo come Nicola non avesse bisogno di essere incoraggiato. Aveva condotto alla fede innumerevoli altre persone ed era addirittura un vescovo. Tuttavia Nicola, in cuor suo, sapeva anche che erano proprio le persone come lui che, a volte, avevano più bisogno di essere incoraggiate nella loro fede. La grande fede, sapeva, non la otteneva chi non aveva dubbi. La grande fede la ottenevano coloro che l’avevano tesa così tanto da dover crescere, altrimenti si sarebbe spezzata del tutto. Continuando a fidarsi di Dio a prescindere da ogni cosa, Nicola scoprì che era in grado di colmare le lacune della sua fede lungo il cammino, aiutandola a crescere ulteriormente.

Per quanto fosse triste per la scomparsa di Rut, Nicola non poté fare a meno di sorridere dal profondo del suo cuore, come doveva aver fatto Rut il giorno della sua morte. Bramava il giorno in cui avrebbe visto Gesù faccia a faccia, proprio come lo stava facendo Rut. Amava, tuttavia, anche il lavoro che Dio gli aveva affidato sulla terra.

«Non possiamo perdere, vero?», disse Nicola con un sorriso mentre rifletteva. «O moriamo e andiamo a stare con Gesù in cielo, oppure viviamo e continuiamo la Sua opera sulla terra. In entrambi i casi siamo vincitori, no? In entrambi i casi siamo vincitori».

«Sì, in entrambi i casi siamo vincitori», gli fece eco Demetrio. «In entrambi i casi siamo vincitori». 

Nelle ore successive, Nicola e Demetrio si raccontarono le storie di ciò che Dio aveva fatto nella loro vita durante il periodo in cui erano stati lontani. Ma nulla avrebbe potuto preparare Nicola a ciò che Demetrio stava per dirgli. Infatti a quanto pare, aveva incontrato una ragazza. E non una ragazza qualsiasi, ma una ragazza che Nicola conosceva molto bene ormai. Il suo nome era Anna Maria.

Capitolo 29

Nel suo viaggio alla ricerca di Nicola, Demetrio parlò con chiunque potesse sapere dove si trovasse. Giunto a Myra, si recò innanzitutto nella chiesa in cui Nicola aveva prestato servizio come vescovo. Non trovandolo, si mise in strada per vedere se riusciva a trovare qualcuno che sapesse qualcosa di lui. E chi trovò per strada, se non la stessa ragazza – ora donna – che Nicola aveva trovato tanti anni prima, mentre vendeva i suoi fiori intrecciati a chiunque li volesse? 

Non era più coperta dal mantello della povertà. La sua bellezza interiore ed esteriore saltò subito agli occhi di Demetrio, che ne fu così affascinato da non poter fare a meno di iniziare una conversazione. E lei sembrava altrettanto presa da lui. Non riusciva a credere che un uomo della sua statura e della sua fede fosse disposto a parlare con lei. Pensava che fosse l’uomo più gentile e incredibile mai incontrato prima.

Quando Demetrio menzionò la sua missione, la ricerca del vescovo di nome Nicola, Anna Maria sussultò. Come poteva questo straniero proveniente dall’altra sponda del Grande Mare, conoscere Nicola? Demetrio raccontò la storia di come si fossero conosciuti e di come Nicola lo avesse salvato dalla sua povertà di fede. Anna Maria, allora, non poté fare a meno di condividere ciò che Nicola aveva fatto anche per la sua famiglia, salvando le sue due sorelle maggiori dalla schiavitù grazie a un sacchetto d’oro per ciascuna di loro, tirato attraverso la finestra, alla vigilia del loro 18° compleanno.

Poi, però, il sorriso di Anna Maria si spense. Mancavano pochi giorni al suo diciottesimo compleanno, ma Nicola era stato arrestato cinque anni prima. Nessuno l’aveva più né visto, né sentito in quegli anni. Nemmeno lei sapeva dove fosse. Anche se suo padre aveva cambiato idea e non si sarebbe mai azzardato a venderla, non aveva comunque ancora una dote da offrire a un potenziale pretendente. Senza quella, come anche Demetrio sapeva bene, il futuro di Anna Maria era incerto. E con Nicola in prigione, non c’era alcuna possibilità che la loro famiglia venisse salvata una terza volta. Anna Maria aveva ripreso a vendere i fiori per strada e, sebbene fossero più d’impatto rispetto alle sue precedenti creazioni, riusciva a malapena a guadagnare abbastanza per aiutare la famiglia, di tanto in tanto, a comprare da mangiare.

Demetrio ascoltò e, come Nicola prima di lui, capì in pochi minuti cosa Dio desiderava che facesse. Poteva essere lui la risposta alle preghiere di Anna Maria, e con molto di più di una semplice dote. Ma sapeva anche che queste cose richiedevano tempo, così si limitò a custodire questi pensieri nel suo cuore; comprò un fiore da Anna Maria, la ringraziò per aver condiviso con lui ciò che sapeva di Nicola, poi continuò per la sua strada, promettendole di mettersi in contatto con lei se avesse mai trovato il loro prezioso amico. 

Alla vigilia del compleanno di Anna Maria, Demetrio si ritrova nel posto in cui Nicola si era già nascosto due volte, anni prima, appena fuori dalla finestra aperta della casa della giovane. La conversazione all’interno era sommessa, mentre Anna Maria e suo padre pregavano, questa volta consapevoli che non c’era modo per Nicola di apparire di nuovo. Spensero le luci e si diressero a letto.

Demetrio aspettò per quelle che gli sembrarono ore, sapendo che non poteva svegliarli e rischiare di svelare il suo piano. In effetti, aveva risparmiato abbastanza negli anni di lavoro in Terra Santa da riempire facilmente una borsa di monete d’oro e costituire una dote. Ma non poteva semplicemente consegnare loro il denaro, perché aveva in mente qualcosa di diverso. Voleva che il padre di Anna Maria, un giorno, gli restituisse quella somma come regalo di nozze! Era un’ipotesi azzardata e sapeva che avrebbe avuto bisogno di più tempo per essere certo che Anna Maria fosse la donna giusta per lui. Ma sentiva, anche, che questo era il modo migliore per far funzionare le cose alla fine, sebbene lei potesse non essere la donna giusta per lui. Qualcosa gli diceva, però, che lo era. E con questo pensiero in mente, fece la sua prossima mossa.

Con cautela e in silenzio, si avvicinò al davanzale della finestra e lasciò cadere la borsa sul pavimento, cercando di non far rumore. Nessuno sentì e nessuno si mosse. Una volta compiuto il suo dovere verso Dio e verso il suo cuore, ripartì alla ricerca del vescovo. Due settimane dopo, Demetrio aveva trovato Nicola e stava condividendo con lui la storia di come aveva incontrato la donna dei suoi sogni

La notizia non sarebbe potuto essere più dolce alle orecchie di Nicola. E ancora una volta, il suo cuore si alleggerì e si sollevò, infatti anche se era chiuso in cella, Nicola riusciva a vedere il frutto delle sue preghiere, esaudite in maniera inimmaginabile. Poteva ancora fare la differenza nel mondo, anche da qui, in prigione, anche quando il mondo cercava di spegnerlo.

Prima di andarsene quella sera, Demetrio abbracciò Nicola ancora una volta; poi si ritirò. Scomparve attraverso la porta della prigione con la stessa miracolosità con cui vi era entrato.

Sarebbero passati altri cinque anni prima che Nicola rivedesse Demetrio. La morsa di Diocleziano continuava a stringere il collo dei cristiani. Ma durante tutti gli anni che rimase in carcere, Nicola si sentì più libero nel suo cuore di quanto si fosse mai sentito prima. Nessun uomo poteva impedirgli di adorare Gesù e nessun uomo poteva impedire a Gesù di fare ciò che voleva.

Quando arrivò finalmente il giorno in cui Nicola fu liberato, la guardia che aprì la porta si affacciò e gli disse: «È ora di andare. Sei libero».

Nicola si limitò a sorridere alla guardia. Lui era già libero, da tempo.

Capitolo 30

Pensando che Nicola non lo avesse sentito, la guardia parlò di nuovo. «Ho detto sei libero, sei libero di andare. Ora puoi alzarti e andare a casa». Alla parola “casa”, Nicola si commosse. Non aveva visto la sua casa, né la sua chiesa, né quasi nessun’altra anima se non Demetrio, da dieci anni. Si alzò in piedi e i suoi movimenti accelerarono mentre rispondeva alle parole della guardia.

«Casa?» ripeté Nicola.

«Sì, a casa. Puoi andare a casa adesso. L’imperatore ha emanato un decreto che ha reso liberi tutti i cristiani».

Era un nuovo imperatore di nome Costantino, quello a cui si riferiva. Gli sforzi di Diocleziano non erano riusciti a piegare i cristiani. Invece di spegnere i loro spiriti, Diocleziano li aveva rafforzati. Come Nicola, coloro che non furono uccisi si rafforzarono nella fede. E quanto più forti crescevano nella fede, tanto più aumentava la loro influenza, che portava a nuove conversioni tra i cittadini che li circondavano. Persino la moglie e la figlia di Diocleziano si erano convertite al cristianesimo. 

Diocleziano si dimise dal suo incarico e lasciò posto a Costantino.

Il nuovo imperatore mise fine alla persecuzione dei cristiani emanando l’Editto di Milano. Questo decreto garantiva una nuova tolleranza verso le persone di tutte le religioni e portò la libertà ai cristiani. Elena, la madre di Costantino, era una devota cristiana e sebbene nessuno sapesse se anche l’imperatore fosse cristiano, la tolleranza dimostrata permise alla gente di adorare chi voleva e come voleva, come avrebbe dovuto essere da sempre. 

Se Diocleziano aveva cambiato il mondo romano in peggio, Costantino lo stava cambiando in meglio. I loro regni erano diversi come il giorno e la notte e dimostravano come una sola persona potesse davvero influenzare il corso della storia per sempre, nel bene e nel male. 

Nicola era consapevole, ora più che mai, di avere solo una vita da vivere. Ma era anche consapevole che, se l’avesse vissuta nel modo giusto, una vita sarebbe stata abbastanza. In cuor suo decise, ancora una volta, di fare del suo meglio per sfruttare il più possibile ogni giorno, a partire da oggi.

Una volta condotto dalla prigione alla città di Myra, non per caso pensò, il primo volto che vide fu quello di Anna Maria. 

La riconobbe immediatamente. Ma i dieci anni di prigionia di Nicola e il logorio della sua vita, le resero difficile riconoscerlo altrettanto rapidamente. Non appena, però, vide il suo sorriso, capì che si trattava del suo caro e vecchio amico Nicola. Certo, era Nicola! Ed era vivo, proprio lì davanti a lei!

Non riusciva a muoversi, dallo shock. Due bambini erano accanto a lei e guardavano la madre, poi l’uomo che ricambiava il suo sguardo. Eccolo, colui che aveva fatto tanto per lei e per la sua famiglia. La sua gioia era incontenibile. Con un richiamo alle spalle, Anna Maria gridò: «Demetrio! Demetrio! Vieni subito! C’è Nicola!». Poi si precipitò verso Nicola, per abbracciarlo e tenerlo stretto. Demetrio uscì da un negozio, vide Nicola e Anna Maria e si precipitò anche lui verso di loro, prendendo in braccio i bambini mentre correva. 

Ora tutta la famiglia abbracciava Nicola come se fosse un fratello o un padre o uno zio appena tornato dalla guerra. Le lacrime e i sorrisi sui loro volti diventarono una cosa sola. L’uomo che aveva salvato Anna Maria e la sua famiglia da un destino peggiore della morte, era stato, anche lui, risparmiato dalla morte! Persino Demetrio sorrise da un orecchio all’altro, nel riabbracciare il suo buon amico e nel vedere quanto Nicola fosse felice di incontrare lui e Anna Maria insieme alla loro nuova famiglia.

Nicola prese i volti di ciascuno di loro, uno alla volta, e li guardò profondamente negli occhi. Poi strinse i bambini a sé. I semi che aveva piantato anni prima nella vita di Demetrio e Anna Maria stavano ancora dando frutti, frutti che ora poteva vedere con i suoi occhi. Tutti i suoi sforzi erano valsi la pena, e niente come il sorriso sui loro volti avrebbe potuto renderglielo più chiaro. 

Nei giorni e nelle settimane a venire, Nicola e gli altri credenti liberati fecero esperienze simili in tutta Myra. Quei giorni furono come una lunga e continua riunione tra familiari e amici. Nicola, così come gli altri sopravvissuti alla Grande Persecuzione, a chi lo incontrava doveva sembrare come Lazzaro, quando Gesù gli ordinò di uscire dalla tomba: un uomo morto, ma che ora era vivo. E come Lazzaro, questi cristiani, non solo erano vivi, ma avevano portato a Cristo molte altre persone grazie a una fede che, ora, si era infuocata in un modo del tutto nuovo. Ciò che di male aveva compiuto Diocleziano, Dio lo aveva usato per il bene. Questo nuovo contingente di cristiani era emerso con una fede più forte che mai.

Nicola sapeva che il suo nuovo livello di fede, come tutti i buoni doni di Dio, gli era stato dato con uno scopo. Per quanto grandi fossero state le prove che Nicola aveva affrontato fino a quel momento, Dio lo stava preparando per una ancora più difficile.

Capitolo 31

«E dopo tutti questi anni non glielo hai ancora detto?» chiese Nicholas a Dimitri. Erano passati dodici anni da quando Nicholas era uscito di prigione, e stavano parlando della borsa d’oro che Dimitri aveva lanciato nella finestra aperta di Anna Maria cinque anni prima.

«Non me l’ha mai chiesto», rispose Dimitri. «E anche se le dicessi che sono stato io, non mi crederebbe. È convinta che sia stato tu. “

“Ma come avrei potuto, quando sapeva che ero in prigione?” Era una conversazione che avevano già avuto in passato, ma Nicholas la trovava ancora incredibile. Dimitri insisteva nel mantenere segreto il suo gesto, proprio come aveva fatto Nicholas ogni volta che era stato possibile. 

‘Inoltre’, aggiunse Dimitri, “ha ragione. Sei stato davvero tu a ispirarmi a farle quel regalo, dato che avevi già donato alla sua famiglia due sacchi d’oro in modo simile. Quindi, in senso stretto, è stato proprio un tuo gesto”.

Nicholas dovette ammettere che il ragionamento di Dimitri aveva una sua logica. “Ma non è stato nemmeno un mio gesto. È stato Cristo a ispirarmi”.

A quel punto Dimitri ammise: «E fu Cristo a ispirare anche me. Credimi, Anna Maria lo sa bene quanto chiunque altro. La sua fede è più profonda che mai. Da quando ti ha incontrato, continua a rendere grazie a Dio per ogni cosa».

E con questo, Nicholas fu soddisfatto, purché alla fine fosse Dio a ricevere il merito. Perché, come Nicholas aveva insegnato a Dimitri anni prima, non c’è nulla che abbiamo che non provenga prima da Dio.

Cambiando argomento, Nicholas disse: «Sei sicuro che a lei non dispiacerà che tu stia via per tre mesi? Posso sempre trovare qualcun altro che mi accompagni». 

«È completamente e assolutamente felice che io venga con te», disse Dimitri. «Sa quanto sia importante per te e sa quanto significhi anche per me. Non me lo perderei per nulla al mondo».

Stavano discutendo dei loro piani per partecipare al Concilio di Nicea quell’estate. Nicholas era stato invitato su richiesta speciale dell’imperatore e ogni vescovo poteva portare con sé un assistente personale. Nicholas lo chiese a Dimitri non appena ricevette l’invito.

Il Concilio di Nicea sarebbe stato un evento straordinario. Quando Nicola aprì per la prima volta la lettera che lo invitava a partecipare, non riuscì a crederci. Tante cose erano cambiate nel mondo da quando era uscito di prigione dodici anni prima.

Eppure eccola lì, una convocazione dell’imperatore romano a presentarsi davanti a lui nel periodo pasquale. L’unica convocazione che un vescovo avrebbe potuto ricevere sotto l’imperatore Diocleziano sarebbe stata un invito a un’esecuzione: la sua! Ma sotto la guida di Costantino, la vita dei cristiani era cambiata radicalmente.

Costantino non solo aveva firmato l’editto che richiedeva una vera tolleranza nei confronti dei cristiani, che portò alla loro liberazione dalla prigione, ma aveva anche iniziato a restituire loro le proprietà che erano state confiscate sotto il suo predecessore. Costantino stava persino iniziando a finanziare la costruzione e la riparazione di molte delle chiese che erano state distrutte da Diocleziano. Era l’inizio di una nuova ondata di grazia per i cristiani, dopo una persecuzione così intensa.

Come ulteriore segno del nuovo sostegno di Costantino alla causa del cristianesimo, egli aveva convocato un raduno di oltre 300 vescovi tra i più importanti del paese. Questo raduno avrebbe avuto due scopi per Costantino: avrebbe unificato la chiesa all’interno dell’impero precedentemente frammentato e non avrebbe compromesso le sue speranze di riportare l’unità in tutto il paese. In qualità di leader del popolo, Costantino affermò che era sua responsabilità provvedere al loro benessere spirituale. Pertanto, si impegnò a partecipare e a presiedere personalmente questo storico concilio. Si sarebbe tenuto nella città di Nicea, a partire dalla primavera di quell’anno e sarebbe durato diversi mesi fino all’estate.

Quando Nicola ricevette l’invito, lodò silenziosamente Dio per il cambiamento di direzione del suo mondo. Sebbene la Grande Persecuzione avesse rafforzato la fede di molti di coloro che erano sopravvissuti, quella stessa persecuzione aveva avuto un impatto negativo sulla capacità di molti altri, limitando gravemente la loro capacità di insegnare, predicare e raggiungere coloro che li circondavano con il messaggio di Cristo che cambiava la vita. 

Ora quelle barriere erano state rimosse, con il sostegno e l’approvazione dello stesso imperatore. Le uniche barriere che rimanevano erano quelle nei cuori e nelle menti di coloro che avrebbero ascoltato la buona novella e avrebbero dovuto decidere da soli cosa farne. 

Per quanto riguarda Nicola, la sua influenza e il rispetto di cui godeva a Myra e nella regione circostante erano cresciuti. La sua grande ricchezza era scomparsa da tempo, poiché ne aveva dato via la maggior parte quando aveva visto arrivare la Grande Persecuzione, e ciò che era rimasto era stato scoperto e saccheggiato mentre era in prigione. Ma ciò che aveva perso in ricchezza lo aveva compensato in influenza, poiché il suo cuore e le sue azioni erano ancora orientati alla generosità, indipendentemente da ciò che aveva o non aveva da dare. Dopo aver dato così tanto di sé alle persone che lo circondavano, era naturale che fosse tra coloro che furono scelti per partecipare al prossimo concilio. 

Si sarebbe rivelato uno degli eventi più importanti della storia, per non parlare di uno dei più memorabili della sua vita, ma non necessariamente per un motivo che avrebbe voluto ricordare.

PARTE 6

Capitolo 32

Sebbene i cristiani godessero di un nuova forma di libertà sotto Costantino, il futuro del cristianesimo era ancora a rischio. Le minacce non provenivano più dall’esterno della Chiesa, ma dal suo interno. Nei ranghi della Chiesa in crescita cominciarono a sorgere delle fazioni, con intense discussioni su vari temi teologici con implicazioni molto pratiche. 

In particolare, un gruppo molto ristretto, ma molto attivo, guidato da un uomo di nome Ario, aveva iniziato ad attirare l’attenzione delle persone, mettendo in dubbio che Gesù fosse effettivamente divino.

Gesù era solo un uomo? Oppure era, realmente, un tutt’uno con Dio nella sua stessa essenza? Per uomini come Nicola e Demetrio, la questione era difficilmente discutibile, perché avevano dedicato tutta la loro vita a seguire Gesù come loro Signore. Avevano rischiato tutto per seguirlo in parole e opere. Egli era il loro Signore, il loro Salvatore, la loro Luce e la loro Speranza. Come per molti altri che avrebbero preso parte al Concilio, non erano le vesti o gli abiti che indossavano a testimoniare la loro fede in Cristo, ma le cicatrici e le ferite che portavano sulla loro pelle per aver sofferto per Lui. Minacciati di morte, avevano rischiato la vita in virtù della loro fede in Cristo come divino, e non dell’imperatore Diocleziano. Non vi era alcun dubbio sulla questione per loro. Tuttavia c’erano ancora alcuni che, come Ario, ritenevano che questa fosse una questione da discutere.

Ario era animato dallo zelo di vedere la gente adorare un solo Dio, non poteva concepire che un uomo, anche se buono come Gesù, fosse tutt’uno con Dio senza bestemmiare il nome stesso di Dio. In questo, non era poi così diverso da coloro che avevano perseguitato Gesù mentre era ancora in vita. Persino alcuni che avevano vissuto allora, avevano assistito ai suoi miracoli con i propri occhi e avevano ascoltato le parole di Gesù con le proprie orecchie, non riuscirono a capire che Gesù dicesse il vero nell’affermare: «Io e il Padre siamo uno». E per questo portarono Gesù da Erode e poi da Pilato, per farlo crocifiggere.

Da ragazzo, Nicola si era interrogato sulle affermazioni di Gesù. Ma quando si trovò a Betlemme, alla fine, tutto acquisì un senso – che Dio stesso era sceso dal cielo sulla terra come essere umano, per farsi carico dei peccati del mondo una volta per tutte, come Dio in carne e ossa.

Ario, tuttavia, era come l’apostolo Paolo quando ancora non aveva incontrato Gesù sulla via di Damasco. Prima dell’esperienza che gli cambiò la vita, l’apostolo voleva proteggere ciò che sentiva essere la divinità di Dio, perseguitando tutti coloro che adoravano Gesù come Dio. Infatti, secondo Paolo, nessun uomo poteva considerarsi un tutt’uno con Dio.

Come Ario, Paolo non poteva credere alle affermazioni di Gesù e dei suoi seguaci. Sulla via di Damasco, però, mentre si stava dirigendo pieno di zelo a cercare e uccidere i cristiani, Paolo incontrò il Cristo vivente in una visione che lo accecò fisicamente, ma lo risvegliò alla Verità, in spirito. Nei giorni successivi, gli occhi di Paolo guarirono e lui si pentì dei suoi vani sforzi. Si fece battezzare nel nome di Gesù e da allora iniziò a predicare che Gesù non era solo un uomo, ma che le Sue affermazioni in cui dichiarava di essere uno con il Padre erano assolutamente vere. Paolo offrì la sua vita in adorazione e servizio a Cristo, e dovette sopportare, come Nicola, la prigionia e la minaccia costante di morte a causa della sua fede. 

Ario era più simile ai leader religiosi del tempo di Gesù che, pieni di zelo per difendere Dio, crocifissero il Signore di tutta la creazione. Si sentiva giustificato nel cercare di ottenere l’appoggio dei vescovi riguardo la sua posizione.

 Nicola e Demetrio non pensavano che le sue idee potessero raccogliere molti sostenitori. Tuttavia, si accorsero ben presto che il carisma personale di Ario e le sue eccellenti capacità oratorie avrebbero potuto esercitare un certo ascendente su alcuni vescovi che ancora non avevano considerato le sue idee e le sue conseguenze.

Nicola e Demetrio, invece, come l’apostolo Paolo, l’apostolo Giovanni e decine di migliaia di altri nel tempo trascorso da quando Gesù visse, morì e risuscitò dai morti, avevano scoperto che Gesù era, fortunatamente e soprannaturalmente, del tutto umano ma anche del tutto divino.

Ma a che conclusione sarebbero arrivati gli altri vescovi? E quale verità avrebbero insegnato alle innumerevoli generazioni a venire? Questa sarebbe diventata una delle questioni cruciali che dovevano essere determinate nella riunione di Nicea. Sebbene Nicola fosse interessato a questo dibattito, non aveva idea che stava per giocare un ruolo chiave nel suo esito.

Capitolo 33

Dopo una grandiosa processione di vescovi e sacerdoti, un coro di chierichetti e le parole di apertura di Costantino, uno dei primi argomenti affrontati al concilio fu proprio quello di Ario: se Gesù Cristo fosse o meno divino. L’uomo espose le sue argomentazioni con grande eloquenza e persuasione alla presenza di Costantino e del resto dell’assemblea. Gesù, sosteneva, era forse il primo di tutti gli esseri creati. Ma essere coetaneo di Dio, uno nella sostanza e nell’essenza con Lui, era impossibile, almeno secondo Ario. Nessuno può essere uno con Dio, affermava.

Nicola ascoltava in silenzio, insieme agli altri vescovi presenti in quell’immensa sala. Il rispetto per l’oratore, soprattutto in presenza dell’imperatore, prevaleva su qualsiasi tipo di borbottio o disturbo che potesse accompagnare altri tipi di incontri come questo, specialmente su un argomento di tale intensità. Ma più a lungo Ario parlava, più diventava difficile per il vescovo rimanere in silenzio.

Dopo tutto, i genitori di Nicola avevano dato la loro vita in virtù del servire Cristo, il loro Signore. Nicola stesso era stato sopraffatto dalla presenza di Dio a Betlemme, proprio nel luogo in cui Dio fece la sua prima apparizione come Uomo in carne e ossa. Demetrio, Samuele e Rut erano stati colpiti in modo simile da quella visita a Betlemme. Avevano camminato sulla collina di Gerusalemme dove il Re dei re era stato messo a morte dai capi religiosi – capi che, proprio come Ario, dubitavano delle affermazioni di Gesù sul Suo essere uno con Dio.

Nicola aveva sempre saputo che Gesù era diverso da qualsiasi altro uomo che fosse mai esistito. E dopo essere morto, Gesù era risorto, era apparso ai dodici discepoli e in seguito anche a più di cinquecento persone che vivevano a Gerusalemme a quel tempo. Che tipo di uomo poteva fare una cosa del genere? Era solo un’allucinazione di massa? Era solo un’illusione da parte di fanatici religiosi? Ma non si trattava di semplici fan, bensì di seguaci disposti a rinunciare anche alla propria vita per il loro Signore e Salvatore.

Le argomentazioni continuavano a scorrere nella testa di Nicola. Il profeta Michea non aveva forse previsto, centinaia di anni prima della nascita di Gesù, che il Messia sarebbe stato “dai tempi antichi, dai giorni eterni”? L’apostolo Giovanni aveva detto che Gesù “in principio era con Dio”, concludendo che Gesù “era Dio”. 

Come altri avevano cercato di suggerire, Ario disse che Gesù non aveva mai affermato di essere Dio. Ma Nicola conosceva le Scritture abbastanza bene da sapere che Gesù aveva detto: «Io e il Padre siamo una cosa sola. Chi ha visto me, ha visto il Padre… Non credi che io sono nel Padre e che il Padre è in me?». Anche i detrattori di Gesù, all’epoca in cui visse, dissero che il motivo per cui volevano lapidarlo era perché affermava di essere Dio. Le Scritture dicono che un giorno lo misero alle strette e Gesù disse loro: «Io vi ho fatto vedere molte buone opere da parte del Padre mio; per quali di esse mi lapidate?». Gli risposero: «Noi non ti lapidiamo per nessuna opera buona, ma per bestemmia, e perché tu che sei uomo ti fai Dio».

Gesù aveva di sicuro affermato di essere Dio, una dichiarazione che lo aveva messo in difficoltà più di una volta. Ciò dimostrava che o era un pazzo, un bugiardo, oppure diceva la verità.

La mente di Nicola era piena di passaggi come questi, oltre che di ricordi degli anni in prigione, anni che non avrebbe mai più riavuto, e tutto perché non era disposto ad adorare Diocleziano come Dio, ma era pienamente disposto ad adorare Gesù come Dio. Come poteva rimanere in silenzio e lasciare che Ario continuasse a parlare così? Come potevano tutti gli altri nella stanza sopportarlo, pensava? Nicola non capiva.

«Non c’era nulla di divino in lui». Ario disse con convinzione. «Era solo un uomo, come tutti noi».

Senza preavviso e senza altra esitazione, Nicola si alzò. Poi i suoi piedi, come se avessero mente propria, cominciarono a camminare deliberatamente e con cautela attraverso l’enorme sala verso Ario. Ario continuò a parlare finché Nicola non si trovò di fronte a lui.

L’oratore allora si fermò. Una violazione del protocollo simile non aveva precedenti.

Nel silenzio che seguì, Nicola voltò le spalle ad Ario e si abbassò la tunica sulla schiena, rivelando le orrende cicatrici che si era procurato in prigione. Nicola disse: «Non me le sono fatte “solo per un uomo”».

Voltandosi di nuovo verso Ario e affrontandolo di petto, Nicola vide il sorriso compiaciuto tornare sul volto del presbitero che disse: «Beh, sembra che tu ti sia sbagliato». Poi riprese il suo discorso come se nulla fosse.

In quel momento Nicola fece l’impensabile. Senza altro pensiero se non quello di impedire a quell’uomo di parlare contro il suo Signore e Salvatore, e sotto lo sguardo dell’imperatore e di tutti i presenti, Nicola strinse il pugno. Tirò indietro il braccio e sferrò un colpo ad Ario in pieno volto.

Il presbitero inciampò e cadde all’indietro, sia per l’impatto del colpo sia per lo shock che ne derivò. Anche Nicola rimase stordito insieme a tutti i presenti in sala. Con gli stessi passi deliberati e intenzionali che aveva compiuto per avvicinarsi a quell’uomo, Nicola ora tornò alla sua sedia e riprese posto.

Un sussulto collettivo risuonò nella sala quando Nicola colpì Ario, seguito da un’esplosione di trambusto quando Nicola si sedette di nuovo al suo posto. L’interruzione minacciava di gettare nel caos l’intera procedura. La stragrande maggioranza dei presenti nella sala sembrava voler saltare in piedi e tributare a Nicola una standing ovation per questo atto audace – compreso, dall’espressione del suo volto, persino lo stesso imperatore! Ma per gli altri, Ario in testa, non ci furono parole di sdegno. Tutti sapevano quale terribile offesa Nicola avesse appena commesso. Era infatti illegale, per chiunque, usare violenza di qualsiasi tipo in presenza dell’imperatore. La punizione per un atto simile era il taglio immediato della mano.

Costantino conosceva la legge, naturalmente, ma conosceva anche Nicola. Una volta aveva persino fatto un sogno su di lui, in cui quest’ultimo lo avvertiva di concedere una sospensione dell’esecuzione a tre uomini della sua corte, avvertimento che Costantino ascoltò e mise in pratica nella vita reale. Quando l’imperatore condivise quel sogno con uno dei suoi generali, questi gli raccontò ciò che Nicola aveva fatto per i tre uomini innocenti a Myra. Il generale, infatti, era uno dei tre che aveva assistito di persona al coraggio di Nicola. 

Anche se l’atto di Nicola contro Ario poteva apparire avventato, Costantino ammirava Nicola. Conosciuto per la sua prontezza di riflessi e per la rapidità d’azione, l’imperatore alzò la mano e fece calare un istantaneo silenzio nella sala. «Questa è certamente una sorpresa per tutti noi», disse. «E sebbene la pena per un atto del genere in mia presenza sia chiara, preferirei rimandare la questione ai leader del Consiglio. Questo congresso è vostro e mi rimetto alla vostra saggezza per condurlo come meglio crediate».

Costantino aveva guadagnato tempo e benevolenza tra le varie fazioni. Il consiglio, nel complesso, sembrava essere d’accordo con la posizione di Nicola, almeno nello spirito, anche se non poteva essere d’accordo con la sua azione avventata. Avrebbe voluto escogitare una qualche forma di punizione, poiché non farlo avrebbe mancato di onorare lo stato di diritto. Tuttavia avendo ricevuto dall’imperatore stesso il permesso di fare ciò che i vescovi ritenevano opportuno, piuttosto che addire alla punizione standard, si sentirono liberi di intraprendere un’altra forma di azione.

Dopo una breve delibera, i leader del Consiglio si trovarono d’accordo e stabilirono che Nicola fosse immediatamente sollevato dalla sua posizione di vescovo, che fosse bandito dal partecipare al resto del concilio di Nicea e che fosse tenuto agli arresti domiciliari all’interno del palazzo. Lì avrebbe potuto attendere qualsiasi altra decisione del consiglio allo scioglimento dell’assemblea di quell’estate. Alla luce del reato commesso, si trattava di una sentenza clemente.

Ma ancor prima di conoscere la sua sorte Nicola aveva cominciato già a punirsi da solo per ciò che aveva appena fatto. In meno di un minuto, era passato dallo sperimentare l’euforia dell’essere su una delle cime più alte della sua vita, al frastorno di trovarsi nelle sue valli più profonde. 

Stava prendendo parte a uno dei più grandi conclavi della storia del mondo, eppure aveva appena fatto qualcosa che sapeva non avrebbe mai potuto ritirare. Le conseguenze delle sue azioni si sarebbero ripercosse su di lui per il resto della sua vita, ne era certo, o almeno per quello che gli rimaneva da vivere. La sensazione che provava poteva essere compresa, forse, solo da chi l’aveva già provata: il peso, la vergogna e l’agonia di un momento di peccato che avrebbe potuto schiacciarlo, se non avesse conosciuto il perdono di Cristo. 

Quando sollevarono Nicola dal suo titolo di vescovo, fu davanti a tutta l’assemblea. Fu spogliato degli abiti vescovili e scortato fuori dalla sala in catene. Ma questo tipo di disonore era un’inezia rispetto all’umiliazione che stava vivendo dentro. Era persino troppo insensibile per piangere.

Capitolo 34

«Che cosa ho fatto?» Nicola chiese a Demetrio mentre i due sedevano in una stanza, nell’angolo più remoto del palazzo. Questa camera era diventata la cella di fortuna di Nicola, che sarebbe stato agli arresti domiciliari per il resto del concilio. Demetrio, sfruttando le sue ormai ampie capacità di accedere ad aree altrimenti non autorizzate, aveva trovato ancora una volta il modo di visitare l’amico in prigione. 

«Che cosa hai fatto?!? Cos’altro avresti potuto fare?», ribatté Demetrio. «Se non l’avessi fatto tu, l’avrebbe fatto sicuramente qualcun altro, o almeno avrebbe dovuto. Con quel pugno hai fatto un favore ad Ario e a tutti noi. Se avesse continuato con la sua diatriba, chissà con quale punizione il Signore stesso si sarebbe abbattuto sull’intera assemblea!». Naturalmente, Demetrio sapeva che Dio era capace di trattenersi, e spesso lo fa, quando la gente inveisce contro di Lui e contro i suoi modi. Egli è molto più clemente di quanto ognuno di noi possa mai esserlo. Ciononostante Demetrio sentiva che le azioni dell’amico erano giustificate.

Nicola, però, non riusciva a vederla così in quel momento. Era più probabile, pensava, che fosse appena riuscito a far guadagnare ad Ario la simpatia di cui aveva bisogno per vincere la sua causa. Sapeva che quando le persone perdono un’argomentazione basata sulla logica, spesso si appellano alle pure emozioni, andando dritti al cuore dei loro ascoltatori, indipendentemente dal fatto che la loro causa abbia o meno senso. E per quanto Ario potesse perdere il suo pubblico sulla base della logica, Nicola sentiva che le sue azioni avrebbero potuto far pendere la bilancia emotiva a favore del presbitero.

Il tormento di questi pensieri martellava la mente di Nicola. Il processo era appena iniziato e lui avrebbe dovuto stare agli arresti domiciliari per i prossimi due mesi. Come avrebbe fatto a sopravvivere a questo assalto di emozioni, giorno dopo giorno, durante quel periodo?

Nicola era cosciente del fatto che questa cella sarebbe stata completamente diversa da quella in cui Diocleziano lo aveva messo per più di dieci anni. Stavolta, sentiva di essersi finito con le sue stesse mani. E sebbene questa prigione fosse una splendida stanza all’interno di un palazzo, per il modo di pensare di Nicola, era molto peggio di quella lurida in cui aveva rischiato di morire. 

Nell’altra cella, era consapevole di esserci finito per le azioni sbagliate di altri. Questo gli dava la sensazione che quello che doveva sopportare, era parte della sofferenza naturale che Gesù aveva detto che sarebbe toccata a tutti i suoi seguaci. Invece, in questa cella sapeva di esserci finito a causa delle sue azioni insensate, azioni che considerava imperdonabili, un pensiero che molti nell’assemblea avrebbero giustamente condiviso. 

Per decenni Nicola era stato conosciuto come un uomo calmo, con forza interiore e dignità posata. Poi, in un solo giorno, aveva perso tutto, e per giunta di fronte all’imperatore! Come avrebbe potuto perdonarsi? «Come posso», chiese a Demetrio: «rimangiarmi quello che ho appena fatto al nome del Signore?».

Demetrio rispose: «Forse Lui non vuole che te lo rimangi. Forse non è quello che pensi di aver fatto al Suo nome che gli sta tanto a cuore, ma quello che hai fatto nel Suo nome. Di sicuro hai fatto quello che io e la stragrande maggioranza dei presenti in sala avremmo voluto fare, se solo avessimo avuto il coraggio di farlo». 

Le parole di Demetrio rimasero nell’aria. Mentre Nicola le contemplava, un lieve sorriso comparve sul suo volto. Forse, dopo tutto, c’era una logica nelle intenzioni del suo cuore che lo avevano spinto a comportarsi così. Voleva sinceramente onorare e difendere il suo Signore, senza in alcun modo distogliere l’attenzione da Lui, il solo a meritarla. Pietro, ricordava, visse un’esperienza simile nel difendere il suo Signore. E Nicola ora si rendeva conto di ciò che Pietro avesse provato quando tagliò l’orecchio a uno degli uomini che erano venuti a catturare il suo Maestro. Gesù disse a Pietro di mettere via la spada e poi guarì l’orecchio dell’uomo. Era ovviamente in grado di difendersi bene da solo, ma Nicola doveva dare credito a Pietro per il suo appassionato modo di difendere il suo Maestro.

Nicola non era ancora convinto di aver fatto la cosa giusta, ma si sentiva in buona compagnia con altri che avevano agito secondo le loro passioni. Le parole di Demetrio lo aiutarono a capire che non era solo nel suo pensiero, e gli fu di conforto il fatto che il suo amico non lo avesse abbandonato del tutto dopo l’accaduto. Il sostegno di Demetrio fu un balsamo lenitivo per l’anima di Nicola e lo aiutò a superare un altro dei momenti più bui della sua vita. 

Sebbene Nicola fosse convinto che il danno causato fosse irreversibile in termini umani – e che Dio avrebbe dovuto lavorare a tempo pieno per far sì che da questa vicenda uscisse qualcosa di buono – Nicola sapeva cosa doveva fare. Anche nel momento della sua più profonda umiliazione, sapeva che la cosa migliore che poteva fare era fare ciò che aveva sempre fatto: riporre la sua totale fede e fiducia in Dio. Ma come? Come poteva credere che Dio fosse in grado di usare questo episodio per il bene?

Come se fosse in grado di leggergli nei pensieri, Demetrio sapeva esattamente ciò di cui Nicola aveva bisogno per aiutarlo ad avere di nuovo fiducia in Dio. Fece, infatti, quello che il suo amico aveva fatto per lui, Samuele e Rut tanti anni prima: gli raccontò una storia.

Capitolo 35

Demetrio iniziò: «Che tipo di storia vorresti ascoltare oggi? Una bella storia o una brutta?». Era il modo in cui Nicola solito introdurre le storie della Bibbia che raccontava a lui, Samuele e Rut durante le loro numerose avventure in Terra Santa. Poi iniziava a deliziare i bambini con un racconto su un personaggio biblico buono o cattivo, oppure con una storia bella o brutta il cui finale era l’opposto di come cominciava.

Nicola alzò lo sguardo con interesse. «Non importa», continuò Demetrio: «perché la storia che devo raccontarti oggi potrebbe essere buona o cattiva. Lo saprai solo alla fine. Ma ho imparato da un buon amico», disse strizzando l’occhio a Nicola: «che il miglior modo per godersi una storia è fidarsi sempre di chi la racconta».

Nicola affermava di osservare le reazioni della gente ogni volta che raccontava storie.

«Quando le persone si fidano del narratore», aveva detto: «apprezzano la storia, qualunque cosa accada, perché loro sanno che il narratore ne conosce il finale. Ma quando invece non si fidano del narratore, le loro emozioni vanno su e giù come una barca in tempesta, a seconda di ciò che accade nella storia. La verità è che solo il narratore sa con certezza come finirà la storia. Quindi, se ti fidi del narratore, puoi godertela dall’inizio alla fine».

Ora toccava a Demetrio raccontare una storia a Nicola. Ne scelse una che riguardava un altro uomo mandato in prigione, un uomo di nome Giuseppe. Demetrio raccontò al suo amico di come la vita di Giuseppe sembrasse avere alti e bassi.

Cominciò: «Il padre di Giuseppe lo amava e gli regalò una bella tunica colorata. Questo è buono, vero?». 

Nicola annuì.

«E invece no, questo era male, perché i fratelli di Giuseppe videro la tunica e furono gelosi di lui e lo vendettero come schiavo. Questo è un male, giusto?”. 

Nicola annuì.

«No, invece fu un bene, perché Giuseppe fu incaricato di gestire le proprietà di un uomo molto ricco. E questo è buono, giusto?». 

Nicola annuì di nuovo.

«No, questo è male», disse Demetrio: «perché la moglie dell’uomo ricco cercò di sedurlo e, quando Giuseppe resistette, lei lo spedì in prigione. E questo è un male, vero?».

Nicola smise di annuire perché sapeva dove il giovane voleva andare a parare.

«No, questo è un bene», disse Demetrio: «perché Giuseppe fu messo a capo di tutti gli altri prigionieri. Li aiutò persino a interpretare i loro sogni. E questo è un bene, no?».

Nicola continuò ad ascoltare con attenzione.

«No, è male, perché dopo aver interpretato i loro sogni, lui chiese a uno degli uomini di aiutarlo a uscire di prigione una volta fuori, ma l’uomo si dimenticò di Giuseppe e lo lasciò lì. Questo è un male, vero?».

Nicola si sentiva come l’uomo abbandonato in prigione.

«No, è un bene! Perché Dio aveva messo Giuseppe nel posto giusto, nel momento giusto. Quando il re d’Egitto fece un sogno ed ebbe bisogno di qualcuno che lo interpretasse, l’uomo che era stato liberato, improvvisamente si ricordò di Giuseppe e gli parlò di lui. 

Il re allora convocò Giuseppe, chiese di interpretare il suo sogno e lui lo fece. Il sovrano rimase così impressionato da metterlo a capo di tutto il suo regno. Come risultato, Giuseppe fu in grado di utilizzare la sua nuova posizione per salvare centinaia di migliaia di vite, tra cui quella di suo padre e persino dei suoi fratelli, proprio quelli che lo avevano venduto. E questo è molto buono!».

«Quindi vedi,» concluse Demetrio: «come ci hai sempre detto tu, non conosciamo il finale del racconto fino a che non arriviamo alla fine. Dio, invece, sapeva cosa stava facendo fin dall’inizio! Ascolta…

  • – al momento giusto, Giuseppe venne alla luce e suo padre lo amò,
  • – così che, al momento giusto, i suoi fratelli lo avrebbero maltrattato;
  • – affinché, al momento giusto, arrivassero i mercanti di schiavi e lo comprassero;
  • – così che, al momento giusto, fosse messo a capo della casa di un uomo ricco, 
  • – affinché, al momento giusto, fosse spedito in prigione;
  • – così che, al momento giusto, fosse messo a capo dei prigionieri;
  • – affinché, al momento giusto, potesse interpretare i loro sogni,
  • – così che, al momento giusto, potesse poi interpretare i sogni del Faraone;
  • – affinché, al momento giusto, diventasse il secondo in comando di tutto l’Egitto; 
  • – di modo che, al momento giusto, Giuseppe si trovasse nell’unico posto al mondo in cui Dio voleva che si trovasse per poter salvare la vita di suo padre e dei suoi fratelli e di molte altre persone!

Durante tutto il suo percorso, Giuseppe non ha mai rinunciato a Dio. Conosceva il segreto per godersi la storia mentre la viveva: si è sempre fidato del narratore, di colui che stava scrivendo la storia della sua vita».

Tutte le paure e i dubbi di Nicola svanirono in quei momenti e lui seppe di potersi fidare del narratore, colui che stava scrivendo la storia della sua vita. Non era ancora finita, per lui, doveva solo confidare nel fatto che lo stesso Dio che lo aveva portato fino a quel capitolo della sua vita, era in grado di condurlo sino al finale.

Nicola guardò Demetrio con un sorriso di ringraziamento, poi chiuse gli occhi. Sarebbero stati due lunghi mesi di attesa prima di conoscere la decisione del Consiglio. Tuttavia sapeva che se fosse riuscito a fidarsi di Dio in quel momento, e poi in quello dopo, entrambi si sarebbero sommati ai minuti, e i minuti sarebbero diventati ore. Le ore si sarebbero trasformate in settimane, poi in mesi, poi in anni. Tutto aveva inizio dalla fiducia in Dio in quel momento, ne era certo.

Con gli occhi ancora chiusi, Nicola ripose la sua piena fede e fiducia nel Signore. La pace di Dio inondò il suo cuore. Ben presto passarono i due mesi. Il consiglio era pronto a prendere le decisioni conclusive su molte questioni, compresa quella che aveva portato Nicola agli arresti domiciliari e lui stava per scoprirne i risultati.

Capitolo 36

«Ce l’hanno fatta!» urlò Demetrio irrompendo dalla porta della stanza di Nicola non appena la guardia del palazzo l’aprì. 

«Ce l’hanno fatta!», ripeté. «Hanno finito! Il consiglio ha votato e ha dato ragione a te! Tutti i trecentodiciotto vescovi, tranne due, si sono schierati con te contro Ario!».

Una sensazione di sollievo percorse tutto il corpo di Nicola.

Anche Demetrio sembrava riuscire a provare lo stesso, mentre guardava la notizia inondare l’intero essere di Nicola.

«Inoltre», proseguì Demetrio: «il Consiglio ha deciso di non prendere ulteriori provvedimenti contro di te!».

Entrambe le notizie erano il miglior risultato che Nicola potesse immaginare. Anche se l’azione di Nicola gli era costata la sua posizione di vescovo, non aveva compromesso l’esito del procedimento. Era persino possibile – anche se non lo avrebbe mai saputo con certezza – che quell’atto avesse, forse, in qualche modo influenzato ciò che avvenne in quei mesi estivi in quello storico concilio.

Pochi minuti dopo l’arrivo di Demetrio, un altro visitatore si presentò alla porta di Nicola. Si trattava di Costantino.

La decisione del Consiglio su cosa fare di Nicola di sicuro era una cosa, ma la decisione di Costantino era un’altra. Una nuova ondata di paura si abbatté su Nicola mentre vagliava le possibilità.

«Nicola», disse l’imperatore: «volevo ringraziarti personalmente per essere venuto qui come mio ospite a Nicea. Voglio scusarmi per quello che hai dovuto sopportare negli ultimi due mesi. Non era quello che avevo previsto per te e sono sicuro che non era nemmeno quello che tu avevi previsto. Ma anche se non hai potuto partecipare al resto del processo, ti assicuro che la tua presenza si è sentita in ogni riunione. Quello che hai fatto quel giorno nella sala mi ha fatto comprendere cosa significhi seguire Cristo più di qualsiasi altra cosa abbia ascoltato nei giorni successivi. Mi farebbe piacere ti facessi sentire in futuro, se fossi disposto di nuovo a essere mio ospite. La prossima volta, però, non resterai nell’angolo più remoto del palazzo. Infine, ho chiesto e ottenuto il permesso dal Consiglio di reintegrarti nella tua posizione di vescovo di Myra. Credo che Colui che ti ha chiamato a servirlo vorrebbe che tu continuassi a fare quello che hai fatto fino a questo momento. Per quanto mi riguarda, lasciami dire, che apprezzo ciò che hai fatto qui più di quanto immagini. Grazie per essere venuto e, quando sarai pronto, sarai libero di tornare a casa».

Nicola aveva ascoltato le parole di Costantino come se fosse in un sogno. Non riusciva a credere alle sue orecchie. Di tutte le parole che l’imperatore aveva appena pronunciato, nessuna gli sembrava migliore di quella finale: casa. Non desiderava altro se non tornare dal gregge che serviva. Era per quelle persone che si era recato a questo importante raduno, per assicurarsi che le Verità che aveva insegnato loro continuassero a essere insegnate in tutta la terra.

Dopo più di due mesi di separazione, domandandosi che fine avrebbero fatto loro e le centinaia di migliaia di persone come loro in futuro influenzate dalle decisioni prese a Nicea, Nicola poteva finalmente tornare a casa. Era di nuovo libero in più di un senso.

PARTE 7

Capitolo 37

Nicola si trovava per l’ultima volta nel suo posto preferito: in riva al mare. Erano passati diciott’anni da quando era tornato a Myra dopo il concilio di Nicea. Nei giorni trascorsi dal ritorno a casa, continuò a servire il Signore come aveva sempre fatto: con tutto il cuore, l’anima, la mente e la forza.

Era giunto sulla riva del mare con Demetrio e Anna Maria, che si erano portati dietro una dei loro nipoti, una bambina di sette anni di nome Rut.

Rut correva avanti e indietro tra le onde, mentre Demetrio e Anna Maria cercavano di seguirla. Nicola aveva il tempo di contemplare il mare e, come spesso faceva, anche l’eternità. 

Ripensando alla sua vita, non seppe mai se davvero era riuscito a realizzare ciò che desiderava: fare la differenza nel mondo. Lungo il cammino aveva intravisto dei cambiamenti, ovviamente, nella vita di persone come Demetrio, Samuele, Rut, Sofia, Cecilia e Anna Maria.

Aveva addirittura imparato da persone come il capitano della nave, il quale quando arrivò a Roma, scoprì che la sua imbarcazione aveva miracolosamente lo stesso peso di quando era salpata da Alessandria, nonostante avesse donato alla gente di Myra del grano per diversi anni. Ricordi come questi incoraggiavano Nicola a credere che Dio lo aveva davvero guidato nelle sue decisioni. 

Tuttavia, conservava lo stesso dei dubbi. Non scoprì mai se ciò che aveva fatto al concilio di Nicea fosse stata la cosa giusta. Non arrivò mai a sapere se le sue conversazioni private con Costantino avessero potuto influenzare la fede personale in Cristo dell’Imperatore.

Fu comunque incoraggiato nell’apprendere che anche la madre di Costantino si era recata in pellegrinaggio in Terra Santa, proprio come aveva fatto lui. Dopo la sua visita, la donna convinse Costantino a costruire chiese nei luoghi sacri che aveva visto. Di recente aveva completato la costruzione di una chiesa a Betlemme nel luogo in cui era nato Gesù e una a Gerusalemme dove Gesù era morto e risorto.

Nicola era consapevole di aver avuto sia successi, sia fallimenti nella sua vita. Ripensandoci, però, non riusciva sempre a distinguerli! Le volte che considerava come delle valli si rivelavano essere cime di montagne, e quelle che pensava come cime si scoprivano valli. La cosa più importante però, ricordava a se stesso, era la fiducia che riponeva nel Signore, sapendo che tutte le cose cooperano al bene per coloro che amano Dio, i quali sono chiamati secondo il suo proposito.

Di ciò che il futuro riservava al mondo, Nicola non ne aveva idea. Ma era sicuro di aver fatto quello che poteva con il tempo a sua disposizione. La sua intenzione fu quella di amare Dio e il prossimo, come Gesù lo aveva chiamato a fare. E dove aveva fallito lungo la strada, confidava che Gesù avrebbe coperto quei fallimenti, proprio come aveva coperto i suoi peccati morendo in croce. 

Come suo padre aveva fatto prima di lui, Nicola guardò di nuovo il mare. Poi, chiudendo gli occhi, chiese a Dio la forza per il prossimo viaggio che stava per intraprendere.

Lasciò che il sole gli scaldasse il viso, poi aprì le mani e fece in modo che la brezza le sollevasse in aria. Lodò Dio mentre quel caldo venticello fluttuava dolcemente tra i suoi polpastrelli.

La piccola Rut fece ritornò dopo aver sguazzato nell’acqua, seguita a ruota da Demetrio e Anna Maria. Guardò, allora, Nicola, con gli occhi chiusi e le mani alzate verso il cielo. Si avvicinò a lui, gli tirò i vestiti e chiese: «Nicola, hai mai visto Dio?».

Lui aprì gli occhi e si rivolse a Rut, poi sorrise a Demetrio e Anna Maria. Guardò il sole, le onde e le miglia di costiera che si estendevano in entrambe le direzioni di fronte ai suoi occhi. Voltò di nuovo il viso verso Rut e disse: «Sì, Rut, ho visto Dio. E più invecchio, più lo vedo ovunque io posi il mio sguardo».

Rut sorrise e Nicola la abbracciò calorosamente. Poi, con la stessa velocità con cui era corsa da lui, ritornò a giocare.

Nicola scambiò un sorriso con Demetrio e Anna Maria, poi anche loro si allontanarono di nuovo, inseguendo Rut lungo la spiaggia.

Guardò un’ultima volta quel bellissimo mare, poi si voltò e si diresse verso casa.

Epilogo

E ora sai qualcosa di più su di me, Demetrio Alexander, e sul mio buon amico Nicola. Quella fu l’ultima volta che lo vidi, fino a stamattina. Mi aveva chiesto se poteva passare qualche giorno da solo, solo lui e il Signore che amava. Mi disse che doveva prepararsi per un altro viaggio. Anna Maria e io avevamo intuito, naturalmente, che cosa intendesse. 

Sapevamo che, forse, si stava preparando per tornare a casa, alla sua vera casa, quella che Gesù aveva detto che avrebbe preparato per quelli di noi che credono in Lui.

Nicola aveva atteso con ansia questo viaggio per tutta la vita. Non che volesse rinnegare un singolo momento dell’esistenza che Dio gli aveva donato qui sulla terra, visto che riconosceva avesse uno scopo unico, altrimenti Dio non l’avrebbe mai creata con tanta bellezza, precisione e meraviglioso mistero.

Ma mentre la sua vita terrena volgeva al termine, lui si dichiarò pronto. Era pronto ad andare e non vedeva l’ora di vedere tutto ciò che Dio aveva in serbo per lui. 

Così questa mattina, quando Nicola mandò a chiamare Anna Maria, me e alcuni altri amici per venire a trovarlo, capimmo che il momento era arrivato.

Quando entrammo in questa stanza, lo trovammo sdraiato sul suo letto, proprio come adesso. Respirava tranquillo e ci fece cenno di avvicinarci. Non riuscivamo a trattenere le lacrime e lui non cercò di fermarci. Sapeva quanto fosse difficile dire addio a chi si ama. Ma ci rese le cose più facili. Sorrise ancora una volta e poi parlò dolcemente, dicendo le stesse parole che aveva pronunciato quando gli raccontai della morte di Rut molti anni prima: «In entrambi i casi siamo vincitori», disse. «In entrambi i casi siamo vincitori».

«Sì, Nicola», dissi. «In entrambi i casi siamo vincitori». Poi nella stanza cadde il silenzio. Nicola chiuse gli occhi e si addormentò per l’ultima volta. 

L’uomo che giaceva davanti a noi dormiva come se fosse una qualunque notte della sua vita. Noi sapevamo, però, che questo era un momento sacro. Era appena entrato alla presenza del Signore. Lo aveva sempre fatto da vivo e noi eravamo certi che lo stesse facendo anche adesso in cielo, Nicola stava camminando, parlando e ridendo con Gesù, questa volta però, faccia a faccia.

Potevamo solo immaginarci cosa Nicola avrebbe detto al suo Signore. Sapevamo, però, con certezza cosa gli avrebbe detto Gesù: «Ben fatto, mio buon servo fedele. Ben fatto. Vieni a condividere la felicità del tuo Maestro». 

Non ho idea di come la storia ricorderà Nicola, se davvero lo farà. Non era un imperatore come Costantino. Non era un tiranno come Diocleziano. Non era un oratore come Ario. Era semplicemente un cristiano, che cercò di vivere la sua fede, toccando una vita alla volta come meglio sapeva fare.

Forse Nicola si chiese davvero se la sua vita avesse fatto qualche differenza. Io so la mia risposta e ora che conoscete la sua storia, vi lascerò decidere in autonomia. Alla fine, credo che solo Dio sappia quante vite sono state toccate da quest’uomo straordinario.

Del resto, so che ognuno di noi ha una sola vita da vivere. Ma se la viviamo nel modo giusto, come Nicola, una vita è abbastanza.

Conclusioni

di Eric Elder

Ciò di cui Nicola era all’oscuro e che chi lo conobbe non avrebbe mai potuto immaginare, era quanto la sua vita avrebbe influenzato altre persone, non solo in tutto il mondo, ma anche per generazioni. 

Per i suoi genitori lui era il figlio adorato, mentre per quelli della sua città il loro vescovo amato. Per noi, però, è diventato celebre con un altro nome: San Nicola.

La parola biblica “santo” significa letteralmente “credente”. La Bibbia parla dei santi di Efeso, dei santi di Roma, dei santi di Filippi e dei santi di Gerusalemme. In questi casi la parola si riferisce ai credenti che si trovavano in quelle città. Così Nicola divenne giustamente noto come “San Nicola” o, per dirla in altro modo “Nicola, il credente”. La traduzione latina è “Santa Klaus”, in olandese “Sinterklaas”, da cui deriva il nome “Santa Claus”.

Il suo buon nome e le sue buone azioni furono fonte di ispirazione per così tanti, che il giorno in cui passò da questa all’altra vita, il 6 dicembre 343 d.C., tuttora è una data festeggiata in tutto il mondo. 

Sono state raccontate molte leggende su Nicola nel corso degli anni, alcune delle quali gli attribuiscono qualità straordinarie. Tuttavia il motivo per il quale tante leggende di questo tipo si diffondono, comprese quelle riguardanti San Nicola, si trova proprio nella straordinarietà della vita delle persone di cui narrano. Erano così buone o così rispettate che veniva loro attribuita ogni buona azione, come se fossero stati loro a compierla.

Sebbene non tutti i racconti di Nicola possano essere rintracciati nei primi documenti che lo riguardavano, i dati registrati, più vicini al periodo di quando era in vita, riportano molte delle storie presenti in questo libro. Per aiutarvi a fare una cernita, ecco quello che sappiamo: 

  • – Nicola nacque tra il 260 e il 280 d.C. a Patara, una città che è possibile visitare ancora oggi in Turchia, sulla costa settentrionale del Mar Mediterraneo.
  • – I genitori di Nicola erano cristiani devoti che morirono durante una pestilenza quando Nicola era un ragazzo, lasciandogli una cospicua eredità.
  • – Nicola fece pellegrinaggio in Terra Santa e si trasferì lì per alcuni anni, prima di fare ritorno nella sua provincia di origine, la Licia.
  • – Nicola attraversò il Mar Mediterraneo su una nave che fu colta da una tempesta. Dopo aver pregato, l’imbarcazione raggiunse la destinazione come se qualcuno avesse miracolosamente tenuto fermo il timone. Il timone di una nave è chiamato anche barra e i marinai del Mediterraneo, ancora oggi, si augurano buona fortuna dicendo: «Che Nicola tenga la barra!»
  • – Quando Nicola tornò dalla Terra Santa, si stabilì nella città di Myra, a circa 30 miglia dalla sua città natale, Patara. Divenne vescovo di Myra e visse lì il resto della sua vita. 
  • – Nicola fece, in segreto, tre donazioni d’oro in tre diverse occasioni a un uomo le cui figlie dovevano essere vendute come schiave, perché non aveva denaro da offrire ai potenziali mariti come dote. La famiglia scoprì che Nicola era il misterioso donatore durante uno dei tentativi ed è ecco perché oggi ne conosciamo la storia. In questa versione, abbiamo aggiunto il colpo di scena in cui a consegnare il terzo sacchetto di monete è Demetrio, per catturare l’idea che, all’epoca come anche ai giorni nostri, si facevano molti doni a nome di San Nicola, noto proprio per queste azioni. Il tema della redenzione è così strettamente associato alla storia del Santo, che se oggi si passa davanti a un banco dei pegni, ci si accorgerà spesso di tre palline d’oro nel logo, che rappresentano i tre sacchi di monete che Nicola regalò per risparmiare a quelle ragazze il loro sfortunato destino.
  • – Nicola difese la vita di tre uomini innocenti, ingiustamente condannati a morte da un magistrato di Myra, prendendo la spada direttamente dalla mano del boia.
  • – “Nicola, vescovo di Myra” è riportato in alcuni, ma non su tutti, documenti storici che menzionano i partecipanti al vero Concilio di Nicea, convocato dall’imperatore Costantino nel 325 d.C. Una delle decisioni principali del Concilio riguardava la divinità di Cristo, che portò alla stesura del Credo di Nicea, che ancora oggi viene recitato in molte chiese. Alcuni storici sostengono che il nome di Nicola non compaia in tutti i registri del Concilio a causa del suo allontanamento forzato dall’assemblea, dopo che colpì Ario per aver negato che Cristo fosse divino. Il nome di Nicola, però, viene menzionato in almeno cinque di questi antichi registri, compreso il primo manoscritto greco dell’evento.
  • – Il Credo di Nicea fu adottato dal Concilio di Nicea diventando una delle più diffuse e brevi dichiarazioni di fede cristiana. La versione originale recita, in parte, come tradotto dal greco: “Credo in un solo Dio, Padre onnipotente, Creatore del cielo e della terra, di tutte le cose visibili e invisibili. Credo in un solo Signore, Gesù Cristo, unigenito Figlio di Dio, nato dal Padre prima di tutti i secoli: Dio da Dio, Luce da Luce, Dio vero da Dio vero, generato, non creato, della stessa sostanza del Padre; per mezzo di lui tutte le cose sono state create. Per noi uomini e per la nostra salvezza discese dal cielo, e si è incarnato e si è fatto uomo. Soffrì e il terzo giorno è risuscitato, è salito al cielo. E di nuovo verrà, nella gloria, per giudicare i vivi e i morti…” Le versioni successive, a partire già dal 381 d.C., hanno modificato e chiarito alcune delle espressioni originali, risultando in alcuni casi simili ma non del tutto identiche a quelle oggi in uso.
  • – Si narra che Nicola abbia fatto molto per la gente di Myra, tra cui assicurarsi il grano di una nave che viaggiava da Alessandria d’Egitto a Roma, salvando quella regione da una carestia. 
  • – La madre di Costantino, Elena, visitò la Terra Santa e incoraggiò Costantino a costruire chiese nei posti, secondo lei, di maggiore rilievo per la fede cristiana. Gli edifici furono costruiti proprio in quei luoghi, indicati dai credenti locali, in cui era nato Gesù e in cui era morto e risorto. La Chiesa della Natività a Betlemme e la Chiesa del Santo Sepolcro a Gerusalemme, furono distrutte e ricostruite molte volte nel corso degli anni, ma sempre negli stessi luoghi in cui la madre di Costantino, e probabilmente Nicola stesso, le avevano viste.
  • – La data di morte di Nicola è stata fissata al 6 dicembre 343 d.C. ed è possibile visitare ancora la sua tomba nella moderna città di Demre, in Turchia, un tempo conosciuta come Myra, nella provincia di Licia. Le ossa di Nicola furono rimosse dalla tomba nel 1087 d.C. da alcuni uomini provenienti dall’Italia che temevano potessero essere distrutte o trafugate, dato che il Paese era stato invaso. Furono poi portate nella città di Bari, dove ancora oggi sono sepolte.

Delle molte altre storie raccontate o attribuite a Nicola, è difficile sapere con certezza quali siano realmente accadute e quali attribuite semplicemente a lui in virtù del suo già buon nome e popolarità. Per esempio, nel XII secolo cominciarono a emergere storie su come Nicola avesse riportato in vita tre bambini, brutalmente uccisi. Anche se i primi resoconti registrati di questa storia sono apparsi solo più di 800 anni dopo la morte di Nicola, questa storia è una delle più frequentemente associate a lui nelle opere d’arte religiosa, in cui vengono rappresentati tre bambini risuscitati, davanti al vescovo. Abbiamo cercato di includere l’essenza di questa storia in questo romanzo sotto forma dei tre orfani che Nicola incontrò in Terra Santa e che riportò in vita, almeno spiritualmente. 

Anche se tutti questi racconti aggiuntivi non si possono assegnare totalmente a Nicola, possiamo dire che la sua vita e il suo ricordo hanno esercitato un effetto così profondo nella storia, che più chiese in tutto il mondo portano il nome di “San Nicola” più di qualsiasi altro personaggio, al di fuori dei discepoli originari.

Qualcuno si chiede se sia giusto credere in San Nicola. Probabilmente lui non si preoccuperebbe poi tanto se crediate o meno in lui, ma gli interesserebbe di più che crediate in Colui in cui lui ha creduto, Gesù Cristo. 

Un’immagine popolare dei giorni nostri mostra il Santo con il cappello al suo fianco, inginocchiato davanti a Gesù Bambino nella mangiatoia. Sebbene questa scena non avrebbe mai potuto realizzarsi nella vita vera, dato che San Nicola nacque quasi 300 anni dopo la nascita di Cristo, l’intenzione dell’artista non potrebbe essere più precisa. Nicola fu un vero credente in Gesù e lodava, adorava e viveva la sua vita al servizio di Cristo. 

San Nicola non avrebbe mai voluto che la sua storia sostituisse quella di Gesù nella mangiatoia, ma avrebbe voluto che la sua storia indicasse Gesù nella mangiatoia. Ecco perché abbiamo scritto questo libro.

Mentre le storie inserite in quest’opera sono state selezionate tra le tante che avevano come scopo la narrazione delle vicende del Santo nel corso degli anni, qui, però, sono state riportate affinché possiate credere – non solo in Nicola, bensì in Gesù Cristo, il suo Salvatore. Questi racconti sono stati scritti per lo stesso motivo per cui l’apostolo Giovanni riportò le vicende di Gesù nella Bibbia. Giovanni disse di aver scritto il suo vangelo:

… affinché voi crediate che Gesù è il Cristo, il Figlio di Dio e affinché, credendo, abbiate vita nel suo nome.” (Giovanni 20:31).

Nicola desidererebbe lo stesso per voi. Vorrebbe che vi convertiste in ciò che era lui: un credente.

Se non l’avete mai fatto, riponete oggi la vostra fede in Gesù Cristo, chiedendogli di perdonare i vostri peccati e di darvi la garanzia che vivrete con Lui per sempre. 

Se avete già riposto la vostra fede in Cristo, lasciate che questa storia vi ricordi quanto sia realmente prezioso credere in Gesù. Rinnovate oggi il vostro impegno a servire Cristo come lo ha fatto Nicola: con tutto il cuore, l’anima, la mente e la forza. Dio farà davvero in modo che tutte le cose cooperino per il bene per coloro che lo amano. Come dice la Bibbia:

“Or noi sappiamo che tutte le cose cooperano al bene per coloro che amano Dio, i quali sono chiamati secondo il suo proponimento”. (Romani 8:28).

Grazie per aver letto questo libro speciale su quest’uomo speciale, prego che il vostro Natale sia felice e luminoso. Come disse Clement Moore nella sua, ormai, celebre poesia, Una Visita da San Nicola:

Buon Natale a tutti, e a tutti una buona notte!”.

Eric Elder

Sugli Autori

Eric e Lana Elder hanno scritto numerose storie di Natale che hanno affascinato e ispirato migliaia di persone nel contesto di una produzione natalizia annuale nota come The Bethlehem Walk.

San Nicola: Il Credente segna il debutto del loro primo racconto natalizio completo. Eric e Lana hanno anche collaborato ad altri diversi libri d’ispirazione, tra cui:

  • Two Weeks With God
  • What God Says About Sex
  • Exodus: Lessons In Freedom
  • Jesus: Lessons In Love
  • Acts: Lessons In Faith
  • Nehemiah: Lessons In Rebuilding
  • Ephesians: Lessons In Grace
  • Israel: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • Israel For Kids: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • The Top 20 Passages In The Bible
  • Romans: Lessons In Renewing Your Mind
  • Making The Most Of The Darkness

Per ordinare o saperne di più, visita il sito:

www.InspiringBooks.com

Contact the Author

I love hearing from my readers! To contact me, visit ericelder.com

Write With Me! NOTEBOOK!!!

A COMPANION GUIDE to help you WRITE & SELF-PUBLISH that book on your heart!
by Eric Elder

Ready to write? Roll up your sleeves and write with me AN ENTIRE BOOK from cover to cover!

I’ve written and self-published over 35 books (this is #37!) and helped dozens of others do the same. I’d love to help you!

Eric Elder

Read below or download the PDF
Also available in Paperback

Preface

This book is a companion guide to my original book Write With Me! in which I describe how I’ve written and self-published 36 books (this is #37!).

You can read the chapters in Write With Me! then answer the prompts in this book to get great start on creating your own book from cover to cover!

Just start with Chapter 1 and answer the questions as best you know how. You may be surprised that within a few weeks you’ll have a complete version of your book, even if in simplified form! 

My main encouragement with both of these books is to help you WRITE & SELF-PUBLISH that book on your heart, getting it out of your head and into a form that others can enjoy. If the stories on your heart have helped you, I know they’ll help others, too!

More than 30 years ago, I was given a wall hanging from a young man I met on a missions trip. Something I said had touched him deeply, and he wanted to encourage me that what I said mattered. I pray they will encourage you.

“God sends each person into this world with a special message to deliver, with a special song to sing, with a special act of love to bestow. No one else can speak your message or sing your song or offer your act of love. God has entrusted these only to you.” 

A few years ago, when I was in the throes of writing one of my books, my friend Greg Potzer (of This Day’s Thought at thisdaysthought.com) sent me 21 quotes on writing and perseverance. The quotes gave me the boost I needed to keep writing. I’ve included them below in hopes they’ll give you a boost, too.

Remember, words have power. God created the whole world and everything in it with just a few words. Maybe your words go forth and touch the world, too.

Eric Elder

21 Quotes on Writing and Perseverance

I only write when I am inspired. Fortunately I am inspired at 9 o’clock every morning. William Faulkner

A poem is never finished, only abandoned. Paul Valery

Of the making of books there is no end. King Solomon (Ecclesiastes 12:12)

If it takes a lot of words to say what you have in mind, give it more thought. Dennis Roch

I have made this letter longer than usual, because I lack the time to make it short. Blaise Pascal

From my first experience of writing a screenplay, I had learned something about the process of revision. You can always make something better, and if you make it worse, you’ll know it. I had learned to have no fear of rewriting. All writers should be so lucky.  John Irving

You know that I write slowly. This is chiefly because I am never satisfied until I have said as much as possible in a few words, and writing briefly takes far more time than writing at length. Carl Gauss

The story is told of an accomplished artist who was applying the finishing touches to a bronze sculpture. He kept filing, scraping, and polishing every little surface of his masterpiece. “When will it be done?” asked an observer. “Never,” came the reply. “I just keep working and working until they come and take it away.” Unknown

“Many of life’s failures are people who did not realize how close they were to success when they gave up.” Thomas Edison

If you knew how much work went into it, you wouldn’t call it genius. Michelangelo

I know God will not give me anything I can’t handle. I just wish that He didn’t trust me so much. Mother Teresa

All our dreams can come true – if we have the courage to pursue them. Walt Disney

If you have built castles in the air, your work need not be lost; that is where they should be. Now put the foundations under them. Henry David Thoreau

Be who you are and say what you feel, because those who mind don’t matter and those who matter don’t mind. Dr. Seuss

Quit now, you’ll never make it. If you disregard this advice, you’ll be halfway there. David Zucker

There are two ways to live your life. One is as though nothing is a miracle. The other is as though every thing is a miracle. Albert Einstein

Most of my friends who are novelists have told me that they never know the end of their novels when they start writing them; they find it peculiar that for my novels I need to know, and I need to know not just the ending, but every significant event in the main characters’ lives. When I finally write the first sentence, I want to know everything that happens, so that I am not inventing the story as I write it; rather, I am remembering a story that has already happened. The invention is over by the time I begin. All I want to be thinking of is the language- the sentence I am writing, and the sentence that follows it. Just the language. John Irving

Do not write so that you can be understood, write so that you cannot be misunderstood. Epictetus

No tears in the writer, no tears in the reader. Robert Frost

Words are, of course, the most powerful drug used by mankind. Rudyard Kipling

When you sell a man a book, you don’t sell him 12 ounces of paper and ink and glue – you sell him a whole new life. Christopher Morley

1. Write with me!

Describe the book on your heart in two or three sentences. What is it you really want to write about?

Write the “working title” of the book on your heart:

Write your name as the author: 

2. The beauty of self-publishing

What is your greatest barrier to writing and publishing that book on your heart? 

How might you overcome it?3. Think “books,”
not “book”

If you were to write multiple books, what are a few of the topics you’d write about?

4. Which book to write FIRST? 

Which of the books on your heart would you like to write FIRST? Think about what you know, what you want to know, and what people ask you about the most. 

What do you already know? 

It’s been said that an “expert” in a field is someone who has spent 10,000 hours working in that area. By this definition, what are there some areas in which you’ve likely spent 10,000 hours?

What do you want to know? 

What other topics are you curious about that you might want to spend a book-length amount of time researching, writing, publishing, and promoting?

What topics do people ask you about the most? 

What are some topics which people already come to you for advice?

5. What’s your main theme?

After people read your book, what do you want them to know, to feel, and to do? Answer each separately.

What do you want readers to KNOW?

What do you want readers to FEEL?

What do you want readers to DO?

Based on your answers, is there a good “working title” and subtitle that you could give your book? 

List a few ideas here. If one title stands out above the others, write it along with your name in the “working title” box on Page 3 of this book! This might not be your final title, but that’s okay! It will at least support your main theme and keep you moving forward.

6. Which stories support your theme?

Whether fiction or non-fiction, sci-fi or mystery, the stories you want within your covers will be the meat of your book. In two or three words, which stories, remembered or imagined, come to your mind that would support your main theme?

As an example, here are a few of the stories I wanted to include in our book St. Nicholas: The Believer. 

  • His parents died in a plague
  • He traveled to the Holy Land
  • He became Bishop of Myra
  • He saved three girls from devastation
  • He was imprisoned for his faith
  • He attended the Council of Nicaea
  • He died, and his legacy began • Start your list here. Jot down a few words for each story that supports your main theme. Don’t edit and don’t worry about the order! Just jot them down as they come to mind. We’ll sort them out later. 

7. No scene that doesn’t turn

Good storytelling contains a series of turning points, those moments where a person’s inner or outer world changes from a positive value to a negative. If you can, arrange your stories in a natural way that highlights those turning points. Ideally, the highs should get higher and the lows should get lower as the book progresses. 

Jot down here a few of your story ideas below that you consider to be highs (+) or lows (-). Then try diagramming as many stories as you can on the chart.

+

+

+

–   

Eric Elder's diagram of turning points from his book "Write With Me! The ultimate guide to writing and self-publishing that book on your heart." From Chapter 7: "No scene that doesn't turn."

8. Now write!

Now’s the time to write! 

Pick one story and give it a working title. These may or may not become your chapter titles in the end, but at least you’ll have a target to shoot for while you’re writing each story. You can rearrange, combine or split up stories later.

For now, just pick one of your stories and spend 10-15 minutes (or maybe 30-60), and write the highlights of that story as they comes to mind in just a few paragraphs or bullet points.

Don’t stop to look up the details. Don’t try to to edit while you go. Just tell the story as it comes to your mind, whether from your memory or from your imagination. 

Then do this again with each of your stories, one per day (or maybe a few) until you’ve finished jotting down highlights from each of your stories.

If you have more than 30 or less than 30 stories, that’s fine! You might end up using more or less in this book, and you can save some to use in your next book. (Think “books,” not “book,” remember?!)

But if you do have 30 stories and write one per day, you’ll have a really good start on your entire book—from beginning to end—in just 30 days! 

Here’s a sample of the notes I took for each chapter of a book I wrote called Living Life with a Capital L. In the end, this book had 21 chapters, plus an introduction and a conclusion. 

Now it’s your turn! Pick a story… and write!

Story 1 (Write your “working title” for this story or chapter. Then write a few paragraphs of what this story is about. Repeat for each topic you’re considering including.)

______________________________

Story 2 ______________________________

Story 3 ______________________________

Story 4 ______________________________

Story 5 ______________________________

Story 6 ______________________________

Story 7 ______________________________

Story 8 ______________________________

Story 9 ______________________________

Story 10 ______________________________

Story 11 ______________________________

Story 12 ______________________________

Story 13 ______________________________

Story 14 ______________________________

Story 15 ______________________________

Story 16 ______________________________

Story 17 ______________________________

Story 18 ______________________________

Story 19 ______________________________

Story 20 ______________________________

Story 21 ______________________________

Story 22 ______________________________

Story 23 ______________________________

Story 24 ______________________________

Story 25 ______________________________

Story 26 ______________________________

Story 27 ______________________________

Story 28 ______________________________

Story 29 ______________________________

Story 30 ______________________________


9. Flesh out your stories

Once you’ve jotted down your stories, take a break for a few days or weeks. You’ve just completed a massive undertaking! 

After your break, you can come back to each of these stories and flesh them out with fresh eyes. 

Now is the time to do your research: to look back at your journals, to look up dates and details, and to find old pictures, articles or ticket stubs—anything that will help jog your memory to add color and flavor to your stories. 

You might find that what you remember is different from what actually happened! That’s okay, too. This is the time to make those corrections. This is why you’re doing your research: to make sure you’re telling the story the best way you can to get across your point.

Note: this step will take longer… much longer!  I usually take about five or six months for this step. You’re writing the actual book now. So take your time, tackling perhaps one or two stories per week, for as many weeks or months as it takes.

10. Tips for self-editing

As you flesh out each story, you can go back through and self-edit each one.

When I finish a story, I like to read it aloud to myself or have my computer read it to me. This method reveals errors that may have been overlooked with just  your eyes. 

What other ways can you self-edit? Write your ideas here, then do it!

11. Send it to a few trusted readers

Who are some “trusted readers” who might be willing to read your story? List them here. 

These are not necessarily your “proofreaders” who point out all the errors, but rather “encouragers” who can help you know if you’re on track or not. 

You don’t need many—just one or two or three—but enough to give you some honest feedback about your stories and your storytelling.

I like to send my chapters one at a time to my trusted readers. That way, I can get their feedback and make changes along the way.

Some possible “trusted readers”

12. Receiving feedback

Prepare yourself for feedback. The biggest surprise might be that people actually like your writing! Still others might not. That’s okay. Take the good with the bad. In the end, make the changes you feel good about, and in the end, be yourself!

As you receive feedback, make some notes here.

Positive responses

Tempering responses

Your own thoughts on your work (if you were to be your authentic self)

13. Getting endorsements

Starting with responses from your “trusted readers” jot down a few words or sentences you might use for endorsements of your book. You can use these when promoting your book. Then continue collecting these snippets as you share your book with others.

Endorsements might come from your editors, your early beta readers, or those who read your book after it’s published. 

Ask their permission, make modifications if necessary, then include these endorsements in your both your initial and ongoing promotions.

Endorsements (list a few words or sentences and who said them)

14. Formatting your book

What books come to mind that are similar to what you envision for your own book, whether in look and feel or content? List those books here.

15. Interior design

Take note of the interior of the book you’d like to mimic. What fonts are used for the body text and headings (the size, shape, look and feel). List some possible fonts you like here (such as Times New Roman, Garamond, Sabon for body text or Arial or Helvetica for headings).

What are margins on each page, the “white space” from the text to the edge of the page? Take out your ruler and enter them here.

Top: _______

Bottom: _______

Inner: _______

Outer: _______

What elements are contained in the header and footer of each page, such as the author’s name or the book title or chapter title?

Left header: ___________________________

Right header: ___________________________

(if different)

Footer: ___________________________

What other pages are included in your sample book, whether at the beginning, the end or in section dividers of the book (such as a dedication page, an acknowledgements page, a table of contents, an epilogue, footnotes, or a list of other books available)?

Other pages: ___________________________

___________________________

___________________________

___________________________

___________________________

___________________________

16. Cover design

What do you picture on the front cover of your book, if anything? If you don’t have any ideas, describe the main theme of the book or an attention grabbing scene that might hook readers.

Sketch or describe it below!What do you picture on the back cover of your book, if anything? Consider things like a catchy description, an author photo and bio, or a bullet list of “What’s in it for me (the reader)?” 

Sketch or describe it below!What do you picture on the spine of your book? This is often the book title and author’s name, and sometimes a logo or publisher’s imprint or a series number.

Sketch or describe it below!

17. Uploading your book

When uploading your book, you’ll be asked to include a description, three categories, and your pricing. 

Write a few thoughts after each prompt below, then use those answers to create a complete description of your book. You can use parts of your answers on the back of your book, or use all of the answers on your book’s description on Amazon, because that description can be much longer and search engines will index every word for potential readers.

What you want readers to know, to feel, and to do

A few endorsementsA table of contents

An introduction or sample chapter

A few books and authors that are similar to yoursWhat categories are appropriate for your book? You can choose three. Consider which section in a bookstore you might find your book, such as Young Adult, Historical Fiction, Self-Help, Memoirs or Christian Living. 

The more specific you can be, the more likely you’ll find readers interested specifically in your book (and the more likely you’ll rank higher in that category on Amazon than a broader category). Take a look at similar books in a bookstore or on Amazon to see what categories they use.

Then list a few categories here and choose your top three.

18. Creating your eBook & hardcover

In what formats would you like to offer your book? Paperback? Hardcover? eBook? An audiobook? A video series? Note below the different variations you’d like to create and rank their order of importance to you.

Format Importance (1-5)

Paperback _____

eBook _____

Hardcover _____

Audiobook _____

Video _____

Other _____

19. Turning your writing into speaking

When speaking about your book, perhaps at an event you or someone else organizes, what would you want to say to your audience? Fill in the blanks below to create an outline of your talk.

Main topic

Consider what you want listeners to know, to feel, and to do.

Opening words 

Consider memorizing these opening words.

3 main points

What three main points would support what you want listeners to know, to feel, and to do? Consider arranging these points from least important to most important, as that will help your talk get more exciting as you build to the final point.

Point 1

Point 2

Point 3

Closing words 

Consider memorizing these closing words. Remember what my childhood dance teacher said: always nail your opening and closing. People will forget about any mistakes in between!

20. Seven touches

Traditional wisdom says it takes “seven touches” before someone commits to buying a product or learning a fact or deciding to come to an event. 

What seven ways, or “seven touches,” could you use to let people know about your book? 

Consider these in your brainstorming: telling your story behind the story, posting reader reviews, offering to do a book reading, creating a video, giving away a few books, asking others to share about your book, and throwing a launch party.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Other ideas

21. Start writing your NEXT book!

Look back at Chapter 3 (Think “books,” not “book”), and write down which books you might like to write next.

List all of your ideas here, then rank them in terms of the topics you’d like to write about the most. If one bubbles to the top… get another Write With Me! Notebook!!! 

God and I are both inviting you: Write With Me!

          Topic                  Rank (1-5)

Endorsements

Here are a few comments from others I’ve helped with their writing or publishing. I’d love to help you!

“Eric’s help made all the difference!” Greg Potzer, Our Favorite Christian Quotations

“He was with me every step of the way.” Brent Knapton, Testimonies of Grace

“Eric gave warm fellowship, encouragement, and expertise.” Clayt Irmeger, Not to be Lived Single-Handedly

“His expertise was just what I needed.” Karen Neal, Bella Bella Cinderella

“Eric has an uncanny ability to motivate people to write.” Tim Wilkins, More Than Words

“He helped me self-publish in an easy, economical way.” Larry Booze, Say it to Stick

“His passion for writing is contagious.” Mary Felkins, This I Promise You

“He provided practical guidance with genuine interest.” Aaron Chan, book forthcoming

“Eric was the bridge to help fulfill my life-long dream.” Cammie Quinn, Follow the Wind Home

“I’ve seen him help others, and he’s now helping me.” Al Lowry, 365 Daily Bible Readings

“Without him, I would not have completed my book.” Sandy Egle,  Ministering to the Least of These

“I know of no one better-equipped to guide writers.” Kent Sanders, The Faith of Elvis

“He never doubted I would bring my idea to completion.” Laurie Bliese, Will the Lights Go Out?

“He believed in my writing before I was sure myself.” Caleb Dossett, They Call Me Mr

“He helped me finally finish my 10-year project.” Jeanette Smith, book forthcoming

“Eric held my hand the whole way.” MelanEE Lisa Davidson, Loved. I. AM!

“I don’t think I could have done it without him!” Elizabeth Giger, Beyond the Front Door

“Eric gave me confidence when I had almost given up.” Steven Lomske, On the Bank of the Chippewa

You can do this! I’m glad to show you how!

I love hearing from my readers! For questions, comments or help with your book, visit: ericelder.com

More by Eric!

DEVOTIONALS

  • Two Weeks With God
  • Exodus: Lessons In Freedom
  • Acts: Lessons In Faith
  • Jesus: Lessons In Love
  • Ephesians: Lessons In Grace
  • Nehemiah: Lessons In Rebuilding:
  • Romans: Lessons In Renewing Your Mind
  • Psalms: Lessons In Prayer
  • The Top 20 Passages In The Bible
  • Israel: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • Israel For Kids! Lessons From The Holy Land
  • The Inspiring Thoughts Collection
  • Water From My Well
  • 365 Daily Devotions With Eric Elder
  • My Stories Of Faith
  • Living Life With A Capital “L”

HISTORICAL FICTION

  • St. Nicholas: The Believer (with Lana Elder)
  • San Nicolás: El Creyente (Spanish Edition)

MUSICAL

  • His Name Was Nicholas (with Lana Elder)

PIANO BOOKS

  • Clear My Mind
  • Soothe My Soul
  • My Favorite Classics

JOURNALS

  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Prayer
  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Faith
  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Love

SEXUALITY

  • What God Says About Sex
  • Fifty Shades of Grace (under pen name, Nicholas Deere)
  • Loving God & Loving Gays
  • Cómo amar a Dios y a los gays (Spanish Edition)
  • 15 Tips For A Stronger Marriage

GRIEF

  • Loving Thoughts (with Greg Potzer)
  • Making The Most Of The Darkness

WRITING & PUBLISHING

  • Write With Me!
  • Write With Me! Notebook!!!
  • Let’s Get Technical!

ALBUMS

  • Clear My Mind
  • Soothe My Soul
  • My Favorite Classics (with Eric’s children and sister)
  • His Name Was Nicholas EP (with Matt Ludwig)

STAGE PRODUCTIONS

  • One Life (a ballet with Cynthia Dewar and Erin Morton)
  • His Name Was Nicholas (a musical with Lana Elder)
  • San Nicola (a puppet opera with Girolamo Botta)

To learn more or order, visit: www.inspiringbooks.com

About this Book

You’ve been reading “Write With Me!” by Eric Elder. This book is also available in Paperback, Kindle, AudibleSpotify or Apple Audiobook.

This book is part of a series of books on writing, self-publishing, and reaching the world with your book. Use these links to read the others.

Write With Me!

Write With Me! Front Cover by Eric Elder

The ultimate guide to help you WRITE & SELF-PUBLISH that book on your heart!
by Eric Elder

Do you have a book on your heart? Don’t know where to start? Don’t know how to finish?

I’ll show you how!

I’ve written and self-published over 35 books (this is #36!) and helped dozens of others do the same. I’d love to help you!

Eric Elder

(Click here to see what others are saying!)

Listen here, read below, or download the PDF
Also available in Paperback, Kindle, AudibleSpotify or Apple Audiobook

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Write with me!
Chapter 2: The beauty of self-publishing
Chapter 3: Think “books,” not “book”
Chapter 4: Which book to write FIRST?
Chapter 5: What’s your main theme?
Chapter 6: Which stories support your theme?
Chapter 7: No scene that doesn’t turn
Chapter 8: Now write!
Chapter 9: Flesh out your stories
Chapter 10: Tips for self-editing
Chapter 11: Send it to a few trusted readers
Chapter 12: Receiving feedback
Chapter 13: Getting endorsements
Chapter 14: Formatting your book
Chapter 15: Interior design
Chapter 16: Cover design
Chapter 17: Uploading your book
Chapter 18: Creating your eBook & hardcover
Chapter 19: Turning your writing into speaking
Chapter 20: Seven Touches
Chapter 21: Start writing your NEXT book!
Endorsements
More by Eric!

Chapter 1: Write with me!

For years, I had a book on my heart I wanted to write. I didn’t know how to start. I didn’t know where to start. And I didn’t know how to actually write it.

But then I was challenged to write a 50,000-word novel in 30 days. Unbelievable! Impossible! Or was it?

I found out it was possible! And I did it. (Well, I only wrote 30,000 words, and it took me 40 days. But at the end of those 40 days, I had finished the first draft of a fully fleshed-out, historical novel.) 

And I’ve done it many times since. I’ve written over 30 books (35 if you count foreign translations and three books of piano music).

Now, I’d like to challenge you to write that book on your heart. Why? Because I believe when you share your experiences, your strengths, and your hope, others will be strengthened and find hope, too. And we could all use a little more hope, couldn’t we?

Whether you’re writing fiction or non-fiction, thrillers or sci-fi or mysteries, I believe your writing is worth it. People will read it. And many will be blessed by it.

Do you believe it?!? I hope you do! And throughout this book, I hope to give you more and more encouragement to finally write and publish that book on your heart.

How did I do it?

I’ll tell you!

I set aside one month, just 30 days, to get my thoughts out of my head and onto my computer.

First, I wrote down 30 scenes that came into my mind. I didn’t have 30 scenes initially. But as I thought about all the things I wanted to include in my book, I thought about the day my main character lost his parents. I thought about the day he took a boat alone to the Holy Land. I thought about the night he threw a bag of coins through an open window to save a woman from destitution.

I jotted down each of these topics on one piece of paper. I kept going and going until I had over 30 topics that I might include in my book.

Then, I set aside an hour a day, more or less, to write a few paragraphs of what I knew and could remember of each of these scenes. I didn’t look them up again. I didn’t waste time going through old books and magazines and doing internet searches. I just wrote from what I remembered. This wasn’t the time for editing or making sure every detail was perfect. This was the time to get the stories out of my head and onto my computer and to jot down the key points that were important and memorable to me.

I did this each day for 40 days because I started adding chapters along the way as they came to mind or helped the story flow.

At the end of 40 days, I had a finished the first draft of a book that made me laugh and cry and inspired me all along the way. 

Was it good? Or was it not so good? I didn’t know. But what I did know was that it captured the heart—the essence—of the story I wanted to tell.

And that story, birthed during my quiet time for an hour a day in November of 2009, became the basis for what eventually became my bestselling book to date— one that’s been turned into a ballet, a musical, and even an Italian “puppet opera.”

How did that journey go? And what got me writing my next book and my next and my next for 35+ books? That’s what I’ll tell you in the rest of this book.

Eric Elder

Chapter 2: The beauty of self-publishing

I’m still shocked when I read my own bio and see that “Eric Elder has written over 35 books.” It sounds like I must be really famous, or really popular, or “someone must really believe in Eric’s writing to publish 35 of his books!”

The truth is, someone does believe in my books. I do! I’ve found a way to get my message out to others, even if no one else ever believes in me or my work. 

I also know that God has called me to write, to share the messages I’ve shared, and my readers are confirming that. He believes in me and my work, and that’s why I’ve published over 35 books.

The beauty of it is, I’ve been able to do all of it for free (not counting, of course, the massive amount of time and effort it takes to write, edit, tweak, and get the book to look and feel and read just right). You might pay for others to do all of that for you, and that’s okay. But for the actual process of “publishing” your book, all it takes is knowing how to export a PDF file (a Portable Document Format file) of your words and upload it to Amazon… for free. They’ll do the rest. Within days, your book can be available for people to print and ship all over the world. 

From Day 1, Book 1, you can start making money, which has never been the case until now. That’s one of the great beauties of self-publishing.

You can do it. You can be your own publisher. And you can bless others and be blessed yourself from Book 1.

How does it work?

I want to tell you this right up front because you might be hesitant to write a book because you’re not sure if anyone will read it. You’re not sure if anyone will publish it. You’re not sure what to do with it after you’ve written it. So you never start it. Or you never finish it.

I want to give you the confidence that you can publish it. You can get your book out to the world. And once you do, the sky’s the limit. There’s no longer any gatekeeper blocking your way from doing this. The only gatekeeper is you. And if you can get past that gatekeeper, in your heart and mind and emotions, you can be sure your book will be published.

I’ll go into more details later about how to do this, but let me give you a few nuggets right now about how I do this and what you can expect.

1) Export a PDF file

Once I’ve written what’s on my heart and gotten it into the shape I’d like readers to read it, I export a copy from my word processor into PDF format. That fixes all the words on the page to appear like they will appear in the print version of the book.

2) Upload that file to KDP

I upload that PDF file to a free account I’ve created on Amazon (currently at kdp.amazon.com, which is Amazon’s official website for uploading self-published books. KDP stands for “Kindle Direct Publishing,” because you can also upload your books for display on Amazon Kindle book readers).

3) Create a book cover

I create a cover for my book, either on my own computer or on a website like Canva.com, or using one of KDP’s online tools to just choose some artwork from their offerings and add my title and name. Amazon figures out the rest to match the size and shape of the book I want.

4) Order a sample copy

I look over the sample version that is displayed on the screen, and if it looks good, I submit it for review. Amazon looks over the files to make sure they’re printable, and if so, they’ll approve the book for printing within a day or two. Then I order a sample copy (a proof copy) for myself and have it shipped to me within another few days. 

5) Click “Approve”!

If I like what I see, I click “approve,” and the book appears for sale on Amazon within a few hours! If I see errors or changes I want to make, I simply make my changes and upload a new copy of my interior pages and/or my cover and order another sample. I’ll sometimes do two or three or four or more samples like this until I get it just right. But once I love it, I click “approve,” and it’s live on Amazon for others to order and ship to their homes. Hallelujah!

When someone orders a book, Amazon prints it, ships it, collects the money from the customer, and deposits a royalty into my account. I can pick my own selling price to adjust how much I’ll receive per book. I usually pick a price that earns me $5 per book—which is about $4 more than most publishers will pay you per book. Amazon makes money, I make money, and the customer gets a great product within days! Everyone wins! 

I can also order copies of my own books at my “author” rate, which is about $2.50 for 100 pages, $3.50 for 200 pages, and so on, plus shipping—which is cheaper than I can print that many pages on my own printer or at a copy shop!

(Here’s a demo video about how to upload your book to Amazon’s KDP. You can watch it now to get an idea of the steps or finish reading the chapter first, then come back to it when you’re ready to upload your book.)

If this sounds too easy, it is! Or if it sounds too hard, depending on your comfort level with technology, don’t worry! I’ll walk you through how to do all of this, step by step, in this book.

But I wanted to start with the end in mind right here at the beginning to assure you of this: if you can write it, you can publish it. And if you can publish it, others can read it and be blessed by your words. 

And that is my end goal: that your readers will be blessed by your story as much as you have been blessed by it! I care about you and your writing because I care about the people you will reach through your writing. It is their hearts and souls that are my end goal, and I believe, God’s end goal, too. If God has put a book on your heart, that means He cares about you and those He can touch through you.

So with that end goal in mind, let’s start back at the beginning!

Let’s start by clarifying exactly what book God has put on your heart to write first. Because you may be surprised that there is more than one book inside you waiting to get out!

Chapter 3: Think “books,” not “book”

One day I met a man who had written many books. He was speaking at a retreat and had just stepped off the stage to greet the guests. 

I told him what an impact his talk had on me, then I told him about a book I was writing.

“I’ve been working on it for seven years and just can’t seem to finish it,” I said.

“Eric, stop right there,” he said. “Here’s the key to finishing that book. Think books, not book.”

It was as simple as that.

He went on, “If you keep thinking about that one book, you’ll never finish it in your lifetime. Is there another book on your heart you want to write after this one?”

I thought, then said, “Yes, I would like to write about… [and I filled in the blank].”

He said, “Now you’ll be able to finish your first book.”

I want to free you up with this: you don’t have to put everything in this book. If you have one book inside you, I believe you have many more inside you, too. And if you start thinking about your next book, you’ll quickly finish your first one to get on to that next one.

He was right! I began to think of the next book I wanted to write, and suddenly I was ready and able to finish my first book. 

Public speakers understand this. After giving a few talks, they know they’ll never be able to say everything they want in one message. But if they haven’t spoken for a while or think this may be their one and only chance to speak, they’ll pack everything into that one message, making it harder than it has to be on themselves and on their listeners.

When speakers have a regular outlet, they find they can more easily make one or two or three important points and leave it at that because they can say more the next time they get up to speak.

Your heart may be so full of words and stories and pictures that are bursting to get out that you’re too overwhelmed to get any of them out.

But if you’ll think books, not book, you’ll find your words flowing much more easily and naturally, not having to cram every single thought into every page or sentence.

I already know you have a book on your heart. That’s why you’re reading this book.

But what other books do you have on your heart? What other topics do you want to write about? This book is important, very important, like mine was. But so is the next one, and the next, and the next. As much as I like my first book, I feel they keep getting better because I keep learning more and more every time.

So if there are many books on your heart, the first question is: Which book do you want to write first?

Chapter 4: Which book to write FIRST?

Here’s a good place to start to help you decide which book you want to write first.

1) Write about what you KNOW

It’s much easier to write about what you know rather than to create a book from what you don’t know. I imagine there’s already a book bubbling up inside you. Whether it’s fiction or non-fiction, fantasy or sci-fi, I think you’ll find it easier to base your book in something you know rather than something you’re creating from scratch.

For me, my first book was a devotional book I wrote to go along with some songs I had written. I thought it would be helpful for my listeners to know the stories behind them—why I wrote them, how they impacted me, and how they might impact those who listened.

I had written twelve songs, so I spent a week away at a cabin and wrote twelve devotionals, plus an intro and a conclusion, so there were enough messages for two weeks of reading and praying and listening to music. I called it Two Weeks With God.

I encouraged my readers and listeners to go through my devotional book and listen to one song a day during those two weeks, spending some quiet time with God. 

The messages were easy for me to write because I knew how the songs had spoken to me. I just had to come up with a consistent length for each message, some additional verses on each topic that could be helpful, and a question or two at the end of each devotional to spur their thinking about their own lives.

One song was about prayers and why it sometimes takes so long for God to answer them. Another was about following Jesus wherever He leads since He is “the Way.” Another was about clearing your mind when thoughts are overwhelming you.

At the end of my week in the woods, I had written 14 devotionals. This was in 1999, before the advent of online self-publishing. I simply printed them on my desktop printer, trimmed and stapled them to fit inside a CD case, and shipped them out to people who ordered my CD. 

It was a big step for me, but it was an “easy win” because the project was big enough to feel like I’d created something of value to others but small enough to finish writing in a relatively short amount of time. 

For my second book, I took a different approach. It came in answer to the question, “What do people ask you about the most?”

2) Write about what people ask you about THE MOST

Whenever I share my testimony about how God has helped me break the power of unhealthy attractions in my life, people come up to me afterward and ask how they can do it, too. They often asked the same questions over and over. 

When I realized I was repeating myself in my answers, I thought, “Maybe I should write down their questions and my answers and share them in a book. Then I could give people the book and have them come back later with any additional questions, or I could offer personal help.”

That’s the book on my heart that took seven years for me to write! I called it What God Says About Sex. The topic was so huge to me and to those asking the questions that I wanted to get everything just right. I wanted to be sure my answers were biblical, sound, and full of wit and wisdom to keep the reader reading and benefitting from whatever I could share.

Writing this book took a turn when I asked God who my readers would be. He said, “Write it for your children.”

My children? I thought!

Suddenly the enormity of the task weighed heavily on me. This wasn’t just a book for people across the globe who could take or leave my words as they wished. This book was for my own precious children, the ones I cared most about in the world.

Then God spoke to my heart again: “That’s the same audience I’m trying to reach, Eric. My own precious children whom I care most about in the world.”

So what was just an idea on my heart became something heavy on my heart, and then clear on my heart. God had people He wanted to reach through this message, and what I wrote really did matter.

After several years of starting and stopping and wondering if I would ever finish writing the book, I met that man who told me to think “books,” not “book.” That freed me up, and I finally finished the book.

3) Write about what you WANT to know

For my third book, I wrote about what I wanted to know. It didn’t start as a book. It started as a personal study of the book of Exodus to learn from the life of Moses how he lead so many people through the wilderness.

I was at a crossroads in my ministry, trying to decide how to move forward with the big things God was calling me to do, but struggling with keeping up with what He had already called me to do.

How was I going to reach more people and help more people with the limited resources and abilities of just one person?

I decided to look at the life of Moses as he was called from obscurity to leading over 600,000 men, not counting all the women and children, out of Egypt and into a new land. It was an insurmountable task! But God gave him the tools and the people and the abilities to do it.

So I sat down with my Bible in hand for 40 days, determined to learn what I could from this great yet unwilling leader. I needed either a new approach or to quit my ministry, which was a real possibility.

I spent those 40 days fasting and praying and jotting down lessons from the life of Moses that I could put into practice in my life. 

After three days, I knew I was to continue in ministry. And at the end of 40 days, I had a plan in hand to move forward, step by step, which I implemented over the next two years. 

When I saw the fruitfulness of my efforts, I began sharing these lessons with others… in our ministers’ association, in a men’s group, and eventually in book form, called Exodus: Lessons in Freedom—How to Get Free, Stay Free, and Set Others Free.

It didn’t start as a book, but it became one as I learned from God and put into practice what He shared with me.

What about you? What book is on your heart that might fall into one or more of these categories?

  • 1) Write about what you know.
  • 2) Write about what people ask you about the most.
  • 3) Write about what you want to know.

Any of these could be good starting points, to get some early wins, and to create a book that can have a significant impact on others.

Chapter 5: What’s your main theme?

My writing friend Kent Sanders asks these three questions before writing:

“After reading your book, what do you want your readers to KNOW? What do you want your readers to FEEL? And what do you want your readers to DO?”

These three questions can help you know what to include—and not include—in your book.

When I wrote my personal memoir of how I fell in love with Lana and fell in love with Christ, I had these three goals in mind.

1) What do you want your readers to KNOW?

I wanted my readers to know that change was possible through the power of Jesus Christ for any kind of unhealthy attractions in their lives.

Some people believe the struggles I’ve had cannot be overcome—ever. So it was important for me to share that they can be overcome, and not just for me, but for anyone who loves Christ and who wants His help.

2) What do you want your readers to FEEL?

I wanted readers to feel that I understood their struggles, having been through them myself, and understood what it felt like to come through on the other side.

Some people don’t feel they’ll ever see “another side” to their struggle. They’re so downtrodden that they don’t believe change is possible, and they don’t believe it’s possible for them. I wanted to boost their faith that this was for them.

3) What do you want your readers to DO?

I wanted readers to put their faith in Christ for everything in their lives, trusting that He is still in the life-changing business today.

I wanted to hold out the Hope and the Answer that I found and encourage them to put their hope in Christ, too, believing that He could not only do this, but could do anything in their lives. Nothing is impossible for Him.

What about you? After reading your book, what do you want your readers to know, to feel, and to do?

Take some time with these three questions and see how they can bring focus to your writing.

Chapter 6: Which stories support your theme?

Once you’ve narrowed your main theme and what you want your readers to know, to feel, and to do when they’re done reading your book, you can now start jotting down which stories you want to share that will help drive that theme home.

For instance, when I was writing the book back in 2009 which I described in the introduction, my wife and I wanted to tell the story of the real-life St. Nicholas who lived back in the 3rd century. We wanted to give people hope that the same God who worked in and through his life could work in and through their lives, no matter what they might be facing.

We had been talking about the idea for years. We read books about St. Nicholas. We talked to scholars who knew about him. We traveled to the Holy Land, where he lived for a time, and I eventually went to his homeland in present-day Turkey to see where he was born, lived, and ministered. 

We had learned enough about his life. Now it was time to write the book. 

But where to start?

We started where I’m suggesting you start… by jotting down each of the stories from his life that we wanted to include to support our main theme: encouraging readers to put their faith in Christ just like Nicholas had done.

We gave the story a working title and wrote 30 scenes we wanted to include—30 snapshots from his life that we wanted to weave into his story.

It looked like this. 

One of Eric & Lana Elder's early outlines for their book "St Nicholas: The Believer"

Here are a few of those snapshots:

  • His parents died in a plague
  • He traveled to the Holy Land
  • He became Bishop of Myra
  • He saved three girls from devastation
  • He was imprisoned for his faith
  • He attended the Council of Nicaea
  • He died, and his legacy began

This became our outline for the story. Having an outline gave us a goal to shoot for, something to write about each day for 30 days.

We then spent the next 30 days fleshing out just one story a day. It usually took an hour or less just to write down a few pages or paragraphs of what each scene would include. 

We knew we might need to add or delete chapters or rearrange some chapters to tell the story in a compelling way. But having the outline gave us a plan, a way to move forward.

What about you? What scenes or images come to your mind that you could include to support your main theme? Maybe you only have a few right now. That’s okay! Now’s the time to “prime the pump” to get your ideas flowing. 

Start your list and jot down just a few words for each story that supports your main theme. Don’t edit, and don’t worry about the order! Just jot them down! 

I’ll give you some tips for working out the order and pacing in the next chapter.

Chapter 7: No scene that doesn’t turn

I read a good book about storytelling by Robert McKee called Story. In it, he analyzes all kinds of films and shares how to tell a good story. One of the keys, he says, is to be sure there is “no scene that doesn’t turn.”

By this, he means that if a scene begins with a positive value (either in the character’s inner world or outer world), it should turn toward a negative value by the end of the scene. If a scene starts with a negative value, it should turn toward a positive. This back-and-forth is what keeps the story moving forward.

I kept this in mind as I outlined the story of the life of St. Nicholas. There were many stories I wanted to thread together, but which ones should I tell, and how should I string them together?

I started by arranging the stories in chronological order, where I knew the order, and then flip-flopping stories where I didn’t know the order, from positive to negative or negative to positive. 

I began the story with his idyllic life growing up in his wealthy parents’ home on the coast of the Mediterranean. Their family were Christians who had been impacted by the Apostle Paul on one of his missionary journeys to their hometown of Patara as mentioned in the Bible in the book of Acts. 

But I included a cliffhanger at the end of chapter one that threatened to upset his idyllic life. A reader had to read chapter two to find out what was about to happen.

I won’t tell you here. You can read the book! But I can say that chapter two starts out negatively with some of the worst news their city could have heard. The chapter ends on a positive note as his parents decide to take up a cause to help everyone around them. Chapter three takes another turn, as his parents are doing what was right and good, but the chapter ends on a negative note that propels the reader forward once again to find out what happens next. 

Every scene turned like this throughout the book, with the positives and negatives getting higher and lower until the climax of his story. The last valley was the deepest of all: an unexpected twist that sends Nicholas into despair. It was a classic storytelling technique where it seems like “all is lost,” that biggest drop before the final high that ends the story.

I didn’t have to fabricate the stories. But I did have to line them up and tell them in a way that I had “no scene that doesn’t turn.” People have told me they couldn’t put the book down. They had to keep reading from chapter to chapter to find out what was next. 

Was his life riveting? Yes! But has his story been told in other ways that were less than riveting? Also, yes! The difference between riveting and dull is understanding the basics of storytelling—a difference that keeps your readers reading to the end.

I did the same with my personal memoir of how I fell in love with my late wife, Lana, and with Christ, called Fifty Shades of Grace: Love Changes Everything (written under my pen name, Nicholas Deere). The two stories are interwoven, and each storyline is significant to the overall story and its outcome.

Once I knew the main story I wanted to tell… that “love changes everything,” I wrote down about 50 stories I wanted to tell from my relationship with Lana and God that would support that main theme. I then laid them out in a way that each scene would have a turning point in my quest to find love.

My love story with both Lana and God had a natural arc to it where the highs got higher and the lows got lower. I didn’t have to exaggerate. But I did have to tell the stories in a way that leaned into each of those turning points to keep the story moving. 

An agent in New York who represents some of the biggest names on the New York Times best-selling list said she was given my book by one of her best-selling authors. The agent said, “It’s definitely a page-turner,” just like the author had told her. Success! 

Once you decide on your main theme and have listed out the main stories you want to share in your book, look at each of the stories and see if they have a natural arc that will build on the idea: “no scene that doesn’t turn.” 

This may not apply the same way to every genre of writing, but it can help your writing in any genre! 

What is the point you’re trying to drive home with your book? And what is the point you’re trying to drive home in each scene or chapter? Make sure that point is well-told and well-crafted. The difference will ensure your readers keep reading to the end.

Diagram of your highs and lows (starting and ending values are up to you!)

Chapter 8: Now write!

Once you’ve jotted down the main stories you want to tell (your outline), now it’s time to write! 

You might feel intimidated to start, but don’t be. You’ve already done much of the hard work, honestly. You’ve defined your main theme. You’ve jotted down your main stories. Now it’s just a matter of getting those stories out of your head and onto paper or screen.

Let the stories flow. Pick one a day if you’d like. Write from what you know. Don’t stop to edit. Don’t stop to look up details. Don’t stop to second-guess yourself. Just write! There will be time for all of those other things later. 

Right now, the ideas are locked away inside your head. That’s a great place for them to be! But it’s not helpful to others until you bring them out into the world. Writing your thoughts is a great way to do this… like pulling strands of memories from inside you and laying them out in front of you, so you can see them clearly. 

You’ll have time to tweak or change, add or delete, rework or reword later. Now’s the time to just get the thoughts down so you’ll have something to work with.

“A ship in harbor is safe,” says John Shedd, “but that’s not what ships are built for.”

If God has put a story on your heart, now’s the time to get it ready to sail! Take those thoughts out of the harbor of your mind. Get them ready to sail!

For me, it’s enough to write down just a few paragraphs… maybe 500 or 700 or 1,500 words. Let me share a story I wrote this week. It’s about 550 words. Not much, but enough to tell the story. I call it “The Missing Psalm.”

We can’t go back again… or can we? Sometimes, the answer lies ahead of us.

A few months before my sweet Lana passed away, she recorded 31 Psalms for a project we were working on. We were writing a devotional about prayer to highlight 31 of the 150 Psalms in the Bible.

I asked Lana if I could record her reading them. Then my sister and my kids and I would record some piano music to go along with each.

It wasn’t until after she passed away that I realized I had forgotten to ask her to record one of the Psalms that was most precious to me: Psalm 20. That was the Psalm I was reading when I was talking to God about marrying her. I especially loved verse 4:

“May He give you the desire of your heart and make all your plans succeed.”

I prayed that prayer over and over, that God would give me the desire of my heart… to marry Lana.

It was a long-shot prayer. In fact, I had read this Psalm just moments after Lana told me she was happy with her single life, wasn’t ready to commit to anyone or anything, and walked away from the spot on the floor where we had been sitting and talking about our future.

That was 35 years ago.

But God eventually answered those prayers! Lana said, “Yes,” and 23 years of marriage and six kids later, I still shake my head at how God encouraged me through that Psalm so many years ago.

How could I have forgotten to ask her to record that Psalm while she was still alive?

From time to time, I’ve looked back, wishing for a do-over. Maybe you’ve felt the same about something in your life.

Well, this week, I got one!

A friend posted a recording he had made using a new AI voice tool. He fed a sample of his own voice into the system, then asked it to read back to him something new he had just written.

In all my years of studying new technologies, including voice technologies like this one, I’ve never heard anything so lifelike. It sounded just like my friend… and it was! It was just brilliantly edited and rearranged so he could say something new.

Then I thought of my wish for a do-over.

I quickly signed up for an account (for $1!) and uploaded five minutes of Lana reading another Psalm (Psalm 119… also one of my favorites). Then I typed in the text of Psalm 20.

I clicked the button, and within 30 seconds I began hearing Lana’s sweet voice again, reading to me from Psalm 20… the missing Psalm that had meant so much to me 35 years ago.

I was in tears.

Yesterday, I decided to record some piano music to go along with it: the love theme from Titanic called “My Heart Will Go On.”

Today, I’d like to share it with you.

No, we can’t go back again. But sometimes, the answer lies ahead of us, in this case, in the form of a new technology that has brought back some very precious memories.

Keep pressing on. Keep moving forward. Keep trusting in God who can always make a way… even when there seems to be no way at all.

Click or visit this link to listen to Psalm 20, read by Lana Elder, with piano by Eric Elder:
https://ericelder.com/wp-content/uploads/my-heart-with-lana-3-19-2023.mp3

I include this as an example because it doesn’t take much to write out one story. I spent about an hour writing, then went back through and spent another hour tweaking, adjusting a few words or ideas here and there, and adding a couple brief sentences to help the readers apply the story to their lives. 

Then I asked a friend to read and edit it. With a few more changes here and there, it was ready to go.

But the initial writing, just getting the story out of my brain and onto my computer, was fairly simple. I knew the story I wanted to tell, and I told it! Just one story. Just one hour. After that, I could change it to my heart’s content.

Writing a book is overwhelming. Writing one story, then another, then another… that’s doable! Especially if you just write from your head the first time through. Don’t edit. Don’t stop to look up facts or details. I did that later to double-check if my dates and memories were correct!

Just write from your head… describe the scene as you lived it or as you envision it. Include your senses that others may not see or imagine: sights, sounds, smells, tastes, tears or smiles of joy. 

Help your readers relive the story that’s in your mind. Once you get it out, you’ll be able to flesh out and fact-check your story, which we’ll look at next.

By the way, here’s a sample of the notes I took for each chapter of my book Living Life with a Capital L.

Notes for Eric Elder's devotional book on John from the Bible called "Living Life with a Capital L"

Chapter 9: Flesh out your stories

Once you’ve finished getting all your stories out of your head and onto paper or a screen, you can dive into fleshing out each chapter. 

Now’s the time to re-read the essence of what you’ve written, look up facts in journals or online, and check out old pictures, receipts or ticket stubs. You may be surprised at the details you find… and what you remember right or wrong! 

Then you can incorporate these ideas into your writing, one story at a time.

If I stopped to do this along the way, I would never finish a book! I would always find something else to do other than to write. I would debate myself every step of the way whether or not to include a certain tidbit or idea. 

So I prefer to wait till I’ve finished writing all my stories before I flesh them out.

I’d like to share here a “fleshed-out” version of a snippet I shared in the last chapter. It’s based on the 2-3 paragraphs I quoted previously where I talked about Lana walking away from me after we had been sitting together on the floor and talking about our future.

This is from Chapter 19 of Fifty Shades of Grace, in which I used pseudonyms for myself, Nick, and for Lana, Noël. You’ll notice this version contains a lot more detail, detail which I went back later and fleshed out to give it more color, background, and insight.

The story picks up a few weeks before our conversation on the floor, about 18 months after we had broken up. I was living in Texas and she was living in Michigan. I had felt God wanted us to break up, and amazingly, both of us put our faith in Christ during our time apart. Unbeknownst to her, I felt God was calling us back together again, this time for good. I had been praying about it for three months by myself and felt I should broach the subject. But I had no idea how she would respond. 

 – – – – – – – – –

Chapter 19: Heart’s Desire(from Fifty Shades of Grace)

Noël couldn’t believe it! She had always loved me and had always wanted to hear this from me! She had even prayed when we broke up that one day I would come to love her like this and ask her to become a permanent part of my life. When we broke up, she trusted that God would give her someone better than me. And now He had! I was way better than the old Nick, now that I had put God first in my life. Noël was amazed—amazed at God, amazed at me, and amazed that God had answered her prayers, even her prayers from so long ago.

But Noël was also wisely cautious. After I broke up with her, she didn’t know if she could ever marry me. While she had hoped this would happen, she wanted to be sure about it all before we actually got back together. She wanted to think and pray about it, but she was definitely excited at the thought of it.

I totally understood her caution, and I totally expected and appreciated it. I couldn’t have asked for more. I was just so thankful that I was finally able to express to her all the love that had been building up inside my heart. Whatever happened, I knew God would speak to us if He really wanted us to be together.

Noël called again two days later and asked if I would come up to see her in Michigan the following weekend. She was going on a ski trip as a leader with the junior high youth group from her church, and she wanted me to come along. 

I thought it was too soon. I wanted her to pray about it more before we saw each other again, so she could hear from God more clearly. But she wanted me to meet her new friends, to see what she was doing with her life, and to make sure this was really what I wanted, too. She was worried that I might have idolized her while we were apart, and she wanted to make sure I really did want to get back together again. I knew that nothing she would do that weekend would change my desires for her, so by the end of our conversation, I suggested that maybe we had better wait. Noël was hurt and disappointed.

I could tell this was really important to her—so that made it important to me. The more I thought about going to see her that weekend, the more I was able to see it through her eyes. She needed to see for herself that I was really serious about this. I had hurt her before, and I needed to do more than just talk to gain back her trust. I called her back and told her I’d love to come. 

Noël said the very words that I had been thinking in my heart: “Thank you for seeing it through my eyes.” That was the confirmation I needed to go through with it, even if I felt like it was too soon.

I flew up to Michigan that weekend and fell deeper and deeper in love with Noël. She had always been cute, but that weekend she was gorgeous, both in body and in spirit.

I loved watching her as she laughed with her friends, did skits for the kids (dressing up as a dwarf with her ears poking out of her hoodie) and encouraged everyone she encountered in their faith. She was everything I had pictured and more.

On Saturday night, when we finally had a chance to talk on our own, we went upstairs in the old Victorian hotel where we were all staying. Noël and I sat down in the hallway to talk. She started telling me what she had been thinking about everything I had said.

She said that as much as she wanted to get back together with me, she felt like this was the first time in her life that she was getting to live life on her own. She liked her new life and her new independence. She was growing deeper in her faith, making great friends and loving working with the kids at the church. She said she was really sorry, but she wasn’t ready to give that all up. 

I was sad—crestfallen, as much as anything. My bubble of excitement had burst, but I understood.

I felt like Jim Carey in the movie Bruce Almighty, when his character, Bruce, asked God:

“How do you make somebody love you without affecting their free will?” 

“Welcome to My world, son,” God replied. “You come up with the answer for that, and we’ll talk.”

There was nothing more I could say to Noël. She thanked me for coming to see her, said goodnight and without a goodnight kiss or any indication that she ever wanted to get back together again, she stood up and walked away.

I sat on the floor and cried.

I had my Bible in my hands, so I opened it up and started reading through a few of the Psalms. When I read Psalm 20 and got to verses four and five, I cried again—but this time with joy. The Psalm said:

“May He give you the desire of your heart and make all your plans succeed. We will shout for joy when you are victorious and will lift up our banners in the name of our God. May the LORD grant all your requests” (Psalm 20:4-5).

God had already given me more than I could possibly ask for from Him. He had forgiven me of my sins, He had given me a new life here on earth, and He had given me the promise of eternal life with Him. I knew I had already gotten way more than I deserved, so how could I ask Him for more? 

But when I read those words, I was encouraged and wanted to ask Him for one more thing. While I didn’t want to sound ungrateful on the one hand or extravagant on the other, I also knew that God still had more for me on this new path of life on which He had put me.

Not knowing if Noël would ever say, “Yes,” I underlined those verses from Psalm 20 in my Bible. I told God that night that if I could ask Him for just one gift in my entire lifetime, it would be to marry Noël. I knew it may have sounded childish, but I was serious. I prayed with all my heart that night that God would give me Noël. Then all I could do was wait. 

– – – – – – – – –

You’ll note that this is a longer version of the story, 1,118 words, to be exact! But you can see how the extra details fill in the gaps, add “color” and interest, and give the reader more food for thought along the way.

And by waiting to flesh out my chapter till I got all of the stories out of my head, I was able to fill in the blanks for the readers, weave the stories together in a more compelling way, and add hooks at the beginning and end of each story to keep the reader turning pages.

Speaking of hooks, you might be tempted to hit “Publish” after doing all this work to flesh out your stories. But don’t! There’s something else I want you to hit instead… which I’ll share in the next chapter. (See what I did there?)

Chapter 10: Tips for self-editing

Once you’ve fleshed out each story, you may be tempted to press “Publish”!

But let me give you another tip: Don’t hit “Publish”! Hit “Pause”!

Writing a book is a massive undertaking. Once you finish a rough draft, you might feel like you’re ready to be done, already! But before you send any previews to anyone else, take a deep breath.

1) Take a short break

Let it rest. Let your brain rest. Then come back to your writing and read it afresh. 

When you do, you’ll notice things you love, things you want to change, and things that made sense when you were writing them, but now you have no idea what you were trying to say! That’s okay! Now’s the time to fix those things before others see it.

I was taking some meds one time that came with a warning not to drive or be up and active or send texts soon after taking the meds.

I had been thinking about sending a text to a friend who had invited me to a Christmas party, but I wasn’t sure if I should go or not. The next morning, my friend texted to say, “Sure, come on over, I’d love to see you!”

I thought: “Did I say that with my out loud voice?” I honestly didn’t remember sending a text, but I looked back and I did! About half hour after I had taken the meds! The text was garbled, full of mistakes, and said what I was thinking, but not what I meant to say “out loud”! Gosh!

The same can happen with your writing if you send it to others without giving it a once over to make sure you said what you thought you said.

2) Read it aloud

After giving it a rest for a day or two or a week or two or a month or two, then you can use your “out loud” voice. Literally!

One of my favorite ways to self-edit is to read my writing aloud.

I find more mistakes that way than just scanning the text with my eyes. Phrases that may look okay might not sound okay. Gaps in logic become clearer. And missing words or reversed word order becomes apparent. You can also better identify which sentences are way too long. 

Sometimes I’ll even have my computer or phone read it back to me. Hearing it read by “someone else,” even an AI voice, can make it obvious when a word is skipped or mistyped. Our eyes sometimes fill in the gaps or autocorrect misspelled words in our minds, but when a computer reads it back to you, the error can be more glaring. 

So just sit back and enjoy and read or listen to your book being read to you, making corrections along the way.

3) Write it for a real person

My final step in self-editing is to write it for a real person. By this, I mean having a real reader in mind that I’m actually going to send it to as soon as I finish editing the chapter or book.

This really puts on the pressure to get it right! Knowing that a real person is going to read it makes me focus and think through what that reader might think as they read it.

I find this revealing whenever I read a reply from someone who responds to one of my weekly messages. I often know the person and what they’re going through, and after I read their response, I reread what I wrote through their eyes.

It’s quite a different experience to read what I’ve written through someone else’s eyes who has been through something very similar or something very different.

I was speaking one day about how I prayed for a woman to be healed of cancer. I truly believed the person would be healed, but in the end, she died. She had an incredible spiritual experience after our prayer, but still, she died.

A woman came up to me after my talk to say she was so relieved when I got to the end and the woman with cancer had died. As I was telling the story, she was getting more and more angry. She was sure the woman was going to be healed. It turned out her husband had just died of cancer, and she was mad at God that he died. And if this woman in my story was healed and her husband wasn’t, she was going to be even more angry.

Here I thought the story would be depressing because the woman with cancer died, but the woman listening to the story was so relieved! 

We never quite know how our readers will respond. But if we know who is going to read our writing, or hear our message, we can get a better idea of how it might sound to that person. Having a real reader in mind is key for making sure you’re saying what you want to say… and not saying what you’re not wanting to say.

“Do not write so that you can be understood, write so that you cannot be misunderstood.” (Epictetus)

When you write for real readers, you can be more sure you’re saying what you want to say. Then find a few trusted readers and get ready to push “Send,” which we’ll cover in the next chapter.

Chapter 11: Send it to a few trusted readers

After you flesh out each chapter and do your self-editing, it’s time to be bold and send it to a few trusted readers!

Who is a trusted reader? Someone you think might be interested in your book, willing to read your book, and able to give helpful feedback (encouragement primarily!)

I have some friends who are great “proofreaders.” They relish in finding mistakes and letting me know they found them. I don’t usually send my writing to these friends first! What I’m looking for first is what they think of the book? Is it hitting the right topics people would be interested in? Do they think it’s worth publishing for more people at all? Or does it really need some major help?

I save my “proofreaders” for the final edit. If I’m going to rearrange or delete or add entire sections or chapters, a proofreader’s help would quickly be negated by all of my changes.

Who are some friends or family members who might be interested in reading what you’ve written? They may or may not have experience in your field. But if they believe in you, that’s a great start!

Then decide how you want to send it to them. Would they like a printout? Would they like a PDF file? Would they just like a chapter at a time via email?

For me, I often just send an email with the text of one chapter in it. I send it to 2-3 people, once a week, as I finish fleshing out and self-editing my chapters. It can take several months at this rate, but this allows me to craft my chapters for real readers, and it allows the readers bite-sized pieces of my book to digest.

And the feedback they give you on those first few chapters can inform how you craft the next few chapters. Are there major missing elements? Are they lost already by Chapter 3? Is there something you need to insert or work on or fix before going through this process with the whole rest of your book? Even if you’ve written your whole book, sending a chapter at a time can be helpful for those reading it.

And, of course, you can ask them! See what works best for them. I have a friend who likes reading a whole book, not pieces and having to wait! So, I do what they prefer! But for all the reasons above, I usually offer the book piecemeal, and people are usually happy to receive it that way.

When you ask them to read it, just tell them what you’re looking for in terms of feedback. Does it make sense? Do you like it? Are there any glaring errors or omissions? Is there any extraneous information? 

Keep in mind, these readers might also make good reviewers of your work when you go to market your book. I don’t usually ask this of them right away. But if they send me some gems of comments, I’ll come back to them later and ask if I can use a quote from something they’ve written to me before.

We’ll talk about receiving feedback next!

Chapter 12: Receiving feedback

Here are three rules to remember when receiving feedback:

1) Brace yourself! 

People might actually like your writing! 

It is, perhaps, one of the most surprising things when someone says they like what I write. Saying that probably says more about me and my insecurities than about my actual writing.

As I wrote my personal memoir, Fifty Shades of Grace, I kept thinking:

“I can never publish this. People won’t like it. People won’t want to hear these stories. I’ll be embarrassed for no reason at all. And worst of all: It probably won’t make any difference in the end.”

My fears and hesitations were over the top. 

So I was totally surprised when the first two “trusted readers” I gave it to said they not only liked it, but loved it! They said they had never read anything like it and thought I should publish it far and wide. They said it was a story that needed to be told.

I truly wasn’t prepared for that response. I was only prepared for anything but that response!

I have been similarly surprised when I’ve published other works. Not because the stories were so personal, but because they were so simple.

I wrote about a little snail that I prayed for one day. My daughter had asked me to take care of it while she was out of town for several months. At one point, I thought it had died. It hadn’t moved in almost 10 days. But then I watched an episode of The Chosen where Jesus prayed for the healing of a woman who had been bleeding for years and the resurrection of a young girl who had clearly died. 

I was about to pull the bubble maker on the snail’s water tank, but decided instead to pray for it to be healed or resurrected. The next day, I checked the tank and it was alive… clinging to the bubble maker, letting the refreshing bubbles wash over its shell!

I shared the story with my email subscribers and on social media, thinking it was such a simple story, and probably not very meaningful to anyone but me. I wasn’t prepared for the response! People not only liked it, they loved it, shared it, and posted comment after comment about how it inspired them to have faith for their own situations that were dead or dying.

It was such a simple story. But the impact was profound. I wasn’t prepared.

So #1, I want you to brace yourself. People might actually like… and truly love… what you have to say. Your stories are important. And if they’re important to you, don’t be surprised when you share them that others find them important to them as well.

2) Temper yourself!

According to Webster’s, to temper something means “to mix” or “to keep within limits,” specifically:

“When you temper something, you mix it with some balancing quality or substance so as to avoid anything extreme.”

Some people might not like your writing. That’s okay! You’re not called to reach everyone. But you are called to reach those God wants you to reach. And sometimes, people who don’t like what you write one day will come to like it another.

One person read the first chapter of my Fifty Shades of Grace and responded with a scathing email. She couldn’t believe I would write about such things, things that should never be discussed publicly. 

But three months later, she wrote to me again. She said, “I want to tell you something about myself that I’ve never told anyone.” She confessed to me something that had happened to her at a party when she was younger. She was so embarrassed about it, she had never revealed it to anyone in her life. The event had impacted her still to this day, even though she was in her 70’s. She told me that reading my story had helped her see that she didn’t need to hold onto that memory and the trauma of it anymore. She said that because of what I shared, she finally felt comfortable sharing her own story with me. And she said she felt healing come as she did.

This is the kind of writing I pray God works through me… writing that will touch people deep in their souls. But I have to remember that sometimes people don’t want their souls touched! It can be hard to hear, hard to deal with, and hard to know what to do with what you hear.

In my book Loving God & Loving Gays, I had one trusted reader read through the entire book before I sent it to anyone else. She had read much of my work before, carefully editing and commenting as she went along. We were in lockstep on so many topics, I was shocked when one day she texted at 5 AM to let me know she had just read one of my chapters and she was emphatically not going to read any more. She was not going to endorse my book. And she was not going to read anything else I ever wrote.

I was, once again, shocked! This time for the opposite reason: someone completely hated and adamantly disagreed with what I had written.

I asked if we could meet and talk about it. She agreed. I asked if I could record the conversation, that if it upset her so much, it would probably upset others in my target audience, so I wanted to hear and work through what she had to say. She agreed to the recording.

She repeated her anger and frustration at what I had written both to me and to the recorder. I rewrote what I had written. I tried talking with her a few more times, but nothing I said or did changed her mind. Whatever happened had truly upset her to the core.

I doubted my writing. I doubted my thinking. I doubted that I should ever publish the book at all.

But then I remembered why I felt God wanted me to write the book. He wanted me to write it to help people like my friend change the way they viewed this topic. If it was an easy topic and everyone agreed with what I wrote, there would be no need to write the book! The reason I wrote it was to help people see it in a new way, having lived through decades of dealing with this issue myself.

I decided to pray. I asked God to reveal to her or reveal to me how I should proceed.

A few weeks later, I sent her one more draft of the entire book. Her response floored me. She said, “I love the book, the whole book. Especially that one chapter” — the one that she had been so upset by.

I said, “Really?”

She said, “Yes, I love it.”

I said, “But you were so upset about that chapter!”

She said, “Oh no, I wasn’t. I totally agree with you on that chapter.”

I said, “I thought you hated that chapter.”

She said, “No, I didn’t. I thought it was great! You must have misheard me.”

I was stunned. I hung up the phone, went back and listened to the recording. Yep, she definitely hated it and was never going to read anything I ever wrote again!

I asked if we could meet. We did.

I asked her one more time what she thought of that chapter. “I loved it. I totally agree with you. I’ve always have felt that way about it.”

I asked if I could play a portion of the recording back for her. I did. She was stunned.

She said, “I can’t believe I ever thought anything differently. I thought I’ve always felt this way.”

At that moment, God gave me a profound revelation: what I had prayed for about my writing had come true. With my very first beta reader, God showed me that not only could my words impact and change other people’s hearts and minds, they could change in such a way that they felt they “had always thought that way,” that they “couldn’t believe they had ever thought anything differently.”

Had I not tempered her comments with what God was doing in her heart, I might have given up on the project altogether. 

As I’m writing this, just yesterday I heard from a mother and son who are reading that same book together, now five years later. They told me it was giving them both so much hope when they had all but given up. What a tragedy if I had taken that first beta reader’s response at face value and not allowed for what God was doing in her heart… and could do in other people’s hearts in the future.

3) Be yourself!

This is not to say we can’t improve. That’s why we’re asking for the feedback in the first place. If our work needs fixing, attention, or to have the brakes put on for some reason, we want people to be honest with us. Yet remember this, especially when writing very personal topics: 

The best books read us. (Eric Elder!)

All of my writing is deeply personal. Whether it’s praying for a snail or telling about my intimate thoughts, my writing is filled with me. Everything I say can and possibly will be used against me! I feel that pressure regularly. 

But I also feel that my thoughts are probably more common than people may admit… to themselves or to me. I want their feedback because I want to put out the best, most helpful work I can. And when I hear feedback that is repeated, or hear it and God speaks to my heart to listen, I take note and try to correct what’s wrong, address what’s needing attention or set it aside completely. Feedback is good and necessary. And I want to sift through it carefully and prayerfully.

At some point, though, I have to commit publicly to what I am writing. And at that point, the best advice I can give you is this: “Be yourself.”

After hearing the input, after making the changes, after adding or dropping or modifying what I’ve written, I have to commit to publishing my words so the public can read them.

Do I like it? Do I feel good about it? Am I willing to take the risk that others may love it, hate it or be challenged by it, whether they ever come to agree with my thoughts or not?

Again, just yesterday, someone told me they had read my book Fifty Shades of Grace. Again, my jaw dropped and my mind went into a tailspin as I tried to think what this person thought of my book. I respected their input. I wanted to know what they honestly thought. But I also cowered in fear in my heart at what I might hear. Even after seven years of hearing feedback on that book, I am still hearing it as if it’s the first time anyone has ever read it. 

Because for that reader, it is.

I asked what he thought and said, “I really do want your honest opinion.” What he said spoke to my heart, and to this point. 

He said, “If it were me, I would probably pull back on some of the descriptions.” But then he added, “But it’s not me. It’s not my story. It’s your story. And I don’t think you should change a thing.”

He is used to giving me honest feedback. He doesn’t mind telling me what he thinks. But his best feedback was what he told me with those words. It’s your story. Don’t change a thing.

There comes a point where we truly have to be ourselves. Where we have to write honestly what’s on our hearts, not being careless or flippant with our words, because words really do matter and are extremely important. But after taking care, after receiving feedback, after tempering the good with the bad, we need to push “publish,” trusting that what God had put on our hearts can be used mightily in His hands.

Chapter 13: Getting endorsements

Endorsements are words of encouragement from readers to recommend your book to others. You can include these quotes on your back book cover or inside your book to help nudge potential readers into reading your book! 

It’s one thing to hear from a car salesman how great their cars are, but it’s another to hear from a “satisfied customer.” Your endorsements are your “satisfied customers.”

Where do you get them and how can you use them? 

Here are a few starting points.

1) Use beta  reader responses

When you give early copies of your books to others, they will often give you feedback you can use as reviews. Here are a few responses I got back from people who read my book Fifty Shades of Grace. I just took these short quotes from their email responses after they read my book:

“A gripping story—a page turner for sure!” R.E.

“Truthful and compelling. I wanted to cry and hold him and tell him everything would be all right (and sometimes box his little ears!)” J.T.

“It hooks you immediately.” K.S.

“Engaging, interesting—and significant.” G.P.

“Excellent! Not overly graphic, but very personal. ” D.M.

“A fascinating story—I think more than one wife will nudge her husband and say, ‘Here. Read this.’” B.B. 

“I don’t think I could be so open and honest. That’s probably why it is so riveting.” J.L.

“A story that all of us can relate to.” A.L.

I didn’t ask these readers up front if they would write a review for me. I just let them read it and asked for their honest feedback. I later went through their email responses and found these short snippets that I thought would help others decide if this was a book they would want to read, too. I then went back to each of my readers and asked their permission to use the short quotes I wanted to use, in this case, with just their initials as the book was also written under my pen name. 

All of them said “Yes”!

I put these quotes on the back of my book, underneath the book’s description as well as on the book’s website and on the Amazon description. I also used these quotes when I promoted my book to my email subscribers and to my family and friends on social media.

It’s one thing for me to say “I’ve written a great book!” It’s another to hear from others who have read the book and are willing to say “This is a great book! You should read it, too!”

2) Ask those you know

If you know people who are in your field and in your target audience, you can ask them if they would be willing to write an endorsement for you. I did this with my book What God Says About Sex, sending it to some people I knew who either had ministries related to this topic or to those who were in my target audience. I sometimes shortened or edited what they said to make all of the quotes read nicely together.

Here are some of their replies. 

“This book is every parent’s new best friend.” Dan Mountney, Campus Pastor, Kensington Community Church

“After only a few pages, I knew I could trust this book in the hands of my daughters.” Bridgette Booth, homeschooling mother

“It’s the kind of book I could read to my son and not be ashamed.” Russell Pond, homeschooling father

“Eric Elder’s approach is as refreshing as is his testimony.” Tim Wilkins, Executive Director, Cross Ministry

“I won’t give away the surprise ending, but guarantee it will rock your boat.” Al Lowry, Founder of GIG, a music ministry at Saddleback Church

 Again, I used these quotes on the back of my book, on my website and on Amazon, and in my emails to my subscribers and social media posts.

3) Use feedback from the public

After my books come out, when someone posts or emails a positive response, I continue to collect and use those quotes for the additional promotion of my book. 

Your book will live forever, and people will continue commenting forever! When I go back and re-market a book, maybe to give it another boost or because it’s seasonal like my Christmas books and movies, I’ll use these public responses to “freshen up” the endorsements.

For instance, here are a few comments I received from people who watched a Christmas ballet based on my St. Nicholas book called One Life: A Christmas Story Ballet. I used these on some promotional materials for the show the following Christmas. 

“Beautiful work. Love the music! I hope you can take it far and wide!” BRIAN BIRD, co-producer of Touched By An Angel and co-creator of Hallmark’s #1 original series, When Calls the Heart.

“Truly Christian, in the best sense of the word, with universal appeal.” JIM ROSENTHAL, former Communications Director for the Archbishop of Canterbury and founder of The St. Nicholas Society.

In these cases, the people happened to have titles and credentials that were significant to my project, so I used those in their bylines as well, with their permission. 

It was as simple as asking, “I saw you posted this review. Would I be able to use it in promoting my project to others?” They both said “Yes”! One even wrote a dozen more snippets for me to choose from, as he knew the value of marketing.

You might feel uncomfortable asking people for endorsements, but again, you might be pleasantly surprised when you do! People are often happy to help, happy to lend their name to your project, and sometimes happy to see their own name in print! You honor them by valuing their feedback. 

And it will truly help others when trying to decide if they should read your book or not. 

So… ask!

Chapter 14: Formatting your book

When it’s finished, what do you want your book to look like?

Now’s the time to start finding some samples of books that are similar to what you have in mind, whether they’re lying around your house or at the library or online or at a bookstore.

What do other books look like that are similar to yours? What books have you loved that you’d like to imitate (imitation is form of flattery). 

In the next few chapters I’m going to walk you through everything you need to know to format the interior and exterior of your book. Why? Because if you’re interested and motivated, you can do it all yourself! Even if you’re not interested or if you’re only interested in doing part of it yourself and asking others to do what they do best, these are still good ideas to have in mind.

For instance, when I was writing What God Says About Sex, I thought of a book format that I really loved. It was Bruce Wilkinson’s The Prayer of Jabez. Not only was it an international bestseller, but I loved the way he wrote it and the design and layout of the book. It was short and easy to read. The cover was tasteful, and the fonts and layout on the inside were welcoming.

So I took a copy off my shelf and started designing my own book in a similar way. 

I measured the outer book dimensions. I measured the margins at the top and bottom and sides of several pages. I looked closely at the fonts used for the body text, the chapter headings, and the pull-out quotes that appeared occasionally. I even liked the “drop caps” at the beginning of each chapter, which are large initial letters of the first word that drop down 2-3 lines below the first few lines of text. 

Then I set about learning how to apply each of these elements to my own book.

Is there a book that comes to mind when you picture your own book? For my friend Cammie Quinn, she wrote an epic Civil War novel about sheep farming in Illinois called Follow the Wind Home. The war is a backdrop for the story. The central theme is love of the land, love of home, and finding healing when we love too much.

I asked if there was a similar book in style or form that she liked. She said she loved Willa Cather’s book, O Pioneers! She said she had read it probably a hundred times.

So we took a look at the book and used that as a starting point. “Do you like the painting on the cover?” I asked. She did, so I suggested an artist who paints in that style—Mark Hill, who also happened to be in our writing group! “Do you like the font on the cover?” Not necessarily, she said, so I created a new font for her. “Do you like the size and shape and feel of the book or do you want it different in certain ways? What about the text on the interior? What about the fonts for the body and the headings? Do you want your name and title of the book at the top of every other page? How do you like the indents and margins?”

It’s surprising how many decisions go into making a book look just right! But when you break it down into each element, you can get a feel for what you like and don’t like, then pursue what you really want. I find that most authors have some idea of what they think their book will look like, even if they don’t think they do. They do! They just might not realize it yet. Most people have read enough books and have seen glimpses of their preferences, which start to emerge after looking carefully at each detail. And that’s great! It’s your book, so I love finding ways to bring it to life that convey the dreams in your head, just as your words have conveyed them.

My friend and bestselling author Debbie Macomber said before she wrote her first book that she could already see it on a bookstore shelf with her name in large letters across the top. And hundreds of bestselling books later, that’s still what I see whenever I look at a book rack at a grocery store: several books on the latest bestsellers list with her name emblazoned across the top!

So what does your book look like, feel like, talk about? What do you want your readers to know, to feel or to do? How does what you’re saying with your words translate into the book that you envision in your readers’ hands? 

If you don’t have an idea, take a look at the world of books around you! Next, we’ll dive into bringing that vision to life.

Chapter 15: Interior design

Once you’ve found a sample book you’d like as a pattern for your book, you can start designing the look of the interior of your book. The interior includes everything inside the book, not the front, back or spine of the book. Everything else is in the interior, from the title page, copyright page, acknowledgments, and table of contents to the main chapters, section pages, and anything you want to include at the end: epilogue, notes, author bio or website links. 

The interior can be as simple or as complex as you’d like! I have one friend who simply typed his story on a full-size screen and exported a PDF file of it just as it was. He uploaded it to Amazon to print out an 8.5”x11” paperback book just as if it came out of his printer, except with a cover and paperback binding. I have other friends who have carefully selected every font, every element, added headings and footers and page numbers and section dividers, resulting in perfectly-bound, bookstore-ready books.

I say this so you can relax! The main thing is to get your story out there, even if you post it freely online. But if you’re like me, you might also like to have your story printed like any other book you’d find on your shelf. It’s a huge accomplishment to write a book, so taking the time to polish it off is often worth any effort it takes. And it helps for marketing too. Aside from the conventional wisdom that you can’t judge a book by its cover, I’d still rather have the best-looking book I can have!

So, what are the elements to consider when designing the interior?

(Here are two demo videos you can watch to see how to format the interior of your book. The first video is for Apple Pages, the second video is for Microsoft Word, and starts at 1:08 in the video.)

1) Choose your fonts

The font I’m using for the body of this book is called Garamond. It’s a very standard font for the main body of many books because it’s easy to read, and it has “serifs” on most letters… those “little feet” at the bottoms of the l’s and i’s and t’s, etc. Those little feet (which is what serif means in Latin) help pull the reader’s eye from left to right along each line of text.

I also like to use Times New Roman (like this) or Sabon (like this) or a similar serif font that is not too fancy but has those little feet to help the reader along. 

Traditional printing rules suggested using serifs for body text and something stronger for headings, usually fonts without the little feet, or in Latin “sans serif.” Now you know some Latin, too. :)

Traditional “sans serif” fonts include Helvetica or Arial. Headings are meant to be bolder and attention-grabbing, so they don’t need the serifs to pull the reader along. For this book, I decided to use my own handwriting, which provides both boldness and personalization, because the book itself is very personal: Write With Me! I call it the “Eric Elder” font. I created the font using an online app from Calligraphr.com. (Yes, that’s spelled right!)

Try some fonts on a paragraph or two, or a heading or two, in your own book and see what you think!

BUT… don’t format your entire document in these fonts directly. There’s a better way.

2) Setup your styles

The better way is to define your preferred fonts as Styles. For instance, in this book, I’ve defined the style of the paragraphs to be called “Body” style and I’ve adjusted the settings to my liking: Garamond, 11 point, justified, with 1.1 points of spacing between lines. 

Once I’ve defined a style, I apply it to the whole document. If I want to adjust the style later, I just change the definition of the “Style,” for instance to increase or decrease the font size or to switch to another font. Then when I make a change to one paragraph, I simply click “Update to Match” on the Style, and the change is applied to every paragraph in the book instantly, without having to go back and highlight and change every paragraph in the book manually.

I also create a style for “Chapter Titles,” and I define that style. If I want to change something later, I just modify the style once, and every Chapter Title in the book changes automatically.

Not only does this make changes easier, but it also helps for formatting other things, like the Table of Contents. Once I’ve applied the Chapter Title style to every chapter title in the book, I can insert a “Table of Contents” element at the beginning of the book and it will automatically create the table and page numbers from every Chapter Title because I’ve already told it what words should be considered Chapter Titles. 

So you can see the value of defining styles right up front. It will make the rest of the process much easier!

I’ve recorded some tutorials for how to create these styles and posted them to my “How To” playlist on my YouTube channel at youtube.com/ericelder. Most word processing programs have this capability, and help screens and online videos can also walk you through the process.

3) Define your page size

If you’ve taken measurements of the sample book you’d like to mimic, you can adjust your document to be exactly that size. I like to save a new copy of my manuscript and work from that for the rest of the steps. Keeping the old copy helps in case I make a mistake or accidentally delete something while experimenting, but I don’t go back to that old copy any more. I make any new edits on the newly formatted copy.

I define the page size by simply changing the size of the entire document. For this book, I’ve defined the page size to be 4.375”x7.” I also like using 5.5”x8.5” 5.01”x8.71” or 6”x9.” It really depends on what you want your book to look like! Check out beforehand to see which sizes are available and most popular.

4) Set your margins

If you have an option, define your pages to be “facing pages” or “mirrored pages” so you can set your margins to be different on the left and right of your book.

You want them to be different because a book has a “gutter” in the middle when it’s opened, and you’ll need a little more margin on the inside of each page so you don’t lose words in the gutter. 

For this book, in my margin setting, I chose “facing pages” and defined the inner margin to be .75” and the outer margin to be .375.” I defined my top margin to be .5” and the bottom to be .375.” How did I get these numbers? I found a book I liked, I measured its margins, and I plugged them in! Easy peasy.

5) Choose your headers and footers

Is there some text you’d like to appear on every page of your book? For instance, the title of your book and/or your name? Just tap the top area of your document and a “header” area should appear so you can type in some text.

For this book, I’ve put the title of my book on the right pages, and my name on the left. I like to do this so if someone copies a page from my book, they’ll remember where they got it, or others can tell where they got it and get a copy, too!

Most word processors will let you define a “different left and right” page. Once you type something into the left or right header, it will appear throughout your book. The same goes for footers. Just insert a field called “Page Number” at the bottom. You don’t have to number each page manually. In fact, you shouldn’t. Let the software do the work, and if you make a change in your text that changes the number of pages, the software will change the page numbers for you.

Other tidbits

To see a sample of other info you might include in your book, just look around this book or the book you’d like to emulate.

For instance, I usually include a title page on the first right-hand page of a book, with a copyright statement on the back of that page, on a left-hand page. I like to sign my books on the title page near my name! 

It’s weird signing your own book, believe me! One day I met Jeanette Oke who wrote When Calls the Heart and other famous novels about the Canadian frontier. I was telling her about my St. Nicholas book, and she asked if she could have a copy for her grandkids. I pulled out a copy from my backpack and asked if she’d like me to sign it. She said, “Yes, please do!” Odd as it seemed, there I was, signing one of my books for Jeanette Oke! Crazy! And I signed it where I sign all my books… on that title page.

Books sometimes start new chapters on right-hand pages, something you can define in your styles for “New Sections.” Every time I start a new chapter, I simply insert a “Section Break” and it defaults to how I like new sections to start. Note this is different than a “Page Break,” which simply starts a new page immediately following the previous one. A Section Break includes those special instructions for making sure the page starts on the right. I don’t always do this, as you can tell from this book. I wanted it to keep this book short and sweet and didn’t want any extra blank pages.

I love layout and design as much as I love writing, so all of this is fun for me. If you do, too, great! You can dive as deep as you want into getting things just right. But if you don’t, don’t worry. You can reach out to me or others who do! There are people who will be glad to help you add all the window-dressing you want to make your book look its best.

Chapter 16: Cover design

Whether you design your cover yourself or have someone else do it, the best graphic design phrase I’ve followed over the years is this:

One dominant theme

 It might be a striking image, a bold typestyle, a particular color scheme. But whatever it is, make it something that draws the eye. 

I’ve created most of my own covers. It’s something I love doing, and it’s a fun challenge for me to get it “just right.” If you want to try, I’ll give you the specifics in this chapter for how to create a cover for your own book so you can upload it to Amazon or wherever you decide to print it.

And if you don’t want to try, there are some simple ways to create a cover on most publishing services. For instance, on KDP on Amazon, once you upload your interior and title information, you can simply click “Launch Cover Creator” and Amazon will give you a few templates to choose from, with the title of your book and your name already on the cover in appropriate places on the front, spine, and back. 

You can then choose a different background image, change the color scheme, type over their dummy text with your own text, or upload your author photo. They make it easy!

But if you want to get more creative and build your cover from scratch, here’s how.

(Here’s a demo video you can watch that goes with this section.)

1) Determine your dimensions

When building your cover, it’s good to know up front that you’ll be creating one large graphic that will include your front cover (on the right of the graphic), your back cover (on the left of the graphic), and your spine (down the side of the book), all in one file. This cover will then wrap around the pages of your book and be trimmed to fit the size you’ve chosen.

Here’s an example of a complete cover file: 

Full cover design for Nicholas Deere's book "Fifty Shades of Grace"

You’ll notice the “one dominant theme” on the front cover (the couple on the right), with the picture wrapping around the spine and onto the back. I like designing covers that blend from front to back to give it a continuous look. The title is in a graceful font, and the subtitle is in a different color, in yet another graceful font. I try not to go crazy combining too many fonts, but one or two that compliment each other is pleasant.

To determine your dimensions, you can simply upload your interior file to KDP and it will tell you specifically how wide and tall your graphic needs to be! They calculate the size by taking into account the width and height of the paper size you’ve chosen, in this case, 5.5”x8.5.”

So to determine the overall height of the graphic, it’s just a matter of adding a little extra (.125”) to the top and bottom of the page to account for that being “trimmed” off when they cut the paper after printing the graphic. The graphic “bleeds” off the edge of the paper like this to account for the trimming. So the height would be 8.5” + .125” for the top bleed and .125” for the bottom bleed for a total height of 8.75.” After trimming, the book will be only 8.5” tall, just like you planned for it to be.

To determine the overall width, add a little extra to the far left and far right of the image (.125”), then add enough for the width of the spine. KDP will calculate this for you, or tell you how to calculate it based on the number of pages in your book. The more pages, the thicker the spine. The fewer pages, the thinner the spine. In this case, the book is 220 pages.

For white paper on KDP, they say to multiply the page count by 0.002252.” So 220 pages x 0.002252” is .495,” or basically 1/2 an inch. So the total width of the graphic needs to be 5.5” + 5.5” + .125” + .125” + .5” = 11.75.” (Cream paper is thicker so they give you a different multiplier for that.)

So now you know the full dimensions of your graphic: 8.75” x 11.75.”

Again, they’ll do all the calculations for you! But now you know what they’re doing.

2) Design your cover

Taking your full dimensions, you can create a graphic that is that exact size. For instance, when I use Canva.com to create a graphic, I simply choose “Create A Design,” then “Custom Size,” then I enter my dimensions: 8.75”x11.75.”

From there I start adding elements and moving them around, the background image, the title text, subtitle text, back cover text, and spine text turned sideways. 

KDP will also give you a design template so you can see the exact dimensions, including trim lines, spine width, and safety zones to be sure anything important doesn’t get accidentally cut off due to slight variations in printing and trimming. Here’s a sample of the design template: 

The pink zone is for safety. Don’t have any important words or graphics there. The black solid line is where the book will be trimmed. The dotted lines in the middle show the spine. Make sure your spine text is rotated in a way that when the book is sitting on a table with the cover showing, the spine text is right-side-up! The yellow area is set aside for a barcode, which KDP will add to the graphic in a white box. You don’t need to create the white box or barcode; they’ll do it for you.

I’ll often import the design template into my design, then choose 50% opacity on the template so I can “see through” it and make sure my text and images are within the safety zones. Then I delete the template before saving the file.  

3) Save Your graphic

When you’re done designing your graphic, you can save it in a PDF file for printing. If you’re using Canva, you can choose to download the image at high resolution for printing (300 dots per inch or higher). You can also choose between color formats (such as CMYK or RGB). Each publisher is different, so choose whichever format they prefer. KDP prefers CMYK, but can accept either.

Once you have your graphic saved, you can upload it to KDP under the option “Upload a cover you already have.”

After your interior file and cover file are uploaded, you’ll have a chance to preview your whole book online, from cover to cover! Exciting!

Chapter 17: Uploading your book

Let’s upload your book! 

Now that you have your interior and cover PDF files, you can upload them to a book printing company like KDP from Amazon or Lulu or IngramSpark.

Let’s start by creating a free account on KDP. As of this writing, just go to kdp.amazon.com and click “Sign Up.”

If you already have an Amazon account for buying things, you can use that same account to upload and sell your books. If you don’t have an Amazon account, just fill out the information to create one. I use my same Amazon account for everything.

You’ll be asked for your name and contact info, your banking info for direct deposits of your royalties, and your tax info if you want Amazon to withhold certain taxes on your behalf.

Once your account is created, you’ll be able to upload your book! Just go to the “Bookshelf” and click “Create” to create a new title.

1) Paperback details

Now you can enter your title, subtitle, author’s name, description, keywords, and categories.

Some of these fields can be changed even after your book is published, like your description, keywords, and categories. But you want to get your title, subtitle, and author’s name right the first time around!

For your description, be sure to include words that your target audience might be searching for, including other titles or authors who might be similar. 

Bonus Tip: For help in choosing words that people are searching for, you can go to trends.google.com and type in some words or phrases that come to mind when you think of your book. You’ll see which of those words or phrases other people are searching for, too!

Do the same for your keywords. These are the most important words you want your book to be known by. They can be individual words or phrases.

For categories, you can choose up to three. Think of these like the section of a bookstore where your book would be found, such as Christian Inspiration or Historical Fiction. You’ll want a category that is specific enough so people wandering through that “section” of the bookstore (even if only online) can find what they’re looking for. The categories you choose will also be used for determining the ranking of your book on Amazon. You could be #12 in Christian Mental Health, but #245,928 in General Christianity.

2) Paperback content

On the Content screens, you can enter your ISBN, choose your publication date, paper type, and trim size, then upload your interior and cover PDF files.

For the ISBN (International Standard Book Num er), Amazon can provide a free one or you can buy one or more from companies like bowker.com. A free one is fine and is tied specifically to Amazon, but some people like to have their own ISBN to tie it to their own identity. I’ve done both for my own books, and I often use the free ones for my clients to save them money.

For the publication date, you can leave it blank so it will go live as soon as you complete the steps, or you can choose a specific date in the future that you can announce to your target readers so they can all buy it on the same day. Choosing a specific day can help boost your rankings in terms of sales for that day, which can, if the sales are enough, help boost your book higher on the sales list and put it in front of more people. I usually leave it blank so it will go live as soon as I’m finished.

You may have already decided on your paper type and trim size when you initially formatted your book, so enter these options. You can still change these options before you publish your book, but not after you publish your book. So there’s still time to experiment and print some sample copies and see what you really like. Just don’t push “Publish” if you’re not sure yet.

Upload your interior file when prompted. Amazon will do some automatic checks to make sure your text and graphics are within the printable margins, your fonts are readable, and your layout is printable. 

They’ll also check to see that your ISBN you’ve entered matches the ISBN you’ve included on the copyright page within your book. If you haven’t added it there, do it now, then save a new PDF file to upload.

Once the interior passes the checks, upload your cover file. Amazon will also check this file for any printing issues, then it will allow you to launch a Preview window so you can flip through your whole book, from cover to cover, to check the margins, fonts, and overall layout. 

If Amazon sees any potential issues, they will flag them and note the page numbers so you can fix and upload a new file. If everything passes their inspection and yours, you can go on to set the rights and pricing.

3) Paperback rights and pricing

Here you can choose all countries where you want to publish your book (I choose All), the primary marketplace where you want to sell your book (I choose Amazon.com for US sales, but you might want to sell your book in your own country primarily if you’re not from the US), then choose a price for your book.

For pricing, I like to set it so I make about $5 per book, whether it’s a paperback, eBook, hardcover, or audiobook. That way I get $5 no matter what format the reader chooses. The reader get various advantages from any format, but I don’t lose or make more from any of the formats. But I do like to get about $5 per sale! For me, it just feels like the right price, both for me and for the buyer. You can choose different prices for different countries, but I just take the defaults that Amazon provides.

Note: Expanded distribution allows you to sell your book on other websites outside of Amazon. You’ll get less of a royalty, but could increase your overall sales. I like expanded distribution if your book size and territories allow for it. You may need to adjust your book size to a more common size if you want expanded distribution. If so, this option will let you know what to change.

Lastly, you can request a proof copy of your book. I definitely suggest choosing this option if you want to see it in your hands before making it available on Amazon. Don’t hit “Publish”! Just choose “Request Proof Copy.” You’ll have an option to order one or a few copies at cost plus shipping. These proof copies will also be marked as such so they’re not designed to be resold.

Order your proof copies, then wait to receive your first copy in the mail! 

If you don’t like it, you can fix it. If you love it, press “Publish”! Amazon will verify all of your book info and within 72 hours, it will be live on Amazon!

Chapter 18. Creating your eBook & hardcover

About 80% of the books I sell are paperbacks, 15% eBooks, 5% audiobooks, and only a handful of hardcovers. That’s why I start by formatting the paperback first, then move on to the eBook and a hardcover, if I do one at all. Finally, I work on an audiobook, as that’s a different type of project. 

Now that we’ve done our paperback, we can work on the ebook and hardcover.

Creating your eBook

Creating your eBook is fairly straightforward, unless you start adding bells and whistles. Then it gets complicated quickly, as an eBook follows different rules.

But for a normal eBook, it can be almost as simple as exporting your paperback book into an EPUB format. Most word processors will have an export function for an eBook. In Pages on a Mac, simply use “File” then “Export as EPUB.” If you use Word, you can simply save your document as a DOCX file and upload it to Amazon without any further conversion.

There are three differences you’ll want to note from a paperback to an eBook. First, you’ll want to include an auto-generated Table of Contents if you don’t already have one in your paperback. This table will be used in the eBook reader to help readers navigate by simply clicking on chapter titles.

The second difference is to create a simple front cover for your eBook. KDP recommends a graphic in .JPG format that is at least 1,000 pixels high by 625 pixels wide, with a resolution of 72 dots per inch. You won’t have a back cover or spine… just this little “chicklet” of an image for people to click on to browse or buy your eBook.

Once you export your EPUB file, you can upload it to KDP by clicking on the “Create Kindle eBook” option on your already existing paperback book. Don’t create a whole new title. When you add an eBook to your existing paperback title, many of the fields will be automatically imported and your paperback and eBook will be automatically linked on your Amazon page.

The third difference is you don’t need an ISBN at all. So you can delete that from the copyright page of your book, or if you have bought a block of ISBN’s you can use one on your eBook. But since it’s not necessary, you don’t need to use one on the eBook.

Creating your hardcover

I sell hardly any hardcovers, but you might want some for your own collection or special friends or family, or you might just want to make it available since you never know who might prefer that format. For instance, I’ve written a year-long devotional called 365 Daily Devotions with Eric Elder that people can read every day. So I’ve created a hardcover version for extra durability.

It’s easy to convert your book for the hardcover format, with a few changes.

First, you may have to change the dimensions of your book, as Amazon or other printers only do a few sizes of hardcovers. It’s easy enough to go into your word processor, choose the Document settings, and change the page size and margins to fit whatever dimensions are needed. 

Second, your cover will have to be modified to accommodate wrapping the cover image around the hardcover. KDP will offer you a template for the exact size of your book, showing how much extra room is needed at the edges to wrap around your book.

Third, you’ll need a different ISBN than for your paperback. Again, you can get a free one from KDP or use one you’ve purchased, but every printed format needs a different ISBN so when people order your book they can be sure they’re getting the right printed copy. You’ll want to change the ISBN on the copyright page inside your book before exporting it as a PDF file.

And yes, I realize I used three acronyms in that last paragraph and you might feel it’s all a jumble! But when you go to upload your eBook or hardcover on Amazon, the screens will walk you through everything you need. Don’t despair… be thankful you don’t have to use Gutenberg’s printer and place every letter on every page and run ink over it! Comparatively, this is still pretty amazinglyeasy! You can do it!

Chapter 19. Turning your writing into speaking

Don’t be surprised if, as soon as you finish writing your book, God invites you to talk about it!

One of the best things writing has done for me is to help improve my speaking. By writing down my thoughts, I’m able to choose my words more carefully and tell my stories more compellingly.

After finishing the first draft of my book, Loving God & Loving Gays, my pastor heard about the book and wanted to read an advance copy. Before he was even finished with it, he invited me to lunch to talk about the book and an interview he wanted to do with me on stage at our megachurch. He said, “If your book is ready by that date, I’d like to order 300 copies to have available in our bookstore as a resource for our people.” I was stunned.

He said he wanted the interview to be extemporaneous, with a few seed questions to get started, but with enough spontaneity that it would feel fresh and unrehearsed. Keep in mind, this was the largest audience I had ever spoken to, both in person and online, on a topic where words really matter. Plus, the interview was to last just five minutes. My answers would have to be very, very concise.

I was nervous, but because I had written the book, I was prepared. I was ready for whatever kind of question he might ask in the moment. 

In the end, what sounded like a casual, off-the-cuff conversation between friends was really the result of 30 years of life and ministry and nine months of crafting sentences on every aspect of the topic. I was able to condense a 230-page book into a five-minute talk that people still tell me has impacted them even five years later.

I don’t know that I would have been able to do it, certainly not as well, had I not spent so much time thinking through and writing down my thoughts beforehand.

All of this is to say that your words matter. The time you spend choosing your words and crafting your sentences matter. For me, it’s like playing a song on the piano. It takes hours and hours of work to learn a three-minute song. But that repetition, that figuring out of the notes, that detailed work to get the dynamics just right, all pay off in the end and make your playing look effortless. 

As anyone who makes something look effortless knows, it’s not effortless in the preparation! Michelangelo said: 

“If you knew how much work went into it, you wouldn’t call it genius.”

Having said that, there are still certain things you can do to prepare to turn your writing into speaking.

1) What do you want your audience to know, to feel, and to do?

I usually start with the same steps that I start a book, asking myself, “What do I want the listener to know? What do I want them to feel? What do I want them to do?”

I was recently asked to speak at a memorial service for a dear aunt and uncle who had passed away on separate occasions. There was a lot I could have said, but I was given exactly three minutes. Many stories flashed through my mind of my interactions with them. Too many to share in that short time. When I thought of my audience, I tried to think what would be most important for them. What could I say that others couldn’t or wouldn’t say, as there were a few different speakers?

I decided to focus on three stories that centered on three significant decisions I had made while staying with my aunt and uncle at their house… and what it meant to me for them to host me and give me a place to think clearly and hear deeply from God.

I wanted the audience to know these stories of how their lives influenced mine. I wanted them to feel closer to God as they listened to the stories. I also wanted them to consider a significant decision that might be on their hearts and to make a commitment to Him. That’s what I wanted them to know, to feel, and to do.

Then I had to come up with the thread that would tie them all together. Each story was a significant decision tied to a specific date. So as I told each story, I mentioned the decision, the date, and how my aunt and uncle played a role.

Finally, I wanted to end with a call to action: to invite them to make a commitment to something that may be on their hearts, too.

The talk went well, and one person said afterward: “I think you are at your best when you are sharing your testimony freely like that. It’s powerful.”

By “freely,” he meant extemporaneously, as if it just sprang out of my heart in that moment. In a sense, it did. I had to rely on the Holy Spirit to give me the words to speak and to witness to the importance their lives had on mine. 

But my “spontaneous” three stories were actually three stories I had written about at length in a couple of my books. I condensed whole chapters into single sentences so I could fit all three stories into my tight timeframe. I was able to do it more effectively because I had already thought through those stories deeply. I had come up with words and phrases to capture the essence of the stories. Then I told them in a way that drove home what I wanted this particular audience to know, to feel, and to do.

Two other things helped me deliver that message. 

2) Write and memorize your opening and closing words

My childhood dance teacher taught us to always nail the opening and closing of our numbers. She said people won’t notice if you mess up in the middle, just be sure to nail your opening and closing! 

The same is true for speeches. I usually try to write out and memorize my opening and closing lines. This assures I have something to say when I stand up and something to say when I wrap up. Here’s my intro from this talk:

“My name is Eric Elder, and Rowland and Martha were my uncle and aunt. When I think of them, three pictures come to my mind.”

I also had a closing statement, a call to action, that I had also written and memorized:

“I think Rowland and Martha are providing a backdrop for each of us today, including me. If there’s a significant decision on your heart, I think we could do nothing better to honor them, and to honor God, than by making a commitment today to follow the God of Rowland and Martha and the God of Joan and Ted and Glen and their descendants.”

Then I invited people to pray a prayer of commitment with me.

I follow this same format for almost all of my talks.

I write down on one sheet of paper:

  • What I want people to know, to feel, and to do,
  • I write and memorize an intro and closing,
  • And I write my main three points that support my theme, often described in three pictures that come to my mind.

3) What’s in it for me?

Third, I try to remember that everyone, everywhere, at all times, has needs. I try to ask myself what the audience is asking: “What’s in it for me?”

The three stories I shared that day may have been meaningful to me as the speaker, but my goal was to also inspire those in attendance, so I tried to make it relatable to them as well. A simple way I did this was to include a few statements that might touch something going on in their lives. I didn’t memorize these for my closing, but that’s where I included them. I said:

“If there’s a significant decision that’s on your heart—whether it’s to put your faith in Christ for the first time, whether it’s about your marriage, whether it’s about your kids or your job or your future or your finances or your health—I think we could do nothing better to honor them and honor God than by making a commitment today.”

By listing several ways my words might apply to their personal situations, I was able to help answer the question: “What’s in it for me?” I also opened a door for the Holy Spirit to turn one message into hundreds of messages, speaking directly to the situations they may have been facing. I wanted my message to be more than just how wonderful my aunt and uncle were when they were alive, which was very important, but also about how their lives could still have an impact on each one of us today.

Afterward, another person came up to me and said:“Thanks so much, Eric. I wanted you to know I made a significant decision today.” Touchdown! Hallelujah!

3) Using nervous energy

The last thought about speaking that I’d like to share here has to do with the common fear of public speaking. I’m told public speaking is one of the top fears of most people, and I can see why!

I get nervous every time I have to get up to speak. Every time. Every. Time.

One of the things I often do when I speak, almost every time, is cry. As I tell stories of how God has worked in my life, I cry. I believe it’s a sign of the Holy Spirit working through me. But I also believe it’s a release of the nervous energy that builds up inside me over several days or hours of preparation. When I get up to speak, I have to fix my words in full sentences and give them their final form, and that pressure, in front of a live audience, is immense. My brain is working overtime, the Spirit is speaking into me and through me, and my heart is full of emotion. And I cry. 

And my audience cries… almost every time.

I have learned not to try to suppress it, but to lean into it. I am full of emotion, and as long as it doesn’t debilitate me, it can help me deliver a message that is full of emotion, too. Full of all the care and prayer and thought that I’ve put into it.

As Robert Frost said: “No tears in the writer, no tears in the reader.” 

The same is true for speakers and listeners.

How are you wired? How might you use your nervous energy to lean into the emotions God has given you? Maybe you get overexcited and you talk fast. Maybe you get stage fright and very few words come out at all. Maybe you laugh when you’re nervous, or cry, like me. Instead of fighting those feelings, how could you lean into them and let God use them for good?

See what I did there? I just answered the question “What’s in it for me?” and made this chapter applicable to you! 

You can do the same whenever you speak.

Chapter 20: Seven touches

Your book’s done and uploaded! Hooray!

Now you have two choices. You can just enjoy the victory of writing and publishing a book. Or you have to gear up for the next phase: marketing your book. If you pick option one, you’re done! But if you want to get your work into the hands of more readers, you’ll want to roll up your sleeves again.

Here’s one tried and true marketing concept that will help you as you go forward. It usually takes “seven touches” to convert a potential reader into an actual reader. By that I mean, you will want to expose potential readers to your book at least seven times, often in multiple ways, before they will commit to buying and reading your book.

People don’t just buy a Coke because they saw it once on a shelf at a store. They buy it because they saw an ad on TV, heard a jingle on the radio, saw a pop-up ad on Google, watched a sporting match with the company’s logo throughout the event, saw a truck on the highway with the logo emblazoned on the side, walked past a promotional display at the grocery store, then saw a sale price on the bottles on the shelf. Finally, they decided, “I’d like a Coke today” and put a case in their cart.

And that’s with an international product that has been advertising to you your whole life.

So how do we get our book in front of people seven times? That’s what we’ll explore next.Here are seven ways to tell the world about your story.

1) Tell the story behind the story

You’ve just spent a good chunk of your life writing your story. People want to hear about that. They’re enthralled by the process. They have seldom, if ever, met a “book writer.”

I was writing on my laptop at a local Steak & Shake when my server looked at what I was doing. “Are you a book writer?” he asked. “I’ve never met a book writer.” He was enthralled.

I chuckled at his description. I could type. I could string sentences together. I could tell a story. But somehow, in that moment, I felt like JK Rowling writing her first book in the Harry Potter series in a coffee  shop in London. Can you imagine waiting on JK Rowling while she sipped coffee and worked on her forthcoming novel? 

That’s what I felt like in the eyes of my server. And to much of the world, that’s what you’ll look like in the eyes of those who find out you’re a “book writer,” too.

Own it!

“Yes,” I said. “I am a book writer.”

For some reason, I liked his description even better than “author”! Being an author intimidates me. In my mind, it implies a certain lifestyle, probably more picturesque and more romantic than it actually is. If I tell people I’m an author, I sometimes feel like an imposter! But I am a book writer. That’s totally true. 

So when I introduce a book to the world, I like to tell the story behind the story: why I wrote it, what it was like writing it, how it felt to have written it, why I’m thankful I took the time to tell it—and why I think they’ll enjoy reading it.

Tell the story behind your story. People want to hear it!

2) Post reader reviews

As I said earlier, it’s one thing to hear from a car salesmen how great their cars are. It’s another thing to hear it from a “satisfied customer.”

Collect reader comments all throughout your process. If someone is intrigued by the idea of your book and tells you so, write it down.

When I told people my wife and I were writing a book about the real St. Nicholas and the great faith he had in Christ, we would share a few tidbits about his life. People would say, “I’d love to read that. I didn’t know he was a real person.” Or they’d say, “I’d love to read that to my kids. I don’t want to take away the fun of Santa, but I still want to point them to Christ.”

Our book was perfect for just those scenarios. We had researched the story, we had found it compelling, and we took time to write it down for others to enjoy. That initial intrigue provided fodder for telling others why they might like to read it, too.

I also captured quotes when advance readers read chapters or the whole book. And then I captured quotes after the book came out to share those with others, too.

Pick one or two quotes and share them online! The next week, do the same! As readers continue to write, continue to post from time to time what they’re saying.

People love hearing from satisfied customers.

Bonus: ask you readers to take a picture of themselves holding your book, maybe when they pull it from the mailbox, or in a location where they’re reading it—maybe in their favorite chair or on a beach or by a fireplace. Include their pictures with their quotes for greater impact!

3) Offer a book reading

My local library loved that I had written a book about St. Nicholas. They asked if I would be willing to do a reading one day at the library to raise awareness about it. Of course I would!

It would be an easy win for me and for those who would come.

When the time came for me to do the reading, I was also introducing a new musical I had written based on the book called His Name Was Nicholas. So I created a whole 45-minute presentation. I talked about the book and why we wrote it. I talked about my high school English teacher who impacted me (and who I invited to the presentation). I talked about the upcoming musical and played some of the music from the show.

The local newspaper decided to feature the story and put me and my book on the front page. It was a 12-page paper and my friend was the editor! But it got my message in front of even more people.

The library felt the audience would be bigger if they combined it with a big open house they were having around the same time. So instead of a small reading to a few children, which is where they slotted me at first, my talk turned into a bigger event with people already wanting to come to the library.

I say all this to say you never know what kind of buzz you might create by offering a book reading to others, starting with your own local community.

4) Create a video

As much as we want people to read our books, the truth is they like to watch videos even more! You can use your phone or have a friend record you on their phone or camera talking about your book. It doesn’t have to be long, but it can be!

Share things you’ve already thought through when writing your book, such as “When the reader finishes the book, what do I want them to know, to feel, and to do?” Just talk about those things for a few minutes and post it online!

You can upload the video to your social media accounts. You can upload it to YouTube with just a few clicks. Then share those links with everyone you can!

I’ve created short clips… one or two or three minutes long, talking about my books, holding the books, reading portions from the books.

I’ve also created entire podcast series around my books. For my book My Stories of Faith, I launched it just after COVID began when people were staying at home and more than a little fearful. I simply turned on my camera in my living room and went live every night for a month, reading one story each night from my book, playing a song on my piano, and praying for those who were watching. I called it Bedtime Stories of Faith. People still talk about that series and how grateful they were for those faith boosters every night during that tumultuous time. You can still watch those videos on my YouTube channel at: youtube.com/ericelder.

I wrote the stories to share, so I wasn’t worried about selling books. I wanted people to have the information, to have the encouragement. Several people did order books as a result for themselves and for their friends.

Don’t limit your book to paper and ink. Set it free whenever you can!

5) Offer giveaways

People love free stuff. And offering a book or two online is an easy way to promote your book without looking like you’re promoting it. You’re giving something away! But it also helps people to learn about your book in a non-threatening way.

When I was promoting my St. Nicholas book and musical, I contacted a couple places that seemed like natural fits.

The first was an international health-sharing ministry I belong to that has a monthly newsletter which features a “member story” each month and how their ministry helps them. I told them about how they helped me through a rough patch in my health when I was trying to stage a ballet version of my book and was almost derailed by a medical situation, permanently. But thanks to their help, I was able to complete the project. 

They set up an interview, asked for some photos of me, my book, and my upcoming event, and they slated it to appear in their November edition, right before Christmas. 

It was a win-win for me and for their ministry. They got to share with all of their members how their ministry had impacted a fellow member, and I got to share about a project that was on my heart. 

They offered two free books to their readers, so people could email to win them. Others could buy them if they didn’t win.

A second organization I contacted was a local radio station. I reached out to the morning show host and told him about my upcoming St. Nicholas musical and asked if he’d like to do an interview about the show and the book and the process that led up to it. He declined that offer, but said if I would just call into the morning show the next day and offer two free tickets to the show, I could talk about the show and the book and whatever I wanted for 2-3 minutes!

That was perfect! I called at the designated time, the host took my call, let me speak for 2-3 minutes, and had listeners call in for the tickets.

Call me naive, but I never realized as a kid, or even most of my adult life, that people weren’t giving free stuff away, they were wanting me to buy their stuff! The free stuff was just to get our attention long enough hear about what they were offering.

But now that I know what’s happening, I can help make it a win-win all around.

When I speak, I often pass around a sign up sheet for people to get on my newsletter list so they can get a boost in their faith anytime. Or even better, I’ll ask them to take out their phones and pull up my website so they can see it for themselves, bookmark it to visit later, and sign up for my newsletter right then.

Some people do a drawing for a free book if the audience will sign up or put their business cards in a bowl. Others hand out “idea sheets” people can take home that highlight some things they might get out of the book. Some people might not be ready to buy when you speak, but when they are ready, they’ll know how to find it! 

There are so many ways to give your readers something of value both while you’re speaking to them and when they eventually read your book, which, if you’re like me, is probably your ultimate goal! 

You took the time to write it. Now take the time to get it into their hands and hearts.

6) Ask others to share

I have friends who do podcasts who also happen to like my books! So from time to time, I’ll ask if they’d like to do an interview about one of the books on their show. 

We chat on zoom for an hour about the book and the book writing process and whatever direction the host wants to take. They post it for their listeners, and I point people to their podcast. Again, it’s a win-win all around.

If you have friends who love, love, love your book, ask if they’ll share it on their social media along with a few thoughts on the book, and maybe why someone would want to read it. What they share doesn’t have to be long, or it can be, but even 2-3 sentences can be enough to expose your book one more time to people you know, and expose your book even further to people you don’t know!

When I was starting to record my piano music, I was talking to a musician friend who has worked with some really big name bands. At that time, when ordering CDs, you had to order 500 or 1,000 at a time. You couldn’t just print one, and there was no streaming or YouTube. My friend said, “You can probably sell 200-300 to your family or friends, but if you don’t have another way to get the word out, you’ll have a closet full of most of your CDs.” 

Thankfully, that’s no longer the model! I can upload a song today and people can start listening to it immediately. But the same principle holds true for books. You might be able to sell dozens or even a few hundred books to family and friends. But if you want to reach a broader audience, though, you’ll need to enlist your current fans to share your book with their family and friends, too. 

Sometimes it’s as simple as asking. So ask!

7) Throw a launch party

I saved this one for last, but I would do this one first. 

I saved it for last because this can also serve as your own celebration of having written and published a book! Make it a party! And it’s all about you… and of course, your book.

You might feel uncomfortable throwing yourself a party. But please do! Let others help you plan it. You’ll find your biggest fans are also your biggest cheerleaders and happy to see you succeed at reaching this HUGE goal.

When I finished one of my books, a friend had also finished one of his so we held a joint launch party. He asked a coffee shop on campus at the college where he taught if we could do it there. They said, Yes! We invited friends and faculty and students and promoted it on social media. 

I met him there on our launch night with a case of my books, and he had a case of his. We set up a book table in the hallway and made a spot to stand during our talks in the coffeeshop.

The interesting thing to me was that even though we didn’t have a big crowd, we had a big celebration in our hearts! We enjoyed being together and celebrating this milestone. We each talked a bit about why we wrote the books, then we each read a chapter aloud.

We only had 15-20 people at most, and we each sold a couple copies of our books. But what happened on social media was an entirely different thing!

We posted announcements leading up to the launch which generated tremendous coverage, then posted pictures from the event, with us and our books at the book table, which generated even more coverage! People celebrated with us from all over, sending congratulations and attaboys for our success.

Again, people were thrilled to see they had friends who were “book writers.” And in truth, it’s no small feat. It’s something definitely to be celebrated!

I’m working with two authors right now who are launching their books. They both chose local libraries as their venues, deciding on a time and date for their launches. 

They’ve made a few posters to put around town and they’ve promoted it on social media. The buzz is already significant. I can’t wait to party with them and celebrate all they’ve done… and all their books will do for others out in the world.

I hope the same for you, too! So go ahead, throw a party!

Chapter 21: Start writing your NEXT book!

What?!? Yes, I mean it! What book has God put on your heart to write next?

Maybe it feels like you just gave birth to this baby, and I’m asking you right away if you want to have another! But if you jotted down a few book ideas at the beginning of this book, you may already have some ideas for your next book… or books! Now that you know the process, you can start writing the next one, and the next, and the next!

Don’t jump into it so fast that you forget to raise and nurture the baby to which you’ve just given birth! And be sure to enjoy a toast with some friends to celebrate the great accomplishment of publishing a book!

But if some new ideas have been percolating about your next book, go ahead and jot them down! Re-read this book, starting with Chapter 1.

Writing can be addictive. But what a great addiction! This is one addiction where you bless yourself and others, too. 

I never knew I had more than one book in me. But I did! Thirty-six books later, you’d think I’d be out of ideas for books. But even as I write this closing chapter, I already have two or three more books in mind to write!

Want to join me… again?!? I’d love to have you! Why not? And this time, bring some friends! 

God and I are both inviting you: Write With Me!

I love hearing from my readers! 

For questions, comments or help with your book, visit:
ericelder.com

P.S. Ready to write? In case you missed it, you can also get my Write With Me! NOTEBOOK!!! to capture all your thoughts to the questions and suggestions in this book.

When you finish the notebook, you’ll have written your entire book from cover to cover! (Tip: Get ONE NOTEBOOK for EACH BOOK you want to write. Think “books,” not “book,” remember?!?)

Endorsements

Here are a few comments from others I’ve helped with their writing or publishing. I’d love to help you!

“Eric’s help made all the difference!” Greg Potzer, Our Favorite Christian Quotations

“He was with me every step of the way.” Brent Knapton, Testimonies of Grace

“Eric gave warm fellowship, encouragement, and expertise.” Clayt Irmeger, Not to be Lived Single-Handedly

“His expertise was just what I needed.” Karen Neal, Bella Bella Cinderella

“Eric has an uncanny ability to motivate people to write.” Tim Wilkins, More Than Words

“He helped me self-publish in an easy, economical way.” Larry Booze, Say it to Stick

“His passion for writing is contagious.” Mary Felkins, This I Promise You

“He provided practical guidance with genuine interest.” Aaron Chan, book forthcoming

“Eric was the bridge to help fulfill my life-long dream.” Cammie Quinn, Follow the Wind Home

“I’ve seen him help others, and he’s now helping me.” Al Lowry, 365 Daily Bible Readings

“Without him, I would not have completed my book.” Sandy Egle,  Ministering to the Least of These

“I know of no one better-equipped to guide writers.” Kent Sanders, The Faith of Elvis

“He never doubted I would bring my idea to completion.” Laurie Bliese, Will the Lights Go Out?

“He believed in my writing before I was sure myself.” Caleb Dossett, They Call Me Mr

“He helped me finally finish my 10-year project.” Jeanette Smith, book forthcoming

“Eric held my hand the whole way.” MelanEE Lisa Davidson, Loved. I. AM!

“I don’t think I could have done it without him!” Elizabeth Giger, Beyond the Front Door

“Eric gave me confidence when I had almost given up.” Steven Lomske, On the Bank of the Chippewa

You can do this! I’m glad to show you how!

More by Eric!

DEVOTIONALS

  • Two Weeks With God
  • Exodus: Lessons In Freedom
  • Acts: Lessons In Faith
  • Jesus: Lessons In Love
  • Ephesians: Lessons In Grace
  • Nehemiah: Lessons In Rebuilding:
  • Romans: Lessons In Renewing Your Mind
  • Psalms: Lessons In Prayer
  • The Top 20 Passages In The Bible
  • Israel: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • Israel For Kids! Lessons From The Holy Land
  • The Inspiring Thoughts Collection
  • Water From My Well
  • 365 Daily Devotions With Eric Elder
  • My Stories Of Faith
  • Living Life With A Capital “L”

HISTORICAL FICTION

  • St. Nicholas: The Believer (with Lana Elder)
  • San Nicolás: El Creyente (Spanish Edition)

MUSICAL

  • His Name Was Nicholas (with Lana Elder)

PIANO BOOKS

  • Clear My Mind
  • Soothe My Soul
  • My Favorite Classics

JOURNALS

  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Prayer
  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Faith
  • A Personal Journal With 101 Quotes On Love

SEXUALITY

  • What God Says About Sex
  • Fifty Shades of Grace (under pen name, Nicholas Deere)
  • Loving God & Loving Gays
  • Cómo amar a Dios y a los gays (Spanish Edition)
  • 15 Tips For A Stronger Marriage

GRIEF

  • Loving Thoughts (with Greg Potzer)
  • Making The Most Of The Darkness

WRITING & PUBLISHING

  • Write With Me!
  • Write With Me! Notebook!!!

ALBUMS

  • Clear My Mind
  • Soothe My Soul
  • My Favorite Classics (with Eric’s children and sister)
  • His Name Was Nicholas EP (with Matt Ludwig)

STAGE PRODUCTIONS

  • One Life (a ballet with Cynthia Dewar and Erin Morton)
  • His Name Was Nicholas (a musical with Lana Elder)
  • San Nicola (a puppet opera with Girolamo Botta)

To learn more or order, visit:
www.inspiringbooks.com

About this Book

You’ve been reading “Write With Me!” by Eric Elder. This book is also available in Paperback, Kindle, AudibleSpotify or Apple Audiobook.

This book is part of a series of books on writing, self-publishing, and reaching the world with your book. Use these links to read the others.

The Write With Me! NOTEBOOK!!! helps you capture all your thoughts to the questions and suggestions in this book. When you finish answering the questions in the notebook, you’ll have written a strong draft of your entire book from cover to cover!

Let’s Get Technical walks through all the steps to share the message of your book with the world, including: how to create a website, a mailing list, a social media presence, a podcast, a YouTube channel, an audiobook, a business card, an online class, a payment system, a coaching calendar, and edit audio & video!

Living Life with a Capital “L”

Living Life with a Capital “L”

Living Life with a Capital "L"

21 devotions based on the book of John
by Eric Elder

Every day we have a choice to make: we can lose ourselves in despair or keep living our lives to the full. Jesus said, “I have come that they may have life, and have it to the full.” Jesus never married, yet He had a full life. He was beaten and ridiculed, yet He accomplished all He came do. I want that kind of life… a Full Life… an Abundant Life… Life with a capital “L.” Maybe you do, too? If so, I invite you to read through the Gospel of John with me and let Jesus lift you up. He came that you may have life, and have it to the full… Life with a capital “L.”

Listen here, read below, or download the PDF
Also available in paperback

Introduction: Living Life to the Full

When I lost my wife of 23 years, I had a choice to make: I could lose myself in despair or keep living my life to the full. I was tempted many times to lose myself in despair.

But I also had to remember that God had given me a life for a reason. And if I was still alive, He still had plans for me. My hope was that God would show me what those plans were.

I was faced with choices continually. 

When I wanted to go see a movie but couldn’t go with Lana and didn’t want to go with anyone else, I had to choose whether to stay home or go alone. I chose to go and laughed and cried and stood up and cheered even, because I was the only one in the theater.

When I wanted to say, “I can’t raise my kids like this. I can’t be both mom and dad,” I had to choose whether I’d give up and give in or lean into who God created me to be. I couldn’t be both mom and dad, but I could be the best dad I could be. 

When my dance teacher from childhood invited me into her classroom to dance again as she was now teaching my daughter, I protested, both internally and externally. How could I possibly dance when I was hurting so badly? But how could I say no to my sweet seventy-two-year-old dance teacher? I chose to go in and dance in my socks… laughing the whole hour (and the rest of the year), as I watched my fifty-year-old belly bounce up and down in the wall-sized mirror.

One day, on a bus ride to the airport, the bus driver gave me a little booklet. It was a pocket-sized Gospel of John from the Bible. The driver probably didn’t know I was a Christian. He probably didn’t know I was a pastor. And he probably didn’t know I had lost the love of my life. 

But what he did know was that the words of God contained in that little book from the Bible could bring life to anyone in any situation at any time. 

The truth is everyone, everywhere, at all times has needs. I began reading that little book that day and carried it with me for the next several months, pulling it out again and again to read whenever I had a few minutes.

That first time I read through it, I underlined every passage that talked about John’s intimacy with Jesus. I was struck by the fact of how close they were. I wanted that kind of intimacy, and Jesus offered it to me, just like He offered it to John.

The second time I read through it, I underlined every passage that talked about conflict, and how Jesus resolved it whenever He encountered it. I learned that sometimes He engaged it and sometimes walked away, depending on His goal in each situation.

The third time I read through it, I underlined every passage that talked about life and living life to the fullest. Jesus said, “I have come that they may have life, and have it to the full.” Jesus never married yet had a full life. He was beaten and ridiculed yet accomplished all He came do. I wanted that kind of life… a full life… an abundant life… Life with a capital “L.”

There are times when I could still slip into despair. But Jesus always offers me a hand, just like He did when Peter was sinking in the sea. He always invites me to make a choice: to sink deeper on my own or to take His hand and let Him lift me up.

Everyone, everywhere, at all times has needs. What about you? What do you need today? I invite you to read through the Gospel of John with me. Let Jesus lift you up. He came that you may have life, and  have it to the full… Life with a capital “L.”

P.S. I’ve included in this book all the stories that John told about Jesus, chapter by chapter. At the end of each chapter, I’ve included a few thoughts of my own. I’ve left space for you to write a few of your thoughts, too!

“I have come that they may have life, and have it to the full.”

Table of Contents

  • Introduction: Living Life to the Full
  • Chapter 1: In Him Was Life
  • Chapter 2: You Have Saved the Best Till Now
  • Chapter 3: Whoever Believes in the Son has Eternal Life
  • Chapter 4: A Spring of Water Welling Up to Eternal Life
  • Chapter 5: The Father… Shows Him All He Does
  • Chapter 6: I Am the Bread of Life
  • Chapter 7: Streams of Living Water Will Flow from Within
  • Chapter 8: Go Now and Leave Your Life of Sin
  • Chapter 9: You Have Now Seen Him
  • Chapter 10: I Have Come that They May Have Life
  • Chapter 11: I Am the Resurrection and the Life
  • Chapter 12: The Man Who Loves His Life Will Lose It
  • Chapter 13: I Will Lay Down My Life for You
  • Chapter 14: I Am the Way and the Truth and the Life
  • Chapter 15: Apart from Me You Can Do Nothing
  • Chapter 16: He Will Guide You into All Truth
  • Chapter 17: Now This is Eternal Life
  • Chapter 18: My Kingdom is Not of this World
  • Chapter 19: It is Finished
  • Chapter 20: By Believing You May Have Life in His Name
  • Chapter 21: Follow Me
  • Conclusion: Jesus Did Many Other Things as Well

Chapter 1: In Him Was Life

(Stories about Jesus as told by His friend John)

John 1 (New International Version)

In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God. He was with God in the beginning. Through him all things were made; without him nothing was made that has been made. In him was life, and that life was the light of all mankind. The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness has not overcome it.

There was a man sent from God whose name was John. He came as a witness to testify concerning that light, so that through him all might believe. He himself was not the light; he came only as a witness to the light.

The true light that gives light to everyone was coming into the world. He was in the world, and though the world was made through him, the world did not recognize him. He came to that which was his own, but his own did not receive him. Yet to all who did receive him, to those who believed in his name, he gave the right to become children of God—children born not of natural descent, nor of human decision or a husband’s will, but born of God.

The Word became flesh and made his dwelling among us. We have seen his glory, the glory of the one and only Son, who came from the Father, full of grace and truth.

(John testified concerning him. He cried out, saying, “This is the one I spoke about when I said, ‘He who comes after me has surpassed me because he was before me.’ ”) Out of his fullness we have all received grace in place of grace already given. For the law was given through Moses; grace and truth came through Jesus Christ. No one has ever seen God, but the one and only Son, who is himself God and is in closest relationship with the Father, has made him known.

Now this was John’s testimony when the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem sent priests and Levites to ask him who he was. He did not fail to confess, but confessed freely, “I am not the Messiah.”

They asked him, “Then who are you? Are you Elijah?”

He said, “I am not.”

“Are you the Prophet?”

He answered, “No.”

Finally they said, “Who are you? Give us an answer to take back to those who sent us. What do you say about yourself?”

John replied in the words of Isaiah the prophet, “I am the voice of one calling in the wilderness, ‘Make straight the way for the Lord.’ ”

Now the Pharisees who had been sent questioned him, “Why then do you baptize if you are not the Messiah, nor Elijah, nor the Prophet?”

“I baptize with water,” John replied, “but among you stands one you do not know. He is the one who comes after me, the straps of whose sandals I am not worthy to untie.”

This all happened at Bethany on the other side of the Jordan, where John was baptizing.

The next day John saw Jesus coming toward him and said, “Look, the Lamb of God, who takes away the sin of the world! This is the one I meant when I said, ‘A man who comes after me has surpassed me because he was before me.’ I myself did not know him, but the reason I came baptizing with water was that he might be revealed to Israel.”

Then John gave this testimony: “I saw the Spirit come down from heaven as a dove and remain on him. And I myself did not know him, but the one who sent me to baptize with water told me, ‘The man on whom you see the Spirit come down and remain is the one who will baptize with the Holy Spirit.’ I have seen and I testify that this is God’s Chosen One.”

The next day John was there again with two of his disciples. When he saw Jesus passing by, he said, “Look, the Lamb of God!”

When the two disciples heard him say this, they followed Jesus. Turning around, Jesus saw them following and asked, “What do you want?”

They said, “Rabbi” (which means “Teacher”), “where are you staying?”

“Come,” he replied, “and you will see.”

So they went and saw where he was staying, and they spent that day with him. It was about four in the afternoon.

Andrew, Simon Peter’s brother, was one of the two who heard what John had said and who had followed Jesus. The first thing Andrew did was to find his brother Simon and tell him, “We have found the Messiah” (that is, the Christ). And he brought him to Jesus.

Jesus looked at him and said, “You are Simon son of John. You will be called Cephas” (which, when translated, is Peter).

The next day Jesus decided to leave for Galilee. Finding Philip, he said to him, “Follow me.”

Philip, like Andrew and Peter, was from the town of Bethsaida. Philip found Nathanael and told him, “We have found the one Moses wrote about in the Law, and about whom the prophets also wrote—Jesus of Nazareth, the son of Joseph.”

“Nazareth! Can anything good come from there?” Nathanael asked.

“Come and see,” said Philip.

When Jesus saw Nathanael approaching, he said of him, “Here truly is an Israelite in whom there is no deceit.”

“How do you know me?” Nathanael asked.

Jesus answered, “I saw you while you were still under the fig tree before Philip called you.”

Then Nathanael declared, “Rabbi, you are the Son of God; you are the king of Israel.”

Jesus said, “You believe because I told you I saw you under the fig tree. You will see greater things than that.” He then added, “Very truly I tell you, you will see ‘heaven open, and the angels of God ascending and descending on’ the Son of Man.”

My Thoughts

I’ve heard people say, “Jesus is all you need.” 

I used to think, “How can that be? I’m human and I need all kinds of things… food, water, friendship, intimacy, health, finances.” 

But then I remembered everything I have comes from Him. As John says, “Through Him all things were made; without Him nothing was made that has been made. In Him was life…”

Now, when I hear people say, “Jesus is all you need,” I get it! Everything I have DOES come from Him! Lana, my kids, my food, my friends, my finances, my health… they ALLcame from Him! Jesus really is all I need… because everything comes from Him!

What do you need today? Come to Him.

John tells us Jesus said the same to two disciples. Jesus saw them following Him, so He turned and asked, “What do you want?”

They told Him and Jesus said, “Come, and you will see.”

John says they went and spent the day with Him. Wow! What I wouldn’t give to spend a day with Jesus! And the truth is, I can! He invites me to come and spend the day with Him every day. Every day. Every day.

Sometimes we don’t realize that Jesus is all we need until Jesus is all we have. Then the truth becomes clear.

“What do you want? Come, and you will see.”

Spend a day with Jesus. He has everything you need.

“In Him was life…”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 2: You Have Saved the Best Till Now

John 2 (New Living Translation)

The next day there was a wedding celebration in the village of Cana in Galilee. Jesus’ mother was there, and Jesus and his disciples were also invited to the celebration. The wine supply ran out during the festivities, so Jesus’ mother told him, “They have no more wine.”

“Dear woman, that’s not our problem,” Jesus replied. “My time has not yet come.”

But his mother told the servants, “Do whatever he tells you.”

Standing nearby were six stone water jars, used for Jewish ceremonial washing. Each could hold twenty to thirty gallons. Jesus told the servants, “Fill the jars with water.” When the jars had been filled, he said, “Now dip some out, and take it to the master of ceremonies.” So the servants followed his instructions.

When the master of ceremonies tasted the water that was now wine, not knowing where it had come from (though, of course, the servants knew), he called the bridegroom over. “A host always serves the best wine first,” he said. “Then, when everyone has had a lot to drink, he brings out the less expensive wine. But you have kept the best until now!”

This miraculous sign at Cana in Galilee was the first time Jesus revealed his glory. And his disciples believed in him.

After the wedding he went to Capernaum for a few days with his mother, his brothers, and his disciples.

It was nearly time for the Jewish Passover celebration, so Jesus went to Jerusalem. In the Temple area he saw merchants selling cattle, sheep, and doves for sacrifices; he also saw dealers at tables exchanging foreign money. Jesus made a whip from some ropes and chased them all out of the Temple. He drove out the sheep and cattle, scattered the money changers’ coins over the floor, and turned over their tables. Then, going over to the people who sold doves, he told them, “Get these things out of here. Stop turning my Father’s house into a marketplace!”

Then his disciples remembered this prophecy from the Scriptures: “Passion for God’s house will consume me.”

But the Jewish leaders demanded, “What are you doing? If God gave you authority to do this, show us a miraculous sign to prove it.”

“All right,” Jesus replied. “Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up.”

“What!” they exclaimed. “It has taken forty-six years to build this Temple, and you can rebuild it in three days?” But when Jesus said “this temple,” he meant his own body. After he was raised from the dead, his disciples remembered he had said this, and they believed both the Scriptures and what Jesus had said.

Because of the miraculous signs Jesus did in Jerusalem at the Passover celebration, many began to trust in him. But Jesus didn’t trust them, because he knew all about people. No one needed to tell him about human nature, for he knew what was in each person’s heart.

My Thoughts

At the wedding in Cana, Jesus really was the “Life” of the party! When the wine ran out, He gave them more! 

How did it happen? Jesus’ mother said, “Do whatever He tells you.”

She knew. She knew what He could do. Perhaps she had seen Him do it before, maybe at home.

 If you run out of something, where can you go? Go to Jesus. Then do whatever He tells you. 

Amazingly, He not only turned the water into wine, but he turned it into better wine. And I imagine the first wine was already pretty amazing because this was a special event and, as the master of the banquet said, “Everyone brings out the choice wine first.” So the first wine, the choice wine, was already good! But the second wine… the master said it was even better.

After losing Lana, I wondered if I would ever get remarried, and how that marriage could possibly compare to the good marriage I already had. Then I heard about an elderly man who got remarried later in life. He told a friend of mine, “My first wife got the younger me. My second wife got the better me.” Hopefully, we all get better with age, too.

After 23 years of marriage, I hope I had become a better husband to Lana. So perhaps it’s possible that there will be another wonderful wife for me in the future who got better with age, too!

Trust Jesus to turn water into wine for you, too. And not just any wine… but the best.

“… you have saved the best till now.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 3: Whoever Believes in the Son has Eternal Life

John 3 (Amplified Bible)

Now there was a certain man among the Pharisees named Nicodemus, a ruler among the Jews, who came to Jesus at night and said to Him, “Rabbi, we know that You have come from God as a teacher; for no one can do these signs that You do unless God is with him.” 

Jesus answered him, “I assure you and most solemnly say to you, unless a person is born again, he cannot see and experience the kingdom of God.”

Nicodemus said to Him, “How can a man be born when he is old? He cannot enter his mother’s womb a second time and be born, can he?” 

Jesus answered, “I assure you and most solemnly say to you, unless one is born of water and the Spirit he cannot enter the kingdom of God. That which is born of the flesh is flesh, and that which is born of the Spirit is spirit. Do not be surprised that I have told you, ‘You must be born again.’ The wind blows where it wishes and you hear its sound, but you do not know where it is coming from and where it is going; so it is with everyone who is born of the Spirit.”

Nicodemus said to Him, “How can these things be possible?” 

Jesus replied, “You are the teacher of Israel, and yet you do not know nor understand these things? I assure you and most solemnly say to you, we speak only of what we know and testify about what we have seen; and you do not accept our testimony. If I told you earthly things and you do not believe, how will you believe and trust Me if I tell you heavenly things? No one has gone up into heaven, but there is One who came down from heaven, the Son of Man. Just as Moses lifted up the serpent in the desert, so must the Son of Man be lifted up, so that whoever believes will in Him have eternal life.

“For God so loved and dearly prized the world, that He gave His only begotten Son, so that whoever believes and trusts in Him shall not perish, but have eternal life. For God did not send the Son into the world to judge and condemn the world, but that the world might be saved through Him. Whoever believes and has decided to trust in Him is not judged; but the one who does not believe is judged already, because he has not believed and trusted in the name of the only begotten Son of God. This is the judgment: the Light has come into the world, and people loved the darkness rather than the Light, for their deeds were evil. For every wrongdoer hates the Light, and does not come to the Light for fear that his activities will be exposed and condemned. But whoever practices truth comes to the Light, so that his works may be plainly shown to be what they are—accomplished in God.”

My Thoughts

If we want an abundant life, Jesus tells us where to start: “You must be born again.” That’s the best way to get a new life, a fresh start. 

Perhaps you’ve already been born again. Perhaps you’ve been a believer a long time, but have lost that feeling of new life, that joy, that peace.

I once counseled a woman going through a very difficult time. She was headed for divorce and discouraged on all fronts. I prayed with her, reminding her of all God’s promises when she first put her faith in Christ. I reminded her it was all still true and still available to her. She had just lost sight of it. 

After our prayer, she got her faith back and said, “I feel like I’ve been born again… again!” 

That’s not a typo. She truly felt like she had been born again… AGAIN!

If you don’t like the way you were born initially, there’s good news! You can be born again!

And if you’ve already been born again, remind yourself where new life, abundant life, eternal life begins. Ask Jesus to revive you, to give you a fresh start, to be born again… AGAIN!

“Whoever believes in the Son has eternal life…”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 4: A Spring of Water Welling Up to Eternal Life

John 4 (The Message)

Jesus realized that the Pharisees were keeping count of the baptisms that he and John performed (although his disciples, not Jesus, did the actual baptizing). They had posted the score that Jesus was ahead, turning him and John into rivals in the eyes of the people. So Jesus left the Judean countryside and went back to Galilee.

To get there, he had to pass through Samaria. He came into Sychar, a Samaritan village that bordered the field Jacob had given his son Joseph. Jacob’s well was still there. Jesus, worn out by the trip, sat down at the well. It was noon.

A woman, a Samaritan, came to draw water. Jesus said, “Would you give me a drink of water?” (His disciples had gone to the village to buy food for lunch.)

The Samaritan woman, taken aback, asked, “How come you, a Jew, are asking me, a Samaritan woman, for a drink?” (Jews in those days wouldn’t be caught dead talking to Samaritans.)

Jesus answered, “If you knew the generosity of God and who I am, you would be asking me for a drink, and I would give you fresh, living water.”

The woman said, “Sir, you don’t even have a bucket to draw with, and this well is deep. So how are you going to get this ‘living water’? Are you a better man than our ancestor Jacob, who dug this well and drank from it, he and his sons and livestock, and passed it down to us?”

Jesus said, “Everyone who drinks this water will get thirsty again and again. Anyone who drinks the water I give will never thirst—not ever. The water I give will be an artesian spring within, gushing fountains of endless life.”

The woman said, “Sir, give me this water so I won’t ever get thirsty, won’t ever have to come back to this well again!”

He said, “Go call your husband and then come back.”

“I have no husband,” she said.

“That’s nicely put: ‘I have no husband.’ You’ve had five husbands, and the man you’re living with now isn’t even your husband. You spoke the truth there, sure enough.”

“Oh, so you’re a prophet! Well, tell me this: Our ancestors worshiped God at this mountain, but you Jews insist that Jerusalem is the only place for worship, right?”

“Believe me, woman, the time is coming when you Samaritans will worship the Father neither here at this mountain nor there in Jerusalem. You worship guessing in the dark; we Jews worship in the clear light of day. God’s way of salvation is made available through the Jews. But the time is coming—it has, in fact, come—when what you’re called will not matter and where you go to worship will not matter.

“It’s who you are and the way you live that count before God. Your worship must engage your spirit in the pursuit of truth. That’s the kind of people the Father is out looking for: those who are simply and honestly themselves before him in their worship. God is sheer being itself—Spirit. Those who worship him must do it out of their very being, their spirits, their true selves, in adoration.”

The woman said, “I don’t know about that. I do know that the Messiah is coming. When he arrives, we’ll get the whole story.”

“I am he,” said Jesus. “You don’t have to wait any longer or look any further.”

Just then his disciples came back. They were shocked. They couldn’t believe he was talking with that kind of a woman. No one said what they were all thinking, but their faces showed it.

The woman took the hint and left. In her confusion she left her water pot. Back in the village she told the people, “Come see a man who knew all about the things I did, who knows me inside and out. Do you think this could be the Messiah?” And they went out to see for themselves.

In the meantime, the disciples pressed him, “Rabbi, eat. Aren’t you going to eat?”

He told them, “I have food to eat you know nothing about.”

The disciples were puzzled. “Who could have brought him food?”

Jesus said, “The food that keeps me going is that I do the will of the One who sent me, finishing the work he started. As you look around right now, wouldn’t you say that in about four months it will be time to harvest? Well, I’m telling you to open your eyes and take a good look at what’s right in front of you. These Samaritan fields are ripe. It’s harvest time!

“The Harvester isn’t waiting. He’s taking his pay, gathering in this grain that’s ripe for eternal life. Now the Sower is arm in arm with the Harvester, triumphant. That’s the truth of the saying, ‘This one sows, that one harvests.’ I sent you to harvest a field you never worked. Without lifting a finger, you have walked in on a field worked long and hard by others.”

Many of the Samaritans from that village committed themselves to him because of the woman’s witness: “He knew all about the things I did. He knows me inside and out!” They asked him to stay on, so Jesus stayed two days. A lot more people entrusted their lives to him when they heard what he had to say. They said to the woman, “We’re no longer taking this on your say-so. We’ve heard it for ourselves and know it for sure. He’s the Savior of the world!”

After the two days he left for Galilee. Now, Jesus knew well from experience that a prophet is not respected in the place where he grew up. So when he arrived in Galilee, the Galileans welcomed him, but only because they were impressed with what he had done in Jerusalem during the Passover Feast, not that they really had a clue about who he was or what he was up to.

Now he was back in Cana of Galilee, the place where he made the water into wine. Meanwhile in Capernaum, there was a certain official from the king’s court whose son was sick. When he heard that Jesus had come from Judea to Galilee, he went and asked that he come down and heal his son, who was on the brink of death. Jesus put him off: “Unless you people are dazzled by a miracle, you refuse to believe.”

But the court official wouldn’t be put off. “Come down! It’s life or death for my son.”

Jesus simply replied, “Go home. Your son lives.”

The man believed the bare word Jesus spoke and headed home. On his way back, his servants intercepted him and announced, “Your son lives!”

He asked them what time he began to get better. They said, “The fever broke yesterday afternoon at one o’clock.” The father knew that that was the very moment Jesus had said, “Your son lives.”

That settled it. Not only he but his entire household believed. This was now the second sign Jesus gave after having come from Judea into Galilee.

My Thoughts

Can you imagine Jesus asking you for a drink? He was God, yet in the flesh, He needed food, water, sleep… and a drink.

As I thought about this, I felt God asking me, “Eric, will you give me a drink?”

“What would you like, Lord?” I said.

“A cup of your love.”

A cup of my love. 

What would that look like? I wondered. I thought of my piano music. My praise. My prayer. My love. This was what I thought I could offer Him. You have other things you can offer.

“Worship Me in spirit and in truth,” God said. “That would be the drink I would love to drink. And I will pour out on you, Eric, Living Water. Water teeming with Life. A spring welling up to Eternal Life. Your praise primes the pump and provides the drink I need to then pour out Life on you. You’ll then have fountains, wells, and springs bubbling up to overflowing.”

What if Jesus asked you for a drink? What would you give Him? Offer Him your drink today and watch as He pours out Life on you.

“The water I give him will become in him a spring of water welling up to eternal life.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 5: The Father… Shows Him All He Does

John 5 (New King James Version)

After this there was a feast of the Jews, and Jesus went up to Jerusalem. Now there is in Jerusalem by the Sheep Gate a pool, which is called in Hebrew, Bethesda, having five porches. In these lay a great multitude of sick people, blind, lame, paralyzed, waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel went down at a certain time into the pool and stirred up the water; then whoever stepped in first, after the stirring of the water, was made well of whatever disease he had. Now a certain man was there who had an infirmity thirty-eight years. When Jesus saw him lying there, and knew that he already had been in that condition a long time, He said to him, “Do you want to be made well?”

The sick man answered Him, “Sir, I have no man to put me into the pool when the water is stirred up; but while I am coming, another steps down before me.”

Jesus said to him, “Rise, take up your bed and walk.” And immediately the man was made well, took up his bed, and walked.

And that day was the Sabbath. The Jews therefore said to him who was cured, “It is the Sabbath; it is not lawful for you to carry your bed.”

He answered them, “He who made me well said to me, ‘Take up your bed and walk.’ ”

Then they asked him, “Who is the Man who said to you, ‘Take up your bed and walk’?” But the one who was healed did not know who it was, for Jesus had withdrawn, a multitude being in that place. Afterward Jesus found him in the temple, and said to him, “See, you have been made well. Sin no more, lest a worse thing come upon you.”

The man departed and told the Jews that it was Jesus who had made him well.

For this reason the Jews persecuted Jesus, and sought to kill Him, because He had done these things on the Sabbath. But Jesus answered them, “My Father has been working until now, and I have been working.”

Therefore the Jews sought all the more to kill Him, because He not only broke the Sabbath, but also said that God was His Father, making Himself equal with God. Then Jesus answered and said to them, “Most assuredly, I say to you, the Son can do nothing of Himself, but what He sees the Father do; for whatever He does, the Son also does in like manner. For the Father loves the Son, and shows Him all things that He Himself does; and He will show Him greater works than these, that you may marvel. For as the Father raises the dead and gives life to them, even so the Son gives life to whom He will. For the Father judges no one, but has committed all judgment to the Son, that all should honor the Son just as they honor the Father. He who does not honor the Son does not honor the Father who sent Him.

“Most assuredly, I say to you, he who hears My word and believes in Him who sent Me has everlasting life, and shall not come into judgment, but has passed from death into life. Most assuredly, I say to you, the hour is coming, and now is, when the dead will hear the voice of the Son of God; and those who hear will live. For as the Father has life in Himself, so He has granted the Son to have life in Himself, and has given Him authority to execute judgment also, because He is the Son of Man. Do not marvel at this; for the hour is coming in which all who are in the graves will hear His voice and come forth—those who have done good, to the resurrection of life, and those who have done evil, to the resurrection of condemnation. I can of Myself do nothing. As I hear, I judge; and My judgment is righteous, because I do not seek My own will but the will of the Father who sent Me.

“If I bear witness of Myself, My witness is not true. There is another who bears witness of Me, and I know that the witness which He witnesses of Me is true. You have sent to John, and he has borne witness to the truth. Yet I do not receive testimony from man, but I say these things that you may be saved. He was the burning and shining lamp, and you were willing for a time to rejoice in his light. But I have a greater witness than John’s; for the works which the Father has given Me to finish—the very works that I do—bear witness of Me, that the Father has sent Me. And the Father Himself, who sent Me, has testified of Me. You have neither heard His voice at any time, nor seen His form. But you do not have His word abiding in you, because whom He sent, Him you do not believe. You search the Scriptures, for in them you think you have eternal life; and these are they which testify of Me. But you are not willing to come to Me that you may have life.

“I do not receive honor from men. But I know you, that you do not have the love of God in you. I have come in My Father’s name, and you do not receive Me; if another comes in his own name, him you will receive. How can you believe, who receive honor from one another, and do not seek the honor that comes from the only God? Do not think that I shall accuse you to the Father; there is one who accuses you—Moses, in whom you trust. For if you believed Moses, you would believe Me; for he wrote about Me. But if you do not believe his writings, how will you believe My words?”

My Thoughts

Fathers show their children what they do. 

As I thought about this, I felt God saying, “Eric, I want you to give Life to your children. Show them what you do. Show them your books, your music, your website. Show them they can have life and give life to others, as I have given it to you.

“Know that I love you and show you what I do. Show them, Eric. Show them what you do, and perhaps they will do it, too.”

I write books. I write music. I write my thoughts in journals. And I help others do the same. Children have free will to do what they want to do and what God calls them to do. But sometimes He calls them to stand on the shoulders of those who have gone before them.

God wanted to heal a man, and He showed Jesus what He wanted to do. So Jesus asked the man, “Do you want to get well?” 

Jesus was amazing in His own right, but He was also amazing because He did what His Father showed Him to do. God didn’t just tell Jesus. He showed Him.

“Show them,” God said. “Show them all you do.” 

As I do what God shows me, and I show others what I do, we can multiply God’s life-giving work.

“For the Father loves the Son and shows Him all He does.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 6: I Am the Bread of Life

John 7 (New International Version)

Some time after this, Jesus crossed to the far shore of the Sea of Galilee (that is, the Sea of Tiberias), and a great crowd of people followed him because they saw the signs he had performed by healing the sick. Then Jesus went up on a mountainside and sat down with his disciples. The Jewish Passover Festival was near.

When Jesus looked up and saw a great crowd coming toward him, he said to Philip, “Where shall we buy bread for these people to eat?” He asked this only to test him, for he already had in mind what he was going to do.

Philip answered him, “It would take more than half a year’s wages to buy enough bread for each one to have a bite!”

Another of his disciples, Andrew, Simon Peter’s brother, spoke up, “Here is a boy with five small barley loaves and two small fish, but how far will they go among so many?”

Jesus said, “Have the people sit down.” There was plenty of grass in that place, and they sat down (about five thousand men were there). Jesus then took the loaves, gave thanks, and distributed to those who were seated as much as they wanted. He did the same with the fish.

When they had all had enough to eat, he said to his disciples, “Gather the pieces that are left over. Let nothing be wasted.” So they gathered them and filled twelve baskets with the pieces of the five barley loaves left over by those who had eaten.

After the people saw the sign Jesus performed, they began to say, “Surely this is the Prophet who is to come into the world.” Jesus, knowing that they intended to come and make him king by force, withdrew again to a mountain by himself.

When evening came, his disciples went down to the lake, where they got into a boat and set off across the lake for Capernaum. By now it was dark, and Jesus had not yet joined them. A strong wind was blowing and the waters grew rough. When they had rowed about three or four miles, they saw Jesus approaching the boat, walking on the water; and they were frightened. But he said to them, “It is I; don’t be afraid.” Then they were willing to take him into the boat, and immediately the boat reached the shore where they were heading.

The next day the crowd that had stayed on the opposite shore of the lake realized that only one boat had been there, and that Jesus had not entered it with his disciples, but that they had gone away alone. Then some boats from Tiberias landed near the place where the people had eaten the bread after the Lord had given thanks. Once the crowd realized that neither Jesus nor his disciples were there, they got into the boats and went to Capernaum in search of Jesus.

When they found him on the other side of the lake, they asked him, “Rabbi, when did you get here?”

Jesus answered, “Very truly I tell you, you are looking for me, not because you saw the signs I performed but because you ate the loaves and had your fill. Do not work for food that spoils, but for food that endures to eternal life, which the Son of Man will give you. For on him God the Father has placed his seal of approval.”

Then they asked him, “What must we do to do the works God requires?”

Jesus answered, “The work of God is this: to believe in the one he has sent.”

So they asked him, “What sign then will you give that we may see it and believe you? What will you do? Our ancestors ate the manna in the wilderness; as it is written: ‘He gave them bread from heaven to eat.’”

Jesus said to them, “Very truly I tell you, it is not Moses who has given you the bread from heaven, but it is my Father who gives you the true bread from heaven. For the bread of God is the bread that comes down from heaven and gives life to the world.”

“Sir,” they said, “always give us this bread.”

Then Jesus declared, “I am the bread of life. Whoever comes to me will never go hungry, and whoever believes in me will never be thirsty. But as I told you, you have seen me and still you do not believe. All those the Father gives me will come to me, and whoever comes to me I will never drive away. For I have come down from heaven not to do my will but to do the will of him who sent me. And this is the will of him who sent me, that I shall lose none of all those he has given me, but raise them up at the last day. For my Father’s will is that everyone who looks to the Son and believes in him shall have eternal life, and I will raise them up at the last day.”

At this the Jews there began to grumble about him because he said, “I am the bread that came down from heaven.” They said, “Is this not Jesus, the son of Joseph, whose father and mother we know? How can he now say, ‘I came down from heaven’?”

“Stop grumbling among yourselves,” Jesus answered. “No one can come to me unless the Father who sent me draws them, and I will raise them up at the last day. It is written in the Prophets: ‘They will all be taught by God.’ Everyone who has heard the Father and learned from him comes to me. No one has seen the Father except the one who is from God; only he has seen the Father. Very truly I tell you, the one who believes has eternal life. I am the bread of life. Your ancestors ate the manna in the wilderness, yet they died. But here is the bread that comes down from heaven, which anyone may eat and not die. I am the living bread that came down from heaven. Whoever eats this bread will live forever. This bread is my flesh, which I will give for the life of the world.”

Then the Jews began to argue sharply among themselves, “How can this man give us his flesh to eat?”

Jesus said to them, “Very truly I tell you, unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you have no life in you. Whoever eats my flesh and drinks my blood has eternal life, and I will raise them up at the last day. For my flesh is real food and my blood is real drink. Whoever eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in them. Just as the living Father sent me and I live because of the Father, so the one who feeds on me will live because of me. This is the bread that came down from heaven. Your ancestors ate manna and died, but whoever feeds on this bread will live forever.” He said this while teaching in the synagogue in Capernaum.

On hearing it, many of his disciples said, “This is a hard teaching. Who can accept it?”

Aware that his disciples were grumbling about this, Jesus said to them, “Does this offend you? Then what if you see the Son of Man ascend to where he was before! The Spirit gives life; the flesh counts for nothing. The words I have spoken to you—they are full of the Spirit and life. Yet there are some of you who do not believe.” For Jesus had known from the beginning which of them did not believe and who would betray him. He went on to say, “This is why I told you that no one can come to me unless the Father has enabled them.”

From this time many of his disciples turned back and no longer followed him.

“You do not want to leave too, do you?” Jesus asked the Twelve.

Simon Peter answered him, “Lord, to whom shall we go? You have the words of eternal life. We have come to believe and to know that you are the Holy One of God.”

Then Jesus replied, “Have I not chosen you, the Twelve? Yet one of you is a devil!” (He meant Judas, the son of Simon Iscariot, who, though one of the Twelve, was later to betray him.)

My Thoughts

When Jesus asked the disciples to give food to the people, He already had an idea of what He wanted to do. He wanted to give the them bread to eat to draw them closer to Him. But even more, He wanted them to come to Him for Life, not just bread.

“I am the bread of life,” Jesus said. “He who comes to Me will never go hungry, and he who believes in Me will never be thirsty.”

When I read that, I felt God saying to me, “Seek Me, Eric, believe Me, and you will never go hunger, never be thirsty. I care about your physical needs. I multiplied bread and wasted none. Yet I care even more about your spiritual needs, which are deeper still. Let Me meet those, too, Eric. Let Me meet them in those holes in your heart. You long for love, but only I can fill those holes. Look to Me to fill them, first and foremost. In Me you will find Life. I alone can fill that deep, deep, need. I am the bread you truly seek. And My Spirit will give you Life.”

“I am the bread of life…”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 7: Streams of Living Water Will Flow from Within

John 7 (New Living Translation)

After this, Jesus traveled around Galilee. He wanted to stay out of Judea, where the Jewish leaders were plotting his death. But soon it was time for the Jewish Festival of Shelters, and Jesus’ brothers said to him, “Leave here and go to Judea, where your followers can see your miracles! You can’t become famous if you hide like this! If you can do such wonderful things, show yourself to the world!” For even his brothers didn’t believe in him.

Jesus replied, “Now is not the right time for me to go, but you can go anytime. The world can’t hate you, but it does hate me because I accuse it of doing evil. You go on. I’m not going to this festival, because my time has not yet come.” After saying these things, Jesus remained in Galilee.

But after his brothers left for the festival, Jesus also went, though secretly, staying out of public view. The Jewish leaders tried to find him at the festival and kept asking if anyone had seen him. There was a lot of grumbling about him among the crowds. Some argued, “He’s a good man,” but others said, “He’s nothing but a fraud who deceives the people.” But no one had the courage to speak favorably about him in public, for they were afraid of getting in trouble with the Jewish leaders.

Then, midway through the festival, Jesus went up to the Temple and began to teach. The people were surprised when they heard him. “How does he know so much when he hasn’t been trained?” they asked.

So Jesus told them, “My message is not my own; it comes from God who sent me. Anyone who wants to do the will of God will know whether my teaching is from God or is merely my own. Those who speak for themselves want glory only for themselves, but a person who seeks to honor the one who sent him speaks truth, not lies. Moses gave you the law, but none of you obeys it! In fact, you are trying to kill me.”

The crowd replied, “You’re demon possessed! Who’s trying to kill you?”

Jesus replied, “I did one miracle on the Sabbath, and you were amazed. But you work on the Sabbath, too, when you obey Moses’ law of circumcision. (Actually, this tradition of circumcision began with the patriarchs, long before the law of Moses.) For if the correct time for circumcising your son falls on the Sabbath, you go ahead and do it so as not to break the law of Moses. So why should you be angry with me for healing a man on the Sabbath? Look beneath the surface so you can judge correctly.”

Some of the people who lived in Jerusalem started to ask each other, “Isn’t this the man they are trying to kill? But here he is, speaking in public, and they say nothing to him. Could our leaders possibly believe that he is the Messiah? But how could he be? For we know where this man comes from. When the Messiah comes, he will simply appear; no one will know where he comes from.”

While Jesus was teaching in the Temple, he called out, “Yes, you know me, and you know where I come from. But I’m not here on my own. The one who sent me is true, and you don’t know him. But I know him because I come from him, and he sent me to you.” Then the leaders tried to arrest him; but no one laid a hand on him, because his time had not yet come.

Many among the crowds at the Temple believed in him. “After all,” they said, “would you expect the Messiah to do more miraculous signs than this man has done?”

When the Pharisees heard that the crowds were whispering such things, they and the leading priests sent Temple guards to arrest Jesus. But Jesus told them, “I will be with you only a little longer. Then I will return to the one who sent me. You will search for me but not find me. And you cannot go where I am going.”

The Jewish leaders were puzzled by this statement. “Where is he planning to go?” they asked. “Is he thinking of leaving the country and going to the Jews in other lands? Maybe he will even teach the Greeks! What does he mean when he says, ‘You will search for me but not find me,’ and ‘You cannot go where I am going’?”

On the last day, the climax of the festival, Jesus stood and shouted to the crowds, “Anyone who is thirsty may come to me! Anyone who believes in me may come and drink! For the Scriptures declare, ‘Rivers of living water will flow from his heart.’” (When he said “living water,” he was speaking of the Spirit, who would be given to everyone believing in him. But the Spirit had not yet been given, because Jesus had not yet entered into his glory.)

When the crowds heard him say this, some of them declared, “Surely this man is the Prophet we’ve been expecting.” Others said, “He is the Messiah.” Still others said, “But he can’t be! Will the Messiah come from Galilee? For the Scriptures clearly state that the Messiah will be born of the royal line of David, in Bethlehem, the village where King David was born.” So the crowd was divided about him. Some even wanted him arrested, but no one laid a hand on him.

When the Temple guards returned without having arrested Jesus, the leading priests and Pharisees demanded, “Why didn’t you bring him in?”

“We have never heard anyone speak like this!” the guards responded.

“Have you been led astray, too?” the Pharisees mocked. “Is there a single one of us rulers or Pharisees who believes in him? This foolish crowd follows him, but they are ignorant of the law. God’s curse is on them!”

Then Nicodemus, the leader who had met with Jesus earlier, spoke up. “Is it legal to convict a man before he is given a hearing?” he asked.

They replied, “Are you from Galilee, too? Search the Scriptures and see for yourself—no prophet ever comes from Galilee!”

Then the meeting broke up, and everybody went home.

My Thoughts

Jesus said, “If anyone is thirsty, let him come to Me and drink. Whoever believes in Me, as the Scripture has said, streams of living water will flow from within him.” By this He meant the Spirit.

Jesus says if we believe in Him, streams of living water will flow from within us. But many of us are producing only a trickle. Why?

As I prayed about this, God brought to mind a message I was about to give, a message that might not be received well. I was fearful what the reaction might be. Yet maybe my fear was holding back the Living Water that God wanted to pour out through me.

I felt God say, “Don’t speak to gain honor for yourself, but for Me. People will try to kill you for what you say. Do it anyway, as it brings honor to Me.”

I felt Jesus say, “I fought the fear of death daily, escaped from it regularly, and spoke in the face of it occasionally, trusting My Father would guide Me and many would put their faith in Him.”

If you’re thirsty, come to Him and drink. Then pour it out to others, without fear and watch as God’s Spirit flows like streams.

“Whoever believes in Me, as the Scripture has said, streams of living water will flow from within Him.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 8: Go Now and Leave Your Life of Sin

John 8 (Amplified Bible)

But Jesus went to the Mount of Olives. Early in the morning He came back into the temple, and all the people were coming to Him. He sat down and began teaching them. Now the scribes and Pharisees brought a woman who had been caught in adultery. They made her stand in the center of the court, and they said to Him, “Teacher, this woman has been caught in the very act of adultery. Now in the Law Moses commanded us to stone such women. So what do You say?” They said this to test Him, hoping that they would have grounds for accusing Him. But Jesus stooped down and began writing on the ground with His finger. However, when they persisted in questioning Him, He straightened up and said, “He who is without sin among you, let him be the first to throw a stone at her.” Then He stooped down again and started writing on the ground. They listened, and they began to go out one by one, starting with the oldest ones, until He was left alone, with the woman in the center of the court. Straightening up, Jesus said to her, “Woman, where are they? Did no one condemn you?” She answered, “No one, Lord!” And Jesus said, “I do not condemn you either. Go. From now on sin no more.”

Once more Jesus addressed the crowd. He said, “I am the Light of the world. He who follows Me will not walk in the darkness, but will have the Light of life.” Then the Pharisees told Him, “You are testifying on Your own behalf; Your testimony is not valid.” Jesus replied, “Even if I do testify on My own behalf, My testimony is valid, because I know where I came from and where I am going; but you do not know where I come from or where I am going. You judge according to human standards. I do not judge anyone. But even if I do judge, My judgment is true and My decision is right; for I am not alone, but I and the Father who sent Me. Even in your own law it is written that the testimony of two persons is true. I am One who testifies about Myself, and My Father who sent Me testifies about Me.” Then the Pharisees said to Him, “Where is this Father of Yours?” Jesus answered, “You know neither Me nor My Father; if you knew Me, you would know My Father also.” Jesus said these things in the treasury, as He taught in the temple; and no one seized Him, because His time had not yet come.

Then He said again to them, “I am going away, and you will look for Me, and you will die [unforgiven and condemned] in your sin. Where I am going, you cannot come.” So the Jews were asking, “Will He kill Himself? Is that why He says, ‘Where I am going, you cannot come’?” He said to them, “You are from below, I am from above; you are of this world, I am not of this world. That is why I told you that you will die in your sins; for if you do not believe that I am the One, you will die in your sins.” So they said to Him, “Who are You?” Jesus replied, “What have I been saying to you from the beginning? I have many things to say and judge concerning you, but He who sent Me is true; and I say to the world the things that I have heard from Him.” They did not realize that He was speaking to them about the Father. So Jesus said, “When you lift up the Son of Man, you will know then that I am He, and that I do nothing on My own authority, but I say these things just as My Father taught Me. And He who sent Me is with Me; He has not left Me alone, because I always do what pleases Him.” As He said these things, many believed in Him.

So Jesus was saying to the Jews who had believed Him, “If you abide in My word you are truly My disciples. And you will know the truth, and the truth will set you free.” They answered Him, “We are Abraham’s descendants and have never been enslaved to anyone. What do You mean by saying, ‘You will be set free’?”

Jesus answered, “I assure you and most solemnly say to you, everyone who practices sin habitually is a slave of sin. Now the slave does not remain in a household forever; the son [of the master] does remain forever. So if the Son makes you free, then you are unquestionably free. I know that you are Abraham’s descendants; yet you plan to kill Me, because My word has no place in you. I tell the things that I have seen at My Father’s side; so you also do the things that you heard from your father.”

They answered, “Abraham is our father.” Jesus said to them, “If you are Abraham’s children, then do the works of Abraham and follow his example. But as it is, you want to kill Me, a Man who has told you the truth, which I heard from God. This is not the way Abraham acted. You are doing the works of your father.” They said to Him, “We are not illegitimate children; we have one Father: God.” Jesus said to them, “If God were your Father, you would love and recognize Me, for I came from God and have arrived here. For I have not even come on My own initiative, but He sent Me. Why do you misunderstand what I am saying? It is because you are unable to hear My word. You are of your father the devil, and it is your will to practice the desires of your father. He was a murderer from the beginning, and does not stand in the truth because there is no truth in him. When he lies, he speaks what is natural to him, for he is a liar and the father of lies and half-truths. But because I speak the truth, you do not believe Me. Which one of you convicts Me of sin? If I speak truth, why do you not believe Me? Whoever is of God and belongs to Him hears God’s words; for this reason you do not hear them: because you are not of God and you are not in fellowship with Him.”

The Jews answered Him, “Are we not right when we say You are a Samaritan and have a demon?” Jesus answered, “I do not have a demon. On the contrary, I honor My Father, and you dishonor Me. However, I am not seeking glory for Myself. There is One who seeks and judges. I assure you and most solemnly say to you, if anyone keeps My word he will indeed never, ever see and experience death.” The Jews said to Him, “Now we know that You have a demon. Abraham died, and also the prophets; yet You say, ‘If anyone keeps My word, he will never, ever taste of death.’ Are You greater than our father Abraham, who died? The prophets died too! Whom do You make Yourself out to be?” Jesus answered, “If I glorify Myself, My glory is nothing. It is My Father who glorifies Me, of whom you say, ‘He is our God.’ Yet you do not know Him, but I know Him fully. If I said I did not know Him, I would be a liar like you. But I do know Him and keep His word. Your father Abraham rejoiced to see My day. He saw it and was delighted.” Then the Jews said to Him, “You are not even fifty years old, and You have seen Abraham?” Jesus replied, “I assure you and most solemnly say to you, before Abraham was born, I Am.” So they picked up stones to throw at Him, but Jesus concealed Himself and left the temple.

My Thoughts

Jesus showed grace to the woman caught in adultery. Then He told her, “Go now and leave your life of sin.” 

To have life, not death, we have to leave our lives of sin. Abundant life and a life of sin don’t mix. We might feel we can have both. But sin always robs us of life, true life. When we leave it, abundant life follows.

When God confronted me with my sins, I didn’t know all the ramifications of them. All I knew was if God said not to do something, and I did it, it wouldn’t go well for me.

I didn’t even know some of the things I was doing were sinful. But when I asked Him to show me, He did. And when I gave them up, I found new life.

If you want Life, ask God what you might need to give up in order to give it. He’ll tell you! As Jesus said, “He who belongs to God hears what God says.”

The woman caught in adultery was about to die for her sins. So was I. But Jesus didn’t come to condemn us. He came to save us. He wants us to live. 

And just like He said to the woman He said to me, “Go now and leave your life of sin.” He freed her and me from death, so we could live… truly live.

“Go now and leave your life of sin.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 9: You Have Now Seen Him

John 9 (The Message)

Walking down the street, Jesus saw a man blind from birth. His disciples asked, “Rabbi, who sinned: this man or his parents, causing him to be born blind?”

Jesus said, “You’re asking the wrong question. You’re looking for someone to blame. There is no such cause-effect here. Look instead for what God can do. We need to be energetically at work for the One who sent me here, working while the sun shines. When night falls, the workday is over. For as long as I am in the world, there is plenty of light. I am the world’s Light.”

He said this and then spit in the dust, made a clay paste with the saliva, rubbed the paste on the blind man’s eyes, and said, “Go, wash at the Pool of Siloam” (Siloam means “Sent”). The man went and washed—and saw.

Soon the town was buzzing. His relatives and those who year after year had seen him as a blind man begging were saying, “Why, isn’t this the man we knew, who sat here and begged?”

Others said, “It’s him all right!”

But others objected, “It’s not the same man at all. It just looks like him.”

He said, “It’s me, the very one.”

They said, “How did your eyes get opened?”

“A man named Jesus made a paste and rubbed it on my eyes and told me, ‘Go to Siloam and wash.’ I did what he said. When I washed, I saw.”

“So where is he?”

“I don’t know.”

They marched the man to the Pharisees. This day when Jesus made the paste and healed his blindness was the Sabbath. The Pharisees grilled him again on how he had come to see. He said, “He put a clay paste on my eyes, and I washed, and now I see.”

Some of the Pharisees said, “Obviously, this man can’t be from God. He doesn’t keep the Sabbath.”

Others countered, “How can a bad man do miraculous, God-revealing things like this?” There was a split in their ranks.

They came back at the blind man, “You’re the expert. He opened your eyes. What do you say about him?”

He said, “He is a prophet.”

The Jews didn’t believe it, didn’t believe the man was blind to begin with. So they called the parents of the man now bright-eyed with sight. They asked them, “Is this your son, the one you say was born blind? So how is it that he now sees?”

His parents said, “We know he is our son, and we know he was born blind. But we don’t know how he came to see—haven’t a clue about who opened his eyes. Why don’t you ask him? He’s a grown man and can speak for himself.” (His parents were talking like this because they were intimidated by the Jewish leaders, who had already decided that anyone who took a stand that this was the Messiah would be kicked out of the meeting place. That’s why his parents said, “Ask him. He’s a grown man.”)

They called the man back a second time—the man who had been blind—and told him, “Give credit to God. We know this man is an impostor.”

He replied, “I know nothing about that one way or the other. But I know one thing for sure: I was blind . . . I now see.”

They said, “What did he do to you? How did he open your eyes?”

“I’ve told you over and over and you haven’t listened. Why do you want to hear it again? Are you so eager to become his disciples?”

With that they jumped all over him. “You might be a disciple of that man, but we’re disciples of Moses. We know for sure that God spoke to Moses, but we have no idea where this man even comes from.”

The man replied, “This is amazing! You claim to know nothing about him, but the fact is, he opened my eyes! It’s well known that God isn’t at the beck and call of sinners, but listens carefully to anyone who lives in reverence and does his will. That someone opened the eyes of a man born blind has never been heard of—ever. If this man didn’t come from God, he wouldn’t be able to do anything.”

They said, “You’re nothing but dirt! How dare you take that tone with us!” Then they threw him out in the street.

Jesus heard that they had thrown him out, and went and found him. He asked him, “Do you believe in the Son of Man?”

The man said, “Point him out to me, sir, so that I can believe in him.”

Jesus said, “You’re looking right at him. Don’t you recognize my voice?”

“Master, I believe,” the man said, and worshiped him.

Jesus then said, “I came into the world to bring everything into the clear light of day, making all the distinctions clear, so that those who have never seen will see, and those who have made a great pretense of seeing will be exposed as blind.”

Some Pharisees overheard him and said, “Does that mean you’re calling us blind?”

Jesus said, “If you were really blind, you would be blameless, but since you claim to see everything so well, you’re accountable for every fault and failure.”

My Thoughts

Jesus wants to bring you life. Just like He wants to bring you healing. 

In the case of the man born blind, Jesus spit on the ground, made a paste of mud, and put it on the man’s eyes. That’s odd, I thought! Giving a man new eyes with a paste of mud. But I suppose it shouldn’t be surprising when God made a whole man out of dirt! God is the One who breathes life into that which is lifeless.

All healing comes from heaven, just as all life comes from heaven.

When asked who healed him, the blind man answered three times: “I don’t know.” Yet the questioners still asked him a fourth time! To which the man replied, “Do you want to become His disciples, too?” Their persistent questions seemed to lead to no other conclusion! Even though he didn’t know who healed him, he did know one thing: “I was blind but now I see.”

After he was healed, Jesus found him again and asked, “Do you believe in the Son of Man?” The blind man wanted to know who that was so he could believe in Him. 

“You have now seen Him; in fact, He is the one speaking with you,” Jesus said.

I love that Jesus said, “You have now seen Him.” This man who was blind since birth, who had never seen anything in his life, now saw Jesus with new eyes.

Come to Jesus, who gave you life. Do what He tells you and let Him heal you. Like the blind man, you’ll say: “One thing I do know. I was blind but now I see.”

“You have now seen Him; in fact, He is the one speaking with you.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 10: I Have Come that They May Have Life

John 10 (New King James Version)

“Most assuredly, I say to you, he who does not enter the sheepfold by the door, but climbs up some other way, the same is a thief and a robber. But he who enters by the door is the shepherd of the sheep. To him the doorkeeper opens, and the sheep hear his voice; and he calls his own sheep by name and leads them out. And when he brings out his own sheep, he goes before them; and the sheep follow him, for they know his voice. Yet they will by no means follow a stranger, but will flee from him, for they do not know the voice of strangers.” Jesus used this illustration, but they did not understand the things which He spoke to them.

Then Jesus said to them again, “Most assuredly, I say to you, I am the door of the sheep. All who ever came before Me are thieves and robbers, but the sheep did not hear them. I am the door. If anyone enters by Me, he will be saved, and will go in and out and find pasture. The thief does not come except to steal, and to kill, and to destroy. I have come that they may have life, and that they may have it more abundantly.

“I am the good shepherd. The good shepherd gives His life for the sheep. But a hireling, he who is not the shepherd, one who does not own the sheep, sees the wolf coming and leaves the sheep and flees; and the wolf catches the sheep and scatters them. The hireling flees because he is a hireling and does not care about the sheep. I am the good shepherd; and I know My sheep, and am known by My own. As the Father knows Me, even so I know the Father; and I lay down My life for the sheep. And other sheep I have which are not of this fold; them also I must bring, and they will hear My voice; and there will be one flock and one shepherd.

“Therefore My Father loves Me, because I lay down My life that I may take it again. No one takes it from Me, but I lay it down of Myself. I have power to lay it down, and I have power to take it again. This command I have received from My Father.”

Therefore there was a division again among the Jews because of these sayings. And many of them said, “He has a demon and is mad. Why do you listen to Him?”

Others said, “These are not the words of one who has a demon. Can a demon open the eyes of the blind?”

Now it was the Feast of Dedication in Jerusalem, and it was winter. And Jesus walked in the temple, in Solomon’s porch. Then the Jews surrounded Him and said to Him, “How long do You keep us in doubt? If You are the Christ, tell us plainly.”

Jesus answered them, “I told you, and you do not believe. The works that I do in My Father’s name, they bear witness of Me. But you do not believe, because you are not of My sheep, as I said to you. My sheep hear My voice, and I know them, and they follow Me. And I give them eternal life, and they shall never perish; neither shall anyone snatch them out of My hand. My Father, who has given them to Me, is greater than all; and no one is able to snatch them out of My Father’s hand. I and My Father are one.”

Then the Jews took up stones again to stone Him. Jesus answered them, “Many good works I have shown you from My Father. For which of those works do you stone Me?”

The Jews answered Him, saying, “For a good work we do not stone You, but for blasphemy, and because You, being a Man, make Yourself God.”

Jesus answered them, “Is it not written in your law, ‘I said, “You are gods”’? If He called them gods, to whom the word of God came (and the Scripture cannot be broken), do you say of Him whom the Father sanctified and sent into the world, ‘You are blaspheming,’ because I said, ‘I am the Son of God’? If I do not do the works of My Father, do not believe Me; but if I do, though you do not believe Me, believe the works, that you may know and believe that the Father is in Me, and I in Him.” Therefore they sought again to seize Him, but He escaped out of their hand.

And He went away again beyond the Jordan to the place where John was baptizing at first, and there He stayed. Then many came to Him and said, “John performed no sign, but all the things that John spoke about this Man were true.” And many believed in Him there.

My Thoughts

As I read this passage, I felt both their sting and the joy of Jesus’ words in the middle: “The thief comes only to steal and kill and destroy; I have come that they may have life, and have it to the full.”

 I had been on the receiving end of “the thief’s” activity, and trying to regain my footing to once again stand in the full life that Jesus promised. While some people tried to stone Jesus for what He was saying, others were putting their full faith in Him: “And in that place many believed in Jesus.”

“Don’t believe Me,” Jesus said, “unless I do what My Father says.” 

As I read this, I felt Jesus saying, “Eric, believe Me. Have faith in Me. Have confidence in Me.”

“Okay, Lord,” I said.

I had been praying about two very different, but very important things in my life, both of which had run their course and were now out of my hands.

God reminded me of a time when I had broken up with Lana, then later wanted to get back together with her, but Lana said she couldn’t. Not right then, anyway. I had to leave it up to God then, too, regardless of how it worked out. 

“Leave these other issues to Me, too,” Jesus said. “You’ve done your role. Now let Me do Mine. Believe Me, Eric. Have faith in Me. Have confidence in Me.” 

So I did.

Jesus came that we would have life and have it to the full. Even when the thief does what he does best, we can trust Jesus to do what He does best.

“I have come that they may have life…”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 11: I Am the Resurrection and the Life

John 11 (New International Version)

Now a man named Lazarus was sick. He was from Bethany, the village of Mary and her sister Martha. (This Mary, whose brother Lazarus now lay sick, was the same one who poured perfume on the Lord and wiped his feet with her hair.) So the sisters sent word to Jesus, “Lord, the one you love is sick.”

When he heard this, Jesus said, “This sickness will not end in death. No, it is for God’s glory so that God’s Son may be glorified through it.” Now Jesus loved Martha and her sister and Lazarus. So when he heard that Lazarus was sick, he stayed where he was two more days, and then he said to his disciples, “Let us go back to Judea.”

“But Rabbi,” they said, “a short while ago the Jews there tried to stone you, and yet you are going back?”

Jesus answered, “Are there not twelve hours of daylight? Anyone who walks in the daytime will not stumble, for they see by this world’s light. It is when a person walks at night that they stumble, for they have no light.”

After he had said this, he went on to tell them, “Our friend Lazarus has fallen asleep; but I am going there to wake him up.”

His disciples replied, “Lord, if he sleeps, he will get better.” Jesus had been speaking of his death, but his disciples thought he meant natural sleep.

So then he told them plainly, “Lazarus is dead, and for your sake I am glad I was not there, so that you may believe. But let us go to him.”

Then Thomas (also known as Didymus) said to the rest of the disciples, “Let us also go, that we may die with him.”

On his arrival, Jesus found that Lazarus had already been in the tomb for four days. Now Bethany was less than two miles from Jerusalem, and many Jews had come to Martha and Mary to comfort them in the loss of their brother. When Martha heard that Jesus was coming, she went out to meet him, but Mary stayed at home.

“Lord,” Martha said to Jesus, “if you had been here, my brother would not have died. But I know that even now God will give you whatever you ask.”

Jesus said to her, “Your brother will rise again.”

Martha answered, “I know he will rise again in the resurrection at the last day.”

Jesus said to her, “I am the resurrection and the life. The one who believes in me will live, even though they die; and whoever lives by believing in me will never die. Do you believe this?”

“Yes, Lord,” she replied, “I believe that you are the Messiah, the Son of God, who is to come into the world.”

After she had said this, she went back and called her sister Mary aside. “The Teacher is here,” she said, “and is asking for you.” When Mary heard this, she got up quickly and went to him. Now Jesus had not yet entered the village, but was still at the place where Martha had met him. When the Jews who had been with Mary in the house, comforting her, noticed how quickly she got up and went out, they followed her, supposing she was going to the tomb to mourn there.

When Mary reached the place where Jesus was and saw him, she fell at his feet and said, “Lord, if you had been here, my brother would not have died.”

When Jesus saw her weeping, and the Jews who had come along with her also weeping, he was deeply moved in spirit and troubled. “Where have you laid him?” he asked.

“Come and see, Lord,” they replied.

Jesus wept.

Then the Jews said, “See how he loved him!”

But some of them said, “Could not he who opened the eyes of the blind man have kept this man from dying?”

Jesus Raises Lazarus From the Dead

Jesus, once more deeply moved, came to the tomb. It was a cave with a stone laid across the entrance. “Take away the stone,” he said.

“But, Lord,” said Martha, the sister of the dead man, “by this time there is a bad odor, for he has been there four days.”

Then Jesus said, “Did I not tell you that if you believe, you will see the glory of God?”

So they took away the stone. Then Jesus looked up and said, “Father, I thank you that you have heard me. I knew that you always hear me, but I said this for the benefit of the people standing here, that they may believe that you sent me.”

When he had said this, Jesus called in a loud voice, “Lazarus, come out!” The dead man came out, his hands and feet wrapped with strips of linen, and a cloth around his face.

Jesus said to them, “Take off the grave clothes and let him go.”

Therefore many of the Jews who had come to visit Mary, and had seen what Jesus did, believed in him. But some of them went to the Pharisees and told them what Jesus had done. Then the chief priests and the Pharisees called a meeting of the Sanhedrin.

“What are we accomplishing?” they asked. “Here is this man performing many signs. If we let him go on like this, everyone will believe in him, and then the Romans will come and take away both our temple and our nation.”

Then one of them, named Caiaphas, who was high priest that year, spoke up, “You know nothing at all! You do not realize that it is better for you that one man die for the people than that the whole nation perish.”

He did not say this on his own, but as high priest that year he prophesied that Jesus would die for the Jewish nation, and not only for that nation but also for the scattered children of God, to bring them together and make them one. So from that day on they plotted to take his life.

Therefore Jesus no longer moved about publicly among the people of Judea. Instead he withdrew to a region near the wilderness, to a village called Ephraim, where he stayed with his disciples.

When it was almost time for the Jewish Passover, many went up from the country to Jerusalem for their ceremonial cleansing before the Passover. They kept looking for Jesus, and as they stood in the temple courts they asked one another, “What do you think? Isn’t he coming to the festival at all?” But the chief priests and the Pharisees had given orders that anyone who found out where Jesus was should report it so that they might arrest him.

My Thoughts

Nothing says “Life” more than a literal resurrection from the dead! 

“I am the resurrection and the life,” Jesus said. Then He proved it, bringing back from the dead someone He loved very much.

“Lord,” His disciples said, “the one You loved is sick.” 

Believe Jesus when He says He’ll raise you to life, too. For you, too, are one He loves.

Don’t think He doesn’t love you if He doesn’t show up when you think He should. Sometimes He stays where He is for our own good.

I wept when Lana died. It’s comforting to know Jesus wept for someone He loved, too. I’ve wept when I’ve lost other things that are precious to me. 

Whatever Jesus does, it’s for your good. He loves you. Remember: Jesus gave up His life so you could live. 

There’s nothing He wouldn’t do for you to have an abundant life. So don’t be afraid. He loves you very much.

“I am the resurrection and the life.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 12: The Man Who Loves His Life Will Lose It

John 12 (New Living Translation)

Six days before the Passover, Jesus came to Bethany, where Lazarus lived, whom Jesus had raised from the dead. Here a dinner was given in Jesus’ honor. Martha served, while Lazarus was among those reclining at the table with him. Then Mary took about a pint of pure nard, an expensive perfume; she poured it on Jesus’ feet and wiped his feet with her hair. And the house was filled with the fragrance of the perfume.

But one of his disciples, Judas Iscariot, who was later to betray him, objected,“Why wasn’t this perfume sold and the money given to the poor? It was worth a year’s wages.” He did not say this because he cared about the poor but because he was a thief; as keeper of the money bag, he used to help himself to what was put into it.

“Leave her alone,” Jesus replied. “It was intended that she should save this perfume for the day of my burial. You will always have the poor among you, but you will not always have me.”

Meanwhile a large crowd of Jews found out that Jesus was there and came, not only because of him but also to see Lazarus, whom he had raised from the dead. So the chief priests made plans to kill Lazarus as well, for on account of him many of the Jews were going over to Jesus and believing in him.

The next day the great crowd that had come for the festival heard that Jesus was on his way to Jerusalem. They took palm branches and went out to meet him, shouting,

“Hosanna!”

“Blessed is he who comes in the name of the Lord!”

“Blessed is the king of Israel!”

Jesus found a young donkey and sat on it, as it is written:

“Do not be afraid, Daughter Zion;

see, your king is coming,

seated on a donkey’s colt.”

At first his disciples did not understand all this. Only after Jesus was glorified did they realize that these things had been written about him and that these things had been done to him.

Now the crowd that was with him when he called Lazarus from the tomb and raised him from the dead continued to spread the word. Many people, because they had heard that he had performed this sign, went out to meet him. So the Pharisees said to one another, “See, this is getting us nowhere. Look how the whole world has gone after him!”

Now there were some Greeks among those who went up to worship at the festival. They came to Philip, who was from Bethsaida in Galilee, with a request. “Sir,” they said, “we would like to see Jesus.” Philip went to tell Andrew; Andrew and Philip in turn told Jesus.

Jesus replied, “The hour has come for the Son of Man to be glorified. Very truly I tell you, unless a kernel of wheat falls to the ground and dies, it remains only a single seed. But if it dies, it produces many seeds. Anyone who loves their life will lose it, while anyone who hates their life in this world will keep it for eternal life. Whoever serves me must follow me; and where I am, my servant also will be. My Father will honor the one who serves me.

“Now my soul is troubled, and what shall I say? ‘Father, save me from this hour’? No, it was for this very reason I came to this hour. Father, glorify your name!”

Then a voice came from heaven, “I have glorified it, and will glorify it again.” The crowd that was there and heard it said it had thundered; others said an angel had spoken to him.

Jesus said, “This voice was for your benefit, not mine. Now is the time for judgment on this world; now the prince of this world will be driven out. And I, when I am lifted up from the earth, will draw all people to myself.” He said this to show the kind of death he was going to die.

The crowd spoke up, “We have heard from the Law that the Messiah will remain forever, so how can you say, ‘The Son of Man must be lifted up’? Who is this ‘Son of Man’?”

Then Jesus told them, “You are going to have the light just a little while longer. Walk while you have the light, before darkness overtakes you. Whoever walks in the dark does not know where they are going. Believe in the light while you have the light, so that you may become children of light.” When he had finished speaking, Jesus left and hid himself from them.

Even after Jesus had performed so many signs in their presence, they still would not believe in him. This was to fulfill the word of Isaiah the prophet:

“Lord, who has believed our message
and to whom has the arm of the Lord
been revealed?”

For this reason they could not believe, because, as Isaiah says elsewhere:

“He has blinded their eyes
and hardened their hearts,
so they can neither see with their eyes,
nor understand with their hearts,
nor turn—and I would heal them.”

Isaiah said this because he saw Jesus’ glory and spoke about him.

Yet at the same time many even among the leaders believed in him. But because of the Pharisees they would not openly acknowledge their faith for fear they would be put out of the synagogue; for they loved human praise more than praise from God.

Then Jesus cried out, “Whoever believes in me does not believe in me only, but in the one who sent me. The one who looks at me is seeing the one who sent me. I have come into the world as a light, so that no one who believes in me should stay in darkness.

“If anyone hears my words but does not keep them, I do not judge that person. For I did not come to judge the world, but to save the world. There is a judge for the one who rejects me and does not accept my words; the very words I have spoken will condemn them at the last day. For I did not speak on my own, but the Father who sent me commanded me to say all that I have spoken. I know that his command leads to eternal life. So whatever I say is just what the Father has told me to say.”

My Thoughts

The paradoxes of Jesus are both intriguing and perplexing. They make so much sense, yet are still difficult to grasp.

How can anything about death possibly be good? Yet Jesus said, “Unless a kernel of wheat falls to the ground and dies, it remains only a single seed. But if it dies, it produces many seeds.” 

Having grown up on a farm, this makes perfect sense to me. Each stalk of corn typically produces only one ear of corn. But when that ear dries up, dies, and falls to the ground, the next year a hundred stalks of corn shoot up in its place, one for every kernel of corn on the ear. The death of the corn produces literally a hundred times as much grain.

Losing someone you love often seems like it could have never yield fruit. However, I’ve spent a quarter of a century studying the life of St. Nicholas, a man who lived back in the 3rd and 4th century. Although he had no wife and no children of his own, he continues to touch the world and a world full of children over the course of many centuries.

I felt Jesus asking me, “Would you rather have the world or a wife.”

“A wife,” I replied truthfully. “But I know You might want me to have the world,” I acknowledged. 

Then I added, “I’d like to have both.” :)

A wife or the world? I’d like both. But I’ll trust Him, either way. And I have to remember: some things must die so other things can live.

“The man who loves his life will lose it, while the man who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 13: I Will Lay Down My Life for You

John 13 (Amplified Bible)

Now before the Passover Feast, Jesus knew that His hour had come for Him to leave this world and return to the Father. Having loved His own who were in the world, He loved them to the end. It was during supper, when the devil had already put betraying Jesus into the heart of Judas Iscariot, Simon’s son, that Jesus, knowing that the Father had put everything into His hands, and that He had come from God and was returning to God, got up from supper, took off His robe, and taking a towel, He tied it around His waist.

Then He poured water into the basin and began washing the disciples’ feet and wiping them with the towel which was tied around His waist. When He came to Simon Peter, he said to Him, “Lord, are You going to wash my feet?” Jesus replied to him, “You do not realize now what I am doing, but you will understand it later.” Peter said to Him, “You will never wash my feet!” Jesus answered, “Unless I wash you, you have no part with Me.” Simon Peter said to Him, “Lord, not only my feet, but also my hands and my head!” Jesus said to him, “Anyone who has bathed needs only to wash his feet, and is completely clean. And you are clean, but not all of you.” For He knew who was going to betray Him; for that reason He said, “Not all of you are clean.”

So when He had washed their feet and put on His robe and reclined at the table again, He said to them, “Do you understand what I have done for you? You call Me Teacher and Lord, and you are right in doing so, for that is who I am. So if I, the Lord and the Teacher, washed your feet, you ought to wash one another’s feet as well. For I gave you an example, so that you should do as I did to you. I assure you and most solemnly say to you, a slave is not greater than his master, nor is one who is sent greater than the one who sent him. If you know these things, you are blessed if you put them into practice. I am not speaking of all of you. I know whom I have chosen; but in order that the Scripture may be fulfilled: ‘He who eats My bread has raised up his heel against Me.’ From now on I am telling you before it occurs, so that when it does take place you may believe that I am He. I assure you and most solemnly say to you, the one who receives and welcomes whomever I send receives Me; and the one who receives Me receives Him who sent Me.”

After Jesus had said these things, He was troubled in spirit, and testified and said, “I assure you and most solemnly say to you, one of you will betray Me and hand Me over.” The disciples began looking at one another, puzzled and disturbed as to whom He could mean. One of His disciples, whom Jesus loved, was leaning against Jesus’ chest. So Simon Peter motioned to him and asked of whom He was speaking. Then leaning back against Jesus’ chest, he asked Him, “Lord, who is it?” Jesus answered, “It is the one to whom I am going to give this piece after I have dipped it.” So when He had dipped the piece of bread, He gave it to Judas, son of Simon Iscariot. After Judas had taken the piece of bread, Satan entered him. Then Jesus said to him, “What you are going to do, do quickly.” But no one reclining at the table knew why He said this to him. Some thought that, since Judas had the money box, Jesus was telling him, “Buy what we need for the feast,” or that he was to give something to the poor. After taking the piece of bread, he went out immediately; and it was night.

So when Judas had left, Jesus said, “Now is the Son of Man glorified, and God is glorified in Him; God will also glorify Him in Himself, and will glorify Him at once. Little children, I am with you a little longer. You will look for Me and, as I told the Jews, so I tell you now, ‘Where I am going, you are not able to come.’ I am giving you a new commandment, that you love one another. Just as I have loved you, so you too are to love one another. By this everyone will know that you are My disciples, if you have love and unselfish concern for one another.”

Simon Peter said to Him, “Lord, where are You going?” Jesus answered, “Where I am going, you cannot follow Me now; but you will be able to follow later.” Peter said to Him, “Lord, why cannot I follow You now? I will lay down my life for You!” Jesus answered, “Will you lay down your life for Me? I assure you and most solemnly say to you, before a rooster crows you will deny and completely disown Me three times.

My Thoughts

I had a friend who was about to get a divorce. I called to see what was happening. His wife wanted to move to another city and he wanted to stay where they were.

“Would you die for your wife?” I asked.

“Yes,” he said.

“Would you live for her, too?” I asked.

He considered the question over the next few months, eventually putting his faith in Jesus and moving to the other city with his wife.

Jesus washed the disciples’ feet to show them the full extent of His love. He knew He was about to give up His life for them. He wanted to live for them, too, leaving us an example to do the same.

What would you do for others if you knew your time was at its end? 

I’ve heard it said, “If you were going to die soon and had only one phone call you could make, who would you call and what would you say? And why are you waiting?”

“I will lay down my life for you.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 14: I Am the Way and the Truth and the Life

John 14 (The Message)

“Don’t let this rattle you. You trust God, don’t you? Trust me. There is plenty of room for you in my Father’s home. If that weren’t so, would I have told you that I’m on my way to get a room ready for you? And if I’m on my way to get your room ready, I’ll come back and get you so you can live where I live. And you already know the road I’m taking.”

Thomas said, “Master, we have no idea where you’re going. How do you expect us to know the road?”

Jesus said, “I am the Road, also the Truth, also the Life. No one gets to the Father apart from me. If you really knew me, you would know my Father as well. From now on, you do know him. You’ve even seen him!”

Philip said, “Master, show us the Father; then we’ll be content.”

“You’ve been with me all this time, Philip, and you still don’t understand? To see me is to see the Father. So how can you ask, ‘Where is the Father?’ Don’t you believe that I am in the Father and the Father is in me? The words that I speak to you aren’t mere words. I don’t just make them up on my own. The Father who resides in me crafts each word into a divine act.

“Believe me: I am in my Father and my Father is in me. If you can’t believe that, believe what you see—these works. The person who trusts me will not only do what I’m doing but even greater things, because I, on my way to the Father, am giving you the same work to do that I’ve been doing. You can count on it. From now on, whatever you request along the lines of who I am and what I am doing, I’ll do it. That’s how the Father will be seen for who he is in the Son. I mean it. Whatever you request in this way, I’ll do.

“If you love me, show it by doing what I’ve told you. I will talk to the Father, and he’ll provide you another Friend so that you will always have someone with you. This Friend is the Spirit of Truth. The godless world can’t take him in because it doesn’t have eyes to see him, doesn’t know what to look for. But you know him already because he has been staying with you, and will even be in you!

“I will not leave you orphaned. I’m coming back. In just a little while the world will no longer see me, but you’re going to see me because I am alive and you’re about to come alive. At that moment you will know absolutely that I’m in my Father, and you’re in me, and I’m in you.

“The person who knows my commandments and keeps them, that’s who loves me. And the person who loves me will be loved by my Father, and I will love him and make myself plain to him.”

Judas (not Iscariot) said, “Master, why is it that you are about to make yourself plain to us but not to the world?”

“Because a loveless world,” said Jesus, “is a sightless world. If anyone loves me, he will carefully keep my word and my Father will love him—we’ll move right into the neighborhood! Not loving me means not keeping my words. The message you are hearing isn’t mine. It’s the message of the Father who sent me.

“I’m telling you these things while I’m still living with you. The Friend, the Holy Spirit whom the Father will send at my request, will make everything plain to you. He will remind you of all the things I have told you. I’m leaving you well and whole. That’s my parting gift to you. Peace. I don’t leave you the way you’re used to being left—feeling abandoned, bereft. So don’t be upset. Don’t be distraught.

“You’ve heard me tell you, ‘I’m going away, and I’m coming back.’ If you loved me, you would be glad that I’m on my way to the Father because the Father is the goal and purpose of my life.

“I’ve told you this ahead of time, before it happens, so that when it does happen, the confirmation will deepen your belief in me. I’ll not be talking with you much more like this because the chief of this godless world is about to attack. But don’t worry—he has nothing on me, no claim on me. But so the world might know how thoroughly I love the Father, I am carrying out my Father’s instructions right down to the last detail.

“Get up. Let’s go. It’s time to leave here.”

My Thoughts

When Jesus left His disciples, He knew it would be bittersweet for them. Bitter for the loss, sweet for the return. 

They didn’t understand the fullness of what He was telling them. Their grief would be heavy at His death. But so would their joy at His return.

I felt God saying to me, “Eric, if you want life, do not let your heart be troubled and do not be afraid. Because I live, you also will live.”

Sometimes people go away. But sometimes they come back again, and sometimes God sends someone else in return.

“Trust in God,” Jesus said, “trust also in Me.”

I found a penny the night before I read this, a small reminder that I could trust in God. 

“In God we trust,” it said to me.

“In God I trust,” I prayed in reply.

“I am the way and the truth and the life.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 15: Apart from Me You Can Do Nothing

John 15 (New King James Version)

“I am the true vine, and My Father is the vinedresser. Every branch in Me that does not bear fruit He takes away; and every branch that bears fruit He prunes, that it may bear more fruit. You are already clean because of the word which I have spoken to you. Abide in Me, and I in you. As the branch cannot bear fruit of itself, unless it abides in the vine, neither can you, unless you abide in Me.

“I am the vine, you are the branches. He who abides in Me, and I in him, bears much fruit; for without Me you can do nothing. If anyone does not abide in Me, he is cast out as a branch and is withered; and they gather them and throw them into the fire, and they are burned. If you abide in Me, and My words abide in you, you will ask what you desire, and it shall be done for you. By this My Father is glorified, that you bear much fruit; so you will be My disciples.

“As the Father loved Me, I also have loved you; abide in My love. If you keep My commandments, you will abide in My love, just as I have kept My Father’s commandments and abide in His love.

“These things I have spoken to you, that My joy may remain in you, and that your joy may be full. This is My commandment, that you love one another as I have loved you. Greater love has no one than this, than to lay down one’s life for his friends. You are My friends if you do whatever I command you. No longer do I call you servants, for a servant does not know what his master is doing; but I have called you friends, for all things that I heard from My Father I have made known to you. You did not choose Me, but I chose you and appointed you that you should go and bear fruit, and that your fruit should remain, that whatever you ask the Father in My name He may give you. These things I command you, that you love one another.

“If the world hates you, you know that it hated Me before it hated you. If you were of the world, the world would love its own. Yet because you are not of the world, but I chose you out of the world, therefore the world hates you. Remember the word that I said to you, ‘A servant is not greater than his master.’ If they persecuted Me, they will also persecute you. If they kept My word, they will keep yours also. But all these things they will do to you for My name’s sake, because they do not know Him who sent Me. If I had not come and spoken to them, they would have no sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin. He who hates Me hates My Father also. If I had not done among them the works which no one else did, they would have no sin; but now they have seen and also hated both Me and My Father. But this happened that the word might be fulfilled which is written in their law, ‘They hated Me without a cause.’

“But when the Helper comes, whom I shall send to you from the Father, the Spirit of truth who proceeds from the Father, He will testify of Me. And you also will bear witness, because you have been with Me from the beginning.

My Thoughts

I’d like my life to bear much fruit. And Jesus tells me how: “Remain in Me and you will bear much fruit. Apart from Me you can do nothing.” 

As I wrote those words on paper, I happened to separate the word “nothing.” 

“Apart from Me you can do no thing.” 

No thing. Not one thing. Nothing that will last anyway; nothing that will bear much fruit. And I want to bear much fruit.

“Keep My words in you,” I felt Jesus saying, “then you will ask rightly because you’ll be using My words when you ask, and you’ll get what you ask for.”

Why does Jesus want us to ask? He tells us: “So that My joy may be in you and that your joy may be complete.”

“Eric, do you want complete joy? Remain in Me. Allow, welcome, and enjoy My pruning so your joy may be complete, and you will will bear much fruit.”

Thank You, Lord!

“Apart from Me you can do nothing.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 16: He Will Guide You into All Truth

John 16 (New International Version)

“All this I have told you so that you will not fall away. They will put you out of the synagogue; in fact, the time is coming when anyone who kills you will think they are offering a service to God. They will do such things because they have not known the Father or me. I have told you this, so that when their time comes you will remember that I warned you about them. I did not tell you this from the beginning because I was with you, but now I am going to him who sent me. None of you asks me, ‘Where are you going?’ Rather, you are filled with grief because I have said these things. But very truly I tell you, it is for your good that I am going away. Unless I go away, the Advocate will not come to you; but if I go, I will send him to you. When he comes, he will prove the world to be in the wrong about sin and righteousness and judgment: about sin, because people do not believe in me; about righteousness, because I am going to the Father, where you can see me no longer; and about judgment, because the prince of this world now stands condemned.

“I have much more to say to you, more than you can now bear. But when he, the Spirit of truth, comes, he will guide you into all the truth. He will not speak on his own; he will speak only what he hears, and he will tell you what is yet to come. He will glorify me because it is from me that he will receive what he will make known to you. All that belongs to the Father is mine. That is why I said the Spirit will receive from me what he will make known to you.”

Jesus went on to say, “In a little while you will see me no more, and then after a little while you will see me.”

At this, some of his disciples said to one another, “What does he mean by saying, ‘In a little while you will see me no more, and then after a little while you will see me,’ and ‘Because I am going to the Father’?” They kept asking, “What does he mean by ‘a little while’? We don’t understand what he is saying.”

Jesus saw that they wanted to ask him about this, so he said to them, “Are you asking one another what I meant when I said, ‘In a little while you will see me no more, and then after a little while you will see me’? Very truly I tell you, you will weep and mourn while the world rejoices. You will grieve, but your grief will turn to joy. A woman giving birth to a child has pain because her time has come; but when her baby is born she forgets the anguish because of her joy that a child is born into the world. So with you: Now is your time of grief, but I will see you again and you will rejoice, and no one will take away your joy. In that day you will no longer ask me anything. Very truly I tell you, my Father will give you whatever you ask in my name. Until now you have not asked for anything in my name. Ask and you will receive, and your joy will be complete.

“Though I have been speaking figuratively, a time is coming when I will no longer use this kind of language but will tell you plainly about my Father. In that day you will ask in my name. I am not saying that I will ask the Father on your behalf. No, the Father himself loves you because you have loved me and have believed that I came from God. I came from the Father and entered the world; now I am leaving the world and going back to the Father.”

Then Jesus’ disciples said, “Now you are speaking clearly and without figures of speech. Now we can see that you know all things and that you do not even need to have anyone ask you questions. This makes us believe that you came from God.”

“Do you now believe?” Jesus replied. “A time is coming and in fact has come when you will be scattered, each to your own home. You will leave me all alone. Yet I am not alone, for my Father is with me.

“I have told you these things, so that in me you may have peace. In this world you will have trouble. But take heart! I have overcome the world.”

My Thoughts

I was praying for the truth. I had a dear friendship that was struggling, in part because I wanted it to be so much more than a friendship. 

I wondered, “Have I harmed our friendship by pressing in and need to step back? Or to be a true friend, do I need to press in more? Should I drop it forever or keep going one day at a time? What’s the truth?”

I was thinking about all of this while attending a meeting. I had to walk out, go into the bathroom, and cry. 

As I walked out of the bathroom, I saw another friend I had been wanting to talk to about something else very important. God had recently been speaking to me about getting in touch with him. I had never seen him before in this building, but there he was.

It was so unexpected, but so divinely appointed. I couldn’t help but realize that God was walking right beside me and lining things up for me, even in my grief.

The funny thing is, this man was standing inside an information booth, the place you go to get guidance, with the word “INFORMATION” above him in all caps.

“I will guide you into all truth,” Jesus said.

I felt God’s guiding me. “Keep going forward,” I felt Him saying, “one day at a time, one step at a time, as I reveal it to you. Can you trust Me today?” God said.

“YES,” I replied, in all caps. :)

“But when He, the Spirit of Truth, comes, He will guide you into all truth.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 17: Now This is Eternal Life

John 17 (New Living Translation)

After saying all these things, Jesus looked up to heaven and said, “Father, the hour has come. Glorify your Son so he can give glory back to you. For you have given him authority over everyone. He gives eternal life to each one you have given him. And this is the way to have eternal life—to know you, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, the one you sent to earth. I brought glory to you here on earth by completing the work you gave me to do. Now, Father, bring me into the glory we shared before the world began.

“I have revealed you to the ones you gave me from this world. They were always yours. You gave them to me, and they have kept your word. Now they know that everything I have is a gift from you, for I have passed on to them the message you gave me. They accepted it and know that I came from you, and they believe you sent me.

“My prayer is not for the world, but for those you have given me, because they belong to you. All who are mine belong to you, and you have given them to me, so they bring me glory. Now I am departing from the world; they are staying in this world, but I am coming to you. Holy Father, you have given me your name; now protect them by the power of your name so that they will be united just as we are. During my time here, I protected them by the power of the name you gave me. I guarded them so that not one was lost, except the one headed for destruction, as the Scriptures foretold.

“Now I am coming to you. I told them many things while I was with them in this world so they would be filled with my joy. I have given them your word. And the world hates them because they do not belong to the world, just as I do not belong to the world. I’m not asking you to take them out of the world, but to keep them safe from the evil one. They do not belong to this world any more than I do. Make them holy by your truth; teach them your word, which is truth. Just as you sent me into the world, I am sending them into the world. And I give myself as a holy sacrifice for them so they can be made holy by your truth.

“I am praying not only for these disciples but also for all who will ever believe in me through their message. I pray that they will all be one, just as you and I are one—as you are in me, Father, and I am in you. And may they be in us so that the world will believe you sent me.

“I have given them the glory you gave me, so they may be one as we are one. I am in them and you are in me. May they experience such perfect unity that the world will know that you sent me and that you love them as much as you love me. Father, I want these whom you have given me to be with me where I am. Then they can see all the glory you gave me because you loved me even before the world began!

“O righteous Father, the world doesn’t know you, but I do; and these disciples know you sent me. I have revealed you to them, and I will continue to do so. Then your love for me will be in them, and I will be in them.”

My Thoughts

Jesus prayed that we would have eternal life. Then He defined it: “Now this is eternal life: that they may know You, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom You have sent.”

Knowing God and knowing His Son is eternal life.

Jesus prayed many other things for us as well. He prayed we would complete the work God gave us to do, that we would have the full measure of joy, and that we would be protected from the evil one.

Why would I say that Jesus prayed these things for us when He was praying them for His disciples? Because He added, “My prayer is not for them alone. I pray also for those who will believe in Me through their message…”

I am one who has believed in Him through their message! Perhaps you are, too. That means Jesus prayed these things for you, too!

As I read these words, I said, “Lord, I do know You. Thank You. And I want to know You more.” 

I thought of some projects I was working on at the time: renovating my attic, finishing my musical, tuning my piano, and cleaning my house for some filming. I felt God wanted me to complete them. They were all part of the work God gave me to do that Jesus prayed I would complete.

“Lord, I want to complete the work You’ve given me to do,” I said. Knowing this gave me joy. 

If you know God and know His Son Jesus Christ, your eternal life has already begun!

“Now this is eternal life: that they may know You, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom You have sent.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 18 (AMP): My Kingdom is Not of this World

John 18 (Amplified Bible)

Having said these things, Jesus left with His disciples and went across the ravine of the Kidron. There was a garden there, which He and His disciples entered. Now Judas, who was betraying Him, knew the place, because Jesus had often met there with His disciples. So Judas, having obtained the Roman cohort and some officers from the high priests and the Pharisees, came there with lanterns and torches and weapons. Then Jesus, knowing all that was about to happen to Him, went to them and asked, “Whom do you want?” They answered Him, “Jesus the Nazarene.” Jesus said, “I am He.” And Judas, who was betraying Him, was also standing with them. When Jesus said, “I am He,” they drew back and fell to the ground. Again He asked them, “Whom do you want?” And they said, “Jesus the Nazarene.” Jesus answered, “I told you that I am He; so if you want Me, let these men go on their way.” This was to fulfill and verify the words He had spoken, “Of those whom You have given Me, I have not lost even one.” Then Simon Peter, who had a sword, drew it and struck the high priest’s servant, cutting off his right ear. The servant’s name was Malchus. So Jesus said to Peter, “Put the sword in its sheath! Shall I not drink the cup which My Father has given Me?”

So the cohort and their commander and the officers of the Jews arrested Jesus and bound Him, and led Him to Annas first; for he was the father-in-law of Caiaphas, who was high priest that year. It was Caiaphas who had advised the Jews that it was expedient for one man to die on behalf of the people.

Simon Peter and another disciple were following Jesus. Now that disciple was known to the high priest, so he went with Jesus into the courtyard of the [residence of the] high priest; but Peter was standing outside at the door. So the other disciple, who was known to the high priest, went out and spoke to the doorkeeper, and brought Peter inside. Then the servant girl who kept the door said to Peter, “You are not one of this Man’s disciples, are you?” He said, “I am not.” Now the servants and the officers had made a fire of coals, because it was cold, and they were standing and warming themselves. And Peter was with them, standing and warming himself.

Then the high priest questioned Jesus about His disciples and about His teaching. Jesus answered him, “I have spoken openly to the world. I always taught in a synagogue and in the temple, where all the Jews habitually congregate; and I said nothing in secret. Why question Me? Question those who have heard what I said to them. They know what I said.” But when He said this, one of the officers who was standing nearby struck Jesus, saying, “Is that how You answer the high priest?” Jesus replied, “If I have said anything wrong, make a formal statement about the wrong; but if properly, why did you strike Me?” So Annas sent Him bound to Caiaphas the high priest.

Now Simon Peter was standing and warming himself. So they said to him, “You are not one of His disciples, are you?” He denied it and said, “I am not.” One of the high priest’s servants, a relative of the one whose ear Peter cut off, said, “Did I not see you with Him in the garden?” So Peter denied it again, and immediately a rooster crowed.

Then the Jews led Jesus from Caiaphas to the Praetorium (governor’s palace). Now it was early and the Jews did not enter the Praetorium so that they would not be unclean, but might eat the Passover. So Pilate came out to them and asked, “What accusation do you bring against this Man?” They answered, “If He were not a criminal, we would not have handed Him over to you.” Then Pilate said to them, “Take Him yourselves and judge Him according to your own law.” The Jews said, “We are not permitted to put anyone to death.” This was to fulfill the word which Jesus had spoken to indicate by what manner of death He was going to die.

So Pilate went into the Praetorium again, and called Jesus and asked Him, “Are You the King of the Jews?” Jesus replied, “Are you saying this on your own initiative, or did others tell you about Me?” Pilate answered, “I am not a Jew, am I? Your own people and their chief priests have handed You over to me. What have You done?” Jesus replied, “My kingdom is not of this world. If My kingdom were of this world, My servants would be fighting to keep Me from being handed over to the Jews; but as it is, My kingdom is not of this world.” So Pilate said to Him, “Then You are a King?” Jesus answered, “You say that I am a King. This is why I was born, and for this I have come into the world, to testify to the truth. Everyone who is of the truth hears and listens carefully to My voice.” Pilate said to Him, “What is truth?”

And when he had said this, he went out to the Jews again and told them, “I find no guilt in Him. But you have a custom that I release someone for you at the Passover. So shall I release for you the King of the Jews?” Then they all shouted back again, “Not this Man, but Barabbas!” Now Barabbas was a robber.

My Thoughts

Sometimes we forget this world is not our final destination, which leads to our distress. “My kingdom is not of this world,” Jesus said, “…but from another place.”

When the soldiers and Jewish officials came looking for someone, Jesus said knew who they wanted. They wanted Him. And He knew what was going to happen. They wanted to kill Him. He knew this was His time.

Peter, however, didn’t know that. He didn’t know what was going to happen, even though Jesus had tried to warn Him. Peter thought Jesus was getting ready to take over the kingdom here, and he was willing to fight for Jesus. Then Jesus surrendered and told Peter to put away his sword.

It must have totally deflated Peter. The One for whom he was willing to die was giving up. How could he not lose hope?

Then Jesus addressed the issue: His kingdom was not of this world or His followers would have fought for Him, and He would have allowed them to. His kingdom was from another place, an eternal place.

I’ve heard it said, “We are not human beings having a temporary spiritual experience; we are spiritual beings have a temporary human experience.”

“Who is it you want?” Jesus asked. 

I want Him. I want Jesus. The One who walked this earth, and who walks now in heaven, too. For I, too, walk this earth, and will some day walk in heaven, too.

Jesus really is all you need, for through Him you get everything else you need… both in this world and in the world to come.

“My kingdom is not of this world… but from another place.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 19: It is Finished

John 19 (The Message)

So Pilate took Jesus and had him whipped. The soldiers, having braided a crown from thorns, set it on his head, threw a purple robe over him, and approached him with, “Hail, King of the Jews!” Then they greeted him with slaps in the face.

Pilate went back out again and said to them, “I present him to you, but I want you to know that I do not find him guilty of any crime.” Just then Jesus came out wearing the thorn crown and purple robe.

Pilate announced, “Here he is: the Man.”

When the high priests and police saw him, they shouted in a frenzy, “Crucify! Crucify!”

Pilate told them, “You take him. You crucify him. I find nothing wrong with him.”

The Jews answered, “We have a law, and by that law he must die because he claimed to be the Son of God.”

When Pilate heard this, he became even more scared. He went back into the palace and said to Jesus, “Where did you come from?”

Jesus gave no answer.

Pilate said, “You won’t talk? Don’t you know that I have the authority to pardon you, and the authority to—crucify you?”

Jesus said, “You haven’t a shred of authority over me except what has been given you from heaven. That’s why the one who betrayed me to you has committed a far greater fault.”

At this, Pilate tried his best to pardon him, but the Jews shouted him down: “If you pardon this man, you’re no friend of Caesar’s. Anyone setting himself up as ‘king’ defies Caesar.”

When Pilate heard those words, he led Jesus outside. He sat down at the judgment seat in the area designated Stone Court (in Hebrew, Gabbatha). It was the preparation day for Passover. The hour was noon. Pilate said to the Jews, “Here is your king.”

They shouted back, “Kill him! Kill him! Crucify him!”

Pilate said, “I am to crucify your king?”

The high priests answered, “We have no king except Caesar.”

Pilate caved in to their demand. He turned him over to be crucified.

They took Jesus away. Carrying his cross, Jesus went out to the place called Skull Hill (the name in Hebrew is Golgotha), where they crucified him, and with him two others, one on each side, Jesus in the middle. Pilate wrote a sign and had it placed on the cross. It read:

Jesus the Nazarene
the King of the Jews.

Many of the Jews read the sign because the place where Jesus was crucified was right next to the city. It was written in Hebrew, Latin, and Greek. The Jewish high priests objected. “Don’t write,” they said to Pilate, “‘The King of the Jews.’ Make it, ‘This man said, “I am the King of the Jews.”’”

Pilate said, “What I’ve written, I’ve written.”

When they crucified him, the Roman soldiers took his clothes and divided them up four ways, to each soldier a fourth. But his robe was seamless, a single piece of weaving, so they said to each other, “Let’s not tear it up. Let’s throw dice to see who gets it.” This confirmed the Scripture that said, “They divided up my clothes among them and threw dice for my coat.” (The soldiers validated the Scriptures!)

While the soldiers were looking after themselves, Jesus’ mother, his aunt, Mary the wife of Clopas, and Mary Magdalene stood at the foot of the cross. Jesus saw his mother and the disciple he loved standing near her. He said to his mother, “Woman, here is your son.” Then to the disciple, “Here is your mother.” From that moment the disciple accepted her as his own mother.

Jesus, seeing that everything had been completed so that the Scripture record might also be complete, then said, “I’m thirsty.”

A jug of sour wine was standing by. Someone put a sponge soaked with the wine on a javelin and lifted it to his mouth. After he took the wine, Jesus said, “It’s done . . . complete.” Bowing his head, he offered up his spirit.

Then the Jews, since it was the day of Sabbath preparation, and so the bodies wouldn’t stay on the crosses over the Sabbath (it was a high holy day that year), petitioned Pilate that their legs be broken to speed death, and the bodies taken down. So the soldiers came and broke the legs of the first man crucified with Jesus, and then the other. When they got to Jesus, they saw that he was already dead, so they didn’t break his legs. One of the soldiers stabbed him in the side with his spear. Blood and water gushed out.

The eyewitness to these things has presented an accurate report. He saw it himself and is telling the truth so that you, also, will believe.

These things that happened confirmed the Scripture, “Not a bone in his body was broken,” and the other Scripture that reads, “They will stare at the one they pierced.”

After all this, Joseph of Arimathea (he was a disciple of Jesus, but secretly, because he was intimidated by the Jews) petitioned Pilate to take the body of Jesus. Pilate gave permission. So Joseph came and took the body.

Nicodemus, who had first come to Jesus at night, came now in broad daylight carrying a mixture of myrrh and aloes, about seventy-five pounds. They took Jesus’ body and, following the Jewish burial custom, wrapped it in linen with the spices. There was a garden near the place he was crucified, and in the garden a new tomb in which no one had yet been placed. So, because it was Sabbath preparation for the Jews and the tomb was convenient, they placed Jesus in it.

My Thoughts

They struck Jesus in the face. It’s perhaps the most brutal way to confront someone.

And it’s a way I once wanted to confront someone. But Jesus already took that punch for them. 

Yet I still wanted to throw a punch, and not just one, but as many as I could for what had been done.

As Forrest Gump said while watching Jenny run out of rocks she was throwing at the house of her abuser: “Sometimes I guess there just aren’t enough rocks.”

Sometimes there just aren’t enough rocks, and we know we just need to forgive, for Jesus has already taken the beating. Still, I was afraid what I might do if I met this person on the street.

Through a friend, I sent a message to let this man know of my anger and frustration. I was trying to forgive, but I still wanted to throw some rocks. He sent back an apology the very next day. After five years of heaviness, I was able to have peace in my heart, not having to hold onto the competing emotions of wanting to pummel him but also forgive him.

“Thank You, Lord,” I said. 

I had found Life again with a capital “L.” And it came from Forgiveness with a capital “F.” 

“It is finished.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 20: By Believing You May Have Life in His Name

John 20 (New King James Version)

Now on the first day of the week Mary Magdalene went to the tomb early, while it was still dark, and saw that the stone had been taken away from the tomb. Then she ran and came to Simon Peter, and to the other disciple, whom Jesus loved, and said to them, “They have taken away the Lord out of the tomb, and we do not know where they have laid Him.”

Peter therefore went out, and the other disciple, and were going to the tomb. So they both ran together, and the other disciple outran Peter and came to the tomb first. And he, stooping down and looking in, saw the linen cloths lying there; yet he did not go in. Then Simon Peter came, following him, and went into the tomb; and he saw the linen cloths lying there, and the handkerchief that had been around His head, not lying with the linen cloths, but folded together in a place by itself. Then the other disciple, who came to the tomb first, went in also; and he saw and believed. For as yet they did not know the Scripture, that He must rise again from the dead. Then the disciples went away again to their own homes.

But Mary stood outside by the tomb weeping, and as she wept she stooped down and looked into the tomb. And she saw two angels in white sitting, one at the head and the other at the feet, where the body of Jesus had lain. Then they said to her, “Woman, why are you weeping?”

She said to them, “Because they have taken away my Lord, and I do not know where they have laid Him.”

Now when she had said this, she turned around and saw Jesus standing there, and did not know that it was Jesus. Jesus said to her, “Woman, why are you weeping? Whom are you seeking?”

She, supposing Him to be the gardener, said to Him, “Sir, if You have carried Him away, tell me where You have laid Him, and I will take Him away.”

Jesus said to her, “Mary!”

She turned and said to Him, “Rabboni!” (which is to say, Teacher).

Jesus said to her, “Do not cling to Me, for I have not yet ascended to My Father; but go to My brethren and say to them, ‘I am ascending to My Father and your Father, and to My God and your God.’ ”

Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples that she had seen the Lord, and that He had spoken these things to her.

Then, the same day at evening, being the first day of the week, when the doors were shut where the disciples were assembled, for fear of the Jews, Jesus came and stood in the midst, and said to them, “Peace be with you.” When He had said this, He showed them His hands and His side. Then the disciples were glad when they saw the Lord.

So Jesus said to them again, “Peace to you! As the Father has sent Me, I also send you.” And when He had said this, He breathed on them, and said to them, “Receive the Holy Spirit. If you forgive the sins of any, they are forgiven them; if you retain the sins of any, they are retained.”

Now Thomas, called the Twin, one of the twelve, was not with them when Jesus came. The other disciples therefore said to him, “We have seen the Lord.”

So he said to them, “Unless I see in His hands the print of the nails, and put my finger into the print of the nails, and put my hand into His side, I will not believe.”

And after eight days His disciples were again inside, and Thomas with them. Jesus came, the doors being shut, and stood in the midst, and said, “Peace to you!” Then He said to Thomas, “Reach your finger here, and look at My hands; and reach your hand here, and put it into My side. Do not be unbelieving, but believing.”

And Thomas answered and said to Him, “My Lord and my God!”

Jesus said to him, “Thomas, because you have seen Me, you have believed. Blessed are those who have not seen and yet have believed.”

And truly Jesus did many other signs in the presence of His disciples, which are not written in this book; but these are written that you may believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that believing you may have life in His name.

My Thoughts

When Mary got to the tomb, two angels greeted her and said, “Why are you crying.” And if it wasn’t amazing enough to have two angels talking to her, when she turned around, Jesus was there, too!

She didn’t know it at the time. But it was Him.

Jesus asked her the same thing, “Why are you crying?” then added, “Who is it you’re looking for?”

I’m looking for You, Jesus! It makes me laugh. Maybe it shouldn’t. But it does. He was literally right there!

Then He says, “Mary.”

And with that… when Jesus said her name… she recognized Him.

Sometimes we miss what’s right in front of us, even the thing for which we’re desperately looking. Some mirrors on cars say, “Objects in mirror are closer than they appear.” I think that’s often the case with Jesus. 

John, the friend of Jesus who wrote these stories, said He wrote them for one reason alone: “These are written that you may believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that by believing you may have life in His name.”

In his way, I think John was trying to tell us that Jesus is closer than He appears. He is, in fact, very near. And if we’ll look for Him, and listen for Him, we’ll find Him.

These stories are testimonies to the reality and presence of Jesus the Christ, the Son of God. If we believe that, we’ll have life in His name. Life with a capital “L”!

“…by believing you may have life in His name.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Chapter 21 (NIV): Follow Me

John 21 (New International Version)

Afterward Jesus appeared again to his disciples, by the Sea of Galilee. It happened this way: Simon Peter, Thomas (also known as Didymus), Nathanael from Cana in Galilee, the sons of Zebedee, and two other disciples were together. “I’m going out to fish,” Simon Peter told them, and they said, “We’ll go with you.” So they went out and got into the boat, but that night they caught nothing.

Early in the morning, Jesus stood on the shore, but the disciples did not realize that it was Jesus.

He called out to them, “Friends, haven’t you any fish?”

“No,” they answered.

He said, “Throw your net on the right side of the boat and you will find some.” When they did, they were unable to haul the net in because of the large number of fish.

Then the disciple whom Jesus loved said to Peter, “It is the Lord!” As soon as Simon Peter heard him say, “It is the Lord,” he wrapped his outer garment around him (for he had taken it off) and jumped into the water. The other disciples followed in the boat, towing the net full of fish, for they were not far from shore, about a hundred yards. When they landed, they saw a fire of burning coals there with fish on it, and some bread.

Jesus said to them, “Bring some of the fish you have just caught.” So Simon Peter climbed back into the boat and dragged the net ashore. It was full of large fish, 153, but even with so many the net was not torn. Jesus said to them, “Come and have breakfast.” None of the disciples dared ask him, “Who are you?” They knew it was the Lord. Jesus came, took the bread and gave it to them, and did the same with the fish. This was now the third time Jesus appeared to his disciples after he was raised from the dead.

When they had finished eating, Jesus said to Simon Peter, “Simon son of John, do you love me more than these?”

“Yes, Lord,” he said, “you know that I love you.”

Jesus said, “Feed my lambs.”

Again Jesus said, “Simon son of John, do you love me?”

He answered, “Yes, Lord, you know that I love you.”

Jesus said, “Take care of my sheep.”

The third time he said to him, “Simon son of John, do you love me?”

Peter was hurt because Jesus asked him the third time, “Do you love me?” He said, “Lord, you know all things; you know that I love you.”

Jesus said, “Feed my sheep. Very truly I tell you, when you were younger you dressed yourself and went where you wanted; but when you are old you will stretch out your hands, and someone else will dress you and lead you where you do not want to go.” Jesus said this to indicate the kind of death by which Peter would glorify God. Then he said to him, “Follow me!”

Peter turned and saw that the disciple whom Jesus loved was following them. (This was the one who had leaned back against Jesus at the supper and had said, “Lord, who is going to betray you?”) When Peter saw him, he asked, “Lord, what about him?”

Jesus answered, “If I want him to remain alive until I return, what is that to you? You must follow me.” Because of this, the rumor spread among the believers that this disciple would not die. But Jesus did not say that he would not die; he only said, “If I want him to remain alive until I return, what is that to you?”

This is the disciple who testifies to these things and who wrote them down. We know that his testimony is true.

Jesus did many other things as well. If every one of them were written down, I suppose that even the whole world would not have room for the books that would be written.

My Thoughts

All the disciples hopes and dreams had died. 

“I’m going out to fish,” Peter said. What else could he do? His hands were tied.

Having caught nothing, Jesus appeared to them and called out, “Friends, haven’t you any fish?”

When I read that, I felt Jesus asking me the same question. I felt all my hopes and dreams had died, too.

“Eric, haven’t you any fish?” I felt Him saying.

“No,” I said, just like the disciples.

“Throw your net on the right side of the boat and you will find some,” Jesus said to them.

But to me, since I wasn’t in a boat and had no net, I felt Jesus saying, “Eric, if you were to obey what I was calling you to do, what would it be?”

I thought about His words. I thought about some things He wanted me to do. But I wondered if I could do them.

“Eric, stay in the fight. Stay in the fight for your faith. It’s true and worth it. Remember who showed up at the Sea of Tiberius for you.”

I recalled a trip I took to Israel several years ago where I was staying at a hotel on the Sea of Tiberius, the same Sea the disciples were on, when God did a miracle for me.

I had felt God wanted me to invite a woman from Swaziland to come on the trip. She sent me a note wondering if God might ever make a way for her to come to the Holy Land. I told her I would pray for her, that I believed God would make a way. But then God spoke to me and told me to make a way for her!

No way! I thought. I barely had faith to get myself and Lana and four of my kids there with me, let alone getting someone there I had never met! 

But the thought was “on me.” It wouldn’t leave me. It wouldn’t stop. We raised the money for her to come, including our own finances. We helped get her passport in order and got her a ticket to fly to Tel Aviv. But when she arrived at the airport, she was turned away by the airport security because they questioned where and how she got a ticket. They put on a plane back home. 

After all that effort, she called from a stopover in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia, to let us know she was headed home.

“No you’re not,” I said, not believing I was actually saying it! How could she possibly come back to Israel now? I remembered a friend who had a friend in Addis Ababa. He went to the airport, found her, and got her papers in order to return. She arrived the next day back in Tel Aviv, to the shock of the airport security. 

“Why did you come back,” they asked. “Didn’t you know that once you’re deported, you’re not allowed to even try to come back in for five years?” No, she didn’t!

Israeli security called me. “Will you vouch for her and keep her with your group the entire time she’s here?”

“I will,” I said.

That night, she appeared at the hotel where we were staying on the Sea of Tiberius. It was no less miraculous to me than the appearance of Jesus must have been to His disciples.

“Eric,” God reminded me, “you found a way then. You made a way. You got her there. Don’t be discouraged in your current hopes and dreams. I can do this, too. I can make a way where there is no way.”

“Throw your net on the right side of the boat,” Jesus said. 

They obeyed, and their net overflowed.

“Follow Me.”

Your Thoughts?

_______________________________________

Conclusion: Jesus Did Many Other Things as Well

I started writing these notes while on a special trip to New York. It was the weekend of my wedding anniversary with Lana, but Lana wasn’t with me. She had passed away five years earlier.

But every year since then, I’ve taken a trip somewhere on our anniversary. It seems wrong to stay home and go through an ordinary day when there’s nothing ordinary about it.

I went to New York to see some shows that I wanted to see. It was a trip Lana and I had taken for our last anniversary together. It seemed fitting to do it again.

To be honest, I was hurting in a new and fresh way on this trip. To my surprise, I had fallen in love again since her passing. Twice, in fact. Both times, however, the women chose to be with someone else, not me. Both times, I was heartbroken… again.

The hotel where I was staying was just a few blocks from Broadway. It was called the RoomMate hotel, but I had no roommate.

The pain that weekend was fresh. Raw. Real. 

I sat in the second row of a show that was one of the most tragically dramatic I had ever seen. Although there were many moments of laughter, the lead actor cried real tears through much of the show. At one point, he knelt down at the front of the stage and looked right at me with tears in his eyes, just as I had in mine. 

I was in the second row and wanted to reach out and touch the tips of his shoes and tell him it was going to be okay. The flow of tears was cathartic.

After the show, I smiled as I caught snowflakes on my tongue in Times Square. I had kissed Lana there five years before.

I smiled as I toured Radio City Music Hall, especially when a photographer asked me to pose with a Rockette who was at least six inches taller than me. I could only shake my head and laugh.

I smiled as I got a text from my most recent love interest wanting to know how my trip was going, even though my heart was breaking because she still wanted to be “friends.”

Smiles and tears. Sometimes they go together. Grief is the price of love. 

How could I possibly live life with a capital “L” when so much around me had fallen apart? That’s what I wanted to know from God that weekend. And that’s why I started writing the thoughts that appear in this book… on stationery from the RoomMate Hotel! I had the Gospel of John with me, in which Jesus promised to give me life to the full, even in the face of adversity.

If anyone knew how to find Life in the face of adversity, it was Jesus. And it was His friend, John, who wrote these stories so we could find life in His name.

“These are written that you may believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that by believing you may have life in His name,” John said.

And that’s the same reason I’ve written my thoughts for you.

“Jesus did many other things as well,” John said. “If every one of them were written down, I suppose that even the whole world would not have room for the books that would be written.”

I’m fully convinced this is true.

What about you? Maybe you have some stories to tell? I’m sure you do. 

Why not write them down so the world can hear them? They need to hear them. I hope you’ll share them.

“Jesus did many other things as well…”

Contact the Author

I love hearing from my readers! To contact me, visit ericelder.com For more inspiring books and music, visit InspiringBooks.com

My Stories of Faith

My Stories of Faith

My Stories of Faith by Eric Elder

True stories of faith to encourage you in yours
by Eric Elder

In this book I share some of my deeper walk with Christ: how I hear from God, the miracles I’ve seen take place when I step out in faith, the blessings I and others have received by leaning into spiritual practices like fasting and prayer and journaling and taking steps of obedience to what I feel God is calling me to do. I pray these stories encourage you to step out in faith, too! I KNOW God will honor your steps of obedience to Him! As Hebrews 11:6 says, “And without faith it is impossible to please God, because anyone who comes to Him must believe that He exists and that He rewards those who earnestly seek Him.”

Listen here, read below, or download the PDF
Also available in PaperbackKindle, or Audible

Introduction: The Gift of Faith

When I first put my faith in Christ, He gave me a gift of faith. I thought every Christian received the same gift. In that moment, I suddenly believed God could do anything, absolutely anything. I believed the whole Bible was true, from cover to cover. I believed anything God did in the past He could do again. And I believed He could do even greater things than these—even through me. As Jesus said, “Truly, I tell you, whoever believes in Me will do the works I have been doing, and they will do even greater things than these…” (John 14:12).

It wasn’t until several years later, when I took a spiritual gifts “inventory,” that I realized God had given me a “gift” of faith, a supernatural gift to believe God can do supernatural things. And it was then that I realized God wanted me to use this gift as He wanted all of us to use our gifts—for building up others in their faith. Or, as the Apostle Paul says, “to equip His people for works of service, so that the body of Christ may be built up, until we all reach unity in the faith and in the knowledge of the Son of God and become mature, attaining to the whole measure of the fullness of Christ” (Ephesians 4:12-13).

But I wondered how to do this. As I asked others, they said that whenever I would tell them my stories of faith—how God had worked in my life—they were encouraged in their faith to believe that God could work in their lives too.

Yes! That made sense. When people needed a boost in their faith, I could give them some of mine. Isn’t that the way with all of our gifts? When people need wisdom or money or healing or help or encouragement, we share with them whatever wisdom or money or healing or help or encouragement we have been given (see 1 Corinthians 12-14).

So I began that day sharing my stories of faith in a more intentional way—writing them down, sending them out, and telling them to others when they needed a lift.

And that’s what I’m doing with this book for you. If you need a boost in your faith, if you need to believe that God can do something impossible for you, if you need to know that God is real, that He loves you, that He is FOR you and has a purpose for your life, then this book is for you. Because, along with hope and love, faith is one of the top three things we all need in life (see 1 Corinthians 13:13).

With that as an introduction, I’d like to begin telling you a few of my stories of faith, starting with the day I was born. Well, not that far back! I’ll start with the day I was born again, at age 23, the day I put my faith in Christ—and He put His gift of faith in me.

Eric Elder
May 25, 2020

P.S. I read these stories online each night during April and May of 2020. The series was called “Bedtime Stories of Faith.” In addition to the stories I share in the book below, I shared more scriptures, a song, and a prayer in these videos to help people relax, unwind, and keep God at the forefront of their minds. Consider this the “extended edition”! Here’s the playlist of all 50 videos.

Chapter 1: Happy Birthday, Eric

I was born on May 8, 1963. I was born again on February 9, 1987. And God gave me more than one gift on that birthday.

I had been wrestling with my faith in the months leading up to that day. I had been wrestling with it for years, really, but especially in those months leading up to that day.

Although I grew up in a Christian home and went to church nearly every Sunday for 23 years, there was one hurdle that kept me from becoming a Christian: I didn’t believe in Jesus. He seemed okay to me, but whether or not He really lived didn’t matter much to me.

I remember reading in my junior high Sunday School class that Jesus said, “For God so loved the world that He gave His one and only Son that whoever believes in Him will not perish but have eternal life… whoever believes in Him is not condemned, but whoever does not believe stands condemned already because they have not believed in the name of God’s one and only Son” (John 3:16,18).

I asked my Sunday School teacher about it, saying that according to Jesus, I wasn’t going to go to heaven because I didn’t believe in Him.

She said, “Oh, Eric. You’re such a good kid, you’ll get into heaven.”

I said, “But Jesus said I have to believe in Him, and I don’t!”

She meant well, I know, but I left wondering if it was true, what Jesus said. But I didn’t know what to do about it.

Fast forward ten years, and I still didn’t know what to think. I had graduated from high school and college and moved from my hometown of Chenoa, Illinois, to take a job with a company in Houston, Texas. In Houston, I started going to church with a cousin who lived there. We went on a weekend retreat with a couple hundred singles from the church to enjoy a few days in the country, hiking and boating and doing zip lines in the woods. We sang worship songs and listened to a speaker talk about Jesus.

After one of these talks, we broke up into small groups to talk about what we had just heard.

“Who is Jesus to you?” was the question we were supposed to discuss.

I felt safe in that environment, so when it was my turn to answer, I said, “I’m not sure I really believe in Jesus.”

One of the men in my group asked if I’d like to come join him and several other men who met weekly at his house to study the Bible and learn more about Jesus. I thought that sounded great and said, “Yes.”

Before we left the retreat that weekend, during the closing segment to hear from anyone who wanted to share about what God had done in their lives during the weekend, a woman stood up and said she had just put her faith in Jesus and was so thankful.

I thought, “How can a person do that? How can they just decide one day they believe in Jesus?” 

I wondered if she was even telling the truth.

To my surprise, I was about to discover that she was—as I was soon to make that same decision myself.

Chapter 2: A Big Bag of Books

One of the questions that first came up in our weekly men’s Bible study was whether or not we knew for sure we were going to heaven. We were studying the book of John and what Jesus said about the topic. About ten of us were sitting in a circle in a living room and one by one we started answering.

I went first, saying I was about 90% sure. I felt I had been pretty good, but I didn’t want to seem so arrogant to say any higher.

The man sitting next to me said he was 100% sure he was going to heaven! I thought that was more than a little arrogant and based on the little that I knew about him, I thought his percentage was a little high.

On we went around the room. The next man said he was 100% sure he’d go to heaven, too. And the next and the next and the next and the next: 100%, 100%, 100%, 100%. Back to me: 90%.

They said, “Eric, the difference between 90% and 100% will change your life.”

“Okay,” I thought. But I had no idea how to make that leap.

About six months later, we began a study of the book in the Bible called Romans. The leader said we should all get four books that would be helpful for our study: 1) a good study Bible, 2) a Strong’s Concordance that listed definitions of every word in the Bible and where each word occurred, 3) a Greek Interlinear Bible showing a verse-by-verse comparison of the original Greek text of the New Testament and its corresponding text in English, and 4) a Vine’s Expository Bible describing each verse and the context in which it was written.

I assumed this was just what people did when they studied the Bible, so I went to a Christian bookstore for the first time in my life and looked for each of these items. A new study Bible had just come out in 1984 called the New International Study Bible. I liked the way it was described, with a team of scholars who had put it together, translating the original Hebrew of the Old Testament books (which were written before the time of Christ) and the Greek of the New Testament (written during and after the time of Christ). The translation was written using everyday language that was both faithful to the original text and read well in English. This version was also filled with footnotes on nearly every verse, explaining more about the original words and meanings and history that was taking place at the time the words were written.

I walked out of the store with a very heavy bag—the Strong’s Concordance alone was 10”x12”x3” and over 1,200 pages, certainly the largest book I had ever bought in my life!

I went home with my big bag of books and curiously began reading the Study Bible, the first Bible I had intentionally bought for myself to read and learn what it said.

I was amazed! The words came alive before my eyes. I felt like I was reading that day’s newspaper, not words written over 4,000 years ago. It was fresh and relevant and made so much sense. I read the description of the seven days of creation as if I were there myself, watching it happen.

When I finished reading for the day, I looked forward to the next day when I could pick it up again. I read every verse and every footnote, looking up words in the Strong’s Concordance to make sure I knew what the words meant as best I could.

I loved it! I had discovered a treasure trove of insight and understanding into my life that I had never explored so deeply. I couldn’t wait to keep reading more.

Chapter 3: A Life-Changing Question 

About six months after the retreat where I openly confessed that I didn’t know what to believe about Jesus, a man in my Bible study asked me a life-changing question. We were then studying the book of Romans and the topic came up of “God’s wrath.” 

God’s wrath, as it was described in chapter l of Romans, wasn’t about Him destroying people. He didn’t want anyone to die. It was about Him turning people over to their own sinful desires, giving them the freedom to choose Him or to choose their own way—even if it broke His heart. “Therefore, God gave them over in the sinful desires of their hearts…to do what ought not to be done” (Romans 1:24a,18b). The end result, the Bible says in verse 32, would unfortunately be death. 

As we talked that night, I learned the Bible says that all of us have sinned, and the penalty for sin is death: “For all have sinned and fall short of the glory of God” (Romans 3:23) and “the wages of sin is death” (Romans 6:23a). 

I disagreed. 

I didn’t think this was right. 

I knew I wasn’t perfect, but I didn’t think I had done anything so wrong that I would get the death penalty or even go to jail. 

I didn’t mean to sound arrogant, but I told the guys I didn’t think I had done anything for which I would die. 

One of them asked me, not unkindly, “Why don’t you ask God what He thinks about how good you’ve been?” 

I thought it was a fair question. I went home that night and decided to ask God. Just before I prayed, though, I got nervous. “What if it was true?” I wondered. “What if I really have done something for which I might die?” 

But I wanted to know the truth. Either the Bible was true and what I believed was wrong or what I believed was true and the Bible was wrong. They couldn’t both be true. And I wanted to know the truth. So I decided to ask God. 

Within two weeks, God answered my prayer.

Chapter 4: Born Again 

As I continued reading through the book of Romans on my own, I came across a list of sins, some of which I had done. At the end of the list, the Bible said, “Although they know God’s righteous decree that those who do such things deserve death, they not only continue to do those things, but they approve of those who practice them” (Romans 1:32). 

As I looked at the sins on this list, I suddenly became aware of just how truly destructive they could be. And since I had done some of them, I knew they could destroy me, too.

I had chosen to do what I wanted to do without regard for what God wanted me to do. In the end, those choices would kill me—not because God wanted me to die, but because I would be simply reaping what I had sown. 

I was cut to the heart. I was suddenly so sorry for what I had done. I didn’t want to die. 

But what could I do about it now? I couldn’t undo what I had done. And if I died as a result of doing those things, I would only be getting what was coming to me. 

I was caught in a dilemma that I didn’t know how to resolve. 

That night I went with my cousin to hear a missionary speak. He was talking about Jesus and why He came to earth—to pay the price for our sins by giving up His life for us so we could go free. 

I had probably heard that message many times before. But if you don’t think you’re a sinner, you don’t think you need a Savior. Now that I was aware of my sins, I realized Jesus was the answer to my dilemma. I didn’t want to die, and God didn’t want me to die, so He sent Jesus to willingly die in my place so I could go free. 

I was overwhelmed at the thought of it. That Jesus loved me so much that He would take my place on the cross to pay for the sins I had willingly committed. 

I had never felt such a love in my life. The closest thing to this kind of love was with a girlfriend in college, Lana. I wanted to pick up the phone to call her and tell her what I was feeling. 

As I reached for the phone, I heard these words in my head: “Talk to Me.” 

I wasn’t sure what to do with them, so I reached for the phone a second time. 

“Talk to me,” I heard again. 

I still didn’t know what was happening, so I reached for the phone a third time. And for the third time, I heard these words: “Talk to Me.”

I knew it was God. I set down the phone and got on my knees on my bed. I buried my head in my pillow and cried. I told God how sorry I was for all I had done, how sorry I was that I couldn’t take it back, and I couldn’t make up for it myself. 

But I couldn’t believe the love I felt from Him, that He was offering a way to wipe my slate clean if I would put my faith in Jesus. I couldn’t believe it, but I knew it was true. 

I put my faith in Jesus that night, asking Him to forgive me of all my sins. I asked Him to fill me with His Holy Spirit to help me do the things He wanted me to do so I could live the life He wanted me to live. 

I told Him I loved Him and wanted to follow Him the rest of my life. I asked Him to call the shots from there on out, not only to be my Savior, but to be my Lord as well. 

In that moment, I was born again. 

That’s how Jesus described it to Nicodemus in the Bible: “I tell you the truth, no one can enter the kingdom of God unless he is born again” (John 3:3). 

I felt like I had been born again, too. I woke up the next morning to a whole new life. It was as if God had picked me up from the path I was on, turned me around, and set me down on a new path, pointed in a whole a new direction. 

I suddenly believed the Bible was true from cover to cover. I believed God could do whatever He said He could do. And I finally knew with 100% certainty that I was going to heaven—not because of what I had done, but because of what Jesus had done for me. As the men in my Bible study had said, the difference between 90% and 100% would change my life. And they were right. It did. It changed the trajectory of the rest of my life, both here on earth and in the life to come.

You really can know for sure that you are going to heaven. And God wants you to know it! As the Apostle John says, “I write these things to you who believe in the name of the Son of God so that you may know that you have eternal life” (I John 5:13). 

If you’ve never put your faith in Christ, do it today! And if you’ve already put your faith in Christ, let this be a reminder to you that God still loves you, still cares about you, and still has an abundant life in store for you, both now and forever in heaven.

To finish the verse I quoted in part earlier, “For the wages of sin is death…,” the rest of the verse says, “but the gift of God is eternal life in Christ Jesus our Lord” (Romans 3:23).

Chapter 5: Fasting 

My first fast was at age 24. I was living in Houston, Texas, and reading in the Bible about fasting—giving up food for a period of time for the purpose of deepening your prayer life. 

Jesus said, “When you fast…” then gave instructions about it. I was intrigued that He said “When you fast” not “If you fast.” It was as if fasting was to be a regular part of a Christ-following life. 

I read a few articles on fasting and decided to try it for myself for three to five days. I had never gone that long without food, so I wasn’t sure what to expect physically or spiritually. I had read that people would often still drink some kind of liquid to stay hydrated—water, juice or broth—but food was given up. 

I started my fast one morning, and that first day I was so hungry. My body’s built-in reaction was to increase my desire for food. I was fascinated by this reaction to missing a meal which God had hardwired into our systems. It ensured we would seek out the energy we needed to sustain our lives. 

Then my head started to hurt and I was less fascinated! All I could think about, it seemed, was food. I tried to pray more, knowing that this was the reason I was fasting, but it was difficult to concentrate. I went to bed that night wondering how I would make it three to five days. The next morning, however, I felt much better. My headache was gone and instead of a hunger for food, I felt a hunger for God. 

I had already planned to take a day off work so I could focus on praying, so the second day I took my Bible, a pen, and my journal to the pool at my apartment complex. I was all alone there and had plenty of time to pray, so I began praying through a list of things I had been collecting to pray about during this time. 

One of the things on my list was to pray for a former girlfriend about a job decision she was trying to make. We had talked on the phone the week before as we still stayed in touch from time to time. She shared with me that she wasn’t sure if she should stay at her current job or not. I told her I was planning this time of fasting and prayer, and I said I would pray for her. I had no idea how that prayer would change both of our lives.

Chapter 6: My First Fast

As I began to pray for my former girlfriend’s job, I began to feel that she really shouldn’t be working in the corporate world at all. What she needed, I thought, was a husband who could take care of her financially so she could be free to stay at home, raise a family, and do whatever else she felt she should do without having to work for money. 

“That’s what she really needs, Lord,” I prayed, “a husband.” 

As soon as I prayed that, these words came into my mind: “Why don’t you marry her?” I thought I was losing my mind. This fasting must be making me delirious. I shut my journal and went on with my day, wondering where that thought came from. 

It wasn’t that I didn’t love her. I did. But a year earlier I felt God wanted me to break up with her for reasons I didn’t understand at the time. We had both given our lives to Christ in the time since our breakup, so we were both starting fresh again. Maybe God did have something more in mind for us. 

I didn’t really believe it, but even after I ended my fast a few days later, the question I had heard at the pool was still at the forefront of my mind, “Why don’t you marry her?”

And it never left me until the day I finally asked her to marry me almost a year later. We were married five months after that and went on to have six kids together and 23 wonderful years of marriage until she passed away all too soon at the age of 48. She stayed home with our kids after our first child was born and never went back to working in the corporate world again. 

To say that fasting and prayer has changed my life would be a serious understatement. I was sold, and I’ve been fasting and praying ever since.

Chapter 7: My 21-Day Fast

I don’t often talk about my fasts as Jesus encourages His disciples to fast in secret, drawing closer to God, not drawing attention to themselves (see Matthew 6:6-18). But there’s still value in sharing what we’ve experienced through fasting. Even Jesus shared his experiences, as did Moses and David and others in the Bible and in the present day. That’s how we know about those stories. 

I’ve always been encouraged by such stories, both biblical and contemporary, so I’d like to share a few of mine to encourage you. 

I’ve fasted for three days, five days, seven days, 21 days, and even 40 days. I’ve fasted for one day a month for four years, praying for the president of the United States at the time, as someone had encouraged as many as could to do so. I’ve fasted from one meal a week for a period of several months, encouraged by the methodical approach to fasting and prayer by John Wesley, the founder of the “methodists,” hence the methodical approach to fasting. 

But the most effective fasts for me have been those where I’ve had something weighing on my heart, something I’ve felt needed extra attention, extra prayer support, extra focus for a period of time until I sensed something was happening. Those are the special times when I’ve seen the clearest connection between my prayers and God’s answers. 

“Don’t you get weaker when you fast?” people sometimes ask me. “How can you fast and still get anything done?” 

I’ve actually found the opposite to be true. After the initial hunger pangs die down—which they naturally do after a day or two as your body adjusts to the new reality and stops sending those dire signals to your brain that you “must eat”—I get a strength from fasting that I don’t get any other way. 

I was once fasting for a week while teaching a computer class for a national seminar company. I was teaching eight hours a day to different audiences in different cities every day. By the fifth day, I would have thought I would have been totally worn out—even without fasting. But I had gained so much strength from the fast that one of the seminar students came up to me after class that fifth day and, not knowing I had been fasting, remarked about how much energy I had as a teacher. “What’s your secret?” she asked me. I confessed that I was surprised about it myself, as I hadn’t eaten anything for five days straight. 

Jesus said, “I have food to eat which you do not know about” (John 4:32). He also said, “Man does not live on bread alone, but on every Word that comes from the mouth of God” (Matthew 4:4). I had seen this at work in my own three-day, five-day, and ten-day fasts. But what about longer fasts, I wondered, say 21 or 40 days?

I asked my doctor when I was considering a 21-day fast, “How long can a person safely go without food?” He said he thought I could go 21 or even 40 days as long as I paid attention to my body. So I decided to try a 21-day fast.

During that fast, I drank mostly water, occasionally adding some watered-down fruit juice or weak broth made from boiling some vegetables—cabbage, potatoes, carrots, etc.—then drinking only the liquid. The idea was to keep hydrated throughout my fast while also giving myself a little extra energy and, honestly, a break from water from time to time. The idea, physically, is to not reactivate the stomach acids which are produced any time food is reintroduced, which would happen with any kind of solid food or even any liquids with more substance to them like milk. Once the stomach acids are reactivated, the hunger pangs and headaches are reactivated as well if the food doesn’t continue coming. 

Spiritually, during that 21-day fast, I was praying about my job and whether or not I should do something different career-wise. I had my answer to that question within three days—to stay the course where I was—so I spent the rest of the 21 days praising God and praying, thoroughly enjoying my time with Him. 

I told my family I was fasting because they would know soon enough anyway, but I didn’t tell others. I was surprised I could sit with them for meal after meal and not eat, yet not be crazy watching them eat, either! My stomach had shut down after the first few days, and I was able to thoroughly enjoy my time with my family as well, even cooking for them often throughout the time. My “food” really did come from heaven.

It was a bold and fruitful experience for me, but it was several more years before I attempted something even bolder and more fruitful: a 40-day fast.

Chapter 8: My 40-Day Fast 

Back in 1994, a man named Bill Bright, the founder of Campus Crusade for Christ, did his first of many 40-day fasts. The experience was so powerful that by 1998, he said he was praying for two million Christians to fast and pray for 40 days by the year 2000. 

Having done several extended fasts by then myself, I was interested in trying this, but could never quite commit myself to actually doing it. There never seemed to be a good time to give up food for 40 days! There was always a holiday or a special event or some kind of activity going on that I didn’t feel I could commit to 40 days in a row. That, plus, I didn’t know if I could actually make it that long. 

The year 2000 came and went, but I still hoped I could do it at some point. That point came in 2004, when I was seriously considering leaving full-time ministry to go back into secular work. I was getting worn down by trying to continually minister to more and more people while also having to continually raise more and more funds to do the ministry. 

So I decided it was time for me to do a 40-day fast to pray for two things. The first was to pray for a revival in America that Bill Bright was calling for, and the second was for clarity about my own calling for the next season of my life. I also decided to go through the book of Exodus during at the same time, looking for clues about how Moses made it through his years of fulfilling God’s calling and leading an entire nation of hundreds of thousands of people through the desert for 40 years. Moses, too, had done not just one but two 40-day fasts during which God had spoken powerfully to him and to the people of Israel. 

As it happened to me on my 21-day fast, I knew within three days of my 40-day fast that God was calling me to stay the course, to continue my ministry, and that He would somehow give me strength and the wisdom and the resources to do it. 

So with that question answered, I was able to spend the rest of my 40 days praying for revival and listening closely to whatever God had to say to me. Every day, I spent some time reading in the book of Exodus until I found a lesson I felt God wanted me to apply to my life. Sometimes it was to stand still when my back was up against a sea. Sometimes it was raising my hands and my heart towards heaven and watching the sea split in front of me so I could walk through it. 

I also learned from the book of Exodus how Moses was encouraged by his father-in-law to delegate to others whatever he could so Moses could focus on what he alone could do. Each day I would write down a verse from Exodus which I could focus on, and also one practical thing I could do based on that insight, whether I did it right then or made note of it to do in the future. 

At the end of my 40 days, which was a long time to go without food, I had 40 little hotel-sized sheets of paper with 40 verses from Exodus to focus on with 40 things to do for the next season of my ministry. In the months that followed, I followed the plan that God had laid out for me during these 40 days, starting with building a new website for my ministry to recruiting volunteers and doing the fundraising that I needed to do to do the work. Because of this, I was able to relaunch my ministry in a stronger, more sustainable way. 

Not only did my 40-day fast result in an action plan that carried me from then until now, but I also wrote down all the lessons I learned from that experience in order to help others learn from them, too. Those writings turned into a devotional book called Exodus: Lessons in Freedom—How to Get Free, Stay Free and Set Others Free. That book became the first of more than a dozen books I’ve written in a similar way, going through a book of the Bible and focusing on whatever God has to say to me through it. This has become my de facto approach for reading and writing about the Bible ever since, learning what I can, and doing what I can do, then sharing that wisdom with others. 

All these years later, I’m still in full-time ministry, and I’m still sharing with others what I’m learning along the way—all of which is fruit from that 40-day fast in which I was so intensely seeking God’s face and His will for my life. 

You might think there’s not a good time to give up food for 40 days. I agree! My fast was during November and December, right in the midst of Thanksgiving and Christmas—probably the worst time to give up food! But I’ve learned that even though there’s never a good time to give up food, there’s always a good time to get closer to God. 

If you’ve never fasted before, or haven’t done so lately, I’d encourage you to give it a try. Whether it’s for three days or five days or 21 or 40, there’s always a good time to get closer to God.

Chapter 9: A Sabbatical 

When Lana and I were dating, she told me she’d love to have twelve kids someday. She was one of nine and said she didn’t think that was enough. She always wished there were more kids around to play with! So when we got married, I knew that once we started having kids, I would be working for a very long time without a break to provide for our family. 

I decided it would be nice to take some time off before we started having kids to do three things I really wanted to do more: to read the Bible, to pray, and to play the piano. I thought three months would be a good amount of time to do these things. A friend of mine had just had knee surgery and was off work for a few months before going back, and our office went on fine without him. I wondered if maybe I could ask for three months off, without pay, but rather than be laid up with an injured knee, I could do those things that were important to me. 

Lana agreed, as she was still working and we would have her income. When I went to ask my boss, I had no idea what he would say, as I had never heard of anyone doing this before. To my surprise, he said, “Yes”! He asked when I wanted to do it, and I gave him some dates. I felt there was a particular Friday that I should start this three-month sabbatical—as I learned it was called in the Bible; a time of rest from doing normal work, based on the word “sabbath”—a sabbatical. When I looked closer at the calendar, though, I realized if I started my sabbatical on the following Tuesday, I would get paid for the previous weekend, plus some extra because it was also a holiday weekend. The difference in income would be about $1,000. 

It would have been nice to have the extra $1,000, especially since I wasn’t going to be getting paid for the next three months. But as I prayed about it, I felt very impressed that I should still start my sabbatical on that Friday. It didn’t quite make sense financially, but I decided to follow that impression. God had surprisingly worked out everything else for this idea, so I wanted to follow His lead. 

When that Friday came, I decided to take a long drive to visit my mom and dad back in Illinois, about 18 hours north of where we were living in Texas. I got on the road and was shocked when I arrived. 

My mom, who had been battling a return of breast cancer from ten years earlier, was not doing well at all. She had not told me when we talked on the phone because I was newly married and she didn’t want to worry me. Her physical condition had deteriorated, though, so rapidly that I couldn’t believe my eyes. 

She was, it appeared, in her very last days. And from what she told me, she was ready to go. 

I soon switched from praying for her healing to praying for God’s mercy to let her go. Three days later, I was able to hold her hand as she passed from this life to the next. 

I’m so thankful I started my sabbatical when I did so I could be with her for those last three days of her life. Had I waited till Tuesday, I would have had $1,000. God is so gracious.

Two months later, my dad had a stroke, and I was able to spend several weeks with him during his recovery before I had to go back to work. 

And yes, God did honor my desire to spend much of that time doing what I had set out to do: reading the Bible, praying, and playing the piano. He also used that time in a special way, going far beyond what I had in mind. 

Nine months later, we started having those babies Lana wanted.

Chapter 10: My Piano 

I love playing the piano. I’ve played since I was a kid, taking lessons along with my brother and sister from Mrs. Eash, who was also our music teacher at school. 

I seldom, if ever, played for others. In part, this was because I didn’t feel confident in my abilities, but also in part because I just enjoyed playing for myself—hearing a song come together out of my own fingers from the sheet music in front of me. It was immensely satisfying. 

After college, when I moved to Houston, I bought my own piano—a $350 used, upright piano that I enjoyed playing, but it didn’t hold its tune very well. 

After about ten years of playing on it, I wished I had something that sounded a little better—one that could at least hold its tune so I could truly enjoy my personal times of playing. 

I mentioned my desire to a Christian friend, asking if she would pray with me about it.

She said she would, then she added, “Why don’t you go to a piano store and pick one out, then ask God for it?” 

I immediately said, “No, I don’t even want to look. I’ll probably see one I really like, then I’ll be frustrated that I can’t get it. I don’t need anything special, just something that will hold its tune better than this one.” 

But my friend wouldn’t let up. “I think you should look,” she said. 

Reluctantly, I decided to take her advice. I went to a piano showroom about twenty miles away and started looking over their collection. 

I always loved playing a grand piano whenever I had a chance. I loved playing my great aunt’s grand piano at her house on Lake Michigan in her wide-open front room that overlooked the lake or playing a friend’s baby grand in the music room of her Victorian-style house or playing another friend’s full-sized grand piano in her parents’ wooded and windowed home in their high-vaulted living room. I could, and would, play for hours whenever they would let me. 

But a grand piano seemed out of the question. I had no idea how much they cost, but I had only seen them in the grandest of settings. When I walked into the showroom, I did see an old, dilapidated-looking grand piano in the corner. Now that’s probably the one for me, I thought. I walked up to it not caring how it looked, only caring how it sounded. But when I started to play it, it sounded even worse than it looked! It was even worse than my old upright at home. 

I worked my way through the showroom, playing uprights and grands until I finally ended up at what was obviously the best piano in the whole store—a brand-new Steinway Model B—a full-sized, seven-foot grand piano with an understated black matte finish. It was beautiful. But how would it sound? I had yet to find a piano in the showroom that sounded good to my ear.

I trepidatiously sat down in front of this last piano and played a “C” chord, just three notes pressed down together. 

It was the most beautiful “C” chord I had ever heard in my life. 

I got up and stood behind the bench next to the salesman who was helping me. “How much is it?” I asked. 

“$42,000,” he said. “It’s the best piano we have.”

I was dumbstruck. I had no idea they even made a piano that expensive. But that “C” chord! I had never played a piano that sounded so beautiful.

I regained my composure and by faith decided to say out loud what I was thinking in my head. I told the salesman, “I’m going to ask God for this piano.” 

As soon as I said it, I heard these words in my head, “I’ll give you this piano—or a better one.” 

I couldn’t believe what I was hearing. How could God possibly give me this piano? And what piano could possibly be better than this one? 

I sat down and played the piano a little more, then tried to play some of the others in the showroom again. Nothing compared to the Steinway Model B. Nothing even came close. 

My fears had come true. I had found the piano I really wanted, but there was no way I could ever afford it. 

And I couldn’t imagine ever finding a better one. 

Until I did.

Chapter 11: My Father’s Love 

Over the next few months, I kept thinking and praying about that grand piano. Could it be that God really did want to give me that piano or a better one? I tried to think of ways I could ever buy such a piano, or who I might ask to help me buy one, but I always reached a dead end. 

Over the weekend, I went to a Christian men’s event and one of the speakers challenged us to consider our relationships with our own fathers. How many of us ever heard our fathers tell us that they loved us? Many never had. As I thought back, I couldn’t ever remember hearing those words myself. Not that my relationship with my father was ever strained in any way, but I couldn’t remember him ever saying those words to me, “I love you.” 

Then the speaker went further and got to the heart of the challenge. How many of us had ever told our fathers that we loved them? As I thought about that question, I came up blank again. The speaker asked us to consider saying those words out loud to our fathers when we got home, even as awkward as it may be. I decided to do it, sensing how significant it might be. 

When I got home, I mentioned the idea to my wife, Lana. 

She said, “Eric, I wasn’t going to tell you this, because it was supposed to be a surprise. But your Dad came over this weekend and asked if he could do something for you. He said he knew you didn’t like your piano and wished you had a better one, so he wanted to bring over the piano from his house that you grew up playing. Even though it wasn’t new, he thought it was better than what you had.”

Lana continued, “He was going to load it into his truck by himself, make a ramp to get it up our front steps, and then take your piano back to his house. He wanted to surprise you with it when you got back home. But I wasn’t sure if you would want him to do that and that he might want to check with you first.” 

I was dumbstruck again. My father was in his 70’s, had been through a stroke and open-heart surgery, and was going to do all of that, by himself, just to surprise me and help me get something he knew I wanted. 

I thought through other things he had done for me over my lifetime, from stringing a zip line from the second floor of our barn to a tree 75 feet away, to attending my music concerts and dance recitals and Cub Scout pinewood derbies. I may not have been able to remember a time when my dad said that he loved me, but I couldn’t doubt that he did love me because of the ways he showed me. 

I cried at the thought of it. I called my dad, told him I would love to have his piano, and I helped him move it into my house. 

As I sat down to play it for the first time, it sounded even better than the Steinway Model B in the showroom, because it came with my father’s love. 

God had done it. He had given me a piano that was better than the one I had prayed for. I was fully content that God had kept His word, even if the answer came in a way that I hadn’t expected.

But God wasn’t finished with the story yet. He still had one more thing in mind.

By the way, I brought lunch over to my dad’s house a few days later, and while we were eating at his kitchen table, I looked him in the eye and said, “Dad, I just wanted to say I love you.” The circle was complete.

Chapter 12: The King 

A few months after I received my childhood piano from my dad, I received a job offer from a church near Dallas, Texas. 

We sold our cute little house in Illinois and bought a house in Dallas. The net gain on the selling and buying was $30,000, which was more than we had ever had in the bank. 

Once in Dallas, I noticed a piano store and decided to take a look. The owner, Mr. Kahn, showed me around, noting that they specialized in rebuilding Steinways. He had hired a builder from the Steinway factory in New York, and a technician who did the final precision voicing of each instrument—a technician who was awarded as one of the top in the country. 

Mr. Kahn showed me some Steinways they were rebuilding for customers, and I was impressed by their attention to detail. It took months to rebuild these classic beauties, from curing and shaping the wood for new sound boards to re-dipping each screw in molten nickel and reinserting them one into their original location. A team of workers stripped, sanded, and reapplied multiple layers of varnish to create that classic, buffed, black-matte finish. 

Then Mr. Kahn showed me his latest acquisition—a 1910 Steinway Model B. It was nearly 100 years old by then, but still a beauty that I later found out was due to its being entirely handmade at the Steinway factory in New York City during the “golden age” of the piano—a time when pianos were at the height of their craftsmanship in America. 

The “harp” of the piano by itself was gorgeous, cast out of bronze in one entire piece to hold the tension of hundreds of strings. It was ornamented with dozens of decorative details no longer found on new Steinways.

It looked gorgeous, but how would it sound?

I could play it, he said, but it would sound like a hundred year old piano. When they finished with it, however, it would sound even better than a new Model B. 

“Better than a new one?” I said. 

“Oh, much better,” he said, attributing the difference to the quality of the original materials that were used and the intricate design compared to the way Steinways were being made today. 

The piano already looked better than the new one I had seen in the showroom, even in its time-weathered state. And could it really be better than the new one I had seen for $42,000 back home?

“But how will it sound,” I finally said out loud.

“Exquisite,” he said. “And if for any reason you don’t like the sound, you don’t have to buy it.”

Would I like them to start rebuilding it for me, he asked. They would just need a deposit to begin the work. 

It would take several months from start to finish and I could stop by to check on the progress anytime I wanted. Then they would need the final payment when the work was complete. 

“How much would it cost?” I asked, preparing for yet another sticker shock. 

“30,000,” he said.

Chapter 13: The Treasure

$30,000. It was everything I had. This is where the question of faith came in. Was I going to believe that God had answered my prayer, step out in faith, and commit to buying this piano, having not even having heard how it would sound when it was done? 

The easy answer was, “Yes.” It was too remarkable that just six months earlier I had thought it would be impossible to get the piano in front of me in the showroom, yet now I had the cash in hand and the very real possibility of getting an even better one. 

Yet it would cost me everything I had. 

I thought of Jesus’ parable about the treasure in a field. “The Kingdom of heaven is like treasure hidden in a field,” Jesus said. “When a man found it, he hid it again, and then in his joy went and sold all he had and bought that field” (Matthew 13:44). 

This verse specifically applied to the kingdom of heaven, but it also applied to my situation. I had sold my home and had the cash, but was this a treasure worth putting everything into? I wasn’t a famous pianist, and I rarely performed in public. I had only started writing a few songs that I only played for myself. I had no way to ever make this money back from playing the piano. I just wanted something that sounded good when I played for myself. 

And for God. He was the primary audience of most of my songs. I played worship music mostly, playing and singing in my quiet times with Him. As I thought about this, I felt I heard God say to me, “Eric, people spend millions playing music that profanes My name. I’ve called you to glorify it. Why would I not want you to have an instrument like this to sing to Me?” 

I pictured God having to listen to all kinds of music, at full volume, from all around the world, music that mocked and derided His name, expressing every kind of vulgar thought or deed. And I thought how pleasing it would be for Him to hear a single melody from one piano and one heart praising His name, giving thanks to Him, putting their full faith and trust in Him, no matter how imperfectly. 

I thought of King David, before he was a king, when King Saul was looking for someone to play the harp for him in the palace when he was feeling tormented. Saul’s servants told him about David, a shepherd boy who played skillfully on the hills of Bethlehem, so Saul brought David to live in the palace and play for him. The Bible says when David played, relief came to the king (see 1 Samuel 16:14-23). 

Perhaps God felt the same when I played, that it brought relief to Him. It certainly brought relief to me. As I pictured David leaving his small-town shepherd fields and moving into the palace, I imagined he probably got a new harp, too. 

“Where do you think David got the harp he played for the king?” I felt God asking me. 

“From the king, I would imagine,” I said. 

“And where are you getting your new piano?” I felt God asking me again. 

“From Mr. Kahn,” I said, laughing as I said it. 

Then I stopped laughing. What does ‘Kahn’ mean, I wondered? 

I asked Mr. Kahn the next time I saw him in the store. 

“Kahn?” he said. “It means king.”

Chapter 14: Standing Alone

By faith, I felt this piano was God’s answer to my prayers, the pearl of great price, the treasure hidden in a field. But I also felt it was too big of a decision to make on my own. 

I decided to ask Lana and the leaders of the church who had just hired me what they thought. 

“$30,000?” Lana said. “I can think of a lot of things we need that add up to $30,000.” 

While Lana was generally supportive of my steps of faith, this one was extreme, even for her. “Mr. Kahn?” she said. Sounds like “Mr. Con” to me. “How can you know if you can trust him?” 

She had a point. I had no way of knowing if I could trust him or not. 

The leaders at my church were just as hesitant. They had hired me as a step of faith for themselves, only able to pay me a part-time salary and relying on me to make up the difference. This could put my position with them in jeopardy and seemed like a reckless and frivolous move. 

They had a point, too. 

Yet I couldn’t deny that a major miracle had just taken place. That which had previously seemed impossible was now entirely possible. In my previous steps of faith I had often been the last one willing to take them, weighing all my options carefully, even when others thought it was quite obvious that God had answered my prayers. 

But in this case, I was the one standing alone. Everyone around me was skeptical, even to the end. 

I had rarely made a decision to do anything when those praying with me about that decision felt otherwise. And I had never made a decision in which Lana didn’t agree with me, or at least agree to trust me with the decision even if she was unsure about it herself. But in this case, every person close to me clearly expressed that they thought I was hearing from myself and not from God. 

When I said I felt I needed to go forward anyway, the leaders at my church even said, “It sounds like you think you hear better from God than we do and you think you know how to handle money better than we do.” 

I thought carefully about what they said, yet somehow I also felt like Joseph in Joseph and the Amazing Technicolor Dream Coat when he says to the butler and the baker after interpreting their dreams, “Don’t rely on all I said I saw. It’s just that I have not been wrong before!” 

I didn’t feel quite that confident, but I felt pretty strongly that this really was God, and that the finances that had come through were already part of the miracle. 

I couldn’t rely on the faith of others this time. I was going to have to rely on my own. What did I truly believe? Did I believe God had answered my prayers or not?

I did. And by faith, I put a down payment on the piano, and I asked Mr. Kahn to start rebuilding it.

Chapter 15: For My King

Three months later, as the technicians at Kahn’s were putting the finishing touches on the piano, they showed me a twelve-inch oval decal they were about to affix to the soundboard. 

I had never seen a decal like it because Steinway no longer applies it to their new pianos. But in 1910, they applied this decal to every Steinway grand. The decal says in its center “Steinway & Sons, manufacturer by appointment to…” and then it lists twelve kings of twelve countries at the time, encircled by the crests of each of those kingdoms: “Manufacturers by appointment to His Majesty William II, German Emperor and King of Prussia, His Majesty Nicholas II, Czar of Russia, His Majesty Alfonso XIII, King of Spain, His Majesty Franz Joseph I, Emperor of Austria and King of Hungary.” On went the list through the kings and queens of Sweden, Great Britain, Italy, Saxony, Norway, and Turkey, ending with “And Other Distinguished Royalties.” 

As I looked at that list of those twelve kingdoms and their twelve kings and queens, I couldn’t help but think that this particular piano had been manufactured by appointment to the King over them all, “the King of kings and Lord of lords, Jesus Christ.” 

I thanked Mr. Kahn for rebuilding it for me and told him why it was so significant that God had brought me to him who’s name he told me, unaware of my prayers, meant king. I told him about my conversation with God and how I felt this piano had been given to me by The King, to be played for the King, and to bring joy to The King and all who heard it, including me. 

When the piano was completely finished just a few days later, with a decal in place that I had never seen before in the center of the soundboard, I could say it was truly the most beautiful piano I had ever seen, even more beautiful than the brand new Steinway Model B I had seen in the showroom more than a year earlier.

When I sat down to play it, it sounded, well, to use Mr. Kahn’s own word that he promised from the beginning, it sounded exquisite. 

I’ve played many Steinways over the years since I got my piano more than twenty years ago. The latest I played was a brand new Steinway Model B just last year at Steinway’s downtown showroom in New York City, which incidentally now sells for $120,000. 

Not one has compared to the one God gave me that day. It’s even better than a new one.

And I still love playing it for my King.

Chapter 16: I Love You, Baby!

I was at the copy shop late one night working on the paper for my ministry called The Ranch. I did newsletters and would send them out to those who followed along with the ministry. I was wearing down, feeling all alone at the back of the store and tired from a long day. The store was about to close, and I was discouraged that after all my work, I still wasn’t done.

Then, from behind me, I faintly heard singing: “You’re just too good to be true…”

I turned to look over my shoulder to see who was there. But it was a song on the store’s PA system. It was Frankie Valli and The Four Seasons singing this song, but somehow the words were directed straight at me! “Can’t take my eyes off of you…” I looked again and thought, “God, is that you?!?”

Then, as if in answer to my question, the chorus rang out:

“I LOVE YOU BABY!

And if it’s quite alright I need you baby,

To warm a lonely night,

Don’t ever leave me baby,

Please don’t leave me!”

It was God, and He was singing to me! I laughed as I listened to Him sing the rest of the song to me, not sure if I could believe it was really Him. But then I remembered a verse in the Bible that says, “the Lord your God will rejoice over you with singing” (Zephaniah 3:17). He really was singing over me!

Then He spoke to my heart: “Eric, there’s so much going on in the world that when I see someone following me and doing what I want them to do, it brings a smile to my face. You may feel like what you do doesn’t make any difference, but it does. You may feel all alone, but you’re not. I’m right here with you. I can’t take my eyes off of you. What you’re doing brings me great joy!”

I don’t always choose to do what God wants me to do. But God showed me that night that He rejoices whenever any of us make that choice. My attitude changed for the rest of the night. It put a smile on my face. I got a second wind and thought of the verse, “The joy of the Lord is your strength” (Nehemiah 8:10). When we see God rejoicing, it gives us strength. So knowing that He took joy in what I was doing, it gave me strength to go on.

The Bible also says: “Let us not become weary in doing good, for at the proper time we will reap a harvest if we do not give up” (Galatians 6:9). 

And just maybe we’ll get to hear God sing over, “I love you, baby!”

Chapter 17: Using My Gifts 

I was reading Jesus’s parable of the talents in Matthew chapter 25. I was intrigued that the master in the story had given different amounts of talents, a type of coin in those days, to three different servants to invest for him as they saw fit, with the amounts determined according to their abilities. 

Two of the servants invested their talents and over time doubled the amounts given to them, giving a return back to their master. But one of the servants hid his talent in the ground, later giving it back to his master with no return at all. The master commended the first two and put them in charge of more, saying, “Come and share your master’s happiness.” But the third he rebuked and let him go, resulting in a fate worse than he could have imagined. 

As I read the story, I thought about my own life and how I was using the gifts and talents God had given me. Was I using them well or hiding them in the ground? Sensing this could be important, I decided to ask God.

“Lord,” I wrote in my journal, “am I not using the gifts You’ve given me?” 

A little to my surprise, the answer came back, “No.” Here I thought I was doing pretty good. I was working at my job, attending Bible studies, raising my kids, loving my wife. 

But I sensed there was more, much more, that God wanted me to do for Him. 

“Lord,” I asked, “what do You want me to do?” 

He said, “I told them to make a return on what I gave them.”

So I began to take an inventory of the things God had given me. I listed five things and asked God what to do with them. 

The gift of faith was at the top of my list, faith to believe that God can do anything, absolutely anything. “What do You want me to do with that, Lord?” I asked.

“Return to Me many faithful men and women.” 

Next up was a desire to commune—to communicate—with Him. 

“Bring others into My presence with you.” 

The third was a desire to read God’s Word, to know His will, and to do it. 

“Multiply that among others,” God said. 

The fourth was to communicate truth and difficult concepts in a way that’s clear and useful to listeners. God said to do it, to communicate His truths to others in a way that’s clear and useful to them. 

And last was a passion for the piano. “What am I to do with that?” I asked.

“Play before millions,” He said. Totally shocked by and disbelieving that last response, I asked, “For what purpose?” 

God said, “To bring joy unending.”

I was tracking with God fine up to that last point. But to play the piano before millions? I had hardly ever played—and didn’t want to play—for anyone. I had never written a song, and I truly didn’t think I was very good at playing. I just loved playing the piano, and almost always played it just for myself. 

I quickly stopped writing and shut my journal. Clearly, I was not hearing from God. 

Just one week later, however, God called me to quit my secular job, to go into full-time ministry, and to begin working for Him. It’s been 25 years since that time, and God has helped me to create a ministry in which I’ve been able to reach tens of thousands of people each day with words of encouragement for their faith. I’ve preached hundreds of messages and written more than two dozen books to help others grow in their faith in Christ.

And, most surprisingly of all, I began playing the piano more and more, writing and even recording my own music. I’ve uploaded it to various websites over the years, but I was really surprised to see one website where my music really took off. It was a new startup company at the time, called Pandora, and my sister and I submitted some music to them and were pleased to learn that it was accepted.

 Now, 25 years later, and just a few months ago, I was looking at the total number of streams of my piano music on Pandora. I had not just surpassed 1 million streams, but 2 million. 

Or, as God had said: “Millions.”

“For what purpose?” I had asked Him.

His response: “To bring joy unending.” 

I am… blown away.

Chapter 18: God’s Call

Two weeks before God called me into full-time ministry, I was telling a friend I wished I had more free time to do the things I loved most—reading the Bible, praying, and playing the piano. It had been five years since I had taken my three-month sabbatical to do those things so intensely, and I was wishing I could do them more. 

As my friend prayed with me about it, she said, “I believe God’s going to free up your time, really soon, so you can do those things.” I appreciated the thought but didn’t think much more about it. 

A week later, though, God challenged me through the parable of the talents to consider whether I was using my gifts for Him or keeping them hidden. One week after that, God called me into full-time ministry in a dramatic and unmistakable way.

It started on the morning of Valentine’s Day, February 14th, 1995. I was taking a bath, reading my Bible, and writing in my journal before flying out later that day from Illinois to Texas to pray for a woman who had cancer. A mutual friend of ours had called me a few days earlier to ask if I would come and pray for this woman as the doctors didn’t expect her to live much longer. 

When my friend asked me to come, I said I was willing, but asked why he didn’t just pray for her since he was there. I didn’t feel I had any particular gift for healing, but he thought otherwise. Several years earlier I had prayed for him and his wife to have a child and they did one year later, even though the doctors had declared his wife infertile. My friend said, “I think if you came, something would happen.” 

He said he’d pay for my flight if I would come, but I would have to come soon as she didn’t have much time left. I didn’t know what might happen, but I was willing to pray with anyone, anytime, so I said I would come—and this was the day that I was heading down there to pray.

 During my quiet time that morning in the tub, I wrote in my journal, “Lord, I dedicate today to you. Use me however you can.”

Then I added, “Lord, I would like to see her healed. For Your sake, for her sake, for my sake. Lord, what are you going to do?”

“Heal her,” He said.

“How and when?” I asked.

“Through you, tonight.”

More than a little bit shocked, I thought, “How can I believe this? Is there a verse to confirm it?”

I then wrote in my journal two verses from the Bible that came to mind: Genesis 2:3 and Exodus 12:2. Just those names and numbers, just like that. I didn’t know what they said, though, so I looked them up. Genesis 2:3 was about the Sabbath day and Exodus 12:2 was about Passover day—neither of which seemed relevant to my situation. 

Puzzled, I began to write, “I need more insight…,” but before I could finish asking the question, God spoke, as clear as crystal.

“Like the Passover and the Sabbath were markers of special days, so today marks a special day for you.”

“What will it mark?” I asked. 

“The beginning of your ministry,” He said.

I closed my journal, broke down, and cried.

Chapter 19: When Following Means Leaving

I cried when God said this day would mark the beginning of my ministry because I had been wanting to do ministry in a fuller way for years. I just didn’t know how or when. I knew that I knew that God was speaking to me, saying today would mark the beginning of my ministry, but, still, I wondered how I could possibly believe it. 

How could I believe He was going to heal this woman? How could I believe this was the day that would shift the direction of the rest of my life? 

I also wondered what kind of healing it might be and if it would be clear that this woman was healed. 

“Will I know that she’s healed?” I asked.

“You’ll know it,” He said.

“Will she know that she’s healed?” I asked.

“She’ll know it,” He said.

“Okay, God,” I said. “I’m going to trust You.” 

On the plane to Texas, God continued speaking to me. 

“That project you’re working on, I want you to give it to Doug,” God said. 

I had been working on a project for my company for almost two years. We were two months away from launching it publicly, and I was more than a little bit shocked that He wanted me to give it away. 

“What would I work on?” I said.

“You don’t need that job,” He said. “I want you to quit—tomorrow.”

Wow! That escalated fast! Maybe God really was serious about this being the beginning of my ministry! 

As excited as I was by the thought, I was also petrified. This was no small decision. I was married, had three kids at home, and about $1,500 in the bank. How could I just quit—tomorrow. At least how could I quit without affecting a whole lot of other things and people. 

I decided to call Lana from the phone on the plane to keep her updated on what I felt God was saying. I had already talked to her that morning in person when I was crying in the tub, telling her what God had been saying to me.

Lana had been completely “with me” at that time, realizing that something significant was taking place. She was trusting God with all of this as much as I was. But quitting my job the next day? Would she still be “with me” on that?

I pulled out the phone that was embedded in the seat in front of me on the plane and called her. I told her what I felt God was asking me to do, to give my project to Doug and to quit my job the next day. Her response stunned me: “Don’t worry about me and don’t worry about the money,” she said.

For my wife to say not to worry about her and not to worry about the money, this had to be God speaking to me! This was completely out of character for Lana, or for any spouse for that matter.

I told her thanks for her support, and that I would have to think about it more later, as my plane was about to land. My friend was picking me up at the airport and we were going out for dinner before heading out to his friend’s house to pray for this woman’s healing. 

First things first. Praying for this woman was the most important thing I needed to focus on next.

Chapter 20: One Thing

My friend picked me up at the airport and we went out to eat at a local Tex-Mex restaurant. Over chips and salsa, he updated me on his renewed marriage and his new son, answers to prayer which encouraged me that God still does miracles. 

As dinner progressed, I shared with him what I felt God was saying to me that day about his friend’s healing, about beginning my new ministry, and quitting my job the next day. He was not only a close friend and fellow believer, but also a co-worker at the same company, so he understood the impact all these things would have on my life if this really was God speaking to me. 

We were about to find out.

We met his friend and her husband at their home, spending the first hour catching up on her story. She had battled cancer for over twenty years. It had affected everything in her life, from curtailing school activities to framing the way she viewed God. 

We shared stories with each other of how God had worked in our lives, as well as ways we had seen and heard how He worked in other people’s lives, too, both people living today and people throughout the centuries. We had no doubt that God could do these things, but would He do them in this situation? And if so, why hadn’t He done them for her yet? 

The lumps of cancer had spread throughout her body, some of which were pressing against her vocal cords, making her voice quiet and strained. We talked about a man in the city where she lived that we both knew who had been suddenly and miraculously healed of a condition that affected his vocal cords. I asked if he might pray for her. She said he had been there a few months earlier. 

I mentioned a famous healing evangelist who also lived in her city. I knew of his story from visiting his church, as his wife had been healed of cancer many years ago and was still flourishing. 

“Yes,” she said, “he and wife were here praying for me two weeks ago.” 

Wow. Okay. I mentioned one other mutual friend who lived there in town who had seen many miraculous answers to his prayers. 

“Yes,” she said, “he was here last week praying for me.”

What was I doing there, I wondered!

“You must really be at the end of your rope if God sent me to you!” I said. I felt I had nothing to offer that hadn’t already been done. But there I was, believing that somehow God was going to heal her, through me, that night. 

Hesitatingly, both for her sake and mine, I shared with her all that God had shared with me earlier in the day—that He wanted to heal her, that she would know she was healed and I would know she was healed, that this day was going to mark the beginning of my ministry, and that He wanted me to quit my job after nine years on the following day. 

In the natural, it seemed totally impossible, not only because so many others had prayed for her healing and nothing seemed to have changed, but also because the prestigious hospital where she was being treated had just told her that one of her blood cell counts was the highest they had ever seen. The cancer was running rampant through her body. 

I told her I didn’t know what to make of all that I felt God was telling me, but I still wanted to share with her what I knew, then pray. 

Part of me doubted that anything would happen, but another part of me expected those lumps of cancer to start flying out of her body. I asked if she had anything we could use for communion, as I felt it would be fitting to take it together as we prayed. Her husband brought some juice and bread from the kitchen, and after several hours of talking, we began to pray. 

Before we did, though, I asked her a question I often ask before praying with people, even if it seems totally obvious what they want me to pray for. Their answers sometimes surprise me, just as it did that night. 

“What would you want me to pray for you if you could ask God for anything?” I said.

 “I want to hear God’s voice,” she said. “I want to hear Him speaking to me. I’ve been a Christian for over twenty years and have read the Bible multiple times, but I’ve never heard God speak to me in a personal way. What good would it be if I was healed of cancer but still couldn’t hear His voice?” 

Her question broke my heart. Of course I would pray for that. And I did. 

I also prayed for her physical healing, but realized that this was secondary to what she really wanted—a closer, deeper, intimate, and personal relationship with God. 

It was midnight when we finished praying, and God said I could go home. 

“But Lord, I protested, she still has the lumps of cancer.” I could still see them protruding from under her skin. I could still hear them in the rasping of her voice. But there was nothing more I could think of to do or to say or to pray.

My friend and I said our goodbyes. He dropped me off at my aunt and uncle’s house where I would be spending the night. And that’s when my real battle of faith began.

As I lay my head on my pillow, I asked God if this really was the beginning of my ministry and if He really did want me to quit my job the next day. 

“God,” I said, “how can I quit my job tomorrow? If I had seen those lumps of cancer fly off her body, I’d quit for sure.” 

God said, “Then you’d be walking by sight and not by faith, and I’ve called you to walk by faith.”

Unable to solve the puzzle that was perplexing my mind, I fell asleep.

Chapter 21: God’s Timing 

I woke up the next morning and went into my office building in Texas. Although I was living and working remotely in Illinois, the main office for the department in which I worked was there in Texas, and I still had an office there, too. 

It was a miserable day, however, walking around the building, trying to get work done while wrestling with my thoughts and my faith. For all the joy of talking and praying with this woman the night before, it was now becoming overshadowed by the decision I felt God was calling me to make about my job. I had no idea what I would do next if I did quit. I only sensed that quitting was the next step God wanted me to take. 

Would I walk by sight or walk by faith? When the end of the workday came, I still felt no closer to a decision. I just couldn’t do it. I couldn’t quit.

I spent that night at another friend’s house, a friend whom God has used to speak into my life like no other. When I told him about my dilemma, he listened, prayed, and shared some verses of Scripture with me about God’s healing power and the power of prayer (Luke 9:11 and Luke 11:9). I went to bed still puzzled, but more confident that God could do all I had asked Him to do and all He was wanting me to do. The next morning, in my quiet time while taking another bath, I confessed my fears to God. 

“I’m afraid,” I said. 

“I know,” He replied. Then He comforted me with words from Jeremiah 17:7, “But blessed is the man who trusts in the Lord, whose confidence is in Him.” 

I kept reading on from there in that passage from Jeremiah 17, reading about the blessings that follow obedience (Jeremiah 17:24-26), and the curses that follow disobedience, such as this: “But if you do not obey Me… then I will kindle an unquenchable fire in the gates of Jerusalem that will consume her fortresses” (Jeremiah 17:27). 

It was a strong warning about disobedience, and as I read it, God brought to mind the time when I was trying to decide which day I should start my three-month sabbatical a few years earlier. There was that date I felt God was telling me to start, yet the date that made more logical sense to me was three days later after a holiday weekend. 

God then reminded me how that decision had worked out: that because I acted in faith on what He said I should do, and started my sabbatical on the day I felt He wanted me to start, I was able to be with my mom for the last three days of her life. Had I waited until the date I thought was more logical, I would have had an extra $1,000. There was no comparison between the two. God’s ways are always better than mine.

Thinking about my current situation, that God had called me to quit “tomorrow” and here it was already the day after that, I sensed I knew what God wanted me to do. I just wasn’t sure I could do it. I was already a day late in being obedient, though, and I knew I couldn’t wait any longer. I had been praying for years that God would increase my faith and to help me step out in faith whenever and however He wanted me to do it, and today I was facing one of those days. 

By faith, I knew He wanted me to quit my job, and it couldn’t wait even one more day. I finished getting ready for work, my last day on my job.

Chapter 22: Elevator Conversation 

I went to my office that morning with only one goal in mind: to turn in my badge and my letter of resignation. Because I worked in the computer department, I wasn’t able to give two weeks’ notice, or any notice for that matter. We had access to too much sensitive data to allow us to linger any length of time if they knew we were leaving. So the protocol was to turn in your badge, pack your things into a box, and be escorted by security on your way out of the building. 

I knew my time would be limited once I told anyone I was quitting, so I quickly said some goodbyes to a few of my co-workers then turned in my badge. 

As I walked towards the elevator lobby on the fourth floor where my office was located, with my box in my hands and a security guard at my side, one of my co-workers followed me.

“Why are you quitting today?” he asked. 

I had decided I wasn’t going to make this an evangelistic departure, talking about God, and all that He was doing in my life. I was just trying to get through it as best I could, with a mixture of fear and faith both competing for my attention inside of me. 

I tried to brush off his question with a generic answer about it being a good time to go given all the changes going on in the company. He didn’t buy it.

“But why today?” he asked. “Why now?”

He was an Asian man from our Artificial Intelligence group, genuinely kind, but from what I knew of our previous conversations, he was a devout atheist. 

I didn’t want to answer him, but his voice was somehow pleading for the truth. So I told him.

 “To be honest,” I said, “God told me to quit yesterday, but I couldn’t do it. So I’m quitting today.”

He burst into tears, saying, “If God told you to do it, you’ve gotta do it!”

He went on to tell me that he had recently become a Christian. He was dating a woman who went to a church in town and had unfortunately gotten her pregnant. He started going to church with her, put his faith in Christ, and told me that when their baby would be born in a few months’ time, he was going to be baptized, too.

I couldn’t believe it! But I couldn’t believe what he told me next even more. He asked what I was going to do, and I told him I had no idea. 

He said, “Eric, you’ve got to get online and start telling people about Jesus.” What he actually said was, “You’ve got to get on CompuServe or AOL,” that shows how long ago this was, as the internet as we know it today was still in its infancy. He continued, “You’ve got to get online and start telling people about Jesus. There are people like me online all hours of the day and night looking for answers, and you’ve got them!” He even offered to pay for my CompuServe or AOL account. 

The door of the elevator opened, I said goodbye, and I walked into it with my box and my escort. I rode down to the lobby and walked out of the building, shaking my head as I walked, wondering if that was really God speaking to me through someone whom I thought, just minutes earlier, had been one of my atheistic friends.

Apparently, it was God speaking, for I’ve been doing just what he said, sharing with people about Jesus online ever since that day. That was 25 years ago.

Chapter 23: A Heart Healed

I flew home to Illinois the next day after I quit my job, unsure what I was supposed to do next. I simply felt good about having been obedient to do what God had wanted me to do. 

“Obedience brings blessing,” He said in His Word. “I will bless you, and others, too, through your obedience.” And He has.

The question that was continually on my mind, though, was, “What about the woman I prayed for to be healed?” It had been three days since we prayed, and I wanted to call and talk to her. 

I asked God if I could, and He said, “Yes.” 

I asked if there was anything I should tell her. He said to tell her that He loved her and that He came on Valentine’s Day to heal her heart. 

I picked up the phone and called. 

“How are you doing?” I asked. 

“Eric,” she said, “I’m sicker than I’ve ever been in my life.” Her voice was raspy and barely above a whisper. My heart sank. 

She continued, “But, Eric, for the first time in my life, I believe I’ve been healed! I’ve been afraid to tell any of my friends because I’ve been so sick. But you wouldn’t believe what happened last night.”

She went on to tell me that she had gone to a renewal conference and the speaker was talking about the love of God—how wide and long and high and deep it was. 

“Eric,” she said, “for the first time in my life I heard God speak to me, personally, telling me how much He loved me.” 

She cried as she talked. 

I said, “That’s exactly what we prayed for, that you would hear God speak to you personally!” I told her what I felt God had told me to tell her just before I called, that He loved her and that He came to heal her heart on Valentine’s Day. 

I told her about quitting my job, that God wanted me to walk by faith, not sight, and that I believed she would be healed. “And I believe God has healed you,” I said. “He’s healed your heart—and there’s no greater healing than that.” 

“I believe that, too, Eric,” she said. 

I said, “And that’s exactly what God said would happen, that you would know that you had been healed, and I would know that you had been healed. And we both know it!”

I told her I would keep praying for her physical healing, but that the greater healing had already taken place—and in the way that was exactly what she had asked for—to hear God’s voice speaking to her personally.” 

I hung up the phone, my heart filled with joy—the joy that comes from answered prayer. 

Six weeks later, she passed from this life to the next. Now she sees God face to face and hears His voice, every day. And she is… completely healed.

Chapter 24: Called to Israel 

Six days after I quit my job, I found myself on a plane to Israel. I didn’t know why. I had never wanted to go to Israel, had never considered going to Israel, and had never even thought about going to Israel. But for some reason, when I quit my job, I began sensing God wanted me to go. 

I saw “Israel” everywhere I looked in the Bible, of course, but for some reason the word was now leaping off the pages. 

Three days after I quit my job, I was lying down on a couch at a guest house in northern Illinois where my family and I were staying on a ski trip with another family from church. We had planned and paid for the trip before I quit, or I probably wouldn’t have gone. I stayed back at the guest house that afternoon while everyone else went out skiing, partly because I wanted some time alone to process all that had taken place over the previous few days, and partly because I didn’t want to get hurt skiing, as I suddenly had no health insurance! 

As I was lying there on the couch writing in my journal and reading my Bible, I sensed God again calling me to go to Israel. I asked Him what to do about it. 

“Go there,” He said. “See it. Live it. Love it. Experience it. There you will find My presence.” 

“What should I see?” I asked. 

“Where My Son was crucified and where My temple will be rebuilt,” He said. 

That was specific! 

“Is this really you?” I asked. “I just don’t know if you’re talking to me. At all. Is this all real?” 

I asked God to set my eyes on a verse in the Bible. I opened it up and sensed God saying to look at the third line down. It seemed crazy, but God had been speaking so specifically, so I looked. It said, “You know my thoughts and when I’m lying down.” 

There I was, lying down on the couch. It continued, talking about how God knows every detail about us, our anxious thoughts, all our ways, and how He is with us always, wherever we go. 

Somehow, in that moment, I knew that God really was right there with me, that He really was speaking to me, and that He really did want me to go to Israel. But how would I get there? I didn’t even know what city I could fly in to or how much it would cost. I only had $1,500 in the bank, no job, and no idea what I was going to do next. Except this: “Go to Israel.”

I decided to call a travel agent right then to see how I would get to Israel, in case I did decide to go. There was no Google or Travelocity at the time where I could look it up. 

I asked the woman who answered my call how I would get to Israel from Chicago. She said I could fly from O’Hare Airport in Chicago to Ben Gurion Airport in Tel Aviv. 

“How much would it cost?” I asked.

Remember, I only had $1,500 in the bank. 

“$1,498,” she said. Two thoughts went through my head at the same time. One was mine and the other was God’s.

Mine said, “I don’t have enough!” 

God’s said: “You have just enough!”

Now the question came of faith. Would I believe this really was God speaking to me and go? Or would I stay home in fear and well-reasoned doubt? 

It was too big of a decision to make on my own, so I reached out for help.

Chapter 25: Ask for Muhammad

I talked to Lana about my thoughts of going to Israel, and then to my pastor and my men’s group at church. Thinking they would all think I was crazy, I decided to let them make the decision whether I should go or not. I felt I was too much in the midst of the whirlwind to trust myself. 

My pastor said, “Wow, you’re trusting us with this decision? Maybe I’d better stay home from the basketball game tonight and really pray about this!” He went to the game, anyway, but I appreciated the sentiment, and he really did spend extra time praying about it.

To my complete surprise, he and all the other men in my group thought this really could be God speaking to me. They encouraged me to follow what I felt God was calling me to do. So with their affirmation, I decided to go. But God had one more thing He wanted to say to me. 

During my quiet time in the church one morning, he said, “Open your Bible.” 

I did. 

I began reading the words in front of me from Ezekiel chapter 8, verses l-3. They leapt off the page. 

Ezekiel described seeing a vision of what looked like a man, glowing like fire, who “…stretched out what looked like a hand and took me by the hair of my head. The Spirit lifted me up between heaven and earth and in visions of God, he took me to Jerusalem, to the entrance of the North Gate of the inner court… and there before me was the glory of the God of Israel.”

I said to God, “Wow, Lord, it was like Ezekiel was flying through the sky, between heaven and earth, just like I’ll be doing, but in a plane. And You took him to the North Gate of the inner court of the temple and revealed Yourself to him there. Okay, to the North Gate of the Temple Mount—that’s where I’ll go.”

I told Lana if anyone is looking for me, I’d be at the North Gate.

With my marching orders in place, I used the last of my money and bought a plane ticket to Tel Aviv. I didn’t know where I would stay, how long I would stay, or what I would do there, except to go to the two places I felt God wanted me to go: the place where Jesus died and the North Gate of the Temple Mount.

On the morning of my flight, a man in my men’s group asked if I had a place to stay when I got there. I didn’t. 

He said the owner of the grocery store in our small town had relatives in Israel. Maybe I could stay with them. We drove to the store and told him where I was going. He was delighted. He called his brother, talked for a few minutes in Arabic, then told me it was all set. They would send someone to pick me up at the airport in Tel Aviv. 

I thanked him and asked if I could get his brother’s name and address. I had traveled enough to know that international connections weren’t always smooth, and it’s good to have a backup plan. 

He said they didn’t have addresses on the West Bank where they lived. This was a time during a lot of uprising and resettlement, so they didn’t have an address.

“Just ask for Muhammad in the city of El Jib,” he said.

Ask for Muhammad. In El Jib. How many could there be? 

With that, I stopped by my house to pick up my bags, drove to the airport, and boarded my plane to Israel.

Chapter 26: A Man of Peace 

Just before I left for Israel, I asked God about staying with this family there. 

“God, is this really what You want me to do? Or should I book a hotel?”

I didn’t have any extra money for a hotel, but I was nervous.

I felt like opening my Bible. The first words I read were from Luke 10:5-7, 9: “When you enter a house, say, ‘Peace to this house.’ If a man of peace is there, your peace will rest on him; if not, it will return to you. Stay in that house, eating and drinking whatever they give you, for the worker deserves his wages. Do not move around from house to house… Heal the sick who are there and tell them, ‘The Kingdom of God is near you.’”

“Okay, Lord,” I said. “I’ll do it.” 

My fears about the trip were not just about where I would stay, but about what would happen when God actually showed up and revealed Himself to me. Sometimes in the Bible, He came in a quiet whisper (see 1 Kings 19:11-13), but other times, it was with fire and smoke and thunderous explosions. Tensions were high once again in Israel, as they often are, as peace talks were on the brink of falling apart. A suicide bombing had occurred there the week before. And now, I wasn’t going to be staying in the tourist areas that were well-protected, but in the West Bank with a Muslim family where violence was constant. 

My fears were heightened when I changed planes in Frankfort, Germany. It was the middle of the night, and I walked to the farthest end of the airport where my plane to Israel was waiting. A dozen Israeli armed guards were standing in a circle around it, and as I walked down the corner towards it, another armed guard was stationed directly in front of me behind a bulletproof glass. There was only one small hole in the glass, behind which was the front tip of his automated rifle pointing straight at me. 

All alone in the middle of the night, I walked down the narrow corridor towards the guard. A song from VeggieTales wafted through my mind. I started singing along with it under my breath: “God is bigger than the boogie man. He’s bigger than Godzilla or the monsters on TV…” 

Between that song and a verse from Luke 10:19, which says, “I have given you authority… to overcome all the power of the enemy [Satan]; nothing will harm you,” I was finally able to board my plane and make it to Tel Aviv.

Instead of Muhammed meeting me at the airport, it was a cousin of the grocery store owner’s. He said he would take me to their house, as the brother feared he might not make it through all the security checkpoints to and from the airport. Fear rose once again within me but I didn’t really have any other option except to possibly turn around and go home. I would have liked to have run away, like Jonah running away from his calling. But as much as I wanted to run away, I had come to far. I knew that running towards God meant going with this man. So I went.

When we arrived at the house where I was to stay, an elderly man was standing outside waiting to greet us, dressed in full Muslim garb from head to toe. He was, I was told, the father of the two brothers and the uncle of my driver… and also the owner of this house. 

I remembered God’s words to me for when I arrived. The Bible had said, “Say, ‘Peace to this house…’” I also knew from my previous trips to other Arabic countries that the customary Arabic greeting is, “As-Salaam-Alaikum,” meaning, “Peace be with you.” And the customary response is, “Wa-Alaikum-Salaam,” meaning, “And peace be with you.” 

So I said to the man, almost as much a question as a greeting, “As-Salaam-Alaikum?” 

He looked at me and replied, “Wa-Alaikum-Salaam.” 

I breathed a thankful sigh of relief and told myself, “I’m staying right here. I’m not moving from house to house. I’ll eat whatever they put before me, I’ll pray for the sick, and I’ll proclaim the kingdom of God is near.”

I had found a man of peace.

Chapter 27: Wait for the Lord 

I wondered if I was going crazy—quitting my job, going to Israel less than a week later, and spending the last of our savings to do it. But Lana encouraged me with a letter she wrote that I found tucked in my suitcase when I arrived in Israel.

“You’re the sanest man I know,” she said.

“Oh, God!” I thought. “Thank you for her strong support!” Her letter, plus my gracious Muslim hosts, helped to ease the tension I felt. In fact, my hosts treated me like a king, giving up their master bedroom on the second floor of their cinder-block house, while they and their two other adults and thirteen children and grandchildren stayed in the other two bedrooms. They fed me royally, and I ate everything put before me, never once feeling sick from some of the most unusual foods that I had ever eaten. Sometimes when I travel, I get sick no matter what food I eat. But not this time. God had kept His promise from His word on that, too, to eat “whatever they put before me.”

Muhammad’s wife cared for me especially, worrying for me when I took the bus into the city each day to see the sites, as I was taking a local bus filled predominantly with West Bank Muslims, and having to pass through several security checkpoints where guards boarded the bus each time to check our papers and my passport. I definitely stood out from the crowd.

I headed for the Temple Mount the first day, as it was one of the two places I felt God wanted me to go, but I was blocked from entering at every gate I tried. Only Muslims were allowed to go in, I was told, as entry was controlled by Muslims because it’s now a Muslim holy site. The gold-topped Dome of the Rock is built over “the rock” where Abraham was going to sacrifice Isaac, but God gave him a ram to sacrifice at the last moment instead. The site was also the same site David chose for Solomon to build the Temple, which Solomon did, and which Jesus visited even when He was a young boy. 

But because the site was now controlled by Muslims, who also trace their lineage back to Abraham, and because this was the final week of Ramadan, a Muslim holy month, tensions were extra high and non-Muslims were restricted from entering the area. 

I tried for two days to enter through various gates, as there are twelve all around the mount, but was never allowed. So I visited other sites like the Mount of Olives, the Garden of Gethsemane, and the Pools of Bethesda. 

On the third day, I decided to change course. The cousin who had picked me up at the airport now drove me into the city and took me directly to the second of the two spots where I felt God wanted me to go, the place where Jesus died. That place has been marked since the 4th century by a church called the Church of the Holy Sepulcher. 

As I entered the church, I ascended the narrow stairs on the right to an upper tier where a life-size, golden cross marks the spot that has been revered for twenty centuries as the place where Jesus died. Although I was surrounded by noisy tourists and somewhat gaudy decorations adorning that small room, I was nevertheless overcome with emotion by what happened there all those years ago. I fell to my knees, less by choice than by sheer emotion, and bent down to the floor in tears. 

Jesus had died for me there, paying the price for the sins I had committed. He was innocent Himself, but He loved me so much that He stepped in to take the penalty in my place. I don’t know how long I stayed there in that position on the floor crying, but when I finally stood back up, I told my Muslim host why I was so overcome, that Jesus had died for me there, doing what no other man could have ever done, He paid the price for my sins so I could be free. 

I had finally seen at least one of the two sites God had wanted me to see, and it was so powerful. That night I laid in bed wondering if or how I would ever see the other one.

I read this verse that night in my Bible, from Psalm 27 in the Amplified Version, which talks about seeking God’s face in His temple. It says:

“Wait and hope for and expect the Lord; be brave and of good courage and let your heart be  and enduring. Yes, wait for and hope for and expect the Lord.” 

So I did.

Chapter 28: The Dome of the Rock

 On my fifth day in the city, I ran into a shopkeeper who told me how I could get onto the Temple Court! If I went to a particular gate before 9 a.m., I could show my passport to the guard there, and he could let me in. It was critical I get there by 9, he said, as they blocked access after that point. 

It was approaching 9 when he told me, so I took off running through the streets of old Jerusalem in the direction he had said. I reached the gate with only a few minutes to spare, showed the guard my passport, and was finally permitted in just before they closed the gate behind me. 

Wow! The sun was so bright that morning, and the wide open space of the Temple Mount was so wide—nearly one square mile of land—and perhaps the most valuable piece of property in the entire world. It’s considered one of the most holy sites in the world to Jews, Christians and Muslims. 

But to me on that day, it was invaluable because it was the place where God had said He would reveal Himself to me—and I was finally there. Where was I to go, now that I was there, and how would He reveal Himself to me? I began looking around, starting at the Al-Aqsa Mosque at the far end and working my way back towards the middle where the brilliant, golden Dome of the Rock was shining. But when I got to the dome and tried to enter it, I was told I had to leave my camera, shoes, and backpack outside. I didn’t want to leave them unattended, so I found a tourist standing by a pile of similar items, and I asked her if I could leave my things with her. She said she’d be glad to watch them, as she was watching those things for the others in her tour group, so I left them there and entered the dome. 

I walked in, unable to believe I was actually there on the Temple Mount. The place where I was now standing was where Solomon built his famous Temple, where the Lord dwelt among His people in the Holy of Holies, and where Abraham’s faith was tested—and proven true. The “Rock” inside the dome was massive, with the exposed portion being about 40 feet in diameter. It was the top of this hill called Mount Moriah back in the days of Abraham. 

I walked around to the left of the rock, trying to try to take it all in. A man was standing on the short base of one of the eight pillars surrounding the rock to get a better look, which I thought was a good idea. When he stepped down, I stood where he had been standing to see the rock from a little higher up. Like many things in Israel, it’s not the rocks or the stones themselves that are impressive, but what took place at them so many years ago.

 Satisfied that I had taken it all in, I exited the dome and returned to the pile of valuables and retrieved my things. The woman who was watching them for me started asking me questions—where I was from, what I was doing there, what church I attended back home. She seemed very interested, but I really didn’t want to chit-chat! I was in kind of a hurry, still waiting for God to show up and reveal Himself to me before I had to leave the Temple Mount! 

But she kept asking questions. I decided to tell her a quick version of my story, how I had quit my job after praying for a woman to be healed, how I had come to Israel at God’s request, and how I had been trying unsuccessfully until that day to get onto the Temple Mount. 

She said her husband would be fascinated by my story. “He’s a pastor,” she said, “and he’s still inside the dome. He’ll be out in just a few minutes, if you could wait to tell him your story, too.”

 Not wanting to be impolite, but also not knowing where God wanted me to go next, I told her I’d stay and talk to her husband. I was more than a little impatient, though, as I was waiting for God to show up! 

I had no idea He was going to show up through this couple from America.

Chapter 29: The North Gate

Before I share what happened next, I have to back up a day, to the day before I finally made it to the Temple Mount. I had stumbled upon a little sign pointing to the “Gihon Spring.” I knew from my Bible reading that this was a spring of water that King David talked about back in his day that provided water for all of Jerusalem. I followed the arrow down a very small path on an unmarked hill to a small trickle of water emerging from a cave. 

No one else was there on the hill with me except a few local kids playing near the spring. I sat down on the side of the path and began reading more about this spring and about King David’s life. One thing that struck me was that David had been anointed with oil for the work ahead of him by God’s prophet, Samuel. I thought it would be great if God could send someone to anoint me with oil for the work ahead of me, too. But where would I find someone to anoint me with oil? I didn’t know anyone in all of Israel, let alone anyone there who could or would anoint me with oil. 

But just one day later, when this woman talking to me on the Temple Mount said that her husband was a pastor, my heart leapt a little. Maybe he could or would anoint me with oil! But more likely he’d probably just think I was crazy. 

When he came out of the dome, my heart leapt a little more. It was actually the very man I had seen inside the Dome of the Rock, standing on the base of the pillar to get a better look. It was the same man who stepped down and I stepped up to take his place. 

My heart leapt even more when, after I told him the story I had told his wife about why I was there and how it all started when I prayed for a women to be healed, he asked me, “When you pray for people, do you ever anoint them with oil?”

I said I did, and he said he did, too! I couldn’t believe it! I hadn’t told him anything about wanting to be anointed with oil myself for the task ahead of me. He’s the one who brought it up! Had God really provided someone to anoint me with oil? 

I asked him if he happened to have any oil with him, and if he did, would be willing to anoint me with oil for the ministry ahead of me, too. 

He said he didn’t have any oil, but that he’d be glad to do it. “How about walking with us as we continue on our tour, and when we get our next break, we can get some oil and pray for you?”

I agreed, and as his tour regrouped, I walked with them as they began to walk past an ancient archway just to the right of where we were standing. I wouldn’t have noticed it as anything special, except that as we walked passed, the tour guide casually mentioned that that gate was, in ancient days, the North Gate of the inner court of the temple—the very same gate God had told me to visit when I went to Israel, saying He would reveal Himself to me there!

My heart was no longer just leaping. It was about to burst within me. God was orchestrating each of my steps, as I was taking them.

Chapter 30: Anointed at the Foot of the Cross

As we walked through the streets, I learned we were walking on the Via Dolorosa, “the way of the cross.” It’s the path Jesus took on His way from the Temple where He was sentenced to death to Golgotha, “the place of the skull,” where He was crucified. Our tour group followed the same path and ended up at the same spot as Jesus, now marked by the Church of the Holy Sepulcher. 

The tour group took a break for lunch when we arrived there, so this pastor and his wife and I decided to take that time to pray together. I found a shop outside the church that was selling anointing oil from the Church of the Holy Sepulcher, so I bought a small bottle and brought it inside with me. But where to pray? We walked up the narrow stairs to the golden cross that I had seen before which marked the spot where Jesus was crucified. But the cross was surrounded by tourists. 

About twenty feet away, however, was a small set of stairs with two pieces of construction wood nailed together and laying at an angle across the steps. They formed a cross, looking much more like the type of cross on which Jesus world have been crucified than the golden one that was surrounded by tourists. The pastor and I looked at each other and we both said, “What about here?” 

It was perfect. 

I knelt down at the steps and asked if he could read something from the Bible. He opened to Zechariah 12-14 about the Lord gathering His people together in Jerusalem and making His name known to people from all over the earth. 

I had told the pastor I was a little afraid of what might happen when God did show up, as it was often loud and boisterous with fire and clouds of smoke. So he and I were both amazed that right when he started praying, the tour group next to us started singing a hymn, and down below us, some priests started chanting and carrying smoking incense that wafted up to where we were praying. The sights and the sounds and the noises were already quite chaotic, when right in the middle of our prayer, about thirty feet away from us, a man started whacking on a long wooden board with another wooden mallet with all his might, over and over again: “Bang, bang, bang, bang!” It turns out that every day at l pm, someone whacks this board in honor of a time, centuries ago, when they weren’t allowed to ring church bells anywhere in Jerusalem. So they whacked on a board to call people to worship, and they still do this to this day.

My new pastor friend was anointing me with oil on my forehead, there at the foot of this wooden cross, ordaining me for the work ahead that God had called me to do: to take the gospel to all the nations and bring as many as possible back into the New Jerusalem, God’s heavenly home. I wept in holy tears that fell on the steps in front of me.

My new friend said afterward that when he heard that man whacking on the board with all his might, he said to himself, “That’s God speaking to this boy!”

And I knew it was.

That night, as I lay in my bed thinking about all that had happened that day, I asked God, “Was that that? Was that what I came here for?”

God said, “Yes.”

I said, “What was it?”

God said, “You’re anointed, at the foot of the cross, in the City of David, my beloved city where I will again reign and gather my people and pour out a River of Life.” God said I would have other ordination ceremonies in my life, but this one was from Him.

I couldn’t believe how God had orchestrated the events of that day, of that entire trip, to bring me to those two places He said He wanted me to go beforehand, walking me from the North Gate of the Temple where I met this couple, to the place where Jesus died, following the Via Dolorosa, the way of the cross, to get there.

Chapter 31: Joppa Again

“Can I go home now?” I asked God.

“Whenever you’re ready,” He said.

I decided to stay a few more days to see a few more sites, then ten days after I had boarded the plane to come, I took a taxi to the airport in Tel Aviv to go home.

As we neared the airport, I asked the driver if we could stop by the Mediterranean Sea for a few minutes, as I wanted to touch the water of that famous sea. 

The place where we stopped was the oldest portion of the city, the ancient city of Joppa where Jonah had boarded a ship to run away from God. I thanked God that He had given me the courage to keep running toward Him instead of away, to seek Him with all my heart, and to wait and hope for and expect Him to show up—because He did.The Faith of a Child

I wondered how quitting my job to go into ministry might affect my family, but I never expected it to have such immediate results. 

Five days after I quit, and the day before I left for Israel, I woke up early in the morning to go to our church to pray and play the piano. Just before I left the house, my oldest daughter, Karis, who had turned four the month before, called to me, crying. She wanted to give me a hug and a kiss and tell me she loved me. I told her God would always watch out for her even if I were gone. 

I don’t remember how we got on the topic of heaven, but she asked about it, and I asked if she wanted to go there. She said yes, and I asked if she wanted to believe in Jesus. She said yes. She wondered if God sleeps. I said no, He never slumbers or sleeps, but He watches over His people, and He watches over her, all the time. She wondered if angels sleep. I said I didn’t know. 

I asked if she wanted to follow Jesus, and she did. She asked if we could pray, so I said, “Okay, let’s do the echo prayer.” 

She said after me, “Dear Lord, I love you. I love Jesus. I believe in Jesus. Please take me to heaven. Fill me with Your Holy Spirit. Teach me how to live and follow you. In Jesus’ name we pray. Amen.”

Then she was all smiles, and we woke up Lana to tell her. She was so happy. 

Part of me wondered how a child could believe, but part of me knew that the faith of a child is all it takes for all of us. “Believe on Me and you will be saved,” Jesus said. 

“Is that is?” I asked God. “Is she saved?” 

“Yes, Eric,” He said. “It’s by grace, through faith. I’ve poured out my grace on her so she can pour it out on others. You have asked for four years that I would reveal Myself to your children at a young age.” 

All I could do was to praise God over and over. I had quit my job just five days earlier, and two days before that God told me this was to be the beginning of my ministry. Here I was, just one week later now, praying with my first person to believe in Christ. 

She’s 29 years old now and still following Him, and in ministry herself, pouring out God’s grace on others. I guess it’s no accident that God led us to name her Karis, which means grace in Greek. 

And I guess it was no accident that God had just led me to into full-time ministry, too.

Chapter 33: Not a Soul!

I wish I could tell stories of hundreds of people I’ve prayed with who put their faith in Christ for the very first time like other evangelists that I know. But God seems to use me in a different way, building faith in those who need it, wherever they may be on their faith-journey timeline. 

I usually give an invitation to follow Christ whenever I speak publicly, even though I can only remember one time when someone has stood up or raised a hand or come forward for a first-time decision—and that time I think the woman misunderstood my invitation when I asked people to stand up. She told me afterward she wondered why everyone else hadn’t stood up with her, too! Still, I continue to give an invitation because I want people to know there’s a choice they have to make to follow Christ or not, whether they make it that day or some other day down the road. 

This has become a bit of a running joke between God and me, though. As much as I wish I could preach in front of stadiums full of people and see hundreds or thousands stream forward to put their faith in Christ for the very first time, I’m usually still standing all alone at the front, all by myself, while the music plays until I finally sit down. Why, I wonder, doesn’t God let me see even one person come to Christ at the end of my public talks? I don’t fully know.

An older pastor once asked a discouraged young pastor if he expected someone to accept every time he preached. 

The young man looked down, embarrassed, and said, “No, I guess not.”

The older pastor said, “That’s your problem!”

When I heard that story, I thought it might be my problem, too. After all, Billy Graham tells in his autobiography that he’s never given an invitation without someone coming forward to accept Christ.

So I changed my attitude from then on to always believe that someone would come forward. I’ve taken half a dozen classes on evangelism to improve my invitation. I’ve memorized verses and illustrations to share the good news with people as clearly as possible. Still, to this day, whenever I’ve given a message and at the end, given an invitation, no one stands up or raises their hand or comes forward for a first-time decision for Christ! 

I’ve not saying I’m a failure at preaching, as people frequently tell me how touched they are by God through my messages. I often see many people wiping away tears from their eyes as something I say touches them or stirs their faith inside them in a life-changing way. But as far as seeing someone put their faith in Christ for the very first time after hearing me speak publicly, I’ve struck out every time. This makes me both laugh and cry, because deep in my heart, I want nothing more than to see people find Christ for the first time as I found Him, because He so changed the trajectory of my life, both in this life and in the life to come. I still preach and still give an invitation nearly every time, believing that someone’s going to come forward. And I always have an inner smile for God when they don’t, as if He isn’t allowing this to happen for some reason, maybe to keep me humble or to see if I’ll still be faithful no matter what the response. If those are the reasons, they’re working, on both counts! 

Privately, however, when I talk and pray with people one-on-one, it’s a different story, like when I prayed with my daughter, Karis, to put her faith in Christ when she was young. Another time happened almost by accident, as I was sharing with a reporter about Christ more out of fear than by faith.

Chapter 34: Not A Reporter!

One of those life-changing, one-on-one conversations I’ve had with others took place on a seminary campus, where my goal wasn’t to evangelize at all. 

I had been invited by a friend to go with him to a conference for people struggling with various personal issues. I had dealt with some of these same issues myself and had thankfully been set free, when I put my faith in Christ. I told my friend I would go with him so he wouldn’t have to attend alone. I also thought it would be helpful for me as I wanted to learn whatever I could to prevent being blindsided by any issue that might possibly arise down the road. 

I was actually scheduled to speak at another conference that same week in Washington DC for work, an event where the Vice President of the United States was also going to be speaking. I was honored to be invited, and it was a real dilemma for me to decide whether to go speak in Washington DC or to go to this conference where it was going to be a bit embarrassing to even show up there. But I felt God wanted me to go with my friend, so I cancelled my trip to DC and went to this other conference instead. 

My biggest fear in going with him was that anyone who saw me would know why I was there, as nearly everyone there was struggling or had struggled in these same areas at some point in their lives. But I went, and I was glad I did, as I learned a lot and was invited back to speak at several of their conferences in future years. But for that first time, I had a good deal of fear, especially when, on afternoon, a man approached me to ask what was going on at the conference. 

As I was starting to tell him, I thought to ask him why he was there. “I’m a reporter,” he said. 

“Oh, God,” I thought. “Not a reporter!” My worst fears were coming true. I could imagine my name in the headlines the next day, telling how I had struggled with some of these same issues myself. I decided to go ahead and answer his questions anyway as best I could. If it made me look bad, so be it, as long as it might possibly make Christ look good. I also decided to pair nearly everything I said with a verse from Scripture. So I would say something, then I would quote something from Scripture, then I would say something else, and I would quote something that went with it from Scripture. That way, if the reporter included something I said in his report, there was a 50-50 chance he would also be quoting something from the Bible, too. 

Our conversation went deeper and deeper as we walked and talked all around campus for a good two, then three hours. When we finished talking, I invited him to attend a worship service with me that night at the chapel on campus, which he did. 

I was still nervous about everything I had said to him, and he got more than an earful of Scripture, too. But somehow, it opened his heart to the good news of Christ, and that night, at the worship service, he committed his life to Christ.

He didn’t tell me this right away. He called me several weeks later, though, to share his joy with me. He had found a local church to attend, had started going to it, and eventually quit his secular reporting job and went into full-time ministry at that church. He continued on in ministry until he retired, more than 25 years later. 

He said that he came to that conference as a last ditch effort to find some hope, and he found it—in Christ. As much as I wish I could preach in stadiums and see thousands of people come forward and put their faith in Christ, I trust that God knows what He’s doing. I trust He’s put me right where He wants me, and He’ll keep using me whenever I listen to Him and obey. Even when I’m scared to death to talk to people that He puts on my path. 

It’s true that “to the world you may be just one person. But to one person, you can be the world.” I can only wonder how many thousands of people have been touched by this one man’s ministry over those 25 years, and still. If God wants to keep my ministry low key and under the radar and still allow me to reach thousands for Him in some other way, hallelujah! I’m glad to let him do it.

Chapter 35: Skinny Dipping in the River of Life

Speaking of having a laugh with God, I was at my church in our small town one morning reading my Bible in the sanctuary. I was all alone in the building, and it was raining outside. 

As I read about the River of Life in Ezekiel chapter 47, and how an angel in a vision led Ezekiel into the river, I was intrigued. The angel led Ezekiel into water that was ankle deep, then up to his knees, then up to his waist, and then deep enough in which he could swim. The river flowed east from Jerusalem, then into the Dead Sea where everything it touched sprang back to life. 

I wanted to be in that river! I felt like I barely had my toes in it, and I wanted to be fully engulfed in it! I didn’t want to just dabble in the things of God anymore—I wanted to do everything He possibly had in mind for me. I said to God that morning that I’d like to step deeper into His river. The rain outside suddenly built in intensity, pelting the roof loudly. 

I felt God say, “You want to be in the river? Go outside!”

I thought, “I can’t do that! I’d get soaked.” 

“Exactly!” God said. I wanted to get in the River of Life, but I didn’t want to get wet. And that was the problem! If I wanted to get in the river, I’d have to get wet. It made me think again: Do I really want to get in God’s river or not?

 When I thought about the benefits of how that river brought life to everything it touched, I decided to do it. I was going to step outside and step into the rain. At the same time, I also thought about how I wanted to come back in to the sanctuary for a while afterward and spend some more time with God, so I didn’t want to get too wet if I could help it.

 I thought it would be better if I took off my shirt so it would be dry when I came back in. Easy enough. 

And my shoes. 

And my socks, too, I suppose. 

And really, the church was out on the edge of town with only a cornfield behind it where I had parked my car. It was very early in the morning, and if I were to go outside the back door where my car was parked, I could probably just strip down to my underwear and keep most everything else dry.

That’s what I’ll do, I thought. So I did. 

I opened the door and looked around to make sure no one else was around, then I stepped outside in the rain. I looked up towards the sky and raised my hands to heaven, saying, “Thank you, Jesus, for Your River of Life! I want to be fully immersed in it!”

But it wasn’t exactly a gentle rain. It more like little water pellets hitting my face and body. Yet I felt good and brave for doing something I felt God wanted me to do.

After several minutes of standing there in God’s presence and praising Him for this tangible expression of my faith, I was good.

I turned around and took hold of the door handle to go back inside. It wouldn’t budge! The door had automatically locked behind me—and my keys to the building were in the pocket of my pants… inside. 

I panicked.

The rain was still pelting my whole body. My car was nearby… but my car keys were with my church keys back inside in the pocket of my pants. And my phone. I couldn’t even call anyone for help.

“Oh, God! What am I going to do!?!”

It was about a mile back to my house, which wasn’t too far, but I couldn’t walk all the way back there through the city streets in my underwear! There was one house nearby and a friend lived there. But my friend was the principal at school who had four daughters. I couldn’t stand just at their door, knocking in my underwear, and have one of his girls answer the door! And if I waited till they went to school, my friend would be gone, too, and only his wife would be home. I couldn’t have her answer the door either!

The only thing left I could think to do was to walk around the outside of the church, try all the other doors, and see if any of them just happened to be unlocked. It wasn’t likely, and someone might still see me as I walked around the front, but it was the only option I had left. So I walked around to the side of the building, tried the next door, and to my shock—and with my incredible gratitude—someone had left it unlocked! 

“Oh, God, thank You!!!”

I went back inside, dried off with some paper towels from the bathroom, and put on my dry clothes. 

I went back into the sanctuary and sat down with my Bible and journal and began to laugh out loud with God. 

I wrote: “You knew I’d lock myself out when I decided to go outside, didn’t you?”

Then I wrote down what I felt God was saying. It was a smiley face emoji. 

“I didn’t know You used smiley faces!” I said.

“I use them all the time!” He replied.

He was definitely laughing, laughing with me. And his smile was grand. 

I had wanted so much to get into God’s river, but I didn’t want to get too wet. I wanted to stay in control. I wanted to do it on my own terms, staying as dry and as comfortable as possible.

God showed me that day how that would turn out!

I’ve thought of this often since.

“I’ll do what You say,” I’ll think to myself, “but I’ll do it this way,” thinking I’m being so smart. Only to find myself worse off than if I had just done in simple obedience what God had said to do. 

God and I had a good laugh that day. And I learned a good lesson, too.

Chapter 36: Baptized

Sometime after I put my faith in Christ, a friend asked me if I had been baptized since I had done that. I hadn’t because I was already been baptized at age 13 as part of a confirmation class for my church. At that time I still had questions about Jesus and what I really believed, but the people around me encouraged me to go ahead and get baptized anyway, so I did.

Now that I really did believe, however, my friend felt I should be baptized again—or really be baptized for the first time as a believing adult. As the Bible says, “Repent and be baptized, every one of you, in the name of Jesus Christ for the forgiveness of your sins. And you will receive the gift of the Holy Spirit” (Acts 2:38).

I had been baptized and then repented, but somehow my friend felt it was important for me to do it in order, to repent and then be baptized. Although I wasn’t sure that it mattered, I was willing to pray about it. 

I began reading other scriptures about baptism, and it seemed that the order did matter—or at least it was consistent with what I read in the Bible. Repent and be baptized.

I decided to do it, so I talked to my pastor. I was stopped from going forward, though, as my pastor said since I had already been baptized in that denomination, he couldn’t officially baptize me again. Theologically, he said, one baptism was sufficient. Another was redundant. I could see his point, and I had wondered the same, so I went home feeling like I had at least done what I could. 

But the thought wouldn’t leave me. “Repent and be baptized…” Those words played over and over again in my mind, repeating the words of Peter from the Bible. I had repented but not been baptized as a believer. 

One day I was reading about spiritual gifts in the Bible and how God, through His Holy Spirit, wanted to give us gifts to better equip us for works of ministry. I was really drawn towards some of the gifts, like the gift of healing. How wonderful would that be, I thought, to be able to pray for someone and help bring about their healing? I asked God about it, if I might have some of those gifts. 

I felt He said, “Have you done what I’ve already asked you to do?” I knew He meant baptism. He wasn’t speaking out of disappointment or anger, but out of love. He wanted more for me, but I felt that somehow He couldn’t release more to me until I had been obedient to do what I already knew I needed to do. 

I went back to my pastor and explained my situation. He said he understood and agreed to baptize me, unofficially as far as the church was concerned, at home in his pool.

“Even though only one baptism is necessary,” he said, “I’ve found that being baptized as a believing adult is much more meaningful to the person being baptized.” 

I invited Lana and a friend and my cousin and was baptized in my pastor’s pool. 

It felt good, really good, to have been obedient to this simple request of Christ. I didn’t feel anything tangibly different that day having been baptized, just thankful that I had done it. The following day, however, things began to change dramatically.

Chapter 37: A New Option Pack 

The day after I was baptized, I was sitting on my living room floor with my Bible open. I was so thankful I had been obedient to being baptized. I felt the ease in my heart that comes from finally doing what I felt I was to do. 

I wanted to praise God, so I went to say aloud two words I had learned in Hebrew that meant, “Praise God.” They were, “Hallal Jah,” from which we get the word, “Hallelujah.” 

I opened my mouth and spoke, “Hallal Jah,” but the words didn’t end there. Out of my mouth flowed a seemingly unending stream of words I had never heard or learned before. They came rapid fire, as if unloading a cartridge of never-ending bullets from a gun. After 5-10 seconds, I stopped, surprised, and took a breath. I opened my mouth again and out streamed more words, unending words, words that I didn’t understand but were distinct and continual. 

I took another breath and began to speak again. 

“What is happening to my tongue?” I thought. It was wagging back and forth rapidly every time I spoke. I took hold of it with two fingers to try to feel what it was doing as I was speaking. 

“My tongue!” I thought. “What is happening to my tongue?”

And then it hit me. “My tongue. I’m speaking in tongues!” I was amazed, intrigued, and more than a little bit stunned. 

Physically, scientifically, I was curious how this phenomenon was working. I began testing what I could do with it. I spoke in a lower voice and could speak and hear it clearly. I spoke higher and could speak and hear it clearly still. I slowed it down and tried to listen for consonants and vowels; there were certain sounds that I recognized, but other sounds that were entirely new. It was perhaps Asian sounding, with glottal stops and unexpected variations in tongue placement in my mouth that I had never experienced before. Certain consonants were there, but others were missing entirely. I kept speaking, fully able to speak in English at any time, but also equally able to speak in this other language at any time as well. I was able to do either at any moment without giving it a second thought. 

It was a full-blown language, as if God had downloaded an option pack into my body. 

“Tongues.” I thought. “I wasn’t asking for the gift of tongues!”

Chapter 38: More Tools

Intrigued as I was by what was happening, I wasn’t exactly happy about it. Like getting socks for my birthday, this wasn’t the kind of gift I had ever wanted before. 

I stood up and continued testing it out, surprised that I could keep speaking in tongues even while picking up a bag of garbage and taking it outside to the dumpster. I’m not sure what I expected, but I was surprised I could do something so remarkably mundane while also doing something so remarkably supernatural. It was fascinating. 

The reason I had never wanted the gift of tongues before was because I didn’t want to be part of something I considered controversial. I didn’t realize that over half the Christians in the world were part of denominations that considered speaking in tongues to be a normal Christian experience. In the circles in which I ran, speaking in tongues was a rarity. 

A good friend of mine had asked me to consider asking God to give me the gift of tongues. She said she had found it to be so helpful in her life, she wanted the gift for me, too. She told me how, when she was walking and talking to others about God in rough areas on the streets in the downtown area of her city, that sometimes people would pull guns or knives on her. She called out to God to give her some spiritual weapons, some more tools, so she could do battle where the real battle was taking place—in their hearts and in their minds. 

God answered her prayers and gave her the gift of tongues, among other gifts. As she began praying in tongues and walking through the streets, she began getting words in English, too. Talking to one hardened woman on the streets, for instance, she felt the woman was considering having an abortion. She said to the woman, “You’re about to get an abortion, aren’t you?” The woman broke down in tears, dropped her defenses, and gave her life to Christ. 

I was fascinated by my friend’s stories, but I still didn’t want the gift of tongues for myself. It wasn’t the gift that I was opposed to. It was the controversy that surrounded it. 

Now, here I was, the day after my baptism, speaking in a language I had never learned or heard before. Although it wasn’t the gift I wanted as I had looked through the various spiritual gifts, I also knew it wasn’t up to me to decide which gifts I would get. That was up to the Holy Spirit. As the Bible says when talking about spiritual gifts, “All these are the work of one and the same Spirit, and He distributes them to each one, just as He determines” (1 Corinthians 12:11). 

I didn’t want to be ungrateful for a gift I had been given or to try to give it back. So I decided to put it to use as best I could, believing that if God had given it to me, He would use it, like all gifts He gives, for the “common good” (see 1 Corinthians 12:7). 

I figured I didn’t have to tell anyone about it, did I? I could use it by myself, in my own prayer time, which I did—at least until the day God called on me to speak in tongues out loud.

Chapter 39: One Little Tear

One day, while praying during my quiet time, I felt God prompting me to pray in tongues out loud while praying for others. 

I was reading again a chapter in the Bible about spiritual gifts and how some people were given the gifts of teaching or preaching and some the gift of tongues. 

“Now to each one the manifestation of the Spirit is given for the common good” (1 Corinthians 12:7). Was it enough for me to pray in tongues by myself, oftentimes while praying for others, but not while I was in the presence of others? Or was I supposed to use this gift out loud while praying for them? It was fear, mainly, that was holding me back from doing the latter. I was afraid of what others might think. 

By this time, I felt confident enough in using my gift privately, knowing that it had provided a great help to me to “pray in the Spirit” when I didn’t know what to pray on my own. Although I was still fearful, I decided I was willing to pray in front of others if the right situation arose. 

Not long after this, one such situation did arise. 

I had heard from a friend that one of our mutual friends had gotten a divorce. I was shocked and heartbroken, unconvinced that this was the right thing for them to do. I began praying for them that God would reverse their situation and help them get back together again. 

This couple was older than me by about twenty years, and had been married longer than me by about that much as well. They lived several states away from me, so I didn’t see them very often. Whenever I did, however, I felt they were made for each other. To imagine them apart just didn’t make sense to me. 

I didn’t know the husband very well, though, and I didn’t feel comfortable calling him directly. I asked the woman’s mother what she thought about the divorce. 

“Good riddance,” was her summary. She never wanted to see the man again. I asked someone else who knew them well, who echoed the same. I then asked the wife herself what she thought, and she said the same, even more forcefully. 

I said to Lana, “Are we the only ones praying for them to get back together?” It sure felt like we were.

One day at work, I learned about a possible business trip that I might be able to take to the city where they lived to speak at a conference there. I felt this might give me a chance to speak to the husband in person, so I submitted a topic to the conference organizers to possibly share there. 

I was sure I was to going to get to speak to him in his city, but my topic was turned down! Boldly, I submitted another topic. This one was accepted, and I was on my way! I’m thankful I didn’t let that first rejection discourage me from what I felt I was to do.

While making my plans for the trip, I contacted the husband to see if we could get together while I was in town for business. He agreed. 

We met at an ice-skating rink where his daughter was practicing for a figure skating competition. I listened to his story from the beginning, about how difficult things had become in their marriage, and about how it had finally ended in their divorce. 

In spite of all he told me, I was still unconvinced they should be apart. 

I began telling him stories of how God had worked in my life. 

The man was intrigued and kept asking questions, so I kept telling him story after story. After we dropped off his daughter at her house, he drove me to where I was staying. 

Before I got out of the car, I asked if I could pray for him. He agreed. I had already said everything I felt I could say and felt at a loss for what else I could tell him. Having run out of words on my own, this seemed like that “right situation” that God had prepared me for—to ask the Holy Spirit more directly into our conversation to speak words where I had none left. 

Before starting my prayer, I told this man that God had given me a prayer language, and I wondered if it would be okay if I used it while we prayed. Again, he agreed. 

I began praying in tongues for him, out loud, switching back to English from time to time as new thoughts came to me, trusting that this was God’s Spirit giving me more to say. By the end of the prayer, I looked up and he seemed completely unmoved, except for one little tear in the corner of his eye.

I asked if he had a Bible. He didn’t, so I gave him mine, encouraging him to read it. 

Having nothing else to say, I got out of the car, slept for the night, and flew home the next day. I wondered if it had made any difference at all, wondered if I had made a mistake, and wondered if I had perhaps ticked him off and likely embarrassed myself in front of him, all at the same time. 

One month later, I found out.

Chapter 40: Radically Saved

Almost a month later, I decided to call him. I had been afraid to talk to him the first time, and I was doubly afraid to talk to him again after our visit. 

He was a self-made man who came to America with nothing from another country on the other side of the world, then built a name for himself and a business worth plenty. 

He was not only twenty years my senior, but his character was intimidating as well. He had a strong personality, one which was affected by the fact that everything he touched seemed to turn to gold.

But I decided to call because I heard about a men’s conference that was going to be held near him. I thought it would really help him, so I wanted to see if he would come with me if I came.

I hadn’t heard a word from him since my visit a month earlier. So with fear in my heart, but a willingness that came only by faith, I picked up the phone and gave him a call.

To my shock, he told me the most amazing story about how, during our prayer in the car, God had touched him so much that that was the first time he had ever cried in his life! He said he had never, ever cried before. 

That one little tear, which I thought was barely a drop, was for him the release of years of pain. He said he put his faith in Christ that night for the very first time in his life. 

The next day, he started reading the Bible I gave him, finishing book after book in it and was well on his way to finishing the whole thing. 

The Bible was speaking to him so much, he said, that he found a local Christian bookstore and bought more Bibles, not just for himself, but to give away to his friends! He wanted everyone to read this book that was speaking so much to him!

He said he had cried buckets of tears in the month since that night in his car. Would he like to go to the men’s conference? Absolutely!

I went, and while there he shared more of his story with me.

I learned that his parents had been missionaries their whole lives and had been praying for him for years, their prodigal son who had never returned home to the faith—not until that night at least. They were overjoyed at his radical salvation. It turned out that Lana and I weren’t the only ones praying for him! Praise God!

He was thrilled with his newfound faith, and I was thrilled to hear the story. What about getting back together with his wife, I asked? 

Absolutely not, he said. Too much water under that bridge. He was going forward with his new fiancé, no matter what. 

I was dumbfounded by his response, and I told him so, quite forcefully. He disagreed, just as forcefully. 

When I got home from the conference, I wrote him a letter, telling him what I felt about the things he had said about his ex-wife and his unwillingness to reconcile with her. I wrote it on several pages of yellow legal paper and mailed it to him. I didn’t hear from him for almost a year.

But one year later, on the anniversary date of when I had first visited him, he called me. He said he was calling from his ex-wife’s house, that he broken off his engagement with his fiancé, had reconciled with his wife, and they were going to get married again in just a few months!

He said that on the day I had first visited him, he had been out shopping with his new fiancé picking out their wedding rings. 

Had I not come out at just that moment, his life would have taken an entirely different course. Instead, he was now back with his wife, had started going to seminary, and eventually became a pastor of a church in his city comprised of people from the country where his parents had been missionaries. 

Where would he be now, he said, or his wife now, or his kids now, had God not prompted me to go and visit him? Where would he be now, I thought, had I not believed God and pushed for that business trip even though it was cancelled at first? Where would he be now, had I not prayed for him out loud in words the Holy Spirit spoke through me to his heart when I had run out of words of my own? And where would he be now had I not given him my Bible so he could read God’s Words for himself? 

He mailed that Bible back to me, signed and dated on that one-year anniversary, inscribed with the words, “A gift from God.” And it was.

Like all good gifts from God, this one, too, had been given for the “common good.” I was convicted that I needed to keep using my gifts for God even more.

Chapter 41: Praying for a Child

I happened to be in Houston visiting some friends when they shared some sad, sad news with me. We were driving in their car and they mentioned they had recently heard from their doctor that they would never be able to have children. 

I was as devastated by their news as they were. I knew how much they both wanted kids and had been trying for several years. After many tests and difficult results, the doctor declared the wife to be infertile.

My heart went out to them, and I asked if I could pray for them. So we went to their home, sat down on their living room floor, and we began to talk. I started asking them some questions, and I learned that there was more going on than just their inability to have children. They had been struggling in their marriage with various frustrations and disappointments on both sides. As we talked, we began to pray for each thing they mentioned. We could all three see the clouds of discouragement lift from over them. They talked, forgave one another, and expressed their love and commitment to each other again.

After two or three hours of talking and praying, we finally began praying for their physical healing, too. As we did, I felt God say to me that they would have a child within a year! I was too shocked to speak it out loud and too nervous to say anything about it in case I was wrong. I just treasured those words in my heart and left the couple that night full of faith—and full of the joy of seeing their marriage renewed.

I flew home, as I had been traveling when I went to visit them, and checked back with them a month later. I asked the husband how things were going. He could hardly contain himself talking about how much God had done in their marriage that night. He was over-the-top in his description of their new love for each other. I asked if there was any news yet on the baby front, but there was none. He was just so thankful for the healing prayers for their marriage.

The next month I called again. Again, the husband was so thankful and ecstatic about their marriage. But no pregnancy yet. I kept praying.

Three months later, I called again. Doing the math, I knew that for them to have a baby in a year would take nine months plus three. How were they doing? Still great, but still no pregnancy. I was sure I had heard from God. I didn’t know how to take it. This wasn’t about me and hearing right. It was about them and their desire for a child. So I kept praying. God asked me specifically one day if I believed He was able to do this—and I said, “Yes.”

Four months after we had prayed, the husband called with incredible news. They were expecting! It would have been unbelievable—except for the fact that I had told God I believed He could do this. Now I could believe it, not just by faith, but by this good report as well.

One year and one month after God had spoken to me that they would “have a child within a year,” they had a healthy baby boy. After all those years of waiting, and the doctors saying they’d never be able to have a child. God said otherwise. I wasn’t going to quibble over whether it was within a year or one month. They’ve never had another child, neither before nor since. But they had that one, just as God had spoken.

The same week I was writing this chapter, I happened to be in the same city where their son had just moved. I reached out to him to see if we could get together and we did. He’s now 24 years old, going to seminary, and has committed his life to ministry as well—now 25 years after I prayed with his parents for a child.

We both rejoiced that God still speaks, God still heals, and God still hears our prayers. 

As God has said numerous times to numerous people in the Bible and to people living today, “Nothing is impossible with Him.” 

Nothing.

Chapter 42: Controversy 

Not every experience of praying in tongues with others has been received so well. 

While I was serving at a church in Texas, a couple asked if I could pray for them. They were trying to have children, but couldn’t. I had seen several couples conceive when I prayed for them, so this couple came to me for prayer, too. 

After telling me their story, we began to pray. But before I started, I asked if it would be okay to pray in a prayer language God that had given me. I said that without it I felt like a doctor going into surgery without a scalpel. They agreed, and we prayed. 

After the prayer, they seemed thankful and went home. The next day, however, the senior pastor of my church told me the couple had decided to leave the church. They said it was because I had prayed for them in tongues and they didn’t want to be part of a church like that. I was crushed. I had been as polite and graceful about it as I knew how, and they had seemed as open and receptive to it as they could be. 

There was nothing more I could do, the pastor told me. They were gone.

Two months later, I was leading worship and I was shocked to see them sitting on the front row!

After the service, they came up to me and I asked, “What happened?”

They said, “We’re expecting!”

I nearly cried on the spot. God came through, once again, doing a work in their lives that went beyond anything I could do. Here I almost let that experience, and my resulting fear, dissuade me from ever praying in tongues out loud for anyone again. Thankfully, God persuaded me that day otherwise and encouraged me to keep using the gifts He has given me for Him. 

I still try to be judicious and wise in when and where I pray in tongues so as not to be a distraction or cause unnecessary problems. Oftentimes, I’ll pray quietly under my breath, both in English and in tongues, as I don’t feel it’s always necessary to pray out loud. 

But when the stakes are high, when lives are on the line, or when I feel it’s the best for those I’m praying for, I pray out loud with all my might. I’ve found that people are often grateful for a prayer that’s truly passionate and heartfelt, no matter what the language. 

And God comes through, time after time after time, because He loves to hear and answer our prayers.

Chapter 43: A New Gift for a New Ministry 

After returning from Israel, God continued speaking to me about many things, including praying for my new piano, going to Japan, and how He was going to provide for me in the months and years to come (more on those in another book!) But one thing He especially did for me was to provide me with a new gift for my new ministry. 

It started when I went to St. Louis to visit some friends for the weekend. One of them sat next to me to pray for me, but she said she wanted to sit on my left side so she could specifically pray for me in my left ear. I told her that was good because it was harder for me to hear in my right ear. She asked how long that had been, and I said it had always been that way. 

I’d had my ears tested, but the tests showed there was no difference in my hearing in either ear. Yet it always seemed easier for me to hear in my left ear. I usually talk on the phone using my left ear, as I feel I can hear better that way. 

She commented that it was interesting because she and others had experienced similar things, but in the way they hear from God. That’s why she wanted to pray for me specifically on my left side, in fact, because she felt from God that it was important to do so. I took note of what she said but didn’t think much more about it and went on with our prayers. 

The chief concern on my heart that weekend was the woman with cancer for whom I had prayed. It was only a few weeks later by that time, and she was sicker than she had ever been before. The doctors thought any day now could be her last. 

I was still praying for her complete healing, but I had also been reading several Bible stories about people being raised from the dead: Jesus, of course, and Lazarus, the synagogue ruler’s daughter, the widow’s son, the man who fell out of the third-story window while Paul was preaching. I was being filled to the full with faith that even if this woman were to die, I was ready to pray that God would raise her back from the dead. I was full of faith that God could do it and was even encouraged by the young son of one of my friends in St. Louis who said, “It’s easier to pray for someone who’s dead because they can’t resist your prayers.” I thought there was a world of wisdom in that statement for a boy so young! 

I got a chance to test my faith when later that day I received a phone call from the woman’s husband. His wife had died. I was heartbroken for him, but overjoyed that she was now able to see God face-to-face and hear from Him every day for the rest of eternity. That was the one thing she had prayed for above all else. Praise God! 

But I was still willing to pray for her to be raised from the dead, and I wanted to be there in person to do it. I checked into flights to Texas and found one leaving the next day. I booked it, both to be there for the funeral and to pray for her. 

I told my friends I was worried I would get there too late, that they would have probably already embalmed her body before I could arrive. But my friend said, “If God wants to raise her from the dead, embalming fluid will be the least of your worries.” Jesus had called Lazarus back after he had been dead for four days, wrapped in cloths and already odorous from decay. And Lazarus not only came back from the dead, but he was healed of whatever caused him to die in the first place! God breathed life into Adam whom He had formed out of dirt (Genesis 2:7), and He can breathe life back into dry bones (Ezekiel 37:4). I knew God could bring this woman back to life at any moment, too. 

I hadn’t packed for a trip to Texas when I left for St. Louis, and I knew the funeral was going to be at a very formal church there. I wished I had a suit to wear. My friend offered me to try on one of her husband’s suits from his closet, and it fit, so I threw it in my bag to take with me to Texas. When I arrived, I again stayed with my friend who had prayed with me a few weeks earlier about quitting my job. We were sitting on his couch, talking about all that was going on, when all of a sudden, he put his hand next to my right ear and snapped his fingers loudly. 

“Why did you do that?” I said. 

“I don’t know,” he said. “I just felt like God wanted me to do it and to see if you could hear from that ear.” 

I hadn’t told him anything about my hearing in that ear. I had only told my friends in St. Louis the day before, whom he didn’t know. Something began to happen, though, starting during those two days and continuing now for more than 25 years, resulting in one of the most profound and helpful gifts God has ever given me.

Chapter 44: This is the Way 

Over the next few days, I began experiencing a strong ringing in my ears, but only one at a time. It wasn’t a normal ringing, though, but almost like someone tugging on my ear, making me want to listen closer in that direction. Whenever my left ear would ring like this, it seemed like God wanted me to do whatever it was that I was considering doing. But when my right ear would ring, He didn’t want me to do it. It was as if God were bringing to life for me the verse from Isaiah 30:21 that says, “Whether you turn to the right or to the left, your ears will hear a voice behind you saying, ‘this is the way; walk in it.’” 

I had never heard of such a thing, although I have often heard people say that they have heard from God in ways that they just knew that they knew that God was speaking to them. How He specifically does it seems to vary with each person individually, as He really does have a personal relationship with each one of us. For me, being inquisitive as when I received the gift of tongues five years earlier, I began to try out this new gift, giving it a bit of a test drive to see how it worked and whether it worked on a repeatable basis. And it did!

That next weekend, I went with my friend to a men’s retreat he was leading. He asked me to talk to the men on the opening night. As I was planning my talk on our drive to the retreat, my friend said that I could plan it out, but that He wanted me to listen to God as I was speaking, that God would guide me whether to go to the right or the left. My friend mentioned the verse, “There is a way that seems right to a man, but in the end it leads to death” (Proverbs 14:12). We took note and laughed that the verse said there was a way that seems “right” to a man, as it was my right ear that would ring when I considered something I thought was a good idea, but that God would override and tell me to do otherwise. It was an easy way for me to remember that although something seemed “right,” God had other things in mind. Whenever my left ear would ring, even if it seemed less likely to be the thing to do in the natural world, I could know I was on the path God wanted. The strength of the ringing also seemed to correspond to the strength with which God was directing me, like He was pulling on my ear, like you would pull the reigns on a horse, but He was doing it audibly. 

As I was praying about my message, I prayed that God would speak to each and every man there, and my left ear rang as I said that as if to say that’s exactly what God was going to do. I was encouraged by this when I began to speak, knowing that God would speak to every man there. I totally believed it would happen. 

I was only about one-third of the way through my prepared remarks, and still in the middle of a story, when my friend who had invited me looked at me and signaled for me to stop. God had done it, apparently. 

How could He have already done it, I thought, with so little said? But I watched over the next 45 minutes as man after man spoke about how God had just spoken to them about their exact situation they were facing. Fifteen of the seventeen men shared while we were still gathered together in a circle. What about the other two, though, I wondered?

After we had broken up for a snack, one of them came up to me to share about how God had spoken to him, too, but it was very personal and he didn’t want to say it in front of the group. Ten minutes later the remaining man came to me to tell me how God had just spoken to him as well through that talk. Seventeen for seventeen! And I had not prompted them or told them what God had said to me beforehand about how God would speak to each and every one of them. I didn’t even get to share two-thirds of what I had planned to say! 

But God had done what He said, as though speaking to me over my shoulder and into my ear, that this was exactly what He had wanted to do. I have tested and kicked the tires on this gift for 25 years and counting, and it still rings true. I’ve even had my ears professionally tested again to see if there might be something wrong with them, but the testing shows that are perfectly fine in every way!

After all these years, I’m still amazed by God. He really is the best. He really does lead and guide us in personal and unique ways, if we’re willing to listen to Him as He says, “This is the way; walk in it.”

Chapter 45: Test the Spirits 

“Dear friends,” wrote the Apostle John, “do not believe every spirit, but test the spirits to see whether they are from God…” (1 John 4:1a). John went on to say that we can test the spirits and see if they really are from God or not. 

Hearing God speak to me is one of the areas I have tested often, sometimes in simple ways, yet I’ve seen it come true as God had said. For instance, I’ll be considering calling a particular auto store, thinking they’ll surely have a common part that I need. But then God will tug on my right ear, indicating that I don’t need to call. Yet I’ll call anyway just to see, and it holds true. “Sorry, we don’t have that part,” they’ll say. I’ve tested this so often that I no longer need evidence that this is a true gift of God, as I can’t always know which way to go on my own. 

What I really need more from God is the faith to do whatever He says, especially when it goes against what I think is “right.” 

One of the most surprising to me was when three times God spoke to me that it was imperative that Lana not get pregnant again, each time at a moment of intimacy where it could quite possibly happen had I not been especially careful. Surely not, God, I thought. Lana had wanted twelve kids when we first got married, and by this time we had six. 

I would have been glad to have more. But not just once or twice, it was three times that God made it clear to me that she was not to get pregnant. Whether it was for a season or for life, I wasn’t sure, but it was clear to me that I was to take extra care in this regard. It’s one thing to say you’ll trust God for how many children He wants you to have and then keep having sex in a way that you could conceivably get pregnant again and again. It’s another to say you’ll trust God when you already have a number in mind—but the number God has in mind doesn’t match.

I didn’t tell Lana the first two times that this happened and God tugged on my right ear. I just took extra care. But the third time, I could no longer avoid telling her. In a way, she was relieved, as she said she was wearing out caring for six kids and me, plus a niece and her dad, both of whom had come to live with us for a time. But in another way, we both wondered why there was such a strong warning, and eventually came to believe this was to be a lifelong decision, so I had surgery so that she would no longer get pregnant. 

Six months after that, we found a lump in Lana’s breast which turned out to be Stage IV cancer. It had already spread throughout her body. Less than a year later, Lana was gone. 

I don’t know how I could have taken care of any more kids when that happened, and I don’t know what might have happened to any child that might have been conceived in her body while she was battling cancer at the same time. 

This was not a matter of whether or not a store had a part that I needed. This was literally a matter of life or death, and God wanted me to know what He wanted me to do. God was protecting us and future children from harm from something neither of us could have known about in any other way at the time. 

“There is a way that seems right to a man,” as the Bible says, “but in the end it leads to death.” 

God really does speak, if we’re willing to listen, step out in faith, and obey.

Chapter 46: The Suit Fit 

Back to my prayers that God would raise this woman from the dead… 

I was in Texas getting ready to attend her visitation and funeral, full of faith that God really could still raise her. 

When I got to the funeral home, and after most of the people had left, I laid my hands on the coffin and prayed with all the faith I had that she would be raised, but she wasn’t. I prayed again at the cemetery the next day, staying behind after everyone else had gone, while they lowered her body into the ground. Still nothing.

When I got home to Illinois, a friend asked how the woman was doing for whom I had been praying. 

“Oh, I’m sorry,” I said. “I thought I told you she had died.” 

“Oh, yes, I know,” she said, “I just wondered how she was doing now.” 

My friend was still as full of faith as I was that God could do anything, absolutely anything. 

People’s reactions to my story about praying for this woman and quitting my job and going to Israel have been interesting. One man drove over to my house to hear it from me in person, saying that he wanted to come and touch me because I was the closest thing to an apostle he had ever seen. 

Another asked me to pray for her to be healed, saying she had just been diagnosed with cancer. I looked at her, bewildered, saying, “Didn’t you just hear me say that the first person I prayed for after going into full-time ministry died?” I couldn’t believe she wanted to me to pray for her still.

Not every reaction was positive. One woman who had heard me share my story at her church came up to me after my message. She said, “The more you talked, the angrier I got. But when you said the woman you had prayed for had died, I was so relieved.”

I was shocked at her response, but it turned out that her husband had died of cancer, and she was just sure that at the end of my story I was going to say this woman had been physically healed. And if so, she was going to be so mad at God, because she had prayed for her husband and he had died. It’s interesting to me that the ending I would have wished for isn’t always the ending people need to hear.

Perhaps the most astounding response came from one of my aunts who, after sharing with her all about praying for this woman, quitting my job, going to Israel, returning and praying unsuccessfully that God would raise her from the dead, said, “I can’t believe it! I just can’t believe it!” 

“I know!” I said, “I can’t believe it, either.”

“I can’t believe the suit fit!” She was proper to a T, and the most amazing thing to her from my story was that God would give me a suit for the funeral that fit. God spoke to her in a way that she needed to hear, that God really cared. And that’s what spoke to her. My mind went back to the men’s retreat and how God had spoken to seventeen out of seventeen men, each in their own way.

God really can speak to each person in their own unique way, if we’ll just walk in faith and keep telling our story.

Conclusion: O Ye of Mini Faith

I have many more stories to tell. I feel like I’m just getting started. But let me close this book with one more, and I’ll save the rest for another time. For as the Apostle John said, “Jesus did many other things as well. If every one of them were written down, I suppose that even the whole world would not have room for the books that would be written” (John 21:25).

I’d like to tell you this last story because you might think I’m unique, that these things I’ve shared with you might have happened to me, but they don’t or won’t happen to you. The truth is, God has given me a gift of faith specifically to help you step out in your faith and see these things happen in your life, too. 

I don’t know that I have a specific gift of healing or prophecy or teaching or mercy or anything else. But what I do have is a gift of faith, believing that God can do anything, absolutely anything. And when you have faith, anything is possible! 

Jesus said, “I tell you the truth, if you have faith as small as a mustard seed, you can say to this mountain, ‘Move from here to there’ and it will move. Nothing will be impossible for you’” (Matthew 17:20).

 I had less than a mustard seed of faith one night when Lana was telling me about a car she wanted to replace hers that was on its last legs. She had never cared about styles or makes or even colors of cars before. She just wanted them to be able to get her from here to there. But for some reason, she was taken with the idea of getting a very specific car: a little red Mini Cooper. They were still quite a rarity here in Illinois at that time. 

She and my oldest daughter looked online to see if she could find one. When she did, she showed me the price. I said I was sorry but there was no way we’d be able to get one of those. She mentioned it to me again that night as we were lying in bed. 

Rather than repeat what I had already told her, I remembered something one of my friends had said to his daughter when he sent her off to college. He said he sent her off with only his prayers, as that’s all he could give her. With a smile, he added, “The same God who takes care of me will take care of you!”

I decided to tell Lana that story in that moment in bed, then I said the same thing to her. I told her I’d pray for her, adding as a joke as much as anything else, “The same God who takes care of me will take care of you!” And I rolled over and went to sleep.

But the next morning, the joke was on me! Eight hours later, I was pulling into our church parking lot for a morning men’s group when right behind me pulled up a car driven by someone who had never been to the group before. He parked right next to me—in his little red Mini Cooper. 

As we got out of our cars, I said, “You don’t happen to be selling your car, do you?” 

He said, “Actually, I am!” He offered for me to take it for a test drive when the meeting was over. 

After our meeting, as I was sitting in the parking lot in the driver’s seat of a little red Mini Cooper, I looked at the side view mirror and could see the red of the car reflected in it. Along the bottom of the mirror I read these words: “Objects in mirror are closer than they appear.” 

I couldn’t believe it. I went home and told Lana the story. Although we didn’t have the money right then to buy his car, I told Lana, “The same God who takes care of me really will take care of you.”

About six months later, God made a way for us to get a car just like it, just like Lana wanted. “Objects in mirror really are closer than they appear.”

When Lana passed away, her car passed on to my oldest daughter who felt God speaking to her through it, too. The same God who took care of Lana and me would take care of her as well. 

Five years later, when my car wore out and I needed a new one, I wondered if I might be able to find a Mini Cooper like hers, but a convertible, as I really love the open air, and in charcoal gray like the first car I had bought on my own. I found one online, drove to Chicago to take a look, and took it for a test drive in the snow with the top down, loving every second of feeling the snow falling gently on me as I drove. God made a way for me to buy it, too, and I drove it home that day.

Two years later, one of my other kids needed a car for work, so my oldest daughter passed along the little red Mini Cooper and bought another one for herself—a light blue convertible. 

Unbelievably, we now have three Mini Coopers in our family, all of which are now fully paid for.

I painted a picture of mine one day, based on a photograph I had taken the day I bought it in the snow with the top down. I never thought I could buy one, let alone two, and eventually three. I titled my painting, “O Ye of Mini Faith.” 

What I thought was impossible, and had barely a mustard seed of faith for, had turned into something far beyond what I could imagine. As the Bible says: “Now to Him who is able to do immeasurably more than all we ask or imagine, according to His power that is at work within us, to Him be the glory…” (Ephesians 3:20-21).

Faith isn’t about getting cars or things or everything we’ve ever wanted. To be honest, some days I feel like I’ve lost more way than I’ve gained, even though I know that isn’t true, either. Faith is about believing in God, believing He exists, and trusting that He will reward those who earnestly seek Him. As the Bible says, “Without faith, it’s impossible to please God, for anyone who comes to Him must believe that He exists, and that He rewards those who earnestly seek Him” (Hebrews 11:6).

I pray you would be full of faith today and every day for the rest of your life. Know that God really does exist, and that He really will reward you as you earnestly seek Him. 

My stories of faith aren’t just for me. They’re for you, too. 

The same God who takes care of me really will take care of you.

Eric Elder

There’s More!

Don’t stop now! You can read more stories and get a boost in your faith anytime by visiting any of these inspirational websites:

Contact the Author

I love hearing from my readers! To contact me, visit ericelder.com For more inspiring books and music, visit InspiringBooks.com

Cómo amar a Dios y a los gays

Cómo amar a Dios y a los gays

Cómo amar a Dios y a los gays, por Eric Elder

¿Qué debe hacer un cristiano? (Spanish Edition of Loving God & Loving Gays)
por Eric Elder, Traducido por Eduardo Nieto

Una reflexión profunda sobre un tema delicado, basada en mi propia experiencia personal y en mi ministerio con cientos de personas sobre este tema durante más de 30 años.

Escucha aquí, lee a continuación o haz clic aquí para descargar el PDF
También disponible en tapa blanda, Kindle, Audible o inglés.

Nota especial: Respecto a las guías de estudio

Este libro contiene una guía de estudio en cada capítulo, la cual es para reflexión personal o estudio bíblico. 

Estas guías están intercaladas a lo largo del libro después de cada dos capítulos para mayor comodidad de quienes quieran estudiar dos capítulos por semana durante seis semanas (con una séptima semana opcional para la Conclusión y el Epílogo).

Para conocer más acerca de las guías de estudio y cómo usarlas, además de aquellas personas que a mi parecer se beneficiarán más de este libro, ¡por favor mira la página 21!

Capítulo 1: Mi testimonio en pocas palabras

Donde compartiré mi testimonio en menos de 150 palabras, incluyendo unas para animarte a leer este libro hasta el final.

Llegué a la homosexualidad en el verano de 1982. Salí de la misma en el otoño de 1984, gracias en gran medida a una amiga que luego llegó a ser mi esposa. 

En el verano de 1987 Dios puso fin a todo el poder que la homosexualidad tenía sobre mi vida, de una vez por todas, cuando puse mi fe en Cristo para todo.

Desde entonces, me casé, tuve seis hijos, y disfruté una sexualidad fuera de serie con una mujer que superaba todo lo que podría haber soñado. 

Han pasado 30 años desde que salí de la homosexualidad. Nunca volví, y no planeo hacerlo. En este libro comparto por qué. 

A lo largo del recorrido, compartiré algunas ideas de cómo acompañar a otros en lo que puede ser el viaje más importante de sus vidas, y cómo hacerlo de una manera verdaderamente amorosa.

Eric Elder

Capítulo 2: Mi testimonio en una cáscara de huevo

Donde comparto que hablar de homosexualidad es como caminar sobre huevos, para mí y para muchos otros. 

Quizás para ti también.

No suelo comenzar mis conversaciones hablando de homosexualidad. (Tampoco suelo iniciar así mis libros). Pero parece que en la actualidad son más y más las conversaciones que tarde o temprano terminan abordando este tema. Y en sí no es algo malo. 

Para mí, como alguien que ha tratado con las atracciones homosexuales por gran parte de su vida, en realidad es algo bueno. El hecho de que hayas tomado un libro como este, me dice que este tema te interesa. Me dice que estás tratando de entenderlo más, para así poder amar más a quienes te rodean, a personas que, quizás por años, han estado luchando con estos sentimientos en silencio.

También debo admitir que cuando surge este tema, todavía me hace sentir un poco nervioso. No por lo que sé o no sé acerca del mismo, ni por lo que creo o no creo, sino por lo que puede suceder si digo algo que se incline hacia un lado u otro. Es uno de esos asuntos delicados que pueden lanzar a órbita a cualquiera con tan solo una palabra o incluso una mirada, así sea sensible o con buenas intenciones.

Incluso, mientras escribía este libro, después de enviar un primer borrador a varios amigos, a una de ellas le gustó todo hasta que llegó al Capítulo 12. Cuando leyó una de mis sugerencias en cuanto a cómo amar mejor a los homosexuales, me envió una nota diciendo: “lo siento, pero estoy sinceramente en desacuerdo contigo en este punto. No puedo seguir leyendo tu libro. Hasta aquí llego. Te deseo lo mejor”.

Quedé impactado, ¡puesto que era una de mis mejores amigas y de ideas afines! La llamé de inmediato para hablar sobre el tema. 

Tras muchas horas de conversación, durante varios días, ella seguía sin ceder. Aunque cambié las palabras y el tono, me mantuve fiel a mi idea original. Ella lo volvió a leer y de nuevo escribió diciendo: “lo siento, Eric. En realidad lo intenté. No puedo seguir con tu libro. Sencillamente no puedo. Todavía me incomoda, y no puedo recomendarlo. De nuevo, lo siento”. 

No podía hacer nada más, solo orar. Y así hice. 

Esa noche ella me volvió a llamar. “Eric”, dijo. “Creo que debo tomar en serio lo que dices en ese capítulo. Creo que contiene una verdad que Dios quiere que vea”.

Gracias a Dios, la situación se resolvió por completo cuando ella leyó la última edición pocas semanas después, la cual contenía los mismos pensamientos y creencias, pero con una redacción más fresca y mayor agudeza. Ella escribió: “Eric, no pude esperar. Salté directo al Capítulo 12. Y estoy llorando. Lloro de gozo. Es genial. Simplemente genial. La redacción es perfecta”.

Mi punto es que, si este tipo de conversaciones se dan entre amigos cercanos y creyentes con mentalidades similares, no es de extrañar que este tema genere tanta tensión entre extraños y quienes no comparten las mismas ideas. 

Sin embargo, en el otro extremo del espectro hay cristianos que no tienen sentimientos fuertes de ninguna índole respecto a este asunto. Sencillamente no saben qué pensar.

Cuando le conté a una amiga sobre mi pasado en la homosexualidad, ella me expresó el dilema que ella y muchos otros cristianos enfrentan;

“Tengo muchos amigos gays”, dijo. “Veo que son amorosos, generosos y amables. Para los cristianos, saber cómo comportarse en torno a los homosexuales es algo similar a una adivinanza, ¿no crees?”

Ella tiene razón. Es una adivinanza, un acertijo que deben descifrar, y un rompecabezas que por muchos años he tratado de resolver. Mi anhelo al escribir este libro es compartir contigo algunas de las soluciones que he encontrado para ayudarte a dar el salto y acercarte más para que tú mismo puedas resolver el enigma.

MANÉJALO CON CUIDADO

Si bien la homosexualidad es un tema sensible, eso no quiere decir que no podemos hablar del mismo de manera sensible, de tal forma que de verdad traiga vida, esperanza y ánimo a quienes nos rodean. 

Doy gracias porque alguien tomó el tiempo para escribir lo que Dios dijo acerca de este tema, aunque las palabras hayan sido escritas hace aproximadamente 2,000 años y a más de 5,000 millas de distancia de donde vivo. Esas pocas palabras, tan solo unos pocos párrafos, en realidad, las escribió un hombre llamado Pablo para los cristianos de Roma. 

Cuando las leí hace 30 años, esas palabras cambiaron mi vida para bien y para siempre, tanto en esta tierra como para la eternidad. En el Capítulo 6 compartiré más acerca de lo que Pablo dijo y cómo me impactó. Ahora quiero que sepas que tus palabras también son importantes, al igual que tus acciones. 

Quiero felicitarte por escoger este libro, por aprender todo lo que puedes aprender, y por querer hacer algo para ayudar a otros en esta área tan importante. Nunca sabes cómo una palabra, una mirada, o un acto considerado de amor puede cambiar la vida de alguien, incluso la tuya. (Por ejemplo, la amiga que más me ayudó, llegó a ser mi esposa. ¡Tus resultados pueden variar!)

He compartido mi historia con muchos durante los últimos 30 años, con cientos de personas en conversaciones cara a cara, y miles más en conferencias y por internet. Sin embargo, siempre que hablo de homosexualidad, ¡siempre!, lo hago con mucho temor. 

Antes me daba miedo compartir mi testimonio por las personas que odiaban a los gays. Temía lo que pensaran de mí, o su trato hacia mí por saber lo que había hecho en el pasado. (Si la Rana René pensaba que no era fácil ser verde, me pregunto cómo se sentiría si la gente pensaba que yo era gay). 

Pero las cosas han cambiado tan dramáticamente en los últimos años, y todavía siento miedo cada vez que comparto mi testimonio. ¡La diferencia ahora es que tengo miedo de las personas que aman a los gays! Temo lo que puedan pensar de mí, o cómo sea su trato hacia mí por saber lo que he compartido. Temo que puedan pensar, de manera errada, que debido a lo que comparto, en cierto sentido odio a los homosexuales. ¡La verdad es que ahora amo a los gays más que cuando yo mismo lo era! La diferencia es que ahora puedo amarlos de verdad, no por lo que puedo obtener de ellos, sino por lo que son en realidad. 

A pesar de mis temores, he aprendido que siempre que comparto mi testimonio, las personas reaccionan con gozo genuino. Mi historia parece aumentar la fe que los demás tienen en que Dios todo lo puede, literalmente todo.

Muchos entienden que, si Dios pudo tocar mi vida de manera tan profunda, entonces puede hacer cualquier cosa por quienes están viviendo algo en lo que ellos no quieren que estén. 

Aunque siempre tengo temor de compartir mi testimonio, la razón por la cual sigo haciéndolo es porque trae esperanza a muchos. En realidad, el negocio de Dios consiste en transformar vidas. Esa es una de Sus especialidades.

Además del cambio que a lo largo de los años ha habido con respecto a por qué me da miedo compartir mi testimonio, también he notado un cambio en los conocimientos que muchos tienen hoy en día acerca de este tema, además que quieren conocer aún más. 

LAS DIFERENCIAS SUTILES ABUNDAN

En la actualidad, la conversación acerca de la homosexualidad tiene muchas más sutilezas que antes.

Hace unos años, cuando publiqué un libro que hablaba de mi testimonio, no en pocas palabras, sino en un libro de 67,000 palabras, donde explicaba con detalle cómo Dios cambió mis pensamientos y deseos en esa área, la respuesta fue fenomenal. ¡Los comentarios y preguntas que recibí de quienes leyeron las primeras 100 copias de ese libro superaron el conteo de palabras del libro mismo!

Lo que a mi parecer sería un libro que satisfaría los deseos de más conocimiento de los lectores, resultó ser un libro que dio lugar a más preguntas y conversaciones. Las personas están hambrientas por saber más acerca de este tema. 

Lo que me gusta acerca de este deseo es que es evidente que la gente de verdad quiere entender este asunto lo mejor posible. De verdad quieren ayudar lo mejor posible a sus amigos y familiares. Como has leído hasta este punto, asumo que tú también te encuentras en esta categoría.

Lo difícil en cuanto a este deseo es que cada vez más, las preguntas que muchos hacen están cargadas de sutilezas. Es mucho más difícil dar respuestas “simples” a preguntas “simples”. Las preguntas detrás de las preguntas parecen interminables.

Hay momentos en los que me siento como uno de los ciegos que Jesús sanó, según el relato bíblico. Su testimonio en pocas palabras es algo así: “Yo era ciego, pero ahora veo”. 

Algunos saltaron llenos de gozo cuando escucharon el relato de aquel hombre, aceptando con gran entusiasmo lo que él decía. 

Otros, sin embargo, querían saber más. Sus preguntas y comentarios también tenían más sutilezas. Es como si quisieran saber “¿exactamente, qué tan ciego eras? ¿Y cuánto puedes ver ahora?” No era suficiente que solo dijera que había sido cambiado. Los demás querían saber, en detalle y con precisión, lo que implicaba dicho cambio. 

Algunos se preguntaban si en realidad había sido ciego antes. Se preguntaban si era el hombre que afirmaba ser, o solo otra persona que se parecía a él. Sin embargo, otros querían demostrar que estaba equivocado, sin importar lo que dijera, ya fuera rechazándolo a él por completo o a la persona a quien se le había dado el crédito de su sanidad. 

Ante todo esto, él solo respondió: “Una cosa sé; que habiendo yo sido ciego, ahora veo” (Juan 9:25b).

Para mí está bien que me hagan preguntas. No me molesta responderlas.

Cuando me pregunta qué tan “ciego” estaba antes, lo que en mi caso significa “¿qué tan fuerte fue tu atracción hacia los hombres en el pasado?” No me molesta decirles que era muy fuerte. Creo que es importante que los demás lo escuchen. 

Cuando me preguntan si podía “ver” todo eso antes, lo que en mi caso significa: “¿en el pasado te sentiste atraído hacia las mujeres?” No tengo problema en decir que sí sentía esa atracción, pero que nunca tuve intimidad sexual con una mujer hasta que conocí a la mujer con quien me casé. 

Cuando me preguntan cuánto puedo “ver” ahora, no me afecta responder que por 23 años tuve una vida sexual fuera de serie con mi esposa, hasta que la perdí en el año 2012, cuando murió de cáncer. 

Y cuando me preguntan si he cambiado por completo, si ya no tengo ninguna atracción hacia los hombres, no tengo problema en responder que todavía tengo pensamientos y deseos ocasionales en esa dirección, pero que el poder que esos pensamientos y deseos tuvieron una vez sobre mi vida ahora ha sido destruido. Cualquier pensamiento gay que pueda tener, ya no me controla a mí ni a mis acciones, como antes.

Las personas quieren saber estas cosas, y no me molesta responder a sus preguntas, incluso si sus motivaciones son, quizás, para encontrar errores en lo que sea que yo esté diciendo. Como David Swift lo escribió en su guión para la película Pollyanna: “Si buscas el mal en alguien, esperando encontrarlo, sin duda lo encontrarás”.

Si alguien buscara algún error en mí o en mi historia, para poder señalarlo como una prueba que respalda su posición, sin importar cuál sea, entonces, estoy seguro de que lo encontrará. Pero si alguien hace una pregunta, no me molesta responderla, porque creo que es importante tener todas las cartas sobre la mesa. 

Todavía me asombro cada vez que escucho una decisión dividida en la Corte Suprema de los Estados Unidos. Me asombra porque la corte está compuesta por nueve de las personas más inteligentes de nuestro país, quienes miran exactamente el mismo conjunto de factores, sin embargo, los jueces suelen llegar a conclusiones opuestas. El voto final suele ser 5 a 4 o 4 a 5 en cualquier caso. 

¿Por qué? Los hechos en sí no son los que conducen a estas conclusiones diferentes, sino lo que las personas vinculan a esos hechos, lo que han aprendido y que es ajeno a ellos, o lo que procuran lograr cuando interpretan esos hechos.

PUNTOS CIEGOS

No culpo a los demás por tener opiniones diferentes sobre lo que puedan o no puedan ver en mi historia. En el mercado de las ideas, creo que la mía se mantendrá tan fuerte como, o más fuerte que, cualquier otra.

Y, al igual que el hombre ciego que Jesús sanó, sé que Dios así lo ha hecho conmigo. Como el ciego, lo único que sé es esto: “¡Yo era ciego, pero ahora veo!”.

Así que, no me molesta si alguien está leyendo este libro, en busca de razones para discutir lo que estoy diciendo. Pero espero que no sean como el hombre de un relato de ficción quien pensó que estaba muerto y fue al psiquiatra para confirmar lo que creía, que de verdad estaba muerto.

Después de decirle a su psiquiatra que pensaba que estaba muerto, éste le preguntó: “¿los hombres muertos sangran?”

El hombre pensó en la pregunta del psiquiatra y, al ver que cuando un hombre muere, su corazón deja de latir y su sangre deja de fluir, respondió: “no, los hombres muertos no sangran”.

Así que el psiquiatra le pidió que tomara un alfiler y pinchara su dedo para ver si sangraba o no. Así que el hombre lo hizo, y comenzó a sangrar en su dedo. A lo cual el hombre exclamó: “¿sabe qué? ¡Los hombres muertos sangran!”

Muchos están convencidos de sus opiniones, y no tienen en cuenta las evidencias que demuestran lo contrario. Si ese eres tú, entonces dudo que haya algo que pueda hacer que te convenza de lo contrario. 

Pero si eres como yo cuando estaba ahondando en este tema para encontrar lo que Dios pensaba, sentía y quería para mí en esta área de mi vida, estando dispuesto a aceptar lo que encontrará como la verdad, porque sabía que lo que fuera que Dios quisiera para mí era mejor que lo que yo pudiera desear, entonces este será un esfuerzo que bien vale la pena. 

Todos tenemos puntos ciegos espirituales, incluso yo, y si no le pedimos a Dios que nos las revele por medio de su Espíritu Santo, sencillamente no podemos verlos por nuestros propios medios. Desde que puse mi fe en Cristo, le he estado pidiendo a Dios que me revele los míos, y siempre me han asombrado los resultados.

RECORRIENDO TODO EL CAMINO

Para quienes aman a los gays y quieren apoyarlos y animarlos lo que más pueden, permítanme decirles esto: “¡Gracias!” Nunca en mi vida ha habido más interés en este tema que ahora, ya sea en nuestro país o en todo el mundo. Desde el presidente hacia abajo, este tema sigue atrayendo la atención nacional e internacional. 

Aunque hay quienes pueden sentirse incómodos con toda la atención que se está dando a este tema, personalmente agradezco mucho que tantas personas estén dispuestas a mirar, en la mayoría de casos por primera vez, las grandes presiones, luchas y dolores profundos que enfrentan las personas que sienten atracción hacia el mismo sexo. 

En muchos sentidos quisiera haber visto tal afluencia de personas buscando entender este asunto 30 y 40 años atrás, cuando comencé a luchar con todas estas preguntas, aparentemente solo. 

En nombre mío y de otros que han tenido sentimientos de atracción hacia los de su mismo sexo, de verdad quiero decir “gracias”. Gracias por tu disposición a aprender, entender y tratar de ser lo más amoroso posible hacia las personas cuya realidad diaria es este tema.

También quiero animarte a recorrer todo el camino en tu amor hacia los demás, sin parar de inmediato cuando encuentres una o dos verdades sutiles. Quiero que sigas preguntando y buscando mayor entendimiento, de modo que puedas ofrecer algo de mucho más valor a tus seres queridos. 

Hay un ciclo de vida natural que las personas siguen cuando aprenden sobre un tema que es nuevo para ellos. A veces las personas terminan su búsqueda muy pronto, tras encontrar algunas verdades, pero nada cerca de toda la verdad.

Este tema lo he explorado durante más de 30 años, y puedo hablar sobre mi propio ciclo de vida en el aprendizaje del mismo. Muchos de los pasos tomaron años. 

Me tomó años pasar de temer a otros cuando me llamaban gay, a preguntarme qué era lo malo de ser gay, a aceptar a quienes estaban involucrados en ese tipo de vida, hasta terminar sumiéndome yo mismo en la homosexualidad. También me tomó años entender el impacto a largo plazo que tenían mis acciones, las cuales me estaban engañando, alejándome de la plenitud que Dios quería para mi vida (y lo que yo mismo quería para mi vida), y lo destructivo que era todo esto para mí y quienes me rodeaban. 

Tardé años en darme cuenta que ser gay no era solo una de las muchas opciones en torno a mi sexualidad, ni tampoco la segunda mejor opción, sino que de verdad habría podido destruirme si hubiese seguido por ese camino. 

No inicié en la homosexualidad de la noche a la mañana, y tampoco salí de la noche a la mañana, aunque mi decisión de dejarla por mi bien fue inmediata cuando puse mi fe en Cristo para todo en mi vida, incluyendo mi sexualidad. Fue ahí cuando me sentí como el salmista que escribió: “Por el camino de tus mandamientos correré, cuando ensanches mi corazón” (Salmo 119:32, RVR).

No sé en qué punto te encuentres del ciclo de aprendizaje de la vida acerca de este tema. Quizás hayas estado pensando y orando sobre este asunto por un tiempo, y quizás hayas llegado a algunas conclusiones. 

Pero si esas conclusiones no encajan con lo que aprendes de la naturaleza, en la manera como Dios ha diseñado a las personas, las plantas y los animales para usar sus órganos sexuales; y si esas conclusiones no se ajustan con lo que conoces de la Biblia, en donde Dios nos ha dado las más fuertes advertencias respecto a esto y otros temas a fin de protegernos, entonces permíteme animarte a seguir preguntando, seguir en la búsqueda, y seguir llamando hasta que encuentres algo que esté de acuerdo con lo que ves en la naturaleza tal como Dios la ha diseñado y esté en línea con las palabras que lees en la Biblia, puesto que es la inspiración de Dios. 

Mi anhelo para ti es que sigas buscando el mayor entendimiento y sabiduría que puedas en cuanto a este tema hasta que por ti mismo encuentres las respuestas de Dios, así te tardes años.

BALDE DE LÁGRIMAS

También entiendo muy bien que, aunque el relatar mi historia puede crear gran esperanza en algunos, también puede generar mucha angustia en otros, dependiendo de su pasado y a dónde quieren llegar. 

Para quienes sea esperanzador, me siento agradecido y mi oración es  que sí sea de ánimo en su recorrido. Para quienes sea hiriente, lo siento mucho. 

Créanme cuando digo que puedo llenar baldes con las lágrimas que he derramado por quienes enfrentan estas luchas; lágrimas por quienes han sentido el peso de preguntarse por qué tienen las atracciones que sienten y por qué esas inclinaciones no han cambiando de la manera que esperaban; y lágrimas por quienes han luchado con este problema por años, pero que todavía no han visto realizados los avances significativos que tanto han deseado.

Pero también puedo decir que llenaría baldes con las lágrimas de gozo que he derramado al ver personas caminar hacia el altar con el hombre o la mujer de sus sueños y del sexo opuesto, gracias a la gran sanidad y restauración que Dios les ha dado en esta área de sus vidas; lágrimas de gozo con amigos al experimentar el nacimiento y el crecimiento de sus hijos que nunca habría venido a este mundo si hubiesen seguido el camino que estaban llevando; y lágrimas de gozo con personas que han encontrado a Cristo y han encontrado una comunidad dentro de sus iglesias, a veces por primera vez en sus vidas, donde encuentran satisfacción para sus más profundas necesidades de significado y conexión, así no hayan conocido aún, o nunca llegue a conocer, a una persona en particular con quien casarse.

Digo todo esto para afirmar que no escribo desde una posición ingenua en torno a las luchas reales que muchos enfrentan en esta área. Tampoco escribo desde una posición de juicio o condenación, pensando que si las personas tuvieran más fe o más sabiduría, o mejores perspectivas, o sentimientos diferentes, todo resultaría diferente para ellos. 

Escribo desde una posición de haber visto a Dios hacer milagros en las vidas de otros, persona tras persona tras persona, a veces de maneras tan diferentes y únicas como cada persona, pero de maneras que, cuando se ha invitado a Dios a entrar, nos ha asombrado a todos los que hemos visto realizados esos milagros. 

GRAN ESPERANZA

Hay una razón por la cual hablar de homosexualidad se siente como caminar sobre huevos. Es porque es como caminar sobre huevos. Pero vale la pena hacerlo porque las personas lo valen. Solo necesitamos hacer nuestro mejor esfuerzo para caminar con sensibilidad.

Como el escritor llamado J. Masai ha dicho de las personas en general: “Por todas partes hay sentimientos, sé sensible”. En cuanto al tema de la homosexualidad, esto es más cierto aún. La homosexualidad es un tema sensible que afecta a las personas en lo más profundo de su ser. Pero el hecho de que sea un tema sensible no quiere decir que no podemos abordarlo con sensibilidad para hablar al respecto.

Para mí, la mejor manera de hablar acerca de este tema es una que sugirió el Apóstol Pablo en una carta que escribió a los cristianos que vivían en Éfeso. Me gusta mucho como lo expresa la versión Nueva Traducción Viviente de la Biblia: “Hablaremos la verdad con amor y así creceremos en todo sentido hasta parecernos más y más a Cristo” (Efesios 4:15, NTV).

Dios quiere que crezcamos, que maduremos y que conozcamos toda la verdad. Luego quiere que digamos toda la verdad con amor, como Cristo en todo. 

Adivino que esto es exactamente lo que también estás esperando con relación a este tema: ser maduro, conocer toda la verdad, y decirla en amor, como Cristo en todo. 

Aunque puedes tener la sensación de caminar sobre huevos cuando hables a otros sobre este tema, la verdad es que Dios puede usar tus palabras, tu corazón y tus acciones para traer vida a quienes te rodean. Las personas pueden tardar en cambiar, pero no creas que nadie te está escuchando. No creas que no prestan atención a lo que estás diciendo. A veces solo necesitan meditar en lo que estás diciendo para poder llegar a sus conclusiones por sí solos. 

La gente te está escuchando, les interesa lo que piensas. Y no importa lo que hagas o lo que digas, si buscas toda la verdad y la dices con amor, como Cristo en todo, entonces sin duda podrás ver milagros en las vidas de otros, para bien y para siempre, tanto aquí como en la eternidad.

Ten claro que hay GRAN ESPERANZA. Lo que tienes para ofrecer a otros es algo que necesitan desesperadamente: tu amor, tu interés, tus palabras, tu toque, tu amabilidad, tu comprensión; en resumen, la verdad de Dios envuelta en amor.

Guías de estudio para los capítulos 1 y 2

En este libro, después de cada dos capítulos quiero hacer una pausa y darte la oportunidad de reflexionar o hablar con otros respecto a lo que has leído.

Si estás leyendo este libro por tu cuenta, quizás sea bueno que tomes un lapicero o un lápiz para escribir lo que piensas. Si lo estás leyendo con un grupo, puedan usar estas guías de estudio para hablar sobre los capítulos a medida que avanzan.

Una de las razones por las cuales incluyo estos pensamientos adicionales para reflexión y discusión es porque he leído que Jesús hizo algo similar con los que fueron más cercanos a Él. 

A Jesús le gustaba mucho relatar historias. De hecho, la Biblia dice: “Jesús empleó muchas historias e ilustraciones” (Marcos 4:33a, NTV). Pero a Jesús también le gustaba mucho extender esas historias con las personas más cercanas a él, como el mismo pasaje lo dice: “cuando estaba a solas con sus discípulos, les explicaba todo a ellos” (Marcos 4:34, NTV). 

Mi anhelo con estas guías de estudio es hacer por ti lo que Jesús hizo con los más cercanos a Él, repasar todo, organizar los enredos y desatar los nudos, si los hay. 

Para ese fin, cada guía de estudio incluye un Resumen del Capítulo y varias Preguntas para Reflexión y Discusión. He incluido una guía de estudio por cada capítulo, pero las he intercalado cada dos capítulos del libro para que sea más fácil para quienes quieren completar ese estudio en seis semanas, con una séptima semana opcional si quieren hablar sobre la Conclusión y el Epílogo de manera separada. 

Para las discusiones de grupo ten libertad de elegir solo algunas preguntas de cada capítulo para conversar cada semana, a fin de dar suficiente tiempo para que todos hablen. Para ayudarte a decidir qué preguntas abordar, sugiero que primero uses las preguntas que incluyen referencias bíblicas.

Por favor ten presente que estas guías de estudio pueden ser la parte más importante de todo el libro, puesto que es ahí donde Dios puede hablarte con la mayor claridad respecto a cada tema que se está abordando. 

Sin importar cómo lo hagas, ¡mi oración es que Dios hable!

EL PÚBLICO A QUIEN VA DIRIGIDO ESTE LIBRO 

También quiero decir algo acerca de la audiencia para quienes he escrito este libro. 

El mismo pasaje de la Biblia que nos dice que Jesús relataba historias y las explicaba, también nos dice que Jesús tenía en cuenta a su audiencia en particular cada vez que hablaba. La Biblia dice: “Jesús empleó muchas historias e ilustraciones similares para enseñar a la gente, tanto como pudieran entender” (Marcos 4:33, NTV).

Así mismo, he escrito este libro con una audiencia particular en mente. 

Desde el fallo de la Corte Suprema de 2015, donde se legalizó el matrimonio homosexual en todos los 50 estados de los Estados Unidos, el panorama cambió para los gays en este país. Y como esto hizo eco en todo el mundo, esa simple decisión también ha cambiado el panorama para los gays a nivel mundial. 

Si bien este fallo da una opción para los gays que quieren llevar sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo hasta el mayor extremo posible, ayuda muy poco a quienes no quieren seguir sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, cualquiera sea la razón que tengan para no hacerlo. Para este último grupo es para quien he escrito este libro, no sólo como lectores, sino también para quienes los aman. 

Si conoces gays que están felices con seguir sin limitación sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, entonces quizás este libro no sea para ellos. Sé como es, y quizás tú también lo sepas, que alguien trate de convencerme de algo que ya he mirado muy a fondo, sopesando todos los factores en la medida de lo posible, y llegado a una conclusión. Que alguien trate de convencerme de lo contrario a veces parece “un metal ruidoso o un címbalo que resuena” (1 Corintios 13:1b, NTV). 

Mi deseo con este libro no es añadir más heridas o dolor a quienes a menudo han soportado suficientes heridas y dolores para una vida. 

He escrito este libro primordialmente para quienes están luchando con sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo y para quienes los aman. He escrito para quienes se preguntan si puede haber una alternativa, cualquier alternativa, para tratar con sus sentimientos de atracción hacia el mismo sexo, lo cual no incluye seguir a plenitud esas atracciones. 

Conozco a muchas personas que se sienten atrapadas en sus atracciones, como si estuviesen encerradas en una sola opción para toda la vida. A nadie le gusta sentirse así de enjaulado. Si conoces a alguien que se siente “estancado” en algo donde no quiere estar, atrapado por sentimientos que nunca pidió tener y nunca habría elegido por sí mismo, aunque sintiera que tenía una elección, entonces este libro es para ti. 

Este libro es para quienes quieren seguir un camino diferente con sus vidas y para quienes los aman. He escrito este libro no sólo como un ejercicio académico, sino como una manera de compartir contigo un camino que yo mismo he seguido y he encontrado muy satisfactorio, incluso más fantástico de lo que nunca imaginé. Es un viaje que puedo recomendar de todo corazón a todo aquel que quiera seguirlo. 

Para quienes no están interesados en esta opción, pero sí les interesa aprender lo más que pueden acerca de un tema cercano y querido para ellos, creo que este libro será de gran beneficio, no solo para ellos sino también para quienes los aman, así no haya mayor razón que entenderse mejor a sí mismos y unos a otros. He escrito este libro de una manera que incluso los que nunca en sus vidas han tenido una atracción hacia el mismo sexo puedan entender a, y relacionarse con los que sí. 

Al final, los verdaderos beneficiarios de este libro serán aquellas personas que se recibirán el mejor amor que se dé como resultado de que alguien que los ama tomó el tiempo para leerlo. 

DOS OTROS LIBROS

Por último, para los lectores que todavía no han puesto su fe en Cristo, o para los cristianos que quisieran leer un relato más romántico de mi historia (¡porque es una historia de amor!), quizás quieran leer mi verdadera historia en forma de novela titulada Fifty Shades of Grace, la cual, por razones de modestia, escribí bajo mi seudónimo, Nicholas Deere. 

Los lectores han dicho que la historia de Fifty Shades of Grace es “un relato cautivante” y “una historia con la que todos nos podemos relacionar”. Como su título lo indica, el libro contiene un relato más bien sensual de mi historia, y aunque está muy bien narrado, algunos lectores lo han encontrado sorprendentemente íntimo. (¡Considérate advertido!)

Para aquellos lectores que quieran leer mi historia en el contexto del “cuadro completo” de lo que Dios tiene para decir respecto al sexo más allá del tema de la homosexualidad, quizás quieran leer mi libro, Lo que Dios Dice Acerca del Sexo. Este popular pero práctico librito ha sido de ayuda para lectores de todas las edades que desean aprender más acerca del sexo desde una perspectiva bíblica, incluyendo lectores menores que por primera vez están empezando a aprender acerca del sexo.

Tras esta introducción, y para quienes quieren continuar leyendo este libro (¡y espero que así sea!), ¡prosigamos con las guías de estudio para los Capítulos 1 y 2!

Eric Elder

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 1: “MI TESTIMONIO EN POCAS PALABRAS”

Resumen del Capítulo

El breve testimonio del autor comunica al menos tres cosas:

  • que llegó a la homosexualidad,
  • que salió de la homosexualidad gracias al poder de Cristo y con la ayuda de una amiga que luego llegó a ser su esposa,
  • y que siente que desde entonces ha estado viviendo una vida abundante, por más de 30 años.

El autor dice que a lo largo de este libro también propondrá ideas para ayudar a los lectores a caminar junto a las personas que aman, en el que puede ser el viaje más importante de sus vidas.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Juan 10:10. ¿Cómo crees que estas palabras de Jesús se pueden aplicar al testimonio del autor?

Lee Juan 20:30-31. A la luz de estos versículos, da algunas razones por las cuales las personas comparten sus historias respecto a lo que Jesús ha hecho por ellos. ¿Qué razones puede tener el autor de este libro para querer compartir su historia?

Lee Juan 21:25. Si Jesús tocó las vidas de tantas personas cuando caminó en esta tierra, de modo que no podrían contenerse en todo el mundo, y si desde entonces ha estado vivo y activo tocando las vidas de muchos, ¿de qué manera crees que esta idea puede ayudarte con respecto a la capacidad que Él tiene para tocar tu vida y las de tus seres queridos?

¿Qué pensamientos vinieron a tu mente cuando leíste el breve testimonio del autor? ¿Su historia dio pie para alguna pregunta? ¿Qué más quisieras saber acerca de su historia?

¿Has escuchado alguna vez un testimonio similar al del autor, sobre alguien que haya experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, pero que haya llegado a vivir una vida heterosexual a largo plazo y muy satisfactoria? Si tal vida fuera posible para ti o algún ser querido, ¿la quisieras para ti o para esa persona? ¿Por qué sí o por qué no?

¿Conoces a alguien que pueda beneficiarse de leer este libro y estudiarlo contigo? De ser así ¿considerarías pedirle que lo haga?

¿Jesús ha tocado tu vida de una manera similar a como tocó la vida del autor, así los detalles sean diferentes? De ser así, ¿estarías dispuesto a compartir tu propio “testimonio en pocas palabras” con quienes te rodean?

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 2: “MI TESTIMONIO EN UNA CÁSCARA DE HUEVO”

Resumen del Capítulo

Hablar sobre homosexualidad a veces puede ser como caminar sobre huevos. Pero el hecho de que sea un tema sensible no quiere decir que no podemos hablar sobre el mismo siendo sensibles. ¿Por qué? Porque:

  • las personas quieren hablar al respecto, 
  • hoy más que nunca hay más preguntas acerca del tema,
  • y las vidas de muchos pueden cambiar para bien y para siempre, así como la vida del autor fue transformada cuando leyó lo que otro dijo acerca de este asunto.

El autor dice que a lo largo de los años ha sentido miedo de compartir su testimonio por dos razones:

  • ¡por temor a lo que puedan pensar las personas que odian a los gays, 
  • ¡y por temor a lo que las personas que aman a los gays puedan pensar!

Sin embargo, el autor sigue compartiendo su testimonio con la esperanza de que ayude a quienes están experimentando atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, pero no quieren seguir esos sentimientos, cualquiera sea la razón para no querer hacerlo.

El autor sabe que quizás haya personas que no acepten lo que él tiene para decir, sin importa qué sea, pero anima a los lectores a seguir leyendo, y dice lo mismo que dijo el ciego que Jesús sanó: “Una cosa sé; ¡Yo era ciego, pero ahora veo!”

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Juan 9:1-41. Después que le hicieron varias preguntas acerca de su sanidad, ¿como el hombre ciego resumió lo que le había sucedido (versículo 25)? ¿Por qué es importante lo que él dijo? ¿Cómo relaciona el autor esta historia con la suya propia?

¿Encuentras que el tema de la homosexualidad surge más y más en conversaciones hoy en día? ¿Por qué el autor considera que esto puede ser bueno? Cuando este tema surge, ¿te sientes cómodo hablando al respecto, o te sientes más como caminando sobre huevos?

Lee el Salmo 119:32. ¿Qué razones da el salmista para decir que su corazón ha sido liberado? ¿En qué áreas de nuestras vidas esta misma razón también puede liberar nuestros corazones? 

Lee Efesios 4:15. Según este versículo, ¿qué quiere Dios que hagamos y que lleguemos a ser? ¿Cómo el hacer estas cosas nos ayuda a crecer a la semejanza de Cristo? ¿En qué punto del “ciclo de aprendizaje de vida” te ves en cuanto a este tema?

¿Por qué algunas personas siguen siempre sin convencerse de que los cambios reales son posibles, al menos según la cita de David Swift y la historia del hombre que pensaba que estaba muerto? 

¿De qué manera puedes aplicar la cita de J. Masai: “por todas partes hay sentimientos, sé sensible” a tus conversaciones acerca de este o cualquier otro tema?

Capítulo 3: Algunas palabras sobre atracciones

Donde comparto la complejidad de las atracciones, de dónde vienen, qué hacer con ellas, y el hecho de que pueden cambiar y en efecto lo hacen, a veces de manera muy significativa.

En este libro encontrarás que a menudo hablo acerca de “atracciones”. Hay un gran debate en torno a la procedencia de las atracciones, ya sea que las circunstancias las forjen o no, ya sea que sean una elección o no, y ya sea que se puedan cambiar o no. Afortunadamente, aquí estoy para responder a todas tus preguntas, sin falta (dicho, con ironía). 

La primera pregunta que me hacen respecto a la homosexualidad es esta: 

“¿Crees que las personas nacen gays?” 

Es una pregunta válida, y en este capítulo daré una respuesta válida. Pero creo que la pregunta más interesante es: “¿Por qué las personas sienten atracción hacia quienes se siente atraídas?”

Esta historia no está en la Biblia, pero he escuchado que Adán un día habló con Dios acerca de Eva. 

Adán dijo: “¿Dios, por qué la hiciste tan hermosa?”

Dios dijo: “La hice así, Adán, para que te sintieras atraído hacia ella”.

Adán pensó por un momento y luego dijo: “Pero ¿Dios, por qué la hiciste tan tonta?”

A lo cual Dios respondió: “La hice así, Adán, para que se sintiera atraída hacia ti”.

(Es una broma que ofende a todos por igual, según mis hijos, eso es lo que la hace tan divertida).

Aunque esa historia acerca de la atracción no está en la Biblia, hay muchas otras que sí lo están, historias como la atracción de Jacob hacia Raquel. (Génesis 28-30), la atracción de David hacia Betsabé, (2 Samuel 11-12), o la atracción de Amnón hacia Tamar (2 Samuel 13). 

Cada uno de estos relatos describe atracciones profundas, pero todas de ellas con finales dramáticamente diferentes. ¿Por qué? Por las elecciones que las personas hicieron respecto a las atracciones que sentían, decisiones que cumplían o destruían los planes de Dios para sus vidas.

Durante los últimos 30 años he tenido conversaciones cara a cara con cientos de personas, y siempre me asombran las respuestas que escucho cuando hablo de las atracciones. Las personas tienen atracciones muy diferentes por razones muy diferentes. 

Hay personas a las que les gustan los hombres con barba; y hay quienes los prefieren sin barba. Hay quienes gustan de mujeres con curvas muy pronunciadas; y hay quienes las prefieren más delicadas. A algunas personas un actor les parece atractivo, mientras que otras no piensan igual del mismo actor. Las razones por las cuales las personas se sienten atraídas a otras personas varían casi tanto como las personas mismas.

CAMBIO DE ATRACCIONES

En una ocasión, después de conocer a un hombre que yo también conocía, una amiga anciana me dijo que le parecía uno de los hombres más feos que jamás había conocido. Aunque no era repulsivo para nada, algunos de los rasgos de su rostro eran desproporcionados con respecto a lo que ella estaba acostumbrada a ver. 

Sin embargo, después me dijo que, tras varios meses de conocerlo, comenzó a verlo de una forma muy diferente. En realidad era un hombre muy atractivo, y él la ganó a ella. Tras meses de pensar que era uno de los hombres más feos que había conocido, llegó a verlo como uno de los más atractivos que jamás había conocido.

Veo esto todo el tiempo, ya sea con novios, novias, esposos o amantes, donde una persona que no sentía ninguna atracción en particular hacia otra, de alguna manera, y repentinamente encuentra que esa persona es el único objeto de sus afectos. He visto personas enamorarse locamente de otros que antes no habían despertado el más mínimo interés en sus corazones. 

También lo he visto pasar a la inversa: alguien que en un momento estaba locamente atraído hacia otra persona, pero luego, incluso de repente o con el paso de un periodo de tiempo, deja de sentir cualquier atracción hacia esa persona. La llama que una vez ardía con tanto brillo desaparece por completo. La persona ha “perdido ese sentimiento de amor”, y ni siquiera queda un rastro de humo de aquel fuego que en otro momento estuvo tan encendido. 

¿Qué hace que las atracciones de otros cambien de forma tan dramática? 

A menudo nada cambia en cuanto a la apariencia o la personalidad de quien es el objeto de tanto cariño o desprecio, pero todo cambia en la mente de la persona que ama o desprecia. 

Se ha dicho que el órgano sexual más importante del cuerpo es la mente. Después de 30 años escuchando las historias de muchos respecto a lo que les atrae y lo que no, estoy convencido de que eso es cierto.

También he encontrado algo particularmente claro al hablar con personas que se sienten atraídas hacia personas de su mismo sexo. Las personas con este tipo de atracción no siempre se sienten atraídas hacia todos los de su mismo sexo, sino solo hacia un pequeño grupo.

Hablando con un hombre que por muchos años ha luchado con la atracción hacia el mismo sexo, le pregunté si se sentía atraído hacia todos los hombres o sólo hacia algunos. Él respondió, “sólo hacia algunos, y no son muchos”. 

Aunque luchaba con sus atracciones hacia ciertos hombres, durante nuestra conversación entendió que no todos los hombres lo atraían, sino que en realidad eran unos pocos. 

Cuando le pregunté acerca del tipo de hombres que lo atraían, hizo una lista específica de cualidades y características que él equiparaba a lo que buscaba en una amistad cercana con un hombre. Incluso si hubiese nacido con una atracción hacia los hombres, en realidad no había nacido con una atracción hacia todos los hombres, porque sencillamente no tenía ese tipo de atracción, sino que era solo hacia un pequeño subconjunto de hombres.

¿NACIDO GAY?

Permíteme subrayar este punto un poco más. Un día estaba hablando con un hombre afroamericano acerca de sus atracciones hacia los hombres. Cuando iniciamos la conversación, me dijo que estaba completamente convencido de que había nacido gay. Si no era así, ¿entonces por qué había tenido esos sentimientos toda su vida?, se preguntaba. 

Cuando le pregunté si se sentía atraído hacia todos los hombres o sólo hacia algunos, su respuesta fue, “¡es claro que sólo hacia algunos!” 

Luego pasó a decirme que había hombres mayores de cierta edad y otros menores hacia los que definitivamente no se sentía atraído. También me dijo que había algunos tipos de hombres por los cuales sentía completa repulsión, por la forma como caminaban, hablaban o como se comportaban, y que nunca consideraría tener ningún tipo de relación romántica con ese tipo de hombres. 

Sin embargo, lo más diciente de todo, para él y para mí, fue cuando dijo que, dentro de ese pequeño subgrupo de hombres, solo se sentía atraído hacia hombres blancos. Él nunca jamás, ni una sola vez, había sentido atracción o había tenido un encuentro con otro hombre afroamericano.

Después de conversar por unos minutos acerca de lo que acababa de decir, le pregunté, lo más amablemente que pude: “¿Entonces me estás diciendo que cuando Dios te creó, te hizo gay, Y TAMBIÉN racista?” 

El hombre soltó una carcajada ante la ironía de la verdad que acababa de comprender. 

Aunque quizás no haya conocido las razones detrás de las atracciones que tenía, entendió que estaba mal atribuir sus atracciones a Dios o a la naturaleza solo porque no sabía de dónde más provenían. 

En ese momento, tanto él como yo pudimos ver que en sus atracciones había algo que no se debía a su ser interno desde el nacimiento, sino que podía ser otra cosa en juego. 

Aunque algo respecto a cómo fue diseñado desde la concepción puede haber tenido un efecto en las atracciones que tenía, el hecho que no se sintiera atraído a todos los hombres, ni siquiera hacia la mayoría de ellos, sino solo hacia un subgrupo en particular de hombres con un subconjunto característico de rasgos, nos hizo entender que probablemente en lo relacionado con atracciones había más cosas en juego que el simple hecho de haber “nacido gay”.

¿Creo que hay razones por las cuales nos sentimos atraídos hacia ciertas personas, algunas de las cuales pueden tener mucho que ver con la forma como Dios nos diseño? ¡Sí! A veces, nuestras reacciones y respuestas hacia otras personas, y sus reacciones y respuestas hacia nosotros, se dan por características o rasgos particulares que Dios nos dio al nacer. (Y antes de finalizar este capítulo, compartiré contigo algunas de las razones por las cuales mi diseño en particular me hizo especialmente receptivo a los avances de otros hombres).

Pero también creo que más allá de nuestro diseño inicial al nacer, hay razones que nos hacen sentir atraídos o no hacia ciertas personas, sin importar su género.  

SENTIMIENTOS

Al hablar de homosexualidad, hablamos de sentimientos. Y los sentimientos pueden cambiar, a veces tan pronto alguien descubre que la persona que ama ha sido infiel, o ha sido sorprendida en una evidente mentira, o ha creado un hábito destructivo. Por el contrario, los sentimientos pueden cambiar tan pronto alguien derrama una copa de vino, o al mirar una luna llena, o al extender una manta sobre la playa. 

Los sentimientos también pueden tardar más tiempo en cambiar, siguiendo la rutina y el flujo normal de una relación a medida que crece o fracasa.

Sin embargo, aunque los sentimientos cambian mucho, también es importante tener presente que puede ser increíblemente difícil cambiarlos, y a menudo persisten por mucho más tiempo del deseado. 

Sé cómo es enamorarse de alguien que no se ha enamorado de mí, y no importa cuánto haya intentado desear u orar para no tener esos sentimientos, no he podido hacerlo, no en mis propias fuerzas. Sin embargo, el hecho de que esos sentimientos persistan no significa que Dios haya determinado que yo esté con esa persona (¡puedo decir que para el gran alivio de la otra persona!) 

También hay personas hacia quienes me he sentido atraído de inmediato, pero después de una o dos conversaciones con ellos, he perdido toda la atracción. 

La sola experiencia, tanto para mí como la de las personas que he escuchado en cientos de conversaciones personales, me dice que nuestras atracciones son complejas, a veces variables, a veces no, a veces persistentes sin importar cuánto lo intentemos, y a veces, al parecer, no se pueden resucitar, así lo intentemos.

Así que, para dar respuesta a la pregunta que prometí responder al comienzo de este capítulo, cuando me preguntan: “¿Crees que las personas nacen gays?” para mí es importante saber la pregunta detrás de esa pregunta.

Si lo que me están preguntando es: “¿Los sentimientos que tengo ahora, o los que he tenido toda mi vida, son los mismos que voy a tener mañana o por el resto de mi vida?, entonces mi respuesta es: “No, tus sentimientos pueden y van a cambiar, y también pueden y podrían cambiar en esta área de su vida”. 

Pero si la pregunta es: “¿Hay algo respecto a cómo me creó Dios, que haya influido en las atracciones que siento ahora, o he sentido en el pasado?” entonces mi respuesta es: “Sí, Dios te creó, y la forma como tú y los demás reaccionan y responden a la forma como fuiste creado puede tener algo que ver con las atracciones que sientes ahora, y las que puedas sentir en el futuro”. 

No soy psicólogo, pero sí sé que las personas tratan a otros de manera diferente, de acuerdo con la forma como Dios los creó, ya sea que sean blancos o negros, zurdos o diestros, delgados u obesos. Y sé que las reacciones de las personas con relación a cómo fueron creadas sí afectan sus atracciones o falta de las mismas. 

Así que, sí creo que la forma como somos creados influye en las atracciones que sentimos y las que otros sienten hacia nosotros.

Pero cuando las personas preguntan: “¿Crees que las personas nacen gays?” a menudo preguntan con motivos muy diferentes. Si son personas que se sienten atraídas hacia el mismo sexo y quieren seguir con esas atracciones, entonces a menudo esperan que la respuesta sea “sí”, para así poder dar libertad sin obstáculos a sus atracciones, al menos sin ese obstáculo. Pero si son personas que se sienten atraídas hacia el mismo sexo y no quieren seguir con esas atracciones, personas que se sienten atrapadas y sin esperanza en sus situaciones, entonces a menudo esperan que la respuesta sea “no”, para así tener la esperanza de que el cambio sí es posible. 

REFORMULANDO LAS PREGUNTAS

Es por esto que me gusta replantear las preguntas que me hacen, no para evitarlas, sino como una forma de abordar las que hay en sus corazones, las cuales, en el caso de si las personas nacen gays o no, en el fondo simplemente se reducen a esta: “¿Crees que las atracciones de las personas pueden cambiar?” 

Y a esa pregunta, mi respuesta es un claro y resonante “¡Sí! Sí creo que las atracciones de las personas pueden cambiar y cambian. 

Luego les doy algunos de los ejemplos que acabo de compartir contigo. 

Para quienes se sienten atrapados y sin esperanza en medio de su situación, esto suele darles esperanzas reales, a veces por primera vez en sus vidas. Para las personas que buscan una razón para “perseguir a” lo que sea que quieren, esto hace que al menos hagan una pausa y piensen un poco más cuidadosamente lo que desean y por qué lo desean.

La realidad práctica es que sencillamente no podemos “perseguir a” todas y cada una de las personas hacia las que nos sentimos atraídos, cuando nos parezcan atractivas. 

Me he sentido atraído hacia muchas estrellas de Hollywood, pero no puedo perseguir a ellas. A menudo pertenecen a alguien más, y quizás nunca se sientan atraídos hacia mí. 

También me he sentido atraído hacia personas casadas o que ya están en relaciones de compromiso. Tampoco puedo perseguir a ellos, sólo porque me siento atraído hacia ellos, de lo contrario destruiría las relaciones que ya tienen con otros. 

Si alguien que siente atracción hacia el mismo sexo se casara con su pareja gay, se estaría engañando a sí mismo al pensar que por casarse con esa persona, de una u otra forma todas sus otras atracciones hacia los demás quedarían eliminadas. 

El casarse no elimina de repente las atracciones que sentimos hacia los demás, ni en los matrimonios gay ni en los matrimonios heterosexuales. Entonces ¿qué harán las personas casadas con sus atracciones sexuales no deseadas? ¿Ser indulgentes con esas atracciones? ¿O (¡Dios no lo quiera!) negarlas? 

En el mejor de los casos, elegirán la última, por su propio bien, por el bien de Dios, y por el bien de todos los involucrados.

Sencillamente no podemos concluir que, si sentimos atracción sexual o romántica hacia una persona, entonces eso quiere decir que Dios quiere que “persigamos a” esa persona. Es por esto que Dios nos ha dado restricciones, las cuales no solo están escritas en la Biblia, sino en nuestros corazones, tales como “no cometerás adulterio”. Dios ha establecido estas restricciones para protegernos a nosotros y a los demás, y para ayudarnos a comprender la plenitud de lo que Él tiene en mente para nuestras vidas, incluyendo nuestras relaciones amorosas. 

¿Las personas nacen siendo gays? Aunque es posible, es casi como decir que las personas nacen racistas. No estoy negando que la forma como Dios nos creo puede influenciar, y de hecho lo hace, la forma como reaccionamos y respondemos los unos a los otros. Pero atribuir esos sentimientos de atracción solo a Dios, o solo a la naturaleza misma, niega lo que para mí es una realidad obvia de que sin duda también hay otras fuerzas en juego.

INCIDENTES QUE INCITAN

Aunque en tantas conversaciones que he tenido con hombres y mujeres a lo largo de los años he encontrado que son pocos los que no han podido identificar alguna razón en particular que explique por qué sienten atracción hacia los de su mismo sexo, o por qué tienen aversión contra los del sexo opuesto, muchos de ellos han podido determinar, con absoluta claridad, el día, momento, incidente o razón exacta que los hizo mover su atención hacia los del mismo sexo o desviarla de los del sexo opuesto.

Algunas mujeres han compartido conmigo incidentes que las han llevado a temer el tener intimidad con hombres. En consecuencia, sencillamente se sienten más cómodas con mujeres. 

Parece sugerir, de manera lógica al menos, que si un evento o circunstancia en particular hizo que los sentimientos de atracción de alguien se dirigieran en cierta dirección, entonces, quizás, otro evento o circunstancia podría hacer que los sentimientos de atracción de esa persona se movieran en otra dirección. 

Esto no es para decir que puede ser fácil cambiar las direcciones. Pero sí es para decir que sí se puede asumir que dicho cambio es posible. Y, con mis propios ojos muchas veces he visto reversiones así de dramáticas.

También he escuchado a hombres decir que ahora no sienten atracción hacia ninguna mujer gracias a la influencia negativa de una o varias mujeres dominantes en sus vidas, ya sea su madre, su hermana o su pareja. Esas mujeres los hacen sentir reprimidos y constreñidos, de modo que terminan prefiriendo estar con hombres. 

En consecuencia, se podría decir que, si sus atracciones se vieron afectadas negativamente por la mala influencia de unas pocas personas en sus vidas, entonces también podrían verse influenciadas positivamente por la influencia positiva de unos pocos en el futuro. 

De nuevo, no estoy diciendo que esto tenga que ser fácil, y he caminado por esta misma senda con suficientes personas durante suficiente tiempo, y sé lo difícil que puede ser, pero sí estoy diciendo que sí es concebible, y más que concebible, vuelvo y lo digo, con mis propios ojos he visto esos cambios.

Todo esto, desde luego, llega al fuerte campo de la psicología, donde abunda un amplio rango de posibilidades y opiniones respecto a las atracciones de las personas. 

Sin embargo, ni siquiera sugeriría esas ideas si no hubiese visto personas descubrir la fuente de sus atracciones, resolver las razones y los por qué, y luego avanzar hacia otra forma de pensamiento y de vida, que les ha dado mucha más plenitud, mucho más gozo y más paz que nunca. (Esto también da lugar a la vieja pregunta: “¿Cuántos psicólogos se necesitan para cambiar una bombilla?” La respuesta: “Solo uno, pero es necesario que la bombilla de verdad quiera cambiar”).

MI RECORRIDO HACIA LA HOMOSEXUALIDAD

Permíteme acercar eso a mí vida. Ya en este capítulo dije que iba a compartir contigo más acerca de mis propias atracciones y algunos de los factores que he identificado como los elementos que en un comienzo me hicieron muy receptivo hacia la homosexualidad.

En cierto sentido sí creo que la forma como Dios me hizo ha afectado mis atracciones y se trata de esto: Dios me hizo con un carácter muy sensible. Soy sensible con las personas, soy sensible al dolor, y soy sensible con las sutilezas, los sentimientos, los colores y las texturas en la belleza, la música y el arte. 

Creo firmemente que así es como Dios me hizo, y que me creó de esa forma para realizar sus propósitos específicos en y por medio de mi vida, así como ha creado a otros de otra forma para lograr sus únicos propósitos en y por medio de sus vidas.

Sin embargo, esto no quiere decir que Dios me creó para tener relaciones sexuales con otros hombres. 

Una simple mirada a las partes del cuerpo involucradas revela que todos nosotros, como humanos, estamos hechos para la sexualidad heterosexual. Los órganos encajan mejor de esa forma, y están diseñados para encajar de maneras y por razones muy específicas, incluyendo la intimidad y la reproducción. 

Además de esta “mirada simple” a las partes del cuerpo involucradas, un estudio más detallado, ya sea en libros de medicina o a la luz de la experiencia práctica, revela la increíble intrincación con la que funciona el sistema reproductivo humano. Es verdaderamente asombrosa la manera como todo encaja, desde cómo la estimulación de los órganos sexuales hace posible la relación sexual, hasta la forma como la esperma y el óvulo se unen para dar inicio a la vida, permitir el crecimiento de un bebé, y llegar al alumbramiento. (Para mí, el sistema reproductivo humano es una de las evidencias naturales más atractivas que demuestra la existencia de Dios).

Estuve presente en el parto de mis seis hijos y es asombroso cómo nacen los bebés. Pero también he estado en la concepción de mis seis hijos, ¡y la forma como son concebidos es incluso más asombrosa!

Desde un punto de vista meramente físico, para mí es muy convincente que Dios me creó como ser humano para ser heterosexual. Así es como nací. Decir lo contrario sería negar “los hechos de la vida” como los veo.

No creo que el hecho de ser alguien sensible signifique que Dios me haya creado para tener sexo con hombres. Pero mi sensibilidad ha significado que con más frecuencia he estado más inclinado hacia el arte, la música, el drama y el baile que hacia los deportes de contacto o a juegos rudos y fuertes. 

Gracias a esto, el haber crecido en el pequeño pueblo donde crecí, a menudo me llevó a estar rodeado de mujeres que compartían las mismas características y fácilmente se convirtieron en unas de mis mejores amigas. 

Me gustaban los deportes, pero no los deportes de contacto, así que tomé clases de danza y de gimnasia en un estudio de baile que quedaba en un pueblo más grande cerca de donde vivía. En cada una de esas clases solía haber de 20 a 30 niñas, y máximo uno o dos chicos. 

Me gustaba la música, y cuando era niño escuché a un hombre de Suiza tocar la flauta, quien dijo que la tocaba cuando caminaba por los Alpes Suizos, cuando lo escuché decir eso, me atrajo mucho poder tocar la flauta algún día. 

Así que cuando tuve la oportunidad de elegir un instrumento para tocar en la banda de la escuela, elegí la flauta. A lo largo de los años, a menudo he tocado en bandas marciales, rodeado de mujeres, en lugar de chocar cabezas en el campo de fútbol con otros hombres. 

Canté en el coro y actué en obras de teatro, las cuáles, de nuevo, en el pueblo donde crecí eran actividades dominadas por mujeres.

Ninguna de estas actividades en sí mismas me hicieron gay. Ninguna de estas actividades me hicieron tener sexo con otro hombre. De hecho, siempre me asombraba que algunos de los chicos de la escuela me llamaran Gay porque hacía esas cosas, ¡sin embargo yo tenía amistades más estrechas con mujeres que cualquiera otro de los hombres que conocía! 

RELACIONES CON HOMBRES

El problema para mí, así como para muchos hombres que llegan a la homosexualidad, no estaba en las relaciones con las mujeres. Ellas a menudo eran mis mejores amigas. Mi problema estaba en las relaciones con los hombres. Yo no hacía parte de su cultura. No hacía parte de sus bromas en los vestidores. No hacía parte de sus clubes sociales, de deportes o clubes para beber. 

Me parecía irónico ver que los hombres que me llamaban gay saltaban unos sobre otros en el campo de fútbol para celebrar sus victorias o se daban palmadas en el trasero después de un juego, así fuera en público, en el campo o estando en privado en las duchas después de un juego. 

Los hombres más machos que conocía, rara vez pasaban tiempo con chicas, mucho menos sólo en relaciones de amistad, sino que pasaban tiempo con otros chicos. TODO. EL. TIEMPO. Me llamaban gay, pero parecían tener relaciones personales y físicas más cercanas con otros hombres, que las que yo jamás había tenido. 

En ese entonces yo no tenía sentimientos de homosexualidad, pero eso no evitó que me llamaran gay, no basándose en mi sexualidad, sino basándose en las actividades en las que participaba. Eso me hacía sentir fuera de sincronía con otros chicos.

¡Y sí me gustaban las chicas! Tuve algunas novias en la escuela media y una relación significativa en la secundaria. Éramos románticos, emocional y físicamente, a menudo nos tomábamos de las manos, nos besábamos y dábamos largas caminatas por los bosques. 

Me gustaba la intimidad física y emocional de esas relaciones. Pero nunca tuve alguna actividad sexual, ya que era algo que sólo era correcto para el matrimonio.

Cuando fui a la universidad, conocí algunos chicos que mostraban verdadero interés en ser mis amigos. En lugar de burlarse de mis talentos artísticos, ¡ellos los celebraban! Pensaban que era bueno que me gustara el canto, el baile y la actuación. 

No podía creer que hubiera hombres que de verdad me entendieran, me apreciaran y disfrutaran estar conmigo por lo que yo era, y no esperaban que fuera alguien diferente. 

Cuando uno de esos mismos chicos se me acercó para ver si yo podía estar interesado en algo más para nuestra amistad, no me tomó mucho tiempo decir “sí”. Aunque tener una relación íntima con un hombre era territorio desconocido para mí, y al comienzo tuve algunas reservas en cuanto a la idea, aún así me fue fácil caer en ello. 

De hecho, me gustó. Me gustó la atención, me gustó que alguien se sintiera atraído hacia mí, y me gustaron los sentimientos físicos que eso producía. 

A nivel emocional, ese tipo de presencia de otro hombre en mi vida satisfacía una profunda necesidad de amistad masculina que había en mi interior, la cual sentía que no había tenido por mucho tiempo, y tenía como bono adicional la afección física que incluía. Para mí, ese era un verdadero caso de “amigos con beneficios”, como algunas personas suelen llamar a esas relaciones.

Cuando entendí que el sexo parecía ser el camino hacia la satisfacción de esa profunda necesidad de amistad masculina en mi vida, encontré que mis atracciones hacia los hombres estaban creciendo. 

Así como muchas mujeres lo han hecho, comencé a buscar hombres con quienes pudiera tener intimidad, de modo que también pudiera sentirme cercano a ellos como amigos. Y, como muchas mujeres, pronto descubrí que, cuando decía “no” al sexo, esa amistad que a mi parecer estaba ganando llegaba a su fin. Tras ver terminadas muchas amistades por esas razones, entendí que quizás esa no era la mejor forma de hacer amigos.

Aunque mis atracciones hacia los hombres crecían con cada relación, no estaba muy seguro si quería que mis atracciones crecieran en esa dirección. 

Pero luego comencé a preguntarme si tenía alguna opción. Aunque en la secundaria, cuando mis amigos me llamaban gay, en realidad no lo era, ahora no podía negarlo. Me refiero a que la primera persona con quien tuve alguna relación sexual fue un hombre, y desde entonces solo tuve intimidad sexual con hombres, así que supongo que eso me hizo gay, ¿correcto? ¿O no? 

Y si era gay, ¿iba a serlo para siempre? No estaba muy seguro de lo que pensaba acerca de esa idea. 

¿De verdad había nacido gay?

Capítulo 4: Algunas palabras acerca de ser gay

Donde comparto lo que significa ser gay, por qué más personas de lo que crees podrían ser definidas como gays, y por qué nunca me consideré a mí mismo gay, incluso cuando lo era.

Nunca me consideré a mí mismo gay. De hecho, ni siquiera sabía el significado de esa palabra hasta cuando algunos chicos de la escuela me llamaron así. Tuve que buscarlo en el Diccionario Webster’s Collegiate de mi familia.(Todavía faltaban unos 20 años para que naciera Google).

Las palabras de elección en ese tiempo variaban entre gay, mariquita, afeminado, raro, y la más denigrante de todas: homo (como cuando caminaba por el pasillo para ir a clase me decían “¡homo!”, o más aún cuando me abría paso por un vestidor lleno de gente después de la clase de educación física, tratando de pasar entre otros 25 chicos con quienes acababan de compartir la ducha abierta). 

A veces las palabras eran en broma. Otras veces las decía con la verdadera intención de quererlo decir.

Cuando busqué la palabra gay, ésta me condujo a la palabra homosexual, la cual estaba definida como “una persona sexualmente atraída hacia miembros de su mismo sexo”. 

En la terminología de hoy la palabra gay suele definirse de manera similar, como “alguien que experimenta atracciones hacia su mismo sexo”. Al usar el término “atracciones del mismo sexo”, la definición amplía un poco el significado para incluir no solo los que se sienten sexualmente atraídos a miembros de su mismo sexo, sino también a quienes están romántica o emocionalmente atraídos a miembros de su mismo sexo, así no sientan atracción sexual hacia ellos.

En cualquiera de estas definiciones he encontrado interesante que la homosexualidad no describe ninguna característica física en particular de una persona, sino los sentimientos que experimenta una persona. Como tal, ser gay no es algo que ningún científico u otra persona podría identificar en otra persona con algún grado de certeza sin que esa persona se lo revele. 

Esto no es para decir que no puede haber algunas expresiones físicas de esos sentimientos, porque a veces las hay. Pero sería como tratar de identificar si alguien tiene hambre o no, sin que esa persona te lo diga. No puedes decir si alguien está hambriento sólo con mirar a esa persona, a menos, que, desde luego, su hambre se manifieste en la manera como actúa debido a su condición.

Con estas definiciones, cualquiera que tenga sentimientos de atracción hacia alguien de su propio sexo podría ser considerado gay. No se tiene en cuenta el grado en el que sienten esas atracciones, ya sean fuertes o débiles, o si en algún grado también tiene sentimientos hacia alguien del sexo opuesto. 

Tampoco toma en cuenta si los sentimientos de atracción de una persona hacia los miembros de su mismo sexo incluyen a todos, o solo un subgrupo, sea grande o pequeño. Si alguien está experimentando o ha experimentado sentimientos de atracción hacia alguien de su mismo sexo, ya sea a nivel sexual, romántico o emocional, entonces, al menos al momento de tener esas atracciones, esa persona es gay. 

Esta definición es demasiado amplia, y, según mis conversaciones con personas que me han hablado acerca de sus propios sentimientos de atracción, incluye muchas más personas de las que podrías imaginar.  

¿OBVIO O INCONSCIENTE?

He hablado con personas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, que están casadas y tienen hijos, con otros que permanecen en soltería y celibato, algunos miran fútbol americano en televisión o ballet en el teatro, y hay quienes tienen un aspecto suave y afeminado y otros con apariencia de machos y rudos. 

A veces tengo que contenerme para no hablar cuando alguien, ya sea una esposa o una madre, me dice que puede identificar a un gay a una milla de distancia, como si hubiera algo en las expresiones externas de cada persona que pone en evidencia  que es homosexual, sin embargo esa misma persona puede ignorar el hecho de que su propio esposo o hijo acaba de revelarme que ha experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, solo que nunca ha compartido esos sentimientos con su esposa o madre por lo que podría pensar si lo supiera. 

Así que, aunque puede ser posible identificar ciertos tipos de gays, es muy difícil reconocer la amplia variedad de personas que a diario nos rodean y que experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, muchos de quienes nunca adivinarías que son gay. 

¿Por qué? Porque nuestros sentimientos se dan en el corazón y en la mente, y solo se exteriorizan si optamos por expresarlos (o si los revelamos inadvertidamente). 

Lo que vemos en el exterior de una persona no siempre revela lo que sucede en el interior. Como Dios le dijo al profeta Samuel cuando estaba buscando al siguiente líder de Israel: “No te dejes impresionar por su apariencia ni por su estatura… La gente se fija en las apariencias, pero yo me fijo en el corazón” (de 1 Samuel 16:7).

¿Por qué es importante conocer esto? Porque si vamos a hablar acerca de cómo amar mejor a los gays, es importante conocer que la definición de gay incluye personas de quienes quizás nunca hayas sospechado que tienen esas atracciones. 

Quizás no haya nada en su forma de hablar, caminar o comportarse, o nada en lo que hacen o no hacen que pueda darte una pista. 

Siempre que hablo en público acerca de este tema, las personas se me acercan, ya sea en público, justo después de terminar, o en privado en otro momento, para revelarme que ellos también han sentido atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Las primeras palabras que a menudo dicen son algo así: “Nunca en mi vida he hablado con nadie acerca de esto, pero por lo que has compartido, siento que puedo decírtelo”.

Uno de estos era un hombre casado y con hijos. Después de una charla se me acercó para preguntarme cómo había enfrentado la vergüenza de todo, habiendo tenido atracciones hacia el mismo sexo como las que él tenía. 

Le hice algunas preguntas y me dijo que él hacía parte de la armada. Dijo que cuando alguno de sus compañeros de abordo hacía chistes sobre homosexualidad, él se unía y también hacía chistes. Pero me confesó que estaba teniendo sexo en secreto con algunos de los otros hombres a bordo. La vergüenza de todo eso lo estaba matando. 

Si no me hubiese revelado el secreto, nunca habría sospechado que tenía sentimientos de atracción hacia otros hombres, e imagino que tampoco su esposa, sus hijos o sus compañeros de navío, salvo aquellos con quienes había tenido intimidad. 

Es importante tener presente que cualquier persona con la que hables puede tener atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, y lo que digas en esas situaciones sí importa.

Un amigo mío de hace mucho tiempo ha luchado toda su vida con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Sin embargo, casi nunca le ha hablado de sus luchas a ninguno de sus allegados. Hace poco me dijo que uno de sus mejores amigos, un hombre casado cuya familia había sido de gran bendición para él, tenía el hábito de hacer con frecuencia comentarios despectivos acerca de los gays, comentarios que punzan. Aunque mi amigo a veces ha querido expresar sus objeciones, dice que teme decir algo por temor a poner en peligro su querida y valiosa amistad. Su amigo casado sencillamente no entiende el dolor que genera en uno de sus mejores amigos.

Otro hombre que conozco dijo que hace parte de un grupo de hombres donde a veces hablan sobre sus luchas con la pornografía. Él decía que se sentía agradecido por no tener ese problema, al menos eso pensó hasta que un día tropezó con pornografía homosexual. 

Se encontró atraído hacia lo que veía y en poco tiempo terminó adicto a la pornografía, pornografía gay. Este hombre quedó tan sorprendido con lo que le estaba sucediendo como cualquier otra persona lo estaría. 

Desafortunadamente, sentía que no podía compartir sus luchas con los otros hombres de su grupo por temor a sus reacciones. Dijo que solo lo compartía conmigo porque yo había compartido mi testimonio. 

La razón por la cual relato esto es porque los chicos de su grupo de hombres nunca van a saber que uno de sus miembros, un hombre con quien se han reunido semana tras semana, lucha con pornografía homosexual. Mientras este hombre no elija revelarles su secreto, los demás en su grupo seguirán pensando que la atracción hacia el mismo sexo es una lucha poco común. Pero no lo es. Es mucho más común de lo que piensas, pero a casi ningún hombre le gusta hablar al respecto.

¡NO TODOS LOS GAYS SON IGUALES!

Otra idea equivocada muy común es pensar que todos los gays son iguales. ¿Recuerdas, por ejemplo, a mi amiga del Capítulo 2, quién dijo que los gays que conoce son “amorosos, generosos y amables”? 

Aunque algunos de los gays que conozco sin duda son “amorosos, generosos y amables”, he conocido otros que son “odiosos, tacaños y sarcásticos”. Algunos son abiertamente mezquinos. Y algunos usan tácticas de matoneo que rivalizarían con cualquiera de las tácticas que enfrenté en la escuela. 

Aunque puede haber algunas características comunes entre ciertos tipos de gays, en realidad no hay un conjunto de características que definen a todas las personas que alguna vez hayan tenido atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Esto no debería sorprendernos, ya que no hay un conjunto de características que define a todo el que es maestro (mi maestro de inglés de tercer grado era muy diferente de mi maestro de física de secundaria) o a todos los atletas profesionales (imagina un tenista profesional cambiando de papel con el defensa de un equipo de fútbol americano). 

He conocido mujeres con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo y que están entre las mujeres más hermosas que haya conocido (algunas han sido modelos profesionales), mientras que he conocido otras que están entre las mujeres más rudas, hoscas y “varoniles” que haya conocido (algunas harían un buen trabajo de gorilas a la entrada de un bar). 

He conocido hombres con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo que parecen cincelados como el David de Miguel Ángel (y que se han forjado carreras ante las cámaras de televisión), y otros con apariencia de criminales (algunos de hecho han estado en prisión por crímenes sexuales, independientemente de su aspecto).

Luego estoy yo. Me considero un chico “común y corriente” que creció en una granja en el Gran Medio Oeste. Toda mi vida la he vivido lo más cercano a Normal que puedas pensar. (Eso es un chiste… Vivo a unas 20 millas de una ciudad llamada Normal. Cuando me mudé a Plano, Texas por un año, un amigo hizo el comentario: “qué emocionante para ti, mudarte de Normal, Illinois, a Plano, Texas”. Es decir, ¿puedes tener algo más “común y corriente” que eso?). 

Todo esto lo digo para hacer énfasis en que las personas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo vienen en todos los tipos, tamaños y formas.

Mientras hago una revisión mental de todas las personas que me han hablado sobre su atracción hacia el mismo sexo, la gran mayoría de ellos son también muy “comunes y corrientes”. Quizás es por eso que mi propia “normalidad” los atrae a hablar conmigo cuando escuchan mi testimonio, porque ven en mí alguien con quien se pueden relacionar y compartir de sus propios sentimientos y luchas. 

Pero cualquiera sea la razón, todo el tiempo conozco personas “comunes” que enfrentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, lo cual me hace ver con claridad que hay demasiadas personas con estas atracciones, muchas más de las que adivinarías.

Sin embargo, quizás no sepas de todos, así como quizás nunca hayas escuchado de mí antes de leer este libro, porque, para ser honesto, es algo muy, muy, difícil de confesar a otros. 

Nuestros sentimientos de atracción son tan personales, tan cercanos al corazón, y afectan nuestras interacciones con demasiadas personas a diario. En especial, para los hombres es bastante difícil hablar de sus pensamientos y sentimientos más profundos, sin mencionar sus pensamientos y sentimientos más profundos en cuanto al sexo, ¡y mucho menos sus pensamientos y sentimientos acerca de su atracción hacia el mismo sexo!

¿SIMPLONES CÉLIBES?

Hay quienes piensan erróneamente que personas como yo, que sirven en el ministerio, no pueden entender a las personas del “mundo real”, que luchan con “problemas reales”. 

Pero quienes están en el ministerio, y que son dignos de su cargo, escuchan más acerca de problemas y dificultades reales de quienes los rodean, que la mayoría de otros profesionales o laicos en el mundo. 

Un pastor británico de comienzos de los años 1900, G.K. Chesterton, escribió una ingeniosa serie de libros de misterios acerca de un sacerdote rechoncho y de baja estatura llamado Padre Brown, quien tenía una “visión extraña de la maldad humana”. 

En uno de los relatos de Chesterton, cuando el Padre Brown atrapa a un notorio criminal, el mismo criminal que antes lo había llamado “simplón célibe”, el sacerdote le explica al criminal, en gran detalle, cómo había podido detectarlo y sorprenderlo en su crimen. 

Ante lo cual el criminal exclamó: ¿Cómo rayos conoce todos esos horrores? 

A lo cual el sacerdote respondió: “Oh, siendo un simplón célibe, supongo. ¿Nunca has pensado que es poco probable que un hombre que no hace casi nada sino escuchar los verdaderos pecados de los demás no sea completamente consciente de la maldad humana?

En realidad, no podría adivinar cuántas horas he dedicado a escuchar a otros decirme algunas de las historias más dolorosas y trágicas que jamás podrías escuchar. 

¿Por qué te digo esto? Para que sepas que, aunque las personas no te hablan de sus luchas en esta área, definitivamente sí me las dicen a , y no quiero que desconozcas aquellas cosas con las que pueden estar luchando a diario quienes te rodean.

Una de las razones por las que he escrito este libro es para traer a la luz las verdaderas luchas de los demás. Espero aumentar tu consciencia de lo que sucede al interior de los que te rodean, de modo que cuando hables sobre este problema, puedas hablar de una forma que anime a las personas y no que las haga sentir, peor, así nunca te revelen sus propias atracciones hacia el mismo sexo.

No te sientas mal si hasta este punto no has sido consciente de cuántas personas a tu alrededor están experimentando atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. He conocido a algunos de los cristianos más sinceros, compasivos y de buen corazón que sencillamente no lo perciben tampoco.

Hace poco estaba preparándome para dar una charla a un grupo de unos 300 jóvenes en una iglesia. Cuando me encontré en un café con una mujer que asistía a esa iglesia, y le mencioné que estaba preparando una charla sobre ese tema ella me dijo: “ah, ¡tú crees que algunos de los chicos de ese grupo están luchando con esto?”

Casi me ahogo con el emparedado que estaba comiendo cuando la escuché decir eso. Por la cantidad de grupos a los que me he dirigido, así sean de 10, 20 o 30 personas, al menos una porción de ese grupo está luchando con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, o saben de alguien muy cercano a ellos que tiene esa lucha, mucho más en un grupo de 300 jóvenes cuyas hormonas corren sin control, así como las preguntas que pasan por sus cabezas. Se preguntan si sus atracciones significan que son gays. Se preguntan qué pensarán los demás de ellos si descubren sus atracciones. Se preguntan si deberían invitar a salir a una chica o a un chico, o solo quedarse llorando en casa. 

Al sacar esta realidad a la luz, de ninguna manera estoy culpando a nadie por no darse cuenta de que este problema afecta a más personas de las que creen. ¡Es por eso que comparto esto contigo! 

Quiero que lo sepas, porque si no lo sabes, no podrás ayudar, al menos no como creo que quieres hacerlo, (que es la razón por la cual estás leyendo este libro).

LLANTOS SILENCIOSOS

Quizás hayas observado que algunas personas llevan en sus mangas sus preferencias sexuales, ya sea para llamar la atención hacia sí mismos, o para anunciar su disponibilidad, o solo porque ya no les importa lo que otros piensen. Algunos son “abiertos y ruidosos” y a veces llaman toda la atención.

Sin embargo, es probable que muchas más personas nunca le digan a nadie de sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Es decir que nunca le dirán a nadie a menos que sientan que han encontrado a alguien en quien pueden confiar por completo, alguien que los apoye, que se interese lo suficiente por ellos al punto de caminar a su lado en medio de sus luchas. E incluso si tienen a una persona así, quizás tomen años para tener la libertad de hablar al respecto.

He tenido amigos con quienes me he relacionado por más de una década, amigos con quienes he compartido mi testimonio, con quienes hemos hablado de algunos de los pensamientos y sentimientos más preciosos e íntimos, y que sólo después de tanto tiempo finalmente me han confesado que han tenido los mismos sentimientos y atracciones hacia otras personas. 

Quizás la vergüenza, el temor, o su incertidumbre respecto a qué hacer con esos sentimientos, nunca les dieron la libertad para hablar con nadie respecto a sus atracciones, ni siquiera conmigo, sólo hasta cuando llegaron a un punto máximo donde la ayuda era más necesaria que su necesidad de mantener el secreto. 

Incluso para mí, tras haber compartido mi testimonio tantas veces a lo largo de los años en charlas, libros y artículos, sigue siendo difícil admitir que fui gay. Ser gay conlleva ciertas connotaciones con las que nunca quise que me asociaran. 

Sin embargo, basado en lo que he hecho y las atracciones que he sentido, debo admitir que fui gay. Y, según las definiciones del diccionario, donde lo único que se necesita es experimentar un sentimiento de atracción hacia alguien de mi mismo sexo, yo sin duda lo era. Incluso después de tantos años, no me gusta admitirlo. 

EN UNA ESCALA DE 0 A 10

También creo que es importante compartir contigo que los términos “gay” y “heterosexual” no son tan estrictos como puedes pensar, (con estricto quiero decir que el uno o el otro son excluyentes). 

Una de las observaciones más importantes que he hecho a raíz de mis conversaciones con quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, es que sus atracciones no solo varían en el grado en el que se sienten atraídos hacia una u otra persona, sino también en la mezcla de atracciones que sienten hacia los miembros de ambos sexos.

He encontrado que esto es cierto en tantos casos que cuando estoy ayudando a otros a pensar en sus atracciones sexuales, a menudo les pregunto en qué punto de una escala de 0 a 10 se pondrían, donde 0 significa que solo se sienten atraídos hacia personas de su mismo sexo y 10 significa que sólo sienten atracción hacia personas del sexo opuesto. Rara vez alguien con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo se ha puesto en el punto 0 de la escala, lo cual significa que nunca han sentido alguna atracción hacia una persona del sexo opuesto. 

E incluso en esos casos poco comunes donde alguien se ha puesto en el punto 0, me han dicho que no ha sido así siempre. 

Un buen amigo mío me dijo que se habría puesto en 0 durante sus primeros 33 años de vida. En todos esos 33 años, nunca, ni una sola vez, jamás, había sentido alguna atracción sexual hacia una mujer. 

Sin embargo, un día, estando sentado en una playa con una amiga, ¡de repente pasó de 0 a 10! ¡Fue un momento decisivo para él que cambió el curso para el resto de su vida! 

Mi amigo quedó completamente asombrado. Nunca había experimentado algo así, ¡y no sabía qué pensar al respecto! Toda su mentalidad cambió aquel día, y pocos años después se casó con una mujer que también cambió su posición en la escala de 0 a 10 cuando se conocieron. Mi amigo y su esposa ya tienen veinte años de casados y tienen dos hijos.

Aunque esta historia puede ser más extrema que otras que he escuchado, donde han pasado años sin sentir una atracción hacia el sexo opuesto, esto indica el hecho de que las atracciones de las personas pueden cambiar, y de hecho así sucede, incluso después de periodos muy largos, no solo dentro de las categorías de gays o heterosexuales, sino entre esas dos categorías. 

Según mi propia experiencia y las de las personas con quienes he hablado, la mayoría de los que se sienten atraídos hacia el mismo sexo tienen una mezcla de atracciones, y no están en un extremo u otro del espectro. Y, como lo mencioné antes, incluso esas atracciones varían mucho dependiendo de las personas en particular hacia las que sienten o no alguna atracción. 

Gracias a los cientos de conversaciones que he tenido, para mí es claro que las atracciones sexuales son complejas, varían mucho, y siempre están cambiando, todavía veo que muchos consideran la orientación sexual como algo rígido y fijo: que se es gay, heterosexual o bisexual. (Y si vas a incluir el bisexualismo en la lista de categorías, y tienes en cuenta que las personas tienen grados variables de atracción dentro de cada una de estas categorías, entonces en realidad estás hablando de todo el espectro de atracciones de 0 a 10).

CONVERSACIONES CONFUSAS

Esto nos lleva de vuelta a la idea de que la orientación sexual no es tan polarizada como muchos tienen a creer, sino que más bien se da como un proceso continuo. Estas conclusiones han conducido a conversaciones muy confusas con personas que insisten en usar las categorías, bueno, queriendo decir de manera categórica algo “inequívocamente explícito y directo”.

En una de esas conversaciones, un hombre que había leído mi historia sobre las relaciones sexuales que había tenido con hombres en el pasado, me envió un correo electrónico. 

Fue muy amable, pero en medio de su nota escribió: “si ha tenido relaciones sexuales con un hombre, usted es gay, solo admítalo”. 

Al responderle, traté de ser lo más amable al decirle: “pero también he tenido relaciones sexuales con una mujer de manera regular por más de 20 años, y nunca más volví a tener relaciones sexuales con otro hombre, así que me pregunto ¿eso qué me hace?” 

A lo cual él respondió que yo seguía siendo gay y que sólo estaba reprimiéndolo. Otros han insinuado que yo nunca fui gay y que solo estaba experimentando. Sin embargo, otros han dicho que debo ser bisexual porque me siento contento con cualquiera de los extremos, lo cual, por cierto, parece ir contra el argumento que afirma que las personas no pueden moverse de un extremo al otro del espectro.

Otra persona me escribió diciendo que no creía que alguien podía pasar de sentir atracción hacia su mismo sexo para sentirse atraído hacia el sexo opuesto. 

Ella dijo que, aunque nunca había tenido relaciones sexuales con nadie, sabía que era lesbiana y nunca iba a poder cambiarlo. 

Después de relatarle mi historia con más detalles, su conclusión fue: “Bueno, si ahora te gusta tener relaciones sexuales con tu esposa, entonces quizás nunca fuiste gay”. 

Esto venía de una mujer que nunca en su vida había tenido un encuentro sexual con otra mujer, sin embargo, se consideraba lesbiana y sin posibilidad de cambiar su condición. Pero también concluyó que yo, que había estado involucrado íntimamente con muchos hombres por muchos años, en realidad nunca había sido gay, porque ahora estaba completamente enamorado con una mujer más allá de mis sueños. 

Conversaciones como estas a veces me son confusas, y otras hacen enojar a las personas con quienes hablo, porque la realidad de lo que les presento no coincide con la pseudo-realidad que han creado en sus propias mentes. (Y eso me hace pensar, de nuevo, en el hombre que creía que estaba muerto, pero que, después de pincharse el dedo y ver que sangraba, dijo: “¡adivina! ¡Los hombres muertos sangran!”) 

La verdad es que muchas personas avanzan en medio de esto con sus sentimientos, en lugar de hacerlo con sus pensamientos. 

¿Qué tan heterosexual se debe ser para ser considerado heterosexual, o qué tan gay se debe ser para ser considerado gay, o qué tan cerca al centro hay que estar para ser considerado bisexual? 

Aunque estas categorías pueden ser útiles para generalizar los sentimientos de atracción de las personas, no son muy útiles para describir el hecho de que nuestros sentimientos y atracciones pueden moverse, y de hecho lo hacen de manera continua, basándose en múltiples elementos, en diferentes momentos y en respuesta a diferentes personas en diversos grados.

El verdadero cambio en nuestras vidas no sólo es posible, sino que en la Biblia lo fomenta con mucho énfasis en versículos como este: “No os conforméis a este siglo, sino transformaos por medio de la renovación de vuestro entendimiento, para que comprobéis cuál sea la buena voluntad de Dios, agradable y perfecta” (Romanos 12:2) Y si el único órgano sexual de mayor importancia en el cuerpo es la mente, ¡este versículo puede ser de gran esperanza a quienes esperan una verdadera transformación. 

He visto transformaciones dramáticas, tanto en mi propia vida como en las de muchas personas que he tenido el gusto de conocer en persona, cambios en cuanto a este tema que se han dado en los corazones y mentes de muchos. He visto cómo personas pasan de un extremo al otro del espectro, a menudo de maneras que han traído gozo y plenitud duraderos mucho más allá de lo que cualquiera podría imaginar. 

En el siguiente capítulo compartiré cómo se dio ese cambio en mi propia vida.

Guía de estudio para los capítulos 3 y 4

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 3: “ALGUNAS PALABRAS SOBRE ATRACCIONES”

Resumen del Capítulo

Todos tenemos atracciones fuertes, pero no podemos asumir que Dios quiere que “persigamos” todas aquellas personas hacia quienes nos sentimos atraídos.

  • Jacob amaba a Raquel y eso terminó bien (Génesis 28-30),
  • David amó a Betsabé y varias personas terminaron muertas (2 Samuel 11-12),
  • y Amón amó a Tamar y terminó asesinado (2 Samuel 13).

Dios quiere que dirijamos nuestras atracciones hacia los propósitos para los que nos las dio.

Algunas personas se preguntan si las atracciones pueden cambiar. El autor comparte varias historias de personas que:

  • han estado enamoradas, pero luego han “perdido ese sentimiento de amor”,
  • han sido solo amigos, para luego encontrar que “hay algo que no sentían antes”,
  • y han estado en relaciones homosexuales, pero luego se han enamorado y casado con alguien del sexo opuesto.

Las atracciones de las personas pueden cambiar, y cambian, a veces de manera significativa. Todos tenemos necesidades válidas, pero Dios quiere que satisfagamos esas necesidades válidas de manera válida.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Génesis 29:17-20 (o toda la historia de los capítulos 28-30), 2 Samuel 11:2-4 (o toda la historia de los capítulos 11 al 12), y 2 Samuel 13:1-2 (o toda la historia del capítulo 13). ¿Por qué cada una de estas tres historias, que tratan de atracciones fuertes, terminó tan diferente?

¿Por qué algunas personas sienten una fuerte atracción hacia ciertos atributos o características, cuando otras no se sienten atraídas a esos atributos o características? ¿Qué elementos pueden influir en dichas atracciones o la carencia de las mismas? 

¿Alguna vez has tenido una fuerte atracción hacia alguien hasta cuando llegaste a conocer mejor a esa persona, o, por el contrario, no has sentido una fuerte atracción hacia alguien hasta cuando lo conociste mejor? 

¿Qué elementos pueden cambiar las atracciones que alguien siente hacia los demás? ¿Por qué las personas a veces “pierden ese sentimiento de amor” y en otros momentos encuentran que “hay algo que no sentían antes”?

Lee Romanos 2:14-15. ¿Qué función cumplen nuestras consciencias en las decisiones que tomamos? ¿Cómo puede alguien “conocer” lo que Dios quiere que hagan, incluso si nunca han leído la Biblia?

Algunas personas saben con precisión qué dio origen a sus atracciones hacia los de su mismo sexo, o su rechazo hacia los del sexo opuesto. ¿Eres consciente de algún incidente o evento en particular que pueda haber influido en ti o en alguien que amas? Si ese es el caso, ¿podría otro evento o incidente positivo hacer que esas atracciones cambien de nuevo en la dirección opuesta?

¿Qué opinas sobre la siguiente afirmación?: “Se ha dicho que el único órgano sexual de mayor importancia en el cuerpo es la mente”. 

¿Alguna vez has notado que tú o alguien que conoces ha sido como el hombre afroamericano descrito en este capítulo, que solo se sentía atraído hacia rasgos muy particulares en una persona? ¿Qué funciones consideras que la naturaleza, la crianza y las experiencias de vida pueden tener en dichas atracciones? 

¿Alguna vez has experimentado atracciones difíciles de contener, sin importar cuánto te hayas esforzado? O, por el contrario, ¿has tenido atracciones difíciles de reencender, así lo hayas intentado mucho? 

¿Por qué el autor cree que se vio inclinado a tener relaciones con los del mismo sexo? ¿Qué opinas sobre la idea de que los hombres con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo no suelen tener problemas en sus relaciones con las mujeres, pero sí en sus relaciones con hombres?

Si las personas creen que está mal negar las atracciones fuertes que sienten en su interior, ¿qué deberían hacer los que se casan y siguen teniendo esas atracciones hacia personas diferentes a su cónyuge? ¿Cuáles son algunas de las razones por las que Dios puede querer que neguemos nuestras atracciones, sin importar lo fuertes que sean?

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 4: “ALGUNAS PALABRAS ACERCA DE SER GAY”

Resumen del Capítulo

El autor comparte tres aspectos acerca de ser gay:

  • ser gay implica sentimientos de atracción hacia las personas del mismo sexo, ya sea que esos sentimientos sean sexuales, románticos o emocionales,
  • y como esos sentimientos se dan en el corazón y la mente, no hay manera de identificar a alguien como gay a menos que lo revele de manera expresa en sus palabras o acciones,
  • como tal, muchas más personas pueden estar luchando con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo sin que nadie lo sepa.

Por eso es tan importante que cuidemos nuestras palabras, porque incluso las personas más cercanas a nosotros pueden estar experimentando atracciones hacia el mismo sexo y están escuchando lo que decimos y las actitudes de nuestros corazones.

El autor afirma que la mayoría de personas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo con quienes ha hablado, han tenido una mezcla de atracciones hacia hombres y mujeres. Él añade:

  • aunque la gente suele usar los términos gay, heterosexual o bisexual, la realidad muestra que los sentimientos hacia los del mismo sexo o del sexo opuesto se graficarían mejor en una línea continua, que de manera categórica en uno u otro extremo, o en el medio,
  • muy pocos de los cientos de personas con quienes ha hablado personalmente acerca de sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo han dicho que ese ha sido el único tipo de atracción que han sentido
  • y gracias a estos factores, muchas más personas de las que se pueden determinar podrían ser identificadas como gays.

El verdadero cambio en todas las áreas de nuestras vidas no sólo es posible, sino que en la Biblia se lo anima con mucho énfasis en versículos como este: “No os conforméis a este siglo, sino transformaos por medio de la renovación de vuestro entendimiento, para que comprobéis cuál sea la buena voluntad de Dios, agradable y perfecta” (Romanos 12:2) 

El autor dice que ha visto y experimentado muchas transformaciones como esas, donde las personas han pasado de un extremo del espectro al otro, a menudo de maneras que han traído gozo y plenitud duraderos mucho más allá de lo que cualquiera podría imaginar.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee 1 Samuel 16:7. ¿Por qué las cuestiones del corazón son tan difíciles de leer en otra persona? Dado que ser gay consiste más en sentimientos de atracción que en alguna característica física, ¿cuál es la única forma de decir si alguien está experimentando atracciones hacia el mismo sexo o no? 

Lee Romanos 2:1-2. ¿Según estos versículos, qué se necesita para ser transformados? Dado que algunas personas dicen que la mente es el órgano sexual más poderoso en el cuerpo, ¿qué otras cosas dicen estos versículos acerca de nuestra capacidad de transformar los deseos sexuales?

¿Te sorprende escuchar que muy pocos gays se sienten atraídos solamente hacia los de su mismo sexo, sino que tienen una mezcla de atracciones hacia ambos sexos? ¿Por qué sí o por qué no? ¿De qué manera esta información cambia tu perspectiva en cuanto a si los gays pueden “cambiar” sus atracciones hacia uno u otro sexo? 

Si tú o alguien que conoces experimenta atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ¿dónde te pondrías a ti mismo o a esa persona que conoces, en la escala de atracciones de 0 a 10, donde 0 es atracción únicamente hacia los del mismo sexo y 10 es atracción únicamente hacia los del sexo opuesto? (¡No tienes que responder en voz alta!) ¿De qué forma esta información puede ser útil para otros al pensar detenidamente en este tema? 

Dado que las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo se dan en los corazones y mentes de los que las experimentan, ¿qué tan probable es que las personas que te rodean estén experimentando esos sentimientos sin que ni siquiera seas consciente de ello? ¿Cómo el saber esto, afecta lo que dices o haces alrededor de los demás? 

¿Por qué puede ser más fácil para alguien hablar de sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo con ciertas personas y no con otras? Si de verdad quieres ayudar a otros en este aspecto, ¿qué podrías decir o hacer para animar a que te compartan con más libertad acerca de sus atracciones, sin tener que respaldar la homosexualidad? 

Después de haber leído en este libro la historia del autor y de otras personas, incluyendo la del hombre que nunca había sentido atracción hacia alguien del sexo opuesto hasta cuando cumplió 33 años, ¿qué puedes decirle a alguien que considera imposible que sus sentimientos de atracción hacia los del sexo opuesto puedan cambiar alguna vez

Dado que has aprendido que la mayoría de personas que tienen atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, en algún grado también sienten atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ¿esto quiere decir que una persona debe ser gay si ha tenido relaciones sexuales con alguien del mismo sexo? Y si esa persona ha tenido relaciones sexuales con alguien del sexo opuesto, ¿esto quiere decir que debe ser heterosexual? Aunque las palabras gay, heterosexual y bisexual pueden ser útiles como categorías amplias, ¿por qué son términos que a veces complican más las cosas en lugar de ayudar en discusiones acerca de este tema?

Capítulo 5: El valor de un amigo amoroso

Donde comparto cómo salí de la homosexualidad, cómo mis atracciones cambiaron con el paso del tiempo, y el valor de un amigo amoroso.

Si localizara mis propias atracciones en una escala de 0 a 10, donde 0 significa que sólo siento atracción hacia hombres, y 10 indica que mi atracción es sólo hacia mujeres, me pondría en algún punto entre esos dos extremos, dependiendo de las diferentes épocas de mi vida. Aunque hay puntos específicos que a veces han cambiado de un extremo a otro, siempre he tenido una mezcla de atracciones. 

Encuentro que me siento atraído hacia las personas sin importar su género. El peligro para mí y para todos nosotros, sin importar nuestra posición en esa escala, surge cuando nuestras atracciones se hacen románticas o sexuales. 

Todos nos sentimos “atraídos” hacia ciertas personas, ya sean estrellas de cine, un vecino o vecina, algún compañero de trabajo o amigos en la iglesia. Nuestras atracciones no son el problema. El problema es cuando esas atracciones se vuelven románticas o sexuales, algo que Dios ha reservado sólo para disfrutarlo dentro de Sus límites bien definidos.

Durante la secundaria, yo habría ubicado mis atracciones en un punto de la escala entre un firme 7 u 8. Me sentía atraído hacia las mujeres. Me gustaba estar cerca de ellas, me parecía fácil conversar con ellas, y como lo mencioné antes, mis mejores amistades solían ser con mujeres. 

Sin embargo, también me veía atraído hacia hombres, aunque a un grado mucho menor. Los hombres me parecían misteriosos e intrigantes. Me sentía atraído hacia los que eran bien parecidos o talentosos. Y de vez en cuando tenía pensamientos sexuales con hombres. En general, deseaba haber sido su amigo. 

Pero la idea de tener una relación romántica o sexual con un hombre no era una opción, ni en mi mente ni en la realidad. 

Si sentía que la intimidad sexual con una mujer antes del matrimonio no era algo correcto, como lo mencioné en el capítulo 3, entonces la intimidad sexual con un hombre parecía mucho menos conveniente. 

En esa época tampoco conocía a nadie que fuera gay, o por lo menos no conocía a personas que admitieran que lo eran. De hecho, tiempo después me enteré de que algunos de mis amigos de secundaria habían tenido relaciones homosexuales durante esos años. 

Sin duda, nunca hablé de mis sentimientos de atracción hacia los hombres. Aunque estaban ahí, no eran sentimientos significativos. Sentía que no podía hacer nada con ellos, así quisiera.

UN CAMBIO REPENTINO

Cuando me mudé a la universidad, y mi novia y yo tomamos caminos diferentes, seguí sintiéndome muy atraído hacia las mujeres. Salí con muchas chicas, y no fueron pocas las increíbles noches que pasé besándome con ellas en el patio, anotando luego en mis diarios cosas como esta: “¡Podría pasar toda la noche besándola!”

Mis atracciones comenzaron a cambiar en el verano después del primer año de estudios. Había comenzado a hacer amistad con unos chicos del campus que parecían tener un interés genuino en mi vida. 

Cuando algunos de ellos quisieron llevar nuestra amistad a otro nivel, las barreras que tenía terminaron cayendo. No me resistí.

Mis atracciones y deseos cambiaron rápidamente al otro extremo de la escala. Los sentimientos de esa época los pondría en un firme 2 o 3. 

Debido a que esas relaciones con hombres fueron mis primeras relaciones sexuales, y como ellos satisfacían en mi vida una necesidad válida de amistades masculinas cercanas, comencé a buscar más amistades como esas. Era como si la fuerza gravitacional sobre mis deseos hubiera cambiado y mi brújula ahora apuntara en la dirección opuesta. 

Todavía sentía atracción hacia las mujeres, y seguía disfrutando de algunas amistades con ellas. Pero como estaba encontrando hombres que por primera vez satisfacían algunas de mis necesidades más profundas, esas relaciones terminaron siendo más y más tentadoras. 

Fue ahí cuando comencé a preguntarme si lo que mis amigos gays decían era verdad: “Una vez gay, siempre gay, Eric”. Parecía que tenían razón, y sus propias experiencias sexuales parecían indicar que esa había su experiencia genuina. 

Aunque mis amigos gays me dijeran esto con motivaciones menos genuinas en mente, ya fuera para justificar sus propias acciones o mantenerme por un poco más de tiempo dentro de su círculo de amigos íntimos, tuve que preguntarme si era verdad lo que decían respecto a “una vez gay, siempre gay”. 

Como nunca había tenido intimidad sexual con una mujer, me preguntaba cómo podría saberlo, a menos que también tuviera relaciones sexuales con una mujer. Así que consideré probar, solo para ver. Pensé que una amiga podría estar dispuesta a intentarlo conmigo y se lo propuse, pero, ahora que lo recuerdo, afortunadamente esa puerta se cerró. 

Tras escuchar por años a varios hombres que han intentado tener sexo con una mujer sólo para ver si les gusta, en lugar de buscar amor genuino y profundo hacia esa mujer, he aprendido que ese tipo de intentos a menudo fracasarán, por obvias razones. 

El sexo es una maravillosa extensión de la intimidad, pero nunca tendrá comparación si se lo toma como sustituto.

Sin saber qué más hacer, seguí haciendo lo que estaba haciendo. Me involucré con otro hombre del campus y comencé a disfrutar a fondo nuestra cercana amistad. 

La homosexualidad estaba satisfaciendo una profunda necesidad en mi vida, y tenía los beneficios adicionales de permitirme tener relaciones sexuales sin el temor a un embarazo, y, al menos desde mi punto de vista, no tenía que pensar en que la relación alguna vez pasara a ser una de largo plazo. Eso sencillamente no estaba en mi radar. 

El matrimonio gay no era una opción legal en ninguna parte del mundo (y no se iba a legalizar en ningún país por otros 17 años), y tener una relación abiertamente homosexual no era una opción para mí. No veía cómo podría enfrentar el ridículo. 

Ni siquiera pensé en el temor de contraer una enfermedad de transmisión sexual. Aunque no lo creas, el SIDA no se había identificado cuando me inicié en la homosexualidad. Tres meses después de mi primera relación homosexual se acuño el término SIDA para describir esta “nueva” enfermedad que en ese tiempo estaba afectando casi exclusivamente a hombres gays, o a los que habían tenido contacto con sangre de hombres homosexuales. 

Considerándolo todo, la homosexualidad parecía ser, al menos para mí, una experiencia libre de riesgos, con poco compromiso y muy gratificante. Me encantó. De verdad. Aunque no lo consideré como una opción a largo plazo para toda la vida, estaba disfrutándolo tanto que no pensé mucho en buscar una alternativa.

Así que no lo consideré mucho más hasta cuando tuve mi propio “encuentro de playa”, como el encuentro en la playa de mi amigo que mencioné antes, solo que el mío fue con la mujer que tiempo después llegó a ser mi esposa.

MI SALIDA DE LA HOMOSEUALIDAD

Había conocido a Lana más o menos un año antes en una fraternidad de negocios profesionales de la universidad. Ella era tierna y divertida, incluso una noche la acompañé caminando hasta su casa, después de haber pasado todo el día juntos en una salida de campo a otra ciudad con nuestra fraternidad de negocios profesionales. 

Esa noche le di un beso de buenas noches en la puerta de su apartamento. En mi diario escribí sobre ese maravilloso día y el beso en la noche, y añadí estas palabras al final: “Pero no creo que de esto salga mucho”. 

Y en efecto así fue. Al menos, no hasta un año después cuando comencé a hablar con Lana acerca de un viaje en auto que estaba planeando hacer hacia la Costa Este. Sabía que a ella le gustaba mucho viajar, así que le pregunté si le gustaría venir conmigo. Ella dijo que le encantaría. Yo la invité sólo como un amigo, nada más, porque yo ya estaba saliendo con otro hombre (algo que ni ella ni nadie más sabía).

¡Lo que no sabía cuando la invité a ese viaje, es que el año anterior, la noche cuando le di el beso de buenas noches a la puerta de su departamento, ella le escribió una carta a su mejor amiga, diciéndole que acababa de conocer al hombre con el que se iba a casar! Desde luego, Lana no me dijo eso, no en ese entonces, claro está, ¡ni siquiera lo hizo hasta después que nos casamos! Ella lo compartió con su amiga y nadie más, guardándolo en su corazón todo el tiempo.

Cuando emprendimos ese viaje hacia la Costa Este, yo no tenía en mente ninguna relación romántica o sexual con ella. 

Pero una noche, mientras caminábamos por la playa y hablábamos de amor y romance en general (yo nunca le había hablado a ella acerca de mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo), nos sentamos y disfrutamos de una botella de vino blanco. Quizás fue la luna y las estrellas, o el vino y las olas, o lo exquisitos que se veían sus labios, no lo sé, pero me incliné y la besé. 

Y ella también me besó. 

¡En ese momento algo sucedió que movió mi escala de un 2 o 3 a un 10! Como lo dice una frase en una canción de La Bella y la Bestia, de repente surgió “algo que no hubo antes”.

Cuando alguien me pregunta si las atracciones pueden cambiar, no dudo al decir “¡Sí! ¡Claro que sí!”

Comenzamos ese viaje como amigos, pero volvimos a casa como algo mucho, mucho más. Nunca antes en mi vida había experimentado esa clase de amor, esa clase de emoción, esa clase de atracción, hacia hombres o mujeres. Era algo fuera de serie. 

Cuando volví a casa después de ese viaje, enfrenté un dilema. Seguía disfrutando mucho de mi amistad cercana con este chico con quien estaba saliendo, pero ahora estaba de cabeza enamorado de Lana. Hice lo que los demás hacen cuando se encuentran en ese dilema y no saben qué hacer, seguí saliendo con los dos. Cuando estaba con mi amigo gay, disfrutaba mucho nuestra vida de gays. Cuando estaba con Lana, disfrutaba mucho nuestra vida heterosexual. 

Las semanas fueron pasando y llegué a tener más y más conflictos en mis pensamientos y sentimientos. Sabía que no podía seguir en dos direcciones tan opuestas sin destruirme a mí mismo, y los más probable es que a ellos también. 

Además del dilema de salir con dos personas al mismo tiempo, lo cual estaba mal en sí mismo, tenía el dilema adicional de preguntarme si debía “seguir” la vida homosexual, o tratar de “seguir” la vida heterosexual. Ambas opciones ofrecían algo real, profundo y satisfactorio, pero sabía que no podía tener ambas cosas para siempre. 

También sabía que mi dilema iba más allá de decidir entre las dos personalidades de las dos personas involucradas, involucraba decidir qué camino iba a seguir en la vida. 

Estaba destrozado por completo. Sentía que no podía hablar con nadie al respecto. Mis amigos heterosexuales no sabían de mi vida gay, y mis amigos gays eran muy claros en decir “una vez gay, siempre gay”.

Quisiera poder describir la angustia real que sentía al tener que tomar una decisión tan importante. Al mismo tiempo me alegra no poder describírtelo, porque en una sola palabra, era insoportable. 

No quería renunciar a las amistades significativas que estaba disfrutando con mis amigos varones después de haber esperado tanto para experimentar un compañerismo genuino como ese. Pero tampoco quería seguir en una dirección que evidentemente no me iba a llevar a donde yo quería llegar. 

Cuando miraba hacia mi futuro, de verdad esperaba algún día tener esposa e hijos, y esperaba tener una relación abierta, sin secretos, para poder hablarles a los demás acerca de la persona más maravillosa en mi vida. (Al recordar esa decisión hoy, entiendo que algunos de esos factores que me preocupaban en ese entonces ya no existen, al menos no en la misma medida, pero en ese momento eran razones muy presentes en mi mente. Otras razones me han impedido volver a la homosexualidad desde entonces, como lo comparto en los Capítulos 9 y 11).

Sabía que esa era una decisión que impactaría el curso del resto de mi vida. En el centro de mi ser, sólo podía ver un camino que me llevaría a donde quería ir. 

MI DECISIÓN

Tomé mi decisión después de varias semanas de luchas y conflictos en mis pensamientos, deseos y emociones. Ahora debía comunicarlo a las dos personas que más me importaban en el mundo.

Se lo dije primero a mi amigo gay, quien lo tomó mal, pero lo había visto venir. Él sabía que tenía sentimientos hacia Lana desde que habíamos hecho el viaje a la Costa Este. 

También sabía que luchaba con el concepto de “una vez gay, siempre gay”, y si en realidad era verdad o no. Aunque fue difícil para él, no trató de impedir que hiciera lo que para él era evidente que había en mi corazón. 

Yo sabía que era una decisión trascendental, pero en ese momento no sabía que al decirle adiós esa noche, le estaría diciendo adiós a la última relación gay de mi vida.

Sabía que al día siguiente tenía que comunicarle a Lana la decisión que había tomado, lo cual también significaba tener que confesarle mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, y el hecho de que había estado saliendo con un hombre al mismo tiempo que había salido con ella. 

Sabía que iba a ser una conversación muy difícil, y no tenía idea de cuál sería su reacción. No podía saber si ella estaría dispuesta a seguir saliendo conmigo después de lo que estaba por decirle.

Aunque sentía que tenía mucho que perder al confesarle esto, no podía imaginar tratar de construir una relación futura con ella sin hablarle acerca de este profundo y oscuro secreto en mi vida. Me parecía justo para ella, y si trataba de mantener ese secreto terminaría destrozándome.

Llamé a Lana y le pregunté si podíamos encontrarnos para hablar sobre algo que había en mi corazón. Aquella noche, con varios intentos fallidos y muchos bocados atascándose en mi garganta, por primera vez en la vida le hablé acerca de mis atracciones hacia los hombres, mis temores de lo que eso podía significar para mi vida, y el hecho de que había estado involucrado activamente con un hombre hasta el día anterior.

LA RESPUESTA DE LANA

La respuesta de Lana me sorprendió. De hecho, me dijo: “Eric, te amo. Siempre te he amado. Y también caminaré a tu lado en medio de esto”.

Nunca en la vida, ni aquel día, ni ningún otro día después de ese evento, sentí algo que no fuera el amor de Lana hacia mí con respecto a mis luchas con la homosexualidad. Nunca me sentí juzgado, menospreciado, sino apoyado y animado. 

No sé cómo lo hizo, y tampoco sé cómo decirle a alguien más cómo hacer lo que ella hizo. Todo lo que sé es que su respuesta aquella noche, y su manera de responder de ahí en adelante cada vez que el tema surgía, me dio el valor y la confianza para saber que podía hacerlo, para seguir en una relación con ella que fue plena y completa, sin carencia de nada. 

Su respuesta fue la expresión de amor más extravagante que alguna vez sentí en mi vida hasta ese punto.

Quizás pienses; “yo nunca habría podido reaccionar como Lana. Después de haber escuchado lo que tenías para decir, habría quedado marcado si hubiese estado en su lugar”. Créeme, yo habría pensado lo mismo. Pero para Lana, su respuesta fue tan natural como respirar. 

Quizás influyó el hecho de que ella creía que Dios le había hablado aquella primera noche cuando le di un beso de buenas noches y le dijo a su amiga que acababa de conocer al hombre con quien se iba a casar. 

Después de casarnos, cuando me reveló lo que Dios le había dicho aquella noche, me dijo que sentía que debía haber sido Él quien le dijo eso por las palabras que vinieron a su cabeza: “Ese es el hombre con quien te vas a casar”. 

Si hubiesen sido sus propios pensamientos, dijo, habría sonado algo como: “Ese es el hombre con el que me voy a casar”. Ella no dudaba que Dios le había hablado esa noche, y ella confió en esas palabras desde ese momento, incluso cuando, parecía que nunca se iba a casar conmigo.

Permíteme reiterar cuánto me abrumó la respuesta de Lana. Yo estaba en un punto muy frágil. Había estado luchando tan intensamente con mis sentimientos respecto a la decisión monumental que estaba tratando de tomar, que lo que dijo y lo que no dijo trajo calma a mi alma de una forma que nunca había imaginado. 

Lana era la clase de amiga que necesitaba en esa crítica coyuntura de mi vida, y siguió siendo esa clase de amiga durante el resto de su vida. 

Sé que no todos tendrán las mismas razones de Lana para amar a sus amigos y familiares gays. Sin duda, ella sólo tenía un papel que jugar en mi vida. 

Pero lo que me fascinó de su respuesta es algo que se puede aplicar a cualquier persona: Lana no permitió que la confusión que había en mi mente le impidiera verme como la persona que ella creía que era. 

Ella me amaba. Ella me veía como un hombre, completamente heterosexual, y capaz de llegar a ser el esposo y padre que tiempo después fui. (En su caso, ¡su esposo y el padre de sus hijos!) 

Esto es lo mismo que tú puedes hacer por tus amigos y familiares que luchan con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo: no dejes que la confusión que haya en sus mentes te impida verlos como las personas que crees que son y que Dios creó para que fueran. 

Aunque algunas personas pueden ofenderse con una afirmación como esta, no debería ser así. A veces otras personas pueden ver en nosotros lo que nosotros mismos no podemos ver.

TU RESPUESTA

Quizás no te sientas calificado para ser esa clase de persona en las vidas de tus amigos o familiares. De ser así, permíteme añadir en este punto que Lana no tenía ningún don o llamado particular para servir a personas que lucharan con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Ella nunca supo ni sospechó que yo había tenido alguna atracción hacia mí mismo sexo hasta cuando yo se lo dije. 

Lana no tenía un “corazón” especial hacia los gays, y nunca se había sentido atraída hacia su mismo sexo. Ella simplemente me amaba.

Quizás pienses que no tienes nada que ofrecerle a alguien que tenga ese tipo de atracciones, ¡pero eso está muy lejos de la verdad! Si amas a alguien, si te interesa su vida, ¡tienes un gran tesoro que ofrecer a esa persona! No necesitas haber pasado por lo que ellos han pasado para poder ser de gran bendición a sus vidas. Ni siquiera tienes que tratar de “meterte en su piel” por uno o dos días para sentir lo que ellos sienten. ¡Solo tienes que amarlos! 

De hecho, es posible que te repugne la idea de la atracción hacia el mismo sexo. Quizás sea algo muy ajeno para ti como lo era para Lana. 

Si ese es tu caso, ¡permíteme decir primero que creo que eso está bien! Hubo una época cuando la idea también me repugnaba, y también creo que eso estaba bien. De hecho, por un tiempo la idea del sexo en general me repugnaba, ¡y creo que eso está bien! 

¿Por qué creo que está bien? Porque, así como nuestras atracciones nos pueden ser útiles en los contextos correctos, nuestras repulsiones también nos pueden servir bien en los contextos correctos.

Por ejemplo, creo que todos estamos programados con cierto rechazo a la idea del sexo cuando somos niños. Si alguna vez has visto a niños viendo a una pareja besarse en televisión o en persona, por lo general su reacción es de mirar hacia otra parte y decir “¡guácala! No quiero hacer eso nunca”. Y es posible que cualquier adulto presente en ese sitio se ría y les diga que muy seguramente van a tener sentimientos diferentes cuando sean mayores, ante lo cual los niños protestarán aún más, creyendo firmemente que no quieren hacer eso nunca, porque en realidad no pueden imaginarse haciéndolo. 

Tuve esos sentimientos en la preadolescencia. Tampoco podía imaginar tener relaciones sexuales con otra persona. Si definiera mis atracciones según la escala que he descrito, no habría puesto un punto en ninguna parte de esa línea. 

SENSORES EN NOSOTROS

¿Por qué no? Creo que es porque Dios ha puesto sensores en nuestro interior respecto a cosas que no pueden ser buenas para nosotros, cosas que nos pueden hacer daño. 

Si alguien tiene relaciones sexuales antes de estar en capacidad de concebir un bebé en términos biológicos, eso sin duda, en el mejor de los casos, no tiene sentido y en términos más serios es perjudicial. Nuestros cuerpos no fueron creados para las relaciones sexuales durante la niñez. Eso tiene sentido para mí, así como el hecho de que Dios nos haya programado para reaccionar diciendo cosas como “¡guácala!” cuando otros se nos acercan para hacer cosas que pueden hacernos daño.

No sé si esto fue cierto en tu caso, pero para mí, cuando entendí de qué se trataba el sexo ¡quedé asombrado! ¡No podía creer que mis propios padres habían hecho eso! Pero entendí que sin duda así había sido, y que seguramente había sido más de una vez porque sabía que mis hermanos y yo proveníamos de ellos. 

Recuerdo haber hablado con un amigo de mi edad que también había llegado a ese entendimiento el mismo día. A los dos nos repugnaba la idea. Ni él ni yo queríamos pensar en el hecho de que nuestros padres habían hecho algo así, y yo no consideraba el hecho de que quizás seguían haciéndolo después de tantos años. ¡Era inconcebible!

No fue hasta cuando llegué a la pubertad que mis pensamientos sobre el tema comenzaron a cambiar, y empecé a considerar que quizás algún día querría hacer eso también. Incluso entonces, la idea seguía siendo extraña para mí y me asustaba un poco pensar en tener que hacerlo algún día. Pero como muchas cosas en la vida, lo que en un comienzo me repugnó, después me intrigó.

Cuando llegué a la universidad, como ya lo mencioné, fue cuando alguien se me acercó con intenciones serias de tener relaciones sexuales conmigo, y esa persona resultó ser un hombre. 

Cuando eso sucedió, todavía tenía barreras internas que superar, sensores que se encendían y que tuve que ignorar, algo con lo que la mayoría de personas se puede identificar. 

Como sólo había besado mujeres hasta ese punto, la idea de besar a un hombre con barba de tres días en su cara era mucho más que algo incómodo. Muchos todavía se incomodan un poco cuando ven por primera vez a unos homosexuales besándose, ya sea en televisión, en una película o en persona. Ese hecho conlleva algo que, incluso para mí hoy en día, y después de haber estado envuelto en la homosexualidad por años, todavía parece incorrecto. 

También creo que es una reacción correcta, de hecho “natural”. Este tipo de reacciones no indican que amas menos a los gays, de hecho, pueden ser una señal de tu capacidad para amarlos más, amarlos de verdad, ya que tienes menos probabilidades de enredarte sexual o románticamente con ellos.

Como a niños que les repugna la idea del sexo en general, no puedo evitar pensar que esos sensores en nuestro interior con respecto a la homosexualidad Dios también los puso como advertencias para considerar con seriedad lo que estamos a punto de hacer antes que lo hagamos. Para algunas personas, esos límites dados por Dios se han cruzado a muy temprana edad y con tanta frecuencia que ya no recuerdan que existían cuando se cruzaron por primera vez. 

Pero en mi caso fui muy consciente cada vez que los crucé. 

Todo esto lo digo para que puedas ser un amigo amoroso para con las personas que tienen atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ya sea que tengas un “corazón” especial hacia los gays o no, ya sea que alguna vez tú mismo hayas sentido atracción hacia el mismo sexo o no, e incluso si te repugna o no la idea de que alguien tenga atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

El hecho de que solo ames a alguien que tiene esas atracciones, te califica como uno de sus mejores amigos que puede ayudarles en sus luchas, así como Lana fue una de las mejores amigas que jamás pude tener, y que me ayudó en medio de mi lucha.

Capítulo 6: El valor de un Dios amoroso

Donde comparto por qué es útil llevar a las personas a Jesús, cómo algunos amigos me llevaron a Jesús, y el increíble valor de tener una relación de amor con Él.

La Biblia relata la historia de algunas personas que llevaron a un amigo a Jesús. Su amigo necesitaba un toque sanador, tanto en el cuerpo como en el alma. 

Debido a la condición de su amigo él no podía llegar por sus propios medios hasta Jesús. Así que ellos lo llevaron. Cuando llegaron a la casa donde Jesús se encontraba hablando, la multitud era tan grande, que no podían entrar. Así que subieron al techo, hicieron una abertura y bajaron a su amigo hasta Jesús.

La Biblia dice que cuando Jesús vio la fe de ellos lo sanó, tanto en su cuerpo como en su alma. 

¡Vaya! Su amigo pudo volver caminando a casa ese día, sanado, perdonado y gozoso. El relato termina diciendo: Todos quedaron asombrados y ellos también alababan a Dios. Estaban llenos de temor y decían: “Hoy hemos visto maravillas” (Lucas 5:26).

La verdad es que hoy tú puedes ser esa clase de amigo para alguien que amas. ¿Cómo lo sé? Porque tuve amigos que hicieron lo mismo por mí. 

Mis amigos no tenían un don específico para ayudarme con lo que necesitaba. Ellos sabían que yo estaba luchando con algo, pero ni siquiera sabían qué era. Solo me llevaron a Jesús. 

Luego Jesús hizo lo que mejor sabe hacer. Sanó mi cuerpo y mi alma.

Aunque todavía sentía una fuerte atracción hacia Lana, un sólido 11 en la escala de 10 puntos, todavía no veía algo inherentemente malo en la homosexualidad. Aunque ser homosexual no era algo con lo que quería continuar, seguía considerando que no estaba mal que otros lo hicieran. 

Todavía disfrutaba pasar tiempo con mis amigos gays, y solía tener los mismos intereses de fondo con ellos. En mi opinión lo que ellos hacían, o lo que yo había hecho no era algo anormal o aborrecible, solo que no era aceptado. Sentía que entendía los pensamientos, los deseos y las atracciones de mis amigos de una forma que la mayoría de mis amigos que siempre habían sido heterosexuales nunca podrían hacerlo. 

Tres años después que me distancié de mi última relación gay, tuve el encuentro con Dios más significativo que jamás había tenido en mi vida, y, en esencia, giró en torno al tema de la homosexualidad.

PALABRAS ESCLARECEDORAS

Cuando me gradué de la universidad, hice un viaje de corto plazo al exterior para realizar un trabajo como consultor de computadoras, después volví a los Estados Unidos y tomé un empleo en Texas, en el departamento de sistemas de una corporación del listado Fortune 10. Una prima que vivía en la misma ciudad me invitó a que fuera con ella a la iglesia, así que fui. 

Aunque toda mi vida había asistido a la iglesia, todavía tenía algunas preguntas elementales respecto a la fe cristiana, no podía estar seguro si Jesús de verdad había vivido, muerto y resucitado. 

Me gustaban las enseñanzas de Jesús, y me agradaba la idea de tratar de ser una persona buena y decente. Pero no podía creer en Él de la misma manera que creían algunas de las personas a mi alrededor.

En la iglesia de mi prima encontré un grupo de personas con quienes sentía que podía ser honesto en cuanto a mis dudas. 

Un fin de semana, en un retiro de solteros, le confesé a un pequeño grupo de hombres que no estaba seguro si de verdad creía en Jesús o no. Uno de ellos fue muy hábil para abordar mis preguntas obvias respecto a la fe, y me invitó a un estudio bíblico con un grupo de hombres que se reunían cada semana en su casa. 

Dijo que ellos solo leían la Biblia, hablaban sobre lo que decía, y trataban de aplicarlo a sus vidas. Me pareció una gran idea, así que la siguiente semana fui a la reunión.

Fue en ese estudio bíblico que por primera vez leí lo que Dios tenía que decir en cuanto a la homosexualidad. 

Estábamos leyendo las palabras del Apóstol Pablo, las que mencioné en el Capítulo 2 y que habían sido escritas casi 2,000 años atrás y a más de 5,000 millas de distancia de donde yo vivía. 

Al leer las palabras de Pablo en la introducción de la carta que había escrito a los cristianos de Roma, Dios les dio vida para mí vida personal. 

Es como si en mi cabeza se hubiera encendido una bombilla. Sentí que Dios me decía: “Eric, te he dado el don de la sexualidad para que puedas tener una vida abundante. Pero lo has usado de una manera en la que yo nunca lo diseñé, una manera que podría darte todo lo opuesto: la muerte”.

“¿Muerte?” Pensé. “Claro que no. No puedo morir por algo que haya hecho”.

Mis palabras sonaban muy similares a lo que la serpiente le había dicho a Eva en el Jardín de Edén respecto a comer del fruto del árbol que Dios le había dicho que no comiera: “Pero la serpiente le dijo a la mujer: ¡No es cierto, no van a morir!” (Génesis 3:4).

Pero Eva comió del fruto prohibido, luego le dio a Adán y lo animó a hacer lo mismo, así como yo había comido algo que me había podido quitar la vida, y había animado a otros a hacer lo mismo.

“¿Cómo podría morir por eso? Me preguntaba. “Sólo estaba divirtiéndome”. 

Luego pensé en el SIDA. Nunca antes me había hecho pruebas para el SIDA. Ni siquiera lo había considerado. De repente me sobrecogió el temor. Y si de verdad había contraído una enfermedad que en ese entonces no tenía cura ni forma de detener su constante avance hacia la muerte.

¡No quería morir! ¡Quería vivir! ¡Y Dios quería que viviera! ¿Pero qué podía hacer yo? No podía revertir lo que había hecho. 

Aunque los hombres de mi estudio bíblico no tenían idea de que yo había estado envuelto en la homosexualidad, sabían que estaba luchando con algo. Así que me llevaron a Jesús. 

Ahora Jesús mismo me estaba hablando, por medio del poder del Espíritu Santo y las palabras de la Biblia, entre las que Dios había inspirado al Apóstol Pablo para que las escribiera.

Al leer esas palabras, pude ver que eran las mismas palabras escritas en mi corazón, sólo que las tenía frente a mí, las estaba leyendo en las páginas de mi Biblia y estaban escritas en blanco y negro. Las palabras en mi corazón trataron de advertirme cada vez que crucé la frontera que no debí haber cruzado, no solo en términos de homosexualidad con otros hombres, sino también a nivel heterosexual con Lana. 

Sin embargo, yo había ignorado esas advertencias, y como resultado, posiblemente me encontraba rumbo hacia mi propia muerte.

Aunque no quería morir, y aunque no quería creer que lo que había hecho podía haberme llevado a la muerte, de repente sentí que era justo que muriera por mis actos del pasado. 

El asunto no se trataba de que Dios no me hubiese dado indicadores de advertencia a lo largo del camino, sino que yo seguí adelante ignorándolos. No era culpa de Dios lo que yo había hecho y sabía que no debía hacer. Esa culpa recaía por completo sobre mí. 

Nunca antes había sentido tal peso. Nunca antes había sentido un dolor tan real por mis acciones. Traté de encontrar alguna salida de mi apuro, pero si la había, no podía verla. 

¿Cómo podía revertir lo que había hecho? ¿Y cómo podía cambiar los pensamientos, sentimientos, deseos atracciones que seguía sintiendo dentro de mí?

EL CAMINO

Luego Dios, en Su asombrosa gracia, ¡me mostró el camino! 

Al día siguiente, me encontraba leyendo un pasaje en la Biblia del libro de Mateo acerca de dos ciegos que le pidieron a Jesús que los sanara.

“Ten misericordia de nosotros” le dijeron a Jesús.

Y Jesús, en lugar de hacer barro y ponerlo en sus ojos, o decirles que se sumergieran en un estanque específico, como había hecho con otros, solo les hizo una pregunta. 

Jesús les preguntó: “¿Creen que puedo sanarlos?” (Mateo 9:28b).

Cuando leí esa pregunta, sentí que Jesús me estaba haciendo la misma pregunta con respecto a mi deseo de sanidad sobre esas atracciones que podían haberme costado la vida. Sentí con claridad que Jesús me estaba preguntando: “Eric, “¿crees que puedo hacer esto también?”

Pensé en todo lo que había escuchado acerca de Jesús: cómo había sanado a los enfermos, caminado sobre el agua, y resucitado a los muertos. Sabía que, si alguien podía hacer algo así, ese era Jesús.

Estando solo, levanté mis manos hacia el cielo y le di a Jesús la misma respuesta que esos ciegos le habían dado. Dije: “sí, Señor, sí lo creo”. 

En ese instante, cuando dije esas palabras con toda la sinceridad de mi corazón, Jesús me tocó, así como había tocado a los ciegos, y me dijo lo mismo que les había dicho a ellos: “Que se haga con ustedes conforme a su fe” (Mateo 9:29) 

En ese momento, la abrumadora carga que había sentido hasta ese punto, el peso de todo lo que había hecho, se quitó de inmediato. El poder restante que la homosexualidad tenía sobre mi vida hasta ese punto fue destruido. Lo supe. Supe que la homosexualidad nunca más volvería a tener poder sobre mí.

Aquella noche, un amigo me invitó a la iglesia donde escuché una charla misionera acerca de la razón por la cual Jesús había venido a la tierra: a morir por las cosas que habíamos hecho mal en nuestras vidas y a romper el poder que éstas tenían sobre nosotros. Si estaba dispuesto a poner toda mi fe y confianza en Él, Él me daría una vida abundante, tanto aquí en la tierra como en el cielo por la eternidad.

Nunca había sentido un amor tan abrumador como el que sentí aquella noche, ni siquiera de parte de Lana. Fue asombroso. Fue maravilloso. Lo abarcó todo. Pensé: “Si Jesús estuvo dispuesto a morir por mí, entonces estoy más que dispuesto a vivir para Él”. 

Esa noche al acostarme, me puse de rodillas, enterré la cara en la almohada, y lloré. 

Lloré por todo lo que había hecho en el pasado que iba en contra del plan de Dios para mi vida. Le confesé (poniéndome de acuerdo con Él) que hasta ese punto había hecho de mi vida un gran desorden. Quería que Él asumiera el control desde ese momento en adelante. 

Le pedí a Jesús que fuera mi Señor, el que ordenaría los movimientos de ahí en adelante. 

Por primera vez en mi vida, de verdad creí que Jesús era exactamente lo que decía ser. Había hecho lo que en su carta a los Romanos el Apóstol Pablo decía que debía hacer para ser salvo: “que, si confiesas con tu boca que Jesús es el Señor y crees en tu corazón que Dios lo levantó de entre los muertos, serás salvo” (Romanos 10:9). 

Al día siguiente me levanté a una vida totalmente nueva.

UNA PELOTA DE PLAYA DESINFLADA

Antes de entregar mi vida a Jesús de esta manera, la batalla de tratar de controlar mis atracciones homosexuales había sido como tratar de mantener sumergida una pelota de playa. Podía hacerlo, pero requería gran esfuerzo. 

Incluso, aunque estaba muy enamorado de Lana, seguía teniendo esa atracción gravitacional hacia los hombres porque todavía tenía una profunda necesidad de amor y aceptación de parte de ellos. Aunque Lana podía satisfacer mis necesidades de intimidad femenina de una manera que sólo lo puede hacer una mujer, ella no podía satisfacer mis necesidades de afirmación y aceptación masculina, que sólo podía satisfacer un hombre. 

¡Pero Jesús lo hizo!

Cuando puse mi fe en Jesús, fue como si Él hubiese llegado con una navaja en su mano y pinchado esa pelota de playa de una vez por todas. La pelota colapsó y se hundió en el agua, llegando hasta mis pies en el fondo, perdiendo así todo el poder que podía tener sobre mi vida. 

Luego Jesús me dio un abrazo como ningún otro hombre pudo haberme dado.

Ese día todo cambió en mi vida, incluyendo mis pensamientos y deseos en cuanto a la homosexualidad. Recuerdo que poco después fui a almorzar con otro hombre que era muy bien parecido. 

Antes de poner mi fe en Cristo, apenas podía mirarlo cuando estaba con él porque me parecía muy atractivo. Pero después de haber venido a Cristo, cuando salimos a almorzar juntos, pude sentarme y por primera vez disfrutar por completo mi tiempo con él, hablando, riendo y disfrutando por lo que él era, un verdadero amigo, un hermano en Cristo. 

¡Me asombró que podía verlo sin sentir ninguno de esos impulsos dañinos que en otro momento habían hecho que fuera tan difícil mirarlo!

¡Esto fue muy interesante! ¡Jesús de verdad lo había hecho! ¡De verdad había roto el poder que por tanto tiempo esas atracciones habían tenido sobre mi vida!

Cuando me preguntan si todavía siento atracción hacia el mismo sexo, no me molesta decirles, “Sí, de vez en cuando, todavía las tengo”. La diferencia ahora es que ya no tienen poder sobre mi vida. Ya no me controlan. Ya no me hacen sentir que debo reprimir esos sentimientos, como tratando de mantener bajo el agua una pelota de playa. 

Todavía noto esas atracciones de vez en cuando, pero ahora es más como posar mis pies sobre esa pelota desinflada. Cuando eso sucede, solo lo rechazo o me alejo.

De verdad fui un hombre libre ¡y sigo siéndolo hoy! ¡Aleluya!

Nunca podré exagerar lo que Lana hizo por mí, y cómo su amor y amistad me sacaron de la homosexualidad en un comienzo. Pero tampoco podré exagerar lo que Jesús hizo por mí y cómo Su amor y Su amistad trataron de una vez por todas con el golpe mortal que tenía por mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

UNA VIDA ABUNDANTE

Lana, dicho sea de paso, puso su fe en Cristo alrededor de la misma época cuando yo lo hice. Ella también había empezado a leer la Biblia por su cuenta, y por primera vez en su vida. 

En su caso, aunque siempre había creído en Jesús y había orado a Él con frecuencia desde su niñez, cuando comenzó a leer la Biblia por su cuenta, entendió que nunca había invitado a Cristo para que fuera su Señor, dejando que Él determinara los movimientos y siguiendo su liderazgo, en lugar de pedir Su bendición para cualquier actividad que ella ya había decidido hacer.

Como los dos pusimos nuestra confianza en Jesús, Él puso un amor mutuo más profundo en nuestros corazones, guiándonos a casarnos y a disfrutar la plenitud de una vida sexual sin inhibiciones, que era lo que Dios siempre había querido para nosotros. 

Varios años después, Dios nos dio un hijo, luego otro, luego un tercero, un cuarto, un quinto y ¡un sexto! ¡Una vida abundante! ¡Alabado sea Dios! 

Mi historia de amor con Lana tiene mucho más, la cual relato en mi libro Fifty Shades of Grace, y que describe en más detalle cómo mis pensamientos, sentimientos, deseos y atracciones siguieron cambiando. 

Pero para el propósito de este libro, basta decir que Lana me dio la plenitud de su amor, y Jesús me dio la plenitud del suyo, y el cambio que surgió a raíz de experimentar el amor de ellos fue dramático.

Estoy muy agradecido con ellos, así como con mis amigos que en un principio me llevaron a Jesús, y todo esto nos trae de vuelta a la historia al comienzo de este capítulo respecto a los amigos que llevaron a su amigo a Jesús, y cómo tú puedes hacer lo mismo por tus amigos.

TUS CALIFICACIONES

Quizás pienses que no estás calificado para ayudar a salir de la homosexualidad a tus amigos o familiares gays. ¡La buena noticia es que no tienes que hacerlo tú solo! 

Si sigues llevando a tus amigos a Jesús, ¡Él hará el resto! Como ya lo dije antes, Dios está en el negocio de transformar vidas. Es una de sus especialidades.

Piensa en mi prima que me invitó a la iglesia. Piensa en el hombre de aquel retiro que me invitó a su estudio bíblico. Piensa en los hombres de ese grupo que se acercaron para ayudarme a leer y aplicar las palabras de Dios a mi vida. 

Ninguno de ellos sabía que yo estaba luchando con la homosexualidad, y si lo superan tampoco habrían sabido como ayudarme. Pero lo que sabían era que Jesús podía hacer cualquier cosa, absolutamente cualquier cosa. Ellos hicieron lo que podían hacer y dejaron que Jesús hiciera el resto.

La realidad es que las palabras han convencido a muy pocas personas para que salgan de la homosexualidad, pero muchas sí han salido gracias a los hechos. Si amas a las personas, entonces tienes lo que se necesita para acompañarlas en medio de lo que sea que puedan estar enfrentando, ¡incluyendo esto!

Para aquellos de ustedes que son heterosexuales y nunca en su vida han sentido atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, permítanme añadir esto: el hecho de que nunca hayan luchado en esta área es una de las mejores habilidades que pueden tener para ser de ayuda.

¿Por qué? En mi propia vida, lo que estaba buscando en mis relaciones homosexuales era la afirmación, aceptación y amor verdadero de los que me rodeaban. Aunque en cierto grado encontraba esta aceptación entre mis amigos gays, a menudo había un motivo subyacente husmeando bajo la superficie. Las cosas no siempre eran lo que parecían.

Lo que encontré en los hombres de aquel estudio bíblico fue afirmación, aceptación y amor verdadero hacia mí, pero sin ningún interés romántico o sexual. ¡Esto fue muy liberador! 

Después de poner mi fe en Cristo y comunicarles mi decisión a esos hombres, ¡ellos se regocijaron conmigo de todo corazón! Durante las siguientes semanas ellos pudieron ver la diferencia que eso estaba haciendo en mi vida, el nuevo sentido de propósito que mi fe en Cristo me había dado. Aunque todavía no conocían mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ni la obra específica que Cristo había hecho por mí, ellos igual se regocijaban conmigo, viendo que de verdad yo era un hombre transformado.

DICIÉNDOLO A LOS DEMÁS

Poco después de tomar mi decisión por Cristo, quise contarle a uno de los hombres del estudio bíblico específicamente qué había sucedido para que yo pusiera mi fe en Cristo.

Él y yo trabajábamos juntos en la misma compañía, y durante mi primer año en Texas habíamos entablado una buena amistad. 

Pero, cuando estaba por relatarle dos detalles de mi historia, sentí que debía relatársela toda a Lana de nuevo. Estaba muy asustado de cuál sería su reacción. Tenía miedo de perder su amistad. Al mismo tiempo, quería que él supiera lo que de verdad había pasado en el fondo de mi ser. 

Y, así como sucedió con Lana, cuando finalmente expresé mis palabras, mi amigo no se espantó, y no se alejó. 

En lugar de eso, se puso de pie y me dio un gran abrazo. 

Aunque nunca en su vida había experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, y no sentía ninguna atracción hacia mí, siguió amándome. Siguió interesándose por mí. Y siguió siendo mi amigo no solo ese día, sino al día siguiente, y el siguiente, y el siguiente, hasta hoy, más de 30 años después. 

Lo que mi amigo hizo por mí al escucharme y luego ponerse de pie y darme un abrazo, rompió con los sentimientos de inferioridad que tuve por años entre mis pares masculinos. Eso acabó con años de ser ridiculizado y de sentir que no era aceptado. Puso fin a años que dediqué a tratar de satisfacer de manera ilegítima las necesidades válidas de amistades cercanas con hombres. 

Ahí tenía a un amigo que me amaba por lo que era, que no quedó aturdido por lo que yo había hecho, y que estuvo dispuesto a seguir amándome por mucho tiempo hacia el futuro.

Poco a poco comencé a compartir mi historia con otras personas cercanas a mí: mi prima que me invitó a la iglesia, sus padres que habían estado orando por mí desde el día que había llegado a su ciudad, y otros hombres que también estaban luchando con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo y querían escuchar lo que Dios había hecho en mi vida y cómo lo había hecho. 

Dios tuvo mucha gracia para conmigo, no pidiéndome que compartiera mi historia con todo el mundo, sino llevándome a entender que estaba bien no compartirla con todo el mundo, al menos no en ese momento. En la historia bíblica acerca de los dos ciegos que Jesús sanó, observé que Jesús les dijo puntualmente que ¡no le dijeran a nadie lo que Él había hecho por ellos! 

¿Por qué no? ¡Eso no me sonaba muy evangelístico! Pero ese no era el momento correcto. Al parecer, Jesús tenía otro momento para que ellos lo compartieran, y es por eso que su historia quedó registrada en la Biblia, y ahora ha llegado a hacer parte de mi propia historia. 

Me fascina el hecho de que Jesús se interesa tanto en nosotros y se interesa tanto por los demás, que nos guía respecto a cuándo compartir, qué decir y con quien quiere que lo hagamos. 

Incluso Jesús mismo a veces se contuvo de decirles a Sus discípulos todo lo que tenía en su corazón, no porque no quería que lo supieran, y no porque no lo iba a comunicar en otro momento, sino porque sabía que sería más de lo que ellos podían soportar en ese momento. 

En un punto, Jesús les dijo: “Muchas cosas me quedan aún por decirles, que por ahora no podrían soportar. Pero, cuando venga el Espíritu de la verdad, él los guiará a toda la verdad, porque no hablará por su propia cuenta, sino que dirá solo lo que oiga y les anunciará las cosas por venir” (Juan 16:12-13).

Así que solo traté de mantenerme cerca de Jesús, compartiendo mi historia cuando él me animaba a hacerlo. A medida que el tiempo pasaba, sentía que Jesús me llevaba a compartir más y más. 

Mi fe se estaba fortaleciendo, y podía ver cómo mi historia era útil de más y más formas y cómo de verdad podía ayudar a otros. 

Dos años después de poner mi fe en Cristo, y poco después que Lana y yo nos casamos, el pastor de la clase de solteros de la iglesia a la que asistíamos me preguntó si estaba dispuesto a compartir mi historia con toda la clase, un grupo de 200 personas. Estaba nervioso, y todo el tiempo que hablé temblé como una hoja. Pero pude ver a Dios obrar en cada persona cuando presentaba la historia de lo que Jesús había hecho por mí. 

Al final de mi mensaje, toda la clase se puso de pie y aplaudió. Quedaron muy impactados y llenos de confianza en que Dios puede hacer cualquier cosa, absolutamente cualquier cosa. 

Esa respuesta me tomó por sorpresa, puesto que había compartido con ellos el secreto más profundo en mi vida. Ellos no celebraban mi secreto, claro está, sino la forma como Dios había cambiado mi vida y me había redimido de aquello que me habría quitado la vida si hubiese seguido por ese camino. 

Después de eso, muchos me dijeron que les había animado lo que Dios había hecho por mí, porque les dio esperanza de que Él también podía hacer algo similar por ellos, sin importar lo que estuvieran enfrentando.

MÁS SANIDAD

Después de esa charla, Dios siguió invitándome a compartirla con mayor frecuencia. Y como veía que Dios podía usar mi historia para Su gloria, estuve más dispuesto a compartirla. 

También empecé a ver que el compartirla me daba una dosis adicional de sanidad que también necesitaba. Ahí estaba yo, temeroso de que al contar tan abiertamente lo que siempre había sido tan privado, mi historia terminara alejando aún más a los demás. En lugar de eso, encontré que el compartir mi historia les daba a las personas la oportunidad de expresar su aprecio hacia mí a pesar de lo que había hecho en el pasado. Sólo en la economía de Dios, Él podía sacar algo tan bueno de algo tan malo. 

Para quienes tienen miedo (como yo) de decirles a los demás lo que Dios ha hecho por ustedes en sus vidas, permítanme resaltar cuánta sanidad trajo Dios a mi corazón a medida que yo fui compartiendo mi historia. 

Recuerdo que se la relaté a uno de los hombres más heterosexuales que haya conocido, un hombre grande y fuerte que era el entrenador principal de una escuela secundaria local. Un hombre de hombres, ¡sin duda! Y ahí estaba yo, sintiendo que Dios quería que le dijera que había sido homosexual. 

Este hombre hacía parte de otro grupo de hombres al que luego asistí en un pequeño pueblo de Illinois donde me mudé con mi familia después de nuestro tiempo en Texas. Él y yo nos habíamos hecho compañeros de oración, y nos encontrábamos una vez a la semana para orar y animarnos mutuamente antes de iniciar el día en nuestros respectivos trabajos.

Después de varios encuentros como ese, sentí que debía contarle lo que Dios había hecho por mí en cuanto a las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Tenía miedo, de nuevo, de contarle a otra persona lo que había hecho. Fue una mañana tensa para mí, porque sentía que tenía mucho que perder, mucho en juego. 

Pero, como había sucedido con Lana, y con mi compañero de trabajo en Texas, después de compartir mi historia con este hombre, se puso de pie, y también me dio un gran abrazo de oso. Lloró diciéndome que me amaba, me apreciaba y me agradeció por compartir esa parte tan personal de mi vida. 

Él tampoco había sentido atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, nunca en su vida. Para mí, y por la forma como me habían tratado en el pasado los chicos del equipo de fútbol americano de mi escuela, el abrazo de ese entrenador y sus palabras de afirmación me trajeron de vuelta. 

Ya han pasado 20 años desde aquel día cuando compartí mi historia con aquel hombre, y es interesante que ahora lidera un estudio bíblico con los jóvenes de una iglesia nueva en otro pueblo donde yo también vivo, ¡un estudio bíblico al que asisten mis propios hijos adolescentes!

En lugar de alejarse con mi historia, que era lo que me temía, el amoroso acogimiento de este hombre, no solo hacia mí, sino hacia toda mi familia también, ha permanecido por más de 20 años.

¿Puedes ver cómo Dios usa un hombre que siempre ha sido heterosexual, que sabe muy poco acerca de la homosexualidad, para ministrar a un hombre roto que tiene gran necesidad de su ayuda? No se necesita mucho, pero sí se necesita algo: se requiere amor, puro, no adulterado, amor de corazón.

Si puedes hacer algo por quienes luchan con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, es poder juntarlos con otros que nunca han luchado en esta área de sus vidas, y pedirles que caminen juntos por una o varias temporadas, o a lo largo de la vida. 

TRAYENDO TUS AMIGOS A JESÚS

Así como nunca podré exagerar lo que Lana hizo por mí al llenar esos lugares solitarios en mi corazón con un alma gemela, una ayudadora, una amante y una amiga constante; y así como nunca podré exagerar lo que Jesús ha hecho por mí al llenar ese vacío del tamaño de Dios que había en mi corazón, de una forma que sólo Él podía hacerlo; tampoco podré exagerar lo que mis amigos heterosexuales han hecho en términos de llenar esos vacíos en mi vida donde he necesitado y anhelado amigos cercanos, amigos con quienes caminar a lo largo de la vida y con quienes compartir un vínculo que no es ni romántico ni sexual, sino que satisface una de mis mayores necesidades que sólo ellos pueden llenar.

Lo mejor que Lana y mis otros amigos han hecho por mí durante todos estos años, ha sido mostrarme a Jesús, aquel que pudo sanarme, salvarme y cambiarme de adentro hacia afuera. 

Él es el que está a mi lado cada noche al acostarme y cada mañana al levantarme. Él es el que sabe por lo que estoy pasando a cada momento del día, que puede regocijarse conmigo cuando me regocijo, y puede llorar conmigo cuando lloro. 

Él es el que me dio la vida desde el comienzo y que me dio una nueva vida cuando puse mi fe en Él. 

¡Me fascina saber que si no te gusta cómo naciste, puedes volver a nacer! ¡Sólo pon tu fe en Jesús! ¡Aleluya! 

Como Jesús le dijo a un hombre llamado Nicodemo que vino a él de noche: “De veras te aseguro que quien no nazca de nuevo no puede ver el reino de Dios… Porque tanto amó Dios al mundo que dio a su Hijo unigénito, para que todo el que cree en él no se pierda, sino que tenga vida eterna” (Juan 3:3 y 3:16).

Trae tus amigos a Jesús. Quizás no conozcas cuál es su necesidad, pero Él sí. Quizás no puedas sanarlos, pero Él puede. Sigue haciendo lo que puedes, y sigue confiando en que Él hará el resto.

Guías de estudio para los capítulos 5 y 6

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 5: “EL VALOR DE UN AMIGO AMOROSO”

Resumen del Capítulo

El autor dice que, a lo largo de su vida, en una escala de 0 a 10, sus atracciones las pondría en tres diferentes puntos:

  • en su adolescencia, en 7 u 8 inclinándose firmemente hacia la heterosexualidad, aunque hasta ese momento nunca había tenido relaciones sexuales,
  • al comenzar sus veintes, en un 2 o 3 inclinándose mucho hacia la homosexualidad, después de haber tenido sus primeras y subsecuentes interacciones con hombres,
  • y a mitad de sus veintes, en un 10+, inclinándose abrumadoramente hacia la heterosexualidad, después de haber tenido una relación íntima con la mujer que luego llegó a ser su esposa. 

Tras 30 años después de haber salido de la homosexualidad, nunca ha vuelto.

Después de confesarle a su novia acerca de sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ella respondió diciendo que aun así lo amaba y estaba dispuesta a acompañarlo en medio de todo eso. Ella se convirtió en uno de sus mayores apoyadores que lo ayudaron a salir de la homosexualidad, y lo hizo sólo amándolo en medio del proceso. Él dice que ella:

  • no tenía un “corazón” especial para los homosexuales.
  • nunca se había sentido atraída hacia su mismo sexo,
  • y no permitió que la confusión que había en la mente de él le impidiera verlo como la persona que ella creía que era, y la persona que ella creía que Dios tenía en mente cuando lo creó. 

Tú puedes hacer lo mismo por los que amas.

El autor dice que las personas pueden ayudar grandemente a los gays, así no se sientan cómodos con la idea de la homosexualidad. El hecho de que alguien no tenga atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, lo califica más para amar de verdad a los que sí tienen esas atracciones, dándoles afecto de corazón sin tener ninguna expectativa romántica o sexual.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Juan 3:17. ¿Por qué crees que la respuesta de la novia del autor fue tan útil para él en su proceso?

¿Por qué es importante no permitir que la confusión mental que tiene otra persona te impida verla como crees que es y como crees que Dios la creó? 

Lee Proverbios 25:11. Antes de leer este capítulo, ¿cómo habrías respondido si alguien que amas te hubiera dicho que es gay? Después de leer este capítulo, ¿cómo quisieras que fuera tu respuesta? (Y si alguien a quien amas ya te dijo que es gay, ¿cómo respondiste, y cómo quisieras haber respondido?

¿Puedes entender por qué los sentimientos de atracción que tenía el autor cambiaron con el tiempo, pasando de ser predominantemente heterosexuales a homosexuales después de sus primeros encuentros íntimos con hombres, y después volvieron a cambiar tras su primer encuentro íntimo con una mujer? ¿Qué función consideras que jugaron las “necesidades válidas” en sus atracciones en cada uno de esos escenarios y en cada cambio de sentimientos?

Considera esta afirmación: “El sexo es una maravillosa extensión de la intimidad, pero nunca tendrá comparación si se lo toma como sustituto”. Cuando las personas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo “solo intentan” tener relaciones sexuales con alguien del sexo opuesto, ¿por qué ese tipo de encuentros tienden al fracaso?

¿Cómo puede alguien que nunca ha experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo ser de ayuda especial para alguien que sí  ha tenido esas atracciones? ¿Qué le puede ofrecer alguien a otros así no tenga un “corazón” especial hacia los gays, o sí incluso siente repulsión ante la idea de la homosexualidad?

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 6: “EL VALOR DE UN AMIGO AMOROSO”

Resumen del Capítulo

La Biblia relata una historia de unas personas que llevaron a su amigo a Jesús para que lo sanara. De este relato podemos aprender tres cosas:

  • cuando Jesús vio la fe de ellos sanó al amigo enfermo, tanto en su cuerpo como en su alma,
  • aunque quizás no conozcas las verdaderas necesidades de tus amigos, Jesús sí las conoce,
  • y si haces lo que puedes hacer, lleva a tus amigos a Jesús, ¡él hará lo que él puede hacer! 

El autor comparte cómo algunos amigos lo llevaron a él a Jesús, sin ni siquiera conocer sus luchas con los sentimientos homosexuales, pero sabiendo que luchaba con algo. Jesús luego sanó al autor en su cuerpo y en su alma. 

El autor describe lo sucedido de esta manera:

  • mientras leía la Biblia, entendió que había hecho algo que podía haberle quitado la vida,
  • se arrepintió de lo que había hecho y fue libre de volver a que sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo controlaran su vida,
  • y describe el cambio como algo similar a pasar de tratar de mantener bajo el agua una pelota de playa a que Jesús pinchara esa pelota con una navaja, derrotando así cualquier capacidad que pudiera tener la pelota para volver a flote por su cuenta.

El autor dice que agradece a sus amigos por hacer lo que podían y agradece a Jesús por hacer lo que Él podía. Él anima a otros a llevar a sus amigos a Jesús, entendiendo que su propia relación constante con Jesús le ha traído la mayor sanidad posible.Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Lucas 5:17-26. ¿Que hubo en la fe de los amigos que pudo haber tocado el corazón de Jesús? 

Lee Mateo 9:27-31. ¿Por qué crees que Jesús le pidió a los ciegos si creían que Él podía sanarlos? Según Jesús, ¿qué función cumplió la fe de ellos en su sanidad? Según el autor, ¿qué papel jugó su fe en Jesús para su sanidad? 

Lee Romanos 10:8-10. De acuerdo con este pasaje, ¿qué se necesita para ser salvo? ¿Qué sucedió con el autor cuando declaró que Jesús era su Señor y creyó en su corazón que Dios lo había resucitado de los muertos?

Lee Juan 16:12-13. ¿Por qué Jesús no siempre comparte la totalidad de lo que podía haber compartido con sus discípulos? ¿Qué sabiduría puede haber habido para que el autor no compartiera todo lo que pudo haber compartido con otros respecto a su testimonio? ¿Cómo ésta sabiduría también le trajo alivio?

¿De qué manera podrías tú “traer a tus amigos a Jesús”? ¿A qué clase de actividades podrías invitarlos o qué cosas podrías hacer por ti mismo que podrían ser útiles para presentarles a Jesús? 

El autor usa la analogía de sostener bajo el agua una pelota de playa para describir cómo sus atracciones habían tenido atrapada su vida. ¿Alguna vez sentiste algo similar en alguna área de tu vida? ¿Qué clase de alivio trajo, o traería, si Jesús pinchara esa pelota de playa una vez y para siempre? ¿Estarías dispuesto a invitar a Jesús a hacerlo?

¿De qué maneras el autor vio que el compartir su historia, en determinadas ocasiones con determinadas personas, traía mucha más sanidad a su propia vida? ¿De qué maneras se podrían aplicar estas ideas a ti si consideras compartir tu propia historia?

Capítulo 7: El valor de una iglesia amorosa

Donde comparto cómo la iglesia me ha ayudado en esta área de mi vida, incluyendo mi iglesia local, la iglesia que se extiende más allá de los muros de ésta y la iglesia a lo largo de la historia.

Hay quienes preguntan: “¿Qué me dices de la terrible respuesta de la iglesia a este tema? ¿No crees que ha sido horrible?” 

A eso tengo que preguntar: “¿Cuál ha sido tu experiencia personal con la iglesia en cuanto a este asunto?” Sinceramente quiero saber. Porque he escuchado historias de terror acerca de cómo las iglesias han hablado sobre este tema, pero sólo las he escuchado en informes de noticias o en revistas o en televisión. 

En toda mi vida, nunca he hecho parte de una iglesia en la que no me haya sentido amado, aceptado, cuidado, respetado y tratado con compasión profunda en cuanto a este tema, incluso cuando estaba involucrado en la homosexualidad. 

Toda mi vida he estado en la iglesia, más de cinco décadas, en iglesias de diversos tamaños, denominaciones y en diferentes ciudades. Y en todos los años que me he congregado en esas iglesias, semana tras semana, tras semana, por más de 50 años, nunca he escuchado un sermón o alguna enseñanza que me haya hecho sentir rechazado, despreciado, desprotegido o no aceptado. 

Ni una sola vez me he sentido degradado, reprochado, humillado o amenazado. De hecho, he encontrado todo lo opuesto. Los líderes y las personas en esas iglesias me han recibido, me han amado, han cuidado de mí, han sido considerados conmigo, se han interesado en mí y han sido amables. Cuando he sido honesto al hablar con otras personas acerca mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ya sea a nivel personal, en grupos pequeños o desde el púlpito, me he sentido respetado, aceptado y honrado. 

Me han abrazado más veces de lo que podría contar, ya sean hombres y mujeres de todo tipo, de un amplio rango de trasfondos, formas y tamaños (incluyendo fornidos entrenadores de fútbol americano). El amor y la aceptación que me han mostrado los cristianos, en muchos entornos me han ayudado en mi propia sanidad a lo largo de este viaje. He encontrado que la iglesia es un refugio, un santuario, y un lugar de sanidad y aceptación. 

Es “allá afuera”, en “el mundo”, ya sea en el gimnasio o en espacios públicos, o en entornos seculares, donde me he sentido vilipendiado, maltratado, irrespetado, amenazado, intimidado y degradado. Es allá afuera, en el mundo, donde me he sentido rechazado, alejado, humillado y despreciado. Es allá afuera donde me han llamado gay, afeminado, marica, raro, y [eliminando el improperio] homo, pero nunca, jamás, ni una sola vez, en la iglesia.

Antes de mudarme a Texas, leí un artículo en una revista de circulación nacional respecto a una iglesia en ese estado. El artículo describía lo que esa iglesia pensaba acerca de los homosexuales y lo que les harían si alguno iba a esa iglesia. 

Recuerdo que pensé: “¡vaya!” No veo cómo podría vivir en Texas. ¡Eso sería horrible!” 

Pero cuando obtuve una oferta de trabajo de una compañía en Texas y me mudé allá, lo que encontré en la iglesia a la que asistí, fue un amable grupo de hombres, quienes fueron de gran apoyo, me amaron y cuidaron de mí como nunca antes alguien lo había hecho. 

Esa iglesia fue el primer entorno en mi vida donde me sentí tan apreciado por mis dones y talentos, y por ser único, ¡y esto venía de personas que no querían tener relaciones sexuales conmigo! Su cariño genuino me llevó a tener un corazón abierto a Cristo, lo cual cambió el resto de mi vida. 

Algunos de los hombres de esa iglesia llegaron a ser unos de mis mejores amigos, amigos para toda la vida, que me apoyaron en mi boda y hasta el día de hoy siguen apoyándome a mí, a mi familia y mi ministerio. Pero si hubiese prestado atención a lo que leí en esa revista de circulación nacional, nunca me habría mudado a Texas. 

Así que mi primera pregunta a quienes piensan que la iglesia les ha dado una respuesta equivocada a las personas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, es para saber cómo ha sido su experiencia personal.

MI EXPERIENCIA EN LA IGLESIA

Quizás mi experiencia sea un testimonio a los tipos de iglesias de las que he hecho parte. Pero a lo largo de los años he estado involucrado con una amplia variedad de iglesias, no todas han sido del mismo tamaño y sabor. Las iglesias han variado en tamaño desde unas pocas docenas de miembros hasta varios miles, y he pasado varias fronteras teológicas desde tradicionales y evangélicas hasta no denominacionales y carismáticas.

O quizás mi experiencia sea un testimonio de la forma como reaccioné personalmente a las cosas que escucho en la iglesia. Aunque en ocasiones no he estado de acuerdo con un orador o un líder en cuanto a cierto tema, mi tendencia ha sido a dejar que esas pequeñas porciones se deslicen, porque por lo general puedo escuchar lo que hay en el corazón de esas personas cuando lo dicen. 

Así que no me ofende mucho lo que las personas dicen en las iglesias a las que asisto, porque sé, y creo que están tratando de hacer lo correcto; están tratando de vivir como Cristo lo mejor que pueden. Y, honestamente, aunque tengo convicciones muy firmes en cuanto a ciertos temas, es muy poco probable que en un entorno de iglesia escuche cosas con las que esté en desacuerdo al punto de enojarme o sentir que mis pensamientos u opiniones estén siendo denigrados de manera indebida.

¿Alguna vez me ha herido la iglesia? Sí. ¿He tenido algunas “experiencias desagradables con la iglesia”, en las que me han tratado de formas que a mi parecer no han sido cristianas, y que me han causado heridas profundas? Sí. Pero nunca de tal forma que denigre la homosexualidad. 

Incluso en mis años de universidad, mientras estuve involucrado en la homosexualidad, seguía asistiendo a la iglesia. Recuerdo que escuché un sermón sobre el sexo y después de escucharlo pensé: “Tengo opiniones diferentes sobre ese tema”. Pero no me sentí herido ni ofendido por lo dicho. Respetaba lo que se había dicho, porque podía escuchar la intención genuina del orador hacia el corazón de los que hacíamos parte de la congregación.

MI EXPERIENCIA EN INTERNET

Quizás algunos piensen que debo haber tenido una exposición muy limitada a las iglesias si no me he encontrado con la mezquindad que ellos han percibido. Pero pueden estar equivocados. 

Por más de 20 años he dirigido un ministerio en internet el cual ahora alcanza a casi 40.000 personas al día, seis días a la semana en más de 160 países. De vez en cuando escribo sobre la homosexualidad, incluyendo mi propio testimonio acerca de cómo Cristo ha cambiado mi vida. 

En más de 20 años escribiendo, dando conferencias y hablando acerca de este tema como parte de mi ministerio, solo un puñado de personas me han dado respuestas negativas, y en ninguna ocasión esas respuestas han provenido de personas que dicen odiar a los homosexuales, sino sólo de personas que dicen que los aman, que afirman que aman la diversidad, y que ¡dicen que quieren que todos sean tratados con tolerancia y respeto! 

Es sólo de ellos, los autoproclamados más “tolerantes” grupos de cristianos, de quienes he escuchado algo de odio o mezquino hacia mí o mi mensaje acerca de este tema. Siempre me ha parecido irónico que quienes más acogen la idea de la tolerancia parecen mostrarla menos hacia quienes no están de acuerdo con ellos. 

En todos mis años de ministerio en esta área, no puedo recordar ninguna persona, ni siquiera una, que me haya escrito y me haya hecho sentir condenado o menospreciado por haber compartido mis experiencias con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Y en caso de que creas que todos mis suscriptores comparten mi manera de pensar en el reino de Dios, y quizás yo solo les estoy predicando a los de mi coro, ¡créeme, no es así! Mi grupo de suscriptores está compuesto por cristianos y no cristianos de tantas denominaciones como las que pueden existir, ubicados en países de todo el mundo. 

Suelo recibir noticias de personas opinando sobre lo que he escrito o enviado y con lo que están en gran desacuerdo. Ellos no guardan sus opiniones si consideran que una cita o un párrafo no coincide con sus creencias o teologías personales, ¡o si hay un apóstrofe o coma fuera de lugar! 

Pero, con respecto a algo que yo haya escrito en cuanto a la homosexualidad, no tengo memoria de haber escuchado ni siquiera un comentario mezquino acerca de los sentimientos que tuve de atracción hacia el mismo sexo y que hayan provenido de algún cristiano. 

Por el contrario, las personas se han sentido inspiradas por los relatos que han escuchado, y a menudo, en sus comentarios han dado detalles de sus propias vidas o las de sus seres queridos, y han buscado consejo y ánimo en medio de lo que han estado enfrentando. Por lo general, las personas de verdad quieren saber más, mucho más, acerca de lo que sea que pueda decirles en cuanto a este tema.

O quizás mi experiencia es un testimonio de la forma de presentar lo que comparto. O quizás es un testimonio de la mano protectora de Dios sobre mí en estos últimos 20 años de ministerio. Posiblemente sea una combinación de todas estas cosas que he mencionado. 

Pero, sencillamente, mi experiencia no me ha llevado a decir que la iglesia ha tratado mal a los homosexuales, o que no ha respetado o sido compasiva con quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ya sea en las iglesias de las que he hecho parte aquí en Illinois, iglesias de las que hice parte en lo profundo de Texas, o personas de iglesias alrededor del mundo a quienes sirvo a diario. 

En cuanto a los pastores que he tenido el honor de escuchar y de quienes he aprendido semana tras semana, ninguno de ellos nunca ha respondido con odio, maldad o intolerancia después de escuchar mi historia en cuanto a las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Los pastores solo han respondido con amor, gracia y respeto por lo que he vivido. 

Puedo pensar en al menos una docena de pastores y líderes en mi iglesia actual, que es de más de 5.000 miembros, que conocen mi historia y por lo general me saludan con grandes abrazos, mucho amor y mucho respeto, no solo cuando comparto mi historia de como Dios ha cambiado mi vida, sino también cuando comparto mis pensamientos y sentimientos constantes respecto a las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Todos los grupos pequeños en los que he participado han hecho lo mismo, me han permitido hablar abiertamente de mis experiencias, lo cual suele conducir a que otros hablen de sus propias luchas en otras áreas de sus vidas.

TU EXPERIENCIA

Quizás estés leyendo esto acerca de la iglesia y esa no haya sido tu experiencia. De ser así, lo siento mucho. Como cristianos, deberíamos ser los embajadores más amorosos del Hombre más amoroso que jamás haya vivido en esta tierra. 

Me da una gran tristeza cuando veo que no nos estamos comportando de esa forma. Podría apelar al hecho de que todos tenemos una naturaleza caída, que ninguno es perfecto, pero eso no nos excusa de no hacer nuestro mejor esfuerzo para resolver las cosas con las personas a quienes hemos ofendido. 

Si tú y yo estuviéramos juntos en persona, te pediría que me hablaras de cómo ha sido tu experiencia con la iglesia, y con gusto me disculparía en lugar de mis hermanos y hermanas en Cristo por cualquier ofensa que hayan cometido contra ti. Ya lo he hecho antes y lo volvería a hacer.

Pero después de haber conversado contigo, también te pediría que me hablaras de cómo han sido tus experiencias “allá afuera” y que luego las compararas con tus experiencias en la iglesia. 

Si, por comparación, tu iglesia te ha tratado con menos amor que el trato que has recibido del mundo, entonces te sugeriría, con la mayor amabilidad posible, que busques otra iglesia, y no solo una que apoye a los homosexuales, porque puedo asegurarte de que no estás recibiendo la plenitud de lo que Cristo y Su próxima esposa, la iglesia, tienen para ofrecerte. No estás recibiendo lo que puedes recibir en miles de iglesias en todo el mundo, iglesias constituidas por personas pecadoras como tú y como yo, pero que en su corazón de verdad quieren hacer lo mejor posible para ser como Jesús.

Algunas iglesias, y, por mi experiencia, con “algunas” me refiero a muy pocas, suelen salir en noticias por estar llenas de odio y rechazo hacia este tema. 

Es correcto que los espectadores cristianos denuncien esas iglesias por su comportamiento, tanto como lo hace el público secular. Sin embargo, después de haber sido denunciadas esas iglesias, con frecuencia, los medios siguen considerándolas como si fueran las representantes de la mayoría de iglesias existentes. Y no lo son. 

En contraste, he visto iglesias que han mostrado gran respeto y amabilidad hacia los homosexuales, sin mencionar los desfiles de orgullo gay y celebraciones de diversidad, a las que miembros de iglesias han ido para regalar agua, expresar su amor y participar en discusiones amables y civilizadas con los asistentes. He visto a miembros de iglesias hacer esto en entornos donde incluso los homosexuales expresan algunas de las espeluznantes actividades en las que sus compañeros gays participan, y lo hacen públicamente, frente a niños y familias. 

He encontrado que los cristianos están entre los grupos de personas que más aman, aceptan y respetan a los demás en todo el mundo, en especial cuando los comparo con algunas de las otras principales religiones de hoy en las que la homosexualidad sigue siendo castigado con la muerte. Y en todos mis años de asistencia a iglesias cristianas, nunca, en ninguna de esas iglesias, he escuchado a un líder pedir la muerte de los homosexuales, o algo diferente a honor, amor y respeto hacia quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo.

Habiendo dicho todo esto, decir que mi experiencia en la iglesia habla por todos los que alguna vez han sentido atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, sería como pedirle a alguien de los Estados Unidos que describiera cómo es para todos haber crecido en ese país. ¡Es imposible! 

Todos tenemos personalidades, trasfondos, historias, dones, limitaciones y demás cosas tan diferentes, que sería imposible usar el ejemplo de una persona como yo para catalogar a todos los que sienten atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Sin embargo, cuando escucho a alguien hablar acerca del trato que la iglesia ha tenido en cuanto a este tema, me gusta preguntar acerca de las experiencias personales, porque de verdad me son ajenas. Y cuando hago esta pregunta, es más frecuente ver que las personas no tienen historias específicas que relatar según sus propias experiencias, sino que están repitiendo historias que han escuchado de otros, a menudo en informes noticiosos que presentan unas de las pocas iglesias que ya he mencionado, las cuales también han sido denunciadas por casi todos los demás cristianos. 

Lo he visto suceder también en temas diferentes a la homosexualidad. Cuando inicié en el ministerio, hubo unos grandes escándalos sexuales que sacudieron al cristianismo. Le comenté a uno de los líderes de mi iglesia que pareciera que todos los pastores estaban teniendo una aventura amorosa. A lo que él respondió: “Oh, conozco muchos pastores que nunca han tenido una aventura amorosa”. 

Él tenía razón, y sus palabras me ayudaron a recalibrar mis pensamientos. Si bien había unos muy pocos casos de alto perfil, cuando me di a la tarea de pensar en los diferentes pastores que había conocido personalmente a lo largo de los años, me di cuenta de que esos pocos casos de alto perfil que veía en las noticias en realidad eran la minoría. 

Aunque es natural que algunas historias ocupen los titulares nacionales, la razón por la cual lo hacen no es porque sean la norma, sino todo lo contrario: ocupan los titulares porque no son la norma, son la excepción.

LA IGLESIA MÁS AMPLIA

Ya he compartido muchas historias contigo acerca de la ayuda cotidiana que las personas en iglesias locales me han dado en cuanto a este tema, incluyendo los amigos heterosexuales que he conocido en esas iglesias a las que he asistido, quienes me han acompañado y apoyado en lugar de alejarme.

Permíteme añadir dos historias más acerca de la iglesia en general y la iglesia histórica, las cuales te ayudarán a entender lo valiosa que ha sido la iglesia para mí y para muchos otros, especialmente en partes muy críticas de mi viaje.

Tras dar mi testimonio ante la clase de solteros en mi iglesia de Texas, una mujer se me acercó y me habló de una conferencia para personas que luchaban con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Ella pensó que quizás yo debía considerar asistir a esa conferencia, pero para ser honesto, no quería ir. Nada sonaba peor que reunirme con una cantidad de personas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ¡porque todos allá sabrían por qué me encontraba en ese lugar! También podía usar una insignia que dijera: “¡Sí, he luchado con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo!”

Pero unos pocos meses después, un amigo me preguntó si estaría dispuesto a asistir con él a esa conferencia. Él pensó que le podría ayudar con sus luchas, así que decidí ir, tanto por su bien, como para saber acerca de la misma, como lo había sugerido aquella mujer en mi iglesia.

En ese momento, mis deseos y atracciones hacia Lana eran fuera de serie, y estaba disfrutando mucho mis amistades con muchos hombres heterosexuales. No estaba luchando con ningún tema específico cuando fui a esa conferencia, pero sí tenía una pregunta en el corazón, y me preguntaba si Dios podía darme la respuesta. 

Me preguntaba si en todo esto todavía estaba pasando algo por alto, alguna porción de información crítica que quizás había ignorado que alguien podría usar algún día en mi contra para arruinar mi matrimonio, mi familia o mi vida. En mi opinión todo estaba bien, pero no quería puntos ciegos, así que me pareció buena idea aprender lo que más pudiera en cuanto a este tema, con las personas que ya habían estado ahí y que habían tratado con lo mismo durante años. 

De modo que fui a la conferencia. Después de superar la incomodidad inicial de literalmente ponerme una etiqueta en el pecho con el logo de la conferencia (ahí estaba: mi insignia diciendo” “¡Sí he luchado con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo!”), todo me pareció asombroso. 

¡Ahí estaban más de 1.000 personas que había experimentado lo mismo que yo! Muchos de ellos ya habían encontrado una salida por medio del poder de Cristo y ahora estaban en diferentes etapas en su caminar de libertad. Algunos apenas habían puesto su fe en Cristo y querían saber qué debían hacer ahora. Otros habían estado caminando en completa libertad por 20, 30, 40 o más años. Para ese entonces habían sido muy pocos mis encuentros con personas que habían tenido experiencias similares a la mía. ¡Y ahí habían más de 1.000 personas de esas en un mismo lugar!

Asistí a cada una de las sesiones, escuchando a todos los oradores que confirmaron lo que yo había experimentado y tuve que aceptar que era verdad. ¡Fue fascinante!

LA RESPUESTA DE DIOS A MI PREGUNTA

Una noche, durante la alabanza, mientras adoraba a Dios por esa reunión de cristianos, le pedí una respuesta a mi pregunta (si había algo más que debía saber en cuanto a este asunto, para que no surgiera en el futuro y me arruinara a mí, o a mi familia, o toda mi vida), y un hombre que estaba de pie adorando a mi lado, a quien nunca antes había visto, se dio la vuelta y dijo: “Nunca vas a volver a lo que una vez fuiste. “Nunca, nunca, nunca, nunca, nunca vas a volver”. 

Quedé asombrado. Pudo haberle dicho esas palabras a cualquier otra persona en esa conferencia, y habrían sido de ayuda, pero para mí, como esa era la pregunta puntual que tenía en mi corazón para Dios, no pude evitar prestar atención. 

Lo siguiente que dijo fue mucho más asombroso. Dijo: “El hombre te va a dar muchas oportunidades. No las tomes. Toma sólo las que Dios te da. Satanás no necesita hacerte pecar para impedir que hagas la voluntad de Dios en tu vida. Lo único que tiene que hacer es llevarte a hacer cosas diferentes a las que Dios quiere que hagas, así esas otras cosas puedan ser buenas y piadosas en sí mismas”.

Las palabras de este hombre llegaron a lo profundo de mi ser. 

Fue durante esa adoración que descargué todas las preocupaciones que tenía de que algún día volvería a la homosexualidad o que de alguna forma esto me destruiría a mí, mi vida o a mi familia. 

No es que me haya sentido inmune a la tentación, ni que repentinamente haya bajado la guardia de tal modo que nunca más volvería a ceder a algún pensamiento. Pero eso me ayudó a cambiar de enfoque. Dejé de preocuparme pensando que algo de mi pasado podía estar al acecho, y me concentré en lo que creía que Dios estaba poniendo en mi corazón para hacer.

Después de la última sesión, el día de cierre de la conferencia, iba caminando por el campus de vuelta al dormitorio donde me estaba quedando, cuando un auto con un par de chicos pasó por mi lado. Uno de ellos, que al parecer había escuchado que esa conferencia tenía algo que ver con la homosexualidad, se asomó por la ventana del pasajero y me gritó: “¡Muérete, [improperio eliminado] afeminado!”

Mientras ellos se alejaban a toda velocidad ¡yo estallé en carcajadas! Aunque estaba usando un distintivo que implícitamente decía: “¡He luchado con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo!” ¡Sentí que nunca antes en mi vida había estado tan lejos de ser homosexual! 

Dios había hecho una obra asombrosa en mi vida y durante esa semana, ¡que mi única respuesta a esa burla fue reírme!” (Y, como quizás lo notes, el hombre que me dijo eso no era alguien de la iglesia, sino alguien de “allá afuera”, de “el mundo”. Eran cristianos, los de la iglesia, los que habían organizado esa conferencia para ayudar a quienes querían ayuda).

Esa reunión de cristianos fue de tanta ayuda, no solo para mí sino también para mi amigo y muchos otros con quienes pude conversar durante la semana, que por varios años volví como orador para hablar sobre diferentes temas.

Había descubierto que la iglesia en general estaba haciendo su trabajo de amar a Dios y a los gays, y me alegró hacer parte de su trabajo.

LA IGLESIA HISTÓRICA

La otra historia que quiero compartir es acerca de cómo la iglesia histórica me ha ayudado en esta área de mi vida. 

Por ejemplo, hasta cuando puse mi fe en Cristo llegué a saber que Dios también había liberado a otros de este mismo problema en las iglesias del pasado, en los días posteriores a la vida, muerte y resurrección de Jesús.

A medida que seguía leyendo mi Biblia, descubrí que la iglesia de Corinto, Grecia, estaba integrada por personas que habían participado en la homosexualidad y cuyas vidas habían sido transformadas por el poder del Espíritu Santo. El mismo Apóstol Pablo que escribió la carta a los cristianos en Roma, también escribió una carta a los cristianos en Corinto alrededor de los años 53 y 57 D.C., tan solo 20 a 22 años después del ministerio público de Jesús en la tierra. (Jesús fue crucificado en el año 33 D.C.). 

En la carta de Pablo a los Corintios, él dice que algunas de las personas en esa iglesia habían estado involucradas en la homosexualidad, entre otras cosas, y luego añadió: “Algunos de ustedes antes eran así; pero fueron limpiados; fueron hechos santos; fueron hechos justos ante Dios al invocar el nombre del Señor Jesucristo y por el Espíritu de nuestro Dios” (1 Corintios 6:11, itálicas mías). 

Esa pequeña palabra, eran, es lo que me más impactó cuando leí por primera vez ese pasaje. Encontré que hace casi 2.000 años hubo personas que experimentaron lo que yo estaba viviendo, habían estado en la homosexualidad, y luego habían salido de él ¡en el nombre de Jesucristo y por el poder de Su Espíritu Santo! 

Si me asombró encontrar en esas conferencias a 1.000 personas que habían pasado por todo lo que yo había estado pasando, ¡puedes imaginar mi asombro al ver que justo en los días posteriores a la vida, muerte y resurrección de Jesús también hubo personas que experimentaron lo mismo! 

Comprendí con claridad que lo que había vivido no era algo nuevo que se está dando sólo ahora en los siglos 20 y 21. Había tenido que enfrentar algo a lo que las personas habían estado haciendo frente por miles de años. 

Conforme he seguido leyendo la Biblia, he aprendido que se ha hablado de la homosexualidad desde los días de Abraham, unos 4.000 años atrás (lee Génesis 18:16-19:29). 

Se volvió a hablar de lo mismo en los días de Moisés cuando Dios le dio instrucciones a Moisés acerca de cómo debería ser nuestra manera de vivir, unos 3.300 años atrás (lee Levítico 18:22 y 20:13). 

Y de nuevo se volvió a hablar de homosexualidad en los años siguientes al ministerio de Cristo en la tierra, unos 2.000 años atrás (lee 1 Corintios 6:9-11).

¡Todo esto es para decir que a Dios no le sorprende la homosexualidad! ¡No es algo que brotó de repente en mi generación! 

A Dios no le sorprende que las personas se sientan tentadas con eso. De hecho, ¡esa es la razón por la cual él habla de eso en la Biblia! 

En la Biblia, Dios no habla de cosas que a Su parecer no sean de tentación para las personas, sino que habla de aquello que Él sabe que es tentador hacerlo. Y en este tema en particular, Dios nos ha expresado sus advertencias con la mayor claridad posible. 

Sin embargo, he visto cómo muchos tratan de hacer gimnasia teológica con esas advertencias claras y explícitas, a fin de hacer parecer que Dios sí quería que participáramos de la homosexualidad. 

Lo entiendo. Comprendo su manera de leer esos pasajes y he leído sus argumentos a favor de eso. Pero para mí, cada uno de esos argumentos se cae por su propio peso. ¿Por qué? Porque he tratado de imaginar qué palabras podría haber usado Dios que fueran más claras o más firmes que las que ya usó. 

Si las palabras en la Biblia en cuanto a este tema no son claras para las personas ¿entonces cuáles palabras pueden serlo? ¿Qué palabras desearían las personas que Dios hubiese dicho si en realidad no quería que participaran en la homosexualidad? (Y ¿qué palabras quisieras que Él dijera?) 

Al mirar cualquiera de los pasajes bíblicos que he mencionado en las páginas anteriores, ¡he encontrado que las palabras usadas en ellos son más fuertes que cualquiera otra que haya visto! 

No estoy diciendo que puede haber varias maneras de interpretar las palabras que tenemos en la Biblia. Lo que estoy queriendo decir, es que me sería muy difícil encontrar palabras más fuertes o más claras. 

Según todo lo que he leído en la Biblia, y todas las conversaciones que he tenido respecto a lo que he leído, una y otra vez he cobrado ánimo al ver que la experiencia transformadora que he tenido con Cristo en esta área es algo que también les ha pasado a muchos. 

También siento ánimo al ver que las personas pueden cambiar, han cambiado por miles de años, y siguen cambiando en la actualidad, así como yo y cientos de personas con quienes me he reunido personalmente hemos cambiado, y miles más que he visto en las conferencias a las que he asistido.

Entonces, ¿por qué nos sorprende saber que el Espíritu de Cristo sigue cambiando personas hoy, de la misma manera que lo hizo con tanta claridad hace casi 2.000 años? Las palabras del Apóstol Pablo a los Corintios son como música a mis oídos: “Algunos de ustedes antes eran así”.

Lejos de tener un registro desagradable en su trato para con los homosexuales, en mi experiencia, la iglesia ha tenido un asombroso desempeño. 

He encontrado amor y apoyo en mi iglesia local, en la iglesia que se extiende más allá de los muros de mi iglesia y la iglesia a lo largo de la historia. 

No es una sorpresa que Dios ame tanto a la iglesia. No es una sorpresa que Él espera el día para encontrarse con la iglesia, Su novia, en el último banquete de bodas, la cena de las bodas del Cordero (lee Efesios 5:31-32, Apocalipsis 19:7, 21:2, y 21:9).

Capítulo 8: Algunas palabras acerca de la tentación

Donde comparto por qué las tentaciones no nos definen, cómo podemos enfriar o alimentar nuestras atracciones, y por qué celebramos el 4 de julio y no el Tratado de Versalles.

Como lo mencioné antes, cuando alguien me pregunta: “¿Todavía te sientes atraído hacia los hombres”” No me molesta responder “Sí. Sí me siento atraído”. 

Pero luego hay otra pregunta de seguimiento que quisiera que hicieran, porque la respuesta a esa pregunta es mucho más significativa: “¿Las atracciones todavía controlan tus acciones?” Mi respuesta a esa pregunta es un resonante: “No, no lo hacen”. 

Y aunque pareciera que estoy haciendo un gran contraste entre esas dos preguntas y respuestas, la diferencia entre ellas es como el día y la noche. 

Cuando Dios transformó mi vida, no solo me cambió llevándome de ser una oruga a ser una mariposa. Me dio alas para que pudiera volar. Me hizo una nueva criatura. Como dice la Biblia: “De modo que si alguno está en Cristo, nueva criatura es; las cosas viejas pasaron; he aquí todas son hechas nuevas” (2 Corintios 5:17, RVR)

Aunque en algunos aspectos sigo siendo la misma persona, soy una criatura totalmente nueva en otros. 

Una de las principales razones por las cuales escribí un libro más íntimo acerca de mi testimonio hace unos años, fue para describir, en detalle lo mucho que Dios había hecho para transformar mi vida en las áreas de mis sentimientos y pensamientos, en mis deseos y atracciones. El libro fue para que las personas supieran que el cambio es posible en la vida real, y que no es solo un cambio de aspecto sino una remodelación completa de todo nuestro ser.

También escribí ese libro para satisfacer el apetito que los demás tienen por más, para que supieran que, si dejan su antigua vida, así ofrezca todos los placeres y alivios de dolor, Dios puede darles toda una nueva vida que ofrece mucho más. Nunca le recomendaría a nadie seguir el camino que yo he seguido si no creyera de todo corazón que a largo plazo sería mejor para ellos, tanto en esta tierra como en el cielo para siempre.

HAY MÁS

Conocí a un hombre que cuando llegó a Cristo, asistía a una iglesia local. Esa iglesia era superficial. Seca. Aburrida. Nada sucedía. El Espíritu nunca fluía. 

Ese hombre estaba muy emocionado de haberle entregado su vida a Jesús, pero cuando iba a esa iglesia, quedaba muy decepcionado. Un día, mirando alrededor, dijo: “¿dejé las drogas por ESTO?” 

Sabía que debía haber más. Sabía que debía haber más de la vida abundante que Jesús le había ofrecido, comparado con lo que estaba experimentando. 

Así que siguió adelante con Dios, terminó yendo a otra iglesia y encontró justo lo que estaba buscando, ¡la vida abundante que había esperado por mucho tiempo! ¡Eso era mejor que las drogas que había dejado! ¡Mucho mejor! Llegó a ser pastor y plantó por todo el mundo más iglesias rebosantes de vida.

Pero si en esos primeros días yo lo hubiera aconsejado, y su primera experiencia en la iglesia fuera un verdadero indicador de cómo iba a ser el resto de su nueva vida en Cristo, yo habría sido el primero en enfatizarle: “¡vuelve a las drogas!”

No han sido pocas las personas las que han venido a mi diciendo que creen que Dios las hizo gays, pero que Él no quiere que actúen de acuerdo con la manera como las hizo, que están destinadas a vivir el resto de sus vidas en frustración y con dolor en el corazón. Yo les he dicho: “Si de verdad crees que Dios te hizo así, pero que quiere que vivas frustrado el resto de tu vida porque nunca vas a poder comportarte conforme a la manera como Él te hizo, entonces permíteme ser el primero en decir enfáticamente: “¡Sigue en la homosexualidad, y hazlo con gusto!” 

Pero no animes a otros a hacerlo, porque creo que Dios no ha hecho gay a nadie sólo para luego hacer que se sienta frustrado el resto de su vida por la manera como Él lo hizo. 

En mi opinión hay otras cosas que impiden que las personas experimenten la vida abundante para la que Dios las hizo. También he encontrado que muchos creen de corazón que Dios no los hizo así, aunque quizás no puedan encontrar otra manera de explicar lo que sienten. Sencillamente no ven otras opciones. Se sienten atrapados, en una jaula, sin ninguna salida aparente. 

Mi deseo es ayudarles a encontrar, a explorar lo que Dios de verdad quiere que hagan, y darles esperanza en que Dios de verdad tiene algo mejor para ellos, sin importar si algún día se casan o no con alguien del sexo opuesto. 

Jesús no nos prometió una vida abundante solo para arrebatárnosla una vez pongamos nuestra fe en Él. Aunque a veces podemos sentirnos así, esa no es la verdad, y no nos vamos a sentir así para siempre. 

Animo a quienes están frustrados y que desean más a que sigan preguntando, sigan buscando y sigan llamando a la puerta porque recibirán más. 

Estas no son solo mis palabras de ánimo. Son Sus palabras. Jesús dijo: Sigue pidiendo y recibirás lo que pides; sigue buscando y encontrarás; sigue llamando, y la puerta se te abrirá. Pues todo el que pide, recibe; todo el que busca, encuentra; y a todo el que llama, se le abrirá la puerta (Mateo 7:7-9, NTV).

Cuando Jesús dijo: “Mi propósito es darles una vida plena y abundante” (Juan 10:10, NTV), hizo su promesa a todos los que hemos estado dispuestos a poner nuestra fe en Él.

El aspecto de esa “vida plena y abundante” va a ser diferente en cada caso, y Jesús es el único que sabe toda la plenitud de lo que eso significa para nosotros. Pero estoy seguro de que Dios traerá Su plenitud de vida a cada uno de nosotros, así como estoy seguro de que el sol volverá a salir mañana. Dios de verdad quiere que todos experimentemos la mayor plenitud de vida posible.

NUESTRA RESPONSABILIDAD
(O HABILIDAD DE RESPUESTA)

Quizás no podamos elegir nuestros sentimientos, pero sí podemos elegir qué hacer con ellos. Sí podemos elegir si vamos a calmarlos o a alimentarlos. Sí podemos elegir actuar conforme a lo que sentimos o no seguir lo que sentimos. 

Y lo que elijamos hacer con lo que sentimos, en gran medida, determinará el tipo de experiencia que tendremos en estas vidas que Dios nos ha dado. Nuestra manera de responder a nuestros sentimientos es nuestra responsabilidad (o habilidad de respuesta).

Sé lo que es estar muy enamorado de alguien, pero no poder satisfacer ese amor. Sé lo que es tener corazones flotando en la cabeza cuando piensas en alguien especial, pero no poder actuar conforme a esos sentimientos. 

Sé lo que se siente cuando el corazón se acelera en tu pecho, pero no poder controlarlo y tener que reprimirlo en tu interior al no poder expresar el amor de la manera que he querido hacerlo. 

Pero también sé cómo es poder calmar esos deseos, llevarlos todos a los pies de Jesús para que no me causen más dolor, confusión y pena por amor.

Esto no significa que en ocasiones no haya tratado de revivir esos sentimientos después de haber renunciado a ellos, deseando tomar el teléfono o enviar una nota “sólo para seguir en contacto”. Pero he aprendido que siempre que he intentado hacer alguna de esas “pequeñeces inofensivas”, mi corazón se acelera en mi pecho y necesito una gran cantidad de tiempo y esfuerzo para calmarlo. Así que termino volviendo al comienzo. 

He aprendido que cuando eso sucede, lo mejor que puedo hacer es hacer el teléfono a un lado o no enviar la nota. He tenido que reconocer que mis motivos no son los correctos. Mis intenciones no son puras. 

Sé que mis sentimientos me conducirán a la decepción si continúo siguiéndolos, porque nunca podré seguir con ellos de la manera que he deseado. Este tipo de golpe al corazón es una revelación indicando que mis atracciones están aproximándose al peligro.

En cuanto a las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, en la medida que sean solo atracciones, simplemente tener claro que hay algo atractivo en alguien, no resulta un problema. 

El problema surge cuando nuestros corazones también comienzan a latir por alguien. Es ahí cuando nuestros sentimientos se hacen peligrosos. Es ahí cuando debemos retirarnos. Es en ese momento cuando debemos identificar lo que sentimos y por qué. 

Entonces, después de saber que lo que sentimos se basa en una necesidad legítima, podemos encontrar maneras de satisfacer esa necesidad legítima de manera legítima, en lugar de hacerlo de manera ilegítima. Si sabemos que nuestros sentimientos no están atados a una necesidad legítima, o que esa no es una manera válida de satisfacer esa necesidad, entonces lo mejor para nosotros es “dejar las cosas así”. Seguir caminando. Dar la vuelta y cambiar de dirección, darle tiempo a nuestro corazón para que se calme. 

He aprendido este sencillo consejo: decirme a mí mismo: “Deja las cosas así”, sigo caminando y no miro atrás, es asombrosamente efectivo. Cancela las punzadas en el corazón que las personas suelen sufrir en la vida.

Cuando digo que todavía siento atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, lo que estoy diciendo es: “Sí, todavía reconozco si una persona me es atractiva o no”. Pero la gran mayoría de las veces, esas atracciones son solo reconocimientos de atracción. El corazón no se ve involucrado. 

Mi corazón sigue tranquilo en mi pecho. No hay dolor, no hay deseos de aferrarme a algo que siento que es doloroso o que injustamente no puedo disfrutar. 

Incluso cuando siento que mi corazón se está involucrando de manera inadecuada con alguien, el simple hecho de tener consciencia de eso, y comprender que no puedo seguir esos sentimientos por una amplia variedad de razones, resulta ser de gran ayuda para mantener mi corazón controlado, de esa manera vuelve a estar calmado.

GUARDANDO NUESTROS CORAZONES

Para mí, eso es lo que el rey Salomón nos animó a hacer cuando dijo: “Sobre todas las cosas cuida tu corazón, porque este determina el rumbo de tu vida (Proverbios 4:23, NTV). 

En lugar de hacer eso, con mucha frecuencia tendemos a derribar las murallas de nuestro corazón, haciéndonos vulnerables al dolor que es una consecuencia natural de no poder tener aquello que deseamos en el corazón. 

Lo que trato de expresar aquí es que hay una diferencia en la manera como experimentamos nuestras atracciones. Pueden seguir siendo simples atracciones, o pueden convertirse en tentaciones, y más que eso, deseos o anhelos que llegan a ser muy dolorosos en la medida que siguen sin ser satisfechos. 

Cuando mi esposa murió, el dolor que experimenté justo después fue increíblemente intenso. Lana había estado conmigo unos días antes, tendida a mi lado en nuestra cama, con su cabeza en la almohada y mirándome con sus ojos llenos de vida. 

Luego, llegó el día en el que ya no estaba ahí. Mi corazón deseaba estar con ella, anhelaba estar con ella, pero sabía que nunca más podría estar con ella en persona de este lado del cielo. 

Al saber que nunca más volvería a satisfacer ese anhelo de mi corazón en esta tierra, el dolor resultante de ese deseo del corazón fue tan intenso como cualquier dolor físico que hubiera sufrido. 

Sin embargo, a medida que el tiempo fue pasando, aprendí que podía contener mi corazón. Por último, llegué a comprender que mi anhelo por estar con ella, nunca se satisfaría. 

En mi dolor llegué a un punto en particular, del que luego leí en un libro escrito por Harold Ivan Smith titulado Decembered Grief (Duelo en diciembre). Él cita a una mujer que también llegó al mismo punto, diciendo: 

“He tomado meses para llegar al punto en el que puedo decir: ¡Está bien, el futuro no va a ser lo que pensaste que sería. Se ha ido, y no lo vas a tener. Sencillamente no va a ser así. Tu futuro se fue con él. Ahora tienes que construir uno nuevo’”.

En mi caso, yo también había aceptado el hecho de la ausencia de mi esposa, y que ella no iba a volver. 

Cuando llegué a ese punto, el dolor en mi corazón disminuyó mucho. Sí, todavía me encantaría estar con ella, tenerla cerca, y mirarla directo a los ojos. Pero mi deseo ya no iba acompañado con el mismo tipo de dolor.

En su libro Fuera del Planeta Silencioso C.S. Lewis describe la diferencia entre estos dos tipos de anhelos. Lewis escribió que en el idioma de las criaturas de su planeta ficticio había dos palabras que significan desear y anhelar, pero que esas criaturas hacían una clara diferencia entre ellas diciendo que “todos lo desearían (wondelone), pero que nadie en sus plenos sentidos podría desearlo (hluntheline)”.

Es algo muy sutil pero que hace una gran diferencia en términos de su impacto práctico en nuestras vidas. Es la diferencia entre recordar a mi esposa con pena y dolor en el corazón, o recordarla con cariño y aprecio. 

Mi dolor por desear algo en el corazón solo se daba cuando retenía la esperanza de que, por alguna razón, lo que anhelaba era una posibilidad real, aunque remota. Pero cuando llegué al aceptar el hecho de que ya no había ninguna remota posibilidad de ver realizado mi anhelo, entonces la parte dolorosa de ese anhelo también desapareció. 

No era posible que mis anhelos se hicieran realidad de ninguna manera, y mi corazón recobró la compostura.

CALMANDO NUESTROS DESEOS

Para decirlo en otras palabras, a veces he pasado al lado de alguien fumando un cigarrillo, y aunque nunca he fumado, a veces he respirado ese humo y pensado: “Ahh, eso huele muy bien”. 

Aunque pueda parecer extraño para algunos, como nunca he fumado, todavía reconozco algo seductor en el olor, ya sea que me recuerde las fogatas al aire libre en mi niñez, o que estimule algo placentero en mi interior, en realidad no lo sé. (Pero ahí está, otra verdadera confesión).

Esto me volvió a suceder hace poco. Iba caminando y pasé por el lado de un hombre que estaba fumando frente a un edificio donde yo había estado haciendo unas compras. 

El hombre se disculpó por fumar frente a mí cuando pasé por su lado. Le dije que no había problema, y aunque nunca había fumado, a veces me gustaba el olor. 

Ahora, no me siento tentado a fumar. No siento el deseo de poner algo dentro de mí con el potencial de causarme la muerte. Pero todavía puedo reconocer que me es atractivo, y puedo ver por qué los es para otros, incluyendo para ese hombre. 

Si hubiera crecido en un ambiente diferente, o expuesto a situaciones de vida diferentes, fácilmente me habría quedado fumando al lado de él. Pero como no fue así, y como no planeo satisfacer algún día ese deseo en particular, mi corazón nunca late por la idea de fumar. 

Puedo seguir mi camino, así como lo hice aquel día, sin volver a pensarlo, hasta cuando pensé en relatarte esta historia. Aunque había experimentado algo que me era atractivo, no tenía ningún poder sobre mí. 

Es lo mismo respecto a cualquier atracción hacia el mismo sexo que siento ahora. 

Aunque reconozco esas atracciones cuando se presentan, puedo seguir mi camino y no pensarlo dos veces. Mis atracciones ahora son como esa pelota de playa desinflada bajo mis pies, en la arena al fondo del agua, algo que, como ya lo dije antes, puedo quitar o pasar por el lado. 

Creo que parte de la razón por la cual puedo hacerlo es debido a la obra transformadora que Dios ha hecho en mi vida, pero en parte también se debe a la sabiduría práctica que Dios me ha dado por medio de Su Palabra y el consejo de algunos cristianos piadosos. 

La buena noticia en cuanto a esto para quienes están luchando con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, o cualquier tipo de atracción no deseada, es que ese mismo poder transformador y sabiduría colectiva están a disposición de cualquiera que esté dispuesto a aferrarse y valerse de ellos. He visto a otros poner en práctica estas ideas en sus propias vidas, de una manera tan efectiva como ha sido mi caso, y sé que son transferibles. 

A veces, de verdad necesitamos “soltar”, para que esos fuegos se extingan, sabiendo que, aunque lo que sintamos puede estar basado en necesidades legítimas, Dios no quiere que satisfagamos esa necesidad de manera ilegítima.

Al reconocer que nunca podré satisfacer ciertos deseos, y alejarme de otros deseos, Dios me ha ayudado a calmar lo que siento hacia las cosas que sé que pueden ser perjudiciales para mí.

ALIMENTANDO NUESTROS DESEOS

Por el otro lado, Dios también me ayudó a alimentar mis deseos hacia aquellas cosas que sé que pueden ser de verdadera ayuda para mí. 

Cuando Lana todavía estaba viva, encontré formas prácticas para profundizar mi amor y afecto hacia ella más allá de lo que ya era. 

Aunque la intimidad que compartimos al comienzo de nuestra relación fue increíble, se fortaleció mucho más con el paso del tiempo. ¿Por qué? En parte, porque comencé a construir con ella una base de datos de experiencias que no tenían comparación. 

Como muchos otros hombres casados que conozco y que han experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, mis atracciones hacia mi esposa eran muy particulares en su enfoque, es decir, casi nunca había sentido atracción hacia alguna mujer diferente a ella. Aunque muchos pueden indicar que este hecho indica que nunca fui transformado, desde mi punto de vista, esa fue una inmensa bendición para mí. 

Lo último que necesitaba era pasar de estar predominantemente atraído hacia los hombres, ¡a estar predominantemente atraído hacia las mujeres! Esa no podía ser una señal de sanidad. Sería tan solo una señal de pura locura reemplazar una forma de tentación por otra. Pero lo que Dios hizo por mí, y lo que ha hecho por otros, fue poner en mi interior una atracción única y fuera de serie hacia mi esposa. Y creo que así es como debería ser. 

Como dice la Biblia: “Que tu esposa sea una fuente de bendición para ti. Alégrate con la esposa de tu juventud. Es una cierva amorosa, una gacela llena de gracia. Que sus pechos te satisfagan siempre. Que siempre seas cautivado por su amor. (Proverbios 5:18-19, NTV).

Sin ser gráfico, lo que puedo decir es que después de crear cientos de memorias de experiencias íntimas con mi esposa, tras muchas semanas, muchos meses y años, encontré que mis deseos se movían con tan solo una mirada a sus senos, cerca del borde del cuello de su blusa. Una mirada fugaz me hacía sonreír por mucho tiempo, suscitando en mí deseos que solo un esposo debería sentir hacia su esposa. 

Para mí siempre fue asombroso experimentar algo como esto, porque en mis años de pre adolescente, e incluso durante la adolescencia, no encontré ninguna diferencia entre ver los senos de una mujer, o ver sus codos o sus rodillas. Sencillamente, no me seducían. 

Sin embargo, después de haber disfrutado de la intimidad con mi esposa una y otra vez, y llegar a entender más a fondo que sus senos tenían una función más profunda en nuestra intimidad, comencé a verlos de otra forma. Con el paso de los años, pude comprender a plenitud de qué hablaban los otros chicos en la escuela, cuando decían que incluso un vistazo a los senos de una mujer provocaba una respuesta inmediata en ellos. 

Conforme la base de datos de experiencias con mi esposa fue creciendo, me ayudó a alimentar el fuego en mi corazón, lo cual también me ayudó a mantener vivo nuestro romance.

Otro paso que tomé para concentrar mi atención sólo en mi esposa fue seguir el consejo de otra persona que también había recorrido ese camino antes de mí. 

Como comparto en mi libro What God Says About Sex (Lo que Dios Dice acerca del Sexo), un amigo cristiano me animó a que renunciara a la idea de complacerme yo mismo a nivel sexual cuando estaba solo, tanto antes como después de casarme. En lugar de disfrutar de libertad por mi cuenta, este amigo me recomendaba que disfrutara de esa experiencia cuando estuviera en compañía de mi esposa. 

Este pequeño consejo resultó ser una de las mejores bendiciones para nuestro matrimonio, porque, aunque a veces me vi tentado a hacer otra cosa, con el tiempo llegó a ser uno de esos anhelos profundos del corazón (hluntheline) que C.S. Lewis describe en su libro. El haber reconocido que yo no podía satisfacer mis deseos sexuales de ninguna manera diferente a cuando estaba con mi esposa, quitó todo el estrés interno que algo así podría haber causado. 

Como consecuencia, mi esposa se convirtió en mi única fuente de placer sexual en la vida. Las bendiciones de una sola decisión nos siguieron felizmente durante el resto de nuestro matrimonio.

Por ejemplo, en gran medida, gracias a esa decisión, nunca caí en la pornografía, porque no tenía sentido activar esos deseos si no podía satisfacerlos. Y como nunca caí en la pornografía, nunca tuve que comparar a mi esposa con los millares de modelos maquilladas que aparecen en esas imágenes. 

En realidad, hallé satisfacción en los senos de mi esposa, en primer lugar, porque de verdad creo que Dios mismo la hizo única como un regalo para mí, pero, en segundo lugar, porque no estaba comparándola todo el tiempo con otra persona. Como mi única fuente de deleite sexual, ella se convirtió en la persona más espectacular del planeta. 

No estoy diciendo que otros deberían hacer exactamente lo mismo que yo he hecho para mantenerme tan enfocado en mi esposa, pero son consejos que resultaron muy buenos para mí, y funcionaron muy bien en nuestra situación. 

Lo que estoy diciendo es que hay cosas que todos podemos hacer para calmar nuestros deseos o alimentarlos. Me sentí muy agradecido de haber encontrado por mí mismo algunas de estas cosas, y debo añadir, en representación de mi esposa, que ¡ella también se sintió muy agradecida!

DEJANDO QUE DIOS NOS DEFINA

También he llegado a entender que mis tentaciones no me definen. Esto se hizo más evidente cuando supe que la Biblia dice que Jesús fue tentado en todo al igual que nosotros, pero que no pecó. 

Al hablar acerca de Jesús, el escritor del libro de Hebreos dice: “Nuestro Sumo Sacerdote comprende nuestras debilidades, porque enfrentó todas y cada una de las pruebas que enfrentamos nosotros, sin embargo, él nunca pecó. Así que acerquémonos con toda confianza al trono de la gracia de nuestro Dios. Allí recibiremos su misericordia y encontraremos la gracia que nos ayudará cuando más la necesitemos” (Hebreos 4:15-16). 

Si Jesús fue tentado en cada una de las pruebas que enfrentamos nosotros, entonces, al parecer también se vio tentado con la homosexualidad, como algunos de nosotros. Sin embargo, nadie que lea atentamente a las escrituras llamaría gay a Jesús, así como no lo llamaría ladrón, mentiroso, adúltero o fornicario, porque nada en las escrituras nos da evidencia alguna de que haya sido alguna de esas cosas. Sin embargo, si Jesús de verdad fue tentado en cada una de las pruebas que nosotros enfrentamos, entonces podemos creer que de verdad también fue tentado con todas esas cosas. 

Pero a Jesús no lo definieron sus tentaciones, y tampoco nos definen a nosotros. Dios, nuestro creador, es quien nos define, el Dios que nos tejió en el vientre de nuestras madres. 

Cuando Dios me hizo, me hizo hombre, completo con todas las partes reproductivas masculinas que me declaran que soy hombre, incluyendo un cromosoma X y uno Y en cada célula de mi cuerpo. (Las mujeres, por otra parte, y por definición científica, tienen dos cromosomas X en cada célula de sus cuerpos).

Soy un hombre en todo el sentido de la palabra, creado desde la concepción para reproducirme heterosexualmente, si Dios quería que me reprodujera. Aunque puedo tener sentimientos hacia los hombres, o verme tentado a involucrarme en actividades sexuales más allá del heterosexualismo, esos sentimientos no me definen. Mis tentaciones no me definen.

El Dios que me creó es quien me define, y la ciencia da testimonio de la naturaleza y los propósitos para los que fui creado.

¿Esto quiere decir que está mal querer tener amistades cercanas con hombres? ¡Claro que no! ¿Esto quiere decir que está mal sentir atracción hacia un hombre o ser tentado a involucrarse romántica y sexualmente con un hombre? ¡Claro que no! 

Nuestros deseos de amistad cercana, y nuestras tentaciones hacia cosas que pueden involucrar a esos amigos cercanos no nos hacen culpables de pecado, así como Jesús no fue culpable de pecado por los deseos y tentaciones que enfrentó. De nuevo, como lo afirmó el autor del libro de Hebreos: “Nuestro Sumo Sacerdote …enfrentó todas y cada una de las pruebas que enfrentamos nosotros, sin embargo, él nunca pecó”.

Podría decir que nuestras atracciones y deseos se forman por una combinación de factores, algunos de los cuales están relacionados con la naturaleza (la forma como nacimos), con la crianza (la forma como fuimos educados), y las circunstancias (las experiencias de vida que hemos tenido). Esto no es ciencia de cohetes, sino una sencilla observación de la naturaleza humana tal como cientos de personas me lo han expresado al compartirme sus experiencias de vida.

DANDO FORMA A NUESTROS DESEOS

Nuestra naturaleza y crianza, y nuestras experiencias sí sirven para dar forma a nuestros “gustos” y a nuestros “deseos”, ya sea que el objeto de esos gustos y deseos sean cosas que podrían terminar siendo buenas, o ser perjudiciales para nosotros. 

¡Y nuestros gustos se pueden alimentar o enfriar de muchas maneras!

Me asombra la manera como el fumar cigarrillos se estilizó tanto en la generación de mis padres, con anuncios que promocionaban beneficios para la salud pulmonar de las personas si fumaban. Un anuncio famoso decía: “Más médicos fuman cigarrillos Camel, que cualquier otro cigarrillo”. 

De hecho, los médicos aconsejaban a los pacientes que inhalaran a fondo humo de cigarrillo a fin de promover pulmones más saludables. 

Pero ahora que el fumar está científicamente vinculado con el cáncer, esta actividad se ha demonizado casi en todo el mundo. La sociedad en general ha cambiado su punto de vista de manera dramática con respecto a fumar, así como también ha cambiado su perspectiva en muchas otras prácticas. 

Aunque no lo creas, cuando yo era niño, usaba pijamas hechas con asbestos. Los asbestos son un excelente retardante de llama, así que se consideraba que era una buena idea saturar con este material la tela de nuestra ropa, en especial la ropa para dormir que usaban los infantes y niños que pudieran tener dificultades al escapar de una habitación en llamas. 

Pero cuando se descubrió que esas mismas fibras de asbesto podían llegar a los pulmones de las personas y provocar cáncer de pulmón, el pensamiento de la sociedad en cuanto a este tema cambió casi de la noche a la mañana.

Así mismo, mi perspectiva sobre las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo cambió de la noche a la mañana cuando Dios me abrió los ojos frente a los efectos dañinos de lo que había hecho. Aunque todavía puedo ver algunos aspectos positivos de involucrarme en una relación homosexual, esos beneficios los supera con mucho peso el daño que podría causar a mi vida, no solo las enfermedades como el SIDA, que acabó con las vidas de muchos homosexuales en los años 1980, sino por las diferentes maneras en que la homosexualidad parece estafar la plenitud de vida que Dios tiene para mí.

Debido a este cambio en mi propia manera de pensar, rara vez permito que cualquier pensamiento fugaz respecto a las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo vaya más allá de eso, un simple pensamiento fugaz, así como rara vez (bueno, nunca) cedo ante un pensamiento fugaz respecto a la idea de comprar una pijama de asbesto para mí o para mis hijos.

Esto no es para decir que no puedo, si quisiera hacerlo, tratar de volver a inflar esa pelota de playa desinflada. ¡Estoy seguro de que podría! Pero no quiero porque que si lo hiciera sería como morir.

INFLANDO NUESTRAS PELOTAS DE PLAYA

Sin embargo, algunos de mis amigos, han tratado de inflar sus pelotas de playa y las he visto explotar cuando lo han hecho.

Por ejemplo, un amigo se casó con una de las chicas más hermosas que haya conocido. Tanto él como su esposa son muy atractivos físicamente, y bien parecidos. 

Antes de casarse, mi amigo había luchado con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, pero después de conocer a esa maravillosa chica, comenzaron a salir y tiempo después se casaron en una boda de película en una locación de maravilla. 

Volví a encontrarme con mi amigo un año después de su boda, y quedé abrumado al enterarme que se estaba divorciando. ¿Cómo podía ser eso posible? Había estado tan enamorado de su novia, y ella también estaba muy enamorada de él. Todo parecía que iba a salir muy bien.

Pero las cosas no funcionaron, me dijo. Me encontré con él en un restaurante de su ciudad natal, conversamos por varias horas, lo escuché decirme que sencillamente ya no sentía interés físico hacia ella. Él quería volver a su vida de homosexualidad. 

Me desconcertó por completo el hecho de que las cosas no estuvieran funcionando para él. Hice cuantas preguntas de sondeo que pude, pero no pude encontrar una razón.

Fue solo casi al final de nuestra conversación que él finalmente me dijo, como si fuera un comentario adicional, “bueno, dos semanas después de nuestro matrimonio yo dormí con el hombre que prestó el servicio de organización de nuestra boda”. Y por alguna razón (no diría que sorprendente), a partir de ese punto, su matrimonio comenzó en decadencia.

“Intenté con el matrimonio”, dijo en tono concluyente, “y no funcionó”. 

Yo quería gritar: “¡Tu no lo intentaste con el matrimonio! ¡Ni siquiera lo hiciste por dos semanas!” 

Yo estaba asombrado. Y él estaba furioso. Me dolía el corazón por su esposa, una mujer que había sido el sueño de la mayoría de otros hombres, así como lo había sido para él en una ocasión, sin embargo, él saboteó su propio matrimonio debido a sus indiscreciones casuales, destruyéndola a ella al mismo tiempo. 

Su matrimonio fallido no fue el resultado de la supresión de sus deseos hacia el mismo sexo; ese fue el resultado de su indulgencia hacia esos deseos, avivando la llama y dejando muchas personas quemadas por el camino.

Tengo otro amigo que nunca en su vida había tenido una relación homosexual, pero siempre se había preguntado cómo sería tenerla. Esas inquietudes quedaron atrás cuando se casó con una mujer que amaba entrañablemente, y juntos iniciaron una familia. 

Sin embargo, años después, me confesó a mí y a su esposa que estaba en peligro de hacer realidad sus sentimientos homosexuales, diciendo que éstos habían vuelto a surgir después de mucho tiempo. 

Me dijo que él y su esposa ya casi nunca tenían intimidad, esto se debía en parte a algunos problemas de salud que ella tenía. Según él, esto, combinado con su carencia de amistades masculinas cercanas en la ciudad donde vivía, lo hizo desear intimidad y una conexión más cercana con otros hombres.

Al hablar más acerca de esas atracciones hacia el mismo sexo y por qué después de tanto tiempo estaban teniendo una influencia tan fuerte, me confesó que ahora estaba viendo pornografía homosexual todos los días. Para él, era como leer el periódico matutino. 

Así que no fue ninguna sorpresa para él ni para mí que ahora se estuviera sintiendo tan en riesgo de hacer realidad sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Esos sentimientos que había podido mantener alejados en el pasado, ahora estaban amenazando con atacarlo a él y a su matrimonio, y él los estaba alimentando a diario. Gracias a Dios, mi amigo tuvo la sabiduría y el valor de llamarme en medio de su lucha, dando así una válvula de escape para que sus tentaciones no lo consumieran.

Un cuento popular relata la historia de un padre que le dijo a su hijo que dentro de cada uno de nosotros viven dos lobos, uno de los cuales quiere hacer lo correcto y el otro quiere hacer lo malo. Cuando su hijo le preguntó cuál lobo iba a ganar al final, el padre respondió: “El que tú alimentes más”.

La Biblia dice que hay una progresión natural en desear algo que puede ser perjudicial para nosotros, luego de desearlo, nos involucramos en, y luego enfrentamos las consecuencias de habernos involucrado. 

Como el Apóstol Santiago dice: “Cuando alguno es tentado, no diga que es tentado de parte de Dios; porque Dios no puede ser tentado por el mal, ni él tienta a nadie; sino que cada uno es tentado, cuando de su propia concupiscencia es atraído y seducido. Entonces la concupiscencia, después que ha concebido, da a luz el pecado; y el pecado, siendo consumado, da a luz la muerte” (Santiago 1:13-15, RVR).

Esa es la progresión natural de nuestros deseos dañinos. Gracias a Dios hay una rampa para salir de este ciclo perjudicial, y Dios quiere que la tomemos siempre. No siempre es fácil, pero Dios en Su Palabra dice que siempre dará la salida, de lo cual hablaré más en el siguiente capítulo (lee 1 de Corintios 10:13).

DECLARANDO NUESTRA VICTORIA

Quiero darte otra sugerencia práctica para ayudarte a ti y a quienes amas a encontrar la libertad frente a sus luchas. 

Un día salí con un amigo a caminar por un parque estatal aquí en Illinois, en nuestro recorrido encontramos un aviso que nos decía que justo en ese lugar se había presentado cierta batalla durante la guerra de independencia de los Estados Unidos. 

Cuando miré más de cerca la placa, decía que dicha batalla se había dado durante el año 1779. 

“¿1779?” Le dije en voz alta a mi amigo. “¿Acaso no obtuvimos nuestra independencia en 1776? ¿Por qué seguían librando batallas aquí en 1779?” 

Luego recordé. ¡Claro! El 4 de julio de 1776 fue el día que declaramos nuestra independencia. Aun así, fueron necesarios siete años más de batallas sangrientas hasta dar por terminada la guerra por nuestra libertad. 

El simple hecho de haber declarado nuestra independencia en 1776 no significó el fin de nuestras batallas. 

De hecho, de muchas maneras, el día de nuestra declaración fue cuando las batallas comenzaron en serio. Y esas batallas no terminaron sino hasta más de siete años después, cuando los Estados Unidos e Inglaterra finalmente firmaron el Tratado de Versalles el 3 de septiembre del 1783.

Sin embargo, no conozco a nadie que celebre la firma del Tratado de Versalles, ni que recuerde la fecha cuando se firmó y se dio fin oficial a la guerra. 

Lo que las personas celebran, y lo que más recordamos, es el día que declaramos nuestra libertad, la fecha que ha estado indeleblemente marcada en la mente de todo estadounidense, el 4 de julio de 1776.

Yo siento lo mismo con respecto al día cuando decidí poner mi fe en Cristo para todo en mi vida, febrero 9 de 1987. 

Esa fecha también ha estado indeleblemente marcada en mi mente, porque fue cuando puse mi fe en Cristo para todo lo que sucediera en mi vida, declarando así mi libertad del yugo que la homosexualidad había tenido sobre mi vida hasta ese punto. 

Esto no quiere decir que no ha habido escaramuzas desde entonces, o que no he tenido momentos cuando esas tentaciones han tratado de surgir en mi interior. ¡Eso no es una sorpresa! ¡Así es la vida! ¡Así es como opera la tentación!

Pero, decir que alguien no ha sido liberado de algo que alguna vez lo mantuvo cautivo, solo porque en ocasiones tiene que librar batallas, es como decir que los Estados Unidos no fueron libres el día que declararon su libertad, sino sólo en otra fecha después de haber dado fin a todas sus batallas, una fecha que casi nadie recuerda ya. 

Cualquier persona que alguna vez haya renunciado a algo que ha disfrutado, así sepa que es algo que terminará siendo destructivo, sabe que tomar la decisión de renunciar a eso es tan importante como ganar las batallas que vendrán después de esa decisión.

La vida es demasiado corta como para seguir viviendo en algo que sabes que terminará destruyéndote.

Quiero animarte a poner tu fe en Cristo para todo en tu vida, así como también quiero animar a tu familia y amigos a que hagan lo mismo. 

Declara tu libertad hoy de todo lo que sea tentador para ti, y aférrate a la libertad que Dios te está ofreciendo por medio de Su Hijo Jesucristo. 

Así podrás cantar como el salmista cantó y como yo he podido cantar: “Por el camino de tus mandamientos correré, cuando ensanches mi corazón” (Salmo 119:32, RVR).

Guías de estudio para los capítulos 7 y 8  

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 7: “EL VALOR DE UNA IGLESIA AMOROSA”

Resumen del Capítulo

Algunas personas creen que la iglesia no ha respondido bien al tema de la homosexualidad. Pero el autor dice que su experiencia ha sido todo lo opuesto: Él dice que:

  • ha encontrado que la iglesia es un santuario, un refugio, y un lugar de sanidad y aceptación,
  • y es “allá afuera”, en “el mundo”, donde se ha sentido vilipendiado, maltratado, irrespetado, amenazado, intimidado y degradado.

A las personas que sienten que la iglesia les ha dado una mala respuesta ante este tema, él les pide que compartan cómo han sido sus experiencias personales, no refiriendo historias de otras personas que han escuchado acerca de algunas pocas iglesias que no son como Cristo y que suelen ser presentadas en las noticias.

Él cree que:

  • la iglesia es la esperanza para el mundo,
  • Cristo sigue perfeccionando a la iglesia para que sea Su esposa,
  • y los líderes y las personas en varias iglesias a las que ha asistido, han sido los más atentos, de mayor ayuda y los más amables con respecto a este tema, incluso cuando todavía estaba involucrado en la homosexualidad. 

El autor reconoce que es posible que sus experiencias no representen las de todos los demás y, en representación de la iglesia, se ha disculpado con quienes han tenido experiencias diferentes. Pero desde su perspectiva, la iglesia como un todo, ha tenido un asombroso registro en su manera de tratar con este tema.

Él concluye diciendo que la iglesia histórica, como se documenta en la Biblia, ha sido útil para él con relación a este tema:

  • porque ve que personas en la iglesia de Corinto fueron liberadas de la homosexualidad de 20 a 22 años después de la vida de Cristo en la tierra,
  • porque ve que este no es un asunto que se limita al siglo 21, sino algo que Dios ha estado afrontando hace 2000, 3000 y hasta 4000 años.
  • y porque ve que las advertencias que Dios hace acerca de este asunto no pueden ser más claras y firmes.

A las personas que consideran que la Biblia no es clara ni firme en cuanto a este tema, el autor les pide que piensen cómo quisieran que Dios expresara sus advertencias a fin de hacerlas más claras o más firmes que lo que ya son. 

Luego indica que la razón por la cual Dios es tan claro y firme en cuanto a este asunto no es porque a él le repugne la homosexualidad, sino porque al haber creado nuestra sexualidad, Dios sabe lo poderoso pero peligroso que puede ser el sexo si se usa de maneras para las que no fue diseñado.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Apocalipsis 19:7-9 ¿Por qué crees que Jesús todavía ama a la iglesia de hoy y espera la gran cena de bodas del Cordero? ¿Qué ánimo puede darte el amor que Jesús tiene por la iglesia en cuanto a la perspectiva que tienes de ella?

Lee Levítico 18:22, Levítico 20:13, Romanos 1:24-32 y 1 de Corintios 6:9-12. ¿Puedes pensar en palabras de advertencia que Dios puede haber usado y que pueden haber sido más fuertes o más claras que las registradas en la Biblia? ¿Qué palabras elegirías si fueras a hacer una advertencia en cuanto a algo que es tentador para otros pero que puede hacerles daño? ¿Usarías palabras más fuertes o más débiles que las ya registradas en la Biblia?

Lee Romanos 5:8. ¿Por qué los cristianos no pedimos la pena de muerte para quienes participan en actos de homosexualidad? ¿Qué ha cambiado desde la venida de Cristo? ¿La condena? ¿O el hecho que esa condena ya fue pagada?

¿Cuál ha sido tu experiencia personal con la iglesia en cuanto a este tema? ¿Has escuchado a líderes de tu iglesia hablar acerca de este asunto de formas desagradables, con odio y degradantes para los homosexuales? ¿O tu experiencia ha sido lo opuesto, donde los líderes de tu iglesia han hablado con compasión, amor y queriendo ayudar a quienes luchan con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo? 

¿Por qué crees que las mismas pocas iglesias siguen llegando a los titulares de noticias cuando se habla de manera horrenda sobre los gays? ¿Crees que esas pocas iglesias hablan por la iglesia en general? ¿Hablan por ti? 

¿Qué les sugiere el autor a las personas que sí son parte de iglesias donde los homosexuales son denunciados, menospreciados y humillados? ¿Se debería ir a una iglesia que respalda a los gays a fin de encontrar otro enfoque? ¿O crees que hay iglesias que consideran que los actos homosexuales son pecaminosos, pero que pueden tratar con dignidad y respeto a las personas que sienten atracciones hacia el mismo sexo?

¿Qué significado tiene para ti el hecho de que la Biblia diga que las personas en la iglesia de Corinto habían estado involucradas en la homosexualidad, pero que añada: “y esto erais algunos”? ¿Qué esperanza pueden dar estas palabras a quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo pero que no quieren hacer nada al respecto?

¿Qué dice acerca de la conciencia de Dios sobre este tema, y el corazón con respecto al mismo, el hecho de que Él haya hecho advertencias tan fuertes y claras hace unos 2.000 años en los días de Jesús, hace unos 3.300 años en los días de Moisés, y unos 4.000 años en los días de Abraham? ¿Crees que sus advertencias indican su escándalo ante la idea de que alguien considere comportarse según sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, o porque Él sabía muy bien que las personas se verían tentadas a hacerlo?

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 8: “ALGUNAS PALABRAS ACERCA DE LA TENTACIÓN”

Resumen del Capítulo

Las tentaciones vienen de todas partes, así como las tuvo Jesús. Pero nuestras tentaciones:

  • no nos definen, así como no definieron a Jesús,
  • no nos controlan, así como no controlaron a Jesús,
  • y no tienen que abrumarnos, porque Dios dijo que siempre daría la salida para escapar de nuestras tentaciones, y Él quiere que siempre tomemos esas vías de escape. 

El autor sugiere varias ideas prácticas para ayudar a calmar deseos dañinos y alimentar los saludables, incluyendo:

  • reconocer que sencillamente nunca debería haber lugar para algunas actividades, con lo cual se reducirían las inclinaciones del corazón,
  • nunca tratar de volver a inflar esas pelotas de playa desinfladas a nuestros pies, al llamar a alguien “sólo para seguir en contacto” o dejando que nuestros pensamientos o vistazos se entretengan en algo que no es saludable,
  • y comprometiéndonos a disfrutar de la plenitud sexual sólo cuando sea en la compañía de nuestro cónyuge, ni siquiera mediante la auto-gratificación. 

Él también dice que no debería sorprendernos que las tentaciones continúen incluso después de haber declarado nuestra intención de alejarnos de ellas, así como las batallas de la Revolución de los Estados Unidos siguieron por varios años después de haber firmado la Declaración de Independencia. Declarar nuestra libertad es tan importante como librar las batallas que siguen. Sin embargo, no debería sorprendernos que vengan batallas, incluso durante años, así como las batallas de la Revolución de los Estados Unidos continuaron hasta la firma del Tratado de Versalles, más de siete años después de la firma de la Declaración de Independencia.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee 2 Corintios 5:17. ¿Cómo se relaciona este versículo con la siguiente afirmación del autor?: “Cuando Dios transformó mi vida, no solo me cambió llevándome de ser una oruga a ser una mariposa, me hizo una nueva criatura”.

Lee Juan 10:10. ¿Cómo se relaciona este versículo con el relato del autor acerca del hombre que terminó en una iglesia seca, superficial y aburrida y que dijo: “¿dejé las drogas por ESTO?”? ¿Alguna vez sentiste que la vida cristiana tiene más de lo que estabas experimentando? ¿Sientes que has encontrado la vida abundante que, según Jesús, está disponible para quienes han puesto su fe en Él, o todavía la estás buscando?

Lee Proverbios 4:23 y Proverbios 5:18-19. ¿Por qué el Rey Salomón dijo que guardáramos nuestro corazón? ¿Qué puede suceder si bajamos la guardia? ¿Cómo podemos guardar nuestros corazones y volver a concentrar nuestra atención en lo que Dios quiere que deseemos?

Lee Hebreos 4:15-16. ¿Qué dicen estos versículos acerca de las tentaciones de Jesús y si esas tentaciones eran consideradas pecado o no? ¿Por qué a Jesús no lo definieron sus tentaciones? ¿Por qué nuestras tentaciones no deberían definirnos?

Lee 1 Corintios 10:13. ¿Qué dice Dios que nos dará cada vez que seamos tentados? ¿De qué maneras dice el autor que las personas pueden calmar o alimentar sus deseos? 

¿Por qué algunas personas se pueden ver sorprendidas por el hecho de que alguien que haya declarado su libertad en esta área todavía enfrente algunas tentaciones? Considerando el hecho de que la mayoría de estadounidenses celebran el 4 de julio de 1776 como una fiesta nacional en lugar de celebrar el 3 de septiembre de 1783, ¿qué dice esto acerca de la realidad de enfrentar batallas constantes para ganar nuestra libertad definitiva? ¿Qué dice esto acerca de la importancia de declarar nuestra libertad, en relación a obtener esa libertad?

Capítulo 9: Algunas palabras acerca del dolor

Donde comparto cómo el dolor puede tentarnos a hacer cosas que quizás nunca hayamos considerado hacer de otra forma, y cómo puedes ayudar a otros en medio de sus tiempos de dolor.

Cuando sufrimos, a veces podemos vernos tentados a hacer cosas que quizás nunca consideraríamos hacer. 

Incluso Jesús se vio tentado de vez en cuando a alejarse de la voluntad de Su Padre, hasta la misma noche antes de Su muerte. Jesús clamó en oración por si había otro camino diferente al que estaba por enfrentar. 

Sin embargo, Jesús terminó sometiéndose a la voluntad de Su Padre, diciendo, “… Sin embargo, quiero que se haga tu voluntad, no la mía” (Lucas 22:42b, NTV).

La tentación es real, y yo tampoco estoy por encima de la tentación. A menos que pienses que en realidad no entiendo la lucha constante que muchos enfrentan a diario, quisiera compartir contigo el papel que ha jugado la tentación en mi vida, en especial en un tiempo de muy profundo dolor.

Poco después que mi esposa Lana fue diagnosticada con cáncer, los médicos nos dijeron que desafortunadamente ya se había extendido por todo su cuerpo. No podían hacer nada para detener su rápido crecimiento. 

El día que recibimos la noticia, lloré en mi habitación por 24 horas seguidas. No pude salir ni siquiera para comer. Mi madre había muerto por el mismo tipo de cáncer, y no podía imaginar ver a mi esposa pasar también por lo mismo. Sabía que me estaba enfrentando a unos de los días más oscuros que enfrentaría en mi vida.

Durante los meses siguientes, el dolor que sentía al pensar en perder a Lana comenzó a volverse insoportable. Un día ella me pidió que habláramos sobre algo que la está inquietando. Dijo que estaba sintiendo celos al pensar con quién me casaría yo después en caso de que ella muriera. 

Esa era una conversación que yo no quería tener. No podía imaginar perderla, mucho menos vivir sin ella, y ¡mucho menos tratar de imaginar tener otra relación con alguien diferente a ella!

No imaginaba que hubiera otra persona que pudiera entenderme como ella me entendía, o perdonarme como lo había hecho, o con quien pudiera tener una vida sexual fuera de serie como la que había tenido con ella. La lista de objeciones en mi mente seguía en aumento.

Pero pocos días después, en medio de mi pena y el dolor de pensar sobre todo eso, a mi cabeza vino un nuevo pensamiento, algo que ya ni siquiera me gustaba. Aunque no podía imaginar tener intimidad con alguna otra mujer por el resto de mi vida, la idea que vino a mi mente fue esta: “Pero si el hombre correcto llega… (o el hombre incorrecto como puede ser el caso)”. ¡¿Qué?! Pensé, mientras mi mente explotaba en su interior.

“Sí”, me dije a mí mismo, “sé lo que Dios dice en Su palabra. Y sí, he hablado sobre este tema por muchos años y he visto a Dios hacer cosas asombrosas. Pero estoy cansado. Tengo dolor. Y estoy sufriendo. Apenas puedo recordar algo que me haya dado algún tipo de alivio al dolor”.

No podía creerlo. Casi por tres décadas no había considerado seriamente la homosexualidad. El solo pensarlo me asustó tanto que al día siguiente le dije a Lana lo que me había pasado y por qué. Ella fue mi mejor compañera de oración en la vida, incluso para cosas como estas. 

Le pedí que orara por mí, así como lo había hecho siempre que le había confesado algo en el pasado, respecto a cualquier tema que me estuviera molestando. Lana oró conmigo, y dos semanas después Dios respondió a esas oraciones.

Durante esas dos semanas, sentí como si una nube oscura estuviera sobre mí todo el tiempo, algo como una niebla o algo pesado. No podía identificar de dónde venía o como deshacerme de eso. Lo único que podía hacer era confiar que Dios me ayudaría a salir de eso.

LA RESPUESTA DE DIOS

Dos semanas después de luchar con las razones por las que pensé algo como eso, Dios me habló muy claramente, tres veces el mismo día.

La primera vez que Dios me habló fue poco después de levantarme. Era un domingo por la mañana, y me senté para tener un tiempo de quietud antes de ir a la iglesia. 

Al abrir mi Biblia, llegué al capítulo 1 del libro de Romanos, el mismo pasaje que leí cuando la luz vino a mí tantos años atrás, cuando Dios quiso tratar con mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Al volver a leer las palabras de Pablo, todo volvió a mí. 

“Eso es”, pensé. “Es por eso que nunca volvería a la homosexualidad. Sé que, si lo hiciera, para mí sería como morir”.

Esa mañana, al estar en la iglesia, nuestro pastor dijo algo acerca de la homosexualidad. Lo que dijo fue quizás la afirmación más simple y profunda que haya escuchado sobre este tema, después de tantos años de estudiarlo, leerlo y hablar a otros al respecto. 

Mi pastor dijo: “Si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien”.  

Cuando dijo esas palabras fue como una segunda y más potente luz de una lámpara de tres bombillos que se encendió aquel día, iluminando mucho más mi mente.

Pensé: “Sí, Señor, eso es. También es por eso que no lo hago”.

Y esa misma noche Dios me habló una tercera vez, en esta ocasión por medio de un amigo. Estaba hablando con él sobre mis temores de perder a Lana y de cómo la idea de la homosexualidad había vuelto a mi mente.

Él me dijo que lo mismo le había sucedido cuando enfrentó la posibilidad de perder a su esposa unos años antes. Dijo que en ese momento se había preguntado si así era como Dios le estaba diciendo que ahora estaba bien si quería involucrarse en la homosexualidad.  

“¡Claro que no!” Dije “Dios no querría que hicieras eso, ¡y tampoco quiere que yo lo haga para suavizar el dolor que ahora estoy sintiendo!” 

Una cosa era considerar la idea en mi propia mente, ¡pero otra muy diferente era escuchar palabras similares de la boca de mi amigo!

Tan pronto como él dijo eso, fue como si todo el resplandor de aquella lámpara hubiese entrado a mi mente. 

“¡Claro que no!” Volví a pensar. “Aunque mi dolor sin duda es real, ¡ que así no es como Dios quiere que enfrente mi dolor! 

Todos estos años que he ministrado a personas que luchan con sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, han sido para ayudar a aliviar el dolor, no para aumentarlo. Y aunque sé que no puedo aliviar todo el dolor de las personas, espero poder al menos evitarles el tipo de dolor malo, el dolor que pueden causarse ellos mismos al hacer lo que quieren hacer, en lugar de hacer lo que Dios quiere que hagan. 

Así como es posible que no tengamos elección respecto al tipo de tentaciones que enfrentamos, tampoco tenemos elección sobre el tipo de pelotas curvas que nos lance la vida. 

Sin embargo, sí podemos elegir cómo responder a esas pelotas curvas.

EL ÁNIMO EN LA OSCURIDAD

En ese momento, con la luz de esa tercera luz, sentí desaparecer la oscuridad que había estado sobre mi cabeza durante las últimas semanas. 

Ese día Dios me habló con claridad en tres ocasiones: primero en Su palabra, segundo usando al pastor de mi iglesia, y tercero con las palabras de un amigo cristiano que había enfrentado una lucha similar. En cada una de esas ocasiones, Dios me ayudó a entender que en la tierra no hay un dolor por el que valga la pena lanzarme yo mismo a un dolor más profundo. 

Mi cabeza se aclaró de inmediato y desde entonces no volví atrás, ya han pasado cinco años. Aunque mi dolor y pena ante la posibilidad de perder a Lana, y el hecho mismo de haberla perdido, siguieron hasta sus últimos días y se extendieron por semanas y meses después de su fallecimiento, pude evitar ese dolor sobre el que tenía control. 

Esa noche, después que Dios me habló con tanta claridad en tres ocasiones, pude decirle a Lana que sus oraciones por mí habían sido respondidas. Pude decirle que no tendría que preocuparse más por que yo volviera a la homosexualidad, así ella muriera, porque Dios había eliminado la niebla una vez más. 

Como nota adicional, pocos meses después Lana me dio un hermoso regalo, cuando volvió a hablar sobre la posibilidad de volver a casarme. Dijo que había estado pensando más al respecto, y quería darme su bendición con la esperanza de que yo me volviera a casar algún día. Dijo que se sentía muy bendecida de tenerme como su esposo y sabía que yo sería una bendición para otra persona en el futuro. 

Aunque aquel día no quería hablar sobre el tema, así como no quería hacerlo unos meses antes, agradecí mucho que ella pudiera tener paz en su corazón en cuanto a mi futuro, y que me diera su bendición si algún día llegaba el momento en el que yo de verdad pensara en volverme a casar.

Después de ese evento, hablé con otro pastor amigo sobre lo que me había pasado y él me dio una perspectiva muy útil. Me dijo que esos pensamientos no eran algo extraño, porque cuando enfrentamos dolor, a menudo nos vemos tentados a volvernos a cualquier cosa que pueda darnos algún alivio de ese dolor, muchas veces sintiéndonos atraídos al pasado. El Rey Salomón también habló de eso en Proverbios 26:11. (Dejaré que busques por tu cuenta esa cita).

Te relato esta historia para que sepas que tampoco me sorprende, si tú o alguien que conoces sigue luchando de vez en cuando con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, incluso después de muchos años viviendo en libertad, y en especial cuando hay un profundo dolor. Ninguno de nosotros sale de este mundo sin ser tentado, ni siquiera Jesús. 

Es entendible que algo de dolor pueda parecer tan insoportable que la idea de ceder a la tentación ya deja de parecer algo terrible. 

También es comprensible si tú, como un amante y compasivo seguidor de Jesucristo, puedes sentir el deseo de decirles a tus seres queridos que sigan adelante y cedan a sus tentaciones. Quizás quieras decirles que de pronto no es tan mala idea, ante lo que estén enfrentando en ese momento. Quizás quieras decirles que disfruten cualquier alivio que puedan encontrar para su dolor, al menos por un poco de tiempo. 

Pero ¿puedo animarte a mantenerte firme? ¿Puedo animarte a ser sabio en medio del dolor de tus seres queridos, y que les ofrezcas verdadera sabiduría que de verdad les ayude en medio de su situación?

Como mi pastor me recordó: “Si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien”.

Quizás pienses que el dolor que tus amigos o familiares enfrentan ahora es insoportable, pero puedo asegurarte de que será mucho peor si ceden a sus tentaciones, en especial si Dios ha dicho que no debemos hacer lo que ellos quieren hacer. Sencillamente no les va a ir bien. No va a funcionar. 

No puedo decirte todo lo que podría salir mal porque no puedo anticipar todo. Pero sé, en este caso especial, que el Padre sí sabe mejor. 

Si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien. Y tampoco les irá bien a tus seres queridos.

¿UN PREMIO DE CONSOLACIÓN?

Algunas personas creen sinceramente que ser gay es la primera mejor opción que Dios tiene en mente para sus vidas o las de sus seres queridos. Creen que Dios debe haberlos hecho así porque no pueden pensar en otra razón que justifique por qué se sienten de esa manera. 

Otras personas creen que, aunque ser gay no es la primera mejor opción, puede al menos estar cerca a la segunda, un premio de consolación para los que no obtuvieron lo que se necesita para tener la primera mejor opción en sus vidas. Aunque pueden creer que ser homosexual no es lo ideal, puede ser lo mejor que ellos o sus seres queridos pueden tener en esta tierra. 

Pero Dios dice que la homosexualidad no es ni la primera mejor opción ni la segunda mejor opción. Dios dice que es una opción perjudicial y destructiva, no solo para los que se involucran en estas actividades, sino también para Sus planes y propósitos para la sexualidad y Sus planes y propósitos para el mundo como Él lo creó. 

Hay quienes pueden decir: “¿Pero qué daño hace la homosexualidad? ¿Por qué no dejar que las personas hagan lo que quieren? No lastiman a nadie”.

Ya he compartido algunos de los daños que he enfrentado por mi homosexualidad: la posibilidad real de contraer SIDA y perder la vida, la posibilidad real de engañarme a mí y a mi esposa para no tener lo que llegó a ser la relación más fabulosa que pudimos tener en la vida; y la posibilidad real de alterar los planes y propósitos de Dios al darnos el regalo de la sexualidad, para crear intimidad entre mi esposa y yo, y procrear hijos que mi esposa y yo pudiéramos amar.

Las personas pueden objetar y decir que hay formas de evitar cualquiera de esos daños. Sí, las hay. Pero apenas he comenzado y ya he listado tres daños importantes que podrían afectarme si hubiera seguido en el camino de la homosexualidad. La lista de perjuicios sigue y sigue.

Creo que quienes dicen que la homosexualidad no lastima a nadie nunca se han sentado con una esposa inconsolable porque su esposo la acaba de dejar por otro hombre, reconociendo que es homosexual, que siempre lo ha sido, y que eso es lo mejor para todos los involucrados. 

Creo que los que han dicho eso nunca se han sentado con los hijos de alguien que los ha abandonado diciéndoles que sigan sus propios deseos en lugar de ser el padre o la madre de los niños que han engendrado. 

Creo que esas personas nunca se sentaron con una novia destrozada, ahora con miedo de algún día casarse porque el hombre de sus sueños acaba de decirle que cree que es gay y que probablemente nunca lo superará, yéndose así a dormir con otro hombre para ver si es verdad lo que cree. 

Desde mi punto de vista privilegiado, he visto a la homosexualidad hacer mucho daño. Y sí, también he visto al heterosexualismo hacer mucho daño. Esto es porque el sexo es como la electricidad: muy poderosa y útil cuando se retiene dentro de sus debidos límites, pero igual de poderosa y destructiva cuando se la libera sin restricción.

Siento dolor por las personas que han sido engañadas pensando que no tienen salida de las tentaciones que enfrentan, y por eso ceden. Me duelen esas personas, en especial porque que sí hay otro camino. 

También siento dolor por las personas abandonadas por los que sienten atracciones hacia su mismo sexo cuando ceden a sus tentaciones, y en el proceso dejan un rastro de destrucción. 

Alguien puede decir: “Bien, es mejor que alguien con esas atracciones se marche y no que permanezca en un matrimonio enfermizo y cause más dolor en el futuro”. 

Estaría de acuerdo si la única opción fuera causar más dolor en el futuro. 

Pero esa manera de pensar pasa por alto el hecho de que Dios todavía sigue en el negocio de transformar vidas. No tiene en cuenta el hecho de que Dios ha ayudado, y sigue ayudando a otros a superar toda clase de luchas y tentaciones en sus vidas, así como me ha ayudado a mí y muchas otras personas que conozco. 

Esa manera de pensar también menosprecia el hecho de que los matrimonios enfrentan toda clase de problemas, y algunas personas usan esto como excusa para no tratar con los otros problemas igual de reales en sus matrimonios.

CAMBIANDO UN DOLOR POR OTRO 

Aunque en la Biblia y en nuestros corazones Dios ha hablado fuerte y claro sobre este asunto, el dolor tiene la capacidad de reducir nuestra habilidad para escuchar a Dios, a menos que permitamos que ese dolor nos acerque a Él.

En muchas ocasiones he visto cómo el dolor y la tentación no solo me han afectado a mí sino también a las personas que amo.

El padre de un amigo mío cometió adulterio. Cuando la verdad salió a la luz, el dolor que enfrentó la madre de mi amigo la llevó a quitarse la vida. Ante todo esto mi amigo y sus hermanos quedaron desesperados.

Como la relación de él con su padre ya se había deteriorado antes de ese evento, el dolor causado por el adulterio de su padre y la muerte de su madre lo hizo más susceptible a las tentaciones hacia el mismo sexo. Terminó sucumbiendo a los avances de un hombre de mayor edad, alguien incluso mayor que su propio padre. 

El afecto y la atención de ese hombre satisficieron una necesidad válida en la vida de mi amigo, llenando los vacíos en su corazón. Sin embargo, para mí era irónico que el dolor resultante de un acto sexual ilegítimo hiciera que mi amigo se volviera a otro acto sexual ilegítimo para aliviar ese dolor. Mi amigo odiaba a su padre por haber cometido adulterio, pero cometió adulterio con aquel hombre mayor, puesto que él también estaba casado con una mujer y tenía una familia. 

¡La familia de aquel hombre también se destruyó cuando su adulterio salió a la luz! Ahí estaba mi amigo, tratando de hacer frente al dolor del adulterio cometido por su padre, solo que, al tratar de hacerlo, cometió adulterio de la misma manera como su padre lo había hecho, salvo que con un hombre. 

No estoy seguro si mi amigo alguna vez hizo la conexión entre lo que su padre le hizo a su familia y lo que él mismo había hecho a la familia de aquel hombre.

Estoy seguro de que mi amigo y si padre, e incluso aquel hombre mayor, estaban tratando de satisfacer sus necesidades legítimas, pero con métodos increíblemente inválidos, dejando a su paso un rastro de destrucción para los años por venir. Lo que cada una de las partes hizo fue cambiar un dolor por otro.

Otro amigo mío fue líder en el movimiento ex-gay por muchos años. Personalmente me ayudó de muchas maneras significativas al comienzo de mi propio viaje. 

Sin embargo, hace algunos años supe que volvió a la homosexualidad, abandonando en el proceso a su segunda esposa y a su familia. A su primera esposa la dejó antes de ser cristiano, lo hizo para seguir su homosexualidad. 

Aunque hizo mucho para ayudarme a mí y a muchos, su segundo matrimonio resultó ser muy difícil por múltiples razones, no solo por sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Cuando encontró a un hombre que captó su atención, decidió volver a la homosexualidad. Su nuevo interés lo convenció de que seguramente todo el tiempo estuvo leyendo las Escrituras de manera equivocada. 

Si yo no entendiera tan bien la conexión que hay entre el dolor y la tentación, me habría confundido su repentino cambio hacia esta “nueva” interpretación de las Escrituras, que lo condujo a creer que la homosexualidad ahora es algo correcto, pero que respetar sus compromisos de largo plazo con su esposa y su familia ya no era necesario. 

Una cosa es pensar que está bien ser gay, pero otra es usar esa creencia como justificación para abandonar las otras partes de la Escritura que ya entiendes como verdad. (O, como Mark Twain suele ser citado diciendo: “Las partes que no entiendo de la Biblia no son las que me molestan, sino las que sí entiendo”).

Aunque mi amigo dice que ahora se siente más libre que antes, y estoy seguro de que así es, puedo imaginar que su esposa y su familia sentirán el aguijón de su decisión durante años. 

No estoy lanzando piedras a mi amigo. Ya te he confesado que sé cómo es tener tanto dolor al punto de vernos tentados a dejar todo lo que hemos aprendido, o enseñado, o creído, o escuchado, o leído en la Palabra de Dios, para encontrar alivio. Lo entiendo. De verdad que sí lo entiendo. 

Pero también me entristece el corazón cada vez que escucho que algo como esto sucede porque, con la correcta sabiduría de Dios, el apoyo de una sólida iglesia local, y el toque de algunos amigos amorosos, se podría evitar mucho de este trágico dolor.

NO TODOS TIENEN UNA LANA

Algunos pueden pensar que pude manejar mejor que otros mis atracciones hacia el mismo sexo gracias a que mi crianza fue muy positiva o porque tuve a alguien como Lana a mi lado. Estoy seguro de que las personas que dicen esto tienen algo de razón. creo que esas cosas me han ayudado mucho, y siento mucha gratitud por ello.

Recuerdo que un día compartí con una persona cómo había dejado la homosexualidad y me había casado con Lana, la mujer de mis sueños. Esta persona nos conocía a Lana y a mí, y dijo: “Sí, pero no todos tienen una Lana”. 

Su afirmación me hizo callar por unos días y tomé tiempo para considerar lo que dijo y dejar que la verdad de sus palabras penetrara. 

Ella tenía razón. No todos tienen una Lana en sus vidas, y eso lo lamento mucho. Pero después de otros días considerándolo, comprendí otra verdad: ¡Yo tampoco contaba más con Lana! 

¿Cómo lo estaba logrando, y cómo iba a continuar lográndolo sin esa increíble compañera de vida a mi lado? Bueno, lo estoy logrando porque voy a seguir haciendo lo que Dios me ha mostrado que debo hacer, con o sin Lana a mi lado. Verás, no se trata de tener o no tener a Lana (¡por mucho que quisiera que muchos tuvieran a alguien así a su lado!)

Se trata de encontrar la “salida” de Dios para escapar de las nubes de la tentación cuando se presenten, una vía de salida que Dios ha prometido proveer siempre. Como dice la Biblia: “No os ha sobrevenido ninguna tentación que no sea humana; pero fiel es Dios, que no os dejará ser tentados más de lo que podéis resistir, sino que dará también juntamente con la tentación la salida, para que podáis soportar” (1 Corintios 10:13).

Claro que Lana me ayudó, pero Dios también ha provisto otras “salidas”.

Incluso en las horas más oscuras de mi vida, Dios ha provisto una salida por medio de Su Palabra, por medio de Su Iglesia, y por medio de algunos amigos cristianos maduros, incluyendo a Lana. 

Cuando no pude encontrar la salida por mí mismo, Dios respondió a nuestras oraciones ayudándome a encontrarla. 

Dios puede usar toda clase de cosas para darnos una vía de escape, pero estas tres son especialmente útiles: permanecer en Su Palabra, permanecer en Su Iglesia, y permanecer en comunión con amigos maduros en Cristo.

¡TÚ PUEDES AYUDAR!

¡Aquí es donde entras! puedes ser el amigo que tus seres queridos necesitan cuando están enfrentando momentos de dolor y sufrimiento. 

puedes ser su verdadero “alivio para el dolor”, no diciéndoles que “sigan” algo que podría darles algún alivio temporal, pero a la larga podría causarles más dolor que nunca.

puedes caminar al lado de tus seres queridos durante sus tiempos de mayor necesidad.

Una de las mayores tragedias que escucho estos días es cuando cristianos aparentemente firmes y de muchos años en el Señor sienten que no tienen un amigo o familiar en quien puedan confiar de verdad. 

Hace poco se conoció la noticia que un famoso cantante cristiano se declaró gay, afectando con esto a su esposa, sus seguidores y sus amigos. Ninguna de estas personas más cercanas a él tenía alguna idea de que por años él había luchado con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Para mí, la parte más triste de su historia fue que él sentía que no tenía a nadie con quien pudiera compartir sus luchas. No es que las personas alrededor de él no hubiesen estado dispuestas a ayudarlo si él se abría con ellas, sino que, por alguna razón, él sintió que no podía ser honesto con ellos. 

Para cuando finalmente les confesó sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo a su esposa, a su familia y amigos, ya estaba completamente comprometido con dejar a su familia en involucrarse de lleno en la homosexualidad. En ese punto ya no había retorno para él, y el oleaje que provocó cuando golpeó las aguas de la homosexualidad sigue teniendo impacto hoy.

En una entrevista después de haber publicado sus inclinaciones, este cantante dijo que se sentía muy aliviado del dolor que había mantenido escondido por años, y luego añadió: “Ya no creo que Dios me odia”. 

Aunque me alegra que sepa ahora que Dios no lo odia, la verdad es que Dios nunca lo odió. Dios lo amó incluso en medio de sus luchas secretas con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Por alguna razón, había creído una mentira, pensando que, debido a sus atracciones, Dios debía odiarlo, cuando la verdad era que Dios lo había amado todo el tiempo, con o sin atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

Este cantante cambió la verdad de Dios por una mentira, y esa mentira lo condujo a dejar a su esposa y a su familia, pensando que les hacía un favor. Habiendo ocultado su lucha por tanto tiempo, nunca tuvo la oportunidad de beneficiarse con la luz. 

Te animo a que ayudes a tus seres queridos para que abran su corazón y expresen el dolor que están sintiendo. Dales permiso de hablar sobre la realidad que hay en sus corazones y mentes. Ofrece un oído atento si algún día quieren hablar, luego, cuando tengas la oportunidad, habla la verdad a sus vidas, en amor, siempre que observes que han dado lugar a una mentira.

Si te parece que estoy sonando una alarma al tratar de advertir a las personas que no sigan en la homosexualidad, ¡es porque lo estoy haciendo! Estoy tratando de advertirles, así como Dios trató de advertirme, ¡y tuvo éxito! 

Dios nos da sus advertencias por Su gran amor para con nosotros, no por Su gran odio hacia nosotros. Y Dios quiere que también advirtamos a los demás desde una posición de amor.

EL PROBLEMA CON EL PROBLEMA

Al terminar este capítulo, quiero compartir contigo una última historia acerca del dolor, y cómo éste puede llevar a las personas a hacer lo que nunca harían. 

Sin embargo, esta historia es sobre un personaje literario de ficción, un hombre que fue descubierto como gay muchos años después de la publicación de la serie de libros en la que aparecía. 

En estos libros, el hombre era presentado como un héroe, y la autora, al igual que muchos de los lectores de los libros, lo describía como “el epítome de la bondad”. 

Muchos años después de la publicación de los libros, la autora respondió a una pregunta acerca de los libros, y en su respuesta, hizo una delicada afirmación sobre su personaje, diciendo, “Siempre pensé en él como si fuera alguien gay”.

Esta afirmación impactó de muchas maneras a los lectores: algunos se regocijaron en que uno de sus personajes más queridos de toda la literatura era gay, aunque los otros se vieron sorprendidos fuera de guardia, tratando de ver cómo uno de sus personajes favoritos podía ser homosexual. La manera como este personaje es percibido ahora se ha visto alterada para siempre por el pequeño trozo de siete palabras que dijo la autora. 

Yo fui uno de esos lectores que fue sorprendido fuera de guardia. Pero al pensar más acerca de la afirmación del autor, y al considerar unos de los pasajes en los libros que describían su historia de vida, pude ver con certeza por qué podía ser gay, en especial a la luz de lo que decía sobre sus años de niñez. 

Al recordar su historia, este personaje describió de la siguiente manera el tiempo en su vida cuando supuestamente era gay: “Dos meses de locura, de sueños crueles y de rechazo por parte de los únicos dos miembros de mi familia que me quedaban… Él huyó mientras yo me quedé para enterrar a mi hermana y aprender a vivir con mi culpa, y mi terrible pena, el precio de mi vergüenza”.

Aunque esto viene de una obra de ficción, lo he visto pasar tantas veces en la realidad, como para saber que sus palabras describen, de manera muy poderosa, cómo el dolor nos puede llevar a cualquiera de nosotros a hacer cosas que nunca considerarías hacer en otras circunstancias. Si este personaje hubiese tenido un amigo como tú, su historia habría sido diferente. : )

Hay una razón por la cual las personas con dolor tratan de correr hacia cualquier cosa que tenga la posibilidad de aliviarlo. “El problema con el problema”, he oído decir, “es que por lo general comienza como algo muy divertido”. 

Pero no dejes que el dolor te impulse a ti o a tus amigos o familiares hacia algo que puede causar un dolor mucho más profundo al final, en especial cuando hay un mejor camino. 

Dios quiere ayudarnos a aliviar nuestro dolor, en el momento correcto, y quiere satisfacer nuestras necesidades legítimas, pero de maneras legítimas. 

Oro por que animes a tus amigos a hacer lo mismo. Quizás solo los salves de sufrir mucho más dolor. 

Como dice la Biblia: “Mis amados hermanos, si alguno de ustedes se aparta de la verdad y otro lo hace volver, pueden estar seguros de que quien haga volver al pecador de su mal camino salvará a esa persona de la muerte y traerá como resultado el perdón de muchos pecados” (Santiago 5:19-20).

Capítulo 10: La importancia del libre albedrío

Donde comparto la importancia de dejar que otros ejerzan su libre albedrío, así como Dios te permite ejercer el tuyo.

La mayoría de personas con quienes he hablado con respecto a atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, son personas que me han buscado. Me han escuchado hablar, o han leído mi testimonio, o han escuchado mi historia de parte de un amigo o familiar. 

La belleza de esto es que la mayoría de personas con quienes he hablado han querido escuchar lo que tengo para decir. Han estado intrigados por la idea de que quizás no tengan que seguir viviendo en algo que ni pidieron ni desearon. 

Esta puede ser una de las razones por las cuales la mayoría de personas con quienes he hablado ha encontrado que mi posición en este tema es de gran esperanza, porque a menudo desean tener en sus vidas la misma libertad que ven en la mía.

Pero también quiero relatarte unas historias acerca de unas de las pocas personas a quienes he buscado para hablar sobre este tema. 

Algunos de ellos han sido hombres con quienes tuve una relación en el pasado y quise compartir con ellos lo que Dios ha hecho por mí. 

Otros han sido amigos que seguían ese estilo de vida cuando yo estaba envuelto en la homosexualidad, pero con quienes no estuve involucrado íntimamente. 

Algunos han sido personas que he conocido a lo largo de mi vida, y por quienes me he sentido impulsado a compartir mi historia. 

Me alegra decir que casi siempre he encontrado una audiencia receptiva entre esas personas, por lo menos en un comienzo. No presiono, pero tampoco me contengo si están dispuestos a escuchar, y por lo general así es. Mis amigos me han escuchado relatar mi historia, y he escuchado sus más profundos pensamientos en respuesta. Siempre he apreciado esas oportunidades para compartir. 

Pero creo que también es importante que sepas que los resultados finales de muchas de estas conversaciones no han provocado ningún cambio externo en las vidas de esas personas, al menos no que yo los haya podido ver. 

Al momento de escribir esto, ninguno de mis antiguos compañeros sentimentales ha llegado a las mismas conclusiones que yo llegué. Ninguno de mis amigos gays de mi pasado en la homosexualidad ha tenido la misma experiencia transformadora que yo tuve, incluso después de haber escuchado a fondo mi historia y haber dedicado tiempo para orar juntos. Al comienzo de este libro, bromeé un poco al decir que solo se necesita un psicólogo para cambiar una bombilla “pero para hacerlo es necesario que la quiera cambiar”.

Aun así, me siento bien con el hecho de que he podido hablar con cada uno de esos hombres y compartir mi historia con ellos. Y, en varias ocasiones, he sentido que no fui solo yo el que quería compartir mi historia con ellos, sino Dios mismo el que organizó nuestros encuentros. 

Al relatarte estas historias, quiero animarte a seguir compartiéndolas con los que te rodean, no importa si ves o no resultados al hacerlo. También quiero animarte a compartirlas de una manera que honre y respete las decisiones que tus amigos y familiares han hecho y que no afecte la afectuosa amistad que tienes con ellos.

Como dice la Biblia, “Si tuviera el don de profecía y entendiera todos los planes secretos de Dios y contara con todo el conocimiento, y si tuviera una fe que me hiciera capaz de mover montañas, pero no amara a otros, yo no sería nada” (1 Corintios 13:2).

UNA CITA DIVINA

En una ocasión hice un viaje personal hasta el otro lado del país para visitar a un amigo y llevarlo a una conferencia para hombres. 

Antes de ese fin de semana, sentí que Dios me estaba animando a que compartiera mi testimonio con él. Él nunca había luchado con la homosexualidad, pero aun así sentí que, por el bien de nuestra amistad, era importante que compartiera con él esa parte importante de mi vida. 

Y pensé que ese era el fin de semana adecuado para hacerlo. Aunque estaba nervioso y renuente, estaba dispuesto a hacerlo. Después de encontrarnos, traté dos o tres veces de hablar del tema, pero nuestra conversación tomaba otro rumbo antes de que pudiera hacerlo.

Cuando llegó el momento de tomar mi vuelo de vuelta a casa, abordé el avión sintiéndome un poco desanimado porque no pude compartir con él lo que sentía que Dios había estado poniendo en mi corazón. 

Al tomar asiento en el avión para volver a casa, me pregunté por qué no había escuchado a Dios, y en ese momento un hombre se sentó a mi lado, abrió una Biblia de estudio grande de pasta dura y la puso en la bandeja frente a su silla. Era exactamente la primera Biblia de estudio que yo compré cuando llegué a Cristo hace muchos años. La mía ya estaba desgastada y andrajosa, pero la de él se veía fresca y deslumbrantemente nueva. La tenía abierta en la primera página del primer libro del Nuevo Testamento, el libro de Mateo.

Miré para ver quién estaba a mi lado, y, para mi asombro, ¡era un amigo con quien había ido a la universidad hacía unos 15 años! 

En ese entonces los dos sabíamos que éramos homosexuales, e incluso hablamos de tener un encuentro íntimo una noche. Pero momentos antes de hacerlo, algo me detuvo por completo. 

Me excusé diciéndole que por alguna razón no me sentía bien de hacerlo. Nunca supe por qué, y nunca tuve una relación sexual con él. Sin embargo, seguimos siendo amigos, y de vez en cuando nos encontrábamos mientras estuvimos en la universidad. 

Al estar a su lado en ese avión, busqué en el fondo de mi cerebro para tratar de recordar su nombre. Cuando finalmente lo recordé, lo dije de inmediato en voz alta. 

Él me miró y también dijo mi nombre, ¡y no sé cuál de los dos quedó más sorprendido de estar sentados “al azar” uno al lado del otro en ese avión!

Le pregunté por la Biblia que tenía abierta en la bandeja frente a él. 

Me dijo que su madre se la había dado justo antes de subir al avión, ella pensaba que él debía leerla. Por años, ella había estado orando por él, esperando ayudarlo a ordenar su vida. Me dijo que ni siquiera sabía por dónde comenzar porque nunca antes había leído la Biblia. Es por eso que la tenía abierta en el primer libro del Nuevo Testamento, porque vio que ahí era donde se encontraban los relatos acerca de Jesús. 

Le dije que ese era un excelente punto de partida, que yo tenía la misma Biblia y que las palabras de Jesús en el libro de Mateo habían cambiado mi vida para siempre, sacándome de la homosexualidad para mi bien. (La historia de los hombres ciegos en Mateo, capítulo 9, donde Jesús les preguntó: “¿Creen que puedo sanarlos?”)

Después de mi decepcionante fin de semana, sintiéndome bloqueado a cada intento de compartir mi testimonio con mi otro amigo, quedé asombrado al ver que, en mi viaje de regreso, esta puerta se había abierto de par en par, ¡con una mesa servida por Dios mismo para los dos! 

Mi amigo también estaba sorprendido y ansioso por escuchar lo que yo tenía para decirle, y, si yo hubiera escuchado con suficiente atención, probablemente habría escuchado a su madre decir algunos “amén” y “aleluya” en la distancia, sabiendo que Dios sin duda respondería sus oraciones tan pronto como su hijo abriera ese libro tan especial. 

Su madre no habría podido imaginarse que Dios iba a proveer un Testamento Viviente como compañero de viaje para su hijo en ese mismo momento, alguien que podría confirmar y dar testimonio de lo que él estaba a punto de leer en el Nuevo Testamento. 

Compartí mi historia como él, así como lo he hecho contigo en este libro.

Él estuvo muy atento durante todo el vuelo, hizo preguntas, relató historias, y compartió las alegrías y frustraciones de ser gay en la ciudad donde vivía. 

Terminamos nuestro tiempo juntos con una oración y un abrazo, cada uno siguió su camino, todavía sorprendidos por la Cita Divina que Dios había organizado. 

Yo había estado sintiendo la fuerte necesidad de compartir mi historia ese fin de semana, pero no lo hice con mi amigo que fue a la conferencia de varones, y que nunca había luchado con la homosexualidad. Lo hice con un amigo de mucho tiempo atrás, quien estuvo muy abierto a mi mensaje y había estado involucrado activamente en la homosexualidad hasta ese mismo día.

CONFIANDO EN DIOS

Quisiera poder decirte que la vida de mi amigo cambió dramáticamente durante los días siguientes a nuestro encuentro, y que ha elegido seguir a Cristo, así como yo lo hice. Pero hasta donde tengo conocimiento, eso no sucedió aquel día, y todavía no ha sucedido. 

Sin embargo, no puedo evitar pensar que Dios tenía algo en mente para que yo lo compartiera ese día, porque hizo algo que yo solo nunca habría podido orquestar. Y, como ya lo he dicho, me tomó años cambiar mi manera de pensar sobre este tema hasta ese día cuando todo lo que había escuchado hasta ese punto, finalmente surtió efecto. 

Debo confiar que el mismo Dios que organizó esa Cita Divina en el avión la usará de alguna manera para atraer a mi amigo hacía Él cuánto sea posible. 

También sé que Dios les da a las personas libre albedrío, la libertad de tomar sus propias decisiones en cuanto a lo que van a hacer con sus vidas y los caminos que van a seguir. Como Bruce le dice a Dios en la película Bruce Todopoderoso: 

“¿Cómo puedes hacer que alguien te ame sin afectar su libre albedrío?” 

“Bienvenido a Mi mundo, hijo”, responde Dios. “Encuentra la respuesta a esa pregunta, y hablamos.”

El libre albedrío es una de las cosas más hermosas, pero más difíciles que le podemos ofrecer a alguien. Pero Dios nos lo da a cada uno de nosotros con tanta libertad, y creo que Él quiere que nosotros hagamos lo mismo, incluso cuando sea muy difícil hacerlo.

VERDADEROS AMIGOS

He hecho muchos otros viajes, algunos por negocios y otros por placer, a varias otras ciudades del mundo, donde he podido hablar con algunos de mis viejos amigos gays. 

En cada una de esas reuniones hemos podido renovar nuestra amistad, animarnos el uno al otro por compartir juntos, y he podido compartir mi historia con ellos, así como lo hice con mi amigo de la universidad en ese avión. 

En algunas ocasiones he podido seguir en contacto con mis amigos, ya sea por teléfono, correo electrónico o por redes sociales. Pero al haber compartido mi testimonio con ellos, y a su vez haber escuchado sus historias, por lo general no he vuelto a hablar del tema. He dejado las conversaciones en su lado de la cancha, para mantener viva nuestra genuina amistad, y sabiendo que, si algún día quieren hablar más, pueden hacerlo. 

Por mucho que quisiera que las cosas positivas en mi vida afectaran positivamente a mis amigos, en realidad aprecio mi amistad por lo que ellos son, no por lo que puedo lograr en ellos o incluso lo que creo que tengo para ofrecerles. 

Si somos amigos con las personas solo con el fin de evangelizar, o solo para convertirlos a nuestro punto de vista, debo preguntar si de verdad somos verdaderos amigos. 

Los verdaderos amigos les dan a los demás el espacio para tener sus propios pensamientos y convicciones, incluso si esos pensamientos y convicciones difieren dramáticamente de los propios. Como un amigo me dijo una vez: “No sacrifiques a otros en el altar de tus creencias”.

Aunque me apasionan mis convicciones, y me encantaría que todos eligieran el camino que yo he elegido, también trato de respetar el libre albedrío que los demás tienen para tomar sus propias decisiones en la vida. 

Después de compartir en una ocasión con alguien, sigo dispuesto a seguir hablando más con esa persona, en especial si Dios me impulsa a hacerlo. Pero también quiero respetar la genuina amistad que compartimos, y no hago que sea condicional dependiendo de si ellos aceptan lo que creo, o que yo acepte lo que ellos creen. 

Hay algo liberador y de gozo en las relaciones que de verdad son incondicionales, así nuestras intenciones sean buenas al querer que nuestros amigos lleguen a nuestro punto de vista.

Comparto estas historias contigo para animarte a compartir tus pensamientos y sentimientos con tu familia y amigos, incluso en temas sensibles como este, haciéndolo con prudencia, y en especial si sientes que Dios ha abierto la puerta para que lo hagas. 

No tengas miedo de decirles a tus amigos y familiares lo que piensas. Eso es parte lo que hace que nuestras relaciones sean tan genuinas, reales y significativas. 

También quiero animarte a darles a tus amigos y familiares el espacio que pueden necesitar para llegar a sus propias conclusiones, respetando y honrando su libre albedrío de seguir o no el camino que les sugieres, así como esperas que ellos respeten y honren tu libre albedrío de seguir o no el camino que ellos sugieren. 

Creo que, si nunca lo has intentado, encontrarás que es algo liberador hacerlo. Veo que cada situación será diferente, desde luego, y no puedo decir que mi enfoque sea el mejor o el único. Pero sí puedo decir que me ha ayudado a mantener las puertas abiertas para conversaciones futuras, y a mantener mis relaciones intactas mucho mejor que cuando he tratado de hacerlo de otra manera.

En una ocasión, una mujer confrontó al evangelista D.L. Moody, diciéndole: “No me gusta mucho su método de evangelismo”.

A lo cual Moody respondió: “A mí tampoco me gusta mucho mi método. Dígame ¿cuál es el suyo?”

Ella dijo: “No tengo ninguno”.

A lo cual Moody respondió: “¡Entonces me gusta más mi método!”

Mi método puede no ser método, ¡pero oro porque pruebes alguno! 

Quizás nunca en tu vida le hayas expresado a otra persona tus pensamientos en cuanto a este tema (o es probable que nunca en tu vida tampoco le hayas compartido a alguien lo que piensas acerca de Cristo). 

De ser así, ¿puedo animarte a que consideres hacerlo? 

Quizás Dios no te haya tocado en esa área de tu vida como lo hizo conmigo, pero creo que lo ha hecho en otros aspectos. Y puedo imaginar, si has llegado hasta este punto del libro, que también conoces el poder de Dios y sabes que él puede hacer cualquier cosa, nada le es imposible.

Quizás tengas una fe inquebrantable en Dios, y en la Palabra de Dios como está en la Biblia, y hay personas que necesitan escuchar de tu fe inquebrantable. Es posible que no conozcas todas las respuestas sobre la homosexualidad, pero para cuando termines de leer este libro, espero que puedas tener mucho más para ofrecer, comparado con lo que tenías antes. 

De ser así, ¿puedo animarte a hablar de lo que sabes, o escribirlo, de modo que otra persona pueda escuchar lo que tienes para decir? Y cuando lo digas, hazlo con seguridad, pero dilo con respeto hacia el libre albedrío de las otras personas, así como esperarías que ellos respeten tu libertad para decidir.

Como me dijo un amigo en una ocasión, y vale la pena repetirlo ahora: “No sacrifiques a otros en el altar de tus creencias”.

CONVERSACIÓN CON ADOLESCENTES

Quiero relatarte otra historia para animarte a comprender que, si compartes lo que piensas acerca de este tema, eso puede transformar una vida, incluso con los que no te han pedido que les expreses tu opinión.

Una noche, después de haberme ido a la cama, cerca de las 11 p.m., recibí una llamada. Era un pastor que conocía muy bien, así que contesté. 

Acababa de encontrar a tres adolescentes de su iglesia que estaban involucrados en una relación de trío. Ellos y sus padres se habían quedado en la iglesia para organizar algunas cosas después de un evento, y fue durante ese tiempo que se presentó el encuentro. 

Cuando el pastor me llamó, los padres todavía estaban allá, los chicos seguían allá, al igual que el pastor y su esposa. Me estaban llamando para preguntarme si podía ir a su iglesia para ayudarlos a saber qué hacer. Ahora, ¡esto sin duda iba a ser incómodo para todos los involucrados!

Conduje hasta su iglesia y entré al lugar de reunión donde se encontraban los tres avergonzados adolescentes sentados junto a sus tres parejas de confundidos padres, quienes estaban junto a su pastor y su esposa quienes deseaban ayudar, pero no sabían bien qué hacer. ¡Y se suponía que yo debía tener todas las respuestas a sus preguntas! 

Lo asombroso es que Dios me dio algunas respuestas aquella noche, y pudimos avanzar en medio de la situación con la mayor sabiduría y gracia posible. 

Hablé a todo el grupo, luego hablé con los adolescentes, luego con los padres y el pastor y su esposa. Programé reuniones personales para la semana siguiente con cada uno de los adolescentes, además de una reunión de seguimiento con cada pareja de padres, luego otra reunión con todos los adolescentes juntos. (Esta no es una fórmula, solo pensé en compartir cómo abordamos esa incómoda situación tanto aquella noche como en las semanas siguientes).

Después de escuchar sus historias y compartir la mía, cada uno de los adolescentes dijo que estaba dispuesto a seguir un camino diferente al que estaban siguiendo la noche cuando fueron sorprendidos. 

En los años siguientes a ese evento, esos tres chicos terminaron casándose con tres mujeres maravillosas, y todos están empezando sus propias familias. Aunque fue incómodo para ellos el haber sido sorprendidos, no puedo evitar pensar que la gracia de Dios permitió que eso sucediera. 

Gracias a Dios, en gran parte debido a que un pastor que oró y actuó para ayudarlos a ellos y a sus padres, que estaban dispuestos a acompañarlos en medio de ese tiempo crítico de sus vidas, estos jóvenes ahora están viviendo la vida que ellos creen, y yo creo, que Dios los llamó a vivir.

Aunque esos adolescentes no pidieron mi opinión, pudieron adoptarla cuando la escucharon, y sus vidas fueron transformadas en el proceso.

¿PROHIBIENDO LA CONVERSACIÓN CON ADOLESCENTES?

He compartido esta historia para animarte a entender que tus palabras y acciones pueden hacer una diferencia, incluso con personas que no han pedido tu ayuda. 

Pero también he compartido este relato contigo porque en los últimos años ha habido un movimiento que prohíbe a las personas hablar de esta manera con los adolescentes, evitando que ellos reciban el mismo tipo de sabiduría y respaldo que yo pude darles a esas familias aquella noche. 

Hace pocos años, aquí en mi propio estado, una ley fue presentada para votación, la cual prohibía a los consejeros profesionales licenciados sugerir a cualquier persona menor de 18 años lo que yo les sugerí a esos chicos aquella noche: que no tenían que ser homosexuales si eso no es lo que querían para sus vidas, y que no estaban atrapados en los sentimientos o actividades que los condujeron a ese punto la noche que fueron sorprendidos.

Según esta ley, cualquier profesional en salud mental estaría obligado a no dar información a un menor de 18 años a quien estuviera aconsejando, indicándole que sí existe la posibilidad de cambiar, así ese menor le dijera que quiere ayuda en ese sentido, e incluso si los padres firmaran un consentimiento para que el consejero pueda ofrecer ese tipo de ayuda. 

Es más, los consejeros profesionales tampoco estarían autorizados para remitir esos clientes a otra persona que pudiera ofrecer ese tipo de ayuda o consejo, ni siquiera si el cliente pidiera específicamente esa información, de lo contrario, el consejero profesional se vería “sujeto a acciones disciplinarias por parte de las respectivas autoridades licenciantes”. Me sorprendió que una propuesta de ley como esa hubiera llegado tan lejos. 

Aunque no soy consejero profesional licenciado, he visto bastantes cambios positivos en las vidas de personas como estos tres adolescentes, sin mencionar los cientos de adultos, de los cuales la mayoría alcanzaron sus metas de no permitir que sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo controlaran sus futuros si querían procurar un resultado diferente para sus vidas. 

Algunas personas dicen que este es el derecho a la auto determinación, el derecho a decidir tu propio futuro y cómo va a ser. En algunos aspectos, yo lo llamaría libre albedrío. 

Aunque esta propuesta de ley estaba bajo consideración, supe que el representante de mi distrito estaba preguntándose cómo votar y que estaba dispuesto a escuchar opiniones de parte de sus electores. 

Llamé a su oficina y dejé un mensaje hablando de los cambios positivos que he visto en mi propia vida y en las vidas de muchos otros que conozco, incluso personas que vivían en su propio distrito. 

Él no tardó en devolver la llamada para hablar un poco más al respecto, y escuchó atentamente lo que yo tenía que decir. 

Luego preguntó: “¿Qué de aquellas personas que afirman que este tipo de consejería es perjudicial?

Yo le dije: “También he escuchado a otros decir eso, y estoy seguro de que hay quienes han sido heridos por toda clase de consejería en todo tipo de formas. Pero en mis 30 años de experiencia hablando con cientos de personas que han luchado con las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, no he encontrado una sola vez que ese sea el caso. Por el contrario, las personas con las que he hablado se han sentido esperanzadas, en muchos casos por primera vez en sus vidas, al escuchar que tienen una opción, que de verdad pueden vivir el tipo de vidas que quieren vivir”. 

Al día siguiente me sentí agradecido de ver que él votó como yo esperaba que lo hiciera, lo cual para mí era una sencilla decisión de dar a las personas el derecho de la autodeterminación. 

Desafortunadamente la ley fue aprobada de todas formas, y en muchos otros estados se han presentado propuestas de leyes similares, cortando así el derecho que cualquier persona menor de 18 años tiene para recibir ayuda con algo en lo que se siente atrapada y no puede encontrar la salida por sí sola.

LA IDEA DE DIOS

Encuentro irónico que la mujer que presentó esta propuesta de ley en nuestro estado es una lesbiana que ha dedicado años a luchar, y ganar, por el derecho a seguir el camino que ella considera mejor para su propia vida, pero ahora quería restringir a otros para que no siguieran el camino que ellos consideran mejor para sus vidas. 

Si queremos que los demás respeten nuestro libre albedrío, debemos respetar el de ellos. Creo que, si esa mujer honestamente se interesara en la salud mental de los niños, habría buscado ofrecerles todo el rango de libertades por las que ella ha luchado y ganado para sí misma. Pero en lugar de hacerlo, ahora estaba sacrificando a los demás en el altar de sus creencias.

Aunque me entristece saber que a nadie se le puede pedir que contra su voluntad reciba consejería para cambiar sus inclinaciones sexuales, también me entristecen restricciones como estas que prohíben que las personas que sí quieren ayuda no la puedan obtener de parte de quienes la pueden dar, ¡o incluso que no puedan obtener una remisión a alguien que pueda dar ese tipo de ayuda!

Hay quienes sienten que es malo restringir los derechos de los que quieren seguir con sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, así que para mí es igual de malo restringir los derechos de quienes no quieren seguir sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, aquellas personas que de verdad quieren ayuda para alcanzar sus propias metas. 

En lugar de ser perjudiciales, de acuerdo con la pregunta del representante, he encontrado, según mi propia experiencia y la de cientos de personas con quienes he hablado personalmente, que, para muchas, muchas personas, esas conversaciones y consejos han sido útiles, de esperanza y de vida. 

El libre albedrío no es solo una buena idea, es la idea de Dios.

Aunque Dios tiene planes para cada una de nuestras vidas, nos permite elegir por nosotros mismos si hemos de seguir sus planes o no. 

Como Josué le dijo al pueblo de Israel: “Por lo tanto, teme al Señor y sírvelo con todo el corazón… Pero si te niegas a servir al Señor, elige hoy mismo a quién servirás… Pero en cuanto a mí y a mi familia, nosotros serviremos al Señor” (Josué 24:14-15, NTV).

MANTENIENDO LAS AMISTADES

Aunque tengo convicciones firmes en cuanto a lo que creo, aun así, sigo teniendo amistad con personas que piensan diferente, incluso en este tema. ¡No tengo problema con eso! ¡Son mis amigos! 

El simple hecho de que mis amigos y yo tengamos creencias diferentes sobre ciertos temas, no impide que comparta lo que pienso con ellos. Pero como son mis amigos, tampoco trato de atacarlos por eso. No hablo mal de ellos en las redes sociales. No les envío artículos airados para expresar mis frustraciones y lo ridículos que me parecen por tener esas creencias. 

Quizás tú tengas otro enfoque con tus amigos. De ser así, con gusto respeto tu libre albedrío, ¡también! Sólo quiero estar seguro de que has pensado detenidamente y orado con respecto a ese enfoque, asegurándote de que honre y respete el libre albedrío de las personas que estás tratando de alcanzar. 

Cualquier diferencia que pueda haber entre mi metodología y la de otros puede basarse en estilo o personalidad, o sólo en hacer seguimiento a lo que es, y lo que no es efectivo para mí. Pero quería compartir contigo lo que hago, y lo que no hago, porque considero que es muy posible tener una discusión abierta y civilizada sobre temas como estos, dando espacio para que otros ejerzan su libre albedrío, así como Dios me permitió ejercerlo. 

Si lo que estoy diciendo respecto a honrar y respetar el libre albedrío de los demás no suena como gran cosa, lo siento. ¡No lo es! Y de hecho no promuevo el punto de vista que afirma que todas las creencias son iguales. 

Pero como ya lo he dicho, dentro del entorno de las ideas, creo que las creencias que tengo se pueden defender por sí solas, e incluso prevalecer. Es por eso que considero de gran valor que compartamos esas ideas. 

Sin embargo, también creo que esas ideas las debemos expresar con civismo y amabilidad, y con afecto y amor mutuo, en especial hacia las personas que son difíciles de amar.

Quisiera que todos pudieran experimentar lo que yo he experimentado al poner mi fe en Jesús. Quisiera que todos pudieran experimentar lo que yo he experimentado desde que salí de la homosexualidad. Pero tampoco voy a retorcerme si alguien no quiere experimentar lo que yo he vivido, así yo desee mucho que esa persona lo viva. No todos quieren cambiar. 

Para algunos, volver al closet es como volver a una jaula. Para otros, tener que seguir viviendo algo que nunca pidieron ni desearon, también es como volver a una jaula. Nadie quiere sentirse atrapado en una jaula. Y esa es la belleza del libre albedrío. Nadie tiene que sentirse así. 

Aunque Dios podría forzar a todos a que hicieran Su voluntad, Él es un Caballero y nos permite elegir por nosotros mismos el camino que hemos de seguir.

Cuando hables con tus familiares y amigos, te animo a que lo hagas como yo suelo animar a las personas a quienes he ministrado, y a los legisladores en su intento por gobernar bien al pueblo: dales a las personas el mismo libre albedrío, el mismo derecho a determinar sus propios futuros, así como Dios te lo dio a ti.

Guías de estudio para los capítulos 9 y 10

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 9: “ALGUNAS PALABRAS ACERCA DEL DOLOR”

Resumen del Capítulo

El dolor puede llevarnos a considerar hacer cosas que quizás nunca hayamos pensado hacer. Incluso Jesús enfrentó unas de sus peores tentaciones la noche de su muerte. 

El autor menciona cuatro cosas que lo ayudaron en medio de un tiempo cuando enfrentó algo de su más profundo dolor:

  • pidió oración,
  • leyó las Escrituras,
  • fue a la iglesia,
  • y habló con un amigo.

Cada una de esas actividades llevó fruto, puesto que esas oraciones fueron respondidas, la Palabra cobró vida y recibió ánimo en su iglesia y con su amigo.

Cuando la verdad finalmente penetró, sus tentaciones y la oscuridad desaparecieron. Durante ese tiempo, el autor escuchó uno de los mejores consejos que ha escuchado con respecto a las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, cuando su pastor dijo: “Si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien.”

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Lucas 22:39-46. ¿Qué les dijo Jesús a sus discípulos que debían hacer para no caer en tentación? Cuando pudo verse tentado a hacer otra cosa, ¿qué hizo Jesús para mantenerse fiel al camino que Su Padre había trazado para Él? ¿De qué manera este pasaje describe la angustia misma de Jesús en medio de ese momento tan difícil?

Lee Santiago 5:19-20. ¿Qué dice el Apóstol Santiago que sucederá siempre que ayudemos a alguien a alejarse del pecado?

¿Por qué el dolor tienta a las personas a considerar hacer cosas que quizás nunca antes consideraron hacer? 

¿Qué cosas podemos hacer para protegernos de las tentaciones cuando estemos en medio del dolor? ¿Qué podemos hacer por otros para ayudar a protegerlos de las tentaciones cuando enfrenten dolor? 

¿Alguna vez has conocido a alguien que al estar en medio del dolor tomó una mala decisión respecto a sus tentaciones? ¿Alguna vez has tomado una mala decisión, o te has visto tentado a hacerlo, estando en dolor? 

¿Qué sucede cuando alguien hace algo que Dios dice que no debemos hacer? ¿Por qué el pecado siempre es una opción destructiva a largo plazo, y no sólo una segunda o tercera mejor opción? 

¿Alguna vez has experimentado la verdad de esta afirmación?: “El problema con los problemas es que por lo general comienzan como algo muy divertido.” De ser así, ¿cuál fue el resultado? ¿De qué manera el “pensar cómo salir” en lugar de solo “sentir que debes salir”, ha cambiado el resultado?

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 10: “LA IMPORTANCIA DEL LIBRE ALBEDRÍO”

Resumen del Capítulo

¿Cómo interactuamos con personas que se aferran a sus más profundas convicciones, así como nosotros nos aferramos a las nuestras? El autor hace tres sugerencias:

  • sigue siendo útil y bueno expresar nuestras creencias, puesto que esa es la manera como los verdaderos amigos y familiares pueden aprender mejor el uno del otro.
  • después de compartir el uno con el otro sus convicciones más profundas, también es de utilidad y bueno respetar el libre albedrío que los demás tienen para elegir y mantenerse firmes en sus propias decisiones.
  • es importante mantener abierta la puerta de la comunicación para conversaciones futuras sobre el tema.

El autor dice que gran parte del éxito que ha tenido en sus conversaciones con quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, posiblemente se debe al hecho de que la mayoría de personas con las que interactúa lo han buscado a él. Entre las personas a las que él se ha acercado para conversar sobre el tema, en lugar de que haya sido a la inversa, a menudo ha encontrado amables oyentes, pero poco cambio, a menos que la persona de verdad quiera cambiar.

Si bien el autor entiende que otros pueden tomar enfoques diferentes a sus conversaciones sobre este tema, también afirma que algunos quizás no tengan ningún enfoque en absoluto. Él anima a las personas a considerar al menos algún método para interactuar con sus amigos y familiares con respecto a este tema. 

El autor también relata la historia de tres jóvenes que no pidieron su ayuda, pero cuyos padres y pastor sí lo hicieron, y cómo Dios usó lo que él compartió para traer nueva dirección a sus vidas. 

Él añade que, aunque hay quienes pueden decir que es perjudicial obligar a las personas a cambiar, es igualmente perjudicial impedir que obtengan ayuda para alcanzar sus propias metas en la vida, así como muchos gays también han luchado y ganado el derecho a seguir y alcanzar sus propias metas. 

El autor concluye con las palabras de un amigo, que resumen cómo podemos respetar el libre albedrío de cada persona: “No sacrifiques a los demás en el altar de tus creencias”.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee 1 Corintios 13:2. ¿De qué manera este pasaje se aplica a nuestras interacciones con las personas que quieren seguir sin restricción sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo? ¿Cómo podemos expresar nuestro amor, incluso cuando no estamos de acuerdo con algo que hace una persona?

Lee Josué 24:15. ¿Qué dice Josué en este pasaje respecto a darles a los demás la libertad de ejercer su propio libre albedrío? ¿Qué dice Josué respecto a ejercer su propio libre albedrío, sin importar lo que los demás puedan decir? ¿Cómo podemos aplicar este principio a las conversaciones con nuestros seres queridos y con quienes podemos discrepar respecto a las decisiones que tomamos en nuestras vidas?

Aunque el autor bromeaba respecto a la cantidad de psicólogos que se necesitan para cambiar una bombilla, ¿Qué verdad puede haber en el remate del chiste: “Es necesario que la bombilla de verdad quiera cambiar”? Si las personas no quieren hacer cambios en sus vidas, o no creen que esos cambios sean posibles, ¿qué probabilidades hay de que de verdad cambien? ¿Cómo las historias en este libro pueden ayudar a alguien a desear ese tipo de cambio o a creer que sí es posible cambiar?

¿Alguna vez te has sentido impulsado por Dios a hacer algo? Y, en comparación, ¿alguna vez te has sentido obligado por Dios a hacer algo, pero no necesariamente impulsado? ¿Encontraste alguna diferencia en los resultados? 

¿Por qué Dios a veces quiere que compartamos una verdad con otra persona, aunque no veamos ningún resultado al hacerlo? 

¿Qué le preguntó D.L. Moody a una mujer que le dijo que no le gustaba su método de alcanzar a otros? Después de escuchar su respuesta, ¿por qué dijo él que prefería su propio método? ¿Y cómo es en tu caso? ¿Qué método has encontrado efectivo para amar a los gays? 

Habiendo leído hasta este punto del libro, ¿qué ideas prácticas has encontrado respecto a amar mejor a los gays? 

Habiendo leído hasta este punto del libro, ¿qué piensas respecto a la idea de los legisladores de impedir que las personas que no quieren seguir sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo obtengan ayuda para alcanzar sus metas? ¿Qué piensas en cuanto a la idea de que los adolescentes en particular en muchos estados ahora no puedan recibir ayuda en esta área? 

Aunque quizás queramos que otros experimenten lo que nosotros hemos disfrutado en nuestra vida, y aunque puede ser útil y bueno compartir con otros nuestras experiencias, ¿por qué es importante dejar que los demás ejerzan su propio libre albedrío con respecto a lo que hemos compartido? ¿Qué beneficios podría traer el siguiente consejo: “No sacrifiques a otros en el altar de tus creencias”?

Capítulo 11: La importancia de los cinturones de seguridad

Donde comparto acerca de la importancia de usar nuestros cinturones de seguridad, en especial ahora que el péndulo sobre este tema está moviéndose tan rápido.

Hace unos meses, una buena amiga mía me estaba animando a orar por la persona que Dios podía traer a mi vida como posible esposa para la siguiente etapa de mi vida. 

Sin embargo, observé que cuando lo mencionaba, se refería a mi futura esposa como “tu persona”. “Ora por tu persona”, o “anhelo conocer a tu persona” o “quizás tu persona es alguien que ya conoces”. 

No pensé mucho en su elección de palabras hasta que leí un artículo de una mujer que estaba en una relación con otra persona del mismo sexo y que describió a su compañera como “mi persona”. 

Así que la siguiente vez que hablé con mi amiga, le dije: “He notado que siempre que te refieres a mi posible futura esposa, nunca usas la palabra ‘ella’, sino que usas ‘tu persona’. Solo quiero saber si lo haces de manera intencional, y si es así, ¿es porque piensas que ‘mi persona’ podría ser una mujer o un hombre?”

Mi amiga hizo una pausa por un momento y pensó seriamente en mi pregunta, lo cual también hizo que me detuviera y tratara de llenar los espacios en blanco por mí mismo: “Después de todo lo que conoce de mí, ¿ella de verdad piensa que Dios ahora querría que me case con un hombre en lugar de hacerlo con una mujer?”

En lugar de responder de inmediato, dijo que le gustaría orar al respecto por unos días y luego volver a darme su respuesta.

Pocos días después lo hizo. Me envió una nota diciendo, entre otras cosas sinceras y amables: “Creo que puedes tener la relación que desees a la profundidad que quieras con cualquier hombre o mujer con quien compartas una atracción mutua. Estoy contigo. Te apoyo, cualquiera sea tu elección”.

Aunque ella era sincera con sus palabras, y sabía que lo que estaba diciendo podía sorprenderme, lo que no supo fue lo devastadoras que fueron sus palabras después de leerlas, me desanimaron por completo y me hirieron. 

Es como si estuviera negado todo lo que Dios había hablado a mi vida en cuanto a este tema; así como las miles de horas que había pasado orando al respecto; o los cientos de conversaciones que he tenido con personas que han buscado mi ayuda para liberarse de las atracciones hacia el mismo sexo; o la gran cantidad de charlas que he dado y artículos que he escrito y libros que he publicado, cada uno exigiendo un gran costo para mí mismo y mi familia; es como si ella estuviera negando mi matrimonio con Lana y el nacimiento de mis seis hijos; y negara la conversación más significante y transformadora que he tenido con Dios en toda mi vida, la conversación que me hizo poner mi fe en Cristo y confiar en Él plenamente para todo en mi vida, incluyendo mi sexualidad. 

Lo que más me afectó fue que si ella no creía que Dios me había estado hablando con tanta claridad y de manera tan consistente en cuanto a este tema durante más de treinta años, entonces ¿quién podría  creerme? 

Ya tenía otros nueve amigos cristianos que habían cambiado sus posiciones sobre la homosexualidad durante los últimos años. Ellos, como muchos otros en nuestro país, habían “evolucionado” en su manera de pensar, creyendo que la homosexualidad ahora estaba bien y era bueno, algo que podía celebrarse.

Cada vez que un amigo me ha dicho que ahora acepta la homosexualidad, me he sentido más desanimado, un poco más aislado, un poco más solo. 

Sé que la intención de mis amigos no es hacer eso, pero no saben que para alguien como yo, que ha luchado con este difícil problema por muchos años, no le es fácil escuchar lo que dicen, es como si las personas más cercanas a ti insinuaran que ya no creen en lo que has estado diciendo todo el tiempo, ya no creen en que Dios te ha estado hablando, y ya no creen en todo aquello por lo que has luchado, enfrentado y a lo que has renunciado con el fin de ayudarte a ti mismo y a otros a vivir sus vidas un poco mejor, con un poco más de libertad. Es absolutamente descorazonador. 

La sugerencia de mi amiga, diciendo que yo podía casarme con quien quisiera casarme, sin importar su género, fue lo que terminó desanimándome más. Fue una afirmación que me derribó al piso. Sentí como si yo fuera esa pelota de playa desinflada de que describí antes, y que me habían hundido al fondo del océano, sin que me quedara nada de aire adentro. 

Para ser honesto, no sabía si algún día podría volver a escribir una palabra o dar otra charla sobre este tema. Si mi amiga más cercana ya no creía en lo que yo decía, ¿cómo podría alguien creerme? 

VOLVIENDO A PONERME DE PIE

Pero lo que me ayudó a volver a ponerme de pie, a abrir mi computadora y tratar de dar una explicación, una vez más, fue que sabía que mis amigos que estaban cambiando de posición sobre este tema, no lo hacían porque no me creían a mí, al menos no directamente, sino porque ahora estaban tratando de identificar por sí mismos la mejor manera de amar a quienes los rodeaban y que experimentaban atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

También sabía que muchas personas a quienes había servido personalmente me habían creído, y seguían creyendo en mí, y sus vidas eran un reflejo de la verdad que he estado exponiendo todos estos años. 

Conozco a muchas personas cuyas vidas han sido totalmente transformadas por las palabras que he compartido sobre mi propia transformación. He visto a Dios obrar de manera tan poderosa en mi vida y en las vidas de otras personas, que que seguirá haciendo lo mismo en más vidas y de maneras aún más poderosas. 

También sé que de mí no depende cambiar los corazones, las vidas o las creencias que los demás tengan en cuanto a este tema, sino que todo esto depende de Dios mismo, sólo Él puede hacer algo así. 

Como dijo el Apóstol Pablo: “Y mi mensaje y mi predicación fueron muy sencillos. En lugar de usar discursos ingeniosos y persuasivos, confié solamente en el poder del Espíritu Santo. Lo hice así para que ustedes no confiaran en la sabiduría humana sino en el poder de Dios” (1 Corintios 2:4-5). 

Incluso mi fe no provino de las palabras de Pablo solas, sino de una demostración del poder del Espíritu cuando Dios le dio vida a estas palabras para mí.

Literalmente me tendí una y otra vez en el piso por varios días seguidos, y al hacerlo las palabras que siempre venían a mi mente eran las mismas que el ciego dijo después de haber sido sanado: “Una cosa sé; que habiendo yo sido ciego, ahora veo” (Juan 9:25b).

Sabía que mi amiga no quería herirme ni aplastarme o desanimarme. Sabía, y lo apreciaba mucho, que ella estaba tratando de expresar lo mucho que me amaba, lo mucho que estaba dispuesta a defenderme, y a apoyarme sin importar cuál fuera mi elección.

OTRO CLAVADO PROFUNDO

Así que, después de recuperarme del impacto inicial de sus palabras, decidí volver a Dios una vez más y preguntarle si había algo más que quería decirme en cuanto a este tema, algo que Él quería que yo escuchara. 

No soy tan engreído como para pensar que he sondeado toda la profundidad de lo que Dios tiene para decir en cuanto a este tema, o cualquier otro tema, como para no volver a él una y otra vez en busca de más. Aunque por muchos años he hablado con Dios muchas veces sobre esto, aproveché esta oportunidad para volver a mirar todo lo que Dios me había dicho en el pasado y cualquier cosa adicional que pudiera decirme ahora.

Este libro que estás leyendo ahora, es el resultado de esa “revisión” con Dios. 

La verdad es que el paisaje ha cambiado significativamente en este tema durante los últimos años, no solo aquí en los Estados Unidos, sino también en todo el mundo. El paisaje también ha cambiado en mi mundo personal ahora que he vuelto a estar soltero y me pregunto qué me deparará el futuro con respecto a otra posible relación duradera.

Decidí usar como trampolín las palabras de mi amiga a fin de aclarar mis pensamientos en cuanto a este asunto en donde fuera posible y ajustar lo que fuera necesario. 

Este ejercicio ha resultado de mucho valor para mí, y por eso agradezco mucho las palabras de mi amiga, aunque fue difícil escucharlas. Personalmente he compartido con ella lo que pienso, así como lo estoy compartiendo contigo. Ella no quería hacerme daño, y yo lo sabía. Sólo quería apoyarme sin importar lo que yo hiciera.

Hasta este punto ya he compartido contigo muchas de las conclusiones a las que he llegado en cuanto a este tema. Y quisiera compartir algunas de las aclaraciones y ajustes que aprendí en esta última inmersión que hice para analizar lo que considero la voluntad de Dios al respecto, y espero que también te sean útiles. 

UN NUEVO PAISAJE

La verdad para mí es que ya no existen algunas de las barreras que en otro momento me contuvieron de buscar una relación homosexual a largo plazo. 

Si quisiera, ahora podría casarme legalmente con un hombre. Ahora podría tener una relación abierta con otro hombre, y tener gran aceptación si así lo quisiera, e incluso sería considerado un héroe. Ahora podría adoptar hijos legalmente o ser el padre de mis propios hijos por medio de una madre sustituta, y criarlos con un padre gay. Ahora podría unirme a cualquier número de iglesias que me darían la bienvenida y me aceptaría como abiertamente gay. Ahora podría encontrar un sinnúmero de libros que ciernen sombras de duda sobre las Escrituras, las cuales en realidad parecen ser muy claras.

Según estas nuevas realidades del mundo, me pregunté ¿qué elegiría, si de verdad pudiera escoger sin ningún obstáculo, sin ninguna restricción, aquello que de verdad deseara en lo profundo de mi ser? ¿Si de verdad fuera una opción para mí, de verdad desearía tener una relación gay permanente? ¿O preferiría tener una relación heterosexual permanente, dados mis pensamientos y sentimientos más profundos, y los deseos de mi corazón?

También decidí darme un clavado profundo en esas aguas, así pareciera muy arriesgado, y aquí está lo que encontré.

Aunque pude ver que casarme con un hombre o una mujer podría satisfacer ciertos apetitos de mi corazón, no encontraría satisfacción para los mismos apetitos. Porque, a pesar de todo lo que se dice sobre la igualdad de matrimonio, casarme con un hombre no sería lo mismo que casarme con una mujer, porque cada opción pone algo muy diferente sobre la mesa. 

Si casarme con un hombre fuera igual que casarme con una mujer, las personas no tendrían preferencias de matrimonio según un género u otro. Son las mismas diferencias entre hombres y mujeres las que hacen que las personas quieran casarse con alguien del mismo sexo y no con alguien del sexo opuesto. La verdadera igualdad de matrimonio no haría diferencias entre hombres y mujeres. 

Pero algunas de las personas que más han luchado por la igualdad de matrimonio son aquellas que ignoran esas diferencias. Quieren casarse con la persona de su elección, precisamente porque esa persona es un hombre o una mujer. 

Cuando alguien quiere cambiar su género a otro, no es porque sienta que ambos géneros son lo mismo, sino porque siente que, de hecho, ambos géneros son diferentes, y prefiere identificarse con un género más que con otro. 

Algunos hombres quieren la libertad de vestirse como mujeres, negando al mismo tiempo que existen diferencias entre ambos géneros. Pero si no hubiese diferencias, entonces su manera de vestir no importaría. Así mismo, algunas mujeres quieren la libertad de comportarse como hombres, vivir como hombres, y ser tratadas como hombres, negando que haya verdaderas diferencias entre hombres y mujeres. 

Los hombres y las mujeres no son lo mismo, y son sus diferencias las que hacen que un género sea más atractivo que otro para algunas personas.

EL SEXO NATURAL

Para mí, aunque disfruté de relaciones románticas y sexuales con hombres en el pasado, y podría imaginar disfrutar de ese tipo de relaciones en el futuro, la biología inherente de las partes del cuerpo involucradas me hace entender que hay algo completamente “antinatural” en ese tipo de relación. 

Con esto estoy diciendo que así no tomara en cuenta lo que Dios dice sobre el sexo en la Biblia, y sólo tomara en cuenta lo que puedo ver con mis ojos en la naturaleza que me rodea, puedo ver que las partes sexuales en un acto homosexual no coinciden muy bien. 

En una relación del mismo sexo nunca se podría cumplir uno de los principales propósitos para los que esas partes parecen haber sido diseñadas. 

Aunque hay otras formas de estimular esas partes del cuerpo, las cuales pueden producir genuino placer, la verdad es que el sexo entre dos hombres o entre dos mujeres siempre será, en el mejor de los casos una simulación del sexo entre un hombre y una mujer. En el peor de los casos, involucrarse en ese tipo de actividad podría causar daños reales. 

Por ejemplo, y vuelvo a decirlo, no quiero ser gráfico, sólo usar una perspectiva científica, las paredes del revestimiento de una vagina humana son más gruesas y más elásticas que las paredes del revestimiento de un ano humano, por lo cual éste último se rompe mucho más fácil durante un acto sexual. Así mismo, el órgano sexual de una mujer produce su propia lubricación cuando se lo estimula, como también sucede con el del hombre, lo cual significa que esas partes no solo encajan, sino que lo hacen con más facilidad, mientras que el canal anal no produce esa lubricación, ni siquiera con estimulación sexual. 

Podría describir la fecundidad que se puede dar con el acto heterosexual cuando un espermatozoide y un óvulo se unen, comparado con la infecundidad que hay entre el acto sexual de dos hombres cuando el semen es liberado dentro de un orificio que parece estar mucho más claramente diseñado para excretar los desperdicios. También puedo describir mucho más, pero no lo haré. 

Estos son sólo unos pocos de los contrastes entre los dos tipos de interacción sexual que puedo observar en la naturaleza y que me sirven de indicador suficiente para entender que algo está mal en el sexo entre personas del mismo género, que no es bueno, que algo no es correcto. 

Esto ni siquiera toma en cuenta las diferencias entre el sexo de lesbianas o el sexo oral, o las caricias mutuas de los órganos sexuales en muchas otras maneras. 

Si bien, no hay duda que estos actos pueden ser placenteros y crear un fuerte grado de intimidad entre dos personas, en lo que respecta a lo natural, es decir, según como vemos la naturaleza, y al menos según el propósito primordial que cada uno de esos órganos tiene, puedo decir que el acto sexual entre dos personas del mismo sexo, en el mejor de los casos, es una emulación de sexo heterosexual, y en el peor de los casos, en realidad puede ser dañina o destructiva. 

Cuando el Apóstol Pablo dice en Romanos 1 que el sexo homosexual es “contra lo natural”, no creo que use esa palabra de manera despectiva. No está diciendo que el sexo homosexual sea “asqueroso” o “repulsivo”. Lo que está diciendo, es sencillamente que va contra lo que el sexo humano se nos presenta en la naturaleza, sin importar si atribuimos el diseño del sexo a la naturaleza o a Dios.

SEXO SOBRESALIENTE

Hay quienes pueden decir que algunos animales a veces tienen comportamientos homosexuales, y que otros, como las lombrices, han sido creados con partes de macho y de hembra. Pero no me convence adoptar aspectos de lo que vemos en el reino animal para nuestros propios hábitos sexuales. 

Por ejemplo, como suele decir uno de mis amigos, la mantis religiosa hembra, le quita la cabeza al macho inmediatamente después del apareamiento, y luego se come el resto del cuerpo, así puede tener suficiente alimento para la nueva vida que en poco tiempo va a crecer en su cuerpo. (Aunque algunas mujeres pueden celebrar este tipo de comportamiento, ¡personalmente no creo que aporte mucho a la construcción de una relación duradera!)

El sexo entre un hombre y una mujer es muy especial y único. No quiero decir que solo sea especial para mí. Sino que, de todas las criaturas del planeta, Dios creó a los seres humanos para que hicieran el amor de una manera que ningún otro ser puede hacerlo: cara a cara. 

¡Ninguna otra criatura en el planeta tiene esta habilidad! Ninguna. ¡Esto es asombroso para mí! 

Seguro, podemos tratar de emular los hábitos del apareamiento de otras criaturas, ¡e incluso podemos tener placer al hacerlo! Pero cuando miro lo que Dios ha puesto a nuestra disposición como seres humanos, y las diferencias entre el sexo heterosexual y el homosexual, entonces trato de imaginarme una relación de por vida con alguien del mismo sexo, y no puedo evitar sentir que me estoy perdiendo de algo muy especial y único, que Dios ha hecho posible sólo para los seres humanos. 

En mi caso, yo quiero lo mejor: el abrazo completo, cara a cara. (Y al considerar la vida sexual de la mantis religiosa, ¡también quisiera estar con vida al día siguiente después de haber hecho el amor!).

CONSULTANDO EL MANUAL

Además de esta perspectiva natural, biológica y científica sobre el sexo, también creo que Dios es quien ha creado nuestros cuerpos y, junto con ellos, nos ha dado el “manual del propietario” en la Biblia. Dios nos ha dado estas palabras para ayudarnos a proteger y preservar nuestros cuerpos para la vida más plena posible. Como el creador del sexo, Él es la primera y principal autoridad en decirnos por qué creó el sexo y cómo hacer el mejor uso del mismo. 

Comentando sobre la poderosa naturaleza del sexo, el evangelista Billy Graham dice: “El sexo es lo más maravilloso que hay sobre esta tierra, siempre que Dios haga parte del mismo. Cuando el Diablo se inmiscuye, es lo más terrible sobre la tierra”. 

¡No podía estar más de acuerdo! 

Como ya lo mencioné antes, al mirar los pasajes de la Biblia que hablan especificamente sobre actividad sexual con personas del mismo sexo, no puedo imaginar otra manera en que Dios habría podido expresar Sus advertencias sobre este asunto, para que fueran más claras o firmes de como han sido expresadas. 

Esto no se debe a que Dios odie a quienes tienen atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, y tampoco es porque los actos sexuales entre personas del mismo sexo sean tan repulsivos para Dios que Él no pueda imaginar por qué alguien querría hacerlo, sino porque él sabe lo poderosas que pueden ser las atracciones sexuales. ¡Él creó el sexo! Él sabe muy bien por qué alguien querría realizar actos sexuales que pueden ser perjudiciales para sí mismo o para otros. 

Dios no nos advierte sobre cosas que en Su opinión nadie nunca querría hacer. Él nos advierte de cosas que Él sabe que podemos hacer, porque Él sabe lo poderosos que pueden ser esos sentimientos, emociones y atracciones. Dios nos advierte porque quiere que disfrutemos esos regalos de la mejor manera más posible, la que da vida. 

El no atender a las advertencias de Dios sería como si mis hijos no atendieran a las mías cuando les digo que no corran hacia la calle porque podría morir si lo hacen, y que les dijera lo mismo muchas veces más y de muchas formas. Imagina mi frustración si me llegara a enterar que ellos siguen corriendo hacia la calle, sugiriendo que mis instrucciones les parecen poco claras, o que en realidad yo no hablo en serio al expresarlas.

En la Biblia hay suficientes palabras registradas con mucha claridad y que me permiten creer que Dios de verdad no quiere que me involucre en actividades sexuales con alguien de mi mismo género. Y, de nuevo, en las palabras que mi pastor me dijo para ayudarme un día que tenía gran necesidad de escuchar lo que Dios tenía para decir sobre este tema: “Si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien”.

MOTIVACIÓN INTERNA

Si nada me detuviera, (iglesia, familia, ministerio, algún argumento, las Escrituras, o las revelaciones personales de Dios), podría verme disfrutando de una relación romántica y sexual con un hombre o una mujer. De verdad podría hacerlo. Y como en el pasado he disfrutado de ambos tipos de relaciones, puedo imaginarme disfrutando cualquier tipo de relación en el futuro, aunque, como ya lo he dicho antes, cada tipo de relación satisfaría necesidades diferentes en mi vida por razones diferentes. 

Pero, al mirar más a fondo en mi ser, he encontrado esto: aunque en el corto plazo podría imaginarme disfrutando de una relación con alguien del mismo sexo, lo haría bajo mi propio riesgo. 

Lo que más quiero, y lo que que me dará la vida más abundante posible, es una relación comprometida de largo plazo con alguien del sexo opuesto, alguien que sea un verdadero complemento a la fuerte masculinidad que siento en todo mi ser. 

No siento esto porque la Biblia, la sociedad, mi familia o mis amigos me lo digan. Lo siento porque creo que Dios lo ha escrito en mi corazón. Lo ha codificado en mi ADN, en cada célula de mi ser. Soy un hombre creado por Dios para tener intimidad con una mujer. 

Conocer esta verdad, desde el fondo de mi ser, ¡es increíblemente liberador! 

La razón definitiva por la que querría buscar una relación con el sexo opuesto en el futuro no se debe a que un factor externo me dice que lo haga. Sino porque en mi corazón está escrito hacerlo. 

Como dice la Biblia: “Aun los gentiles, quienes no cuentan con la ley escrita de Dios, muestran que conocen esa ley cuando, por instinto, la obedecen, aunque nunca la hayan oído. Ellos demuestran que tienen la ley de Dios escrita en el corazón, porque su propia conciencia y sus propios pensamientos o los acusan o bien les indican que están haciendo lo correcto” (Romanos 2:14-15, NTV).

OBSTÁCULOS EXTERNOS

Me encanta tener motivaciones internas en lugar de externas, y sí, agradezco mucho los obstáculos externos. ¿Por qué? Porque, aunque mi conciencia me puede indicar lo correcto y lo malo, ella no es infalible. 

Como escribe un pastor: “El problema con la conciencia es que, de todas las fuentes de verdad, ésta es la menos confiable porque la Biblia nos enseña que nuestra conciencia se puede debilitar. Se puede deformar. Se puede endurecer… De hecho, se puede matar… El hecho de que mi conciencia me permita hacer algo, eso no quiere decir que sea correcto. Todo ser humano en este mundo ha sido programado para conocer lo bueno y lo malo. El truco está en llenar nuestras mentes y corazones con la verdad de Dios para que ‘hagamos eco de Su sí y Su no’”.

Esta es la razón por la cual los obstáculos externos son tan útiles. Y es por eso que siento tanta gratitud por la evidencia de heterosexualismo que encuentro en la naturaleza y por las advertencias de Dios registradas en la Biblia. Por tal razón agradezco a mi familia, mis amigos y mi iglesia por su sinceridad en querer mantenerme dentro del mejor camino que Dios tiene para mi vida.

Hace poco vi un aviso en la autopista que decía: “¿No llevas cinturón de seguridad? ¿Qué te está deteniendo?” Me pareció una perfecta analogía para esta discusión sobre los encuentros sexuales, así como para toda clase de experiencias en las que quizás deseemos involucrarnos. 

Si nada me detuviera, hay muchas cosas que disfrutaría hacer, al menos por una vez en la vida, como saltar de un acantilado de 100 pies, o comer toda una bandeja llena de brownies, o ver si mi auto de verdad puede alcanzar las 160 millas por hora, como dice en el velocímetro. Y debo admitir que he intentado hacer algunas de estas cosas, al menos en cierto grado, ¡conociendo muy bien el riesgo de que las cosas podrían terminar muy mal para mí!

Pero vivir la vida sin ninguna restricción es tan loco como subir a una montaña rusa sin ponerse el arnés de seguridad que ha sido específicamente diseñado para eso. El hecho de que podamos hacer algo, no quiere decir que deberíamos hacerlo. 

Después de la desagradable aventura de Bill Clinton con una de sus practicantes en la Casa Blanca, un periodista le preguntó por qué lo había hecho. Bill respondió: “Creo que hice algo por la peor razón posible: sólo porque podía hacerlo. Creo que esa es la razón moralmente más débil que alguien podría tener para hacer algo, cuando lo hace sólo porque puedes”. 

El libre albedrío sólo es libre si sigues con vida para ejercerlo. Sí, Dios nos ha dado libre albedrío, pero Él espera que elijamos Su voluntad porque Él sabe que Su voluntad siempre es lo mejor para nosotros. 

Aunque tengo mucha gratitud con Dios por haberme dado el libre albedrío, también estoy muy agradecido porque me ha dado la sabiduría y la habilidad para contenerme de hacer absolutamente todo lo que podría desear hacer, porque hay muchas cosas que desearía hacer si no tuviera restricciones. Pero sé que no me iría bien si hiciera esas cosas, así como sé que no les iría bien a quienes me rodean o por los propósitos para los que Dios me creó.

¿Por qué te digo todos estos deseos secretos que he encontrado en el fondo de mi corazón? Porque quiero que sepas que, por muchos, muchos años, he considerado muy bien estas cosas. 

Y siempre que he salido a la superficie después de esos profundos clavados, siempre, he salido con un mayor entendimiento de por qué Dios ha dicho lo que ha dicho sobre este tema, y por qué me alegra mucho haberlo escuchado hace tantos años.

TERRITORIO NUEVO

Habiendo dicho todo esto, también quiero decir que, estando en mi última profundización hacia el fondo de mi ser con respecto a mis pensamientos, sentimientos y deseos, descubrí que sigue habiendo mucho territorio que puedo explorar en mis amistades con hombres, territorio que no es sexual ni romántico, pero que me he abstenido de recorrer en el pasado por miedo a ser considerado como “gay”. 

Aunque el panorama en este tema ha cambiado, ese cambio no necesariamente es para mal. En cierta medida, ese cambio ha mejorado mucho las cosas, incluso para mí. 

Me parece importante aclarar, en especial para los lectores jóvenes de este libro, por qué este cambio de panorama no se ha dado tan rápido como puedes pensar que sucedió en los corazones y mentes de muchos de mi generación y generaciones pasadas. 

El temor a que alguien piense que puedes ser gay se basa en la realidad de que la homosexualidad, cuando yo era niño, en realidad era ilegal. 

Una persona podría ser multada, enviada a la cárcel, perder su empleo, ser expulsada del ejército, de su apartamento, ser obligada a recibir terapias o quedar marcada de por vida ante los ojos de la sociedad, sin mencionar a todos los que podrían llegar a considerar a esa persona como su futuro cónyuge.

Por esas y otras razones (como el deseo de no querer recibir una golpiza después de clase de gimnasia), yo y muchos otros como yo, evitábamos hablar abiertamente sobre nuestras atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. 

A todo costo, evitábamos cualquier apariencia que indicara que sentíamos atracción hacia el mismo sexo, incluso alejándonos de los que decían que sentían esas atracciones. 

Sin embargo, en los últimos años he entendido que muchos de esos temores que tuve en mi juventud ya no son válidos ni útiles. Por esta razón Dios me ha estado mostrando de qué maneras he seguido conteniéndome en algunos de mis propios pensamientos y amistades, por temores que he tenido respecto a cómo me veo, no por algo que Dios haya dicho respecto a mis actividades. 

Por ejemplo, cuando hace poco le pedí a una de mis hijas que pintara la portada para uno de mis libros, en el fondo ella pintó una hermosa sombra de color púrpura. Sin embargo, para mí, y porque el libro era tan revelador a nivel personal sobre mi propia vida y caminar de fe, su elección de colores era equivalente a gritar a todo pulmón: “¡Mírame! ¡Soy gay!” 

Por supuesto, Dios no dice nada en Su Palabra que restrinja el uso de cualquier color, mucho menos del color púrpura. De hecho, el púrpura era tan costoso crearlo en la antigüedad, que a menudo era el color preferido de la realeza. 

Al pensar más racionalmente sobre la elección de colores que hizo mi hija, en lugar de hacerlo con las emociones, entendí que su propuesta de portada se veía hermosa tal como ella la había hecho. Nada de eso había pasado por la cabeza de mi hija, y entendí que probablemente en estos días no importaría si incluso alguien piensa que soy gay (y algunas personas, incluso entre mis amigos, podrían hacer una fiesta por mí si pensaran que lo soy). 

El hecho de haber titubeado después de ver la portada por primera vez, y haberla aceptado como hermosa después de todo, me hizo ver con claridad el hecho de que para mí ahora está bien adoptar algunas de esas cosas que en otro momento había tenido miedo de hacer. Puedo aceptarlas porque en ellas no hay nada inherentemente ilícito o impío.

En otro ejemplo, hace un tiempo me tomé una selfie con una pareja para quienes dirigí su boda. 

Al sostener la cámara, el novio inclinó su cabeza hacia mí, pero la novia no lo hizo, y la foto resultante mostraba a dos hombres bien vestidos recostados el uno sobre el otro, mientras la novia estaba bien erguida y alejada hacia un lado. 

Les pedí que tomáramos la foto de nuevo, diciendo que la luz no había quedado bien, lo cual era verdad, pero esa no fue la única razón por la que quise tomar la foto de nuevo. Quise hacerlo porque, para mí, parecía que el novio y yo éramos la pareja, y no él y su novia. 

Cuando volví a ver la primera foto que habíamos tomado ¡estaba perfectamente bien! Nos veíamos como buenos amigos pasando un buen tiempo en una boda. 

Nadie, salvo yo, se habría fijado en la manera como estábamos parados, ¡y nadie tampoco habría pensado que él y yo éramos pareja! Pero en mi hipersensibilidad a parecer gay, de cualquier manera, estuve a punto de eliminar una foto que era muy normal.

NUEVOS EJEMPLOS

Los ejemplos siguen y siguen. Desde la muerte de mi esposa, he tenido un nuevo interés en algunas de las actividades que me gustaba hacer en la juventud, como el baile, la pintura, escribir música y tocar el piano. Muchas de esas actividades las hice a un lado cuando dejé la homosexualidad porque me parecían actividades de gays. 

Durante mi niñez, en mi círculo de amigos eran las mujeres las que dominaban estas artes. Pero con el paso del tiempo, he descubierto que un gran número de hombres, tanto en tiempos bíblicos como en la actualidad, disfrutan y sobresalen haciendo cosas como estas todo el tiempo. 

El Rey David, por ejemplo, es conocido por matar a miles en batalla, pero tocaba el arpa y escribió la mayoría de las tonadas del libro de los Salmos. Pero dudo que alguien lo haya enfrentado en el campo de batalla y le haya pedido que sacara primero su Identificación de Hombre. Incluso él podría hacer temblar a Chuck Norris. 

Por años me ha gustado mucho tocar el piano, y también la flauta, así como varios otros instrumentos, pero nunca me sentía “varonil” al hacerlo. Pero cuando leí en la Biblia sobre un hombre llamado Jubal, en Génesis capítulo 4, vi que él fue llamado “el padre de todos los que tocan la flauta y el arpa” (de Génesis 4:21). 

Ahí está un hombre que no solo tocaba la flauta y el arpa, sino que fue llamado el “padre” de todos los demás que lo hicieron después de él. ¡Qué honor! ¡Qué distinción! Pero yo me había sentido avergonzado todos esos años por algunos de los talentos que Dios había puesto en mí. 

El Rey David danzó delante del Señor (lee 2 Samuel 6:14), y un hombre llamado Bezalel fue muy hábil haciendo diseños artísticos y todo tipo de artes manuales (lee Éxodo 31:1-5). 

La lista de modelos varoniles sigue, según lo registrado en y fuera de la Biblia. Pero por años no quise disfrutar de muchas de esas cosas por miedo a ser catalogado como gay. 

RECUPERANDO TALENTOS

Sin embargo, ahora estoy disfrutando mucho de tocar el piano, no solo para mí mismo sino también en público. He estado componiendo música e incluso escribiendo un musical acerca de la vida del verdadero San Nicolás que vivió entre los siglos 3º y 4º D.C. 

He estado pintando por diversión y tomando clases de baile solo porque me hacen reír.

Ninguna de estas cosas es inherentemente de homosexuales. ¡Ninguna de estas actividades me hacen querer tener sexo con un hombre! ¡Ninguna de estas cosas son restringidas por Dios! 

Pero ahora estoy comenzando a disfrutarlas a mayor plenitud porque mi temor de ser catalogado como gay finalmente se está desvaneciendo, al menos en parte, ante la creciente aceptación de la homosexualidad entre la sociedad. Ser considerado gay ya no conlleva el mismo tipo de riesgo que tenía hace 30 años. 

Dios me ha estado mostrando que ahora puedo comenzar a derribar algunos de los muros de protección que he puesto alrededor de mi vida, muros que ya no son necesarios.

Como dije en los primeros capítulos, aunque algunas personas pueden sentirse desanimadas por los cambios sociales con respecto a este tema, hay razones para sentirse muy agradecido por ese cambio, puesto que finalmente está permitiendo que personas (incluido yo) exploren y recapturen algunos de los talentos que Dios les ha dado y que han evitado por mucho, mucho tiempo, talentos que desde un principio nunca debieron haber evadido.

Para concluir este capítulo, permíteme reiterar que, así como es conveniente usar cinturones de seguridad al conducir, es igual de conveniente evitar actividades que sean románticas o sexuales a fin de proteger la preciosa intimidad que Dios tiene en mente para nosotros. 

Pero también es igual de conveniente deshacernos de aquellas cosas que nos impedirían explorar todo el territorio que tenemos a nuestra disposición, territorio en el que podemos disfrutar nuestras amistades más plenamente y usar los dones, talentos y habilidades que Dios nos ha dado. 

Aunque este cambiante paisaje ha producido nuevas libertades para muchos, también ha producido nuevos dilemas, en especial para los cristianos, los cuales abordaré en el siguiente capítulo.

Capítulo 12: La importancia de las lágrimas

Donde comparto cómo las lágrimas pueden ser una de tus mejores expresiones de amor genuino, y cómo pueden ayudarte a seguir amando a otros mientras te mantienes firme en lo que crees.

El paisaje cambiante respecto a la homosexualidad ha creado la necesidad de una respuesta genuina de parte de los cristianos. Espero que este libro sea parte de esa respuesta. 

Creo que el dilema principal que los cristianos están enfrentando está mejor ilustrado en las preguntas en torno al tema del matrimonio gay. Es ahí donde la teoría se pone en práctica. 

He observado que cuando alguien recibe una invitación a una boda homosexual, esto de repente trae a la superficie todo lo que esa persona cree, o piensa que cree respecto a la homosexualidad. La pareja que envía la invitación está pidiendo una respuesta, la cual, a su vez, tiene el potencial de consolidar o romper una amistad para los próximos años. Aunque no tiene que ser así, a menudo parece ser así para todos los involucrados.

El dilema se magnifica exponencialmente cuando esa invitación viene de alguien muy cercano y querido, como un hijo o una hija, un hermano o una hermana, o un amigo cercano o compañero de trabajo. 

Nuestra reacción como cristianos en esos momentos importa mucho. Si bien este capítulo se concentra en el tema de cómo puedes responder a alguien que te invita a una boda gay, por favor ten presente que uso esto solo como ejemplo para ayudarte a pensar cómo puedes amar a Dios y a los homosexuales más profundamente, y cómo puedes expresar tu amor de tal forma que tus seres queridos puedan recibirlo. 

Espero que esta conversación no solo sea aplicable a un evento de un día, sino que también te dé una ayuda real en las constantes interacciones y expresiones de amor hacia amigos y familiares homosexuales.

Permíteme comenzar con esta verdad que nunca cambia, que es la meta suprema de cualquier respuesta que podamos dar, y es el amor. Como dice la Biblia: “… y hagan todo con amor” (1 Corintios 16:14 NTV).

También quiero añadir otra importante verdad. Siempre que alguien nos pide hacer algo, es importante tener presente que el amor no siempre dice “sí”, y tampoco dice siempre “no”. El amor tiene en cuenta a las personas involucradas y las relaciones únicas que hay entre esas personas. 

Tengo seis hijos, y no siempre les respondo de la misma manera a cada uno de ellos, incluso si me hacen la misma pregunta. ¿Por qué? Porque todos tienen su propia personalidad, y tengo una relación única con cada uno de ellos, basada en sus personalidades, así como en nuestras historias de interacción entre nosotros a lo largo de muchos años.

Mientras algunas personas pueden responder bien al amor con mano firme, otras responden mejor a la sola bondad. La Biblia dice que hay espacio para ambas cosas (lee 2 Corintios 7:8-10 y Romanos 2:1-4).

Comencemos con el ejemplo que usé en el capítulo anterior, donde hablé de una amiga que estaba tratando de expresarme su amor al decirme que me apoyaría sin importar las decisiones que yo tomara en el futuro en cuanto al sexo de algún compañero sentimental. 

Si bien mi amiga quería mostrar mucho amor con sus palabras, lo que no percibió fue cuánto me hirieron. No siempre sabemos cómo será la reacción de alguien ante nuestras expresiones de amor hasta después de haberlas expresado, ¡porque las personas no son cortes de cartón de dos dimensiones que siempre son predecibles!

En la situación con mi amiga, pocos días después tomamos tiempo para hablar respecto a cómo me había hecho sentir con sus palabras, y volver a escuchar lo que en realidad estaba tratando de expresar, y ofrecernos sinceras disculpas por yo haberme ofendido y por ella haberme hecho sentir todo menos amado por ella como amiga. En otras ocasiones he tenido que hacer lo mismo con ella, porque he dicho cosas con la intención de ser cariñoso, pero no han sido entendidas, sino que se han recibido de forma muy diferente a lo previsto.

El hecho de que seas amigo de alguien no significa que siempre puedes ver lo que hay en su mente, y tampoco que siempre salga todo bien. Afortunadamente, la gracia no se limita a una sola ocasión, sino que es algo que podemos extender y recibir continuamente. 

Recuerda: “Por todas partes hay sentimientos, sé sensible”. 

EXPRESANDO NUESTROS PENSAMIENTOS

Cuando intentamos expresar mejor nuestro amor es importante tener en cuenta no sólo lo que decimos y hacemos, o lo buenas que son nuestras intenciones en lo que decimos y hacemos, sino cómo nuestros seres queridos van a recibir lo que decimos y hacemos.

Con respecto al tema del matrimonio gay, digamos, por ejemplo, que consideras que el matrimonio gay no es bueno, correcto ni saludable para la pareja que te ha invitado a asistir a su boda. ¿Cómo puedes dar una respuesta guiado por amor

Si consideras que lo que están haciendo no es bueno, correcto o saludable, y te sientes motivado por Dios o por tu propio deseo interno de compartir tus preocupaciones con una o ambas de las personas que se van a casar, entonces por supuesto, ¡por favor hazlo! 

Hazlo con amor, pero no dejes de hacerlo si sientes que tus palabras podrían ser de ayuda para ellos. Sé que habría querido que alguien me hubiese hecho la advertencia con amor antes del día de mi boda, si de verdad consideraba que había una razón por la cual no debía casarme con la persona con quien planeaba hacerlo. Esta sabiduría se aplica, desde luego, si la pareja que se va a casar es heterosexual u homosexual. 

Por otro lado, si Dios no te está animando a compartir tus preocupaciones con la pareja en cuestión, o no tienes un impulso interno para hacerlo, quizás debas prestar atención a lo que sientes o no sientes. Quizás no sea algo que Dios quiera que abordes, o es probable que no sea el momento correcto para que lo hagas, o puede empeorar las cosas para todos los involucrados, tanto a corto como a largo plazo.

Ha habido momentos en los que me he sentido impulsado a decirle algo a alguien que estaba haciendo algo que a mi parecer era perjudicial para él o ella, pero en otras ocasiones simplemente me he sentido obligado, no necesariamente impulsado, a decir algo. La diferencia entre la manera como han sido recibidas mis palabras ha sido notoria, de manera positiva en el primer caso y de manera negativa en el segundo.

Tu obligación no es corregir todo lo malo que ves en este mundo. Como ya lo dije antes, Dios no envió a Jesús “a condenar al mundo, sino para que el mundo sea salvo por Él” (Juan 3:17b). Hay una gran diferencia entre condenar a las personas por su pecado y salvarlas de su pecado.

Cualquier padre sabe que los hijos no se corrigen todas las veces que, según tu opinión, hacen algo mal, de lo contrario, ellos siempre tendrían miedo de volver a intentar hacer cualquier cosa. Gracias a Dios, en Su gran misericordia no me reprende cada vez que hago algo que podría hacerme daño. Pero sí hay ocasiones cuando hay tanto en juego, que es importante decir algo. 

Si consideras que esta es una de esas ocasiones, te sugeriría que siguieras el consejo del Apóstol Santiago, que dice: “Todo hombre sea pronto para oír, tardo para hablar, tardo para airarse…” (Santiago 1:19b, RVR). Esto está de acuerdo con la manera como Dios se acerca a nosotros (lee Éxodo 34:6-7).

TIEMPO, ORACIÓN Y MUCHA MEDITACIÓN

Hace varios años, unos amigos míos recibieron una invitación a una boda gay, y me preguntaron qué pensaba que debían hacer. La boda iba a ser un gran encuentro. Familiares de todas partes del país iban a asistir, y muchos no se habían visto por bastante tiempo. 

La reacción inicial de mis amigos fue que no deberían ir porque no consideraban que el matrimonio gay fuera algo correcto. Aunque querían ir por el bien de las relaciones con la pareja que los había invitado y por el resto de la familia extendida que asistiría, por su buena conciencia, no consideraban que debían asistir. 

“¿Qué debemos hacer?” me preguntaron.

Les dije que su primera reacción era razonable, ya que nadie debía sentirse obligado a asistir ni a participar en algo que violaba sus conciencias. 

También les pedí que tomaran tiempo para considerar su decisión, y no que la tomaran con ligereza, ya que sus relaciones con la pareja y su familia extendida también eran importantes. 

Así que mis amigos tomaron tiempo para pensar, orar y meditar al respecto. Al final, decidieron no ir. Una de las principales razones para la decisión, fue que ellos consideraban que no debían participar en una celebración que ellos consideraban perjudicial para la pareja en cuestión. 

También sentían que su asistencia indicaría que aprobaban algo que Dios no aprueba, violando así la advertencia bíblica en el libro de Romanos contra dar tal tipo de aprobaciones, que dice: “… no sólo las hacen, sino que también se complacen con los que las practican” (Romanos 1:32b). 

Mis amigos no hicieron un gran escándalo con su decisión. La pareja que les había extendido la invitación ya conocía las convicciones de mis amigos con respecto al matrimonio gay, así que no fue necesario decir algo más. Respondieron amablemente y rechazaron la invitación.

Aprecio que mis amigos hayan tomado tiempo para pensar, orar y meditar en cuanto a su respuesta. Quienes les habían hecho la invitación merecían ese honor. 

Aunque los que se iban a casar habrían podido ofenderse con la decisión de mis amigos, también creo que pudieron haber sentido alivio ante la respuesta. La mayoría de parejas no quieren que los invitados se sientan obligados a ir a su boda si no se sienten cómodos para hacerlo.

Sé que no me gustaría que alguien violara su consciencia para hacer algo que yo les pidiera hacer, así como creo que esa persona no querría violar mi consciencia para que yo hiciera algo que me pude hacer. El amor va en doble vía en una relación, y el respeto de la consciencia del otro es una manera de expresar nuestro amor.

También puedo decir que en varias ocasiones he recibido invitaciones a bodas con las que no he sentido afectada mi conciencia, pero a las que no he sentido mucho entusiasmo por asistir. ¿Por qué? Porque he sentido una genuina preocupación por la pareja. He dudado de que ese matrimonio pudiera durar algunos meses y mucho menos algunos años. 

Para mí es una lucha ir a esas bodas, pero aun así siempre he orado para tomar una decisión, porque los que me han invitado merecen ese honor. Al final, mi asistencia no siempre es un reflejo de mi opinión respecto a la relación de esa pareja, es un reflejo de lo que creo en la relación que tengo con la persona que me ha invitado. 

Aquí hay un principio que quizás se ilustre mejor con un ejemplo personal.

RELACIONES PERJUDICIALES

Desafortunadamente, sé lo que es que alguien rechace asistir a tu boda, y sé que ese rechazo puede generar una grieta en una relación, la cual puede verse afectada por años. 

Una mujer muy cercana a Lana creía sinceramente que Lana iba a terminar en el infierno si se casaba conmigo, porque yo había crecido en una denominación diferente a la de Lana. Esta mujer dijo que estaba orando todos los días, para poder encontrar lo bueno en mí, pero lo único que veía era mal. Se rehusó a ir a nuestra boda, esperando que su decisión hiciera que Lana la cancelara. 

Aunque Lana apreció la preocupación de aquella mujer, ella tenía sus propias creencias firmes y profundas con respecto al tema, y sentía que casarse conmigo era justo lo que Dios quería que hiciera.

Esa mujer se había dado a la tarea de expresarle su opinión a Lana en varias ocasiones, y Lana había tratado de expresarle las suyas de manera amable, pero sin ningún resultado. Esto llegó al punto en el que los rechazos constantes y verbales de esta mujer dejaron de ser bien recibidos, amables y cariñosos. 

Aunque ya mencioné que habría querido que alguien me lo dijera si consideraba que estaba tomando una decisión con mi vida que podía ser un terrible error, también creo que hay un punto en el que esas opiniones dejan de ser útiles, amorosas o amables. 

Si, después de haber tomado tiempo para orar y meditar respecto a la idea de alguien, todavía estamos en desacuerdo, yo esperaría poder llegar a un punto de respeto mutuo hacia las convicciones de cada uno. 

Desafortunadamente, ese no fue el caso con esta mujer, quien de manera constante y verbal se rehusaba a asistir a nuestra boda. Aunque ella decidió asistir en el último momento, sus palabras, acciones y la grieta que crearon entre ella y Lana generó una verdadera división entre ellas, la cual se extendió por años.

Creo que hay otra forma, una mejor.

UN TIEMPO PARA TODO

Como lo dice la Biblia: “Hay una temporada para todo, un tiempo para cada actividad bajo el cielo… un tiempo para callar y un tiempo para hablar” (Eclesiastés 3:1 y 3:7). 

En realidad, hay un tiempo para todo. De verdad hay tiempo para hablar y tiempo para callar. Aunque aprecié que esta mujer compartiera sus convicciones con Lana, cuando llegaron al punto en el que sus palabras sonaban como “un metal o un címbalo que retiñe”, quisiera que ella se hubiese dado cuenta que lo que hacía ya no era amoroso sino más bien una exigencia. 

Por otra parte, me alegra que ella haya expresado sus opiniones antes de la boda, ¡y que no lo haya hecho en la boda!

Me he preguntado qué se puede hacer si el que oficia una boda gay dijera esto que se suele decir: “Si alguien conoce una razón por la cual esta pareja no debería casarse, que hable ahora o que calle para siempre”. 

¿Sería ese el momento para que alguien que tiene convicciones profundas en cuanto a que el matrimonio gay no está bien, hable y exponga por qué cree que la pareja no debería casarse? ¿O hay una mejor manera de hacerlo? ¿Hay un mejor momento? 

Si alguien espera hasta ese punto en la ceremonia para hablar, creo que eso sería muy poco amable y falto de amor. Esto lo menciono porque si Dios está animándote a hablar con la persona, esperaría que lo hicieras antes del día de la boda, ¡y no durante la ceremonia! Recuerda, “lo que hagas, hazlo con amabilidad y amor”. Quizás sería apropiada una llamada telefónica o una conversación tomando un café con uno o con los dos que te invitaron. O si reunirse personalmente resulta muy incómodo o potencialmente explosivo, quizás una tarjeta o una carta podrían funcionar. 

O quizás, como ya lo mencioné, si Dios no te está impulsando a decir algo, y no sientes un llamado interno a hacerlo, también valdría la pena prestar atención a esa falta de estímulo o impulso interno. Así como hay momentos apropiados para hablar, hay ocasiones propicias para callar. 

Si sientes que debes decir algo, por favor no dejes que nada te desanime a hacerlo (vuelve a leer Santiago 5:19-20). Pero tampoco te sientas obligado a decir algo si Dios no te está llamando a hacerlo, porque de lo contrario, tus palabras pueden sonar como metal o címbalo que retiñe. Es por esto que es muy importante tomar tiempo para orar y meditar en tu respuesta.

MANTENIENDO LAS RELACIONES

También he conversado con personas que han recibido invitaciones a bodas gays de seres querido muy allegados a ellos, y que han expresado su amor de otra manera, sintiendo que Dios los ha animado a asistir.

He escuchado sus consideraciones en cuanto a qué hacer y qué no hacer. He visto sus luchas con los sentimientos de querer estar con quienes aman, pero no querer ver ningún daño sobre sus vidas. 

¿Cómo puede alguien decidir qué hacer cuando siente que Dios le anima a asistir? De nuevo, creo que es importante tomar tiempo para pensar, orar y meditar al respecto. También debo recordar que, aunque el amor no siempre dice “sí”, tampoco siempre dice “no”.

Como lo dije antes, mi asistencia a una boda heterosexual no siempre es un reflejo de mi confianza en la relación de la pareja que se está casando, sino un reflejo de mi confianza en la relación que tengo con la persona que me ha invitado.

Para algunos que han tomado esta difícil decisión, han encontrado sabiduría al asistir por esta sencilla razón: a fin de mantener las relaciones con quienes los invitaron. 

Cuando los que reciben la invitación tienen relaciones estrechas con la pareja que los ha invitado, y todos ya conocen las profundas convicciones de cada uno en cuanto al tema, no hay ninguna confusión en que su asistencia pueda indicar aprobación. En lugar de eso, su asistencia indica su disposición a mantener las relaciones con sus seres queridos, incluso cuando no están de acuerdo. 

LA BONDAD DE DIOS

Caminar al lado de las personas que amamos mientras ellos hacen cosas que consideramos dañinas y perjudiciales para ellos puede ser una de las cosas más difíciles que tengamos que hacer.

También puedo imaginar que esta es una de las cosas más difíciles que Dios tiene que hacer por nosotros al darnos la libertad de ejercer nuestro libre albedrío cuando sabe muy bien hacia dónde nos van a llevar nuestras decisiones. 

Sin embargo, caminar a nuestro lado, también es una de las cosas más amorosas que Dios hace por nosotros, incluso cuando tomamos decisiones permanentes, que alteran nuestra vida y tienen el potencial de ser perjudiciales. Dios nos promete que seguirá a nuestro lado, permitiéndonos ejercer nuestra propia voluntad, incluso si tiene que contener las lágrimas mientras lo hacemos. 

Como Dios dice en la Biblia: “Nunca te fallaré. Jamás te abandonaré” (Hebreos 13:5, NTV). 

He tratado de pensar cuántas veces Dios ha caminado a mi lado cuando he decidido hacer cosas que van contra Su voluntad, cosas destructivas para mí y para los que me rodean. 

He tratado de pensar en cuántas lágrimas debió derramar Dios al yo tomar esas decisiones, pero aun así siguió a mi lado. Como padre, he derramado una buena cantidad de lágrimas por las personas que amo, y también he estado a su lado en medio de momentos muy difíciles. Pero también puedo decir que nuestras lágrimas a menudo pueden hablar más que cualquier palabra que hayamos dicho.

Las lágrimas en realidad son una de las mayores expresiones de amor que podemos ofrecer por nuestros seres queridos. Como dijo Washington Irving, “hay algo sagrado en las lágrimas. No son muestra de debilidad, sino de poder. Hablan con más elocuencia que mil lenguas. Son mensajeros de una pena abrumadora, de profunda constricción, y de amor indecible”.

Hace poco hablé en el funeral de una querida amiga y una de las mujeres más piadosas que he conocido. Uno de sus nietos se me acercó al finalizar y me habló del gran impacto que la vida de su abuela había tenido en la suya. 

Me dijo cómo, siendo adolescente, una navidad quería de regalo un álbum musical que era de los más vulgares en el mercado. Estaba en un tiempo de rebeldía, y la música expresaba todo el dolor que sentía y la ira que deseaba expresarle a todos los que lo rodeaban. 

Él estaba llorando mientras me relataba la historia de cómo su abuela le había dado el álbum que había pedido para esa navidad, y cuando lo hizo, comenzó una conversación con él respecto a lo que estaba sintiendo y por qué se sentía así. Ella le dijo que entendía por qué deseaba esa música, pero había mejores maneras de tratar con sus sentimientos, que no tenían que acudir a esa música en busca de ayuda, sino que podía buscar a Dios. 

Ella estuvo dispuesta a encontrarse con él en su situación, pero no quiso dejarlo solo. Al darle el álbum, ella le expresó su amor de una manera que podía recibirlo. Pero ella le mostró que había otra forma, una mejor.

Lloré al escuchar lo que mi querida amiga había hecho, algo que no sé si yo habría podido hacer, pero que tocó la vida de este joven, quien meses después de haber recibido ese álbum, le entregó su vida por completo a Cristo y renunció a buscar su solaz en cosas que terminarían destruyéndolo.

No puedo sugerirles a todos el método de mi amiga para cada situación, pero sí puedo decir que Dios lo usó ese día de una manera poderosa para tocar la vida de aquel joven. Y como mi amiga fue una mujer firme en Dios, tengo la seguridad de que ella tomó tiempo para orar y pensar en su decisión antes de proceder en la dirección que se sintió guiada a seguir.

MIS LÁGRIMAS

¿Cómo se relaciona esto con el matrimonio? Se relaciona porque Dios usó esta historia para hacerme llorar una noche cuando sentí que me preguntó si alguna vez yo podría ir a una boda gay, si, por alguna razón en particular, Él quería que fuera.

Aunque he acompañado a otros al tomar sus decisiones respecto a si asistir o no a una boda gay, nunca me han pedido a mí que vaya a una. Pero una noche Dios me preguntó que considerara qué haría si alguien muy querido para mí lo hiciera. Una cosa es aconsejar a otros mientras tratan de navegar esas aguas turbulentas. Otra muy diferente es cuando eres el que está en el bote.

Aunque es difícil hacer hipótesis sin conocer lo específico, si considero valioso pensar en este tema antes de que se presente la situación, así estaremos mejor preparados para responder si sucede o cuando suceda.

¿Podría asistir a una boda gay, sabiendo lo que sé sobre la homosexualidad, y creyendo lo que creo acerca de lo que Dios me ha dicho con tanta claridad en cuanto a este tema? 

El dilema para mí es que mi participación con la homosexualidad casi me quita la vida. Es el pecado en mi vida que Dios señaló como la razón por la cual Jesús dio su vida por mí. Estaba siguiendo un camino hacia la muerte, pero Jesús dijo que ya había pagado ese precio por mí. Si yo estaba dispuesto a poner mi fe en Él, podría recuperar mi vida y vivir con Él y para Él, para siempre.

Aunque en mi vida hay muchos otros pecados por los que Jesús murió y que luego señaló, este fue el que Dios destacó para mí entre toda la lista de Romanos capítulo 1. Eso fue lo que me condujo a poner mi fe en Cristo. 

No podía ver cómo podría algún día asistir a una ceremonia que celebraba solemnemente una relación por la que creo que Jesús tuvo que ir a la cruz. Sencillamente no podía.

Pero al parecer, casi como cuando le pidió a Abraham que sacrificara su hijo Isaac en un altar, Dios me estaba preguntando si yo estaba dispuesto a asistir a una boda gay si Dios mismo me pedía que lo hiciera.

Pensar esto me quebrantó, así como Abraham debió llorar al pensar en que tenía que sacrificar a su hijo. ¿Qué haría yo si alguien cercano y querido para mí me invitara a su boda gay, así él o ella conociera mis más profundas convicciones, pero que aun así tuviera un profundo deseo de que yo estuviera presente en uno de los días más importantes de su vida?

Lo único que podría hacer es llorar, llorar por la trascendencia de la decisión tomada por esa persona cercana a mí; llorar por los daños que podrían llegar a la vida de mi ser querido como consecuencia; llorar por esta decisión que estaría cerrando la puerta para siempre a la posibilidad de casarse con alguien del sexo opuesto como yo me casé con Lana y experimenté algo con ella mucho más allá de lo que jamás pude imaginar.

Pero luego pensé en cuántos baldes de lágrimas ha llenado Dios por mí cuando he tomado decisiones que han impactado el resto de mi vida, pero aun así Él siguió a mi lado, sosteniendo mi mano a lo largo del camino.

Seguro, podría quedarme en casa y pretender que nada está sucediendo. O podría asistir y sentarme en una esquina, como si estuviese usando un brazalete negro en protesta por sentirme coaccionado a asistir. O quizás había una mejor manera. 

Quizás, como Dios me estaba sugiriendo, podía sostener la mano de mi ser querido en uno de los días más significativos de su vida, no por mi confianza en la relación de la pareja que se está casando, sino por mi confianza en mi relación con la persona que amo y que me invitó.

“Quizás yo podría hacerlo, Dios”, yo dije, “pero sólo después de derramar muchas, muchas lágrimas”. 

Y Dios dijo: “Ahora estás comenzando a entender la profundidad de mi amor. También estás empezando a comprender cómo puedo hacer lo que tengo que hacer a diario. Estás viendo cómo puedo mostrar gracia a millones, incluso en medio de su pecado, conociendo las consecuencias de éste sobre sus vidas, porque sé cuánto me ha costado su pecado”.

Como dice la Biblia: “Pero Dios mostró el gran amor que nos tiene al enviar a Cristo a morir por nosotros cuando todavía éramos pecadores” (Romanos 5:8). 

TOMÁNDOLO EN SERIO

Si recuerdas mi historia al comienzo de este libro, respecto a mi querida amiga y creyente con quien compartimos la misma manera de pensar, que dejó de leer en un punto del capítulo 12 y me envió una nota diciendo que ya no lo podía leer, éste es ese punto.

Yo no lo explicaba con tanto cuidado como lo estoy haciendo ahora. Y aun así todavía es posible que no esté capturándolo con la precisión con la que Dios me lo explicó. Pero después que ella leyó el primer borrador de mi libro, donde dije que podría verme asistiendo a una boda gay si Dios me animaba, y si mi relación con la persona que me había invitado era de suma importancia, mi amiga se preguntaba cómo podría yo alguna vez tener una buena razón para asistir a una boda gay. 

Ella me dijo que sentía que yo estaba contradiciendo todo lo que había dicho en el resto del libro, porque le parecía que yo estaba respaldando el matrimonio homosexual. Pero mis palabras en ese borrador quizás eran más ambiguas de lo que esperaba, porque nada podía estar más lejos de la verdad. No puedo celebrar, no puedo respaldar, y no puedo afirmar algo que Dios no celebra, respalda ni afirma. No puedo hacerlo. 

La verdad es que creo que lo que Dios me mostró esa noche me sirvió para destacar y resaltar todo lo demás que he dicho en el resto de este libro respecto a lo que se necesita para amar a Dios y a otros en la mayor plenitud posible. 

¿Qué me mostró? Me mostró la importancia de las lágrimas, lágrimas que se expresan en amor.

¿Podría yo ir a una boda gay? No con celebración. Pero quizás podría ir por respeto a la relación que tengo con la persona que me invitó. No podría celebrar algo por lo que Jesús tuvo que ir a la cruz. Quizás podría si mi asistencia fuera una manera de expresar mi verdadero afecto hacia la persona que me invitó de una manera que esa persona pudiera recibirlo, así como mi amiga le dio a su nieto un álbum y expresó su afecto hacia él de una manera que él pudo recibirlo. Si bien hay mucho en juego al ir a una boda gay, puedo ver cómo el mismo principio permitiría que las personas a quienes amo sigan aferradas a sus principios mientras yo sigo firme en los míos. 

Hay una gran diferencia entre acompañar a alguien celebrando algo perjudicial para él o ella, y acompañarla conteniendo las lágrimas. Externamente, ambas cosas pueden parecer lo mismo. Pero por dentro, la diferencia está en las lágrimas, las cuales se expresan en amor.

Alguien puede decir: “¿Entonces sería mejor no ir?”

Yo pensaría lo mismo, salvo por lo que Dios me recordó acerca de las muchas veces en mi vida cuando Él caminó a mi lado al pasar por cosas que sé que habría deseado nunca haber presenciado al estar a mi lado. Ahora, al recordar esos momentos, lo único que puedo decir es que estoy muy agradecido de que Él estuvo ahí.

¿Querría yo ir a una boda gay? No, no me gustaría ir, porque sinceramente creo que Dios nos ha advertido que no participemos de actos homosexuales, y creo que “si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien”. Y por causa de lo que creo, tampoco puedo imaginar que la mayoría de parejas gay querrían que yo fuera a su boda. Nadie quiere obligar a alguien a hacer algo que esa persona no quiere hacer.

Pero sí podría entender si alguien me extendiera una invitación de corazón sincero, teniendo claros conocimientos y las razones de mis convicciones en este tema, pero que aun así quisiera que yo fuera por el genuino y mutuo afecto que sentimos, entonces sería probable que yo fuera, no porque crea en el matrimonio gay, sino porque creo en mi relación con la persona que me ha invitado. 

Al explicarle esta verdad con más precisión a mi amiga que dejó de leer en este punto, y cuando Dios comenzó a mostrarle a ella lo que me había mostrado a mí, ella me volvió a llamar y me dijo: “Creo que necesito tomar en serio lo que estás diciendo en ese capítulo. Contiene una verdad que Dios quiere que vea”.

Sin duda, hay tiempo para el amor con mano firme, y Dios puede llamarte a que expreses tu amor de esa manera (lee 2 Corintios 7:8-10). Pero también hay tiempo para simple gentileza, y Dios también puede llamarte a que expreses tu amor de esa manera (lee Romanos 2:1-4). Así como la Biblia habla sobre cómo el amor con mano firme puede conducir a arrepentimiento, también habla de cómo la gentileza puede llevar al arrepentimiento.

Estas son decisiones difíciles, y no se pueden tomar a la ligera. Si fueran fáciles, ¡creo que no habrías empezado a leer un libro como este! 

Pero si estás dispuesto a pedirle sabiduría a Dios, dándole suficiente tiempo a tus decisiones, orando y meditando en ellas a fin de escuchar Su dirección, estoy convencido de que podrás tomar decisiones que lo van a honrar a Él, a tus seres queridos y a sus más profundas convicciones.

Como dice la Biblia: “Y si alguno de vosotros tiene falta de sabiduría, pídala a Dios, el cual da a todos abundantemente y sin reproche, y le será dada” (Santiago 1:5).

LA PLENITUD DE LAS PALABRAS DE DIOS

Antes de terminar esta discusión, hay un matiz importante que no quiero que pierdas de vista. 

Aunque en este capítulo he usado el matrimonio como ejemplo para amar a otros en medio de nuestras lágrimas, esa es una de las muchas situaciones que enfrentaremos en la vida cuando tengamos que decidir cuál es la mejor manera de expresar nuestro amor a otros de una manera que puedan escucharlo mientras nos mantenemos firmes en nuestras convicciones.

Creo que Jesús nos da el mejor ejemplo de cómo poder hacerlo.

Un amigo mío hace poco asistió a un evento especial en una iglesia que estaba visitando. El pastor a cargo del evento pasó al frente en un punto y leyó en la Biblia el pasaje acerca de la mujer que fue sorprendida en adulterio y que fue llevada ante Jesús.

El pastor leyó este pasaje en relación con el tema de la homosexualidad. Y esto es lo que leyó:

Mientras hablaba, los maestros de la ley religiosa y los fariseos le llevaron a una mujer que había sido sorprendida en el acto de adulterio; la pusieron en medio de la multitud. “Maestro —le dijeron a Jesús—, esta mujer fue sorprendida en el acto de adulterio. La ley de Moisés manda apedrearla; ¿tú qué dices?”. 

Intentaban tenderle una trampa para que dijera algo que pudieran usar en su contra, pero Jesús se inclinó y escribió con el dedo en el polvo. Como ellos seguían exigiéndole una respuesta, él se incorporó nuevamente y les dijo: “¡Muy bien, pero el que nunca haya pecado que tire la primera piedra!”. Luego volvió a inclinarse y siguió escribiendo en el polvo. 

Al oír eso, los acusadores se fueron retirando uno tras otro, comenzando por los de más edad, hasta que quedaron solo Jesús y la mujer en medio de la multitud. 

Entonces Jesús se incorporó de nuevo y le dijo a la mujer: —¿Dónde están los que te acusaban? ¿Ni uno de ellos te condenó?

—Ni uno, Señor —dijo ella. 

—Yo tampoco —le dijo Jesús—.

(Juan 8:3-11a).

El pastor cerró su Biblia en ese punto de la historia, miró alrededor del salón y dijo: “Eso es todo lo que necesito escuchar. Debemos decirles lo mismo a quienes son homosexuales: ‘Yo tampoco te condeno’”. 

Mi amigo dijo que casi todos los presentes asintieron con la cabeza en aprobación. Casi todos, salvo mi amigo. Él había dejado su Biblia abierta por un poco más de tiempo para seguir leyendo lo que Jesús dijo después. 

Se preguntó por qué el pastor había cerrado la Biblia en ese punto del relato, en lugar de leer el resto de lo que Jesús le dijo a esa mujer aquel día. 

¿Por qué el pastor solo compartió algunas de las palabras de Jesús, y no todas sus palabras?

Lo que mi amigo leyó, y lo que el pastor debió haber leído a las personas en ese evento si hubiese dejado su Biblia abierta solo para leer una frase más, fueron las siguientes palabras: 

“Vete y no peques más” (Juan 8:11b).

Aunque creo que ese pastor y los presentes en esa reunión habían sido sinceros en tomar algo de tiempo, meditación y oración respecto a este tema, y habían encontrado algunas ideas sobre la verdad, también creo que se quedaron cortos y no encontraron la plenitud de lo que Jesús tenía para decir en cuanto a este tema. 

Jesús veía los pecados de esta mujer iguales a los del resto de personas reunidas alrededor de ella para apedrearla. Eso es verdad.

Y Jesús demostró que no quería que nadie la apedreara, sino que deseaba que ella viviera en lugar de morir. Como le dijo a Nicodemo: en realidad no vino “a condenar al mundo, sino para salvar al mundo” (lee Juan 3:17). Eso también es verdad.

Pero el trozo de verdad que el pastor y estas personas no encontraron fue aquello que evitaría la muerte de esta mujer por lo que estaba haciendo, y le permitiría vivir la vida a plenitud. Esta verdad estaba en las últimas palabras que Jesús le dijo a ella: “Vete y no peques más”. 

Fue este trozo de verdad que le costaría la vida a Jesús unos pocos días después. Este trozo de verdad fue la única razón por la cual Jesús pudo perdonarla por sus pecados y dejarla ir, porque él mismo iba hacia la cruz a pagar con Su propia vida el precio de los pecados de ella. Fue ese trozo de verdad lo que le permitió a ella de verdad quedar libre y vivir la vida que Dios había creado para ella.

La Biblia no nos dice qué hizo aquella mujer después de que Jesús la liberó. Pero, según lo que me sucedió cuando enfrenté la posibilidad real de la muerte por mis pecados, y el compromiso resultante que tuve de nunca volver a mis viejos caminos, puedo imaginar que ella tampoco volvió a sus viejos caminos.

Dios nos ha mostrado toda Su maravillosa gracia, y quiere que extendamos esa gracia a otros. También nos ha mostrado Su maravilloso amor, y quiere que también extendamos ese amor a otros. La gracia dice: “Yo tampoco te condeno”. 

El amor añade: “Vete y no peques más”.

Mi esperanza es que todos sigamos buscando cada trozo de verdad que Dios tiene en mente para que lo encontremos en este tema y en muchos otros, sin nunca perder de vista la plenitud de lo que Él tiene para decir. 

Como dice la Biblia: “En cambio, hablaremos la verdad con amor y así creceremos en todo sentido hasta parecernos más y más a Cristo” (Efesios 4:15, NTV). 

P.D. No dejes de leer la conclusión y el epílogo, ¡que vienen después de las guías de estudio de las siguientes páginas! ¡Algunos de los primeros lectores de este libro dijeron que estos últimos dos capítulos son sus favoritos en todo el libro!

Guías de estudio para los capítulos 11 y 12

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 11: “LA IMPORTANCIA DE LOS CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD”

Resumen del Capítulo

Algunos cristianos quieren respaldar y afirmar a sus amigos gays al estimularlos a seguir al máximo sus atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Pero para las personas que no quieren seguir esas atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, ese tipo de “apoyo” puede ser aplastante. El autor sugiere que:

  • aunque todos queremos que nuestros amigos nos amen y respalden, no queremos que nos animen a hacer cosas que van contra nuestras propias convicciones,
  • y aunque todos queremos ser amorosos y de apoyo, debemos comprender que las palabras de respaldo que damos a los demás pueden no sonar como apoyo para quienes las escuchan.

El mensaje de esperanza de una persona puede sonar como un mensaje de esclavitud para otra. Todo esto indica por qué necesitamos ser cuidadosos con lo que hablamos y orar en cuanto a este tema, teniendo en cuenta la persona con quien hablamos.

Si bien, ya no existen muchas de las restricciones que en otro momento sirvieron de obstáculo para que las personas no siguieran el camino de la homosexualidad, las restricciones de la palabra de Dios han seguido intactas. La palabra de Dios actúa como un “cinturón de seguridad” para nosotros, y sigue siendo la mejor protección para evitar que nos hagamos daño a nosotros mismos y a los demás.

El autor dice que el cambiante paisaje en cuanto a este tema:

  • ha sido útil de muchas maneras para quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, puesto que pueden tener mayor libertad para explorar formas válidas de satisfacer sus necesidades legítimas, sin el temor de ser catalogados como gays,
  • pero ninguna de estas nuevas libertades ha cambiado el hecho de que los hombres y las mujeres son diferentes, razón por la cual las personas todavía prefieren casarse con una persona de un sexo en lugar del otro.

Incluso con todas estas nuevas libertades, el autor dice por qué está completamente convencido de que la Palabra de Dios sigue siendo la mejor manera de restricción en cuanto a este asunto: para nuestro bien, por honrar a Dios, y por el bien de todos los involucrados. 

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee 1 Corintios 2:4-5. ¿Cómo puede nuestro testimonio hablar a las personas del poder de Dios tanto como las otras palabras que podemos procurar usar para convencerlos de lo que creemos? ¿Cómo puede el testimonio del autor hablar del poder de Dios tanto como las otras palabras que puede tratar de usar?

Lee Juan 9:25. ¿Qué hace tan poderoso el sencillo testimonio del hombre ciego a quien Jesús sanó?

Lee Romanos 1:26-27. ¿Por qué la Biblia describe los actos homosexuales como “contra naturaleza”? ¿Qué afirmación hace esto en cuanto a los “hechos de vida” según lo que nos presenta la naturaleza?

Lee Génesis 4:21, 2 Samuel 6:14, y Éxodo 31:1-5. Aunque algunas actividades pueden hacer parecer a las personas como más o menos gays, ¿qué dice la Biblia respecto a la variedad de dones que Dios le ha dado a su pueblo? ¿Cómo este tipo de pasajes pueden dar libertad adicional a quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo para que satisfagan sus necesidades legítimas? 

¿Qué dijo el autor respecto a por qué se sintió tan mal cuando una amiga le ofreció su apoyo, sin importar el género de la persona con quien se casará en el futuro? ¿Cómo nuestras palabras de apoyo, así las expresemos con amor, a veces pueden ser interpretadas de la manera incorrecta? 

¿Qué palabras crees que el autor habría deseado que su amiga le hubiera dicho, al darle su apoyo como persona, pero sin respaldar algo que Dios le ha advertido que no haga? 

¿Cómo podemos ofrecer nuestro amor sincero, con cuidado y compasión a quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, sin comprometer nuestras más profundas convicciones? 

¿De qué formas has visto cambios en las políticas públicas en cuanto a este tema a lo largo de tu vida? ¿Y en los años recientes? 

¿Cómo crees que este cambio en la opinión y las políticas públicas afectará a quienes experimentan atracciones hacia el mismo sexo al tratar de decidir por sí mismos el camino que van a seguir? ¿Crees que este cambio facilita o dificulta esas decisiones? 

Si el género en verdad no importa con respecto al tema del matrimonio ¿Por qué algunos prefieren casarse con otra persona de determinado sexo en lugar del otro? ¿Puedes ver cómo se pueden satisfacer diferentes necesidades con personas de géneros diferentes, pero no siempre se pueden satisfacer las mismas necesidades con personas de ambos géneros?

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA EL CAPÍTULO 12: “LA IMPORTANCIA DE LAS LÁGRIMAS”

Resumen del Capítulo

El nuevo panorama con respecto a la homosexualidad requiere una respuesta genuina de la iglesia. El autor espera que este libro sea parte de esa respuesta. En este capítulo, el autor usa el ejemplo de ser invitado a una boda gay para abordar diferentes formas de expresar nuestro amor en otras situaciones. Este ejemplo es útil porque:

  • una invitación a una boda gay es tan clara como una “pregunta”, que suele requerir la respuesta específica de una persona,
  • una invitación a una boda homosexual a menudo traerá a la superficie todo lo que esa persona cree, o piensa que cree respecto a la homosexualidad,
  • y una respuesta a la invitación a una boda homosexual involucra a personas y relaciones reales, no teorías abstractas.

Aunque puede haber muchas discusiones en cuanto a asistir o no a una boda gay, incluso entre devotos cristianos que creen en la Biblia y tienen la convicción de que el matrimonio gay no es correcto, bueno o saludable para los que se van a casar, puede ser útil tener una discusión considerada sobre este tema. Algunas de estas respuestas varían según las relaciones y convicciones de las personas que invitan y los invitados, tales como:

  • si la asistencia o no asistencia viola la conciencia de una persona,
  • si la asistencia o no asistencia equivale a aprobación,
  • y si la asistencia o no asistencia impactaría de manera significativa la relación entre los que hacen la invitación y los invitados.

Algunas consideraciones adicionales a tener en cuenta incluyen:

  • cómo Dios ha estado a nuestro lado incluso cuando hemos hecho cosas que Él no ha querido que hagamos,
  • cómo el acompañar a alguien en celebración es muy diferente a acompañarlo conteniendo las lágrimas,
  • y tanto el amor con mano firme como la genuina gentileza pueden conducir al mismo resultado, dependiendo de la situación.

Aunque este capítulo se concentra en el matrimonio gay como ejemplo, ilustra el dilema real que los cristianos enfrentarán en sus vidas con sus seres queridos. El autor confía en que Dios puede guiarnos a tener el enfoque más amoroso si le damos a esa situación algo de tiempo, oración y meditación. 

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee 1 Corintios 13:2 y 16:14. ¿Cuál debería ser siempre nuestra guía en respuesta a cualquier problema cultural o de otra índole? 

Lee Eclesiastés 3:1, 7 y Santiago 1:9. ¿Qué dicen estos pasajes en cuanto al problema de cuándo hablar y cuándo callar? ¿Alguna vez te han pedido que expreses lo que crees en cuanto al tema de la homosexualidad? De ser así, ¿cómo crees que fue tu respuesta? ¿Qué quisieras haber hecho mejor? 

Lee Romanos 1:32 y Hebreos 13:5b. ¿Cómo cada uno de estos pasajes pueden guiar a alguien a saber si asistir o no a una boda gay? ¿La asistencia a una boda equivale necesariamente a la aprobación de la misma? ¿Cómo tu respuesta a la pregunta anterior afecta tu decisión de asistir o no?

Lee Juan 8:1-11, Juan 3:17, y Romanos 5:8. ¿De qué manera pudo dejar libre Jesús a la mujer que había cometido adulterio? ¿Qué iba a hacer en su lugar para que su libertad fuera posible? Aunque no podemos morir por los pecados de alguien como lo hizo Jesús, para liberar a esa persona, ¿cómo podemos vivir por esa persona para que sea libre? ¿Qué hizo Cristo por nosotros mientras seguíamos pecando?

Lee Romanos 2:4. ¿A qué puede conducir la benignidad de Dios? ¿Qué actos de bondad podemos extender a otros y que puedan conducir a lo mismo?

¿Alguna vez te han invitado a una boda de cualquier clase en la que no necesariamente aprobabas la unión, pero de todas formas fuiste? ¿Qué factores influyeron en tu decisión de ir o no ir? ¿Cómo pueden esos factores ser útiles con respecto a la decisión de asistir o no a una boda gay?

¿Alguna vez has recibido una invitación a una boda gay? De ser así, ¿cuál fue tu respuesta, y por qué? Y ya sea que te hayan invitado o no a una boda gay, ¿por qué es tan importante tomar tiempo para orar y meditar en tu respuesta?

Conclusión: Por qué todos necesitamos un arco iris

Donde comparto por qué el arco iris es un símbolo apropiado, no solo para el movimiento homosexual, sino para todos nosotros, porque todos estamos juntos en esto.

A veces, como cristianos, pensamos que tenemos ventaja al estar con Dios. Creemos que estamos en su grupo “interno” y todos los demás están “afuera”. Perdemos de vista el hecho de que todos somos preciosos ante los ojos de Dios, que todos hemos sido creados a su imagen.

Esto lo comprendí de una manera conmovedora cuando fui a Israel por primera vez en el año 1995. Me hospedé con una familia musulmana en el lado Oeste, era una casa donde las balas, en el pasado, habían perforado los muros exteriores y los vidrios de las ventanas de la habitación donde yo dormía. 

Ahí estaba yo, un cristiano apasionado visitando Israel por primera vez, menos de 10 días después de haber renunciado a mi trabajo secular para entrar a servir de tiempo completo en el ministerio. Era un peregrinaje de fe, a solas con Dios, iba a vivir por una semana con una familia de quienes sólo había escuchado un poco la mañana cuando partí de casa para ir al aeropuerto. 

Ese mismo día, un amigo mío había organizado mi hospedaje con un amigo suyo que era musulmán y que administraba la tienda de alimentos de nuestro pequeño pueblo, él me ofreció un lugar de hospedaje con sus familiares mientras yo visitaba el país. 

Esta familia musulmana fue muy amable conmigo, me trataron como a la realeza, aunque el mismo día que llegué mencionaron de paso que si alguna vez veían al evangelista estadounidense Billy Graham, lo asesinarían de inmediato. (Decidí que ese no era el momento para mencionar que el señor Graham era uno de mis héroes vivientes de la fe, y que mi esposa y yo habíamos usado su apellido como segundo nombre para uno de nuestros hijos. ¡De verdad hay tiempo para hablar y tiempo para callar!)

Aunque esta familia fue muy hospitalaria, más amable que ninguna familia que haya conocido, todavía tenía esa sensación en mi interior de que por ser cristiano estaba con Dios “dentro” de un círculo especial, y que por alguna razón ellos estaban “afuera” de ese círculo. 

Teológicamente sí entiendo que Cristo abre una puerta para que nos acerquemos a Dios limpios y perdonados, lo cual nos da increíbles bendiciones y beneficios, ¡incluyendo vida eterna! Pero en términos de ser preciosos a los ojos de Dios, todos estamos en el mismo nivel del campo de juego.

Una noche, después de haber estado visitando algunos de los lugares sagrados de esa Tierra Santa, llegué a la casa de esta familia y comprendí esto: De hecho, yo era un gentil (como la Biblia se refiere a todos los que no son judíos), así como mis anfitriones musulmanes eran gentiles. Yo no era alguien “de adentro” con Dios, así como tampoco ellos lo eran. 

Según cualquier judío ortodoxo, yo era más como esa familia musulmana y no como la mayoría de los primeros judíos seguidores de Jesús. Ese día, Dios puso en mi corazón que la única diferencia entre mis anfitriones musulmanes y yo era que yo había puesto mi fe en Cristo y que ellos no, lo cual sí hace toda la diferencia, tanto en este mundo como en el venidero. Sin embargo, por mi nacimiento natural yo era tan gentil como mis anfitriones. 

De repente sentí con ellos una unidad que nunca antes había sentido. Comprendí que había estado en el mismo bote en el que ellos estaban. Fue sólo por la disposición que Cristo tuvo para abrir las puertas del reino de Dios para todos que yo, como gentil, había tenido la oportunidad de entrar a ese reino.

LAS PERSONAS SON PERSONAS

Esto lo comparto contigo mientras consideras cómo amar mejor a Dios y a los gays. En realidad, no es cuestión de “nosotros contra ellos”, sino de “todos estamos juntos en esto”. 

En muchas formas me siento tan lejos de ser gay como cualquiera que nunca ha experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Es como que ahora soy “esto” mientras ellos siguen siendo “aquello”. Pero la verdad es que todos somos “aquello”, todos necesitamos la misericordia y la gracia de Dios porque hemos pecado de una u otra manera. 

Y todos también volvemos a Dios de la misma manera: por medio del amor y el perdón que nos ofrece por Jesucristo.

Romanos 1 tiene unas fuertes palabras de advertencia para quienes, entre otras cosas, han estado en la homosexualidad. Pero Romanos 2 tiene unas fuertes palabras de advertencia para todos los demás:

“Tal vez crees que puedes condenar a tales individuos, pero tu maldad es igual que la de ellos, ¡y no tienes ninguna excusa! Cuando dices que son perversos y merecen ser castigados, te condenas a ti mismo porque tú, que juzgas a otros, también practicas las mismas cosas… Y tú, que juzgas a otros por hacer esas cosas, ¿cómo crees que podrás evitar el juicio de Dios cuando haces lo mismo?  ¿No te das cuenta de lo bondadoso, tolerante y paciente que es Dios contigo? ¿Acaso eso no significa nada para ti? ¿No ves que la bondad de Dios es para guiarte a que te arrepientas y abandones tu pecado? (Romanos 2:1, 3-4). 

A lo largo de este libro he tratado de comunicar que las personas que luchan con atracciones hacia el mismo sexo no son muy diferentes a cualquier otra persona que lucha con otra clase de tentación. 

Todos nos sentimos atraídos a algo que no es bueno ni saludable para nosotros. Todos nos sentimos atraídos a algo contra lo que Dios trata de advertirnos con el “No” más fuerte y claro posible. Todos necesitamos el amor de Dios, su compasión, y su gracia, y Él nos da todo esto gratuitamente por medio de Jesucristo.

Un día, la autora de la popular serie de libros que mencioné antes, quien dijo que siempre vio a uno de los principales héroes de sus libros como alguien gay, respondió en Twitter a un mensaje proveniente de una de sus seguidoras, quien dijo que “no lograba verlo”. 

Había leído de principio a fin todos los libros de la serie y en ninguna parte había identificado que ese importante personaje fuera homosexual. 

La autora respondió: “¿Será porque las personas que son gays se ven como… personas?”

¡Vaya! ¡Qué respuesta! ¡Qué revelación! Es algo muy cierto, en muchos niveles.

Las personas son personas. Todos tenemos cosas con las que luchamos, y todos tenemos cosas de las que necesitamos ser salvos. Ninguno de nosotros tiene un registro moral perfecto. Es verdad que “todos estamos juntos en esto”. 

ANTEOJOS DE COLOR ROSA

Todos, como Noé y su familia después del diluvio, necesitamos un arco iris en el cielo, una promesa de Dios de que no nos volverá a destruir con un diluvio. 

Cuando comencé a leer la Biblia siendo ya adulto, me intrigó qué tan rápido, en el capítulo 6 del primer libro, Génesis, nosotros como humanidad ya nos habíamos desviado tanto de las esperanzas y sueños que Dios tenía para nosotros, que Él estuvo listo y dispuesto a destruir todo lo que había creado.

Sin embargo, Dios encontró a una persona que hacía lo correcto ante sus ojos, y por sólo una persona, Dios estuvo dispuesto a darnos otra oportunidad. 

Dios salvó a Noé y su familia de la destrucción total, luego prometió que nunca volvería a destruir la tierra con una inundación. Ya conoces la historia: Dios puso un arco iris en las nubes como señal de esa promesa.

Lo que no comprendí hasta cuando leí esa historia siendo ya adulto, fue para quien era la señal. Siempre pensé que el arco iris era una señal para nosotros, Sus hijos e hijas en la tierra, para recordarnos que Él nunca volvería a destruir la tierra. Pero al mirar el pasaje más de cerca, vi que el arco iris en realidad era una señal para Él, un recordatorio para Él de la promesa que había hecho. 

Dios dijo: “Cuando envíe nubes sobre la tierra, el arco iris aparecerá en las nubes y yo me acordaré de mi pacto con ustedes y con todas las criaturas vivientes. Nunca más las aguas de un diluvio volverán a destruir a todos los seres vivos” (Génesis 9:14-15).

Esto cambió mi manera de pensar en cuanto al arco iris. En lugar de ser una señal para mí, era una señal para Él. Me impactó que el arco iris, para Dios, es como un par de anteojos de color rosa, (anteojos de la talla de Dios), a través de los cuales Él puede ver la tierra de una nueva manera.

Una vez tuve unos anteojos como esos. Aunque había tenido gafas de sol de otros colores: grises, azules o de color marrón, ninguna de ellas parecía mejorar lo que veía a mí alrededor tanto como las de color rosa. 

Siempre que me las ponía, todo se veía un poco más brillante, un poco mejor. Era como si tuviera una perspectiva completamente nueva ante la vida, ante todo lo que veía.

Después de leer este pasaje sobre el arco iris desde la perspectiva de Dios, pude imaginarlo mirándome, y en lugar de ver mi fealdad, las cosas que yo había hecho y estropeaban mi propia imagen, Él me veía con otra óptica. 

Podía imaginar que, para Dios, Él me veía un poco más brillante, un poco mejor. 

Cuando Dios nos mira a través de su arco iris, es como si estuviera viéndonos de la manera como nos creó en un principio, como esperaba que fuéramos desde el comienzo.

Luego pensé en las personas del movimiento gay que eligieron el arco iris como su símbolo, y que adhieren pegatinas de arco iris a sus autos, y que uzan banderas de arco iris en sus casas. Y no pude evitar pensar que quizás, ante los ojos de Dios, esto le ayuda a Él a ver las cosas bajo otra luz, una luz que vuelve a recordarle Sus promesas.

ÉL ESTÁ CONMIGO

¿Y no es eso lo que Jesús hizo por nosotros? Cuando Jesús vino a la tierra y murió por nuestros pecados, pasó a ser nuestro nuevo arco iris, nuestro nuevo pacto. 

Ahora, cuando Dios me mira, ve a Jesús, no porque yo sea como Jesús (aunque quisiera serlo), sino porque Jesús se pone de pie delante de mí y dice: “Él está conmigo”. 

Cuando Jesús tomó mi lugar en la cruz, un lugar que yo merecía por mis muchos pecados, Dios me cubrió con el perdón que Cristo compró con Su vida. 

Cuando Dios me mira, ve a Jesús. Ve un Eric mejorado, un Eric glorificado, un Eric santificado, Eric 2.0, porque me ve a través de sus gafas color Jesús.

Como la mujer sorprendida en adulterio, yo también fui sorprendido en mis pecados. Y como la mujer sorprendida en adulterio, Jesús dijo que yo también podía ser libre, por lo que Él hizo en la cruz para pagar por mis pecados, permitiéndome vivir la vida que Dios había creado para que yo viviera desde un comienzo. Y al comenzar a vivir esa nueva vida, Jesús me dijo, así como le dijo a la mujer sorprendida en adulterio: “Vete y no peques más”.

Todos necesitamos un arco iris. Todos necesitamos a Alguien que pueda salvarnos de nuestros pecados. Todos estamos juntos en el mismo bote.

No sé tú, pero en mi caso estoy muy agradecido por que Dios haya puesto ese arco iris en el cielo. No puedo pensar en una mejor señal o en una bandera más apropiada para ondear en mi vida, no como símbolo de mi orgullo, sino como un recordatorio de las promesas que Dios ha hecho.

Incluso, a veces me he preguntado si es posible que Dios mismo haya inspirado a los del movimiento gay a que eligieran el arco iris como su símbolo, como la señal que pueden exhibir en sus casas, sus desfiles y sus vidas. 

¿Podría ser que Dios mismo haya inspirado a alguien en la Casa Blanca para encenderla con todos los colores del arco iris el día que nuestra Corte Suprema legalizó el matrimonio gay en todo el país? 

¿Podría ser que Dios mismo haya inspirado a las personas a ondear la bandera del arco iris en nuestras embajadas de todo el mundo? 

No sé la respuesta. Pero estaría agradecido si fuera Dios el que inspiró cada una de esas cosas.

Ahora, siempre que veo un arco iris, recuerdo el increíble amor de Dios hacia mí. Me recuerda Su maravillosa gracia. Me hace acordar que todos estamos juntos en esto. 

Por sobre todo, me hace recordar que todos necesitamos un arco iris de vez en cuando. 

Es gracias a Jesús, quien envió su Espíritu Santo a morar dentro de todo el que pone su fe en Él, que tenemos ese arco iris, a donde quiera que vayamos.

Guía de estudio para la conclusión

GUÍA DE ESTUDIO PARA LA CONCLUSIÓN: “POR QUÉ TODOS NECESITAMOS UN ARCO IRIS”

Resumen del Capítulo

A veces es fácil pensar en términos de “nosotros” y “ellos” respecto a cualquier tema en la vida, y mucho más en cuanto a este tema. Pero la verdad es que todos estamos juntos en esto. La verdad es:

  • ninguno de nosotros tiene un registro moral perfecto,
  • todos necesitamos la misericordia y la gracia de Dios,
  • y todos también volvemos a Dios de la misma manera: por medio de la fe, el amor y el perdón que nos ofrece por Jesucristo.

Así como el arco iris fue una señal en el día de Noé, hoy sigue siendo una señal para nosotros de la promesa que Dios hizo de nunca volver a destruir el mundo con un diluvio. El arco iris:

  • es una señal para nosotros de la promesa de Dios, así que podemos descansar tranquilos en esa promesa,
  • es una señal para Dios de Su promesa, para que Él la recuerde,
  • y quizás sirve como unas gafas color rosa del tamaño de Dios, así, cuando nos mira, nos ve como nos creó en el comienzo, sin pecado, así como ve a quienes han puesto su fe en Cristo: justificados ante sus ojos.

Aunque sin duda Dios mismo es la inspiración detrás de todos los arcos iris en el cielo, el autor se pregunta si quizás Dios también sea la inspiración detrás de todos los otros arcos iris que vemos en el mundo, sin importar quienes los exhiban o por qué lo hagan, así todos nos vemos un poco más brillantes ante los ojos de Dios. 

Si ese es el caso, entonces todos podríamos usar un arco iris en nuestras vidas, ¡todos los días! Y gracias a Jesús tenemos uno.

Preguntas de Reflexión y Discusión

Lee Romanos 2:1-4. ¿Por qué el Apóstol Pablo dice que nosotros que juzgamos a otros por ciertos pecados hacemos lo mismo? ¿Qué es lo que él quiere decir en Romanos 2:1-4?

Lee Génesis 6:9-14, 7:21-24 y 9:1-17 ¿Qué estaba sucediendo en los días de Noé que hizo que Dios deseara destruir a todo el mundo? ¿Por qué Dios decidió salvar a Noé y su familia? 

¿Alguna vez has considerado este asunto en términos de “nosotros” y “ellos”? ¿Qué opinas sobre la siguiente afirmación?: “Todos estamos juntos en esto”. ¿Por qué el autor dice que todos estamos juntos en esto, así alguien nunca haya experimentado atracciones hacia el mismo sexo, o haya tomado acciones en ese sentido?

¿Qué opinas sobre la siguiente afirmación?: “Será porque las personas que son gays se ven como… personas”.

¿Qué diferencia haría si, en lugar de confrontar a las personas involucradas en la homosexualidad, camináramos a su lado, para ayudarlos a salir de esa condición?

¿Por qué Dios necesitó establecer un recordatorio en el cielo para nunca volver a destruir la tierra con un diluvio? ¿Para quién lo puso? ¿Cómo crees que el arco iris nos ayuda a Dios y a nosotros cada vez que aparece en el cielo?

¿Cómo puede Jesús servir de “arco iris” en las vidas de los que ponen su fe en Él? 

Aunque Dios es claramente la inspiración detrás de cada arco iris que aparece en el cielo, ¿es posible que Él también sea la inspiración detrás de cada arco iris que vemos a nuestro alrededor todos los días? De ser así, ¿qué propósito puede tener Él al hacerlo? ¿Cómo puede esta manera de pensar cambiar tu manera de ver los arcos iris cada vez que veas uno a partir de ahora?

Epílogo: 10 pasos hacia una mejor comprensión

Donde comparto algunas ideas prácticas para guiar tus discusiones sobre este tema con quienes están experimentando atracciones hacia el mismo sexo.

Ya que has leído este libro, quizás te estés preguntado; “¿Y ahora qué?” 

He escrito esta guía para darte unas ideas en cuanto a cómo abordar este tema con quienes están experimentando atracciones hacia el mismo sexo. Así es como yo abordo este tema con las personas que amo. 

Oro por que esta guía te ayude a multiplicar todo lo que Dios ha podido hacer por medio de mí para hacerlo también por medio de ti. Juntos, espero podemos tener un impacto positivo en la mayor cantidad posible de personas, incluyendo a los que más amas.

PASO 1) CONOCE LO QUE CREES Y POR QUÉ LO CREES

Antes de conversar sobre este tema, es útil identificar lo que ya has llegado a creer al respecto y por qué has llegado a esas convicciones. Aunque lo que crees puede cambiar con el tiempo con un poco más de exploración, oración y conversaciones, este es un buen punto de partida para tener una conversación.

Esto es lo que yo creo en cuanto a este tema y por qué lo creo. Ten la libertad de usar esta lista como trampolín para crear tu propia lista. 

La pregunta es esta: “¿Qué es lo que en realidad crees en cuanto a la homosexualidad y por qué?”

  • Creo que los actos homosexuales son pecado. ¿Por qué? Porque Dios nos ha advertido en la Biblia que no los hagamos, y lo ha hecho de manera fuerte y clara. (Romanos 1:8-32; Levítico 18:22, 20:13; 1 Corintios 6:9-20)
  • Creo que las tentaciones homosexuales no son pecado. ¿Por qué? Porque Dios dice que todos enfrentamos tentaciones, así como Jesús las enfrentó, pero esas tentaciones no nos definen. (1 Corintios 10:13; Hebreos 4:14-16)
  • Creo que cualquier persona puede ser redimida y liberada para nunca más volver a seguir sus tentaciones homosexuales. ¿Por qué? Porque Dios está en el negocio de transformar vidas, incluso en este tema, (1 Corintios 6:11-12; 2 Corintios 5:17; además de mi propio testimonio y el de muchos otros)
  • Creo que los que de verdad desean casarse algún día con alguien del sexo opuesto, pueden hacerlo y tener maravillosos resultados. ¿Por qué? Porque cuando nos deleitamos en el Señor, Él nos concede los deseos de nuestro corazón. (Salmos 37:4-6, Juan 10:7-10; además de mi propio testimonio y el de muchos otros)
  • Creo que el matrimonio ideal para Dios es un esposo y una esposa comprometidos de por vida. ¿Por qué? Porque Dios nos creó intencionalmente de una forma que satisface de manera simultánea nuestro deseo de intimidad y Su deseo de un mundo lleno de personas, ¡porque Él ama a las personas! (Génesis 1:26-28; Génesis 2:18-25; Marcos 10:2-9; Juan 3:14-18)
  • Creo que las relaciones homosexuales no son ni la primera, ni la segunda mejor opción para nadie, sino que a largo plazo son destructivas y perjudiciales para los involucrados, para otras personas, y para los propósitos de Dios al habernos dado el regalo de la sexualidad. ¿Por qué? Porque si haces algo que Dios dice que no debes hacer, no te va a ir bien. (Romanos 1:24-32; Romanos 3:23, 6:23; Deuteronomio 28:1-2, 15)
  • Creo que Dios nos ama incondicionalmente, nos llama a vivir nuestras vidas a plenitud, y nos capacita para hacerlo. ¿Por qué? Por la forma como Jesús nos perdonó, nos llamó a vivir nuestras vidas a plenitud, y nos capacitó para hacerlo. (Juan 8:1-11; 1 Corintios 6:9-11; Romanos 8:9-11)
  • Creo que Dios nos llama a amarnos incondicionalmente unos a otros, a tratarnos como quisiéramos que nos trataran. ¿Por qué? Porque así fue como Jesús nos amó y nos invitó a hacer lo mismo. (Mateo 7:12; Mateo 22:34-40; Romanos 5:6-8)

PASO 2) CONOCE LO QUE CREEN TUS SERES QUERIDOS Y POR QUÉ LO CREEN

  • Pídeles a tus seres queridos que te relaten su historia, siendo lo más honestos posibles, y escuchándolos de verdad, con el deseo de entender, no solo responder. (Santiago 1:19-20; Proverbios 10:19, 18:2, 18:13)
  • Escucha su corazón, no sólo sus palabras, de modo que puedas entender con mayor claridad lo que dicen (y dentro de lo posible no ofenderte con cualquiera de sus palabras). (Proverbios 20:5)
  • Presta atención a las necesidades legítimas que están tratando de satisfacer. (Filipenses 4:19)
  • Escucha cómo están tratando de satisfacer esas necesidades legítimas, ya sea de manera ilegítima o no. (Proverbios 3:5-6)

PASO 3) COMPARTE LO QUE CREES Y POR QUÉ LO CREES

  • Comparte, con amor, las verdades que has llegado a creer. (Efesios 4:15)
  • Comparte, con amor, los versículos que respaldan lo que crees, confiando que esos versículos cobrarán vida para los que los escuchan. (Hebreos 4:12)
  • Comparte, con amor, la historia de Corintios en la Biblia, mi historia, y las historias de otros que han encarnado lo que crees. Para comenzar: comparte este libro, o comparte toda mi historia, Fifty Shades of Grace, escrito bajo mi seudónimo Nicholas Deere; o la historia de Dennis Jernigan Sing Over Me; o la de Jeff Konrad, You Don’t Have to be Gay; o la de Christopher Yuan, Out of a Far Country. (1 Corintios 6:9-11; Juan 20:30-31; Juan 21:25)

PASO 4) IDENTIFICA LOS PUNTOS DE ACUERDO Y DE DESACUERDO

  • Identifica los puntos en común respecto a lo que cada uno piensa, en especial en cuanto a necesidades válidas, reconociendo que estar de acuerdo es algo poderoso. (Mateo 18:19)
  • Identifica los puntos de desacuerdo en lo que cada uno piensa, en especial con respecto a las maneras de satisfacer esas necesidades legítimas, pero que pueden parecer inválidas para cada uno de ustedes, reconociendo que incluso las personas maduras a veces tienen puntos de vista diferentes. (Filipenses 3:15-16; Gálatas 2:11)
  • Identifica los posibles daños que pueden venir de satisfacer necesidades válidas de maneras que cada uno de ustedes considera inválidas; incluyendo daños a las personas involucradas, daños a otros, y daños a los propósitos para los que Dios nos ha dado el regalo de la sexualidad. (1 Corintios 6:18-20; Romanos 1:27; Génesis 3:1-3)

PASO 5) EXPLORA IDEAS PARA SATISFACER NECESIDADES LEGÍTIMAS DE MANERAS LEGÍTIMAS.

  • Explora ideas para satisfacer necesidades legítimas que no sean sexuales ni románticas. (1 Samuel 18:1-4; Ruth 1:16-18; Proverbios 18:24; Hechos 9:27, 11:25-26; 1 Timoteo 1:2)
  • Explora cómo las personas pueden usar sus dones y talentos para honrar a Dios, y no comprometer su integridad. (Efesios 2:10; Éxodo 31:1-11; 1 Samuel 16:14-23; Génesis 4:21)

PASO 6) OREN EL UNO POR EL OTRO, PIDIENDO SABIDURÍA Y SANIDAD DE DIOS

  • Oren el uno por el otro, por que Dios revele su sabiduría en este tema y de la manera más completa posible. (Santiago 1:5-8)
  • Oren el uno por el otro, pidiendo sanidad sobre cualquier herida que hayan recibido en cuanto a este tema. (Santiago 5:13-15)
  • Pidan y reciban perdón el uno del otro por cualquier herida que puedan haberse causado, ya sea de manera intencional o no. (Santiago 5:16; Efesios 4:32; Colosenses 3:12-14)

PASO 7) ESTABLEZCAN LÍMITES SALUDABLES ENTRE SÍ, PARA HONOR Y RESPETO MUTUO

  • Conversen sobre cómo pueden honrar y respetar las profundas convicciones que cada uno tiene. (Romanos 12:10)
  • Hablen sobre límites o restricciones que pueden ser de mucha ayuda para honrar y respetar las convicciones de cada uno. (1 Corintios 10:23-31)

PASO 8) DEJEN LA PUERTA ABIERTA PARA OTRAS CONVERSACIONES, ¡PERO NO SE MOLESTEN!

  • Deja la puerta abierta para otras conversaciones, entendiendo que con el tiempo logramos perspectiva gracias a la oración y también obtenemos respuestas. (Romanos 8:22-28; 12:18)
  • Consideren sus conversaciones en cuanto a este tema como santas y preciosas, porque lo son, no son triviales ni superficiales. (Proverbios 21:19; Colosenses 3:21; Proverbios 25:11; 27:15-16)
  • Cuando no estén de acuerdo, háganlo con civismo. (Proverbios 15:1-7; Lucas 12:58; Romanos 15:1-7; 2 Timoteo 2:14)

PASO 9) ¡DISFRUTEN LAS PARTES DE SU RELACIÓN QUE PUEDEN DISFRUTAR!

  • Disfruten el regalo que Dios le ha dado a cada uno, sin importar sus profundas convicciones en cuanto a este tema en particular. (Juan 13:34-35)
  • Dejen que cada uno ejerza su libre albedrío, así como Dios nos permite ejercerlo, siempre honrando y respetándose el uno al otro. (Gálatas 5:13)

PASO 10) NO DEJEN QUE NADA LOS SEPARE DEL AMOR QUE TIENEN EL UNO POR EL OTRO, INCLUSO ESTE TEMA, ASÍ COMO NADA PUEDE SEPARARLOS DEL AMOR DE DIOS.

  • Recuerden que nada puede separarlos del amor de Dios. (Romanos 8:34-39)
  • Comprométete con no dejar que nada te separe de tus seres queridos, incluyendo este tema. (Ruth 1:16-18)

Acerca del autor

Descrito por USA Today como “una nueva clase de evangelista”, Eric Elder es autor, orador y pianista contemporáneo. También es pastor ordenado y el creador de The Ranch, un sitio en internet diseñado para impulsar la fe:

www.TheRanch.org

Otros libros escritos por Eric Elder:

  • Two Weeks With God
  • What God Says About Sex
  • Exodus: Lessons In Freedom
  • Jesus: Lessons In Love
  • Acts: Lessons In Faith
  • Nehemiah: Lessons In Rebuilding 
  • Ephesians: Lessons In Grace
  • Israel: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • Israel For Kids: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • The Top 20 Passages In The Bible
  • Romans: Lessons In Renewing Your Mind
  • St. Nicholas: The Believer 
  • San Nicolás: El Creyente (Spanish Edition)
  • Making The Most Of The Darkness
  • 15 Tips For A Stronger Marriage
  • Fifty Shades Of Grace (bajo el seudónimo de Nicholas Deere) 
  • Water From My Well

Para más información, por favor visita: www .Inspiring Books .com

¡A Eric siempre le gusta tener contacto con sus lectores! Puedes escribirle en cualquier momento a: eric@theranch.org

Water From My Well

Water From My Well

Water From My Well

Finding God in the midst of life, love, and loneliness
by Eric Elder

Twenty inspiring messages drawn from my own personal well, including topics like:

  • goal setting and goal keeping;
  • asking for blessings and receiving blessings; remembering to smile in the good times and trusting God in the bad;
  • pursuing love with all your heart and dealing with the loneliness that sometimes results;
  • believing that God can do anything, moment by moment, and enjoying His sanctuary in the mean time;
  • keeping your feet forward and your knees bent so you don’t get sideswiped by obstacles in your way;
  • being who you are and telling your story; the power of prayer and the blessing of perseverance;
  • excavating your heart to expand your capacity;
  • and digger deeper to go deeper with God.

Listen here, read below, or click here to download the PDF
Also available in PaperbackKindle, or Audible

Dedication

To my dear friends who encourage me to go deeper.

Introduction

One of my favorite books to read when I was first venturing into the world on my own was a collection of essays by E.B. White called simply Essays of E.B. White. 

White was famous for writing not only children’s books like Charlotte’s Web and Stuart Little, but also for writing an elegant grammar book which I—and many others—used in English classes over the years called The Elements of Style.

I loved White’s essays in particular, not only because they were written so fluidly, but because they gave me a glimpse into his heart and soul. I could see the scenes he was de- scribing. I could feel the feelings he felt. He put words to my thoughts which I was only beginning to formulate in my mind, like this one from an essay called “Years of Wonder”:

“I wanted to test myself—throw myself into any flame that was handy, to see if I could stand the heat.”

Like E.B. White, I’ve written the messages in this book as a way to give you a glimpse into my own heart and soul. Maybe you’ll relate to some of the things I’ve shared here, whether it’s the excitement and difficulty of setting and keeping goals, or what to do when you run up against boulders in the rivers of your life. These messages were written over a period of several months in 2016, a year that for me was filled with a combination of life, love and loneliness. Yet through it all, I was thankful to know that God was right there with me, every step of the way. I pray these messages will bring life and refreshment to your soul like water from a well—in this case, water drawn from my own personal well.

Read. Explore. Enjoy!

And thanks for coming along with me on my journey! As you’ll see in Chapter 20, this is just the beginning—the best is yet to come!

Eric Elder

Chapter 1: It’s That Time Of Year

I was listening to a song on the radio one day with my 21-year-old daughter, Makari, and I said to her, “I wish I could write a song like that.”

She turned to me and said, “You can!” 

“Really?!?” I said. “Do you think so?” 

“Of course, you can!” she replied, with total confidence in my abilities.

As I sat there and thought about her statement, I couldn’t believe how much her simple belief in me changed my whole attitude to- wards the idea of writing a song that other people might come to love as much as I loved listening to that song on the radio.

Although I had written songs before, ever since having that conversation with my daughter I’ve written several songs that I’ve come to love as much as the song I heard on the radio that day! I haven’t published them yet, but I hope to do so someday. And perhaps someday, someone else will be blessed by my music as much as I’ve been blessed by the music of others.

I tell you that story to encourage you to set some goals for yourself that you can believe in. What a difference it makes to have even one confidence-boosting statement come into your mind, one statement that will help you reach for and attain that which God has put on your heart to do and enabled you to do. 

My good friend, Kent Sanders, has encouraged me in my own goal-setting this year in a book he wrote called The Artist’s Suitcase. In his chapter called “Y is for Year,” Kent gave me a great idea for envisioning myself at the end of the year, trying to imagine myself doing some things that I’m not doing now. 

One of the things I envisioned was a picture of myself, holding onto a finished script and score for a new musical I’m working on based on the life of St. Nicholas, a book which my wife and I wrote as a novella a few years ago. I had already begun writing the first three scenes and songs for the musical at the end of last year, and with my new Kent-in- spired vision in mind, I could actually see my- self finishing the whole thing by the end of this year—holding a copy of the completed script and score in my hand! 

I’m telling you this now, that this is one of my goals, as an extra incentive to help me stick to that plan! I’m also planning to chat with Kent and another good friend by phone for an hour each week to help us all keep on track with the visions God has put on each of our hearts. I can’t tell you how much it helped me last year to do this as Kent and I both had books we wanted to write. By talking to each other each week about our progress, and read- ing each other’s work as we went along, we both launched our books last year on the same day. Even though our books were on different topics, our mutual goal of writing and publishing a book kept us on track all year long. 

I’m telling you this not only for my own accountability, but to encourage you in your own goal setting. What are some things God has put on your heart for the coming year? What would you like to change, improve, or see differently in your life, if you could envision or change one or two (or ten or fifteen) things by the end of the year? 

Regardless of how you fared on last year’s goals, today is a new day! This year is a new year. Perhaps part of your answer to achieving your goals in the coming year is contained in the things I’ve shared with you here:

1) Go ahead and dream. Envision yourself one year from now and what you would hope would be different in your life. This is not a pipe dream. This is an essential dream to help you move forward. As the Bible says: “Where there is no vision, the people perish” (Proverbs 29:18, KJV).

2) Believe you can do it. This doesn’t have to be just positive “self talk.” Run your ideas past God and others. Let them speak into your life to help give you the confidence you need or the clarity to sharpen your idea, like I received from my daughter when I told her about my desire to write a song that really moved people. If God has put a desire on your heart, trust Him to help you carry it out to completion. As Paul said to the Philippians: “I thank my God every time I remember you… being confident of this, that He who began a good work in you will carry it on to completion until the day of Christ Jesus” (Philippians 1:1, 6, NIV).

3) Enlist someone to walk with you towards achieving your goal. Whether you ask a friend, a mentor, a pastor, a small group leader, a cousin, a relative, your parents or your children, pick one, two or three others with whom you can talk about your goals and walk with you towards achieving them on a regular basis through- out the year. They’ll be honored and you’ll increase your chances of success exponentially. As King Solomon wrote: “Two are better than one, because they have a good return for their work: If one falls down, his friend can help him up… A cord of three strands is not quickly broken” (Ecclesiastes 4:9, 10a, 12b, NIV).

Go ahead and dream. Believe you can do it. Enlist someone to walk with you towards achieving your goals. I know you can do whatever God has put on your heart to do! If He’s really put it there, He’ll certainly help you to achieve it! As Paul said to the Ephesians:

“For we are God’s workmanship, created in Christ Jesus to do good works, which God prepared in advance for us to do” (Ephesians 2:10, NIV).

You can do it! I know you can!

Chapter 2: When Calls The Heart

My daughter, Makari, and I met last weekend in Vancouver, British Columbia, to be on the set and meet the cast and crew of the Hallmark television series When Calls The Heart. 

Makari and me with actors Daniel Lissing (“Jack”) and Erin Krakow (“Elizabeth”), Mamie Laverock (“Rosaleen”) and Mitchell Kummen (“Gabe”), and Jesse Hutch (“Luke” on Debbie Macomber’s Cedar Cove) 
Makari and me with actors Daniel Lissing (“Jack”) and Erin Krakow (“Elizabeth”), Mamie Laverock (“Rosaleen”) and Mitchell Kummen (“Gabe”), and Jesse Hutch (“Luke” on Debbie Macomber’s Cedar Cove) 

I’d like to share some stories and pictures with you from the weekend and encourage you to trust God with your whole heart. As I told some of the cast and crew, for me this isn’t just a TV show; it’s a weekly boost in my faith that heals, inspires and touches my heart in a deep, deep way. 

And that’s no accident.

Fourteen years ago, I had an occasion to interact with Brian Bird, one of the shows executive producers (along with Michael Landon, Jr). I had sent an email to Brian back when he was writing and producing another TV series called Touched By An Angel. Touched was one of the few TV shows we could watch together as a family, just like When Calls The Heart is now. 

And that was no accident either.

Brian Bird and those involved in the production of both of these shows wanted to create high quality, uplifting programming that inspired faith in the hearts of its viewers, rather than denigrating their faith. I wrote to Brian all those years ago because I wanted to express to him my sincere thanks for his work on Touched. It wasn’t just a show to distract us from our lives; it was a show to help us live our lives better. Like going to church, Touched gave us a weekly boost in our faith—and the hope to keep going on—by giving us very real and very practical messages on topics ranging from death and forgiveness to building better relationships.

But to tell my story properly, I really have to back up to two weeks before I wrote that first email to Brian Bird fourteen years ago, as I had never even heard of him before. What was really on my heart was that I wanted to write a letter to Martha Williamson, the executive producer of Touched By An Angel. I had just finished reading a book she had written in which she told why she latched onto the show in the first place—and how she helped to shape it to be so faith-inspiring. I was so thankful for her tenacity to take on this project and stick to her convictions that I wanted to write her a letter of sincere thanks.

But I had never written to a television exec before! How would I find her? How would I get a letter through to her? And what were the chances that she would ever see what I wrote at all, given the mounds of fan mail they must receive every day? 

I didn’t have time to write a heartfelt letter that no one would ever read. And more than likely, I thought, my letter would probably just end up as some statistic showing that one more viewer liked their show. I had much more to say than that, and it wasn’t worth my time if my letter would just end up as a checkmark on some tally sheet for a busy senior executive.

I had literally 1,000 emails of my own that were awaiting replies in my own inbox, some of which had been waiting for months, and I decided to take care of that important correspondence first before I sat down to write to Martha Williamson. I told myself if I got my inbox down to zero, then I would write a letter to her.

To my surprise, two weeks later I had finished answering every email in my inbox, plus all the new ones that came in during those two weeks (plus the new ones that came as responses to my responses!) My inbox was showing that rare (and never-to-be-repeated) number of emails as “zero.” Having achieved that miraculous goal, I knew it was time to write a letter to Martha Williamson.

So I did. I spent the rest of the day trying to think of how best to communicate my sincere thanks. By Friday afternoon, I had finished. 

The next question was how to get the letter to her. But I was worn out and decided to wait until the following week to figure out that part of the puzzle.

On Saturday night, our family watched Touched once again, and once again we were moved to tears and greater faith by the story we saw.

On Sunday morning, I got an email from one of my subscribers on my mailing list who gets my weekly messages. He asked if I could change his email to a new address so he could keep getting my messages. My wife was looking over my shoulder as I was reading his email and noticed that his name was “Al Lowry.”

“Al Lowry?” she said. “Wasn’t that the name of the dad in last night’s episode of Touched By An Angel?

I remembered his name, too, because “LOWRY” had been written in bold letters on the back of his daughter’s basketball jersey in one of the scenes.

“Yeah, I think it was,” I said.

So I wrote to “Al Lowry” and told him that I changed his email address, adding that it was funny because he had the same name as a character on Touched By An Angel that we had seen the night before.

Al wrote back to say that it was funny because the guy who wrote that episode is in his small group at his church and had used Al’s name as a character name in the show!

What?!?! I couldn’t believe it! I did a quick search on the Internet to find the name of the writer, Brian Bird, and discovered that he was not only a writer, but also that he was a co-producer with Martha Williamson!

Here I had been praying about how to get a letter to Martha Williamson to thank her for the show, and I was reluctant to even write the letter because I thought she would never read it! But now I had a way that I might actually be able to get it into her hands!

I told Al what I had been trying to do and asked if he could pass along my letter to Brian. He said he would, and Brian himself wrote back to say he’d pass it along to Martha Williamson!

Brian also wrote to ask me if I could send my letter to the network also, as they were in the midst of trying to decide whether or not to renew the show for another season. Brian said that the network gave serious consideration to letters from viewers like mine, so he sent me the addresses where I could also send my letter. A few weeks later, I learned that the show had been renewed for one more season, and another twenty-some episodes.

Did my letter make any difference? I can’t say for sure. But I do know that God had put it on my heart to write it, so I did my part. Then He did His part and put it in the hands of someone who could do something with it. Praise God! Whatever the reason it was renewed, my family and I were able to enjoy the show every week for another year—along with millions of others who were also touched by Touched.

In the years that followed, Al Lowry became a good personal friend of mine, eventually joining our ministry as a member of our board of directors. I continued to correspond with Brian, who was, and still is, a tremendous inspiration to me in my own writing, as we both continue to do our best to touch people with high quality, uplifting and faith-affirming messages.

Although I’ve kept in touch with Brian over the years by email, Facebook and phone, this weekend was the first time we met face-to-face! Brian had invited my daughter and me to a special event he had put together for a small group of fans and friends of When Calls The Heart, as Brian knew that my daughter is going into acting. It was a total blast.

Makari and me with executive producers Brian Bird and his wife Patty, Michael Landon, Jr., and director Neill Fearnley and writers Derek Thompson and Robin Bernheim.
Makari and me with executive producers Brian Bird and his wife Patty, Michael Landon, Jr., and director Neill Fearnley and writers Derek Thompson and Robin Bernheim.

In one sense, meeting Brian in person wasn’t a big deal for we had been conversing for the past fourteen years. But in another sense, meeting him in person WAS a big deal as the seeds of our growing friendship—and the mutual encouragement that we’ve gained—had been planted so many years ago. That one small act of following through with what God had put on my heart has yielded numerous benefits not only for me and Brian and Al, but for all those who have been touched by the work we’ve all been able to do, both apart and together. Who knows what might happen from here?

As for me, I’m glad I trusted God and did what He put on my heart to do all those years ago and all along the way.

What about you? Is there something God is putting on your heart to do today? Listen to His call, give it a chance, then follow through. See what God might do with it! Trust Him from the bottom of your heart, do your part and let Him take care of the rest.

As the Bible says:

“Trust God from the bottom of your heart; don’t try to figure out everything on your own. Listen for God’s voice in everything you do, everywhere you go; He’s the one who will keep you on track” (Proverbs 3:5-6, MSG).

Chapter 3: Asking For Blessings

Last month I had the rare opportunity to meet Janette Oke, author of the book which served as the basis for the new television series running on the Hallmark Channel called When Calls The Heart. My daughter and I were invited to attend a special event on the set near Vancouver where the show is filmed, as my daughter is going into acting. I have to admit, I’ve never read any of Janette Oke’s books before; I’ve only seen them all over the shelves in bookstores (she’s written over 75 novels, selling more than 30 million books!)

And yet, when the key people were introduced at a gathering for fans and friends of the show on Friday night—including actors, producers and script writers—I was floored when Janette was introduced. Why? Because here was the woman behind this entire “world” I had been watching for two years on TV with my family. She’s the one who envisioned the characters, described the settings and infused them with her faith and values. While it’s taken hundreds of cast and crew members to bring that world to the screen, it all started in her mind 33 years ago when she first wrote the book When Calls The Heart (she’s now 81 years young).

As a writer myself, I was struck by how our words can have an effect on people all over the world, even decades or generations after our words are first written. I thought, I would love to have a portion of whatever God has given to Janette!

When I saw her at one point during the night standing in the ballroom with only one or two others around her, I thought perhaps I could ask her to pray for me. Although I didn’t know what she might say, I thought it was worth it to try. I walked over and introduced myself, saying, “Thank you for using your gift to reach so many people, including me. I’m a writer, too, and I wondered if you would pray for me, that God would use my words to reach many people for His kingdom as well?”

Janette said she’d be glad to pray for me! She pulled me in close and launched into a beautiful one or two minute prayer, speaking directly into my ear.

After praying, she signed a notebook I was carrying, writing, “Eric, May God continue to lead you. Janette Oke.”

 Janette Oke praying for me and signing my notepad the night before my daughter and I visited the set of When Calls The Heart, a Hallmark TV series based on Janette’s book by the same title.
Janette Oke praying for me and signing my notepad the night before my daughter and I visited the set of When Calls The Heart, a Hallmark TV series based on Janette’s book by the same title.

It may seem bold or unusual to ask someone to bless you with a portion of that which God has blessed them. Yet it’s not the first time I’ve asked someone to pray for me like that. I’ve taken courage from those in the Bible who have asked others to bless them as well, like Elisha asking for a blessing from Elijah: “Let me inherit a double portion of your spirit” (2 Kings 2:9b, NIV); or Jacob asking for a blessing from the man with whom he had been wrestling all night: “I will not let you go unless you bless me!” (Genesis 32:26b, NIV).

It’s not that I’m expecting instant answers from these prayers of blessing, and it’s not like I’m trying to rub a magical charm for good luck. It’s simply asking for a prayer of blessing from those whom God has already blessed. And as a believer in prayer, I trust that God will answer those prayers some day, in some way—and even in ways that might go beyond all I could ask or imagine.

I remember asking a famous singer one time if he would pray for my voice. He said, “Sure,” then asked, “What happened to your voice?” thinking that perhaps I had injured it in some way.

I said, “Oh, my voice is fine, I just wish I could sing like you!” He laughed, then prayed for me, gladly. It’s not that I thought my voice would suddenly change to sound like his, for we’re all gifted and wired in unique ways. He didn’t get to where he was by just a prayer—it takes lots of hard work, training and “practice, practice, practice.”

But I also know that Jesus has “good gifts” He wants to give us, and He encourages us to ask in order to receive them. As Jesus said:

“Ask and it will be given to you; seek and you will find; knock and the door will be opened to you. For everyone who asks receives; the one who seeks finds; and to the one who knocks, the door will be opened” (Matthew 7:7-8, NIV).

My daughter and I asked for prayers of blessings from two other people during our weekend on the set.

We met the father of one of the child actors on the show and were able to talk with him about how their family got connected with the production. As he answered our questions, I thought, Wouldn’t it be great if he would pray for my daughter that God would open some similar doors for her? I didn’t even know if he was a Christian or not. But at one point while we were talking, he mentioned how “blessed” he felt by all that had happened to their family. I decided then and there that it was worth asking him for a blessing, too.

I asked, “Would you mind praying for my daughter that God would bless her as you and your family have been blessed?”

He paused for a moment, then said, “No one has ever asked me to do that before. But sure, I’d be glad to.” He took our hands in his and prayed an honest, godly and heart warming prayer.

The third prayer of blessing we received came at the end of the weekend’s activities when my daughter talked to an actor with whom she was very impressed. He wasn’t an actor on this particular show, but happened to be on the set that day with us. Again, we weren’t sure if he was a Christian or not, but we had heard from a member of the crew that they thought he was involved with a church nearby. My daughter stepped up to talk to him, looked at him sincerely and asked, “Would you pray for me? I’m going into acting, too, and I would love to receive what you have.”

He looked at her and said, “Not many people ask me that! But okay, let’s pray.” He then launched into a lengthy prayer for her, which turned into a 45-minute conversation about acting, Hollywood, boundaries and balancing work and family life. That prayer and conversation turned out to be the highlight of the whole weekend for my daughter.

I tell you these stories not to be a name dropper, for I have no interest in that. I tell you these stories because I want to encourage YOU to ask for blessings from those you meet—those who have been gifted in ways that you may want to grow, too.

It’s good to check your motives before asking for a blessing, as this isn’t meant to be a substitute to try to curry someone’s favor or as a way to get close enough to someone to get their autograph! It’s simply and truly a way to ask God to bless you as others have been blessed. If that’s your desire, then let me encourage you to consider asking, too! If the person you ask says, “Yes,” then receive whatever blessing God chooses to pour out on you. Who knows how your life and the lives of those around you—perhaps even the lives of people all around the world for generations to come—might be affected by your asking!

When I came home from our weekend in Vancouver, a friend told me that she had been praying that I would receive everything God wanted me to receive on the trip. As I thought about her prayers, I thought about those three blessings that others had prayed over my daughter and me. I thought, Yes, Lord, I think I have received everything You wanted me to receive.

Ask and it will be given to you; seek and you will find; knock and the door will be opened to you. Ask God, yes, but don’t be afraid to ask people sometimes, too. Their prayers of blessings may rock more than just your world.

Chapter 4: Finding God’s Provision

Are you in need of something from God today? If so, let me encourage you (as a friend recently encouraged me) that “God’s provision is there before the need has presented itself. It is merely a matter of the light shining on the provision so it can be seen.”

I’ve been amazed to see this truth lived out in my own life over the last few weeks.

A few weeks ago, I was talking to another friend who shared with me, rather unintentionally, that his family was down to their last $49 in their bank account. He was trying hard to fill it back up, but his hard work wasn’t bearing as much fruit as he needed.

He had done so much for me over the years that I wondered what I could do for him. I looked in my own bank account and saw that I had $500.36. Before I had time to talk myself out of it, I wrote out a check for $500 and put it in the mail to my friend. I knew it was the right thing to do. I just had to trust that God would somehow provide for us both.

The day my check arrived at my friend’s house, another need presented itself—this time, a bill I hadn’t anticipated for $2,000! To make matters worse, I got a message from my bank saying that a check I had deposited a few months earlier had accidentally been deposited twice, so they were removing the amount of that check—which happened to be $500— from my bank account! I then found out from my friend that same day that my check to him for $500 had just arrived at his house!

I took a deep breath and said, “God, I know You were prompting me to do this. I’m going to have to trust You to cover it.” I was headed out of town for the weekend, and I didn’t have time to think about it or to hardly even worry about. I had to trust God that He would work it out.

When I got back from my trip, I saw an email in my inbox that I had already seen just before I left for my trip, but I had simply ignored it because it looked like spam. It was from an agent for a company who said he had a client who was interested in buying one of the domain names I owned (a domain name is a website address, like http://www.theranch.org or http://www.thisdaysthought.org; I’ve bought and used several domain names over the years for different projects, each of which has cost me about $15 a year.)

I checked out this agent’s website, and the company did look legitimate. The domain name their client wanted to buy was one which I had used many years ago—and thought I might use again some day—but I wasn’t sure if I ever would. So I wrote to the agent and asked what his client was offering to pay for the domain name.

He wrote back and said, “$1,000.”

$1,000! I couldn’t believe it! On one hand, I wanted to jump at the opportunity. But on the other hand, I was still wondering if maybe I should hang onto that domain name in case I decided to use it again someday.

I thought, If they had offered me $10,000, that would be a no-brainer. I’d just pick out another domain name if I ever needed one in the future. But for $1,000, I’m not sure if I should give it up.

There was a button on the agent’s website where I could make a counter offer. I thought about entering $10,000, but that seemed ridiculous. I would have been happy to have maybe $2,000-3,000 for it. But to have $10,000, that would certainly be an easy decision.

Not wanting to give it much more thought, especially since I still wondered if this was even a legitimate offer, I clicked the button to make a counter offer, I entered $10,000 and then I pushed “Send.”

A few hours later, I got an email saying that the client was willing to offer $2,500, but that would be their final offer.

$2,500! That was right in between the $2,000-3,000 that I said I would be happy with! And not coincidentally, that was exactly the amount I was needing to cover my two unexpected expenses: $500 for my friend and $2,000 for myself.

“God, I can’t believe it! I’m sorry I had so little faith!” Trusting now that it was God’s provision, I clicked the button that said, “Accept Offer.” By the end of the week, I had transferred my domain name to the client and had deposited their check into my bank account. My friend cashed the check I sent him, and I paid my unexpected bill.

When I looked back at the original email from the agent, I saw that it had come on the same morning that my friend had received my check (and I received the notice from my bank that it was $500 short), and the same day I received that unexpected bill for $2,000. God’s provision was already there in my inbox. It was merely a matter of the light shining on the provision so it could be seen.

This reminded me of the unusual way Jesus paid a bill for a friend and Himself one day, too.

When a tax collector came to Jesus and Peter, asking them to pay their two-drachma “temple tax,” Jesus gave Peter these unusual instructions. Jesus said:

“…go to the lake and throw out your line. Take the first fish you catch; open its mouth and you will find a four-drachma coin. Take it and give it to them for My tax and yours” (Matthew 17:27b, NIV).

I can imagine the surprise on Peter’s face when he threw out his fishing line, reeled in a fish and there in its mouth was a four-drachma coin!

The provision for both Peter and Jesus was there all along, either already in the fish’s mouth, or perhaps on the bottom of the lake, just waiting for the God of the universe to direct the fish to nibble along until it picked up the coin in its mouth and went to the spot where Peter would be fishing. God’s provision was already there before the need presented itself. It was merely a matter of the light shining on the provision so it could be seen.

I was thinking about sharing this story with you today, about God’s provision for me, but then something else popped that made me hesitate. Yet another need had presented itself that I had no way of meeting. I thought, God, how can I write this story about You providing for our needs even before the needs present themselves when I’m facing another need right now that I have no idea how I’m going to meet?!? But then something amazing happened—just yesterday.

Back on Thursday, when this need arose, we had a terrible snowstorm. Schools and businesses were closed for the first time all winter. My mail had been delivered to my mailbox before the storm got too bad, but by the time I went out to the mailbox later in the day, the door to the mailbox had blown open by the storm. A magazine was hanging half-way out, soaked in snow. I wondered if anything else had blown out, and as I looked around, I did find a piece of junk mail almost completely covered by snow and soaking wet. I tried to look for any other mail that might have blown out, but the storm was too fierce to keep searching any further.

Then yesterday, when almost all of the snow had finally melted, I looked out in my yard. There were six pieces of mail strewn all over the yard that had been covered completely by snow just a few days before. I picked up each one, seeing that some were important and others were not—and one from a church where I used to attend. When I opened the last letter from the church, I was in shock! Enclosed was a check for the exact amount of the need I had learned about on the day of the snowstorm! A letter was attached explaining that the church wanted to give our ministry a special one-time gift from their surplus offerings from the previous year. This check was a portion of that surplus for the year! (In all the years since we attended that church, we had never received such a gift before. This was completely unexpected!)

Again, I was astounded, not only that the need was covered fully, but that it had been already covered on the very same day that the need had presented itself. God’s provision was already there; it was merely hidden under a blanket of snow until the light of the sun shown upon it!

Chapter 5: What Are You Looking For?

I’ve just returned from Israel, where I took my two youngest kids to celebrate Easter in the Holy Land. It was a terrific trip, the highlights of which were baptizing my kids in the Jordan River and worshipping with them the next day at the Garden Tomb in Jerusalem with other believers from all over the world. It was phenomenal!

I mean, how could it not be phenomenal? To be in the Holy Land on Easter morning, worshipping in a beautiful garden while looking at an empty tomb that dates back to the time of Christ. And then to be listening to Scriptures being read about what happened on that first Easter morning—events that took place right there in the city where I was worshipping?!?

Yet not everyone was so inspired. On our way out of the service, I heard a woman say (scream, really), “What a waste!” 

She then continued her tirade as she walked down the street, cutting down everything that happened in that early morning worship service. She was fuming. Absolutely fuming.

I thought, Were we even at the same service? How could she not have been totally moved by the music, the message and all that happened during that sweet time in the presence of God?

I’ve seen the same thing happen at other sites throughout Israel. I remember the first time I ever stepped foot in the Church of the Holy Sepulcher, a church which had been built in the 4th century over the spot where believers had been shown for centuries where Christ was crucified. When I walked into the building, I fell to my knees and cried for at least ten minutes straight. I was so thankful for what Jesus had done for me there on that hill. It didn’t matter to me that the church was filled with noise and people and an eclectic collection of artifacts that had been donated by kings and queens over two millennia. All I could see was the image of my Savior, saving me from my sins, as He died there on that hill nearly 2,000 years ago.

Yet as I walked out of that church, I heard people debating whether the church was beautiful or gaudy, whether this was or was not the true location of the crucifixion or if it was instead at the Garden Tomb a short walk away. Other people were shaking their heads at the chaos they had experienced inside, while still others were absolutely enthralled to have visited a place where their parents, and their grandparents before them, had made similar pilgrimages over the years.

While we were all looking at the same things, we were not all looking for the same things. And therein lied the difference: what we were looking for versus what we were looking at.

I shared this difference later in the week with our tour group of 38 people—because after five or six days of touring around, it could have been easy to start thinking that all we were seeing was a bunch of rocks. At the Church of the Holy Sepulcher, you can reach through a hole in the floor and touch the top of the rock that makes up the hill where Jesus died and over which the church was built. At the Garden Tomb, you can walk inside an empty tomb from the time of Christ, carved out of the rock in the hillside. In Bethlehem, you can walk down some stairs below the altar and touch a similar rock in a hole in the floor that marks where Jesus was likely born.

Bo, Kaleo and me at the Garden Tomb for Easter in Jerusalem.
Bo, Kaleo and me at the Garden Tomb for Easter in Jerusalem.

Everywhere we went we saw rocks, whether it was the Western Wall (built out of rocks), or the Church of All Nations (built over the rock where Jesus wept in the Garden of Gethsemane), or the Temple Mount, on which stands the iconic “Dome of the Rock”—inside of which is… well, as the name clearly states… a rock!

And yet our trip was about so much more than rocks. It wasn’t what we were looking at that was so important, but what we were looking for.

As I walked into the city of Capernaum, for instance, which contains broken columns of pillars from the ancient synagogue in that city, I was struck by the fact that Jesus healed and transformed the lives of two blind men there in that city when they put their faith in Him. That story was the same story that I was reading in my Bible—2,000 years later and 7,000 miles away—which inspired me to put my faith in Jesus. I felt I had been healed just as miraculously as those who had come to Jesus in Capernaum. And on this trip, I had in my backpack a copy of a book I had written in which I describe how Jesus changed my life when I read that story that took place in Capernaum.

I pulled out the book and showed it to our group, sharing with them what had happened to me 29 years ago when I read that story of what happened in Capernaum nearly 2,000 years later and 7,000 miles away. Yes, we were all looking at the ancient rocks of Capernaum, chiseled into the shapes of pillars and seats for a synagogue to use thousands of years ago. But it wasn’t the rocks that I was thinking about as I testified to the group about what Jesus had done in my life. It was the Man who had walked among those rocks, the Man who had taught and healed and touched people’s lives all those years ago and the Man who was still touching people’s lives—like mine—all these years later.

Aside from the truth that we were looking at rocks, the bigger truth was that each of those rocks told a story. In fact, Jesus Himself said, when His followers were praising Him as He entered Jerusalem and the religious leaders told Him to silence His followers:

“I tell you, if they keep quiet, the stones will cry out” (Luke 19:40, NIV).

And here, 2,000 years later, those same stones still testify to the Savior who spoke those words!

As I shared my testimony with our group that day in Capernaum, I was thankful that it wasn’t just the rocks which testified to the Savior. In the words of a terrific praise song from the 90’s: 

“I ain’t gonna let no rock out-praise me!”

It was hard for me to walk around the Holy Land and think about much else except praise for my Savior who has touched me in so many ways. It wasn’t what I was looking at that sparked such strong reactions within me, but what I was looking for.

What about you? What are you looking for today? Don’t just focus on what you’re looking at. Keep your eyes open wide. Who knows? God may even speak to you through a rock.

Chapter 6: Remembering To Smile

Last weekend I had a chance to dance in a recital with my childhood dance teacher from 40 years ago. She’s now teaching my daughter’s tap class, and at the beginning of the school year, she said, “Eric, you don’t have to sit out in the hallway. You can come and dance with us! Just take off your shoes and dance in your socks.”

Part of me really wanted to do it. I loved my weekly tap classes as a kid. They always made me smile (and as my sister-in-law says, “How can you not smile when tapping?!”).

But another part of me was really embarrassed by the idea. I’m over 50 (53 today, actually!) and I couldn’t imagine how it would look to see myself in the classroom mirror, tapping again. But my tap teacher is now 75 and still tapping away. How could I say “No” to Miss Janet?

So I took off my shoes and went into the classroom, along with my daughter and a few other moms and their daughters. By the end of the class I was hooked. I hadn’t laughed so much or so long in a long, long time, and for that alone I told Miss Janet I’d be back again the following week. I went out and bought a pair of tap shoes and for the past 9 months have been tapping away with Miss Janet and my daughter every week.

Last weekend was the culmination of our year together, as I danced with my daughter and Miss Janet in her annual dance recital—her 60th since she began teaching—and she wanted to do it up right with a big bang.

She asked if I would dance with her in a special number at the end of the show, along with several other current and former students of hers. Again, I demurred, as I couldn’t imagine dancing in a recital after all these years. But at 75, Miss Janet can still do the splits, so she wondered if I could dance with her and drop her down into the splits then pick her right back up again a couple times during the show.

She hooked me again. How could I say “No” to Miss Janet? So we did it! And we had a blast, laughing all the way.

Dancing with the Stars: my daughter and me rehearsing for one last dance with Miss Janet.
Dancing with the Stars: my daughter and me rehearsing for one last dance with Miss Janet.

After the show, I gave Miss Janet a card and a picture, thanking her for the laughs and smiles. The picture I gave her was of a pewter statue my mom had given me back when I was in high school, as my mom said it reminded her of me when I was a boy, taking acrobats from Miss Janet. The smile on the boy’s face was the same smile I had whenever I walked on my hands. There was something about it, walking on my hands and doing back flips—just like tapping—that always made me smile.

A pewter statue my mom had given me years ago of a boy doing what he loves.
A pewter statue my mom had given me years ago of a boy doing what he loves.

I told Miss Janet that I have put this statue on my desk from time to time over the years to remind myself to smile whenever I’m doing the work God has called me to do. Sometimes I get so bogged down in the details of the work that I forget to smile. I forget that this is what I was made for, this is what God has called me to do, created me to do and what I truly enjoy doing!

Whenever I look at this statue, it reminds me to smile. Not just when the work is done, not just when I’m on stage, not just when someone wants to take a picture, but right there in the midst of life, all along the way.

I love the quote of Eric Liddle, the Olympic runner who had a heart for missions. Although he wanted to move overseas to be a missionary, he also wanted to train for and run in the Olympics. When describing to a friend why he decided to run in the Olympics and wait until a later time o be a missionary, Eric said:

“When God created me, He made me fast. And when I run, I feel His pleasure.”

There are some things in life that just bring a smile to God’s face—oftentimes the same things that bring smiles to our faces. And He loves bringing smiles to our faces. He loves bringing us joy. He loves bringing us laughter. He loves delighting us with the intimacies and ecstasies of life.

But with all the pressures, obstacles and heartaches that we face, it’s sometimes easy to forget. We forget to smile.

It’s not that life isn’t hard. It’s not that there aren’t times when it’s right to be sad. It’s not that God wants us to fake it. But sometimes we just have to remind ourselves to smile. And when we do, it can open the door to bringing joy back to our lives. As the Bible says:

“A happy heart makes the face cheerful… the cheerful heart has a continual feast” (Proverbs 15: 13a, 15b).

I was sad a few weeks ago when Miss Janet told me this would be her last recital and the end of her teaching career. After 60 years of teaching over 7,500 students, she was going to retire after the show. I wanted to cry. But looking at Miss Janet, how could I be sad? She had brought such joy back into my life. I had had so much fun all year that I was ready to take her class over and over again.

But as I told her in my card, I was so thankful she had invited me to dance with her for one more year, so thankful to dance with her in the recital and so thankful for the laughs and smiles again. I really needed them.

And whenever I was dancing with her, I didn’t need the reminder.

Thank you, Miss Janet, and many blessings on your years ahead!

Chapter 7: Moment By Moment

I’d like to encourage you today to put your trust in God for just one moment. Whatever you’re facing, whatever you’re working through, whatever you’re dealing with or wondering about, put your trust in Him for just one moment.

Trust Him that He can walk you through it. Trust Him that He will help you all along the way. Trust Him that He will never leave you or forsake you, that He will never leave you alone, that He is working things out behind the scenes in ways that You could never imagine.

I shared a story yesterday at my son Josiah’s graduation ceremony about his commitment to working hard on the things he loves. My wife and I homeschooled all six of our kids, and this was our fourth to graduate from high school. I was speaking to a group of fellow homeschooling families in the area who had gathered to celebrate twenty-two seniors who were graduating this year. I said:

“We hit a pretty major bump in our homeschooling road about four years ago when my wife was diagnosed with cancer, and sadly she passed away just nine months after her diagnosis. Since I work from home, my wife wanted me to keep homeschooling the kids, as long as I felt it was doable for me and working for them. There were plenty of days when I wasn’t sure if it was doable for me or working for them, but we had had days like that before, so we all kept at it. I felt like some things were slipping through the cracks, though, like continuing their piano lessons. I had taught them for years when they were younger, and we had hired teachers for them at other times, but it had been a while since any of my kids had played at all. I kept telling myself I should get them back into the piano because they were all really good at it, but I hadn’t been able to do it yet.

“One night I came home from an event and heard Josiah playing an incredible piece on the piano. I hadn’t heard him play in a long time and had never heard that particular piece before. I was stunned, and I asked him when he learned to play it. He said, ‘Every time you’re gone, I’ve been working on it. I was going to wait until I had finished the whole piece to play it for you.’ I about burst into tears. (And I also thought, ‘I should leave more often!’) But it really spoke to my heart that even when I feel the weakest in my abilities, I can trust my kids to God and His abilities, because He’s able to do way more for them than I could ever do. I also learned that I can trust my kids, that if there’s something they really want to learn, they will.”

I had no idea that God, and my son, were already working behind the scenes. As I shared that story yesterday, I was reminded that I could trust God for the things I’m facing today, and will face tomorrow, and the next day, too.

I wrote a song for the piano about twenty years ago called “Moment By Moment.” I wrote it after having attended a conference where the topic one night was about the power of trusting in God—even for just one moment. The speaker asked us if we thought we could put our trust in Him for just one moment, that moment, right then. 

Yes, I thought, I can certainly trust Him for a moment. She then asked if we could trust Him again for the next moment, the one we were experiencing right then. Yes, of course, that was easy, too. I could trust Him for another moment.

She then said that if we could just keep trusting God like that, moment by moment, those moments would add up to minutes, minutes would add up to hours, and hours would add up to days, then months, then years. If we could keep trusting God moment by moment, we would end up trusting Him for the rest of our lives. “Don’t underestimate what God can do in a moment,” she said. 

I had to agree. There’s power in trusting God, even if it’s just for one moment.

When I wrote the song “Moment By Moment” almost twenty years ago, I was just getting started with writing music. Although I loved playing the piano and had played my whole life, I had never written anything on my own until a friend walked up to me one day while I was practicing the piano. He gently closed the piano book in front of me and said, “Play now. I’d like to hear what you’d play if you didn’t have someone else’s music in front of you.”

I stared at the closed book. Then I stared at my friend. I stared back at the closed book again. I had no idea what to play! I had never played a song without sheet music in front of me. I sat there for over an hour, looking at the closed book, looking at my hands on the keys and talking to my friend about why I didn’t know how to do what he was asking me to do.

But because of my friend’s gesture of closing the book in front of me, and his genuine interest to hear what I would play if I were to play what was written on my heart—not just on the page—I gave it a try.

Over the next few weeks, I began turning those heart songs into piano songs that others could listen to and enjoy. “Moment By Moment” was one of the songs that came out, as I was reflecting on the idea of what could happen if I were to really trust God, even in a moment like that.

Last weekend, I had a chance to play that song on stage at our church during a time of communion. As I played, I couldn’t help but reflect back to the time when I first wrote that song almost twenty years ago and how much God had done in my life over those twenty years. I was now playing that music that was written on my heart and letting God use it to touch the hearts of several thousand people who had gathered to worship Him that morning. Praise God! 

I had trusted Him moment by moment, and all of those moments had turned into minutes, then hours, then days and months and years.

Don’t underestimate what God can do in a moment, as the speaker encouraged us to consider all those years ago.

Keep putting your trust in Him, moment by moment. And when you do, you—and many others around you—will be blessed.

The sheet music for my song Moment By Moment, from my album called Clear My Mind.
The sheet music for my song Moment By Moment, from my album called Clear My Mind.

The sheet music for my song Moment By Moment,from my album called Clear My Mind.

Chapter 8: My Sanctuary

I’d like to encourage you this week to find a place where you can spend some quiet time with God. Not necessarily just a quiet place, but a place where you can really sense God’s presence, where you can talk with Him and He can talk with you, where you can get away from the craziness of the world and enjoy spending time with the God who created you, who loves you and who cares about the things going on in your life even more than you care about them.

Whether it’s a physical sanctuary in a church or a prayer closet in your home or a hammock swaying in the breeze between two trees, I pray that You’ll be able to find your own kind of sanctuary this week—a place of refuge, a place where you can truly enjoy being in the presence of God.

I remember walking into a church sanctuary one day in the middle of the week. I was all by myself, and I thought I’d just sit down and play the piano. As I was sitting there calmly by myself, I suddenly realized that I wasn’t alone. God Himself was right there with me. That church sanctuary became instantly transformed into a literal “sanctuary,” a holy place where the presence of God had come to rest.

Having God’s presence show up like that was such a wonderful feeling that I started writing a song about it while I was there. I called it, “My Sanctuary.” It went, in part, like this:

“All I want
All I need
Is to be with You
And to know You’re near.

“All I want
All I need
Is to talk with You
And to know You’ll hear.

“And I know
There’s a place
I can go to feel Your presence
Oh, Lord, bring me there
Bring me home.”

I continued to write and sing a new song to the Lord that day, a song that had welled up within my soul and had come out as an expression of thankfulness to Him for showing up and being with me in that place.

The sheet music for my song My Sanctuary, as found on my album called Soothe My Soul.
The sheet music for my song My Sanctuary, as found on my album called Soothe My Soul.

Earlier this year I had a chance to walk through the streets of Jerusalem and go down inside the tunnels along the western wall of the Temple Mount area. Inside these tunnels, there’s a place you pass that is the closest you can get these days to the “holy of holies,” the place in the Temple in the days of King Solomon where God said His presence would dwell. That spot in the tunnels is a fairly holy spot still today, and God’s presence still seems to exude from it. People come from all over the world to stand and pray at that spot near the wall. It’s a holy spot, for sure, knowing that you’re standing in a place that has been revered and hallowed by so many people over such a long span of years.

Yet I’ve experienced similar “holy places” in various spots around the world—not because anything particular happened on those spots at some point in history, but because I felt God’s presence in those places in powerful ways that can only be described as holy moments.

Holy spots like these abound. And if a holy spot is defined by a place where God’s presence dwells, then such a spot could be anywhere at any time, all around the world.

A few years ago a woman stayed at our house for a few months to help us repair and restore it. She had come from overseas to help us out as we worked on it, and she said she felt God’s presence there in a particular way as she stayed. On the day she left, we were walking around the house looking at various aspects of it when she came to a plaque in the front entrance of the house. On it was a picture of a house with the words: “Home is where the (HEART) is.” (There was a picture of a heart where the word “HEART” would have appeared.)

Our guest took out a pencil and wrote on the heart just one word in very small but distinct capital letters: LORD. The plaque now read what she had experienced there: “Home is where the LORD is.” I’ve often been reminded of that truth as I look at that plaque. Home is not just where the heart is, but home is anywhere the LORD is. And since there’s nowhere in the world that the LORD isn’t, then we can come into His presence and get that sense of “home” anywhere in the world. We just need to be willing to take the time to seek Him, invite Him in and then acknowledge His presence when He is there.

There’s a joy that comes from being in God’s presence. There’s a sense of safety, of comfort, of protection that comes from spending time with Him. A “sanctuary” is just such a place. It’s a safe haven, an oasis, a shelter, a retreat, a hideaway, a port in the storm. But more than those things, a sanctuary is a place where the presence of God dwells.

That’s why I want to encourage you this week to find a place where you can spend some quiet time with Him—a place where you can really experience the presence of God. A place where you can talk with Him and He can talk with you. A place where you can get away from the craziness of the world and enjoy spending some time with the God who created you, who loves you and who cares about the things going on in your life even more than you care about them.

My prayer is that you’ll be able to find such a place. And when you do, I pray you’ll feel right at home.

Will you pray with me?

Father, thank You for being a shelter in the storm, a place of refuge, a strong tower in our times of trouble. Lord, we come to You this week, looking for Your presence and eagerly desiring to spend some time with You. Help us to find that place, wherever it may be, so that we can spend some time with You, soaking up all You have to convey to us, and letting us share with You all that’s on our hearts, too. Bring us into that place, Lord, and help us to come into it over and over and over again in the days ahead. In Jesus’ name, Amen.

Chapter 9: Keeping Your Feet Forward And Your Knees Bent

A friend recently asked me, “How do you feel when you come across a boulder that’s in your way?”

How do I feel? I didn’t understand the question.

Maybe my friend meant to say, “What do you do when you come across a boulder that’s in your way?” Because I know the answer to that one. I usually try to talk to the boulder (if the boulder is in the form of a person) or to God (if the boulder is related to finances or health or a person to whom I can’t talk for some reason). I usually try to explain why I need to keep going the way I’m going, asking them to help me keep going or to move out of the way so I can get through.

But my friend said, “No, that’s not what I’m asking. I’m asking, ‘How do you feel when you come across a boulder?’”

Again, I didn’t understand the question. “Can I just go around the boulder?” I asked.

“Sure, you can go around it if you want to,” my friend said. “But that’s not what I’m asking. I’m asking, ‘How you feel when you come across one that’s in your way?’”

How do I feel? “Well,” I said, “I usually feel frustrated. Angry. Hurt. Of course, that’s how I feel. Isn’t that obvious? Isn’t that the way everyone feels?”

My friend didn’t answer, but simply said, “I think there’s something God wants to say to you. That’s why I’m asking.”

So over the next few days, I began to pray about the question: “How do I feel when I come across a boulder that’s in my way?” The answer seemed so obvious that I didn’t understand why it would even matter.

But while praying one day, I suddenly remembered something from many years ago—when I was just a kid. I was white-water rafting with my family on a river in Colorado. The guide who rented us the raft and was helping us to navigate the river gave us a helpful tip:

“If you fall out of the raft, float on your back with your feet forward and your knees bent. That way, if you run into a boulder underwater, you’ll hit it with your feet first and be able to step up over it or push off and go around it. But if your feet aren’t forward, you’re likely to run into it with your back or your side or your head and you could get hurt pretty badly. And if your knees aren’t bent, you won’t be able to step up over it or push off and go around it. So be sure to keep your feet forward and your knees bent.”

I’ve rafted and floated on many rivers since then, whether in the mountains of Nepal or on the plains here in Illinois, and I’ve always remembered that guide’s advice. It’s kept me from getting hurt several times.

So when I was praying about the boulder question, I remembered the guide’s advice. And I suddenly realized that God did have something He wanted to say to me.

There have been times in my life when I’ve come across boulders that were in my way. Boulders that seemed to pop up out of nowhere. Boulders that threatened to derail me from the direction I was wanting to go. And my reaction has almost always been the same. I get frustrated. Angry. Hurt.

I’ve tried talking to the boulders and talking to God. But when the boulders haven’t moved, I’ve just gotten more frustrated. More angry. More hurt. Even when the boulders have moved, I’ve often felt the pain of running into the boulders long after I’ve moved on farther down the river.

White-water rafting in northern California with my son, Lucas, (middle-left) and my friend, Al Lowry (bottom-left). I’m on the top-left next to the guide. (June, 2005)
White-water rafting in northern California with my son, Lucas, (middle-left) and my friend, Al Lowry (bottom-left). I’m on the top-left next to the guide. (June, 2005)

My friend’s question made sense to me now. What if, I thought, instead of getting sideswiped by the boulders that I come across in life, I change my posture, knowing that there are probably going to be more boulders ahead, and keep my feet forward and my knees bent so I can step up and over them or push off and go around them? It might not change the fact that I’ll still run across some boulders—and it might still take some effort to get around them. But I might not get so frustrated when I come across them. I might not get so angry. I might not get so hurt.

I began to think through some of the boulders I had run across in the past and how this advice could have helped me during those times: when I asked a boss for a favor, and he said no; when I asked a girl if she wanted to date, and she said no; when I asked God to change a situation, and He said no. In each situation, I remember getting frustrated. Angry. Hurt. I took their answers personally when oftentimes it wasn’t personal at all, at least not at its core. In each situation, the others were just doing what they felt was right in the situation, but somehow it got personal from there.

As I thought about each of those situations from my past, I wondered, What if I had kept my feet forward and my knees bent? How would I have reacted differently? The biggest and most obvious difference was that I wouldn’t have gotten nearly as frustrated, nearly as angry or nearly as hurt. I wouldn’t have taken it all so personally. Instead, I could have stepped up and over the boulders, or pushed off and gone around them, rather than getting sideswiped, hit in the back, or knocked on the head.

I also thought about some of the boulders I’m facing now—those barriers that seem to be in my way and could potentially give me some real knocks, too, if I’m not prepared for them. I can easily see how I don’t have to take it so personally if the boulders don’t move. I can see it better from the boulders’ perspectives. A boulder, after all, isn’t necessarily at fault for being plopped down in the middle of the river. It’s just sitting there innocently, perhaps, but happens to be in my way!

And while I know very well that my guide’s advice can’t prevent me from ever experiencing frustration or anger or hurt, it does give me a way to minimize or eliminate much of the frustration or anger or hurt. The big difference is posture. Preparedness. And not letting every obstacle seem so dang personal.

I finally saw the value in my friend’s question. As boulders are popping up now, I’m trying harder to remember the advice of my Guide:

“Keep your feet forward and your knees bent.”

I can already see that I’m getting less frustrated, less angry and less hurt when I do run across boulders that are in my way. And, to my amazement, with my feet forward and my knees bent, it’s sometimes as easy as stepping up and over them or pushing off and going around. Praise God!

Chapter 10: Going For What’s In Your Heart

I’ve been challenged recently to go for what’s in my heart. By that I mean searching for that which is deepest in my heart and going for it. I only have so many heartbeats in life, and I want to make each one count.

A few months ago, I was praying about several things I was considering doing, but for various reasons I wasn’t sure if I should do them or if I could do them or how things might turn out if I did do them. I’m a thinker by nature, and I usually pray about, think about and analyze every decision, weighing the pros and cons fairly thoroughly before coming to a conclusion. While this trait is helpful at times—and has spared me from some disastrous results—it has also lead to some serious “analysis paralysis,” whereby I’ve been unable to come to any conclusions at all.

So a few months ago, while writing in my journal, I listed out the various decisions I was trying to make. As I asked God about each of these decisions, I felt like He was asking me: “What’s in your heart, Eric?”

The question was like a jolt to my system.

Really? I thought. What’s in my heart?

The answers came instantly, and I wrote down each one:

– I’d like to…
– I’d like to…
– I’d like to…
– I’d like to…
– I’d like to…

As I looked at each answer, I thought, Yeah, I guess I really could do each of those things. Some of them were risky, expensive and not likely to pan out for various reasons, but none of them were sinful or unbiblical. In fact, some of them were very honoring to God and to others. When I found out what was deepest in my heart for each decision, the answers were clear—much clearer than I realized before—and I was surprised at how quickly those answers came.

After a little more time in prayer, I decided to go for what was in my heart in each of the situations and see where they led.

In one case, I wanted to take my family on what has become a many-year tradition of snow skiing for a day, and there was a particular day that stuck out in my mind when we should go. It would be the very last possible day of skiing, however, as we hadn’t been able to go until that time. The ten-day weather forecast looked terrible though… hot, actually! I couldn’t imagine there would be any snow left. But that date and the details seemed so clear to me that I felt we should go ahead and plan the trip. Even up until the day before our scheduled trip, the weather reports still looked like it would be impossible for us to ski the next day! While my head said, “No,” my heart said, “Yes.” 

We went and there was plenty of snow! The day turned out to be amazingly beautiful! We had never had such a unique day of “spring skiing” like that before.

A beautiful day of spring skiing with my family. (Click here to watch video.)
A beautiful day of spring skiing with my family. (Click here to watch video.)

In another decision, I wanted to send a gift and a blessing to someone who I felt had wronged me in the past. I didn’t know how this person might take it, and I didn’t want to bring up old wounds. Yet he was embarking on a new season in his life, and I wanted to offer my genuine blessing—and honest forgiveness—as he headed into his future. While my head said, “No,” my heart said, “Yes.” I sent the gift as a blessing, along with a letter explaining why I had sent it. He received it gladly and sent me a note of appreciation. While it may not have resolved everything related to our past hurts, it was a good start and good for my heart—and hopefully for his.

I’m still working on and waiting to see how some of the other decisions will turn out. But I can say that I’ve felt good about the decisions I’ve made. Even with the very real risks and costs involved, I feel like I’ve chosen a path which makes for a richer, more abundant life, no matter what.

As I thought about each of these decisions, I thought about some other decisions I’ve made in the past year when I went with what was in my heart—in spite of where my fears might have taken me.

I wanted to take my two youngest kids to Israel this past Easter, but was warned by the tour agency that the trip would be more expensive over Easter and the sites would be packed. As time went on, I still felt I should do it, but I was concerned that the issues raised by the tour agency were very real and very valid. The company even cancelled the trip at one point because of these issues, so I looked into going on my own. While I found some good rates and availability at various hotels and sites, I was still worried about the crowds.

A few days before I needed to make a final decision, I decided to call the tour agency again to see if they had reconsidered. Not only had they reconsidered, but they now had 35 people signed up to go—and the trip turned out to be less expensive than any other trip during the year! The tour company just hadn’t gotten back to me to let me know. 

So I signed up. The company wrote back and asked if I would be willing to be the spiritual leader for the group, doing daily devotionals at each of the historic sites and baptizing those who wanted to be baptized in the Jordan River. That was exactly what I was already planning to do with my own kids. 

I said, “Yes,” we went, and my kids and I—and our group of 38—were all abundantly blessed. Instead of clamoring crowds, we found ourselves first in line at many of the sites for a variety of reasons. While the tour company was right to bring up their concerns, I was glad I kept going for that which was in my heart.

Touring Israel with our group over Easter.
Touring Israel with our group over Easter.

One last story.

I met with a group a few months ago who, for the past several years, has sent our ministry some gracious donations every month. This group stepped up a few years ago to help out when things were extremely tight for our ministry even though our type of ministry was outside the scope of activities they would normally help to fund. I appreciated their help at the time, as it was a compassionate response to a genuine need. With their help and the help of others who stepped in at that time, our funding has since gotten much stronger. As this group was recently re-evaluating their annual giving, they let me know that since we were in a better position ourselves, they were going to cut back their support in the months ahead, phasing it out completely within a year. I told them I was very thankful for all the help they had given us, and we set up a meeting to talk about the details of their plan for my own budgeting purposes.

Before the meeting, however, I felt like God was asking me again, “What’s in your heart, Eric?” 

I was honest with God and said, “I’m very thankful for all the support they’ve given us to date, Father. It’s really helped to get us through a time when things were very tight. But,” I added, “if I were to be fully honest, I would hope that after all this time of partnering together, they would double what they’re sending us each month to help us go further than ever before, rather than scaling back and eventually phasing out their support. I would even be happy if they could just send us $1 a month—if only for the sake of feeling like they were ‘cheering us on’ in our ministry.”

When I met with the group to discuss the phase-out details, they asked at the end of our conversation how I felt about everything. “For the record,” I said, “my ‘official’ answer is that I’m very thankful for all the help you’ve given us. It’s really made a difference for our ministry over the past several years, and for that I’m truly thankful.”

“And what’s your ‘unofficial’ answer?” one of them asked. “That’s the one we really want to hear.”

“‘Unofficially,’” I said, “I’m still very thankful for all you’ve done so far. But after all this time of partnering together, what I would really love is if you could double your monthly support—and keep supporting us for as long as you can.”

They thanked me for my candor and said they would meet to talk and pray some more about it all. A few weeks later, I got a call from the group. Rather than cutting back their monthly donations and phasing out their giving, they had decided to continue helping with their monthly support (although not double as I had suggested, but more than I was expecting). And furthermore, they had no plans to phase out our support at all! Instead, they were going to now consider us one of their ongoing, regularly supported ministries. This one decision would impact us for years to come! 

In a follow-up letter the group gave me with all of the details, I was struck by one phrase in particular. It said, “We are here to cheer you on…” I had never mentioned that phrase to them at all! But that’s what I was wanting most. It felt like God Himself had given me the answer to that which was deepest on my heart!

Once again, I had taken a risk—in this case a risk of appearing ungrateful or hurting the feelings of people who had become dear friends over the years. But once again, I’m so glad I went for what was in my heart. And in so doing, not only have I been blessed, but thousands of others will benefit from this group’s ongoing generosity. 

Thank You, Lord, for giving me the courage to go for that which is deepest in my heart!

Chapter 11: Being Who I Am

I was having dinner with a friend when the conversation became awkward. We were talking about a subject we hadn’t discussed in a long time, and we didn’t know where each other stood.

I could tell I was holding back from saying what I wanted to say, and my friend could tell the same. To ease the tension, my friend said, “Eric, how about this: why don’t you just be who you are, and I’ll be who I am. Then we’ll take it from there.”

Whoosh! In an instant, all of the tension left my body.

Rather than worrying about how my words might be perceived, I felt the permission to just “be who I am”—in this case to speak freely—thereby advancing our conversation by leaps and bounds.

A few days later I was flying out west to meet with some people I had never met before. I was nervous about the meeting, and I was afraid I might feel “very small” in the presence of people who were rightly considered by many to be “very big.”

As I was praying about the meeting, asking God to use our meeting to bear fruit for His kingdom in whatever way He wanted, I began worrying about what I should or shouldn’t bring up during our meeting. In answer to my question, I felt like God said: “Be yourself, Eric. Be who you are. And I’ll be who I AM!”

Whoosh! In an instant, all of the tension left my body.

Rather than worrying about how my words might be perceived, I felt I had permission to just “be who I am”—in this case to relax and enjoy this time of meeting new people—knowing that God would be who He IS: the great “I AM.”

Over the next few days, as I met with person after person during the meeting, I was able to truly be myself and enjoy the moments as they came. I laid down any agenda I might have had and often just thought, What would I do if I were to just be who I am? 

When I saw one of the “very big” people walking towards me carrying a stack of chairs to the meeting room, rather than thinking of what I should say or how I should say it, I thought, What would I do if I were to just be who I am? My answer: I’d offer to help carry the chairs! 

I offered, he accepted, and I began making trips back and forth with him just carrying the chairs.

It was so simple! I knew I could trust that if God had something more for me to say or do, He would prompt me to do or say it. But in the absence of His prompting otherwise, it was easy to know what to do next: just be who I am! And in so doing, not only was I blessed, but so were those around me, even if it was in the most simple of ways.

This isn’t to say that “being who I am” isn’t without risk. There’s always some risk in letting down our walls—and some walls are good and right for the protection of ourselves and of others. Even my friend warned me during our dinner conversation that dropping walls doesn’t always end well. Life is messy. People are messy. But what a blessing to be able to share what was truly on my heart that night. And as my friend said later, “I know you, Eric, and I had to trust that no matter where our conversation went, something good would come of it.”

I’m still experimenting. I’m still exploring. But I’m enjoying the process, asking not only what God wants me to do, or what Jesus would do—which are both terrific questions—but also “What would Eric do?” What would I do, given the way God has created me, gifted me and wired me? And then doing it, just being who I am and letting others be who they are—and letting God be who He is: the great “I AM.”

Chapter 12: Telling Your Story

Last year, for the first time in my life, I decided to sit down and write out my full story—the story of how I came to put my faith in Christ and what’s changed in my life since I took that momentous step.

I wrote the story under a pen name because, even though I had told the story many times, I had never shared all of the details in such a personal way. I wasn’t sure if I would ever publish it at all, and I didn’t want anyone to know it was me who had written it in case I decided against publishing it when I was done.

But by the time I got to the end, I knew that this was a story that had to be told—with all its ugly bits and happy bits and funny bits intact. I offered the book to several publishers, many of whom were initially interested, but none of whom would eventually publish it, saying it was too secular for the Christian market, and too Christian for the secular market.

So I published it myself. Within the first 24 hours, it went to #10 on Amazon’s best seller list in the category where stories like mine are posted! Hallelujah! (I would still love for a publisher to pick up the book and take it to places I could never take it on my own. But in the mean time, I’ll just keep sharing it with as many people as I can!)

My story... now at inspiringbooks.com
My story… now at inspiringbooks.com

After I began sharing my story in this way, other people said they were touched by it and asked if I could help them tell their stories about how God had worked in their lives. I said I’d be glad to help.

So this year, I’ve prayed about and committed to helping five other people tell their stories, two of whom have just finished their first drafts. And what incredible stories they are! It’s amazing to see what comes out when people are given the freedom to tell their stories, holding nothing back, and seeing how interesting, unique and genuinely intriguing each story is. As a friend told me when I was writing my story:

“Every person has a million dollar book inside of them. They just have to tell their own story—but they have to be brutally honest when they tell it.” 

I’m looking forward to sharing my friends’ stories with you when they’re finished. One is by a professional model who came to Christ and was able to deal with the ugliness she still felt inside. Another is by a woman whose husband went through a horrendous crisis in his health which sent my friend back to the foot of the cross daily. While the details of each of their stories are different, the theme is the same: God had walked with them every step of the way.

Such stories are endless. As the apostle John said after writing down his story: 

“Jesus did many other things as well. If every one of them were written down, I suppose that even the whole world would not have room for the books that would be written” (John 21:25, NIV).

Maybe you’ve considered writing down your story. Maybe you’ve already started writing. Maybe you’ve wanted to tell your story, but you’re afraid of what others might think about you if you do. But as author and pastor Rick Warren says,

“Every saint has a past, and every sinner has a future.” 

Can I encourage you today to tell your story? Write it down, pass it around and let others see what Christ has done in your life!

I, for one, am fascinated by stories of faith to see how God has worked in other people’s lives. In fact, that’s why I love reading the Bible so much. It’s filled with stories of real people, who have lived real lives, and who have interacted with the real and living God.

I’m thankful that others have taken the time to write down their stories so I can learn from them. If you’ve been encouraged by hearing what God has done for others, think how others could be encouraged to hear what God has done for you.

What’s your story? Maybe it’s time to tell it. Will you pray with me?

Father, thank You for walking with us through the stories of our lives. Help us to be willing, eager and ready to tell our stories with others who desperately need to hear the words of hope that we can give them, hope that You will be there for them every step of the way as they live out their own stories. Use our words to touch people in a way that no one else could ever touch them. And as we share, may Your name be magnified, glorified and honored all along the way. In Jesus’ name, Amen.

Chapter 13. Dropping To My Knees (Part 1)

This fall, I’m hoping to start a new series of messages on the topic of prayer and how you can have a more effective prayer life.

I’ve been working on this series for more than five years, but for various reasons, I have not yet felt it was ready to share with you. But the past few months, I have found myself dropping to my knees more often than ever, and I feel the time is right to share these messages with you now.

Recently, when I hear about something that’s happening, or someone shares with me what’s going on in his or her life, it often seems like the only appropriate response is to literally get down on my knees and start praying. As a side note, I’m not normally prone to just dropping down to my knees. I’ll pray, yes, and I have prayed on my knees before. But what’s new lately is that I feel compelled that there’s nothing better I could do than to physically get down on my knees and pray—whether that means getting out of a chair, turning around and kneeling down, and putting my head and my hands down on the chair I was sitting on; or putting my head face-down in my pillow in the middle with my knees tucked up under me on my bed; or sometimes even dropping down to my knees as I’m going about my day, wherever I happen to be. In one way, I feel awkward doing this. But in another way, I often feel this is the only thing that seems right to do in the moment. As Abraham Lincoln has said:

“I have been driven many times to my knees by the overwhelming conviction that I had nowhere else to go.”

There are so many things in life that require prayer, and no other response seems to compare.

Will you pray with me?

Father, thank You that we can come to You in prayer anytime, day or night, whether on our knees, on our chairs, on our beds, or walking throughout this magnificent world You’ve created for us. I pray that You would speak to our hearts today about how our prayer lives can be more effective and how we can have richer conversations with You. Speak to our hearts in a way that only You can do, guiding us in the best next steps we can take to grow in our faith, to grow in our devotion to You and to touch the lives of others through prayer. We ask this all in the strong name of Jesus. Amen.

Chapter 14: Dropping To My Knees (Part 2)

Last week I wrote to you about how I’ve been doing a lot of praying on my knees lately, something that I’ve done from time to time over the years, but not as often as in these past few months. After I wrote that message and sent it out, an interesting thing happened.

I was at church later that night for our Sunday evening worship service. I was on the worship team at our church that day and had already played the keyboard for the morning service. We have an identical service every Sunday evening, so I thought I knew the routine just fine. Our worship team was waiting backstage in the green room for our cue to go out and take our places to lead worship when the senior pastor, who was preaching on stage, decided to have a special time of prayer with the congregation before we came on stage. With all of the recent violence in the world, he felt we needed to pray in a special way. He didn’t say anything other than to pray along with him.

I had just stood up along with the rest of the worship team, to get ready to go on stage. Then, without giving any other direction, our pastor simply knelt down on the stage and began to pray. When he dropped to his knees, I remembered my message from earlier that morning which I had entitled “Dropping To My Knees.” I thought, I should probably get down on my knees right now! But I also thought, But we’re about to go on stage as soon as he’s done praying; I’d better stand here and be ready. Yet without another moment’s hesitation, I was compelled, once again, to drop down to my knees. I did and immediately began praying.

Within seconds of my going down, I noticed that our whole worship team had done the same. There was no question on their parts either; no hesitation whatsoever. It was the only response that seemed right. I was floored, quite literally. We all prayed like that for several minutes, and when we were done, we simply stood up and walked onstage to lead worship. Our kneeling down to pray didn’t interrupt the flow one bit. In fact, I’m sure it helped the flow tremendously.

Why am I so resistant sometimes to just drop down on my knees when it seems to be the most natural thing in the world after I’ve done it? 

Later that night, I saw that the production assistant, who was giving us our cues backstage, had snapped a picture of our prayer time. She posted it online, thankful to be part of a church and a worship team who were willing to get down on their knees and pray.

Our worship team spontaneously praying on our knees backstage.
Our worship team spontaneously praying on our knees backstage.

I normally wouldn’t post a picture like this, as it seems odd to do so. But like the production assistant, I too was so thankful for the same reasons. I felt there was no better response that we could make to our pastor’s call to pray than to join him by praying on our knees.

Last night, I had another experience down on my knees. I was playing a game with my kids out in the back yard when the ball we were playing with bounced out into a field of soybeans that had grown up around our house. We could see the direction the ball went, but we couldn’t find it when we walked out into the field as the beans had grown to be about two feet high. I said to my son, “If we could just lay down on the ground and look under the leaves at the base of the beans, I think we could see it. But,” I added, “I really don’t want to lay down on the ground.” A moment later, guess where I was! Laid out flat on the ground!

Not seeing anything, I got back up onto my knees. And there, a few rows over, nestled at the base of the plants and hidden from view by the leaves above, was the ball. I was instantly transfixed, thinking, 

Some things are simply seen better when we’re down on our knees.

As it is with finding lost balls, so it is with prayer: some things are simply seen better when we’re down on our knees.

Will you pray with me?

Father, thank You for letting us get down on our knees at any time (or in our hearts at least, even if it’s not possible physically to get on our knees) and to come to You in prayer. Thank You that You hear our prayers and answer them, sometimes showing us things that we never would have seen had we not been on our knees. Thank You for others who model this kind of prayer for us, whether it’s a pastor, a friend, or even Your Son, Jesus, as He prayed in the Garden of Gethsemane. Thank You for helping us to see on our knees that which we might never see any other way. In Jesus’ name, Amen.

Chapter 15: Pulling Weeds

I woke up early on Tuesday morning to do something I really didn’t want to do: pull weeds. I don’t usually mind pulling weeds, but this was the last patch of what had become a week-long project of pulling weeds, and I was wearing out.

At first it was kind of fun. I was able to put on some headphones, get down on my knees and even take time to pray while I was down there. But after a week of pulling weeds, I was wearing out. I didn’t know how much longer it was going to take. I knew what I had to do though—and that was to just keep pulling weeds.

I decided not to worry about how long it would take, but to just keep going forward with the task at hand: pulling weeds. I got down on my knees again and began to pull. Surprisingly, after an hour of pulling, I was done! And not only with that patch, but since it was the last patch, I was done with the entire project that I had been working on for a week! The end had been right around the corner. I just didn’t know it. All I knew was that I just had to keep pulling weeds.

Pulling weeds...going, going...and finally gone!
Pulling weeds…going, going…and finally gone!

Yesterday morning, I woke up with another task at hand: recording a new song on the piano that I’ve been wanting to record for several months now. Unlike pulling weeds, this was a project I really wanted to do. But when I woke up yesterday morning, I felt like I was facing the same final patch of weeds again, and I had no idea when I would ever be able to finish the recording.

All I knew was that I just had to keep going and keep taking the next step that was right in front of me. Amazingly, within an hour, I had made huge strides in the recording process. By the end of the day, I had finished recording and editing all of the individual sound clips in order to turn them into one seamless and beautiful song. (I still have a few more “next steps” to take until the song is finished completely, so I can’t share it with you yet. But here’s a picture of the final note of the song in the bottom right corner of what has to be the longest and most complicated song I’ve ever recorded.)

The final note (the purple square in the bottom right corner)
The final note (the purple square in the bottom right corner)

One last story. 

I’ve been working through an unresolved situation with a friend for the past ten and a half months. While I believed there would be a resolution at some point, I felt like I had done everything I could do on my end, and I had no idea when that resolution might come.

This week I decided to take a personal prayer retreat for three days. While I’d been planning to do a prayer retreat with others at the end of the year, I thought it would be a good time to set aside the same amount of time on my own and enjoy my own personal time with God. Most of my kids were away at a music festival, so I had time to think and pray. 

On my knees in prayer that first morning, I laid out the various things I was praying about in my life. Later that night, my friend called, and during our two-hour conversation, things were resolved. I told my friend that I had just started a three-day prayer retreat that morning. I said, “If only for this conversation, I am so glad I set aside this time to pray.” And I still had two days of “retreating” to go!

I want to encourage you today that whatever seemingly insurmountable task may lay before you, whether it’s pulling weeds or recording a song or reaching a resolution with a friend, keep focused on the task at hand. Do what God has called you to do. Take the next right steps He has called you to take. Then trust the outcome into His gracious and loving hands.

Will you pray with me?

Father, thank You for giving us work to do here on earth, whether it’s pulling weeds, recording songs, or building friendships with others. Lord, I ask that You would help us to stay focused on the tasks before us, not getting overwhelmed by all the things that need to be done, but moving ahead with the next right thing we know to do. Lord, help us to accomplish all that You’ve put on our hearts to do—for Your sake, for our sake and for the sake of all those who will be touched by our efforts. In Jesus’ name, Amen.

Chapter 16. Holding Nothing Back

I have a secret to share with you today. Like many of my messages, this one is very personal. But I hope that giving you a peek inside my heart will be helpful. With that preface in mind, here’s what I’d like to share.

About a year ago, I fell in love. It was quite unplanned and quite unexpected. I was talking with a dear friend from long ago and far away when all of a sudden, I was smitten. I don’t know how it happened, but suddenly I was captivated—and I couldn’t let it go.

I didn’t tell anyone about it for two months, and I didn’t tell her about it for three. I just kept it all close to my heart, talking to God, asking Him what He wanted me to do, and asking myself what I would want, if I could really choose to do whatever I wanted.

After three months of praying on my own, I felt like I should tell her. I sent her a note and asked if we could talk. She said, “Yes,” she’d be glad to, and we picked a day to get together.

The night before we met, I asked God what He wanted me to tell her, and I felt like He said, “Let her know your heart, your fears, your prayers, your requests. She will be able to help you straighten them out.” I would have loved to do that, but it seemed like that would be way too much to share, way too early, and way too risky.

But it also felt like this was what God really wanted me to do. I asked Him, “Is there any scripture to confirm this?”

I opened my Bible and began to read a conversation between Samuel and Eli, as recorded in the book of First Samuel, chapter 3. Samuel was hesitant to tell Eli something that God had spoken to his heart, but Eli told Samuel to tell him everything, word for word, holding nothing back. The next words seemed to jump off the page:

“So Samuel told him, word for word. He held back nothing” (1 Samuel 3:18, MSG).

Again, God spoke to my heart: “Hold back nothing, Eric. Hold back nothing. It’s important for her to hear it and you to say it. Hold back nothing.”

The next day we met, and, over a cup of hot chocolate, I shared with her everything that was on my heart—all that I had been praying about during the previous three months—holding nothing back.

In the months that followed, we talked and prayed, exchanged emails and texts. We never dated, never kissed, never held hands. In fact, I didn’t even know if she had any feelings for me at all beyond our mutual friendship. All I knew was that God wanted me to share all that was on my heart, holding nothing back.

Six months later, I had finally finished sharing all that I could think of that was on my heart. I felt like I was a campfire that was being stoked with firewood continually until there was no more wood to throw on the fire. I had shared everything; there was nothing left to say; I had held nothing back. All I could do now was pray.

Not long after this, I was on tour in Israel and found myself standing on the Temple Mount, that hilltop in Jerusalem where Abraham once stood as he laid his son, Isaac, on the altar before God. I felt like God wanted me to do the same with this relationship. I had poured out my heart and said all I could say. Now He wanted me to lay it down before Him. So I did.

Months passed, and I heard no response. Then last week, I got a call. My friend had had time to process all that I had shared, and she was ready to respond.

As much as she felt honored by our friendship and appreciated all I had said, she felt that she wasn’t the one I was really looking for—that she was a placeholder for the one who was to come. She was glad to be that placeholder, to prepare my heart for that person in the future, but she couldn’t see herself as being that person.

I was disappointed, of course, but somehow I agreed with her! I knew that what she was saying was absolutely right. She really had helped me to straighten out all of my thoughts and feelings, fears and prayers. I was so glad I had shared with her all that I had shared. While I could have been tempted to see her response as a rejection (and if it was, it was the kindest rejection I had ever felt), God spoke to my heart to say that it wasn’t a rejection; it was an acceptance—an acceptance of God’s will, His perfect will, His BEST will, for both of our lives. God’s will is always goodwill, even when it doesn’t come in the form we might have expected.

As the ancient writer Epictetus said: 

“I am content with what happens, for I know that whatever God chooses is better than what I choose.”

I could have also been tempted to think that I had just wasted almost a year of energy—mental, physical and spiritual energy. But God stopped me in mid-thought and said,

“Time spent seeking My will with all your heart, soul, mind and strength is never wasted. It’s always invested, and it will pay huge rewards for years to come.”

It made me think of another quote, written by an unknown author, that says:

“Nothing lies beyond the reach of prayer except that which lies beyond the will of God.”

I believe that is true with all of my heart. I am thankful I sought God with all my heart, soul, mind and strength. I am thankful that I shared with my friend all that I shared, holding nothing back. And I am thankful for the answer which has come.

While I was hesitant to share this with you as it is so personal and so fresh, I know that the fruit often tastes sweetest when it’s fresh off the tree. May we all enjoy it together.

Will you pray with me?

Father, thank You that we can come to you anytime in prayer, seeking Your perfect will with all our heart, soul, mind and strength. Thank You that our time in prayer is never wasted, but always invested, and that it will pay rewards for years to come. Thank You for friends who let us share with them freely, and thank you for their gracious responses. And Lord, thank You for the reminder that Your will is always goodwill. In Jesus’ name, Amen.

Chapter 17: Drawing Water From Your Well

As a writer, I’m often pouring out to others that which has been poured into me. I’ll hear something that intrigues me, I’ll put it into practice in my own life, and then I’ll share what I’ve learned so others can enjoy it, too. I used to think of this as if I were being handed a cup of cool water, taking a good, long drink, and then, if I liked it, passing that cup along so others could taste it for themselves.

But I’ve come to realize it’s not as simple as just passing the cup along. It’s more like having the water poured over me and letting it filter through the soil of my life into my own personal well. When I later draw out that water and give it to others, it has been filtered and flavored in a way that is uniquely mine. The water may come from the same Source, but it now has a unique flavor, a flavor that is unique to my own personal well.

I told a friend I wanted to send her something I had written which was based on something she had shared with me. Before I sent it, I said, “Of course, you’ve already heard this before, because you’re the one who shared it with me!”

To which she replied, “Oh, no, I’d love to read it. I’m looking forward to seeing what the water filtered through your well tastes like.”

I thought her statement was precious and profound, something which I’ve pondered and savored ever since. On my wall at home, I have a small wall hanging that a young man had given me after I visited his church in the Philippines. I had shared a personal message with him from my heart, and he was so touched by what I said that he went out and bought this wall hanging to let me know how much my words had encouraged him. It says:

“You are special. God sends each person into this world with a special message to deliver, with a special song to sing, with a special act of love to bestow. No one else can speak your message, or sing your song, or offer your act of love. God has entrusted these only to you.”

A special wall hanging in my home given by a friend.
A special wall hanging in my home given by a friend.

The young man who gave it to me had written on the back of the wall hanging, “Thank you for enlightening me, for leading me into the right path, and for letting God use you.”

As I look back on what I shared with him in my message that day—now almost twenty years ago—I realize just how unique that message really was. It had been drawn from the well of my own personal encounters with God, and God had used it to touch him in a very personal way.

When you take the time to give out to others that which has come from your own personal encounters with God, you’re giving people water that is uniquely from your well—a well which God has spent so much time developing.

That’s one of the reasons why I love reading the Bible so much. I’m able to draw water from the wells of people like David and Abraham, Esther and Ruth, and especially Jesus. Each of them had a unique walk with God. Each of them received water from the same Source. Each of their stories and encounters with God has been filtered through his or her own unique soil. In turn, each of their stories adds to the richness and flavor of my own relationship with God.

You have your own unique well, too. God has poured water into you from His deep, deep well and filtered it through the soil of your life. Like Evian water that has been filtered through the soil in a small town in the French Alps and is now shipped all over the world, the water in your well is costly and precious. Why not draw it out and share it with others? No one else can speak your message, or sing your song, or offer your act of love. God has entrusted these only to you.

Chapter 18: Excavating My Heart

When people ask me how I’m doing, I know they genuinely want to know—and I genuinely want to tell them. And overall, I’m doing good, really good. But I’m also not immune to something that I imagine many of you have experienced as well. Every once in a while, and especially in the last few months, I’ve found myself bumping into that thing called “loneliness.”

It’s not that I don’t have friends or family. It’s not that I don’t enjoy a deep and personal relationship with God. It’s just that sometimes, in the midst of walking out my life, I feel like I’m walking all alone.

I bumped into it again last week when a friend called with some heartbreaking news. As I tried to digest the words—and the possibility of facing yet another major loss—I realized I had not just bumped into loneliness; I was about to become engulfed by it.

I was walking through the grocery store when it happened, while I was picking out food for the week with my youngest daughter. Suddenly I felt like I couldn’t take one more step. (I could have taken one more step. I just felt like I couldn’t.) I mentally scanned through my list of friends I could call or text so at least someone would know what was happening in case I melted down into a puddle right there in the frozen food section of Walmart.

But then my daughter came back with another item on our list, so I just kept walking. I kept checking things off my list. And for the next half hour, I battled my inner thoughts and emotions, trying to just focus on the next item on my list, and the next, until I finally made it to the checkout lane. I knew that this feeling would pass if I could just keep taking one step at a time, as feelings like this have passed before. But I was so thankful when, later that night, I got home and was able to crash into my bed, letting sleep take over and do its restorative work in my heart and soul.

The next day I talked to a friend and shared what had happened to me. She, too, had bumped into this kind of loneliness and had sometimes had been engulfed by it altogether. What she learned in that place, however, and what she shared with me, so touched my heart that I wanted to share it with you. She said: 

“That loneliness is God’s excavation of the ground, of a place in someone’s heart, of a place that God is going to fill. But He’s purposely not filling it yet. He’s purposely leaving a space. And every time that feeling comes, He’s taking a scoop—sometimes a bulldozer-sized scoop—but He’s taking a scoop and making room in your heart.”

She continued:

“And God wouldn’t do this if He wasn’t intending to fill it. When God’s trying to take us deeper with Him, when He makes a space, He will fill it. He’s intentionally not filling it because He’s making the right place. And I think, based on the goodness of who He is—the utter goodness of who He is—there is no other answer. I don’t think those are wasted moments. I think those are very real and very important moments.”

It makes me cry just to think about itcry with thankfulness for a good, good God who wastes nothing in our lives if we’ll give it to Him.

Rather than feeling like life is trying to rip something out of me, I can now see clearly that God Himself is the One who is at work. God is doing a work in my heart, taking bigger and bigger scoops, in order to increase the capacity for whatever it is that He wants to pour into those newly opened spaces.

I’m thankful for a new vision of what’s going on inside. I’m thankful for family and friends to whom I can reach out when I need someone else on the other end of the line. I’m thankful for a God who I KNOW is for meand who I KNOW is for youa God who really does want to work all things for our good.

The next time I feel that loneliness come upon me, I have something new to try. I’m hopeful that I’ll be able to truly say, 

“Father, thank You for taking another scoop. Thank You for digging deeper and deeper in my heart in order to take me deeper with You. Thank You for excavating my heart, for making space for more and for increasing my capacity to love You and love others in a way that goes beyond anything I’ve ever experienced before. Thank You for always being FOR me and for holding those spaces open in my heart until the exact moment when You decide to fill them. Help me to not try to fill them with anything other than what You’re creating them for, because I want more than anything to be filled with all that You have for me. I trust You, and I trust Your goodness in this situation, as I do in all things. In Jesus’ name, Amen.”

And the next time someone asks me how I’m doing, I can genuinely say once again, “Overall, I’m doing good, really good,” because I know that God’s got this, too.

Chapter 19: Recalibrating My Goals

Question: If you’re stranded on a desert island, what 3 things would you most want to have? Answer: Michael Phelps, a saddle and a gold medal on a stick!

I’ve been watching the Olympics these past two weeks, and I’m inspired. I’m inspired to see what people can do when they put their minds to it, with Michael Phelps being example #1. He had a dream, he went for it, and he worked hard to attain it.

I’ve also been reviewing my own goals for this year—goals which I set back in January—and I’m inspired to pick up the pace to see what I can still accomplish by the end of the year. Unfortunately, I’ve fallen behind on some of my goals. I’ve stopped working actively on others. And I’ve found that the targets for one or two of my goals have moved.

But with the fall fast approaching, and the end of the year coming into view, I’m inspired to recalibrate my goals and keep pressing forward.

If you read my goal-setting message at the beginning of the year, you might remember that one of my goals was to write a complete script and score (the dialogue and music) for a new musical based on a book my wife and I had written a few years back about the real-life Saint Nicholas who lived in the 3rd and 4th centuries A.D.

One-third of the finished script and score for St. Nick: The Musical (now finished at inspiringbooks.com).
One-third of the finished script and score for St. Nick: The Musical (now finished at inspiringbooks.com).

I’m pleased to tell you I’ve finished writing a third of the script and a third of the score! But I still have two-thirds’s to go—and only a third of the year left to get there! So this week I had a decision to make. I could either get discouraged that I’ve fallen behind and give up on the project altogether, or I could pick up the pace, press on and keep moving forward toward my goal. As I looked at that goal again this week, remembering why I set it, how I thought I could accomplish it and the progress I’ve made to date, I’m ready to dive back into writing again.

I had another goal this year to lose some weight. By the middle of the year I had lost half of the weight I had hoped to lose for the year, and I was right on target. But over the past six weeks, I’ve taken a break from tracking and losing weight, only to find I’ve gained some of it back. So this week I had another decision to make. I could either get discouraged that I’ve not only stopped making progress toward that goal, but have actually started going backward, or I could pick up the pace, press on and keep moving forward toward my goal. And as I looked at that goal again this week, remembering why I set it, how I thought I could accomplish it and the progress I’ve made so far, I’m ready to dive back into tracking and losing more weight, too.

It wasn’t easy to decide to jump back into these goals, but I had a small victory this week that gave me a boost.

I was mowing a large patch of grass behind our house with a push mowernot an electric push mower, but a “reel”-type hand push mower like my grandpa used to use. The grass had gotten taller, so pushing the mower through the grass wasn’t easy. I kept having to stop and clear out the grass and sticks that kept the reel from spinning (and honestly I was thankful for the break each time so I could stop, catch my breath and wipe the sweat from my face). I didn’t think I could finish the whole patch, and I was tempted several times to give up and go inside.

But as I was pushing the mower through the grass, I started thinking about all of my goals for the yearwhy I had set them, what I hoped to accomplish by doing them and what might happen if I actually achieved themand I was inspired to keep going with them all… and with the mowing, too! Even though I was ready to give up after 20 minutes, then 30 minutes, then 40 minutes, I kept pushing on until 45 minutes later, I was done! (And yes, this is the same patch of grass where I was pulling weeds a few weeks ago and had to give myself continual pep talks to finish that project, too!)

Fresh off this victory, I went back inside, took a shower, then pulled out all of my goals again for the year. Yes, I had fallen behind on some of them. Yes, I had gone backwards on others. And yes, I was going to have to take aim in a different direction to hit the rest. But I knewlike every Olympian who competed in Brazil these past two weeksthat if I kept on track and kept putting in the hard work it takes to achieve my goals, then I would certainly achieve more than I could ever achieve otherwise.

And somewhere along the way, I just might win a gold.

Chapter 20: Going Deeper

Since the beginning of the year, I’ve shared nineteen messages with you on a variety of topics, from goal-setting and goal-keeping to keeping your feet forward and your knees bent so you don’t get sideswiped by the boulders in your life. Today I’d like to share one more message with you in this series, a message I believe will help each of us go deeper in our walks with God than we’ve ever gone before.

Before I started this series, I was telling a friend that there were some aspects of my walk with God where I felt like I had hit bedrock. I felt like I had dug as deep as I could, and there was no further I could go. If I tried digging any further, my shovel would just clank against the rock, over and over again.

I wasn’t frustrated by this feeling, however. In fact, I was quite comfortable to rest right where I was!

But my friend told me about a character in a movie who was running through a desert when, all of a sudden, the ground beneath him started to give way. A huge hole opened up, revealing a rushing river below. As the ground gave way, the character jumped into the newly opened hole and into the rushing river underground, taking him further and deeper than he had ever gone before.

My friend saw me as that character in the movie, and couldn’t help but believe that there was a rushing river beneath my feet as well that God wanted me to jump into.

I was intrigued by the idea, but I didn’t know what to do about it. The ground beneath me was seemingly impenetrable. What else could I do?

But one of the things I’ve also been trying to do this year is trying to grow in my own personal relationship with God. For the past few months especially, I’ve been trying to deliberately focus on what my unique relationship with Him looks like, not superimposing onto it what other people’s relationships with Him look like.

Knowing that this was on my heart, and combining it with the vision of the idea of the ground giving way beneath my feet, my friend encouraged me to do something I had never done before. It sounded almost heretical, at least to someone like me who loves the Bible and has read it many, many times. My friend asked me to consider setting aside the Bible for a period of time in order to focus very intentionally on my own personal relationship with Him.

I thought the idea was too risky. Unnecessary. I didn’t want to do it.

But while I was in Israel earlier this year, walking down a road where Jesus likely walked, I read these words in my Bible, words spoken by Jesus Himself to the religious leaders of His day—leaders who had studied the Scriptures for years, inside and out. Jesus said:

“You have your heads in your Bibles constantly because you think you’ll find eternal life there. But you miss the forest for the trees. These Scriptures are all about Me! And here I am, standing right before you, and you aren’t willing to receive from Me the life you say you want” (John 5:39-40, MSG).

I was struck to the heart and challenged anew. What would it look like if I were to fast for a period of time from relying on other people’s relationships with God as a substitute for my own, even if those others included people like David and Moses and Paul. What would—and does—my unique relationship with God look like?

I decided to give it a try for a time, praying and asking God to build my relationship with Him even stronger than before. And just last week, I finally broke through!

During our worship service at church, our pastor was talking about prayer. Everything he said was speaking directly to my heart. It was as if God Himself were prefacing every sentence with my name.: “Eric, …” “Eric, …” “Eric, …” I jotted down notes as fast as I could, knowing that God was using these words to speak to me directly, encouraging me to take the next step towards going deeper with Him.

When the message was done, we sang a song to God in response to all we had just heard. As I sang, I felt like I could practically see the ground beneath my feet starting to give way! I could see a hole opening up right there in the concrete floor! And as the ground was giving way and the floor was falling out, I could see it clearly: that rushing river that I couldn’t see before!

When the song ended, the shaking stopped, and the concrete floor was perfectly solid once more—hard as rock. But I had seen the river, and I very much wanted to jump through that hole and into the river, letting it take me further and deeper than I had ever gone before.

The next few days, I was captivated by that image of the river beneath me. I felt like I could almost slip down through the ground at any moment and into the water below. But then I’d stop myself. I wondered, Do I really want to do this? I was tethered, in a good way I felt, to all of these other people’s relationships with God—and I wanted to stay tethered to them. What would happen if I were to really unhook and explore what my relationship with God was like on my own?

On Wednesday, I found my answer!

I was listening to a speaker at a men’s breakfast at our church, when suddenly the speaker shouted: “STAY TETHERED TO JESUS!” I knew that instant exactly what God wanted me to do! All I had to do was to release my tether from relying on the experiences of others, and tether myself to Jesus Himself, which is the very thing I would love to do as well! I love the Bible; it’s my favorite book in the world. But I don’t want to miss the forest for the trees. I don’t want to be holding onto the words about Jesus so tightly that I miss taking hold of Jesus Himself!

Yes, Lord! I thought. That’s what I want!

I took the other end of my tether, and I hooked it firmly to Jesus. I looked into the hole below me that had now opened up again, and I knew I could make the jump whenever I was ready. And I was ready, knowing that Jesus was holding tightly to the other end of my rope.

I jumped!

What I hadn’t expected was that at the very same moment that I jumped, Jesus jumped, too! AHHHHH!!! Now I was in a total freefall, with no ground beneath me and no rope above me. I looked over at Jesus, shocked that He had just jumped over the edge at the same time that I did! He just looked at me and smiled as we continued to hurtle down toward the river below.

That wasn’t what I had expected. It was better! I was doing this with Jesus. Praise God!

Over the past few days, I’ve been heading down that river with Jesus, going further and deeper than I’ve ever gone before. But that’s not the end of the story.

Yesterday morning, I woke up thinking about this new journey. And while I love the idea of having Jesus with me, I kept saying over and over, “I don’t want to go alone.” (He’s a good friend; He knew what I meant.)

Then I looked up above us, and in the same way I had seen Jesus and me jumping over the edge of the hole and into the river, I now saw one or two dozen more people at the edge, parachuting over it! They were coming along with us!

They were coming with us, but I felt like God was saying that they weren’t ready yet to get in the river with us. They wanted to watch as we went along. But one by one, God was saying, when they saw the joy that it brought us to be in the river, they would join us in the river, too. And not just one or two dozen, but hundreds and thousands—and eventually hundreds of thousands!

I wouldn’t be alone! We’d all be rushing down the river together, going further and deeper than we’d ever gone before.

How about you? Want to come along? I’d love to have you join me!

Just make sure to “STAY TETHERED TO JESUS!” (And don’t be surprised if He jumps when you do!)

I’m convinced this isn’t the end of this story. The best is yet to come!

About The Author

Described by USA Today as “a new breed of evangelist,” Eric Elder is an author, composer and creator of The Ranch, a faith-boosting website at www.TheRanch.org.

Also by Eric Elder:

  • Two Weeks With God
  • What God Says About Sex
  • Exodus: Lessons In Freedom
  • Jesus: Lessons In Love
  • Acts: Lessons In Faith
  • Nehemiah: Lessons In Rebuilding 
  • Ephesians: Lessons In Grace
  • Israel: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • Israel For Kids: Lessons From The Holy Land
  • The Top 20 Passages In The Bible
  • Romans: Lessons In Renewing Your Mind
  • St. Nicholas: The Believer 
  • Making The Most Of The Darkness
  • 15 Tips For A Stronger Marriage
  • and Fifty Shades Of Grace (under the pen name Nicholas Deere) 

To order anytime, please visit: www.InspiringBooks.com